MSC Nastran Superelements and Modules User’s Guide

MSC Nastran 2021.4

Superelements and Modules
User’s Guide
Corporate Europe, Middle East, Africa
5161 California Ave. Suite 200 Am Moosfeld 13
University Research Park 81829 Munich, Germany
Irvine, CA 92617 Telephone: (49) 89 431 98 70
Telephone: (714) 540-8900 Email: europe@mscsoftware.com
Email: americas.contact@mscsoftware.com

Japan Asia-Pacific
KANDA SQUARE 16F 100 Beach Road
2-2-1 Kanda Nishikicho, Chiyoda-ku #16-05 Shaw Tower
1-Chome, Shinjuku-Ku Singapore 189702
Tokyo 101-0054, Japan Telephone: 65-6272-0082
Telephone: (81)(3) 6275 0870 Email: APAC.Contact@mscsoftware.com
Email: MSCJ.Market@mscsoftware.com

Worldwide Web
www.mscsoftware.com, www.hexagon.com

Support
https://simcompanion.hexagon.com/customers/s/article/support-contact-information-kb8019304

Disclaimer
Hexagon reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information contained in this document without prior notice.
The concepts, methods, and examples presented in this text are for illustrative and educational purposes only, and are not intended
to be exhaustive or to apply to any particular engineering problem or design. Hexagon assumes no liability or responsibility to any
person or company for direct or indirect damages resulting from the use of any information contained herein.
User Documentation: Copyright 2021 Hexagon AB and/or its subsidiaries. Printed in U.S.A. All Rights Reserved.
This notice shall be marked on any reproduction of this documentation, in whole or in part. Any reproduction or distribution of this
document, in whole or in part, without the prior written consent of Hexagon is prohibited.
This software may contain certain third-party software that is protected by copyright and licensed from Hexagon suppliers. Additional
terms and conditions and/or notices may apply for certain third party software. Such additional third party software terms and
conditions and/or notices may be set forth in documentation and/or at http://www.mscsoftware.com/thirdpartysoftware (or successor
website designated by Hexagon from time to time).
PCGLSS 8.0, Copyright © 1992-2016, Computational Applications and System Integration Inc. All rights reserved. PCGLSS 8.0 is
licensed from Computational Applications and System Integration Inc.
MSC, Dytran, Marc, MSC Nastran, Patran, Hexagon logo, MSC Software logo, e-Xstream, Digimat, and Simulating Reality are
trademarks or registered trademarks of Hexagon AB and/or its subsidiaries in the United States and/or other countries.
NASTRAN is a registered trademark of NASA. FLEXlm and FlexNet Publisher are trademarks or registered trademarks of Flexera
Software. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Use, duplicate, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subjected to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer
Software) and DFARS 227.7202 (Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Computer Software Documentation), as
applicable.
U.S. Patent 9,361,413
December 13, 2021
NA:V2021.4:Z:Z:Z:DC-SUPER-PDF
Documentation Feedback
At MSC Software, we strive to produce the highest quality documentation and welcome your feedback.
If you have comments or suggestions about our documentation, write to us at: documentation-
feedback@mscsoftware.com.
Please include the following information with your feedback:
 Document name
 Release/Version number
 Chapter/Section name
 Topic title (for Online Help)
 Brief description of the content (for example, incomplete/incorrect information, grammatical
errors, information that requires clarification or more details and so on).
 Your suggestions for correcting/improving documentation
You may also provide your feedback about MSC Software documentation by taking a short 5-minute
survey at: http://msc-documentation.questionpro.com.

Note: The above mentioned e-mail address is only for providing documentation specific
feedback. If you have any technical problems, issues, or queries, please contact Technical
Support.
 Contents
MSC Nastran Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Contents

Contents

Preface
List of MSC Nastran Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Training and Internet Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

1 Introduction and Fundamentals

Introduction to this Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Why Use Superelements? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Reduced Cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Quicker Turnaround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Reduced Risk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Large Problem Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Partitioned Input and Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Automation with High Performance Computing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Fundamentals of Superelement Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Partitioned Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Key Concepts in Superelement Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Static Condensation Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Manual Solution of a Small Superelement Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Conventional Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Superelement Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
List of Superelement Enhancements Released Since Version 69 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

2 How to Define a Superelement

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Superelement vs. Residual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Three Types of Superelements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Main Index
 ii MSC Nastran Superelements and Modules User’s Guide

Defining List Superelements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

List Superelement Definition with the SESET Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
List Superelement Definition with the GRID Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
List Superelement Definition on Element ID – the SEELT entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Interior versus Exterior Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Superelement Partitioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Defining PART Superelements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Defining Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
The Bulk Data Section Using PARTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Format of the Input File When PARTs are Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Connecting PARTs to Other PARTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Defining and Attaching External Superelements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Discussion of 2-step vs. 3-step methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Definition of External Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Creating External Superelements with EXTSEOUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Using 2-Step External Superelements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Using 3-Step External Superelements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
The Superelement Map – SEMAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Contents of the Superelement MAP – List Superelement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Contents of the Superelement MAP – PART Superelement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

3 Single Level Superelement Analysis

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Baseline Static Example using Patran . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Single-Level Analysis Using List Superelements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Static Example using Patran. (flyswatter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Single-Level Analysis Using PART Superelements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Static Example using Patran (flyswatter). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Single-Level Analysis Using External Superelements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Static Example Using Patran (flyswatter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Comparison of Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

4 Loads, Constraints, Case Control, and Parameters in Static Analysis

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Mechanical Loads in Static Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
List Superelements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
PART Superelements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
External Superelements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Thermal Loads in Static Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Main Index
 Contents iii

List Superelements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

PART Superelements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
External Superelements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Boundary Conditions in Static Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Single Point Constraints (SPCs). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Grid Point Singularity Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Multipoint Constraints (MPCs) and Rigid Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Case Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
The SUPER Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Condensed Case Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Expanded Case Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Output Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Parameter Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
List Superelements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
PART Superelements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
External Superelements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Special Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
SNORM for PART or External Superelements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

5 Inertia Relief Analysis Using Superelements

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
The Concept of Inertia Relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Interface for Inertia Relief Using Superelements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Manual Definition of Reference Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Automatic Definition of Reference Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Inertia Relief Examples (Freedom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Baseline Residual Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
List Superelement Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
PART Superelement Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
External Superelement Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Comparison of results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

6 Multiple Loading in Static Analysis

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Internal Case Control Partitioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Use of Load Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Examples for Multiple Loading Conditions (cantilever plate). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Baseline Residual Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Main Index
 iv MSC Nastran Superelements and Modules User’s Guide

List Superelements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

PART Superelements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
External Superelements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Comparison of Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

7 Multi-Level Superelement Analysis

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Comparison of Single- and Multi-Level Superelements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
User Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
List Superelements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
PART Superelements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
External Superelements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Example – Multi-Level Superelement Solved Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Example – Multi-Level Superelement (Freedom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Baseline Residual Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
List Superelement Solution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
PART Superelement Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
External Superelement Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Comparison of Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

8 Output Description and Control in Static Superelement Analysis

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Diagnostic/Connection Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Superelement Definition Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Controlling Diagnostic Output with PARAMs SEMAP, SEMAPOPT, SEMAPPRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Part Superelement Diagnostic Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Sorted Bulk Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Boundary Grid Search Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
List (SESET) Superelement Diagnostic Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Sorted Bulk Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Boundary Grid Search Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Visualizing Model with OUTPUT(PLOT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Result Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
List Superelements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
PART Superelements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
External Superelements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Controlling Results Output with SEDR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Main Index
 Contents v

9 Introduction to Dynamic Analysis Using Superelements

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Description of Dynamic Reduction Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Static Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Dynamic Reduction – Component Modes Synthesis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Illustrative Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Accuracy Improvements with CMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Nastran Set Definitions – The USET Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424

10 Input and Output for Dynamic Reduction

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Case Control for Dynamic Reduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Single Level Dynamic Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
List Superelements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
PART Superelements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
External Superelements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Multi-Level Dynamic Reduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Defining the Superelement Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Multi-Level Superelement Component Modes Synthesis Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Multi-Level Modal Reduction Example (fly swatter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481

11 Dynamic Loading on Superelements

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Direct Reference to EXCITEID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Indirect Reference to EXCITEDID: LOADSET / LSEQ Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Superelement Damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Modal Transient Illustrative Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Non-Superelement Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
List Superelement LOADSET / LSEQ Reference to EXCITEDID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
List Superelement Direct Reference to EXCITEDID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
PART Superelement LOADSET / LSEQ Reference to EXCITEDID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
PART Superelement Direct Reference to EXCITEDID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Frequency Response Illustrative Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Non-Superelement Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
List Superelement LOADSET / LSEQ Reference to EXCITEDID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
List Superelement Direct Reference to EXCITEDID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
PART Superelement LOADSET / LSEQ Reference to EXCITEDID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571

Main Index
 vi MSC Nastran Superelements and Modules User’s Guide

PART Superelement Direct Reference to EXCITEDID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577

External Superelement Dynamic Loading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Residual Vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Applying a Dynamic Load an External Superelement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Applying the Time History to the External Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Combining External Superelement Dynamic Loads with Residual Dynamic Loads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
External Superelements and Damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590

12 External Superelement Examples

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
Automatic Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
Manual Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
Potential Conflicts with SPC/MPC dof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
Static Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
Static Examples Using 2-Step Method (EXTSEOUT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
Static Examples Using 3-Step Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
Modal Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
Modal Examples Using 2-Step Method (EXTSEOUT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
Modal Examples Using 3-Step Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
Transient Response Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
Transient Response Examples Using 2-Step Method (EXTSEOUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
Transient Response Examples Using 3-Step Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Frequency Response Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Frequency Response Examples Using 2-Step Method (EXTSEOUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Frequency Response Examples Using 3-Step Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
External Superelement Usage in SOL 400. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
SOL 400 3-Step Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642

13 Practical Image Superelements

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
List Superelements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
Using CSUPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
Example Using CSUPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
PART Superelements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
Using SEBULK and SELOC to image a PART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
Using SEMPLN to define a mirror plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
Example Using SEBULK, SELOC, and SEMPLN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
External Superelements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679

Main Index
 Contents vii

Plate Example Using External superelement and SEBULK and SELOC Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
Double Flyswatter Problem Using External superelement and SEBULK, SELOC and SEMPLN Entries . . . . . 685
Example of Airplane with Two Engines with Rotors Using External superelement and SEBULK, SELOC and SEMPLN
Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691
Multiple Image Example for Electronic Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702
Baseline Solution (Full Model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703
CSUPER Image Superelement Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704
PART Superelement Image Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709
External Superelement Image Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713
Comparison of Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721

14 Preparing Adams Flexible Bodies

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724
Creating a Flexible Body with ADAMSMNF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724
Simple Linkage Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
Additional Reference Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735

15 Design Sensitivity and Optimization with Superelements

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738

16 Superelements in Aeroelasticity
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740
Example of Swept Wing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
List Superelement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744
PART Superelement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
External Superelement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750

17 Considerations in Nonlinear and Buckling Analysis

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
Superelement Limitations in Nonlinear and Buckling Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
Buckling Example Showing Poor Approximation for Superelements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760
Applying Loads on Upstream Superelements in Nonlinear Statics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769
Superelement Loading in SOL 106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769
Superelement Loading in SOL 400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
Practical Buckling Example – Isolating and Individual Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778

Main Index
 viii MSC Nastran Superelements and Modules User’s Guide

Superelements in Heat Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784

18 Random Vibration with Superelements

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792
Enforced Motion (SPCD) Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796
Baseline Model, Cantilever Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796
List Superelement, Cantilever Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809
PART Superelement, Cantilever Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812
External Superelement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815
Enforced Motion (Large Mass) Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823
Electronics Board Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824
Baseline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825
List Superelement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828
Part Superelement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 832
External Superelement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837
Comparison of Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846

19 Output with XYPLOT

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850
Superelement Plotting with PLOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850
PART Superelement Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 853
CSUPER Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859
XYPLOT Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862
Illustrative Example: Modal Transient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866
Illustrative Example: Modal Frequency Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876
Illustrative Example: Random Vibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882

20 Modules
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890
Connecting Modules to Other Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890
Manual Module Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891
Automatic and Semi-Automatic Module Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891
Augment/Override Automatic Module Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891
Module Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892
Advanced Analysis Features Available with Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892
Example Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893
Module Instantiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 897
Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 897

Main Index
 Contents ix

Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 897
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899
Guidelines and Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900
Automatic Contact Generation (ACG) with Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909
User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909
Example: Planetary Gear Model with ACG and Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 913
Geometric imperfection with Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 916
User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 916

21 Output Transformation Matrix

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 922
What is an OTM?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 922
Generating OTMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923
Available Types of OTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923
How are OTMs Computed?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 924
OFP Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 930
OTM Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 930
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 930
Point OTMs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 932
Element OTMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 936
BEAM Element OTMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 936
BAR Element OTMs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940
Plate Element OTMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 943
Shell Element OTMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 947
Solid Element OTMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 951
Element Types for OTM Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 954
Storage Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 957
The MSC Nastran™ Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958
OUTPUT2 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 959
OUTPUT4 + PCH (Punch) Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 973
The PCH (Punch) File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 988
Reference Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989
Glossary
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992
Boundary Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992
Branch Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992
Collector Superelement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992

Main Index
 x MSC Nastran Superelements and Modules User’s Guide

Component Modes Synthesis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992

Constraint Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992
External Superelement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992
Fixed Boundary Solution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 993
Free Boundary Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 993
List Superelement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 993
Load Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 993
Mixed Boundary Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 993
Multilevel Superelement Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 993
Mutually Exclusive Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 993
Main Bulk Data Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 993
PART Superelement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994
Phase 1 Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994
Phase 2 Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994
Phase 3 Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994
Qualifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994
SEP1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994
SEP1X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 995
Single Level Superelement Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 995
Processing Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 995

Main Index
 Preface

0 Preface


List of MSC Nastran Guides 12

Technical Support 13

Training and Internet Resources 13

Main Index
 12 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
List of MSC Nastran Guides

List of MSC Nastran Guides

A list of some of the MSC Nastran guides is as follows:

Installation and Release Guides

 Installation and Operations Guide
 Release Guide
Reference Guides
 Quick Reference Guide
 DMAP Programmer’s Guide
 Reference Guide
 Utilities Guide
Demonstration Guides
 Linear Analysis
 Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 400)
 Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700)
 MSC Nastran Verification Guide
User’s Guides
 Getting Started
 Linear Static Analysis
 Dynamic Analysis
 Embedded Fatigue
 Embedded Vibration Fatigue
 Thermal Analysis
 Superelements and Modules
 Design Sensitivity and Optimization
 Rotordynamics
 Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 400)
 Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700)
 Aeroelastic Analysis
 User Defined Services
 Non Linear (SOL 600)
 High Performance Computing
 DEMATD

Main Index
 CHAPTER 0 13
Preface

You may find any of these documents from MSC Software at:
http://simcompanion.hexagon.com

Technical Support
For technical support phone numbers and contact information, please visit:
https://simcompanion.hexagon.com/customers/s/article/support-contact-information-kb8019304
Support Center (http://simcompanion.hexagon.com)
The SimCompanion link above gives you access to the wealth of resources for MSC Software products. Here
you will find product and support contact information, product documentations, knowledge base articles,
product error list, knowledge base articles and SimAcademy Webinars. It is a searchable database which
allows you to find articles relevant to your inquiry. Valid MSC customer entitlement and login is required to
access the database and documents. It is a single sign-on that gives you access to product documentation for
complete list of products from MSC Software, allows you to manage your support cases, and participate in
our discussion forums.

Training and Internet Resources

MSC Software (www.mscsoftware.com)
MSC Software corporate site with information on the latest events, products and services for the
CAD/CAE/CAM marketplace.
http://simcompanion.hexagon.com
The SimCompanion link above gives you access to the wealth of resources for MSC Software products. Here
you will find product and support contact information, product documentations, knowledge base articles,
product error list, knowledge base articles and SimAcademy Webinars. It is a searchable database which
allows you to find articles relevant to your inquiry. Valid MSC customer entitlement and login is required to
access the database and documents. It is a single sign-on that gives you access to product documentation for
complete list of products from MSC Software, allows you to manage your support cases, and participate in
our discussion forums.
http://www.mscsoftware.com/msc-training

The MSC-Training link above will point you to schedule and description of MSC Seminars. Following
courses are recommended for beginning Nastran users.
NAS120 - Linear Static Analysis using MSC Nastran and Patran

This seminar introduces basic finite element analysis techniques for linear static, normal modes, and
buckling analysis of structures using MSC Nastran and Patran. MSC Nastran data structure, the element
library, modeling practices, model validation, and guidelines for efficient solutions are discussed and
illustrated with examples and workshops. Patran will be an integral part of the examples and workshops and
will be used to generate and verify illustrative MSC Nastran models, manage analysis submission requests,

Main Index
 14 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Training and Internet Resources

and visualize results. This seminar provides the foundation required for intermediate and advanced MSC
Nastran applications.

Main Index
 Chapter 1: Introduction and Fundamentals
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User’s Guide

1 Introduction and
Fundamentals

Introduction to this Guide
 Why Use Superelements?

Fundamentals of Superelement Analysis

Partitioned Solutions

Manual Solution of a Small Superelement Example

List of Superelement Enhancements Released Since Version 69

Main Index
 2 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Introduction to this Guide

Introduction to this Guide

In finite element analysis, demand for computer resources has always exceeded existing capabilities. In the
early days of computers, when engineers were solving 3 x 3 problems by hand, computers were able to handle
problems as large as 11 x 11. Once engineers discovered this ability, the size of engineering problems quickly
grew to exceed the capacity of the existing systems. This process has repeated itself time and time again. Today
modern computers are capable of solving problems involving more than 100,000,000 equations with
100,000,000 unknowns, which is still not enough to satisfy the needs of many engineers as more detail is
added to finite element models and higher fidelity solutions are required.
The limits on hardware resources, combined with budget restrictions (large runs and stochastic variations can
be time-consuming), limits the ability of engineers to solve large, complicated problems with high fidelity
meshes. A solution to these problems (both hardware and time budget), can be achieved for many models by
using superelements in MSC Nastran.
By using superelements, the analyst can not only analyze larger models (including those which exceed the
capacity of your hardware), but he can also become more efficient in performing the analysis, thus allowing
more analytical design cycles or iterations in the analysis. Another benefit of superelements efficiency can be
realized when models are subjected to probabilistic or stochastic analysis by varying portions of the structure.
In design optimization, the use of superelements has become automated to help reduce the overall
optimization costs through a process called Automated External Superelement Optimization (AESO) which
is briefly described in Chapter 15: Design Sensitivity and Optimization with Superelements, and more fully described
in the Design Sensitivity and Optimization User’s Guide.
The principle used in superelement analysis is often referred to as substructuring. That is, the model is
divided into a series of components, each of which is processed independently resulting in a set of matrices
that are reduced to a boundary and describe the behavior of the component as seen by the rest of the structure.
Often these components are comprised of logical groupings of elements (an engine, a wing, a fender, the
exhaust system, etc.), hence the term superelement.
The reduced boundary matrices for the individual superelements are combined to form assembly matrices
which are referred to as the residual matrices. The residual matrices are solved using standard techniques for
calculating displacements (and velocities, accelerations for dynamic solutions). The residual solution is then
imposed on the boundary of each superelement so that the data recovery (calculation of displacements,
stresses, etc.) for the boundary can be combined with the data recovery for the body loads on the
superelement.
In static analysis the theory used in superelement processing is exact. In dynamics the reduction of the
stiffness is exact, but approximations occur during the reduction of the mass and damping matrices. The
dynamic solution can be improved dramatically by augmenting the static reduction with additional dynamic
degrees of freedom in a method called component modal synthesis, which is described in Chapter 10: Input and
Output for Dynamic Reduction.
In buckling analysis, the reduction of the differential stiffness uses the same theory as the static reduction, but
doesn’t provide an accurate solution compared to the non-reduced system. Unfortunately, there is no
improvement available as in dynamic analysis, however, a savvy user can use this to his advantage as described

Main Index
 CHAPTER 1 3
Introduction and Fundamentals

in Practical Buckling Example – Isolating and Individual Panel (Ch. 17). Superelements can be used in nonlinear
analysis, but the superelement is limited to a linear reduction in its initial orientation.

Note: Even though the theory of static condensation is exact for static solutions, the numeric
conditioning of the structural matrices can affect the overall solution. If the superelement
stiffness matrices are well conditioned, then there will be only miniscule differences between a
residual-only solution and a superelement solution.

This User’s Guide is intended to be tutorial in format. That is, the emphasis is on how to use superelements,
not on the theory of superelements. Sufficient theory is presented for those who wish to understand the
operations. Hand-solved samples are included to help the user understand the operations involved when
superelements are used. Sample MSC Nastran input files and selected output are also presented at
appropriate points for clarity. All of the example files used in this guide are also delivered with the standard
MSC Nastran delivery in the “install_dir/doc/seug/chapter#/subject” subdirectories.
This User’s Guide presumes that the reader is experienced in finite element analysis and wants to add
superelement technology to his repertoire of skills. The Guide is arranged so that an experienced finite
element analyst can start at the beginning and read only the information applicable to the type of analysis
desired. Overall information on superelements is presented first, followed by information for static analysis,
followed by dynamics and other features. It is recommended that the user read the first 3 chapters for
foundation as well as Chapter 4 because much of the information presented in the section on statics is
applicable in subsequent chapters. However, an engineer should be able to read the applicable sections
without having to read unnecessary information.

Why Use Superelements?

Efficiency is the primary reason to use superelements. A finite element model is rarely analyzed only once.
Often the model is modified and re-analyzed time and time again. By analyzing only the part of the structure
which changes, the user can save significant time. Without using superelements, each analysis can cost the
price of a complete solution. Here is a partial list of the advantages of superelements:

Reduced Cost
Instead of solving the entire model each time, superelements offer the advantage of incremental processing.
On restarts this advantage is magnified by the need to process only the parts of the structure directly affected
by the change. This means that if the user thinks ahead when defining superelements, it is possible to achieve
performance improvements on the order of anywhere from 2 to 30 times faster than non-superelement
methods (or more).

Quicker Turnaround
Because superelements can be processed individually with less computer resources required than a complete,
non-superelement solution, it is often possible to submit individual superelement processing runs using fast
queues (or on local workstations instead of servers), rather than waiting and running the complete problem

Main Index
 4 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Why Use Superelements?

at once using an overnight queue. As stochastic and Monte Carlo simulations are becoming more popular
to understand the robustness of a structural design, fast solutions are a must.

Reduced Risk
Processing a model without using superelements is an all-or-nothing proposition. If an error occurs, the entire
model must be processed again once the error is corrected. When using superelements, each superelement
need be processed only once, unless a change requires reprocessing the superelement. If an error occurs during
processing, only the affected superelement and the residual structure (final superelement to be processed)
need be reprocessed. The superelements that did not have an error do not need to be processed again until a
change is made to those superelements.

Large Problem Capabilities

All computers have hardware limits. MSC Nastran is designed so that problem size will not be limited by the
program. This means that limits on available disk space or memory are the only limitations that should be
encountered by a user. When the size of a model becomes too large to be processed on a computer without
using superelements, the user can use multiple computer resources to process each superelement, or process
one superelement at a time on a single computer resource. The reduced matrices for each superelement can
be stored on separate drives and brought together for the residual solution. Then data recovery can be done
on each superelement separately, if desired. This process frees file space and reduces disk usage and storage
costs.

Partitioned Input and Output

Because superelements can be processed individually, separate analysis groups or organizations can model
individual parts of the structure and perform model checks without information from other groups. An
excellent example is the International Space Station which has many contractors working on the structure.
Each contractor models his own components and sends either complete or reduced models to a system
integrator, who assembles the models to represent the many possible configurations, performs analysis for
each configuration, and sends results back to the individual contractors for their use. The partitioned output
format used in superelements allows for segmented data recovery; i.e., data recovery can be requested for only
the desired segments of the structure.

Security
Many companies work on proprietary or secure projects. These may range from keeping a new design from
the competition, to keeping material data proprietary, to working on a highly confidential defense program.
Even when working on open programs, there is a need to send a representation of the model to others so that
they may perform a coupled analysis of an assembly which incorporates the component. The use of external
superelements allows users to send reduced boundary matrices that contain no geometric information about
the actual component-only mass, stiffness, damping and loads as seen at the boundary. Upon receiving a set
of reduced matrices in any format that can be read by MSC Nastran, an engineer can define an external
superelement using those matrices and attach the foreign structure to his model.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 1 5
Introduction and Fundamentals

Automation with High Performance Computing

As models become larger and users demand high fidelity system level responses, the discipline of High
Performance Computing (HPC) has become a primary consideration for industries such as the automotive
industry. There are many techniques involved in HPC, including efficient use of CPU core memory (i.e.
L1, L2, L3 cache), shared memory parallel (SMP) schemes for enhanced matrix solution times using multi-
core CPU machines, and distributed memory parallel (DMP) schemes used to take advantage of compute
clusters with many different machines linked with a high-speed intranet to split and recombine solutions.
While many of the schemes are purely mathematical (cache memory, SMP), the distributed computing
utilizes superelement technology as its core method for splitting and recombining the solution of a large
model. There are several schemes available to the user, such as Geometric Domain Decomposition which
automatically splits the model into superelements based on GRID connectivity, Matrix Domain
Decomposition which automatically splits the model into superelements based on matrix characteristics, and
Automated Component Modes Synthesis (ACMS) which automatically splits the model based on GRID or
Matrix characteristics and adds a Component Modes Synthesis calculation for improved dynamic
characteristics. While distributed HPC is based on superelement technology, the discipline of HPC is
beyond the scope of this document and will be covered in another manual.

Fundamentals of Superelement Analysis

Superelement analysis can be described as a form of substructuring. That is, a model can be divided into
superelements by the user in such a way that MSC Nastran will process each superelement independently of
all other superelements. The processing of each superelement results in a reduced set of matrices (mass,
damping, stiffness, and loading) that represent the properties of the superelement as seen at its connections
to adjacent structures. Once all superelements have been processed, these reduced matrices are assembled in
what is known as the residual structure, and the assembly solution is performed. Data recovery for each
superelement is performed by expanding the solution at the attachment points, using the same
transformation that was used to perform the original reduction on the superelement.
Superelements can consist of physical data (elements and grid points) or can be defined as an image of
another superelement or as an external superelement (a set of matrices from an external source to be attached
to the model). Figure 1-1 demonstrates a simplified illustration of condensing a structure to its boundaries,
solving a reduced system, and back-expanding the solution to obtain the data recovery for the superelement.
Example files are available to the user in the following installation directory and file names:
/doc/seug/chapter1/clamp-baseline.bdf, clamp-seset.bdf, and clamp-part-se.bdf.

Main Index
 6 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Fundamentals of Superelement Analysis

Figure 1-1 Simplified Depiction of Superelement Reduction, Solution, and Data Recovery

The following figures illustrate the possible types of superelement. In Figure 1-2, a model of a portion of a gear
is shown. The physical model of one tooth can be represented as a superelement. This type is called a primary
superelement-one where the actual geometry for the superelement is defined in the bulk data. Other gear
teeth, as shown in Figure 1-2, are images of the first (primary) tooth. An image superelement is a superelement
that uses the geometry of another superelement to describe it for MSC Nastran. These image superelements
can save processing time in that they are able to re-use the reduced stiffness, mass, and damping matrices from
their primary superelement, which reduces the amount of calculations needed. Full data recovery is available
for image superelements. An image superelement can be an identical image, as shown in Figure 1-2, or a mirror
image, as shown in Figure 1-3. In Figure 1-3, the right side of the plate is a mirror image copy of the primary.
Please note that images can have their own unique loadings. Only the stiffness, mass and damping is identical
to the primary. Another type of superelement is the external superelement, where a part of the model is
represented by using matrices from an outside source (the matrices can come from another MSC Nastran
run). For these matrices no internal geometry information is available; only the grid points to which the
matrices are attached are known. An external superelement is shown in Figure 1-4. In this figure the finite
element model is on the left and the external superelement is represented by the dashed lines on the right.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 1 7
Introduction and Fundamentals

Figure 1-2 A Primary Superelement and Several Identical Images

Figure 1-3 A Primary Superelement and its Mirror Image Superelement

Figure 1-4 An External Superelement

In static analysis the theory used in superelement processing is exact. In dynamics the reduction of the
stiffness is exact, but approximations occur during the reduction of the mass and damping matrices. The

Main Index
 8 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Partitioned Solutions

dynamic solution can be improved dramatically by augmenting the static reduction with additional dynamic
degrees of freedom in a method called component modal synthesis, which is described in Chapter 10: Input and
Output for Dynamic Reduction.

Partitioned Solutions

Key Concepts in Superelement Partitions

There are several key concepts that must be understood in the superelement formulation and processing;
these are:
 The input is partitioned into a separate set for processing each superelement. When MSC Nastran is
processing the bulk data for a model, the input is partitioned into a separate set for each
superelement, based on user instructions. The input used to accomplish this partitioning is discussed
in Chapter 2: How to Define a Superelement.
Once the bulk data is partitioned into separate sets, each superelement is processed individually. The
degrees-of-freedom (DOFs) for each superelement are partitioned into sets in a manner identical to
that used in conventional analysis. That is, all DOFs for a superelement are combined to create a G-
set. Then MPCs and R-elements are used to define the M- and N-sets, etc. (see Constraint and Set
Notation (Ch. 6) in the MSC Nastran Reference Guide for a complete description of MSC Nastran
sets). The only change in the definition of sets is the definition of exterior DOFs. For each
superelement the exterior DOFs are defined as the A-set, which can contain physical and modal
degrees of freedom.
 Boundary / Exterior DOFs are best described as those that are retained or kept for further analysis. A
superelement’s exterior DOFs are best described as those that are retained for further analysis, or you
can think of them as boundary or attachment DOFs, where the superelement connects to other
superelements or the residual. Note that exterior DOF are not required to attach to any other DOF.
Structural matrices are assembled for each superelement, and the matrices go through reduction
processing until the only remaining terms are for the A-set or attachment DOFs. These reduced
matrices are used to represent the properties of the superelement when it is attached to the rest of the
model.
 Interior DOFs can be thought of as those that are condensed out during superelement processing.
All DOFs of a superelement that are not exterior are called interior DOFs (the omitted or O-set).
These are the DOFs that are condensed out of the matrices during the reduction process. Using
either static or dynamic reduction, the stiffness, mass, damping, and loading on these interior DOFs
are transferred to the exterior DOFs.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 1 9
Introduction and Fundamentals

 Each superelement is processed individually. The reduction process is best illustrated using the
process known as static condensation. For illustration purposes, we will ignore Lagrange DOF in
this discussion, since they are not compatible with superelement processing. In static condensation
we will start with the superelement matrices after all MPCs, R-elements, and SPCs have been
processed. The set of DOFs remaining at this point are in terms of the F-set (DOFs that are not
constrained), which contains the O- and A-sets as subsets. Although the interior DOFs include the
M- and S-sets also, the interior DOFs in this guide will often be often referred to as the O-set.

Note: Lagrange Rigid Element Processing. Typically, the dependent dof associated with RBE’s are
placed in the “mr” set, while the dependent dof associated with MPC’s are placed in the “mp”
set; which collectively define the M-Set. However, if the user specifies RIGID=LAGRAN in
the case control, the dependent dof are carried into the ASET as part of the “lm” dof.
Currently the MSC Nastran processing does not handle the RIGID=LAGRAN for
superelements. Further discussion on this subject can be found in Nastran Set Definitions – The
USET Table (Ch. 9).

Static Condensation Process

The key to superelement processing is the reduction of the omitted DOF to the equivalent boundary
matrices as shown in the following figure:

Main Index
 10 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Partitioned Solutions

Figure 1-5 Pictorial Example of Static Condensation

A comprehensive description of the equations used by MSC Nastran can be found in Dynamic Reduction and
Component Mode Synthesis in SubDMAP SEMR3 (Ch. 7) in the MSC Nastran Reference Guide. A more simplified
presentation of the static condensation theory is included here for completeness. It is assumed that the reader
has some familiarity with the MSC Nastran set notation – for more information on set notation, please refer
to Degree-of-Freedom Sets (Ch. 8) in the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
In this formulation we will start with the superelement matrices after all M-set (MPCs and Rigid elements),
and S-Set (active SPCs and permanent constraints on grid entries) have been processed. The set of DOFs
remaining at this point are in terms of the F-set (dof that are not constrained), which contains the O- and A-
sets as subsets. Although, in general, the interior dof may also include the M- and S-sets also, the interior dof
in this guide will often be often referred to as the O-set.
The static equation for the F-set is
 K ff   U f  =  P f  (1-1)

This equation may be expanded to show the A-set and O-set partitions as

Main Index
 CHAPTER 1 11
Introduction and Fundamentals

   
 K oo   K oa    U     Po  
o
  =   (1-2)
T
 K oa   K aa    U a     Pa  
   

where the bar over a term (K aa and P a ) indicates that the sub-matrix represents the associated matrix of
terms for that set before the reduction operation. In a static solution, the T-set is equivalent to the A-set and
is defined as the “retained physical dof.” So, for a static solution the previous equation becomes:

   
 K oo   K ot    U     Po  
o
T   =   (1-3)
 K ot   K tt    U t     Pt  
   
If we look at the upper part of the equation, we obtain
 K oo   U o  +  K ot   U t  =  P o  (1-4)

–1
Pre-multiplying both sides of the equation by  K oo  produces

total –1 –1
 Uo  =  – K oo   K ot   U t  +  K oo   P o  (1-5)

fixed
We can break up the total solution U o into two parts: the Fixed Boundary Solution ,  U o  , and the Free
free
Boundary Solution,  Uo  . To simplify the equation we define the physical boundary transformation
matrix between the exterior and interior motion as  G ot  .

–1
 G ot  = –  K oo   K ot  (1-6)

Physically, the  G ot  matrix represents the influence coefficients to the free boundary solution, also referred
to as the Constraint Modes. That is, each column of this matrix represents the motion of the interior points
when one boundary dof is moved one unit while the other boundary points are held constrained. Therefore,
the transformation matrix has one column for each exterior (boundary) dof (the Aset for the superelement),

Main Index
 12 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Partitioned Solutions

and the number of rows are equal to the number of interior dof (the O-set for the superelement). The
constraint modes are discussed further in Example of Constraint Modes (Ch. 9) which includes a graphic example.

Note: Computational Cost of Constraint Modes

The calculation of the constraint modes – more specifically  G ot  – is typically the highest
cost associated with a static superelement solution because of the cost of calculating the matrix
–1
 K oo  . Even in dynamic solutions the cost associated with the constraint modes is often a
significant cost of the overall solution.

When the constraints mode influence coefficients are multiplied by the boundary displacements of the
residual solution, the free boundary solution is obtained:
free
 Uo  =  G ot   U t  (1-7)

Where  U t  is the partition from the residual structure solution of the physical dof to the superelement
boundary dof.
In addition to the free boundary solution, the fixed boundary solution of the superelement must be calculated
in order to obtain the total solution for the superelement:
fixed –1
 Uo  =  U oo  =  K oo   P o  (1-8)

This matrix represents the static solution for the displacements of the superelement when the loads are
applied and the exterior points are held fixed. Based on these definitions, the total displacement of the interior
points can be defined as
total free fixed
 Uo  =  Uo  +  Uo  (1-9)

A physical representation of this equation demonstrates the concepts of fixed boundary solution and free
boundary solution for a cantilever beam example.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 1 13
Introduction and Fundamentals

Figure 1-6 Pictorial representation of fixed boundary solution and free boundary solution

Continuing with the reduction theory – we rewrite the equation for the lower part of Equation 1-3 as:
T
 K ot    G ot   U t  +  U oo   +  K tt   U t  =  P t  (1-10)

From which, we can obtain the reduced stiffness  K tt  and boundary loading  P t  of the superelement:

T
 K tt  =  K ot   G ot  +  K tt  (1-11)

T
 P t  =  G ot   P o  +  P t  (1-12)

The residual structure consists of all components of the model that were not assigned to any other
superelement, plus the assembly of the reduced superelement matrices. Each superelement is processed in this
manner, and its associated matrices are reduced to the exterior dofs. Once all superelements have been
processed, the reduced matrices are assembled into a system matrix during the residual structure processing.
Thus, the total assembled stiffness matrix of the residual structure,  K gg  , is represented by

 K gg  =  K jj  +   K aa  (1-13)

Main Index
 14 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Manual Solution of a Small Superelement Example

The system or assembly solution is performed using the assembled matrices for the residual structure. Once
the assembly solution is known, the boundary solution is found for each superelement. This boundary
solution is used to calculate the interior displacements for each superelement, then standard data recovery is
available for all superelements, including the residual structure. Any output that is available in standard (non-
superelement) analysis is available in superelement analysis. The difference is that the output is now
partitioned by superelement.

Manual Solution of a Small Superelement Example

The following small problem is used to demonstrate how a static analysis is performed using superelements.
The solution to the problem is first shown using conventional analysis, then by using superelements.

Figure 1-7 Small NON-Superelement Example

For this example we are looking only at motion along the axis of the points, thus the problem is simplified to
contain only five DOFs. Note: this example is solved in MSC Nastran and provided as part of the
documentation. The conventional analysis model is: /doc/seug/chapter1/simple-conventional.bdf and the
superelement solution is: /doc/seug/chapter1/simple-superelement.bdf.
The output for the simple-conventional.bdf file is as follows. Note that this .f06 listing, and other listings in
this book may remove page headings and slightly re-arrange the format slightly to fit the page, so the actual
.f06 output format may be slightly different than shown

Main Index
 CHAPTER 1 15
Introduction and Fundamentals

.
MSC NASTRAN JOB CREATED ON 19-MAR-11 AT 16:09:34 MARCH 19, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 7/15/10 PAGE 10

DEFAULT

0 BASELINE MODEL SUBCASE 1

D I S P L A C E M E N T V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

1 G 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

2 G 2.500000E+00 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

3 G 4.000000E+00 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

4 G 3.500000E+00 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

5 G 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

L O A D V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

2 G 1.000000E+00 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

3 G 2.000000E+00 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

4 G 3.000000E+00 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

F O R C E S O F S I N G L E - P O I N T C O N S T R A I N T

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

1 G -2.500000E+00 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

5 G -3.500000E+00 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

F O R C E S I N S C A L A R S P R I N G S ( C E L A S 1 )

ELEMENT FORCE ELEMENT FORCE ELEMENT FORCE ELEMENT FORCE

ID. ID. ID. ID.

1 -2.500000E+00 2 -1.500000E+00 3 5.000000E-01 4 3.500000E+00

Listing 1-1 MSC Nastran Output for the Simple Example w/o Superelements

Conventional Analysis
In conventional analysis the problem is formulated in matrix form, constraints are applied, and the resulting
reduced problem is solved. The five-by-five stiffness matrix is as follows:

Main Index
 16 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Manual Solution of a Small Superelement Example

K 12 – K 12
– K 12 K 12 + K 23 – K 23
 K gg  = – K 23 K 23 + K 34 – K 34 (1-14)
– K 34 K 34 + K 45 – K 45
– K 45 K 45

Each row (or column) in the above matrix represents the terms associated with one DOF in the model. The
terms are in ascending order; that is, the first column represents DOF 1, and the last column represents DOF
5. Replacing the springs by their numeric values, we have

1 –1 0 0 0
–1 2 –1 0 0
 K gg  = 0 –1 2 –1 0 (1-15)
0 0 –1 2 –1
0 0 0 –1 1
We now apply the constraints to the problem. In finite element analysis, constraints are applied by removing
the associated rows and columns from the matrix; therefore, after applying constraints we have the static
equation for the constrained structure

  –1  
 U2  K 12 + K 23 – K 23  P2 
   
 U3  = K 23 K 23 + K 34 – K 34  P3  (1-16)
   
 U4  K 34 + K 45  P 4 
   
or, in numeric terms

 
 U2  –1  
  2 –1 0  1 
 U3  = –1 2 –1  2  (1-17)
   
 U4  0 –1 2  3 
 
Solving the equations provides the solution for the free dof:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 1 17
Introduction and Fundamentals

 
 U2   2.5 
   
 U 3  =  4.0  (1-18)
   
 U4   3.5 
 
The total solution vector becomes:

 
 U1   
   0.0 
 U2   2.5 
   
 Ug  =  U 3  =  4.0  (1-19)
   
 U4   3.5 
   0.0 
 U5   
 
The constraint forces are obtained by partitioning the G-set stiffness matrix and solution vector as follows:
 F s  =  K sf   U f  (1-20)

   2.5 
 F1  – 1 0 0    – 2.5 
  =  4.0  =   (1-21)
 F5  0 0 –1    – 3.5 
   3.5 

Element Data Recovery

For this example, we can calculate the element forces based upon:
 F elem  +  K elem   U elem  (1-22)

The CELAS1 convention for calculating element force is (Refer to Eq. (3-64) in the MSC Nastran Reference
Guide):
 F 12  =  K 12   U 1 – U 2  (1-23)

 F 12  =  1.0   0.0 – 2.5  =  2.5  (1-24)

The remainder of the elements forces can be calculated similarly.

 F 23  =  – 1.5  (1-25)

 F 34  =  0.5  (1-26)

Main Index
 18 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Manual Solution of a Small Superelement Example

 F 45  =  3.5  (1-27)

Superelement Analysis
We now formulate and solve the same problem using superelements, as shown in Figure 1-8. Because the
method of defining superelements has not been discussed yet, some of what follows has not been defined.
However, as you read further, more of the information will become clear. First a flowchart showing the order
of processing used to perform superelement analysis is shown in Figure 1-9, Flowchart for Superelmeent Processing.

Figure 1-8 Small Superelement Example

Main Index
 CHAPTER 1 19
Introduction and Fundamentals

Figure 1-9 Flowchart for Superelmeent Processing

Note: Note to advanced users: in the MSC Nastran SubDMAP listings, the parameter LPFLG is used
to control entry and processing within a superelement loop. Also, several of the MALTER
statements are strategically placed at the top and bottom of superelement loops as follows:

Table 1-1 Strategic DMAP MALTER Locations Associated with Superelements

$MALTER:TOP OF PHASE 1 SUPERELEMENT LOOP AFTER PARAMETERS AND

$MALTER:QUALIFIERS SET

$MALTER:AFTER SUPERELEMENT STIFFNESS, VISCOUS DAMPING, MASS, AND

$MALTER:ELEMENT STRUCTURAL DAMPING GENERATION (KJJZ, BJJX, MJJX, K4JJ)

$MALTER:AFTER TOTAL SUPERELEMENT STIFFNESS, VISCOUS DAMPING, AND MASS

Main Index
 20 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Manual Solution of a Small Superelement Example

Table 1-1 Strategic DMAP MALTER Locations Associated with Superelements

$MALTER:FORMULATED, STRUCTURAL + DIRECT INPUT (KJJ, BJJ, MJJ)

$MALTER:AFTER SUPERELEMENT LAD GENERATION (PJ)

$MALTER:AFTER UPSTREAM SUPERELEMENT MATRIX AND LOAD ASSEMBLY

$MALTER:(KGG, BGG, MGG, K4GG, PG)

$MALTER:AFTER SUPERELEMENT MATRIX AND LOAD REDUCTION TO A-SET,

$MALTER:STATIC AND DYNAMIC (KAA, MAA, BAA, K4AA, PA)

ENDIF $ EXTER $MALTER:BOTTOM OF PHASE 1 SUPERELEMENT LOOP

$MALTER:AFTER SUPERELEMENT DISPLACEMENT RECOVERY (UG)

$ SET THE FOLLOWING FOR DBCPATH

ENDIF $ MALTER:BOTTOM OF SUPERELEMENT DATA RECOVERY LOOP

Continuing with the superelement solution for our simple example, the definitions of the model shown in
Figure 1-8:
 Superelement 1 (SEID = 1)
• Grid points 1 and 2 are interior points. (These grid points are condensed out during the Phase 1
operations for superelement 1.)
• Elements and are interior or belong to superelement 1.
• The constraint at grid point 1 is contained in superelement 1.
• The load applied on grid point 2 is in superelement 1.
• Grid point 3 is exterior to superelement 1. (After all reduction [Phase 1] is completed for
superelement 1, all that remains is a set of matrices representing the superelement attached to grid
point 3.)
 Superelement 2 (SEID = 2)
• Grid points 4 and 5 are interior to superelement 2.
• Grid point 3 is exterior to superelement 2.
• The load on grid point 4 is in superelement 2.
• Elements and are interior to or belong to superelement 2.
• The constraint on grid point 5 is contained in superelement 2.
 Residual structure (R.S. OR SEID = 0)
• Grid point 3 is interior to the residual structure.
• There are no elements left to belong to the residual structure.
• The load on grid point 3 is in the residual structure.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 1 21
Introduction and Fundamentals

• Superelements 1 and 2 are processed independently, then the reduced matrices are assembled at
the residual.

Phase 1 Processing of Superelement 1

After the model is divided into superelements, the data for superelement 1 contains the following
information:

Figure 1-10 Simple Model, Superelement 1 Partition

Based on this model, u 3 is the exterior DOF and belongs to the A-set for superelement 1. Therefore, we
want to generate matrices for superelement 1, apply any constraints, and reduce the matrices to the exterior
DOF. The G-set for this superelement consists of the DOFs associated with grid points 1, 2, and 3. The
following are the G-sized matrices:

K 12 – K 12 01 –1 0
1
 K gg  = – K 12 K 12 + K 23 – K 23 = – 1 2 – 1 (1-28)
0 – K 23 K 23 0 –1 1

 P 
 1   0 
1  P   
 Pg  =  2  =  1  (1-29)
 1   
 P   0 
 3 

The boxed superscript 1 ( 1 ) shown on the matrices indicates that they belong to superelement 1. Notice

1
that the force on grid point 3, P 3 , is not included in the Superelement Processing because the force is
applied to an exterior point, it is not included in the superelement, but is accounted for in the residual

Main Index
 22 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Manual Solution of a Small Superelement Example

structure. This fact is indicated in the matrix for the loading by placing a bar over the P3 term and indicating
that this represents only loading on grid point 3 associated with superelement 1.
Looking at the model, we see that grid point 1 is constrained. Because that grid point is interior to the
superelement, the constraint is applied as a part of the processing for superelement 1. The resulting (reduced)
stiffness matrix is

1 K 12 + K 23 – K 23 K oo K ot
 K ff  = = = 2 –1 0 (1-30)
– K 23 K 23 K to K tt –1 1

This matrix is now divided into interior (O-set) and exterior (A-set) DOFs, and a static condensation is
performed to reduce the matrices to the exterior DOFs.
First we compute the boundary transformation for superelement 1 becomes (recall equation (1-6)):

1 –1 1 –1
 G 0t  = –  K oo   K ot  = ------------------------  K 23  = – ------------ =  0.5  1 (1-31)
K 12 + K 23 1+1

The physical meaning of this equation is that if Point 3 is moved +1.0 units, then Point 2 will move 0.5 units.
This is exactly as expected considering that Point 1 is constrained.
Now, we use the G ot transformation to compute the reduced stiffness at the boundary:

1 T
 K tt  =  K ot   G ot  +  K tt  =  – 1.0   0.5  +  1.0  =  0.5  (1-32)

Again, the results make sense because there are two springs in series, for which the equation is readily available
in text books or online services such as Wikipedia (http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hooke%27s_law#Derivation) :
K 12 K 23 11
K equiv = ------------------------ = ------------ = 0.5 (1-33)
K 12 + K 23 1+1

Now we have to reduce the applied loadings to the boundary. After applying the constraint to the loading
matrix, we have

 P 
1  2   
Pf  =   =  1.0  (1-34)
 P1   0.0 
 3 
Referring back to 1-12, the loads reduction to the boundary becomes:

1 1 T 1
 Pt  =  P3  =  G ot   P 2  +  P 3  =  0.5   1.0  +  0.0  =  0.5  (1-35)

Inspection reveals that this also makes sense. If grid points 1 and 3 are constrained, then ½ of the load would
be distributed to each point.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 1 23
Introduction and Fundamentals

Phase 1 Processing of Superelement 2

After the model is divided into superelements, the data for superelement 1 contains the following
information:

Figure 1-11 Simple Model, Superelement 2 Partition

Degree of freedom u 3 is the exterior dof and belongs to the A-set for superelement 2. The reduction of the
stiffness and loads to the exterior dof follows. Since this is similar to superelement 1, only the critical
equations are shown.

K 34 – K 34 0
2 1 –1 0
 K gg  = – K 34 K 34 + K – K 45 = – 1 2 – 1 (1-36)
45
0 – K 45 K 45 0 –1 1

 2 
 P   0 
2  3   
 Pg  =  P  =  3  (1-37)
 4   
 P   0 
 5 
Again, since grid point 3 is exterior to superelement 2, the load is not part of the load vector for superelement
2. Recall, forces on exterior points are not included in the superelement matrices.
The constraint will be applied, this time at dof 5, thus the boundary transformation will be calculated and
applied to the stiffness and loads matrices, resulting in the following:
2 –1 K 34 –1
 G ot  = –  K oo   K ot  = ------------------------ = ------------ =  0.5  (1-38)
K 34 + K 45 1+1

Main Index
 24 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Manual Solution of a Small Superelement Example

2 T
 K tt  =  K ot   G ot  +  K tt  =  – 1.0   0.5  +  1.0  =  0.5  (1-39)

2 2 T 2
 Pt  =  P3  =  G ot   P 4  +  P 3  =  0.5    3  +  0.0  =  1.5  (1-40)

The transformation and reduced matrices make sense. If grid point 3 is moved 1.0 unit, grid point 4 will
move 0.5 units. As before, the stiffness is two springs in series, resulting in a combined stiffness of 0.5, and
the load of 3.0 units at grid point 4 gives a 1.5 unit reaction at point 3 if it is constrained.

Residual Structure Processing

The remaining dof, or in this case grid point 3, is defined as the residual structure.
 Phase 1 Processing
The phase 1 matrices are generated for the residual structure, based on any elements or loads remaining, then
the reduced matrices from the superelements are added at the appropriate dof.
 Phase 2 Processing
After the combined (or assembled) matrix for the residual is formed, and constraints applicable to the
remaining DOFs are applied and the residual structure problem is solved as part of phase 2 operations.
 Phase 3 Processing
Phase 3 represents the data recovery. In this case, since there is only one grid, the data recovery is trivial. In
the general case, the data recovery for the residual will include the residual element stresses, strains, forces, etc.
Figure 1-1, depicts how the superelements feed into the residual structure. The individual components that are
assembled to make up the residual are shown on the left. The resulting assembly model is shown on the right,
where the system stiffness is: K = K 1 + K 2 . The residual structure for this model contains no elements,
only one grid point, the physical load on that point, and the reduced matrices from the superelements.

Figure 1-12 Simple Model, Residual Structure

Because all physical constraints have been applied at the superelement level, no reduction is performed at the
residual level for this model. If there were a physical model for the residual, then it would also go through the

Main Index
 CHAPTER 1 25
Introduction and Fundamentals

application of constraints and a reduction to a final set of analysis matrices. Therefore, the assembly matrix
is the result of adding the superelement matrices together at grid point 3, or

0 0 n i
 K gg  =  K jj  +  i = 1  K tt  (1-41)

0  1 2
 K gg  =  0  +   K tt  +  K tt   (1-42)
 
=  0  +  0.5  +  0.5  =  1.0  (1-43)

1 2
Where the matrices  K tt  and  K tt  represent the reduced superelement stiffness matrices, and the

0
 K jj  matrix represents the stiffness matrix resulting from any elements in the residual structure. In this

0
problem there are no elements in the residual structure; therefore,  K jj  is null. Since there are no SPCs
or MPCs in the residual structure, there are not eliminations or reductions require, so

0 0
 K tt  =  K gg  =  1.0  (1-44)

Similarly, the loading matrix is the physical loadings applied on the residual, plus the reduced superelement
loads. Because grid point 3 was in the residual, its load was not applied to the upstream superelements, so
the 2.0 unit force on grid point 3 is finally included at this point.

0 0 0 1 2
 Pt  =  Pj  =  Pj  +   Pt  +  Pt   (1-45)
 

0
 Pt  =  2.0  +   0.5  +  1.5   =  4.0  (1-46)

Now that the stiffness and loading matrices have been generated and reduced, we are ready to solve the
residual structure problem for the physical (T-set) displacements. This is referred to as the Phase 2 solution:
–1
 U t  =  K tt   P t  (1-47)

0 1
 U3  = ---  4.0  =  4.0  (1-48)
1
Now that the residual solution vector is available, the data recovery can be performed. In this case, there is
no additional data recovery for the residual structure since there are no elements, SPC constraints, or MPC

Main Index
 26 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Manual Solution of a Small Superelement Example

constraints. The data recovery will be performed for the superelements in the subsequent sections. Review
of the MSC Nastran output from file /doc/seug/chapter1/simple-superelement.bdf. confirms the solution.
1 MSC NASTRAN JOB CREATED ON 19-MAR-11 AT 16:09:34 MARCH 19, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 7/15/10 PAGE 22

DEFAULT SUPERELEMENT 0 , 1

0 SUPERELEMENT MODEL SUBCASE 1

D I S P L A C E M E N T V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

3 G 4.000000E+00 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

L O A D V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

3 G 2.000000E+00 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

Listing 1-2 MSC Nastran Output for the Residual Structure of the Simple Example with Superelements

Detailed explanations of the output will be provided in subsequent chapters.

Data Recovery for Superelement 1

The first part of the Phase 3 data recovery involves partitioning the residual solution to the superelement
boundary. In this case, it is trivial since there is only one residual dof. The next step for superelement data
recovery is to calculate the solution vector for the interior dof. The interior solution has two components:
t
 Free boundary displacements u 2

The free boundary displacements are based on the boundary solution of the residual structure (i.e. the
external dof are, in general, free dof in the residual). For this example, the only unknown becomes u 2 based
on the external dof boundary displacements (i.e. the T-set), or

Figure 1-13 Simple Example – Superelement 1 Free Boundary Displacement Data Recovery

Main Index
 CHAPTER 1 27
Introduction and Fundamentals

seid
 t seid seid
 uo  =  G ot   Ut  (1-49)
 

1
 t 1 1
 u2  =  G ot   U t  (1-50)
 

=  0.5   4.0  =  2.0  (1-51)

o
 Fixed boundary displacements u 2

The fixed boundary solution is the solution vector for the interior dof when the T-set is fixed.

Figure 1-14 Simple Example – Superelement 1 Fixed Boundary Displacement Data Recovery

seid
 o – 1 seid seid
 uo  =  K oo   Po  (1-52)
 

1 1
 o –1 1
 uo  =  K oo   Po  (1-53)
 

1
= -----------------  1.0  =  0.5  (1-54)
1 + 1
 Total interior solution: u 2

The total interior solution is the summation of the free boundary solution and the fixed boundary solution
seid seid
seid  t  o
 Uo  =  Uo  +  Uo  (1-55)
   

Main Index
 28 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Manual Solution of a Small Superelement Example

1
 U2  =  2.0  +  0.5  =  2.5  (1-56)

 The F-set (free set) displacements  U f 

The solution vector for the degrees of freedom allowed to move is obtained by merging the T-set and O-Set:
seid
 
seid  Ut 
 Uf  =   (1-57)
 Uo 
 

 1
 U2   2.5 
=   =   (1-58)
 U3   4.0 
 

 The G-set displacements  U g 

The total solution vector for all dof in the superelement is calculated by merging the SPC constraints and
back-expansion of the MPC dependent dof. In this example, there are only SPCs, so the total solution vector
becomes:
seid
 
seid  Uf 
 Ug  =   (1-59)
 Us 
 

 1
 U1   0.0 
   
 U 2  =  2.5  (1-60)
   
 U3   4.0 
 
Rearranging:

 
 U1   0.0 
1    
 U g  =  U 2  =  2.5  (1-61)
   
 U3   4.0 
 
 Constraint Forces

Main Index
 CHAPTER 1 29
Introduction and Fundamentals

The constraint forces are obtained by partitioning the G-set stiffness matrix and solution vector as follows:
 F s  =  K sf   U f  (1-62)

 
 F 1  = – 1 0  2.5  =  – 2.5  (1-63)
 4.0 
 Element Data Recovery
For this example, we can calculate the element forces based upon:
 F elem  =  K elem   U elem  (1-64)

 F 12  =  K 12   U 1 – U 2  (1-65)

 F 12  =  1.0   0.0 – 2.5  =  – 2.5  (1-66)

Similarly:
 F 23  =  1.0   2.5 – 4.0  =  1.5  (1-67)

The MSC Nastran output for this superelement matches the hand calculations

Main Index
 30 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Manual Solution of a Small Superelement Example

:
1 MSC NASTRAN JOB CREATED ON 19-MAR-11 AT 16:09:34 MARCH 19, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 7/15/10 PAGE 29

DEFAULT SUPERELEMENT 1 , 1

0 SUPERELEMENT MODEL SUBCASE 1

D I S P L A C E M E N T V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

1 G 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

2 G 2.500000E+00 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

3 G 4.000000E+00 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

L O A D V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

2 G 1.000000E+00 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

F O R C E S O F S I N G L E - P O I N T C O N S T R A I N T

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

1 G -2.500000E+00 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

F O R C E S I N S C A L A R S P R I N G S ( C E L A S 1 )

ELEMENT FORCE ELEMENT FORCE ELEMENT FORCE ELEMENT FORCE

ID. ID. ID. ID.

1 -2.500000E+00 2 -1.500000E+00

Listing 1-3 MSC Nastran output for Simple Example – Superelement 1

Data Recovery for Superelement 2

Following the same procedure, the data recovery for superelement 2 produces the following results:

 
 U3   4.0 
2    
 U g  =  U 4  =  3.5  (1-68)
   
 U5   0.0 
 
The constraint forces are:

 
 F 5  = – 1 1  3.5  =  – 3.5  (1-69)
 0.0 

Main Index
 CHAPTER 1 31
Introduction and Fundamentals

And the element forces are:

 F 34  =  1.0   3.5 – 4.0  =  – 0.5  (1-70)

 F 45  =  1.0   0.0 – 3.5  =  – 3.5  (1-71)

The MSC Nastran output for this superelement matches the hand calculations:
1 MSC NASTRAN JOB CREATED ON 19-MAR-11 AT 16:09:34 MARCH 19, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 7/15/10 PAGE 38

DEFAULT SUPERELEMENT 2 , 1

0 SUPERELEMENT MODEL SUBCASE 1

D I S P L A C E M E N T V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

3 G 4.000000E+00 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

4 G 3.500000E+00 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

5 G 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

L O A D V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

4 G 3.000000E+00 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

F O R C E S O F S I N G L E - P O I N T C O N S T R A I N T

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

5 G -3.500000E+00 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

F O R C E S I N S C A L A R S P R I N G S ( C E L A S 1 )

ELEMENT FORCE ELEMENT FORCE ELEMENT FORCE ELEMENT FORCE

ID. ID. ID. ID.

3 5.000000E-01 4 3.500000E+00

Listing 1-4 MSC Nastran output for Simple Example – Superelement 2

List of Superelement Enhancements Released Since

Version 69
Superelement technology is constantly being advanced by the development staff of MSC Nastran and New
versions of MSC Nastran are released periodically. This guide has been prepared with minimal reference to
the version number and is consistent with the MSC Nastran 2010. The previous version of this guide was
released in conjunction with the MSC Nastran 2001. There have been several significant releases in the
meantime and it is felt to be of historical interest to show how each of these releases add to the Superelement
capability. It is also of great practical interest to those who are not using the most recent release to see which

Main Index
 32 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
List of Superelement Enhancements Released Since Version 69

of the capabilities described in this Guide are not available to them. The major enhancements since Version
69 are identified here. Discussions of each of these topics are included in this Guide.
Version 69
 Introduction of PART Superelements
 Release Guide Contents, Chapter 5:
• Automatic Attachment of Partitioned Superelements
• Multilevel Superelements
• Superelements in Dynamic Analysis
• Restarts with Superelements
• Image Superelements
• MSC/NASTRAN Plotter
• Parts Assembly with Manual Control
• Upward Compatibility
• MSC/PATRAN Interface
• Definitions and Acronyms
• Summary of New or Modified Bulk Data Entries
• Sample Files
Version 69.1
 External Superelements for SOL 101 and SOL 103 – 3 Step Method
• PARAMs added: EXTOUT, EXTDROUT, EXTDR
• Support for MATRIXDB, DMIGDB, DMIGOP2, DMIGPCH
• Addition of EXTERNAL to SEBULK entry
• EXTRN bulk data entry introduced
Version 70.0
 Enhanced External Superelements
• Better documentation on usage
 Residual Vectors for improved dynamic
 Superelement Mass Reduction performance improvement
Version 70.5
 Splining Upstream Superelements in Aeroelastic Analysis
 Use of External Superelements in Aeroelastic Analysis
 Coupled Fluid-Structure Models with Interface DOFs in Superelements
• PARAM, FLUIDSE
 External SE Enhancements

Main Index
 CHAPTER 1 33
Introduction and Fundamentals

• Assembly of external in SOL 101 thru 159

• Data Recovery support added for SOL 107 through 112
• CSUPER-type support for external SE via EXTOUT PARAMs
• PARAM,VMOPT,1 to support virtual mass at GSET level
• Better component mode handling byu bypassing INREL module
Version 70.7
 Distributed Parallel Linear Static Analysis (SOL 101)
 Differential Stiffness for Upstream Superelements
 External Superelement Data Recovery for SOL 146
 Modal Damping for Upstream Superelements, PARAM,SESDAMP,YES
 Add Modal Damping to Structural Damping for Superelements, PARAM,KDAMP,-1
 Special Superelement Reserved for Fluid Elements, PARAM,FLUIDSE,seid
 Reduced Data Recovery Matrices, PARAM,MINIGOA
 Automated QSET Generation, PARAM,NQSET,n
 Automatic Removal of Unused QSET dof, PARAM,SMALLQ
Version 2001
 Shell Normal Default, PARAM,SNORM
 Multiple DMIG input
 Force Resultant Output Enhancements
 Simplified Static Loading Data in Dynamic Analysis (removal of LOADSET/LSEQ restrictions)
 OMODES Case Control of Modal Output
 OTIME Case Control of Temporal Output
 WEIGHTCHECK Mass Summation Output Including Upstream Superelements
 Parallel Processing Enhancements: Geometric Domain Decomposition
 Automated Component Modes Synthesis (ACMS)
Version 2004
 Enhancements to External Superelements – 2 Step Method
• EXTSEOUT Cast Control
• BNDFIX/BNDFIX1, BNDFREE, BNDFREE1
 Scale Factors on X2GG and X2PP Matrices
 Support of Adjoint Sensitivity in Superelement Analysis
 Design Responses Spanning Across Subcases or Superelements
 Specify DELAY or DPHASE in Upstream Superelements
 Residual Vector Enhancements
 Nonstructural Mass Support for Superelements (NSM, NSM1, NSMADD)

Main Index
 34 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
List of Superelement Enhancements Released Since Version 69

 Modal Participation Factors for Fluid Superelement

 Control of Superelement Differential Stiffness Calculation, PARAM,SEKD
 Adams Flexible Body Support, ADAMSMNF
 Punch File Identification of Superelement ID
Version 2004R3 (2004.5)
 ACMS with Matrix Domain Decomposition
 ACMS compatible with Superelements, Including External Superelements
Version 2005
 CSET Improvements, PARAM,MHRED
 Automatic QSET generation, PARAM,AUTOQSET
Version 2005R2 (2005.1)
 External Superelement Support in SOL 600
 ADAMSMNF Support in SOL 600
 USET Support for MATMOD Option 16
 Support for Fixed Boundary Displacements in SOL 101 for EXTSEOUT Assembly Runs
 Support for Data Recovery with EXTSEOUT(DMIGPCH) option
Version 2005R3 (2005.5) / MDR1
 Efficiency Enhancements for MTRXIN handling of DMIG entries
 BSETi/BNDFIXi and CSETi/BNDFREEi Entries can be commingled
 Enhancements to EXTSEOUT
• ASMBULK AUTO and MANQ options
• FSCOUP option to Store Fluid-Structure Coupling Matrix
• DMIGSFIX option to Define DMIG Matrix Names
• Automatic QSET numbering scheme with PARAM AUTOQSET
• Automatic OTM output for PLOTEL elements
• MATDB name equivalent to MATRIXDB
Version 2007 / MDR2
 ACMS for External Superelement Reduction
 Automatic External Superelement Optimization (AESO)
Version 2007.1 / MDR2.1
 ACMS for External Superelement Reduction of Fluid
 EXTSEOUT support for OUTPUT4 with MATRIXOP4
 Merged Superelement Output, PARAM,FULLSEDR

Main Index
 CHAPTER 1 35
Introduction and Fundamentals

Version 2008 / MDR3

 Local Adaptive Mesh Refinement
 Improved SMP throughput for Static Condensation
Version 2010
 Support for Part Superelement Optimization
 SOL 400 Support for Linear Solutions with Superelements
Version 2013.1
 Rotors in External Superelements (See Chapter 11: Superelement Analysis with Rotors in the MSC Nastran
Rotordynamics User's Guide)
Version 2014
 Multiple Rotors in Multiple External Superelements and the Residual (See Chapter 11: Superelement
Analysis with Rotors in the MSC Nastran Rotordynamics User's Guide)
 Copy and Move/Mirror Capability for External Superelements (See Chapter 11: Superelement Analysis
with Rotors in the MSC Nastran Rotordynamics User's Guide)
 Generate Non-Sparse Matrices via the MATOP4 option of the EXTSEOUT Case Control
Command.
Version 2016
 Superelement with Advanced Nonlinear Elements
Version 2017
 Accelerated ACMS for External Superelements with Better SMP Scalability
Version 2017.1
 Multiple External Superelements with Fluid Cavities
Version 2018
 Assemble External Superelements in SOL 400 Created in Other SOLs
 Create External Superelements With Linear Perturbation in SOL 400
 Create External Superelements With Differential Stiffness in SOLs 101, 103 and 107 Through 112
 Case Control Commands EXTDROUT and EXTDRIN for 3-Step External Superelement Data
Recovery
Version 2018.2
 AVL/EXCITE(TM) Implemented Using External Superelements With the 2-Step Method (See
Chapter 19: AVL EXCITETM Interface in the MSC Nastran Dynamic Analysis User's Guide)
Version 2020
 External Superelement Based Data Recovery for Nastran/ADAMS Interface (Chapter 17: MSC
Nastran/ADAMS Interface in the MSC Nastran Dynamic Analysis User's Guide)

Main Index
 36 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
List of Superelement Enhancements Released Since Version 69

Version 2021
 Monitor Points Results in External Superelement 2-Step Data Recovery
 External Superelement CMS with Real Coupled Modes

Main Index
 Chapter 2: How to Define a Superelement
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User’s Guide

2 How to Define a
Superelement


Introduction

Superelement vs. Residual

Three Types of Superelements

Defining List Superelements

Defining PART Superelements

Defining and Attaching External Superelements

The Superelement Map – SEMAP

Main Index
 38 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Introduction

Introduction
Now that the basic concept of superelements has been explained, we can focus on how to define
superelements in MSC Nastran. Superelements are defined using the Bulk Data Section of the input file and
controlled via File Management Section (FMS), Executive Control, PARAMeters, and Case Control.
There are three methods available for defining superelements:
 List Superelement: Commonly referred to as “SESET” superelements
 PART Superelement: Commonly referred to as “BEGIN SUPER” superelements
 External Superelement: Commonly referred to as “EXTSEOUT” or “EXTOUT” or “DMIG”
superelements
The purpose of this chapter is to describe the input required to define each type of superelement as well as
discuss some of the advantages and disadvantages of each method.

Note: BEGIN SUPER vs. BEGIN BULK Superelement Partitioning

MSC Nastran maintains two distinct paths for superelement processing in the solution
sequences. When a BEGIN SUPER entry is present the program uses the more modern
SEP1X module to make the SEMAP table used to control partition of superelements. When
there is a BEGIN BULK entry but no BEGIN SUPER entries a parallel path using the older
SEP1 module is used instead. For a more detailed discussion of these two methods, please refer
to the Superelement Analysis (p. 425) in the MSC Nastran Reference Guide.

Superelement vs. Residual

Each superelement in MSC Nastran is identified by an integer identification known as the SEID. Each SEID
must be a unique positive integer (with the exception of the residual structure, which is known as
superelement 0). If no superelements are defined, the model is assumed to be a residual-structure-only model,
and a conventional (non-superelement) solution is performed. By default, all superelement solution
sequences perform a conventional solution if no superelements are defined. The superelement solution
sequences for MSC Nastran are as follows

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 39
How to Define a Superelement

Table 2-1 Solution Sequences that Support Superelements

SOL Number SOL Name Description
101 SESTATIC Statics with options:
Linear steady state heat transfer.
Alternate reduction.
Inertia relief.
103 SEMODES Normal modes.
105 SEBUCKL Buckling with options:
Static analysis.
Alternate reduction.
Inertia relief.
106 NLSTATIC Nonlinear or linear statics
107 SEDCEIG Direct complex modes
108 SEDFREQ Direct frequency response
109 SEDTRAN Direct transient response
110 SEMCEIG Modal complex eigenvalues
111 SEMFREQ Modal frequency response
112 SEMTRAN Modal transient response
128 SENLRHM Nonlinear harmonic response
129 NLTRAN Nonlinear or linear transient response
144 AESTAT Static Aeroelastic response
145 SEFLUTTER Aerodynamic flutter
146 SEAERO Aeroelastic response
153 NLSCSH Static structural and/or steady state heat transfer
analysis with options:
Linear or nonlinear analysis.
159 NLTCSH Transient structural and/or transient heat transfer
analysis with options:
Linear or nonlinear analysis.
200 DESOPT Design Optimization
400 NONLIN Nonlinear static and transient analysis

With Sol 400, please note that

Main Index
 40 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Three Types of Superelements

1. Advanced Nonlinear Elements are also supported by Superelements, only linear behavior and linear
materials are applied in Superelements.
2. External Superelements are not supported in the current version.

Three Types of Superelements

As mentioned in the Introduction to this chapter, MSC Nastran has 3 basic methods for defining
superelements:
 List Superelements: as the name implies, List Superelements are defined by specifying a list (or set)
in the main Bulk Data section of the input file. These are often referred to as “SESET”
superelements because the most common way of defining them is with the SESET bulk data entry.
When superelements are defined using this approach, the model defined in this section of the input
is cut apart into separate components (each component is a superelement). A good way to describe
this is to say that the program is using a cookie-cutter approach with the model, taking a model and
dividing it into superelement lists for processing. Many models of this type could be run as a stand-
alone, or “one shot” model without superelement processing. However, a savvy user who has
repeated components can use the List Superelements to efficiently image (copy, repeat, mirror) parts
of the model.
 PART Superelements: PART superelements are defined by defining each superelement in its own
Partitioned Bulk Data section. These separate sections of the bulk data are self-contained in that
each section contains all geometry, elements, properties, constraints, parameters, and loading data
for that component of the model. When PARTs are used the program works in a manner similar to
an assembly process. That is, a series of separate components are assembled into the final finite
element model, i.e. the residual structure.
 External superelements: External Superelements are similar to PART superelements in many
respects, except rather than solving the model in a single run, the superelement can be processed and
output for use at a later time. There are many advantages of external superelements: 1) the reduced
matrices are compact and can be added to another structure while maintaining full fidelity of the
component behavior on the system, 2) they can be easily re-used as many times as necessary at a very
low runtime cost, 3) they can protect design information (proprietary geometry) and material
information (composite layup), 4) key results can be monitored without the need for full data
recovery, 5) files can be easily shared and maintained across different organizations or design groups.
The three approaches can be used independently or together depending upon the application. In versions
prior to Version 69, only the list superelements were available. Input files from versions prior to Version 69
of MSC Nastran can be used in later versions, and any superelement input will be treated as before. Once
PARTs are defined, the program uses a different set of rules to partition the Main Bulk Data Section into
superelements. The modern external superelements were first introduced with PARAMs in V69.1 and
enhanced to include convenient case control commands in V2004. A list of enhancements by version can be
found in List of Superelement Enhancements Released Since Version 69.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 41
How to Define a Superelement

Defining List Superelements

As the name implies, List Superelements are defined by specifying a list or set; but List Superelements can
only be defined in the main Bulk Data section of the MSC Nastran input file. The superelement processing
partitions the model into separate sections based on a list of interior grid points and/or elements defined by
the user. The Main Bulk Data Section is defined as the ‘first’ bulk data input section which occurs after
BEGIN BULK or BEGIN SUPER [=0].
List Superelements can be defined on the GRID entry, the SESET entry, or the SEELT entry. In addition, a
superelement can be defined as a copy of another superelement (image superelement) or by using matrices
from an external source (external superelement) by using the CSUPER entry. Refer to Chapter 13: Practical
Image Superelements for more details on image superelements.
Any grid points defined in the main bulk data that are not assigned to a superelement, using either a SESET,
GRID, or a SEELT entry will automatically be assigned to the residual structure (SEID = 0).
For list superelements defined with BEGIN BULK: if SPOINTs or EPOINTs exist in the input stream, they
are automatically and permanently assigned to the residual structure and cannot be reassigned to be interior
to a superelement. However, if the user specifies BEGIN SUPER, then SPOINTs and EPOINTs can be
assigned to any superelement. The reason is that BEGIN BULK and BEGIN SUPER undergo different
superelement processing as described in the Superelement Analysis (Ch. 7) in the MSC Nastran Reference Guide

List Superelement Definition with the SESET Entry

The SESET entry can be used to define the interior GRIDs associated to a Superelement. The user simply
defines the SESET, its SEID and the associated GRID list for the interior GRIDs.

SESET Superelement Interior Point Definition

Defines interior grid points for a superelement.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SESET SEID G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7

Example:
SESET 5 2 17 24 25 165

Alternate Format and Example:

SESET SEID G1 “THRU G2
”
SESET 2 17 THRU 165

Main Index
 42 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Defining List Superelements

Field Contents
SEID Superelement identification number. Must be a primary superelement. (Integer > 0)
Gi Grid or scalar point identification numbers. (0 < Integer < 1000000; G1 < G2)

The SESET entry takes precedence over the SEID field on the GRID entry defined below. SESET defines
grid and scalar points to be included as interior to a superelement. SESET may be used as the primary means
of defining superelements or it may be used in combination with SEELT entries which define elements
interior to a superelement. For additional comments on the SESET entry, please refer to the SESET (Ch. ) in
the .
There is no limit on the number of SESET entries that can be used to define a superelement, and the THRU
option on the SESET entry, can have open sets. That is, not all grid points in the range specified need to exist.
If a nonexistent grid point is referenced by an SESET entry, that part of the entry is ignored.
If BEGIN SUPER is used and SEELT is present, then SEELT will take precedence over both the SESET entry
and GRID entry SEID field.

List Superelement Definition with the GRID Entry

An interior superelement GRID can also be defined on the GRID entry in the SEID field.

GRID Grid Point

Defines the location of a geometric grid point, the directions of its displacement, and its permanent single-
point constraints.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
GRID ID CP X1 X2 X3 CD PS SEID

Example:
GRID 2 3 1.0 -2.0 3.0 316

Field Contents
lD Grid point identification number. (0 < Integer < 100,000,000, see Remark 9.)
CP Identification number of coordinate system in which the location of the grid
point is defined. (Integer > 0 or blank*)
X1, X2, X3 Location of the grid point in coordinate system CP. (Real; Default = 0.0)

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 43
How to Define a Superelement

Field Contents
CD Identification number of coordinate system in which the displacements,
degrees- of-freedom, constraints, and solution vectors are defined at the grid
point. (Integer > -1 or blank, see Remark 3.)*
PS Permanent single-point constraints associated with the grid point. (Any of the
Integers 1 through 6 with no embedded blanks, or blank*.)
SEID Superelement identification number. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)

*See the GRDSET entry for default options for the CP, CD, PS, and SEID fields.

Note: Note that a SESET entry will override the definition on the GRID entry. Also, the GRDSET
entry can be used to define the default SEID for all GRIDs in the main bulk data section.

List Superelement Definition on Element ID – the SEELT entry

As an alternative to defining the superelement based on GRID ids, the superelement can be defined based
on element ids using the SEELT entry. If the main bulk data section is defined with BEGIN SUPER [=0]
instead of BEGIN BULK, then the SEELT entry can be used to define the elements which belong to each
superelement. The advantage is that sometimes it is easier to define element ranges rather than GRID ranges
for large models. Refer to the note on superelement processing based on BEGIN SUPER vs. BEGIN BULK
Superelement Partitioning.

SEELT Superelement Boundary Element Reassignment

Reassigns superelement boundary elements to an upstream superelement

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SEELT SEID EID1 EID2 EID3 EID4 EID5 EID6 EID7

Example:
SEELT 2 147 562 937

Alternate Format and Example:

SEELT SEID EID1 “THRU EID2
”
SEELT 5 12006 THRU 12050

Main Index
 44 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Defining List Superelements

Field Contents
SEID Superelement identification number. See Remark 7. (Integer > 0)
EIDi Element identification numbers. (Integer > 0 or “THRU”; for
“THRU” option EID1 < EID2.)

The SEELT entry can also be used to assign elements connected entirely to boundary GRIDs to the upstream
superelement.

Interior versus Exterior Points

Any GRID point assigned to a superelement by the user is interior to that superelement. Exterior grid points
are defined by the program based on processing order. If a grid point is connected to a superelement but is
interior to a downstream superelement (one which is processed later), that grid point is exterior to the
upstream superelement. Processing order can be defined by either the user or the program. Other than
Chapter 7: Multi-Level Superelement Analysis, we will limit the discussion in this Guide to what is known as a
single-level processing tree, where all exterior points of the superelements are assigned as interior to the
residual structure.

Simple Example using Cantilever Plate

To illustrate the concept of interior vs. exterior grid points, we can use the cantilever plate as an example. In
this case, we want to define two superelements and a residual as shown in Figure 2-1; the non-superelement
model for this can be found at: /doc/seug/chapter2/cantilever-beam/baseline.bdf, and the corresponding
SESET model is in the same directory in file seset.bdf.

Figure 2-1 Simple Example use to define List Superelements

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 45
How to Define a Superelement

We will define the interior grids for each superelement with the SESET entry. Note that this example
demonstrates both forms of the SESET entry (simple list and “thru” list).

Table 2-2 Sample SESET Entries used to define a List Superelement

$ Tip.10
SESET 10 108 THRU 111
SESET 10 208 THRU 211
$ Base.20
SESET 20 101 102 103 201 202 203

The resulting superelement definition is shown in Figure 2-2.

Figure 2-2 Example Model Superelement Interior Grid Definition

Considering superelement 10, the grid definitions are as follows:

Figure 2-3 Interior and Exterior Grids for Superelement 10

Main Index
 46 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Defining List Superelements

Note that GRID 107 and 207 are exterior to Superelement 10 and interior to Superelement 0 (the residual).
The .f06 file clearly lists the interior and exterior GRID definitions as well as the list of elements for each
superelement
SUPERELEMENT 10

LIST OF INTERIOR GRID POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF INTERIOR POINTS = 8 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 108 109 110 111 208 209 210 211

SUPERELEMENT 10

LIST OF EXTERIOR POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF EXTERIOR POINTS = 2 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 107 207

SUPERELEMENT 10

LIST OF ELEMENT ID-S ( TOTAL NO. OF ELEMENTS = 4 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 7 8 9 10

Listing 2-1 Superelement Summary Based on List Superelements with BEGIN BULK

Note that instead of SESET, this example could have been defined by using BEGIN SUPER (instead of
BEGIN BULK) and the following SEELT definition: SEELT,10,7,thru,10. In this case the superelement
processing would have gone through the ‘new’ superelement processing and the output would have been
different as shown in Listing 2-2. See also the Note on BEGIN SUPER vs. BEGIN BULK Superelement Partitioning The
purpose of this chapter is to describe the input required to define each type of superelement as well as discuss
some of the advantages and disadvantages of each method.
0 SUPERELEMENT 10

TYPE = PRIMARY (MAIN BULK DATA)

LIST OF EXTERIOR POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF EXTERIOR POINT = 2 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 1B 2B

0 SUPERELEMENT 10

TYPE = PRIMARY (MAIN BULK DATA)

LIST OF INTERIOR POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF INTERIOR POINT = 8 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 108 109 110 111 208 209 210 211

0 SUPERELEMENT 10

TYPE = PRIMARY (MAIN BULK DATA)

LIST OF ELEMENTS ( TOTAL NO. OF ELEMENTS = 4 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 7 8 9 10

Listing 2-2 Superelement Summary Based on List Superelements with BEGIN SUPER

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 47
How to Define a Superelement

Demonstration of Defining Interior Points in Patran

The cantilever plate example in the previous section can be easily defined in Patran. It is presumed that the
user has a working knowledge of Patran and groups. First, to define the superelements, the user opens the
proper form in Patran by selecting the Meshing tab and the Superelement Icon

Figure 2-4 Opening the Create Superelement form in Patran

Next the user simply selects the group which will define each superelement. The “dot” in the “SE.10” will
tell Patran to honor the number “10” as the SEID when it exports the MSC Nastran bdf SESET entries.

Main Index
 48 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Defining List Superelements

Figure 2-5 Patran Superelement Definition Based on Groups

By default, Patran will automatically detect grids 107 and 207 as the superelement exterior dof. There are
some special cases where the user may want to redefine the exterior dof and they are covered later in this Guide
When creating an analysis job, the user must specify if superelements are desired, otherwise Patran will not
write a superelement model. By default, a PART superelement model is written, but the user can also chose
a list (SESET) superelement model as shown in the example below.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 49
How to Define a Superelement

Figure 2-6 Patran Analysis Setup to Write a List (SESET) Superelement Input File

Superelement Partitioning
Each superelement is processed as an independent model. To achieve this, MSC Nastran creates separate bulk
data for each superelement. In the case of Part Superelements, this is naturally performed based on the user

Main Index
 50 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Defining List Superelements

directive BEGIN SUPER = SEID. However, for list superelements, MSC Nastran must interrogate and
partition the bulk data into its constituent superelements.
List superelements are partitioned based on user input. Recall that list superelements are defined with SESET
entries, or GRID entries with and SEID specified on field 9, or by defining BEGIN SUPER in conjunction
with SEELT in the main bulk data section.
The partitioning process for list superelements is described as follows.
 First the processing order is defined for the model; i.e. which superelement will be processed first.
For single-level superelements, the processing order is not important. However, for multi-level
superelements, the tip superelements must be processes first, followed by the collector superelements
in a hierarchy that will feed into the residual structure. Once the processing order is defined, the
bulk data is partitioned for each superelement based on the processing order.
 All interior grid points assigned to the superelement are placed in the bulk data section for its
associated superelement. These grids are also removed from the residual structure bulk data.
 All elements connected to the interior grid points of the superelement are placed in its associated
bulk data section. These elements are removed from the residual bulk data.
 All exterior points are stored with the superelement bulk data. These grids remain in residual bulk
data section and may also be defined in other superelement bulk data sections.
 Any loading entries specific to the interior grid points and/or interior elements are removed from the
residual bulk data and associated with the superelement bulk data. Any information removed from
the residual bulk data and associated to a superelement is not available for use in any other
superelement.
 Any loads that are specific to grids interior to the residual structure are retained in the residual bulk
data section and processes with the residual structure. (Refer to the simple example in Superelement
Analysis (Ch. 1)).
 Copies are made of common data. For example, property entries can be applicable to elements in
multiple superelements. Also loadings such as PLOAD4 and GRAV could apply to multiple
superelements. Common data is not removed from the residual bulk data, but it is copied so that it
will be available for the relevant superelements.
Once all information for the first superelement has been separated, the process is repeated for the next
superelement based on the processing order. After the bulk data has been separated, moved, or copied for each
upstream superelement, the remaining data belongs to the residual structure. Once the list superelements
have been partitioned, each superelement is processed using its own unique bulk data. If there are entries that
need information from more than one superelement for processing (for example, PLOAD4 entries with a
THRU range including elements from several superelements), the program may give a fatal message when
processing the affected superelements. To simplify matters, think of each superelement as being processed
independently from all others, thus reducing the chance for errors.
A more detailed description of the grid and element partitioning is included in the following subsections.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 51
How to Define a Superelement

Grid Point Partitioning

Interior grid points are assigned by the user. Exterior points are normally determined by the program, based
on element connectivity. Any grid point (that is not interior to the superelement) connected to an element
that is interior to a superelement is defined as an exterior point for the superelement.
In addition, it is possible for the user to define additional exterior grid points beyond the ones assigned by
the program. This definition can be accomplished by using the CSUPEXT entry.

CSUPEXT Superelement Exterior Point Definition

Assigns exterior points to a superelement.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CSUPEXT SEID GP1 GP2 GP3 GP4 GP5 GP6 GP7

Example:
CSUPEXT 2 147 562 937

Alternate Format and Example:

CSUPEXT SEID EID1 “THRU EID2
”
CSUPEXT 5 12006 THRU 12050

Field Contents
SEID Superelement identification number. See Remark 7. (Integer > 0)
GPi Grid identification numbers. (Integer > 0 or “THRU”; for “THRU” option GP1 <
GP2.)

Main Index
 52 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Defining List Superelements

This entry is used to assign exterior points that might not be assigned based on connectivity. Examples are:
reference grid points on CBAR and CBEAM entries, PARAM,GRDPNT, reference grid points on loading
entries, and points connected only by RBE or MPC entries.

Note: SPOINT and EPOINT handling

There are special rules regarding scalar (SPOINT) and extra (EPOINT) points. SPOINTs are
“scalar points” and are used as special dof for operations like storing generalized dof in
Component Modes Synthesis (see also Dynamic Reduction – Component Modes Synthesis (Ch. 9),
defining warping dof for CBEAM elements, and as a dof to store relative displacements in a
relative displacement MPC, to name a few uses. EPOINTs are “extra points” that are used in
dynamics analysis to define transfer functions as part of control systems. Extra points are
added to the system after the finite element matrix assembly and real eigenvalue solution.
Therefore, structural elements, constraints, and static loads may not be connected to
EPOINTs. Note that neither SPOINTs nor EPOINTs are associated to geometric entities.
 EPOINTS: must be part of the residual structure. If the user attempts to assign an
EPOINT as interior to an upstream superelement, a FATAL message will occur.
 SPOINTS: depending on the processing method, SPOINTs have different rules:
 BEGIN BULK: For list superelements in the main bulk data section defined with
BEGIN BULK, both scalar and extra points are, automatically and permanently
assigned as interior to the residual structure. They cannot be interior to any other
superelement. Scalar points can be exterior to any number of superelements and are
often used in dynamics to represent component modes. Extra points cannot be
exterior to any superelement; in fact, any entries that reference extra points can
reference only points and elements that are interior to the residual structure.
 BEGIN SUPER: For Part Superelements or List Superelements in models that
contain “BEGIN SUPER …”, the SPOINTs remain interior to the superelement in
which they are defined. In multi-level superelement analysis, this gives the user the
option to define “collector” superelements and store component modes in SPOINTs.
Also, warping dof and other dof defined with SPOINTs will remain in their natural
superelement for processing.

Element Partitioning
Element partitioning for list superelements is handled automatically by MSC Nastran. Any element that is
connected entirely to the interior points of a superelement is assigned to that superelement. A Branch Element
is an element that connects to grid points belonging to more than one superelement. Branch elements are
assigned to the most upstream (based on processing order) superelement to which they are connected
Figure 2-7 shows an example of a branch element. This example is the same example described earlier and can
be located at /doc/seug/chapter2/cantilever-beam/seset.bdf. In this example, element 7 attaches to GRID
107 and 207 which both belong to superelement 10 (as an external dof ) and superelement 0 (as an internal
dof. Since superelement 10 is the ‘most upstream’ superelement, element 7 is automatically attached to
superelement 10. From a programming standpoint this means that the element formulation (stiffness, mass,
etc.) and element data recovery (element forces, stresses, etc.) are calculated during the processing of
superelement 10. From a practitioner standpoint, the more important thing to understand is that the

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 53
How to Define a Superelement

element data recovery will be performed and reported in the .f06 and .op2 files as part of superelement 10.
For this example, the .f06 file clearly demonstrates that element 7 belongs to superelement 10 and that the
data recovery is performed for superelement 10.

Figure 2-7 Example of Branch Superleement

0 SUPERELEMENT 10

LIST OF INTERIOR GRID POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF INTERIOR POINTS = 8 )

0 INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 108 109 110 111 208 209 210 211

0 SUPERELEMENT 10

LIST OF EXTERIOR POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF EXTERIOR POINTS = 2 )

0 INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 107 207

0 SUPERELEMENT 10

LIST OF ELEMENT ID-S ( TOTAL NO. OF ELEMENTS = 4 )

0 INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 7 8 9 10

0 SUPERELEMENT 0

LIST OF INTERIOR GRID POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF INTERIOR POINTS = 8 )

0 INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 104 105 106 107 204 205 206 207

0 SUPERELEMENT 0

LIST OF ELEMENT ID-S ( TOTAL NO. OF ELEMENTS = 3 )

0 INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 4 5 6

1 MSC Nastran JOB CREATED ON 20-MAR-11 AT 12:28:00 MARCH 20, 2011 MSC Nastran 7/15/10 PAGE 17

Main Index
 54 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Defining List Superelements

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM SUPERELEMENT 0

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 7321 (SEDRDR)

DATA RECOVERY FOR SUPERELEMENT 0 IS NOW INITIATED.

1 MSC Nastran JOB CREATED ON 20-MAR-11 AT 12:28:00 MARCH 20, 2011 MSC Nastran 7/15/10 PAGE 20

DEFAULT SUPERELEMENT 0 , 1

0 SESET STATIC SOLUTION SUBCASE 1

D I S P L A C E M E N T V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

104 G 5.068370E-03 1.580829E-02 0.0 0.0 0.0 9.892963E-03

105 G 6.398248E-03 2.707486E-02 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.247253E-02

106 G 7.548106E-03 4.074128E-02 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.469234E-02

107 G 8.518030E-03 5.644763E-02 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.655197E-02

204 G -4.830489E-03 1.579607E-02 0.0 0.0 0.0 9.892758E-03

205 G -6.080313E-03 2.706290E-02 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.247260E-02

206 G -7.150200E-03 4.072934E-02 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.469227E-02

207 G -8.040061E-03 5.643537E-02 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.655221E-02

1 MSC Nastran JOB CREATED ON 20-MAR-11 AT 12:28:00 MARCH 20, 2011 MSC Nastran 7/15/10 PAGE 22

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM SUPERELEMENT 10 , 1

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 7321 (SEDRDR)

DATA RECOVERY FOR SUPERELEMENT 10 IS NOW INITIATED.

1 MSC Nastran JOB CREATED ON 20-MAR-11 AT 12:28:00 MARCH 20, 2011 MSC Nastran 7/15/10 PAGE 25

DEFAULT SUPERELEMENT 10 , 1

0 SESET STATIC SOLUTION SUBCASE 1

D I S P L A C E M E N T V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

107 G 8.518030E-03 5.644763E-02 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.655197E-02

108 G 9.307833E-03 7.383300E-02 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.805235E-02

109 G 9.918178E-03 9.254120E-02 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.919017E-02

110 G 1.034660E-02 1.121981E-01 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.997773E-02

111 G 1.060229E-02 1.324967E-01 0.0 0.0 0.0 2.034813E-02

207 G -8.040061E-03 5.643537E-02 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.655221E-02

208 G -8.750085E-03 7.382199E-02 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.805149E-02

209 G -9.279610E-03 9.252547E-02 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.919340E-02

210 G -9.631094E-03 1.122000E-01 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.996567E-02

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 55
How to Define a Superelement

211 G -9.795371E-03 1.324328E-01 0.0 0.0 0.0 2.031519E-02

1 MSC Nastran JOB CREATED ON 20-MAR-11 AT 12:28:00 MARCH 20, 2011 MSC Nastran 7/15/10 PAGE 26

DEFAULT SUPERELEMENT 10 , 1

0 SESET STATIC SOLUTION SUBCASE 1

S T R E S S E S I N Q U A D R I L A T E R A L E L E M E N T S ( Q U A D 4 ) OPTION = BILIN

ELEMENT FIBER STRESSES IN ELEMENT COORD SYSTEM PRINCIPAL STRESSES (ZERO SHEAR)

ID GRID-ID DISTANCE NORMAL-X NORMAL-Y SHEAR-XY ANGLE MAJOR MINOR VON MISES

0 7 CEN/4 -5.000000E-02 4.000000E+02 3.673928E+00 2.999654E+02 28.2752 5.613475E+02 -1.576736E+02 6.545851E+02

5.000000E-02 4.000000E+02 3.673928E+00 2.999654E+02 28.2752 5.613475E+02 -1.576736E+02 6.545851E+02

107 -5.000000E-02 7.899135E+03 -2.632689E+00 2.999654E+02 2.1709 7.910506E+03 -1.400356E+01 7.917517E+03

5.000000E-02 7.899135E+03 -2.632689E+00 2.999654E+02 2.1709 7.910506E+03 -1.400356E+01 7.917517E+03

108 -5.000000E-02 7.899135E+03 9.980545E+00 2.999654E+02 2.1743 7.910524E+03 -1.408448E+00 7.911228E+03

5.000000E-02 7.899135E+03 9.980545E+00 2.999654E+02 2.1743 7.910524E+03 -1.408448E+00 7.911228E+03

208 -5.000000E-02 -7.099135E+03 9.980545E+00 2.999654E+02 87.5882 2.261497E+01 -7.111770E+03 7.123104E+03

5.000000E-02 -7.099135E+03 9.980545E+00 2.999654E+02 87.5882 2.261497E+01 -7.111770E+03 7.123104E+03

207 -5.000000E-02 -7.099135E+03 -2.632689E+00 2.999654E+02 87.5839 1.002412E+01 -7.111792E+03 7.116809E+03

5.000000E-02 -7.099135E+03 -2.632689E+00 2.999654E+02 87.5839 1.002412E+01 -7.111792E+03 7.116809E+03

0 8 CEN/4 -5.000000E-02 4.000000E+02 -1.365707E+01 2.999654E+02 27.7067 5.575302E+02 -1.711873E+02 6.599902E+02

5.000000E-02 4.000000E+02 -1.365707E+01 2.999654E+02 27.7067 5.575302E+02 -1.711873E+02

6.599902E+02

Listing 2-3 Branch Superelement Processing in .f06 File

A Boundary Element is an element that is connected to grid points, all of which are exterior to a superelement.
Boundary elements are automatically assigned to the downstream superelement, but may be placed in the
upstream superelement by using the SEELT Bulk Data entry. For example, consider Figure 2-8 which is the
cantilever plate with beam elements surrounding each plate element (i.e. a stiffened plate). In this case, since
GRID 107 and 207 are exterior to Superelement 10, and element 307 attaches to GRID 107 and 207, the
default behavior is that element 307 belongs to Superelement 0. This means that any mass, stiffness,
damping, or element load is calculated and attached to the matrices that make up Superelement 0. The user
may choose to assign element 307 to Superelement 10. In order to assign a boundary element to
Superelement 10, the user can use the SEELT command. For this example, there are two example problems
located in /doc/seug/chapter2/cantilever-beam/boundary-se0.dat and /doc/seug/chapter2/cantilever-
beam/boundary-se10.dat. The file boundary-se0.dat demonstrates the default behavior

Main Index
 56 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Defining List Superelements

Figure 2-8 Example of Boundary Elements Automatically Assigned to Residua

0 SUPERELEMENT 10

LIST OF ELEMENT ID-S ( TOTAL NO. OF ELEMENTS = 16 )

0 INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 7 8 9 10 107 108 109 110 207 208

11 209 210 308 309 310 311

0 SUPERELEMENT 0

LIST OF ELEMENT ID-S ( TOTAL NO. OF ELEMENTS = 13 )

0 INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 4 5 6 104 105 106 204 205 206 304

11 305 306 307

DEFAULT SUPERELEMENT 0 ,1

0 SUBCASE 1

S T R E S S E S I N B E A M E L E M E N T S ( C B E A M )

STAT DIST/

ELEMENT-ID GRID LENGTH SXC SXD SXE SXF S-MAX S-MIN

0 206

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 57
How to Define a Superelement

206 0.000 -5.124043E+03 -5.124043E+03 -5.834160E+03 -5.834160E+03 -5.124043E+03 -5.834160E+03

207 1.000 -5.252965E+03 -5.252965E+03 -5.705236E+03 -5.705236E+03 -5.252965E+03 -5.705236E+03

0 304

104 0.000 -1.436810E+02 -1.436810E+02 -4.061910E+01 -4.061910E+01 -4.061910E+01 -1.436810E+02

204 1.000 -4.087595E+01 -4.087595E+01 -1.434255E+02 -1.434255E+02 -4.087595E+01 -1.434255E+02

0 305

105 0.000 -1.421059E+02 -1.421059E+02 -3.954948E+01 -3.954948E+01 -3.954948E+01 -1.421059E+02

205 1.000 -3.946863E+01 -3.946863E+01 -1.421882E+02 -1.421882E+02 -3.946863E+01 -1.421882E+02

0 306

106 0.000 -1.422200E+02 -1.422200E+02 -3.948044E+01 -3.948044E+01 -3.948044E+01 -1.422200E+02

206 1.000 -3.956195E+01 -3.956195E+01 -1.421399E+02 -1.421399E+02 -3.956195E+01 -1.421399E+02

0 307

107 0.000 -1.432607E+02 -1.432607E+02 -4.087958E+01 -4.087958E+01 -4.087958E+01 -1.432607E+02

207 1.000 -4.062019E+01 -4.062019E+01 -1.435215E+02 -1.435215E+02 -4.062019E+01 -1.435215E+02

Listing 2-4 Boundary Element Automatically Assigned to Residual

The file boundary-se10.dat demonstrates how to reassign boundary element 307 to superelement 10 by
specifying the following SEELT entry:

SEELT Superelement Boundary Element Reassignment

Reassigns superelement boundary elements to an upstream superelement

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SEELT SEID EID1 EID2 EID3 EID4 EID5 EID6 EID7

Example:
SEELT 10 307

In Patran, this can be put in the direct text input for the bulk data section as follows:
SEELT,10,307
For this example, boundary element 304 remains in the residual, but boundary element 307 has been
reassigned to superelement 10.

Main Index
 58 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Defining List Superelements

Figure 2-9 Example of Boundary Element Manually Assigned to Upstream Superelement

SUPERELEMENT 10

LIST OF ELEMENT ID-S ( TOTAL NO. OF ELEMENTS = 17 )

0 INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 7 8 9 10 107 108 109 110 207 208

11 209 210 307 308 309 310 311

0 SUPERELEMENT 0

LIST OF ELEMENT ID-S ( TOTAL NO. OF ELEMENTS = 12 )

0 INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 4 5 6 104 105 106 204 205 206 304

11 305 306

DEFAULT SUPERELEMENT 0 , 1

0 SUBCASE 1

S T R E S S E S I N B E A M E L E M E N T S ( C B E A M )

STAT DIST/

ELEMENT-ID GRID LENGTH SXC SXD SXE SXF S-MAX S-MIN

0 206

206 0.000 -5.124043E+03 -5.124043E+03 -5.834160E+03 -5.834160E+03 -5.124043E+03 -5.834160E+03

207 1.000 -5.252965E+03 -5.252965E+03 -5.705236E+03 -5.705236E+03 -5.252965E+03 -5.705236E+03

0 304

104 0.000 -1.436810E+02 -1.436810E+02 -4.061910E+01 -4.061910E+01 -4.061910E+01 -1.436810E+02

204 1.000 -4.087595E+01 -4.087595E+01 -1.434255E+02 -1.434255E+02 -4.087595E+01 -1.434255E+02

0 305

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 59
How to Define a Superelement

105 0.000 -1.421059E+02 -1.421059E+02 -3.954948E+01 -3.954948E+01 -3.954948E+01 -1.421059E+02

205 1.000 -3.946863E+01 -3.946863E+01 -1.421882E+02 -1.421882E+02 -3.946863E+01 -1.421882E+02

DEFAULT SUPERELEMENT 10 , 1

0 SUBCASE 1

S T R E S S E S I N B E A M E L E M E N T S ( C B E A M )

STAT DIST/

ELEMENT-ID GRID LENGTH SXC SXD SXE SXF S-MAX S-MIN

0 210

210 0.000 -8.225272E+02 -8.225272E+02 -1.068186E+03 -1.068186E+03 -8.225272E+02 -1.068186E+03

211 1.000 -9.582994E+02 -9.582994E+02 -9.324120E+02 -9.324120E+02 -9.324120E+02 -9.582994E+02

0 307

107 0.000 -1.432607E+02 -1.432607E+02 -4.087958E+01 -4.087958E+01 -4.087958E+01 -1.432607E+02

207 1.000 -4.062019E+01 -4.062019E+01 -1.435215E+02 -1.435215E+02 -4.062019E+01 -1.435215E+02

0 308

108 0.000 -1.383584E+02 -1.383584E+02 -3.462496E+01 -3.462496E+01 -3.462496E+01 -1.383584E+02

208 1.000 -3.558226E+01 -3.558226E+01 -1.374025E+02 -1.374025E+02 -3.558226E+01 -1.374025E+02

Listing 2-5 Boundary Element Manually Reassigned to Upstream Superelement with SEELT

Point elements such as concentrated mass elements (CONMi) are assigned as interior to the superelement
that contains the grid point to which the element is attached. For the case where the GRID is exterior to one
superelement and interior to another superelement, the CONM2 will be assigned to the interior grid (i.e.
the downstream superelement). Consider, for example, the cantilever plate model with CONM2 attached
to GRIDs 107, 207 as shown in Figure 2-10Example of Point Element on a Superleement Boundary. In this
case, the default behavior is that the CONM2 are processed entirely within Superelement 0. This example
is located at: /doc/seug/chapter2/cantilever-beam/conm2-SE0.dat.

Figure 2-10 Example of Point Element on a Superleement Boundary

0 SUPERELEMENT 0

LIST OF ELEMENT ID-S ( TOTAL NO. OF ELEMENTS = 5 )

Main Index
 60 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Defining List Superelements

0 INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 4 5 6 501 502

Listing 2-6 CONM2 Automatically Assigned to Downstream Superlement

However, the SEELT command can assign the CONM2 to the upstream superelement if desired
(/doc/seug/chapter2/cantilever-beam/conm2-se10.dat).
SEELT,10,501,502
0 SUPERELEMENT 10

LIST OF ELEMENT ID-S ( TOTAL NO. OF ELEMENTS = 6 )

0 INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 7 8 9 10 501 502

Listing 2-7 Manually Reassigned to Upstream Superelement with SEELT

Example of Bulk Data Partitioning

The following example demonstrates the bulk data partitioning associated with list superelements. The
double-headed flyswatter is used for demonstration; the input file can be located at
/doc/seug/chapter2/flyswatter/seset.dat. This example differs from the cantilever plate in that not all of the
superelements are directly adjacent to the residual structure elements. The grid points shown in Figure 2-12
are the grid points that belong to the residual structure. All other grid points are interior to one of the
superelements. These residual structure points are all exterior points for one or more of the superelements.
The residual structure contains not only the reduced matrices for the superelements, but also any elements
that were not assigned to another superelement. The residual structure for this model contains only one
element, QUAD4 number 5, which was not assigned to another superelement during superelement
processing.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 61
How to Define a Superelement

Figure 2-11 Flyswatter Example for List Superelement Partitioning

Figure 2-12 Residual Structure Interior Grids

Main Index
 62 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Defining List Superelements

The SESET entries associated with Figure 2-12 are as follows:

$ SEID.10

SESET 10 33 34 37 38

SESET 10 45 THRU 50

SESET 10 57 THRU 62

SESET 10 69 THRU 74

SESET 10 81 THRU 86

SESET 10 93 THRU 98

$ SEID.20

SESET 20 39 40 43 44

SESET 20 51 THRU 56

SESET 20 63 THRU 68

SESET 20 75 THRU 80

SESET 20 87 THRU 92

SESET 20 99 THRU 104

$ SEID.30

SESET 30 29 30

$ SEID.40

SESET 40 31 32

$ SEID.50

SESET 50 9 THRU 12

SESET 50 21 22

$ SEID.60

SESET 60 15 THRU 18

SESET 60 25 26

$ SEID.70

SESET 70 1 THRU 8

Listing 2-8 Flyswatter SESET Definition

In this example, all points that are exterior to any superelements are interior to the residual structure.
Therefore, all superelements attach directly to the residual structure. This is known as a Single Level
Superelement Tree. If the exterior point of any superelement is an interior point of another superelement which
is not the residual, the model is what is known as a multilevel tree, which will be discussed later (Chapter 7:
Multi-Level Superelement Analysis). Conceptually, the single level superelement processing is shown in the
following figure:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 63
How to Define a Superelement

Figure 2-13 Single Level Superelement Analysis

More details on Single Level Superelement Analysis are contained in Chapter 3: Single Level Superelement
Analysis.
Following the process defined in the beginning of Superelement Partitioning (Sec. ), the following steps are
followed for this model:
 The processing order for the model is determined. Since this is a single-level tree, the processing
order is not critical. MSC Nastran defines the order by superelement id with the residual structure
being processed last. The .f06 output is as follows:
SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE

(SORTED BY SEID)

INDEX SUPERELEMENT PROCESS ORDER DOWNSTREAM SE SUPERELEMENT TYPE

0 0 8 0 RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

1 10 1 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

2 20 2 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

3 30 3 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

4 40 4 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

5 50 5 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

6 60 6 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

7 70 7 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE

(SORTED BY PROCESS ORDER)

INDEX SUPERELEMENT PROCESS ORDER DOWNSTREAM SE SUPERELEMENT TYPE

Main Index
 64 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Defining List Superelements

SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE

0 10 1 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

1 20 2 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

2 30 3 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

3 40 4 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

4 50 5 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

5 60 6 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

6 70 7 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

7 0 8 0 RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

Listing 2-9 Flyswatter Single-Level Processing Order

 The interior grids associated to each superelement are placed into the bulk data section for its
corresponding superelement. The exterior grids for each superelement are associated to both the
upstream superelement and the residual. For example, superelement 30 has interior grids 29 and 30
and exterior grids 19, 20, 35 and 36.

Figure 2-14 Grids Associated with Superelement 30

 The interior and exterior grids associated to superelement 3 are identified in the .f06 file as follows:
SUPERELEMENT 30

LIST OF INTERIOR GRID POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF INTERIOR POINTS = 2 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 29 30

SUPERELEMENT 30

LIST OF EXTERIOR POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF EXTERIOR POINTS = 4 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 19 20 35 36

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 65
How to Define a Superelement

SUPERELEMENT 0

LIST OF INTERIOR GRID POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF INTERIOR POINTS = 12 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 13 14 19 20 23 24 27 28 35 36

11 41 42

Listing 2-10 File Identification of Grids Associated with Superelement 3

 The elements associated to each superelement are placed into the bulk data section for its
corresponding superelement. For superelement 30, the details are as follows

Figure 2-15 Elements Associated with Superlement 30

SUPERELEMENT 30

LIST OF ELEMENT ID-S ( TOTAL NO. OF ELEMENTS = 2 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 14 15

Listing 2-11 File Identification of Elements Associated with Superelement 30

 Loads are processed. Since this model has inertia loading only, all of the loads are processed for each
superelement and reduced to the boundary. The OLOAD RESULTANT is printed for each
superelement:
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 7325 (SEP2DR)

PROCESSING OF SUPERELEMENT 3 IS NOW INITIATED.

^^^ USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 9045 (PHASE1DR)

^^^ PHASE 1 - SUPERELEMENT GENERATION, ASSEMBLY AND REDUCTION.

1 MSC Nastran JOB CREATED ON 25-MAR-11 AT 14:37:57 MARCH 25, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10 PAGE 29

Main Index
 66 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Defining PART Superelements

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM SUPERELEMENT 3

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 7310 (VECPRN)

ORIGIN OF SUPERELEMENT BASIC COORDINATE SYSTEM WILL BE USED AS REFERENCE LOCATION.

RESULTANTS ABOUT ORIGIN OF SUPERELEMENT BASIC COORDINATE SYSTEM IN SUPERELEMENT BASIC SYSTEM COORDINATES.

0 OLOAD RESULTANT

SUBCASE/ LOAD

DAREA ID TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

0 1 FX 0.000000E+00 ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00

FY ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- 0.000000E+00

FZ ---- ---- 3.622400E-01 1.883648E+00 1.159168E+00 ----

MX ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- ----

MY ---- ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00 ----

MZ ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00

TOTALS 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 3.622400E-01 1.883648E+00 1.159168E+00 0.000000E+00

Listing 2-12 Loads Processing for Superelement 3

 Finally, all of the common data is copied to the respective superelement sections. For this model,
the common data includes the PARAM entries, but, in general, this could include properties
(PSHELL, PBEAM, etc.) and material entries (MAT1, MAT2, etc.). There is no special printout
for each superelement in the .f06 file associated with the common data.
The items associated with each superelement (interior points, exterior points, and elements) printed in the
.f06 file can be controlled by the SEMAP, SEMAPOPT, and SEMAPPRT parameter. These are defined in
the Quick Reference Guide.

Defining PART Superelements

As its name implies, the list superelements in the previous section are defined by lists (sets). Another method
of generating superelements is by defining PARTs. PARTs are used to subdivide a model into superelements
by defining an entire stand-alone bulk data of each superelement. This provides advantages to model
integrators when assembling component models that are generated by different organizations, different
engineers, or that were generated independently from other components in the assembly.

Defining Parts
PARTs are defined as separate components using separate areas of the Bulk Data Section in MSC Nastran.
Therefore, each PART can be thought of as a separate component model. MSC Nastran automatically locates
any coincident grid points in common between the constituent PARTs and connects the component models
to create the assembly model. Of course, for more complicated situations, MSC Nastran provides the user
with complete control of the connection points.
The Bulk Data Section can be divided into separate sections for each PART. This division is accomplished by
using the BEGIN SUPER entry. The format of this entry is as follows:
BEGIN [BULK] SUPER = i

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 67
How to Define a Superelement

Where i is the superelement id defined by the user. The commonly used form of this command is:
BEGIN SUPER = i
Which is the form used in this book.
The PART superelement concept was introduced in Version 69. Prior to Version 69, the Bulk Data Section
of the input file was always a single section of data that contained the complete model definition. That is to
say, the entire model was defined in the area between BEGIN BULK and ENDDATA. Each grid point had
to be unique, and each element id had to be unique and parameters in the Bulk Data Section applied to every
superelement (unless overwritten by a case control parameter). With the advent of PART superelements, it
became possible to partition the Bulk Data Section of the input into separate component models, using the
BEGIN SUPER command. Thus, each of these component models is a self-contained model defining a
PART of the total model. Within each of these sections, grid point and element ids must be unique as before;
however, different PARTs can reuse grid and element ids, because the sections are separate in the input file.

The Bulk Data Section Using PARTs

When PARTs are used, the bulk data is divided into different sections. The section of the bulk data contained
between the BEGIN BULK (or BEGIN SUPER [= 0]) and either the first BEGIN SUPER = i, or the
ENDDATA is known as the Main Bulk Data Section. In this section the user may define superelements as
described in Defining List Superelements in Section Defining List Superelements. Any superelements
defined in this section are known as main bulk data superelements. Refer to the note on superelement
processing based on The purpose of this chapter is to describe the input required to define each type of
superelement as well as discuss some of the advantages and disadvantages of each method. in Chapter 1. The
superelement partitioning associated with PARTs in MSC Nastran contains logic to determine coincident
grid points between different PARTs. After determining which grid points are coincident, MSC Nastran will
(by default) automatically connect any coincident grid points. Of course, the user has the option to override
the automatic connection which will be described in Connecting PARTs to Other PARTs, in Connecting PARTs
to Other PARTs.

Format of the Input File When PARTs are Used

When PARTs are used the Executive and Case Control Sections are unchanged, only the Bulk Data Section
is different. A sample input file looks like the following:
SOL 101

CEND

TITLE = Sample Input File Demonstrating PARTs definition

BEGIN BULK

$ MAIN BULK DATA SECTION

$ bulk data definition for the Residual Structure (SEID=0)

BEGIN SUPER = 1

Main Index
 68 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Defining PART Superelements

$ bulk data for PART Superelement 1 (SEID=1)

BEGIN SUPER = 25

$ bulk data for PART Superelement 25 (SEID=25)

ENDDATA

Listing 2-13 Example of PART Superelement Delimiters with BEGIN SUPER

In this example, there is a Main Bulk Data Section (which may or may not define list superelements) and two
PART superelements (SEID = 1 and SEID = 25). Each section is self-contained. That is, no entry in PART
1 can reference an entry in any other section of the input. This goes for all PARTs; they must be self-
contained. There are several Main Bulk Data Section bulk data entries that can be used to move, copy, or
manually connect PARTs, but beyond these entries, no entry in any section of the input can reference an entry
in any other section of the bulk data.

Note: A common point of confusion when using PART superelements is the use of PARAM entries.
Since each PART is processed independently of the other PARTs, the PARAMs must be
defined within each PART bulk data section. Alternatively, most PARAMs can be defined in
the Case Control Section. For example, in order to obtain a results output2 file for each PART
superelement, PARAM,POST,-1 must be specified in each PART bulk data section, or in the
case control. For PARAMs that will apply to the entire model, it is common to put the
PARAM entries above the first SUBCASE. For more details on which parameters can be
defined in the Case Control, or Bulk Data, refer to the Parameter Applicability Tables (Ch. 6) in
the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide.

Static Example Input Using Freedom

We will use the “freedom” airplane example to demonstrate how to set up a model using PARTs. In this
example, we will assume that there are different analysts (or organizations) responsible for various
components of the aircraft. In this case, we have a full model and will not use symmetry or image
superelements, which will be introduced in later chapters.
Also, it is assumed that each analyst (or organization) has provided a complete ‘run ready’ bulk data section
that has all grids, elements, properties, materials, loads, constraints, etc. defined. Note that loads and
constraints must have consistent IDs across parts in order to process properly; a more detailed description of
loads and constraints is contained in Chapter 4: Loads, Constraints, Case Control, and Parameters in Static Analysis.
The files associate with this example can be found in /doc/seug/chapter2/freedom/.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 69
How to Define a Superelement

Demonstration of Patran definition

PART superelements can be easily defined in Patran. Note that Patran does have the limitation that all grids
and elements must be unique (which is not the case for Nastran PART superelements). For this example, we
will start with /doc/seug/chapter2/feedom-baseline.dat and read it into Patran.

Figure 2-16 Freedom Example Baseline (w/o Superelements)

Next, the model is organized into logical groups. For readers trying to follow this example, a session file is
available to generate the groups; /doc/seug/chapter2/group-create-color-continuous.ses. The session file also
be colors and displays the model in group mode to more easily identify the superelements.

Figure 2-17 Freedom Model After Being Organized Into Groups

Main Index
 70 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Defining PART Superelements

Creation of superelements is easily accomplished in Patran. From the meshing tab, the user selects the
superelement icon and defines each superelement by selecting the appropriate group. An example is shown
here:

Figure 2-18 Patran Creation of Superelements by Groups

For this example, the wing box is designated as the residual structure. Therefore, in Patran a superelement is
not created for the wing box. Also note that the SEID can be encoded into the superelement name by
including a “.##” – for example “wings.40” will make sure that the SEID associated with the wings group will
be 40.
After the superelements are defined, the superelements are selected when generating the MSC Nastran
analysis file.
The user can chose to write part superelements or list superelements (SESET) by selecting the appropriate
option on the form.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 71
How to Define a Superelement

Figure 2-19 Including the Superelements in an Analysis

The resulting input files for both PART superelement and list superelement (SESET) are found in the
installation: /doc/seug/chapter2/freedom/partse-continuous.bdf and seset.bdf.
In a variation of the model, a completely independent bulk data file was created for each component. In this
case the grid ids are discontinuous between the parts. The constituent models are contained in these files in
/doc/seug/chapter2/freedom.

Main Index
 72 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Defining PART Superelements

Filename SEID GRID/Element/MPC Ids

freedom-part-aft-fuselage.bdf 30 30000-39999
freedom-part-cabin.bdf 50 50000-59999
freedom-part-engines.bdf 20 20000-29999
freedom-part-nose.bdf 60 60000-69999
freedom-part-tail.bdf 10 10000-19999
freedom-part-wingbox.bdf Residual 1-9999
freedom-part-wing.bdf 40 40000-49999

The ‘assembly’ input file, partse-discontinous.bdf, is very simple and uses INCLUDEs to read the constituent
models:
SOL 101

CEND

TITLE = Freedom plane example

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = discontinuous nodes at interfaces

ECHO = NONE

param,post,-1

param,prtmaxim,yes

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Default

SPC = 1

LOAD = 1

DISPLACEMENT(plot,SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

STRESS(plot,SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,BILIN)=ALL

BEGIN BULK

include 'part-wingbox.bdf'

BEGIN SUPER = 10

include 'part-tail.bdf'

BEGIN SUPER = 20

include 'part-engines.bdf'

BEGIN SUPER = 30

include 'part-aft-fuselage.bdf'

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 73
How to Define a Superelement

BEGIN SUPER = 40

include 'part-wings.bdf'

BEGIN SUPER = 50

include 'part-cabin.bdf'

BEGIN SUPER = 60

include 'part-nose.bdf'

enddata

Connecting PARTs to Other PARTs

PART Superelements offer a complete range of flexibility to the user when it comes to defining connections
and relocating a PART. Each of these features will be described in the following subsections.

Automatic PART Connections

As the section title suggests, MSC Nastran has an automatic connection feature to connect PARTs. By
default, the program automatically connects grids from a PART to any coincident grids in any other PARTs
or grids defined in the Main Bulk Data Section. There is no need to be concerned with coordinate systems
on these coincident points; MSC Nastran automatically connects coincident points, accounting for
differences in the output coordinate systems. These points will be identified as boundary points in the output
from MSC Nastran. By default, no special effort is required from you to make the connection. If for one
connection all the boundary points belong to PARTs (none of the coincident points are in the residual
structure), then MSC Nastran will create a new internal grid that is coincident with the boundary grids and
assign the internal grid in the residual structure (or to the lowest connected superelement in a multi-level
tree). These internal points cannot be constrained. If you wish to apply a constraint on this point, you can
define a coincident grid point in the residual structure (or in the lowest connected superelement for a multi-
level tree) and constrain that point, or you can apply constraints in the PARTs (subject to the limitations
described in Chapter 4).
At this point, the user may ask, “do the grids have to be exactly coincident, or is there a tolerance?” The
answer is yes, MSC Nastran has provisions to define a “close enough” tolerance for grids from different
PARTs to be considered coincident. This is defined on the SECONCT entry with the “TOL” field or on
the SEBULK entry with the “TOL” field.

SECONCT SEIDA SEIDB TOL LOC

GIDA1 GIDB1 GIDA2 GIDB2 GIDA3 GIDB3 -etc.-

SEBULK SEID TYPE RSEID METHOD TOL LOC UNITNO

Main Index
 74 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Defining PART Superelements

TOL Location tolerance to be used when searching for boundary grid points. (Real; Default =
10E-5). The search is based on a sphere with a radius of TOL.

Even though the user has an option to change the “TOL” associated with a search, it is recommended that
the user take measures to ensure that the grids are exactly coincident to ensure that the model will pass strain
energy checks performed by the GROUNDCHECK case control command. The consequence of
connecting non-coincident boundary grids is similar to that of having direct MPC equations that connect
non-coincident grids but do not account for the offset in the equations.
For example, in the freedom sample partse-discontinuous.bdf , the tail to aft fuselage was automatically
connected at 20 grids. A closer examination of the interface shows that the grid ids were, in fact, not the
same, but the coordinates of the grids were coincident, so the models were automatically connected. The
figure below shows the interface grids and the listing is from the .f06 file

Figure 2-20 Exploded View of Automatic Connection Featuring Discontinuous GRID IDs (model separated for
clarity)

0 BOUNDARY SEQUENCE ASSIGNMENT TABLE

0 BOUNDARY

SEQUENCE ID --------------------------------- ASSIGNED TO POINT ID (SUPERELEMENT) -

1B 10415 ( 10) 30001 ( 30)

2B 10416 ( 10) 30002 ( 30)

3B 10417 ( 10) 30003 ( 30)

4B 10418 ( 10) 30004 ( 30)

5B 10419 ( 10) 30005 ( 30)

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 75
How to Define a Superelement

6B 10420 ( 10) 30006 ( 30)

7B 10421 ( 10) 30007 ( 30)

8B 10422 ( 10) 30008 ( 30)

9B 10423 ( 10) 30009 ( 30)

10B 10424 ( 10) 30010 ( 30)

11B 10425 ( 10) 30011 ( 30)

12B 10426 ( 10) 30012 ( 30)

13B 10427 ( 10) 30013 ( 30)

14B 10428 ( 10) 30014 ( 30)

15B 10429 ( 10) 30015 ( 30)

16B 10430 ( 10) 30016 ( 30)

17B 10431 ( 10) 30017 ( 30)

18B 10432 ( 10) 30018 ( 30)

19B 10433 ( 10) 30019 ( 30)

20B 10434 ( 10) 30020 ( 30)

Listing 2-14 Freedom Boundary Connections for Discontinuous Grid IDs

User Controlled PART Connections

The automatic connection feature in MSC Nastran is applicable to many models, but there are also many
situations where the automatic connection feature is inadequate or inappropriate. For example, suppose
there are two plates that are riveted at 25mm intervals, but each have a mesh density of 5mm. It would be
inappropriate to connect the plates at every 5mm, but rather every fifth GRID as depicted in Figure 2-14. As
another example, there may be a residual has coincident nodes with a CBUSH to simulate a bolted
connection as shown in Figure 2-15. When a coincident search finds two grids, which one should it choose?
MSC Nastran cannot determine this a priori, therefore, a FATAL message will be issued and the user will
have to specify the connection precisely. There are several methods available to define the connections, and
each has its own appeal depending on the situation. These will be described in the subsequent subsections.

Main Index
 76 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Defining PART Superelements

Figure 2-21 Example of Not Connecting Every Coincident GRID

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 77
How to Define a Superelement

Figure 2-22 Example of Multiple Coincident Nodes

SEBNDRY, SEBULK, SECONCT, SEEXCLD

In the examples in Figure 2-14 and Figure 2-15 it is clear that an automatic scheme cannot cover all cases of
superelement connection. Fortunately, the design of MSC Nastran allows the user to specify which grids will
be used in the boundary search. This can be done by overriding the default search by using several methods:
 SEBNDRY: The SEBNDRY defines a list of grid points that can be connected between a PART
and one or more PARTs (used to limit the automatic search for coincident points).
 SEBULK: Defines boundary search options (sets tolerance for coincident grid point checks)
 SECONCT: Explicitly defines the GRIDs and SPOINTs to be connected between PARTs
(override automatic search logic) and allows you to set the tolerance for the coincident point test
 SEEXCLD: Provides a list of points in a PART that cannot be connected to one or more other
PARTs (used to limit automatic search logic)
SEBNDRY Superelement Boundary-Point Definition

Defines a list of grid points in a partitioned superelement for the automatic boundary search between a
specified superelement, or between all other superelements in the model.

Main Index
 78 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Defining PART Superelements

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SEBNDRY SEIDA SEIDB GIDA1 GIDA2 GIDA3 GIDA4 GIDA5 GIDA6
GIDA7 GIDA8 -etc.-

This entry is used to limit the automatic search logic to selected grid points for certain PARTs. Any grid points
listed on this entry are the only grid points in SEIDA to which the automatic logic can connect grid points
in SEIDB.
Description of the fields on this entry:

Field Contents
SEIDA Partitioned superelement identification number. (Integer > 0)
SEIDB Superelement identification. See Remark 2. (Integer > 0 or Character “ALL”; Default =
“ALL”)
GIDAi Identification number of a boundary grid point in superelement SEIDA. (Integer > 0 or
“THRU”; For “THRU” option, G1 < G2.)

Example:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SEBNDRY 400 4 10 20 30 40

In the example, the user instructs MSC Nastran to search for grid points in superelement 4 that are coincident
to points in PART 400, only grid points 10, 20, 30, and 40 in PART 400 can be used. No other grid points
in superelement 400 can be connected to points in superelement 4, even if they are coincident.
Note that if a restricted list of grid points needs to be listed for PART 4, then a similar entry should be
generated by the user.

SEBULK Partitional Superelement Connection

Defines superelement boundary search options and a repeated, mirrored, or collector superelement.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SEBULK SEID TYPE RSEID METHOD TOL LOC UNITNO

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 79
How to Define a Superelement

This entry has a number of uses. For purposes of the current section, we will limit the discussion to the
control of the automatic search logic for coincident grid points. In this context, a description of the fields on
this entry follows:

Field Contents
SEID superelement number for which this SEBULK entry is being used. There may be several
SEBULK entries required to define each PART in the model.
TYPE there are several TYPEs allowed. For purposes of the current discussion, only PRIMARY
will be considered (the other TYPEs involve more advanced features)-no default value.
RSEID reference superelement id-also an advanced feature to be discussed later.
METHOD boundary GRID point search method-can be AUTO (default) or MANUAL. If this is
MANUAL, then SECONCT entries must be used for this PART to make the
connections to the rest of the model.
TOL location tolerance for coincident grid point test (default = 1.E-5).
LOC coincident grid point test option for MANUAL connection. Can be YES (default = grid
points must be within TOL, or a FATAL will be issued) or NO (do not test for
coincidence-may be dangerous).

Example:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SEBULK 14 PRIMA 1.E-3 AUTO
RY

The example instructs MSC Nastran to use the automatic coincident grid point search logic to find the
attachment points for superelement 14, but to use a tolerance of 1.0E-3 units.

SECONCT Partitioned Superelement Boundary-Point Connection

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SECONCT SEIDA SEIDB TOL LOC
GIDA1 GIDB1 GIDA2 GIDB2 GIDA3 GIDB3 -etc.-

Alternate Format
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Main Index
 80 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Defining PART Superelements

SECONCT SEIDA SEIDB TOL LOC

GIDA1 THRU GIDA2 GIDB1 THRU GIDB2

This entry manually specifies points (GRID or SPOINT) to be connected between two superelements. If this
entry is used and METHOD=AUTO on the SEBULK entry, these points are added to the list of points found
by the automatic logic. If METHOD=MANUAL on the SEBULK, then only these points are connected
between these two superelements.
Description of the fields on this entry:
Field Contents
SEIDA Identification number of superelement for connection to SEIDB. (Integer > 0)
SEIDB Identification number of superelement for connection to SEIDA. (Integer > 0)
TOL Location tolerance to be used when searching for or checking boundary grid points.
(Real; Default = 10E-5)
LOC Coincident location check option for manual connection. (Character; “YES” or “NO”;
Default = “YES”)
GIDAi Identification number of a grid or scalar point in superelement SEIDA, which will be
connected to GIDBi
GIDBi Identification number of a grid or scalar point in superelement SEIDB, which will be
connected to GIDAi

Example:
SECONCT 10 20 1.0E-4 YES
1001 4001 2222 4444

This entry instructs MSC Nastran that when connecting PART 10 to superelement 20, the tolerance for the
coincident grid point test will be 1.0E-4 units and the coincident point test will be performed. This entry
also instructs the program to connect point 1001 in PART 10 to point 4001 in superelement 20, point 1002
in PART 10 to point 4002 in superelement 20, and point 2222 in PART 10 to point 4444 in superelement
20 (in this context point can apply to sets of either GRID entries or SPOINTs).
SEEXCLD. The format of the SEEXCLD entry follows:

SEEXCLD Partitioned Superelement Exclusion

Defines grids that will be excluded during the attachment of a partitioned superelement.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 81
How to Define a Superelement

SEEXCLD SEIDA SEIDB GIDA1 GIDA2 GIDA3 GIDA4 GIDA5 GIDA6

GIDA7 GIDA8 -etc.-

This entry is used to limit the automatic search logic. While the SEBNDRY limits the search to selected grid
points, the SEEXCLD excludes grid points from the search. Any grid points listed on this entry are grid
points in SEIDA that the automatic logic cannot connect to grid points in SEIDB.
Description of the fields on this entry:
Field Contents
SEIDA Partitioned superelement identification number. (Integer > 0)
SEIDB Superelement identification. (Integer > 0 or Character = “ALL”; Default = “ALL”)
GIDAi Identification number of a grid in superelement SEIDA to be excluded from connection
to superelement SEIDB. (Integer > 0 or “THRU”; for “THRU” option GIDA1 <
GIDA2.)

Example:
SEEXCLD 110 10 45 678 396

The above entry instructs the program to exclude grid points 45, 678, and 396 when performing the
automatic search to connect PART 110 to superelement 10.

Manually Defining Exterior Points for a PART

When defining a PART, additional exterior points can be specified by the use of ASET, BSET, CSET,
BNDFIX, BNDFREE, and/or ASET1, BSET1, CSET1, BNDFIX1, or BNDFREE1 entries to define the
exterior points. Any point in a PART that is listed on either an ASET or ASET1 entry is automatically made
exterior to that PART (whether there is a coincident point in another superelement or not). All six DOFs of
that point are made exterior. The fields on these entries that are used to select DOFs are ignored when these
entries are used in PARTs. If there is no coincident point in any other PART, internal points are created in
the residual structure that are coincident with the selected points, and the matrices for the PART are
connected to these points.
The formats for these entries are very similar, and are grouped here for convenience

Main Index
 82 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Defining PART Superelements

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ASET ID1 C1 ID2 C2 ID3 C3 ID4 C4

BSET

CSET

BNDFIX

BNDFIX1

ASET1 C ID1 ID2 ID3 ID4 ID5 ID6 ID7

BSET1

CSET1

BNDFIX1

BNDFREE1
ID8 ID9 ID10 etc.-

The ASETi, BSETi, and BNDFIXi entries indicated dof that are fixed during component modes synthesis,
while CSETi, and BNDFREEi indicate dof that are free during component modes synthesis. These concepts
are described in detail in Chapter 9: Introduction to Dynamic Analysis Using Superelements. Additional description can
be found in Table 2-4.

Moving and/or Rotating a PART

If the model of a PART is not in the desired location or orientation, it can be repositioned by translating
and/or rotating and/or mirroring the PART into a new orientation before the program performs the
connection search with other components of the model. Repositioning a PART to a new orientation is
accomplished using the SELOC entry in the Main Bulk Data Section. This is performed by simply defining 3
points on each PART that will provide the proper orientation. Mirroring a PART can be accomplished by
defining a mirror plane with SEMPLN and then using SEBULK to define the PART to be mirrored. If a
PART needs to be mirrored and repositioned, the mirror operation is performed first. Note that these points
do not necessarily have to be a boundary point for connection of the PARTs. Actually, a POINT bulk data
entry can be used to define a geometric point without adding degrees of freedom to the system.
The SELOC entry is defined as follows:

SELOC Partitioned Superelement Location

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 83
How to Define a Superelement

Defines a partitioned superelement relocation by listing three noncolinear points in the superelement and
three corresponding points not belonging to the superelement.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SELOC SEID PA1 PA2 PA3 PB1 PB2 PB3

This entry instructs MSC Nastran to move and/or rotate a PART (SEID) using three non-colinear GRID
entries in the PART (PA1, PA2, PA3) and three GRID entries or POINTs defined in the Main Bulk Data
Section (PB1, PB2, PB3).
Field Contents
SEID Partitioned identification number of the partitioned superelement. (Integer > 0)
PAi Identification numbers of three noncolinear grids (GRID entry) or points (POINT
entry) which are in the partitioned superelement. (Integer > 0)
PBi Identification numbers of three grids (GRID entry) or points (POINT entry) defined
in the main Bulk Data Section to which PAi will be aligned. (Integer > 0)

If the user request MSC Nastran plots of the model using the PLOT case control commands, any PART that
has been translated and/or rotated will appear in its final location. Currently Patran only plots PARTs in their
original location and orientation. Therefore, it is recommended that you use the MSC Nastran plotter to
view your model after using any SELOC entries. Also, deformed plots are available with PARTs in their final
locations. There is an option (SENOMOVE) on the PLOT command that can be used to display PARTs in
their original location. The jet example below includes the PLOT commands to obtain final model
orientations and deformations.

PART Basic Coordinate System vs. Main Bulk Data Basic Coordinate System
When the SELOC entry is encountered, the program repositions the PART so that grid points PA1-PA3 in
the PART are coincident with PB1-PB3 in the main bulk data. This repositioning is performed before the
coincident grid point search logic is performed, thus connections for the PART are based on the relocated
position. When a PART is relocated like this, the basic coordinate system for the PART is translated and
rotated to move the PART into the desired position. Output for the PART is relative to the part basic
coordinate system in relocated orientation.
When a model has PARTs defined, each PART is in its own separate section of the bulk data and are
processed as individual models up to the point when they are assembled. As a default, MSC Nastran assumes
that the basic coordinate system for all PARTs is identical to that defined in the Main Bulk Data Section.
Therefore, we have a term known as the main bulk data basic coordinate system. As long as the model is
defined using the main bulk data basic coordinate system, no additional transformations are required.
However, if a PART is reoriented and rotated via the SELOC entry, there are additional transformations
required to align everything properly which are accounted for automatically by MSC Nastran (see the
subsection on loads below for special handling of loads on rotated parts.)

Main Index
 84 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Defining PART Superelements

Example using Jet

Consider the following simplified example of a Jet aircraft will demonstrate translation, rotation, and
mirroring of a few simple PARTs.

Figure 2-23 Simplified Example of a Jet Plane.

In this scenario, the original PARTs were generated by different organizations using different coordinate
systems. The Parts in their initial orientation are shown in Figure 2-17.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 85
How to Define a Superelement

Figure 2-24 Jet PARTs in Their Original Orientation.

The PARTs for this example and their required geometric manipulation are identified as follows:

SEID Description Geometric Manipulation

1 Fuselage None
2 Right Inboard Wing Reposition with SELOC
3 Right Outboard Wing Reposition with SELOC

Main Index
 86 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Defining PART Superelements

SEID Description Geometric Manipulation

4 Vertical Tail Reposition with SELOC
5 Left Horizontal Stabilizer Reposition with SELOC
12 Left Inboard Wing Mirror with SEBULK / SEMPLN then
reposition with SELOC
13 Left Outboard Wing Mirror with SEBULK / SEMPLN then
reposition with SELOC
15 Right Horizontal Stabilizer Mirror with SEBULK / SEMPLN then
reposition with SELOC

A partial listing of the input file is included here for reference. The full bulk data for this file can be found
in in /doc/seug/chapter2/jet101.dat.
OUTPUT(PLOT)

CSCALE 1.3

PLOTTER NAST

SET 1= ALL

$isometric view

VIEW 210., 25. , 180.

AXES y , z, x

$ $

seplot 1,2,3,4,5

ptitle = plot all primary se in their original positions

find scale origin 1 set 1

plot senomove set 1

seupplot 0

ptitle = plot undeformed full model

find scale origin 1 set 1

plot set 1

seupplot 0

ptitle = plot deformed full model

find scale origin 1 set 1

plot static deformation set 1 origin 1

Listing 2-15 Partial Input file for Jet101.dat – Demonstrating Nastran PLOT Commands.
$

$ position se 2 (inboard right wing)

GRID,2001,,1.,1.625,-1.

GRID,2002,,1.,0.,-1.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 87
How to Define a Superelement

GRID,2003,,1.,-.25,-2.

SELOC,2,19,24,23,2001,2002,2003

$ position se 3 (outboard right wing)

GRID,2011,,1.,1.75,-5.

GRID,2012,,1.,-1.00,-5.

GRID,2013,,1.,-1.08333,-6.0

SELOC,3,43,49,35,2011,2012,2013

$ Define mirror plane with 3 grids, and mirror SE 2, 3, 5

GRID,9998,,-5.96-8,1.625, 0.

GRID,9997,,0.,0.,0.

GRID,9996,,2.,0.,2.87-7

SEMPLN,12,PLANE,9998,9997,9996

SEMPLN,13,PLANE,9998,9997,9996

SEMPLN,15,PLANE,9998,9997,9996

SEBULK,12,MIRROR,2,AUTO

SEBULK,13,MIRROR,3,AUTO

SEBULK,15,MIRROR,5,AUTO

$ position image se 12 (inboard left wing) after mirroring

GRID,3001,,1.,1.625,1.

GRID,3002,,1.,0.,1.

GRID,3003,,1.,-.25,2.

SELOC,12,19,24,23,3001,3002,3003

$ position image se 13 (outboard left wing) after mirroring

GRID,3011,,1.,1.75,5.

GRID,3012,,1.,-1.00,5.

GRID,3013,,1.,-1.08333,6.0

SELOC,13,43,49,35,3011,3012,3013

Listing 2-16 Partial Input file for Jet101.dat – Demonstrating Reposition and Mirror

Body Loads on Rotated Parts

If the repositioning involves rotating the PART, then (as mentioned before) the basic coordinate system of
that PART will be rotated. Thus, all loadings, MPCs, and SPCs go through the same rotation as the PART-
possibly causing unexpected results if you have not planned for this rotation. There are some loading entries

Main Index
 88 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Defining and Attaching External Superelements

that account for this rotation automatically. Currently, only the GRAV and RFORCE entries support this
capability, accomplished by the field labeled MB on these entries. The formats for these two entries are:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
GRAV SID A N1 N2 N3 MB
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RFORCE SID GID CID A R1 R2 R3 METHOD
RACC MB IDRF

The MB field on these two entries tells the program whether the loading is defined using a coordinate system
defined in the PART (and therefore rotated with the PART), which is the default, or whether the coordinate
system is defined in the Main Bulk Data Section (MB=-1). If the load is defined using a coordinate system
from the Main Bulk Data Section, the loading does not rotate with the PART; rather, the loading retains the
original orientation based on the selected coordinate system in the Main Bulk Data Section.
The user is cautioned to check the OLOAD resultants carefully for any PARTs that are rotated during a
repositioning or mirroring operation.

Defining and Attaching External Superelements

The use of external superelements has been around for a very long time in many forms. Prior to MSC
Nastran Version 69.1 many companies would use custom DMAP solutions to generate and assemble reduced
structural matrices, load transformation matrices, and output transformation matrices. The advantages of
external superelements included reduced solution times for large systems (i.e. Space Shuttle Orbiter, rockets,
commercial and military jets, automotive assemblies, etc.), quicker turn around for design iterations and load
cycles, keeping data private / security (material properties, internal details, airfoil geometry, etc.), and
partitioned output (output provided back to only the relevant organization), had been recognized by the user
community and many processes were built around the custom DMAPS. The classic list superelements
(SESET) had the capability for external superelements via the CSUPER entry. However, this had many
limitations and was not as portable across organizations and versions as the modern external superelement
technology which is based on PART superelement techniques. The discussions in this section, and most of
this guide, will be focused on the modern external superelement technology introduced in MSC Nastran
Version 69.1.
Most of the superelement enhancements that have been incorporated into the standard solution sequences
since Version 69 have been centered around external superelements. For a comprehensive list of these
enhancements, please refer to List of Superelement Enhancements Released Since Version 69 (Ch. 1).

Discussion of 2-step vs. 3-step methods

In MSC Nastran Version 69.1, the external superelements were first introduced via the means of PARAM
EXTOUT and similar entries. This offered the users access to easy external superelement generation,
assembly, and data recovery in a 3-step method. Subsequently, in MSC Nastran Version 2004, the process
was simplified to a 2-step method using the Case Control command EXTSEOUT. Subsequently in MSC
Nastran Version 2018, the 3-step method was enhanced with the addition of the EXTDROUT and

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 89
How to Define a Superelement

EXTDRIN Case Control commands. This section will describe then general procedures required for either
method. Although these methods are very similar, each method has its advantages and users should
understand the differences before selecting the method that is appropriate to their needs.

Figure 2-25 Schematic of 2-Step External Superelement Process

Another way to visualize the steps involved in the 2-Step External Superelement Process is to review how the
steps are applied to the C-Clamp example. Note that in this case, the residual consists of only 2 grid points
and no elements. This is perfectly valid, and in practice it is common to have a residual structure without
any elements (but usually there are several external superelements that are attached to the residual). This
example is provided in the following files: /doc/seug/chapter2/clamp-ext2step-1st.dat and clamp-ext2step-
2nd.dat

Main Index
 90 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Defining and Attaching External Superelements

Figure 2-26 Illustrative Example of the 2-Step Method

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 91
How to Define a Superelement

Figure 2-27 Schematic of 3-Step External Superelement Process

A similar mapping of the 3-Step External Superelement Process onto the C-Clamp example is shown below.
This example is provided in the following files: /doc/seug/chapter2/clamp-ext3step-1st.dat, clamp-ext3step-
2nd.dat, and clamp-ext3step-3rd.dat

Main Index
 92 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Defining and Attaching External Superelements

Figure 2-28 Illustrative Example of the 3-Step External Superelement Process

2-Step Method
The 2-Step method of external superelements in MSC Nastran was introduced in Version 2004. This
method uses case control EXTSEOUT to generate the external matrices, which can include stiffness, mass,
damping, material damping (k4 damping), loads, fluid structure coupling matrices, and output
transformation matrices (OTMs) for use in subsequent data recovery.
In addition to the external matrices, the EXTSEOUT method has options to generate bulk data entries
necessary for the bookkeeping and assembly during the assembly run. These automatically generated entries
are placed in the “.asm” file described in the EXTSEOUT Case Control command.
The EXTSEOUT case control command provides a convenient method to define the features that the user
wants to activate during the superelement reduction process for the 2-Step method.
Depending on the output option or user request with EXTBULK, additional information will be put in the
standard punch (.pch) file. For a discussion of output options, please refer to Output Formats and Considerations.

Note: EXTBULK Processing

The punch file generated when EXTBULK is requested provides a self-documenting file which
defines the GRIDs, boundary dof (ASET), modal dof (QSET), PLOTELs, and coordinate
systems (CORD2x) for the reduced matrices. The data generated in the .pch file is required
for the assembly run processing of the DMIGPCH and MATOP4 options; however, the data
in the .pch file is ignored in the assembly run because all of the data is embedded in the
matrices that are stored on the database or output2 files.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 93
How to Define a Superelement

Output Transformation Matrix (OTM) Limitations

For the 2-Step process, OTMs are created for displacements, constraint forces (SPC and MPC forces),
element forces, element stresses, element strains, and monitor point results and used in the assembly run to
calculate the external superelement data recovery. Displacements and SPC and MPC forces are always
calculated as requested, BUT CARE MUST BE TAKEN when specifying output for STRESS, STRAIN and
FORCE. Item Code Description (Ch. 7) in the must be consulted to determine if an OTM is possible for the
output request. The items available for OTM output are designated with at (1) – which has this definition:
 Data for components marked with the symbol (1) are included in the data block MES and MEF
outputs from modules DRMH1/DRMH3 and DRMS1. DRMH1/DRMH3 are used in
EXTSEOUT Case Control processing. (See MSC Nastran DMAP Programmer’s Guide.)
As an example, consider the stress OTMs for a QUAD4 element. A review of the Item Code Descriptions
reveals that there are four QUAD4 element types, but only one is available for OTM calculations:

Table 2-3 QUAD4 Element Types and their Availability for OTM Processing
CQUAD4
Element Available
Type Description for OTM? Comment
33 QUAD4 – Linear Center YES Center output only.

Case Control request: STRESS(CENTER)

90 QUAD4 – Nonlinear NO Nonlinear analysis will not generate OTMs
95 QUAD4 – Composite NO Composites will not produce OTMS.
144 QUAD4 – Linear Corner NO STRESS(CORNER) will not produce any
OTMS

The following snippet from Item Code Description (Ch. 7) in the shows the superscript of (1) and its availability
for OTM processing.

Main Index
 94 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Defining and Attaching External Superelements

Figure 2-29 Snippet of Stress Item Code Descriptions from Quick Reference Guide

Because of the OTM limitations, some users still prefer the flexibility of the 3-Step method. The 3-Step
method also supports xdb output.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 95
How to Define a Superelement

3-Step Method
The 3-Step method setup is identical to the 2-Step method setup except for the follwing additional input
requirements:
 scr=no is required in the external superelement creation run
 With EXTSEOUT(MATRIXDB or DMIGDB=dbext), the dbext keyword must also be specified
along with an INIT dbext FMS statement.
 EXTDROUT Case Control command is required in the second step to export the boundary
solution
 EXTDRIN Case Control command is required in the third step to import the boundary solution.
There is also a difference in the data recovery options:
 In the first run of the two-step method, EXTSEOUT automatically generates output
transformation matrices (OTMs) based on STRESS, FORCE, DISPLACEMENT, SPCFORCE,
MPCFORCE, STRAIN, and MONITOR Case Control commands specified in the first (creation)
run. Then in the second (assembly) run, the OTMs are imported and data recovery is performed on
the external superelement. This data recovery is limited to certain element types and specialized
outputs. For example, grid point forces and stresses, corner stresses, strain and kinetic energies, and
composite stresses are not supported in the OTMs.
 The three-step method requires a restart of the first step to perform data recovery on the external
superelement in a read-only restart 3rd step. This method supports all data recovery options allowed
in a non-superelement run; e.g., grid point forces and stresses, corner stresses, strain and kinetic
energies, and composite stresses.
The options for Steps 2 and 3 are outline in Using 3-Step External Superelements in Using 3-Step External
Superelements.

Definition of External Points

In order to use external superelements, the user must define the interface points to the superelement, or the
external points. The considerations that go into selecting the interface points include: physical interfaces
(bolt locations, strut attachments, etc.), locations for load application, and number of dynamic dof necessary
to adequately define the dynamic response of the external superelement in the assembled environment.

Physical External DOF

The selection of physical interfaces is the most logical and common physical dof that are selected for external
superelements. However, other considerations can lead the user to define additional points – such as dof that
will be used for clearance calculations or dof that will be used to apply loads. In any event, the definition of

Main Index
 96 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Defining and Attaching External Superelements

physical dof for use in external superelements can be accomplished with several different bulk data entries.
These are summarized here:

Table 2-4 Bulk Data Entries used to Define Physical DOF of External Superelements
Bulk Data Entry Behavior
ASET, ASET1 Define physical dof to be retained in a static condensation. By
default, these dof are part of the BSET and considered fixed
during component modes synthesis (1)
BSET, BSET1 Define physical dof to be retained in a static condensation. These
points are fixed during component modes synthesis(1)
CSET, CSET1 Define physical dof to be retained in a static condensation. These
points are free during component modes synthesis
BNDFIX, BNDFIX1 Same as BSET, BSET1
BNDFREE, BNDFREE1 Same as CSET, CSET1
Table Notes:
(1)
If there are no BSETi/BNDFIXi or CSETi/BNDFREE/BNDFRE1 entries present, all a-set points
are considered fixed during component mode analysis. If there are only BSETi/BNDFIXi entries
present, any a-set degrees-of-freedom not listed are placed in the free boundary set (c-set). If there are
only CSETi/BNDFREE/BNDFRE1 entries present or both BSETi/BNDFIXi and
CSETi/BNDFREE/BNDFRE1 entries present, the c-set degrees-of-freedom are defined by the
CSETi/BNDFREE/BNDFRE1 entries, and any remaining a-set points are placed in the b-set.

The ASET/ASET1, BSET/BSET1, CSET/CSET1, BNDFIX/BNDFIX1, and BNDFREE/BNDFREE1

entries follow a similar format that list grid numbers and component degrees of freedom associated with the
set. The BNDFIX/BNDFIX1 entries are described here, the other entries are similar and full descriptions
can be found in the Quick Reference Guide.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ASET ID1 C1 ID2 C2 ID3 C3 ID4 C4
BSET
CSET
BNDFIX
BNDFIX1

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 97
How to Define a Superelement

ASET1 C ID1 ID2 ID3 ID4 ID5 ID6 ID7

BSET1
CSET1
BNDFIX1
BNDFREE1
ID8 ID9 ID10 etc.-

Where “C” or “Ci” indicate a dof direction and “IDi” is a grid number.

Dynamic External DOF

As detailed in the Dynamic Reduction – Component Modes Synthesis (Sec. ) static condensation of physical points
is usually inadequate to capture the dynamic behavior of a superelement. Thus, the static condensation is
augmented with Component Modes Synthesis (CMS) and residual vectors. To accommodate these
additional dof, there are a few relevant entries:

Entries Related to Dynamic DOF Description / Behavior

SPOINT In conjunction with QSET/QSET1, A degree of freedom
available to store Component Modes and/or Residual Vectors
QSET, QSET1 Defines the SPOINT IDs that are used to store CMS and/or
Residual Vector dof
EXTSEOUT EXTBULK=MAN For the .asm file: generate an SEBULK entry that specifies
MANUAL as the method for searching boundary points, and
an SECONCT entry that defines connections for boundary
grid and scalar points.
EXTSEOUT EXTBULK=MANQ For the .asm file: generate an SEBULK entry that specifies
AUTO as the method for searching boundary points, and an
SECONCT entry that defines connections for boundary
scalar points.
EXTSEOUT EXTBULK=AUTO Automatically generate SPOINT/QSET entries.
For the .asm file: generate an SEBULK entry that specifies
AUTO as the method for searching boundary points, and an
SECONCT entry that defines connections for boundary
scalar points.
PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES Similar to EXTSEOUT EXTBULK=AUTO

Main Index
 98 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Defining and Attaching External Superelements

The QSET and QSET1 entries follow a similar format to the physical dof format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
QSET ID1 C1 ID2 C2 ID3 C3 ID4 C4
QSET1 C ID1 ID2 ID3 ID4 ID5 ID6 ID7
ID8 ID9 ID10 -etc.-

If either PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES, or EXTSEOUT EXTBULK=AUTO are specified, SPOINTs are

automatically generated internally to represent the Q-set DOFs. The IDs of these SPOINTs are of the form
9sssnnnn where sss is the superelement ID seid specified by the EXTID keyword, and nnnn is a mode
number. Both sss and nnnn will have leading zeros inserted in them to ensure that sss is a three-digit number
and nnnn is a four-digit number. Thus, for example, the Q-set DOF corresponding to the 8th mode of
superelement ID 5 would be represented by an SPOINT with an automatically generated ID of 90050008,
while the Q-set DOF corresponding to the 50th mode of superelement ID 25 would be represented by an
SPOINT with an automatically generated ID of 90250050.
Because of the preceding numbering scheme, the superelement ID seid specified by the EXTID keyword
must necessarily not exceed 999 when PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES is specified. The program terminates the
job with a User Fatal Message if this condition is not met.
Further, because of the preceding numbering scheme, the user should ensure that, when
PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES is specified, the IDs of the grid and scalar points of the external superelement do
not conflict with the automatically generated SPOINT IDs of the Q-set DOFs. The program terminates the
job with a User Fatal Message if this condition is not met.

Creating External Superelements with EXTSEOUT

The EXTSEOUT case control command
The EXTSEOUT case control command provides a convenient method to define the features that the user
wants to activate during the superelement reduction process for the 2-Step method. The format of the
command is as follows:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 99
How to Define a Superelement



EXTSEOUT  STIFFNESS MASS DAMPING K4DAMP LOADS FSCOUP



 MAN 
 
ASMBULK =  MANQ  EXTBULK EXTID = seid
 
 AUTO  (2-1)

 
 MATDB (or MATRIXDB) 
 DMIGDB 
 cccccc  
DMIGSFIX =   DMIGOP2 = unit 
 EXTID  
 DMIGPCH 
 MATOP4 (or MATRIXOP4) = unit 
 

Example(s):
EXTSEOUT
EXTSEOUT(DMIGOP2=26)
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK EXTID=200)
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK EXTBULK EXTID=100)
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK=AUTO EXTBULK EXTID=100)
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK=MANQ EXTID=10 DMIGDB)
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK EXTID=100 DMIGOP2=26)
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK EXTID=100 DMIGPCH)
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK EXTID=100 DMIGSFIX=XSE100 DMIGPCH)
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK EXTID=200 DMIGSFIX=EXTID DMIGPCH)
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK EXTID=100 MATOP4=26)
.

Describer Meaning
STIFFNESS Store the boundary stiffness matrix.
Describer Meaning
STIFFNESS Store the boundary stiffness matrix.
MASS Store the boundary mass matrix.
DAMPING Store the boundary viscous damping matrix.
K4DAMP Store the boundary structural damping matrix.
LOADS Store the boundary static loads matrix.
FSCOUP Store the boundary fluid-structure coupling matrix.

Main Index
 100 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Defining and Attaching External Superelements

Describer Meaning
ASMBULK or Generate Bulk Data entries for use in a subsequent superelement assembly
ASMBULK = MAN process and store them on the assembly punch file (.asm). This data, which is
used in the main bulk data portion of a subsequent assembly job, includes an
SEBULK entry that specifies MANUAL as the method for searching
boundary points, and an SECONCT entry that defines connections for
boundary grid and scalar points.
ASMBULK = MANQ Similar to the ASMBULK = MAN option, except that the generated
SECONCT entry defines connections not only for boundary grid and scalar
points, but also for Q-set points. This allows the user to have control over the
Q-set points of the external superelement in the subsequent assembly job.
ASMBULK = AUTO Generate Bulk Data entries for use in a subsequent superelement assembly
process, and store them on the assembly punch file (.asm). This data, which
is to be used in the main bulk data portion of a subsequent assembly job,
includes an SEBULK entry that specifies AUTO as the method for searching
boundary points, and an SECONCT entry that defines connections for
boundary scalar points.
EXTBULK Generate Bulk Data entries related to the external superelement and store
them on the standard punch file (.pch). This data is used in the BEGIN
SUPER portion of the bulk data of a subsequent assembly job. EXTBULK
need not be specified if DMIGPCH or MATOP4 (see the following
descriptions) is specified.

Note that, in general, the EXTBULK keyword is not required and is provided
solely for user convenience. In the absence of EXTBULK and the associated
output on the standard punch file resulting from it, the subsequent assembly
job will retrieve the required data for the external superelement from the
medium on which the boundary matrices are stored.
EXTID=seid seid (integer > 0) is the superelement ID to be used on the SEBULK and
SECONCT (if applicable) Bulk Data entries stored on the assembly punch
file (.asm) if ASMBULK is specified, and in the BEGIN SUPER Bulk Data
entry stored on the standard punch file (.pch) if EXTBULK or DMIGPCH
is specified.
DMIGSFIX = cccccc cccccc is the suffix (up to six characters) to be employed in the names of the
DMIG matrices stored on the standard punch file (.pch) if the DMIGPCH
option is specified.
DMIGSFIX = EXTID The seid defined by the EXTID keyword is the suffix to be employed in the
names of the DMIG matrices stored on the standard punch file (.pch) if the
DMIGPCH option is specified.
MATDB Store the boundary matrices and other information on the database.
(or MATRIXDB)
(Default)

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 101
How to Define a Superelement

Describer Meaning
DMIGDB Similar to MATDB (or MATRIXDB) except that the boundary matrices are
stored as DMIG Bulk Data entries on the database.
DMIGOP2 = unitop2 Store the boundary matrices as DMIG Bulk Data entries on an .op2 file
whose Fortran unit number is given by unitop2 (Integer > 0).
DMIGPCH Store the boundary matrices as DMIG Bulk Data entries on the standard
punch file (.pch).
MATOP4 = unitop4 unitop4 is a non-zero integer with the following meanings:
(or MATRIXOP4 =
unitop4) unitop4 > 0

Store the boundary matrices in sparse format on an op4 file whose Fortran
unit number is given by unitop4

unitop4 < 0

Store the boundary matrices in non-sparse format on an .op4 file whose

Fortran unit number is given by |unitop4|

The various remarks about the entries above can be found in the EXTSEOUT case control command in the
Quick Reference Guide.

ASMBULK
The ASMBULK keyword in the EXTSEOUT case control command provides a convenience to the user by
automatically generating bulk data entries necessary for the bookkeeping and assembly during the assembly
run. The following table summarizes the entries generated by specifying ASMBULK:

Table 2-5 Entries Generated in the “.asm” File When ASMBULK is Requested
ASMBULK Generated Entries Purpose
GRID GRID points associated with the boundary points and PLOTEL
entries.
CORD2x All coordinate frames necessary to define the GRID placement (CP)
and displacement (CD) coordinate frames
PLOTEL All PLOTEL entries defined in the reduction run. These are often
used to view the ‘outline’ modal or dynamic displacements in an
assembly run.

Main Index
 102 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Defining and Attaching External Superelements

Table 2-5 Entries Generated in the “.asm” File When ASMBULK is Requested
ASMBULK Generated Entries Purpose
SEBULK Defines the EXTID as an External superelement and defines the
connection method (automatic or manual) between the external
superelement and the residual structure during the assembly run.
Also defines the fortran unit number to use when reading an op2 or
op4 file.
SECONCT The SECONCT entry is used to define the “grid pairings” used in
the assembly run. There are options to output actual grid pairs or
use the automatic option. There are also pairings available for
SPOINTs in dynamic analysis
EXTID (not a bulk data entry) The user defined SEID that will be assigned to the external
superelement – this will be used in the SEBULK and SECONCT
entries
SPOINT For modal reductions using component modes synthesis (CMS),
the modal dof are stored in SPOINTs. These can be manually or
automatically generated by the program depending on user options
– generated with the MANQ option only.

EXTBULK
The EXTBULK keyword on the EXTSEOUT case control command generates bulk data entries related to
the external superelement and stores them on the standard punch file (.pch). This data is used in the BEGIN
SUPER portion of the bulk data of a subsequent assembly job. The data generated by EXTBULK is necessary
for DMIGPCH and MATOP4 media formats, but is not used by the other media formats. However, the
data generated in the punch file when EXTBULK is specified provides a self-documenting file which defines
the GRIDs, boundary dof (ASET), modal dof (QSET), PLOTELs, and coordinate systems (CORD2x) for
the reduced matrices.

Table 2-6 Entries Generated in the “.pch” File When EXTBULK is Requested
Punch File Entry Purpose
BEGIN SUPER = extid Define the bulk data delimeter for the external superelement and
define the SEID
GRID GRID points associated with the boundary points and PLOTEL
entries.
CORDix All coordinate frames necessary to define the GRID placement (CP)
and displacement (CD) coordinate frames
PLOTEL All PLOTEL entries defined in the reduction run. These are often
used to view the ‘outline’ modal or dynamic displacements in an
assembly run.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 103
How to Define a Superelement

Table 2-6 Entries Generated in the “.pch” File When EXTBULK is Requested
Punch File Entry Purpose
ASET, BSET, CSET, BNDFIX, Entries associated with the boundary definitions for the external
BNDFREE, ASET1, BSET1, superelement.
CSET1, BNDFIX1, BNDFREE1,
QSET, QSET1
SPOINT For modal reductions using component modes synthesis (CMS),
the modal dof are stored in SPOINTs. These can be manually or
automatically generated by the program depending on user options.

Main Index
 104 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Defining and Attaching External Superelements

Table 2-6 Entries Generated in the “.pch” File When EXTBULK is Requested
Punch File Entry Purpose
DMIG matrices If DMIGSFIX is blank, the following matrices are output

(if DMIGPCH output is specified)  KAAX (boundary stiffness matrix)

 MAAX (boundary mass matrix)
NOTE: depending on the user
request, not all matrices will be  BAAX (boundary viscous damping matrix)
generated.  K4AAX (boundary structural damping matrix)
 PAX (boundary load matrix)
 AAX (boundary fluid structure coupling matrix)
If DMIGSFIX = integer (SEID of external superelement)

 Kseid (boundary stiffness matrix)

 Mseid (boundary mass matrix)
 Bseid (boundary viscous damping matrix)
 K4seid (boundary structural damping matrix)
 Pseid (boundary load matrix)
 Aseid (boundary fluid structure coupling matrix)
(where seid is the superelement id)
If DMIGSFIX = label (label of external superelement, limited to 6
characters)

 Kcccccc (boundary stiffness matrix)

 Mcccccc (boundary mass matrix)
 Bcccccc (boundary viscous damping matrix)
 K4cccccc (boundary structural damping matrix)
 Pcccccc (boundary load matrix)
 Acccccc (boundary fluid structure coupling matrix)
(where cccccc is the user specified label)
(1)
DMI matrices DMI Matrices are output associated with the OTMs required for
data recovery of the external superelement in the assembly run.
(if DMIGPCH or MATOP4 is
specified)  MUG1, MUG1O (Displacement OTMs)
 MQG1, MQG1O (SPCForce OTMs)
 MES1, MES1O (Element Stress OTMs)
 MEF1, MEF1O (Element Force OTMs)

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 105
How to Define a Superelement

Table 2-6 Entries Generated in the “.pch” File When EXTBULK is Requested
Punch File Entry Purpose
(1)
DTI tables DTI tables are output associated with the OTMs required for data
recovery of the external superelement in the assembly run.
(if DMIGPCH or MATOP4 is
specified)  TUG1, TUG1O (Displacement OTMs)
 TQG1, TQG1O (SPCForce OTMs)
 TES1, TES1O (Element Stress OTMs)
 TEF1, TEF1O (Element Force OTMs)
Table Notes:

1. The MUG1, MQG1, MES1, MEF1, TUG1, TQG1, TES1, and TEF1 matrix and table are
associated with the “free boundary” displacement, spcforce, stress, and force OTMs. The
MUG1O, MQG1O, MES1O, MEF1O, TUG1O, TQG1O, TES1O, and TEF1O matrix
and table are “fixed boundary” , spcforce, stress, and force OTMs. For more information on
“free boundary” vs “fixed boundary” solutions, refer to Manual Solution of a Small Superelement
Example

Main Index
 106 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Defining and Attaching External Superelements

Output Formats and Considerations

The EXTSEOUT case control command provides many output media format options. These are
summarized in the following table:

Table 2-7 External Superelement Media Format Options

EXTSEOUT format Behavior Notes
MATRIXDB or MATDB Stores boundary matrices 1. Machine Precision
and OTMS on the 2. Run with SCR=NO
database (.MASTER and
.DBALL files)
DMIGDB Stores boundary matrices 1. Machine Precision
and OTMS on the 2. Run with SCR=NO
database (.MASTER and
.DBALL files)
DMIGOP2 Writes boundary matrices 1. Machine Precision
and OTMS to an 2. ASSIGN OUTPUT2
OUTPUT2 file.
EXTSEOUT specify DMIGOP2=unit
3. Run with SCR=NO if data recovery in
step 3 is desired.
DMIGPCH Writes boundary matrices Loss of precision in DMIG format
to the punch file (.pch) in
DMIG format.

OTMs are written to the

punch file in DMI and
DTI format.
MATOP4 or Writes boundary matrices 1. ASSIGN OUTPUT4
MATRIXOP4 to an OUTPUT4 file. a. FORMATTED (ASCII)
OTM Matrices are b. UNFORMATTED (Binary)
OUTPUT4, OTM Tables 2. Machine Precision if UNFORMATTED
are punched.
3. FORMATTED can specify precision
with PARAM,OP4DIGS (default=15)
4. EXTSETOUT(MATRIXOP4 or
MATOP4=unitop4)
If unitop4 is positive then matrices are
stored in sparse format. If negative then
non-sparse format.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 107
How to Define a Superelement

Using 2-Step External Superelements

The use of the 2-Step external superelement option is dependent upon the media format chosen. The
following subsections describe the generic setup for each media option. Specific example problems for each
media format are included in CHAPTER 12.
MATRIXDB/MATDB and DMIGDB formats
The following table summarizes representative entries required for each step of the 2-step external
superelement using the MATRIXDB or DMIGDB options:

Table 2-8 External Superelement 2-Step Procedure with MATRIXDB or DMIGDB

Step Required Entries
STEP 1 – Matrix Command Line
Generations
 Save the database for subsequent use in step 2
Filename used for SCR=NO
example: step1.dat
Case Control
SEID=10 is used for
example  Define the EXTSEOUT parameters (representative entry shown):
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK EXTID=10)
OR
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK EXTID=10 DMIGDB)
 Define output requests for data recovery in Step 2 (these entries are
optional, or may use a SET ID instead of ALL)
DISP=ALL
SPCF=ALL
STRESS=ALL
FORCE=ALL
STRAIN=ALL
MPCFORCE=ALL
MONITOR=ALL
Bulk Data

 Parameters for defining physical / dynamic boundary dof:

ASET/ASET1, BSET/BSET1, CSET/CSET1, BNDFIX/BNDFIX1,
BNDFREE/BNDFREE1, QSET/QSET1
 DOF to store CMS and RESVEC dof
SPOINT

Main Index
 108 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Defining and Attaching External Superelements

Table 2-8 External Superelement 2-Step Procedure with MATRIXDB or DMIGDB

Step Required Entries
STEP 2 – Assembly File Management Section
and Data Recovery
Model  Assign and locate the database(s) from Step 1
ASSIGN SE10M=’step1.MASTER’
Filename used for
example: step2.dat ASSIGN SE10D=’step1.DBALL’
DBLOCATE DB=(EXTDB)CONVERT(SEID=10),
LOGICAL=SE10M
where:
step1.MASTER is the database from the Step 1. xxx is the superelement
identification number given to the partitioned Bulk Data Section for
the external superelement.
Case Control

 Define output requests for data recovery (these entries are optional, or
may use a SET ID instead of ALL). Only these requests will be honored
for the external superelement:
DISP=ALL
SPCF=ALL
STRESS=ALL
FORCE=ALL
STRAIN=ALL
MPCFORCE=ALL
MONITOR=ALL
Bulk Data Entries

 Include the assembly file generated in Step 1

INCLUDE ‘step1.asm’

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 109
How to Define a Superelement

DMIGOP2
The following table summarizes representative entries required for each step of the 2-step external
superelement using the DMIGOP2 option:

Table 2-9 External Superelement 2-Step Procedure with DMIGOP2

Step Required Entries
STEP 1 – Matrix File Management Section
Generations
 Define the output2 filename and unit number
Filename used for
ASSIGN OUTPUT2=’se10.op2’ unit=32 delete(1)
example: step1.dat
Case Control
SEID=10 is used for
example  Define the EXTSEOUT parameters (representative entry shown):
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK EXTID=10 DMIGOP2=32)
Output2 unit 32 is
used for example  Define output requests for data recovery in Step 2 (these entries are
optional, or may use a SET ID instead of ALL)
DISP=ALL
SPCF=ALL
STRESS=ALL
FORCE=ALL
STRAIN=ALL
MPCFORCE=ALL
MONITOR=ALL
Bulk Data

 Parameters for defining physical / dynamic boundary dof:

ASET/ASET1, BSET/BSET1, CSET/CSET1, BNDFIX/BNDFIX1,
BNDFREE/BNDFREE1, QSET/QSET1
 DOF to store CMS and RESVEC dof
SPOINT

Main Index
 110 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Defining and Attaching External Superelements

Table 2-9 External Superelement 2-Step Procedure with DMIGOP2

Step Required Entries
STEP 2 – Assembly File Management Section
and Data Recovery
Model  Assign the Output2 file from Step 1
ASSIGN INPUTT2=’se10.op2’unit=32(2)
Filename used for
example: step2.dat Case Control

Inputt2 unit =32 is  Define output requests for data recovery (these entries are optional, or
used for example may use a SET ID instead of ALL). Only these requests will be honored
for the external superelement:
DISP=ALL
SPCF=ALL
STRESS=ALL
FORCE=ALL
STRAIN=ALL
MPCFORCE=ALL
MONITOR=ALL
Bulk Data Entries

 Include the assembly file generated in Step 1

INCLUDE ‘step1.asm’(2)
NOTES

1. The op2 filename must be different than the base input filename (i.e. cannot be step1.op2)
because the post processing output2 unit is autoassigned.
2. The SEBULK entry UNITNO field that is generated in the .asm file will use the unit
number defined in the EXTSEOUT entry in Step1. If the user wants to change the inputt2
unit number in Step 2, it must be changed on both the ASSIGN statement and the SEBULK
entry in the .asm file.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 111
How to Define a Superelement

DMIGPCH
The following table summarizes representative entries required for each step of the 2-step external
superelement using the DMIGPCH option:

Table 2-10 External Superelement 2-Step Procedure with DMIGPCH

Step Required Entries
STEP 1 – Matrix Case Control
Generations
 Define the EXTSEOUT parameters (representative entry shown):
Filename used for EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK EXTID=10 DMIGPCH DMIGSFIX=S10)
example: step1.dat
 Define output requests for data recovery in Step 2 (these entries are
SEID=10 is used optional, or may use a SET ID instead of ALL)
for example DISP=ALL
SPCF=ALL
STRESS=ALL
FORCE=ALL
STRAIN=ALL
MPCFORCE=ALL
MONITOR=ALL
Bulk Data

 Parameters for defining physical / dynamic boundary dof:

ASET/ASET1, BSET/BSET1, CSET/CSET1, BNDFIX/BNDFIX1,
BNDFREE/BNDFREE1, QSET/QSET1
 DOF to store CMS and RESVEC dof
SPOINT

Main Index
 112 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Defining and Attaching External Superelements

Table 2-10 External Superelement 2-Step Procedure with DMIGPCH

Step Required Entries
STEP 2 – Assembly Case Control
and Data Recovery
Model  Bring in the matrices generated in Step1. In this example it is assumed that
all possible matrices were generated. Since DMIGSFIX=S10 in Step 1, the
Filename used for “S10” is used for each matrix:
example: step2.dat K2GG=KS10
M2GG=MS10
B2GG=BS10
K42GG=K4S10
A2GG=AS10
P2G=PS10
 Define output requests for data recovery (these entries are optional, or may
use a SET ID instead of ALL). Only these requests will be honored for the
external superelement:
DISP=ALL
SPCF=ALL
STRESS=ALL
FORCE=ALL
STRAIN=ALL
MPCFORCE=ALL
MONITOR=ALL
Bulk Data Entries

 Include the assembly file and dmig (punch) file

INCLUDE ‘step1.asm’
INCLUDE ‘step1.pch’(2)
NOTES

1. The “.pch” file must be at the END of the main bulk data section since it has the BEGIN
SUPER entry. If it is placed at the beginning or in the middle of the main bulk data section,
either FATAL messages or unpredictable results will occur. If multiple “.pch” files are
included, then they must all be grouped at the end of the main bulk data section.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 113
How to Define a Superelement

MATRIXOP4 / MATOP4
The following table summarizes representative entries required for each step of the 2-step external
superelement using the MATRIXOP4 option:

Table 2-11 External Superelement 2-Step Procedure with MATRIXOP4

Step Required Entries
STEP 1 – Matrix File Management Section
Generations
 Define the output2 filename and unit number
Filename used for ASSIGN OUTPUT4=’se10.op4’ unit=33 delete
example: step1.dat
Case Control
SEID=10 is used for
example  Define the EXTSEOUT parameters (representative entry shown):
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK EXTID=10 MATRIXOP4=33)
Output4 unit 33 is
 Define output requests for data recovery in Step 2 (these entries are
used for example
optional, or may use a SET ID instead of ALL)
DISP=ALL
SPCF=ALL
STRESS=ALL
FORCE=ALL
STRAIN=ALL
MPCFORCE=ALL
MONITOR=ALL
Bulk Data

 Parameters for defining physical / dynamic boundary dof:

ASET/ASET1, BSET/BSET1, CSET/CSET1, BNDFIX/BNDFIX1,
BNDFREE/BNDFREE1, QSET/QSET1
 DOF to store CMS and RESVEC dof
SPOINT

Main Index
 114 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Defining and Attaching External Superelements

Table 2-11 External Superelement 2-Step Procedure with MATRIXOP4

Step Required Entries
STEP 2 – Assembly File Management Section
and Data Recovery
Model  Assign the output4 file from Step 1
ASSIGN INPUTT4=’se10.op4’unit=33(1)
Filename used for
example: step2.dat Case Control

 Define output requests for data recovery (these entries are optional, or
may use a SET ID instead of ALL). Only these requests will be honored
for the external superelement:
DISP=ALL
SPCF=ALL
STRESS=ALL
FORCE=ALL
STRAIN=ALL
MPCFORCE=ALL
MONITOR=ALL
Bulk Data Entries

INCLUDE ‘step1.asm’(1)
INCLUDE ‘step1.pch’(2)
NOTES

1. The SEBULK entry UNITNO field that is generated in the .asm file will use the unit
number defined in the EXTSEOUT entry in Step1. If the user wants to change the inputt2
unit number in Step 2, it must be changed on both the ASSIGN statement and the SEBULK
entry in the .asm file.
2. The “.pch” file must be at the END of the main bulk data section since it has the BEGIN
SUPER entry. If it is placed at the beginning or in the middle of the main bulk data section,
either FATAL messages or unpredictable results will occur. If multiple “.pch” files are
included, then they must all be grouped at the end of the main bulk data section.

Using 3-Step External Superelements

The Step 2 solution is capable of OTM data recovery, but there is also the option to save the boundary
solution so that a more complete data recovery can be done using the database stored during Step 1. The
external superelement boundary solution may be stored on the MSC Nastran database using MATRIXDB
(or MATDB) and DMIGDB export options, op2 file using DMIGOP2, or op4 file using MATRIXOP4

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 115
How to Define a Superelement

(or MATOP4). The following sections outline the steps and entries necessary to accomplish the 3-Step
method.

Step 1 – Creating External Superelement

Table 2-12
Step 1 Output Format Required Entries
MATRIXDB (or MATDB) and Command Line
DMIGDB
 Save the database for subsequent use in step 2 and 3
Filename used for example: step1.dat SCR=NO
SEID=10 is used for example File Management Section

 Allocate dbset to store boundary matrices for Step 2

INIT dbext

Case Control Section

Commands for creating external SE:

 EXTSEOUT(MATDB=dbext ASMBULK EXTID=seid)

Or
EXTSEOUT(DMIGDB=dbext ASMBULK EXTID=seid)
Bulk Data

 Parameters for defining physical / dynamic boundary dof:

ASET/ASET1, BSET/BSET1, CSET/CSET1,
BNDFIX/BNDFIX1, BNDFREE/BNDFREE1,
QSET/QSET1
 DOF to store CMS and RESVEC dof
SPOINT
DMIGOP2, MATRIXOP4 or The required entries are identical to the 2-Step method described
MATOP4, and DMIGPCH for Step 1 under "Using EXTSEOUT (2-Step) External
Superelements" except that scr=no must be specified on the
command line in order to perform a data recovery restart in Step 3.

Step 2 – Attaching External Superelement: Residual Solution

Main Index
 116 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Defining and Attaching External Superelements

Step 2 – Attachment Required Entries

If STEP 1 was MATRIXDB, Same entries as shown under Step 2 in Table 2-8 along with the entries
MATDB, or DMIGDB shown below which are required to export the boundary solution.

Filename used for example:  Allocate the Fortran file or DBset for the boundary solution
step2.dat ASSIGN OUTPUT2='se10bndry.op2' unit=33
Or
ASSIGN OUTPUT4='se10bndry.op4' unit=33
Or
INIT se10bndry
Case Control Section
 Define output media for SEID boundary solution
EXTDROUT(DMIGOP2=33)
Or
EXTDROUT(MATOP4=33)
Or
EXTDROUT(MATDB=se10bndry) with scr=no on the
command line
Or
EXTSEOUT(DMIGDB=se10bndry) with scr=no on the
command line.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 117
How to Define a Superelement

Step 2 – Attachment Required Entries

If STEP 1 was DMIGOP2 Same entries as shown under Step 2 in Table 2-11 along with the entries
shown below which are required to export the boundary solution.
Filename used for example:
step2.dat File Management Section

Store boundary displacements  Allocate the Fortran file or DBset for the boundary solution
on output2 unit 33 ASSIGN OUTPUT2='se10bndry.op2' unit=33
Or
ASSIGN OUTPUT4='se10bndry.op4' unit=33
Or
INIT se10bndry
Case Control Section
 Define output media for SEID boundary solution
EXTDROUT(DMIGOP2=33)
Or
EXTDROUT(MATOP4=33)
Or
EXTDROUT(MATDB=se10bndry) with scr=no on the
command line
Or
EXTSEOUT(DMIGDB=se10bndry) with scr=no on the
command line

Main Index
 118 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Defining and Attaching External Superelements

Step 2 – Attachment Required Entries

If STEP1 was DMIGPCH Same entries as shown under Step 2 in Table 2-10 along with the entries
shown below which are required to export the boundary solution.
Filename used for example:
step2.dat File Management Section
Store boundary displacements  Allocate the Fortran file or DBset for the boundary solution
on output2 unit 33 ASSIGN OUTPUT2='se10bndry.op2' unit=33
Or
ASSIGN OUTPUT4='se10bndry.op4' unit=33
Or
INIT se10bndry
Case Control Section:
 Define output media for SEID boundary solution
EXTDROUT(DMIGOP2=33)
Or
EXTDROUT(MATOP4=33)
Or
EXTDROUT(MATDB=se10bndry) with scr=no on the
command line
Or
EXTSEOUT(DMIGDB=se10bndry) with scr=no on the
command line

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 119
How to Define a Superelement

Step 2 – Attachment Required Entries

If STEP 1 was MATRIXOP4 Same entries as shown under Step 2 in Table 2-11 along with the entries
shown below which are required to export the boundary solution.
Filename used for example:
step2.dat File Management Section

 Allocate the Fortran file or DBset for the boundary solution

ASSIGN OUTPUT2='se10bndry.op2' unit=33
Or
ASSIGN OUTPUT4='se10bndry.op4' unit=33
Or
INIT se10bndry
Case Control Section:
 Define output media for SEID boundary solution
EXTDROUT(DMIGOP2=33)
Or
EXTDROUT(MATOP4=33)
Or
EXTDROUT(MATDB=se10bndry) with scr=no on the
command line
Or
EXTSEOUT(DMIGDB=se10bndry) with scr=no on the
command line.

Main Index
 120 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Defining and Attaching External Superelements

Step 3 – Data Recovery for External Superelement

Table 2-13
Step 3 Data Recovery from Step 2
Boundary Solution Required Entries
If Boundary Solution stored with File Management Section
MATRIXDB, MATDB, or
DMIGDB  Obtain the data from the original reduction run and the
boundary displacements from the assembly run.
Filename used for example: ASSIGN SE10M=’step1.MASTER’
step3.dat
ASSIGN SE10D=’step1.DBALL’
RESTART LOGICAL=SE10M(1)
ASSIGN ASSYM=’step2.MASTER’
ASSIGN ASSYD=’step2.DBALL’
DBLOCATE DB=(EXTDB) WHERE(SEID=10),
LOGICAL=ASSYM
where:
step1.MASTER is the database from the Step 1.
step2.MASTER is the database from the Step 2.
10 is the superelement identification number given to the
partitioned Bulk Data Section for the external superelement
in Step 2.
Case Control Section

 Any data recovery request applicable to the analysis will be

honored.
 Identify that the 3-step data recovery is being performed
EXTDRIN(MATDB)

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 121
How to Define a Superelement

Table 2-13
Step 3 Data Recovery from Step 2
Boundary Solution Required Entries
If Boundary Solution stored with File Management Section
DMIGOP2
 Obtain the data from the original reduction run and the
Filename used for example: boundary displacements from the assembly run.
step3.dat ASSIGN SE10M=’step1.MASTER’
ASSIGN SE10D=’step1.DBALL’
Boundary displacements on
output2 unit 33 RESTART LOGICAL=SE10M(1)
ASSIGN INPUTT2=’se10bndry.op2’ unit=33
where:
step1.MASTER is the database from the Step 1.
10 is the superelement identification number given to the
partitioned Bulk Data Section for the external superelement
in Step 2.
Case Control Section
 Any data recovery request applicable to the analysis will be
honored.
 Identify that the 3-step data recovery is being performed
EXTDRIN(DMIGOP2=33)
NOTES

1. The File Management Section for the Data Recovery Restart is based on a “read only restart” –
This means that the data on the original database is accessed, but the data is not modified or
added to in any way.

Main Index
 122 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
The Superelement Map – SEMAP

Table 2-13
Step 3 Data Recovery from Step 2
Boundary Solution Required Entries
If Boundary Solution stored with File Management Section
MATRIXOP4 (or MATOP4)
 Obtain the data from the original reduction run and the
Filename used for example: boundary displacements from the assembly run.
ASSIGN SE10M='step1.MASTER'
step3.dat
ASSIGN SE10D='step1.DBALL'
Boundary displacements on RESTART LOGICAL=SE10M(1)
output4 unit 33 ASSIGN INPUTT4='se10bndry.op4' unit=33
where:
step1.MASTER is the database from the Step 1.
10 is the superelement identification number given to the
partitioned Bulk Data Section for the external superelement
in Step 2.
Case Control Section
 Any data recovery request applicable to the analysis will be
honored.
 Identify that the 3-step data recovery is being performed
EXTDRIN(MATRIXOP4 or MATOP4=33)
NOTES

1. The File Management Section for the Data Recovery Restart is based on a “read only restart”.
This means that the data on the original database is accessed, but the data is not modified or
added to in any way.

The Superelement Map – SEMAP

The SEMAP contains the tables that will instruct MSC Nastran how to process a superelement job. It
contains lists processing order, superelement associations, interior grids, exterior grids, elements, etc. By
default, the superelement map is output to the .f06 file for each superelement run. The amount of output
can be controlled by PARAM,SEMAP and its associated parameters SEMAPOPT and SEMAPPRT.
Throughout this chapter, we have introduced snippets of the SEMAP that were relevant to the topic at hand.
This section will describe the SEMAP in more detail using the output from the freedom examples:
/doc/seug/chapter2/freedom/partse-continuous.bdf and /doc/seug/chapter2/freedom/partse-
discontinuous.bdf . Please refer to Figure 2-17 for details on how the model is broken up into superelements.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 123
How to Define a Superelement

Contents of the Superelement MAP – List Superelement

This section defines the SEMAP for list superelements that are defined in the main bulk data section
(BEGIN BULK). The first part of the SEMAP is the Superelement Definition Table. This is presented in
two sorts (sorted by SEID and sorted by Process order). The type of superelement is also specified. The
types include: Residual Structure, Primary (main bulk data or begin super), Repeat, Mirror, Collector, or
External. The Superelement Tree defines how the superelements will be processes and connected to on-
another. It is more important to understand the process order that MSC Nastran will use when multi-level
superelements are used – this subject will be covered in detail in Chapter 7: Multi-Level Superelement Analysis
SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE

(SORTED BY SEID)

INDEX SUPERELEMENT PROCESS ORDER DOWNSTREAM SE SUPERELEMENT TYPE

0 0 7 0 RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

1 10 1 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

2 20 2 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

3 30 3 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

4 40 4 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

5 50 5 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

6 60 6 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE

(SORTED BY PROCESS ORDER)

INDEX SUPERELEMENT PROCESS ORDER DOWNSTREAM SE SUPERELEMENT TYPE

0 10 1 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

1 20 2 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

2 30 3 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

3 40 4 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

4 50 5 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

5 60 6 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

6 0 7 0 RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

TABLE OF DOWNSTREAM CONNECTIONS FOR EACH SUPERELEMENT

INDEX SE ID ID-S OF DOWNSTREAM CONNECTIONS IN DOWNSTREAM ORDER

1 10 0

2 20 0

3 30 0

4 40 0

5 50 0

6 60 0

S U P E R E L E M E N T T R E E

( NO. LEVELS = 1 NO. TIPS = 6 * = PROCESS ORDER )

TIP L E V E L N U M B E R

Main Index
 124 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
The Superelement Map – SEMAP

INDEX

-1-

1 10

1*

2 20

2*

3 30

3*

4 40

4*

5 50

5*

6 60

6*

Listing 2-17 Listing of Superelement Definition Table, Connectivity, and SETREE for List superelements

Next the Unique Superelement Connectivity List provides details on the number of points that share a
connection between superelements as well as the 1st ID associated with each connection.
UNIQUE SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST ------------------------------------ CONNECTED TO --

(SORTED BY SE-ID)

COUNT 1ST GRD TYPE INT.-TO-SE SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID

16 1 0 40

34 30021 0 20 30

37 17 0 50

170 54 0

24 50782 0 50 60

24 50001 0 30 50

20 30001 0 10 30

17 10039 10 0

397 10001 10

304 20001 20

144 20006 20 0

637 30055 30

96 30233 30 0

40 40009 40 0

1048 40011 40

136 50025 50 0

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 125
How to Define a Superelement

621 50038 50

193 60025 60

24 60032 60 0

Listing 2-18 Listing of Unique Superleement Connectivity List for List Superleements

Next, the list of interior points, exterior points, and elements is provided for each superelement. Note that
the residual structure will not have any exterior points and is always listed last.

SUPERELEMENT 10

LIST OF INTERIOR GRID POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF INTERIOR POINTS = 414 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 10001 10002 10003 10004 10005 10006 10007 10008 10009 10010

11 10011 10012 10013 10014 10015 10016 10017 10018 10019 10020

21 10021 10022 10023 10024 10025 10026 10027 10028 10029 10030

SUPERELEMENT 10

LIST OF EXTERIOR POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF EXTERIOR POINTS = 20 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 30001 30002 30003 30004 30005 30006 30007 30008 30009 30010

11 30011 30012 30013 30014 30015 30016 30017 30018 30019 30020

SUPERELEMENT 10

LIST OF ELEMENT ID-S ( TOTAL NO. OF ELEMENTS = 859 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 10001 10002 10003 10004 10005 10006 10007 10008 10009 10010

11 10011 10012 10013 10014 10015 10016 10017 10018 10019 10020

21 10021 10022 10023 10024 10025 10026 10027 10028 10029 10030

31 10031 10032 10033 10034 10035 10036 10037 10038 10039 10040

SUPERELEMENT 0

LIST OF INTERIOR GRID POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF INTERIOR POINTS = 325 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

21 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

Main Index
 126 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
The Superelement Map – SEMAP

201 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210

211 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220

221 221 222 501 30001 30002 30003 30004 30005 30006 30007

231 30008 30009 30010 30011 30012 30013 30014 30015 30016 30017

SUPERELEMENT 0

LIST OF ELEMENT ID-S ( TOTAL NO. OF ELEMENTS = 397 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Listing 2-19 Listing of Interior Points, Exterior Points, and Elements for List Superelements

Contents of the Superelement MAP – PART Superelement

The output for the PART superelements (or any model with superelements and a BEGIN SUPER entry), is
very similar to the List Superelement output for Main Bulk Data superelements. There are some advantages
in that more information is output with respect to the Boundary Grids and their connectivity.
SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE (SORTED BY SEID)

PRIMARY PROCESS DOWNSTREAM

SUPERELEMENT SUPERELEMENT ORDER SUPERELEMENT TYPE LABEL

------------ ------------ ------- ------------ ----------------------------- --------------------------------

0 0 7 0 RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

10 0 1 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

20 0 2 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

30 0 3 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

40 0 4 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

50 0 5 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

60 0 6 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE (SORTED BY PROCESS ORDER)

PRIMARY PROCESS DOWNSTREAM

SUPERELEMENT SUPERELEMENT ORDER SUPERELEMENT TYPE LABEL

------------ ------------ ------- ------------ ----------------------------- --------------------------------

10 0 1 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

20 0 2 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

30 0 3 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

40 0 4 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

50 0 5 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

60 0 6 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

0 0 7 0 RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 127
How to Define a Superelement

TABLE OF DOWNSTREAM SUPERELEMENTS FOR EACH SUPERELEMENT

SUPERELEMENT DOWNSTREAM SUPERELEMENTS IN DOWNSTREAM ORDER

------------ --------------------------------------------------------------------------------

10 0

20 0

30 0

40 0

50 0

60 0

S U P E R E L E M E N T T R E E

( CONFIGURATION = SINGLE LEVEL NO. LEVELS = 1 NO. TIPS = 6 )

TIP LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9-

1 10

2 20

3 30

4 40

5 50

6 60

Table 2-14 Listing of Superelement Definition Table, Connectivity, andSETREE for PART Superelements
Next, the Boundary Sequence Assignment Table shows how the superelement grids are connected. In this
example, GRID 30001 is on the boundary of SEID 10 and 30. Since this is a single-level tree, GRID 30001
is assigned to the residual structure. Refer to Figure 2-8 for an example.

BOUNDARY SEQUENCE ASSIGNMENT TABLE

BOUNDARY

SEQUENCE ID --------------------------------- ASSIGNED TO POINT ID (SUPERELEMENT) -------

1B 30001 ( 0) 30001 ( 10) 30001 ( 30)

2B 30002 ( 0) 30002 ( 10) 30002 ( 30)

3B 30003 ( 0) 30003 ( 10) 30003 ( 30)

4B 30004 ( 0) 30004 ( 10) 30004 ( 30)

Main Index
 128 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
The Superelement Map – SEMAP

5B 30005 ( 0) 30005 ( 10) 30005 ( 30)

6B 30006 ( 0) 30006 ( 10) 30006 ( 30)

7B 30007 ( 0) 30007 ( 10) 30007 ( 30)

8B 30008 ( 0) 30008 ( 10) 30008 ( 30)

9B 30009 ( 0) 30009 ( 10) 30009 ( 30)

10B 30010 ( 0) 30010 ( 10) 30010 ( 30)

11B 30011 ( 0) 30011 ( 10) 30011 ( 30)

12B 30012 ( 0) 30012 ( 10) 30012 ( 30)

13B 30013 ( 0) 30013 ( 10) 30013 ( 30)

14B 30014 ( 0) 30014 ( 10) 30014 ( 30)

15B 30015 ( 0) 30015 ( 10) 30015 ( 30)

16B 30016 ( 0) 30016 ( 10) 30016 ( 30)

17B 30017 ( 0) 30017 ( 10) 30017 ( 30)

18B 30018 ( 0) 30018 ( 10) 30018 ( 30)

Listing 2-20 Listing of Boundary Sequence Table for Part Superelements

The boundary sequence data is also reported with the interior SEID. This is useful for models with
complicated connections or multi-level trees.

POINT/SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST (SORTED BY POINT ID - "B" INDICATES BOUNDARY SEQUENCE ID)

INTERIOR TO

POINT ID TYPE SUPERELEMEMT ------------------------------- CONNECTED TO SUPERELEMENT ------------------

1B G 0 10 30

2B G 0 10 30

3B G 0 10 30

4B G 0 10 30

5B G 0 10 30

6B G 0 10 30

7B G 0 10 30

8B G 0 10 30

9B G 0 10 30

10B G 0 10 30

11B G 0 10 30

12B G 0 10 30

13B G 0 10 30

14B G 0 10 30

15B G 0 10 30

16B G 0 10 30

17B G 0 10 30

18B G 0 10 30

19B G 0 10 30

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 129
How to Define a Superelement

20B G 0 10 30

21B G 0 20 30

Listing 2-21 Listing of Point to Superelement Connectivity for PART Superelements – Sorted by Point

Another convenient output is the connectivity list showing the first boundary point and how many boundary
points are associated with the connectivity of each superelement. This can be useful when the user knows
there should be a certain number of connections between 2 superelements. A quick review of the table can
indicate problems that need to have further investigation.
POINT/SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST (SORTED BY FIRST POINT ID - "B" INDICATES BOUNDARY SEQUENCE ID)

FIRST INTERIOR TO

COUNT POINT ID TYPE SUPERELEMEMT ------------------------------- CONNECTED TO SUPERELEMENT ---------------------------

----

20 1B 0 10 30

34 21B 0 20 30

24 55B 0 30 50

16 79B 0 40

37 95B 0 50

24 132B 0 50 60

MSC Nastran JOB CREATED ON 29-MAR-11 AT 17:13:27 MARCH 29, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10 PAGE 9

POINT/SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST (SORTED BY COUNT - "B" INDICATES BOUNDARY SEQUENCE ID)

FIRST INTERIOR TO

COUNT POINT ID TYPE SUPERELEMEMT ------------------------------- CONNECTED TO SUPERELEMENT ---------------------------

----

16 79B 0 40

20 1B 0 10 30

24 55B 0 30 50

24 132B 0 50 60

34 21B 0 20 30

37 95B 0 50

POINT/SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST (SORTED BY INTERIOR SUPERELEMENT - "B" INDICATES BOUNDARY SEQUENCE
ID)

FIRST INTERIOR TO

COUNT POINT ID TYPE SUPERELEMEMT ------------------------------- CONNECTED TO SUPERELEMENT ---------------------------

----

16 79B 0 40

34 21B 0 20 30

24 132B 0 50 60

Main Index
 130 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
The Superelement Map – SEMAP

24 55B 0 30 50

20 1B 0 10 30

37 95B 0 50

Listing 2-22 Listing of Point to Superelement Connectivity for PART Superelements – Additional Sorts

Next, the list of interior points, exterior points, and elements is provided for each superelement. Note that
the residual structure will not have any exterior points. Also note that boundary dof are designated with a
“B”.
SUPERELEMENT 0

TYPE = RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

LIST OF INTERIOR POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF INTERIOR POINT = 325 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63

11 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 …

151 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213

161 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 501

171 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B

181 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B 16B 17B 18B 19B 20B

191 21B 22B 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B 28B 29B

SUPERELEMENT 0

TYPE = RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

LIST OF ELEMENTS ( TOTAL NO. OF ELEMENTS = 397 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

21 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29

SUPERELEMENT 10

TYPE = PRIMARY (MAIN BULK DATA)

LIST OF EXTERIOR POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF EXTERIOR POINT = 20 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B

11 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B 16B 17B 18B 19B 20B

SUPERELEMENT 10

TYPE = PRIMARY (MAIN BULK DATA)

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 131
How to Define a Superelement

LIST OF INTERIOR POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF INTERIOR POINT = 414 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 10001 10002 10003 10004 10005 10006 10007 10008 10009 10010

11 10011 10012 10013 10014 10015 10016 10017 10018 10019 10020

21 10021 10022 10023 10024 10025 10026 10027 10028 10029 10030

SUPERELEMENT 10

TYPE = PRIMARY (MAIN BULK DATA)

LIST OF ELEMENTS ( TOTAL NO. OF ELEMENTS = 859 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 10001 10002 10003 10004 10005 10006 10007 10008 10009 10010

11 10011 10012 10013 10014 10015 10016 10017 10018 10019 10020

Listing 2-23 Listing of Interior Points, Exterior Points, and Elements for PART Superelements

Main Index
 132 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
The Superelement Map – SEMAP

Main Index
 Chapter 3: Single Level Superelement Analysis
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User’s Guide

3 Single Level Superelement

Analysis

Introduction
 Baseline Static Example using Patran

Single-Level Analysis Using List Superelements

Single-Level Analysis Using PART Superelements

Single-Level Analysis Using External Superelements

Comparison of Methods

Main Index
 134 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Introduction

Introduction
A single-level superelement analysis is defined as one in which all superelements connect to the residual
structure only. Single-level superelement analysis occurs when the exterior points of all superelements in the
model are interior to the residual structure. In this case each superelement can be processed independently
from all other superelements. This concept was introduced in Example of Bulk Data Partitioning (Ch. 2). The
figures are repeated here as a refresher:

Figure 3-1 Flyswatter Example Showing Grids Assigned to Residual in Single Level Superelement Analysis

A single level superelement means that any boundary points where two or more superelements meet are
external to the upstream superelement (SEID>0) and internal to the residual structure. Single-level analysis
is the simplest form of superelement analysis and is recommended for the beginning superelement user.
Partitioning the model into superelements for a single-level analysis requires the least effort from the user, and
processing control (if desired) is simple. Conceptually, the single level superelement processing is shown in
the following figure:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 135
Single Level Superelement Analysis

Figure 3-2 Single Level Superelement Analysis of Flyswatter

It should be noted that if PARTs are used, the model is automatically a single-level model unless either
DTI,SETREE or SETREE entries exists in the Main Bulk Data Section. If the model is defined as a Main
Bulk Data Section only model, care must be taken to verify that all exterior points belong to the residual
structure; otherwise, a multilevel processing tree (Chapter 7: Multi-Level Superelement Analysis) is created
automatically.
In addition to single level being recommended for the beginning superelement user, single-level analysis is
recommended for use in the analysis of structures that are expected to change often and in many areas. For
this case, where there is no knowledge of areas that will not be changing, a single-level model is almost always
the most efficient. Thus, when a change occurs, only the affected superelement and the residual structure
need to be processed again. Therefore, restarts for model change can be very efficient. In fact, this is one of
the biggest advantages of using superelements. With the advent of external superelements, the processing
becomes even easier.
MSC Nastran offers the user a variety of results output formats. Some of these formats are more suitable for
output post-processing of superelements in Patran than others. The formats, their descriptions, and a

Main Index
 136 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Baseline Static Example using Patran

statement of superelement support are in the table below. Note that for this chapter, the op2 file
(PARAM,POST,-1) will be used.

Table 3-1 Nastran Output Format Compatibility with Superelement Processing

Results Output Format Extension Description Superelement Support
.f06 The basic output file is the .f06 file. Full support of all
It is an ASCII file that can be opened superelement output
DISP(PRINT)=ALL
in any text editor easily read and
interpreted by the user.
.pch This file is an ASCII output. It is not Full support of all
convenient as the .f06 to the human superelement results.
DISP(PUNCH)=ALL
viewer, but lends itself to user written
scripts and importing into custom
post-processors.
.xdb The xdb file is a binary format which PART superelements are not
is indexed for rapid results access. supported
DISP(PLOT)=ALL
Patran can ‘attach’ the xdb file List Superelements are not
PARAM,POST,0 instead of reading it, thus keeping fully supported
the Patran database smaller because
the results are on the external xdb
file.
.op2 The op2 file is a binary format which Full support of all
is a flat file. Patran must read the op2 superelement results
DISP(PLOT)=ALL
file into its database, thus increasing Note: Patran does not support
PARAM,POST,-1 the overall size. duplicate IDs, so PART
superelements may need to be
processed in their own
database.
.MASTER/.DBALL The MASTER/DBALL is a binary PART superelements are fully
format of the Nastran database supported
DISP(PLOT)=ALL
which is indexed for rapid results List Superelements are fully
NASTRAN SYSTEM(316)=19 access. Like the xdb, the supported.
MASTER/DBALL can be attached
to Patran, keeping the database
small.

Baseline Static Example using Patran

This Chapter will go into more depth than the introductory chapters, so more detail will be presented in
reviewing the input, processing, and results. To form a baseline, the model will be baselined as a non-
superelement model, and then details will be provided to define the model using both list and PART
superelements. Finally, the superelement and non-superelement solutions will be compared.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 137
Single Level Superelement Analysis

It is assumed that the user has some working-level knowledge of Patran, so buttons and forms that are
considered base knowledge are not shown. It is presumed the user knows how to rotate the model, create
groups, define loads, and submit analysis decks to MSC Nastran. The baseline file can be located at
/doc/seug/chapter3/baseline/baseline.bdf
The model consists of 104 grids and 67 elements as shown here:

Figure 3-3 Double Headed Flyswatter Baseline Model

All of the elements are unit thickness and the material is steel (in English units). The model is fixed at the
base (grids 1 & 2) in all 6 dof and there are three loadings as shown below:

Main Index
 138 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Baseline Static Example using Patran

Figure 3-4 Load 101, the pressure load applied to the two square portions of the model

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 139
Single Level Superelement Analysis

Figure 3-5 Load 201, In Phase point loads applied at the corners

Main Index
 140 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Baseline Static Example using Patran

Figure 3-6 Load 301, opposing point loads at the corners.

There are some key metrics from the MSC Nastran solution of the baseline model that will be compared to
the superelement solutions.
O U T P U T F R O M G R I D P O I N T W E I G H T G E N E R A T O R

REFERENCE POINT = 0

M O

* 3.166560E-02 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -2.180939E-01 *

* 0.000000E+00 3.166560E-02 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 2.168404E-19 *

* 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 3.166560E-02 2.180939E-01 -2.168404E-19 0.000000E+00 *

* 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 2.180939E-01 1.663935E+00 -1.387779E-17 0.000000E+00 *

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 141
Single Level Superelement Analysis

* 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -2.168404E-19 -1.387779E-17 3.125090E-01 0.000000E+00 *

* -2.180939E-01 2.168404E-19 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 1.976444E+00 *

* 1.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 *

* 0.000000E+00 1.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 *

* 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 1.000000E+00 *

DIRECTION

MASS AXIS SYSTEM (S) MASS X-C.G. Y-C.G. Z-C.G.

X 3.166560E-02 0.000000E+00 6.887407E+00 0.000000E+00

Y 3.166560E-02 6.847823E-18 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00

Z 3.166560E-02 6.847823E-18 6.887407E+00 0.000000E+00

I(S)

* 1.618332E-01 1.238432E-17 0.000000E+00 *

* 1.238432E-17 3.125090E-01 0.000000E+00 *

* 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 4.743421E-01 *

I(Q)

* 1.618332E-01 *

* 3.125090E-01 *

* 4.743421E-01 *

* 1.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 *

* 0.000000E+00 1.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 *

* 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 1.000000E+00 *

Listing 3-1 Grid Point Generator Output for Baseline Mode

RESULTANTS ABOUT ORIGIN OF SUPERELEMENT BASIC COORDINATE SYSTEM IN SUPERELEMENT BASIC SYSTEM COORDINATES.

OLOAD RESULTANT

SUBCASE/ LOAD

DAREA ID TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

101 FX 0.000000E+00 ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00

FY ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- 0.000000E+00

FZ ---- ---- -3.200000E+01 -2.560000E+02 -4.440892E-16 ----

MX ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- ----

MY ---- ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00 ----

MZ ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00

TOTALS 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -3.200000E+01 -2.560000E+02 -4.440892E-16 0.000000E+00

201 FX 0.000000E+00 ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00

FY ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- 0.000000E+00

FZ ---- ---- 4.000000E+00 4.000000E+01 0.000000E+00 ----

MX ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- ----

Main Index
 142 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Baseline Static Example using Patran

MY ---- ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00 ----

MZ ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00

TOTALS 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 4.000000E+00 4.000000E+01 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00

301 FX 0.000000E+00 ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00

FY ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- 0.000000E+00

FZ ---- ---- 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 2.080000E+01 ----

MX ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- ----

MY ---- ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00 ----

MZ ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00

TOTALS 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 2.080000E+01 0.000000E+00

Listing 3-2 OLOAD Resultant for Baseline Mode

*** SYSTEM INFORMATION MESSAGE 4159 (DFMSA)

THE DECOMPOSITION OF KLL YIELDS A MAXIMUM MATRIX-TO-FACTOR-DIAGONAL RATIO OF 1.133766E+03

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 5293 (SSG3A)

FOR DATA BLOCK KLL

LOAD SEQ. NO. EPSILON EXTERNAL WORK EPSILONS LARGER THAN 0.001 ARE FLAGGED WITH ASTERISKS

1 -4.6426305E-12 4.9504608E-02

2 -4.5038209E-12 1.5267804E-03

3 -2.1373923E-12 1.2906785E-03

Listing 3-3 Residual Solution Diagnostics for Baseline Model

RESULTANTS ABOUT ORIGIN OF SUPERELEMENT BASIC COORDINATE SYSTEM IN SUPERELEMENT BASIC SYSTEM COORDINATES.

SPCFORCE RESULTANT

SUBCASE/ LOAD

DAREA ID TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

101 FX 0.000000E+00 ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00

FY ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- 0.000000E+00

FZ ---- ---- 3.200000E+01 0.000000E+00 4.849454E-12 ----

MX ---- ---- ---- 2.560000E+02 ---- ----

MY ---- ---- ---- ---- 6.487255E-12 ----

MZ ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00

TOTALS 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 3.200000E+01 2.560000E+02 1.133671E-11 0.000000E+00

201 FX 0.000000E+00 ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00

FY ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- 0.000000E+00

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 143
Single Level Superelement Analysis

FZ ---- ---- -4.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -1.151745E-12 ----

MX ---- ---- ---- -4.000000E+01 ---- ----

MY ---- ---- ---- ---- -1.540990E-12 ----

MZ ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00

TOTALS 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -4.000000E+00 -4.000000E+01 -2.692735E-12 0.000000E+00

301 FX 0.000000E+00 ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00

FY ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- 0.000000E+00

FZ ---- ---- 7.709389E-13 0.000000E+00 -8.907434E+00 ----

MX ---- ---- ---- -2.398082E-13 ---- ----

MY ---- ---- ---- ---- -1.189257E+01 ----

MZ ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00

TOTALS 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 7.709389E-13 -2.398082E-13 -2.080000E+01 0.000000E+00

Listing 3-4 SPCFORCE Resultants for Baseline Model

MAXIMUM SPCFORCES

SUBCASE/

DAREA ID T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

101 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 1.6000000E+01 1.2800000E+02 2.3944511E+01 0.0000000E+00

201 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 2.0000000E+00 2.0000000E+01 3.7587638E+00 0.0000000E+00

301 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 1.1134293E+01 2.4154820E+00 5.9462829E+00 0.0000000E+00

MAXIMUM DISPLACEMENTS

SUBCASE/

DAREA ID T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

101 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 4.2660399E-03 5.5805832E-04 3.4896220E-05 0.0000000E+00

201 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 7.6339021E-04 9.9121207E-05 1.6829077E-05 0.0000000E+00

301 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 6.4533926E-04 4.1716805E-05 8.6961598E-05 0.0000000E+00

MAXIMUM APPLIED LOADS

SUBCASE/

DAREA ID T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

101 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 6.3999999E-01 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00

201 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 2.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00

301 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 2.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00

Listing 3-5 Maximum SPCFORCES, DISPLACEMENTS and APPLIED LOADS for Baseline Model

Main Index
 144 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Baseline Static Example using Patran

Figure 3-7 Deflections for Pressure Load – Baseline Model

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 145
Single Level Superelement Analysis

Figure 3-8 Deflections for In Phase Point Loads – Baseline Model

Main Index
 146 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Baseline Static Example using Patran

Figure 3-9 Deflections for Opposing Point Loads – Baseline Model

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 147
Single Level Superelement Analysis

Figure 3-10 Stress Tensor for Pressure Load (max=1.79E+3) – Baseline Model

Main Index
 148 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Baseline Static Example using Patran

Figure 3-11 Stress Tensor for In-Phase Loads (Max = 2.87E+02) – Baseline Model

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 149
Single Level Superelement Analysis

Figure 3-12 Stress Tensor for Opposing Loads (Max = 1.59E+02) – Baseline Model

Single-Level Analysis Using List Superelements

The list superelement equivalent will be generated in Patran. Of the list superelement methods, Patran
supports BEGIN BULK with SESET.

Static Example using Patran. (flyswatter)

The Patran definition of superelements is based on Groups. Therefore, the first step in defining
superelement is to define Groups. For the example problem /doc/seug/chapter3/baseline/baseline.bdf, the
model was defined with different property sets. Patran has a convenient method to create groups from
property sets as shown in the following figure. A session file for creating these groups is included in
/doc/seug/chapter3/create-group.ses

Main Index
 150 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single-Level Analysis Using List Superelements

Figure 3-13 Generating Groups from Property Sets

The result of the above action will create a screen similar to the following:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 151
Single Level Superelement Analysis

Figure 3-14 Result of Creating Groups from Properties

Note that the user can easily modify the group colors by changing them in the Display Options for Entity
Color/Label/Render Form. Of course, this step is completely optional for the user.

Main Index
 152 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single-Level Analysis Using List Superelements

Figure 3-15 Example of Modifying Group Colors

After the groups are created, it is simple to define the superelements. On the Meshing Tab, the user selects
the Superelement Icon. The superelement form is straight forward. The user enters a name, or label, for the
superelement and then selects the desired group. Note, to specify a unique superelement ID associated with
each superelement, the user can “embed” a number. To do this, the label should include “.##” at the end.
The “.” is a delimeter telling Patran that the following number “##” is to be encoded as the SEID when
writing the SESET entry. For example, a label of “SE.10” will generate SESET entries with SEID=10.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 153
Single Level Superelement Analysis

Figure 3-16 Example of Generating Superelements with Embedded SEID

In this example, each group associated with a pshell id is made into a superelement, with the exception of
pshell.10, which is designated at the residual structure. So, pshell.1 = SE.10, pshell.2 = SE.20, etc. For the
user following along in Patran, a session file to create the superelements is located at
/doc/seug/chapter3/create-se.ses (Note: this assumes the groups were created as described above – if not,
unexpected results will occur).
The “Select Boundary Nodes…” button allows the user to select the boundary nodes of a superelement.
Patran will automatically select boundary nodes based on the element connectivity. However, for special
cases the user may want to add additional boundary nodes or clarify the boundary notes. In this case the
Patran form is convenient for selecting the additional nodes. The “Get Default Boundary Nodes” will
automatically populate the “Selected Boundary Nodes” list box with the nodes that Patran found on the
boundary. The user can add or modify these nodes as necessary.

Main Index
 154 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single-Level Analysis Using List Superelements

Figure 3-17 Form to Modify Boundary Node Definition

Now that the superelements are defined, a superelement analysis can be performed. Note that by default,
Patran DOES NOT write a superelement model. The superelements must be selected by pressing the “Select
Superelements” button and selecting all of the superelements. Also note, that by default, a PART
superelement will be written by Patran. In order to obtain a list superelement defined with BEGIN BULK
and SESET, the user must unselect the “Write Part Superelement” toggle.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 155
Single Level Superelement Analysis

Figure 3-18 Example of Selecting SESET Superelements for an Analysis

Since this model will be compared to the baseline model, the user will want to specify the “Node i.d. for Wt.
Gener.” as 0. Also, as described earlier, the output format will be op2. These can be defined on the Solution
Parameters form.

Main Index
 156 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single-Level Analysis Using List Superelements

Figure 3-19 Defining Node for Grid Point Weight Generator and OP2 File Format

Finally, the use must select the subcases associated with the baseline model. This is easily accomplished with
the “Subcase Select” button and its subordinate form.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 157
Single Level Superelement Analysis

Figure 3-20 Select the Same Subcases as the Baseline Model

The exported file (doc/seug/chapter3/seset/seset.bdf) will have the SESET entries defined. Recall that the
SESET entries define the interior grids associated with a superelement. Reviewing the list below (refer to
Figure 3-3 and Figure 3-13) confirms that Patran has written the desired SESET entries.
A more detailed view of the interior and exterior grids for Superelement 10 bears this out. The SESET entry
includes all grids associated to superelement 10 except 35 and 36, which belong to superelement 10, but are
exterior grids.

Main Index
 158 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single-Level Analysis Using List Superelements

Figure 3-21 Exterior Grids to Superelement 10

$ SE.10

SESET 10 33 34 37 38

SESET 10 45 THRU 50

SESET 10 57 THRU 62

SESET 10 69 THRU 74

SESET 10 81 THRU 86

SESET 10 93 THRU 98

$ SE.20

SESET 20 39 40 43 44

SESET 20 51 THRU 56

SESET 20 63 THRU 68

SESET 20 75 THRU 80

SESET 20 87 THRU 92

SESET 20 99 THRU 104

$ SE.30

SESET 30 29 30

$ SE.40

SESET 40 31 32

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 159
Single Level Superelement Analysis

$ SE.50

SESET 50 9 THRU 12

SESET 50 21 22

$ SE.60

SESET 60 15 THRU 18

SESET 60 25 26

$ SE.70

SESET 70 1 THRU 8

Listing 3-6 SESET Entries Associated with List Superelement

After running doc/seug/chapter3/seset/seset.bdf, the .f06 file and results can be interrogated. The first thing
is the SEMAP. This indicates the processing order and the superelement tree. Note that every superelement
has a “DOWNSTREAM SE” of 0 (or the residual) confirming that this is a single-level superelement tree.

SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE

(SORTED BY SEID)

INDEX SUPERELEMENT PROCESS ORDER DOWNSTREAM SE SUPERELEMENT TYPE

0 0 8 0 RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

1 10 1 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

2 20 2 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

3 30 3 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

4 40 4 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

5 50 5 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

6 60 6 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

7 70 7 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE

(SORTED BY PROCESS ORDER)

INDEX SUPERELEMENT PROCESS ORDER DOWNSTREAM SE SUPERELEMENT TYPE

0 10 1 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

1 20 2 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

2 30 3 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

3 40 4 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

4 50 5 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

5 60 6 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

6 70 7 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

7 0 8 0 RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

TABLE OF DOWNSTREAM CONNECTIONS FOR EACH SUPERELEMENT

INDEX SE ID ID-S OF DOWNSTREAM CONNECTIONS IN DOWNSTREAM ORDER

1 10 0

Main Index
 160 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single-Level Analysis Using List Superelements

2 20 0

3 30 0

4 40 0

5 50 0

6 60 0

7 70 0

S U P E R E L E M E N T T R E E

( NO. LEVELS = 1 NO. TIPS = 7 * = PROCESS ORDER )

TIP L E V E L N U M B E R

INDEX

-1-

1 10

1*

2 20

2*

3 30

3*

4 40

4*

5 50

5*

6 60

6*

7 70

7*

UNIQUE SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST ------------------------------------ CONNECTED TO --------------

(SORTED BY SE-ID)

COUNT 1ST GRD TYPE INT.-TO-SE SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID S

1 13 0 50 70

2 27 0 40 60

2 35 0 10 30

2 19 0 30 50

1 24 0 60

1 23 0 50

1 14 0 60 70

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 161
Single Level Superelement Analysis

2 41 0 20 40

28 33 10

6 34 10 0

6 40 20 0

28 39 20

2 29 30 0

2 31 40 0

6 9 50 0

6 15 60 0

6 1 70

2 7 70 0

Listing 3-7 SEMAP of Process Order for List Superelement Example

Next comes the listing of interior grids, exterior grids, and elements associated with each superelement:
SUPERELEMENT 10

LIST OF INTERIOR GRID POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF INTERIOR POINTS = 34 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 33 34 37 38 45 46 47 48 49 50

11 57 58 59 60 61 62 69 70 71 72

21 73 74 81 82 83 84 85 86 93 94

31 95 96 97 98

SUPERELEMENT 10

LIST OF EXTERIOR POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF EXTERIOR POINTS = 2 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 35 36

SUPERELEMENT 10

LIST OF ELEMENT ID-S ( TOTAL NO. OF ELEMENTS = 25 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

11 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37

21 38 39 40 41 42

… continues for each SEID

Listing 3-8 SEMAP of Interior Grids, Exterior Grids, and Elements for Each Superelement

Next, the partitioned geometry and bulk data associated to each superelement is written to the output2 file.
Refer to Figure 1-9 for a schematic representation of these steps. The following table lists the datablocks that

Main Index
 162 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single-Level Analysis Using List Superelements

are output for each superelement. For a more detailed description of each datablock refer to the DMAP
Programmer’s Guide or the nddl listings in the MSC Nastran delivery.

Table 3-2 Data Written to Output2 (PARAM,POST,-1) by PHASE 0 Processing

Datablock Name NDDL Datablock Name Data Contents
GEOM1X GEOM168 Geometry data (v68 format): CORD2x, GRID, POINT
GEOM2X GEOM201 Table of Bulk Data entries related to element connectivity
for MSC Nastran Version 2001. (CBAR, CBEAM,
CQUAD4, etc.)
GEOM3X GEOM301 Table of Bulk Data entry images related to static and
thermal loads for MSC Nastran Version 2001.
GEOM4X GEOM4705 Table of Bulk Data entry images related to constraints for
MSC Nastran Version 70.5
EPTX EPT01 Element property table for MSC Nastran Version 2001
MPTS MPTS Table of Bulk Data entry images related to material
properties and nonlinear solution parameters (MAT1,
MAT2, NLPARM, etc.)
DITS DIT Direct Input Tables (TABLE1D, TABLE2D,
TABRND1, etc.)
DYNAMICS DYNAMIC Table of Bulk Data entry images related to dynamics
(DLOAD, DPHASE, EIGRL, FREQ1, etc.)
PCOMPT PCOMPT Supplemental data related to composites elements.
EDTS EDT Data related Aeroelastic entries (ACMODL, AECOMP,
SPLINEi, etc.)
BGPDTX BGPDT68 Basic grid point definition table (Pre-Version 69)
Contains a list of all grid points in internal sort, with (for
grid points) their x, y, z locations in the basic coordinate
system along with a displacement coordinate system
identification number. (output only if PARAM
POSTEXT='YES')

The following table lists the Phase 0 data written to the .op2 for this example. Note that datablocks that are
null are not output.
^^^ USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 9044 (PHASE0)

^^^ BULK DATA AND CASE CONTROL PARTITIONING, RESTART CHECKING, AND UNDEFORMED PLOTTING IS

^^^ INITIATED FOR SUPERELEMENT 10

*** USER WARNING MESSAGE 2053 (GP4)

UNDEFINED SINGLE-POINT CONSTRAINT SET 1

*** SYSTEM WARNING MESSAGE 3002 (MAKEOLD)

EOF ENCOUNTERED WHILE READING DATA BLOCK GEOM2S (FILE 101) IN SUBROUTINE MAKoG2

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 163
Single Level Superelement Analysis

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4114 (OUTPX2)

DATA BLOCK GEOM1X WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 12 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT USING NDDL DESCRIPTION FOR GEOM16, TRL =

101 0 0 8 0 0

NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS GEOM1

(MAXIMUM POSSIBLE FORTRAN RECORD SIZE = 16386 WORDS.)

(MAXIMUM SIZE OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN = 291 WORDS.)

(NUMBER OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN = 15 RECORDS.)

(TOTAL DATA WRITTEN FOR DATA BLOCK = 315 WORDS.)

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4114 (OUTPX2)

DATA BLOCK GEOM2X WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 12 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT USING NDDL DESCRIPTION FOR GEOM20, TRL =

102 0 0 0 8192 0

NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS GEOM2

(MAXIMUM POSSIBLE FORTRAN RECORD SIZE = 16386 WORDS.)

(MAXIMUM SIZE OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN = 353 WORDS.)

(NUMBER OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN = 15 RECORDS.)

(TOTAL DATA WRITTEN FOR DATA BLOCK = 377 WORDS.)

1 MSC NASTRAN JOB CREATED ON 02-APR-11 AT 08:53:17 APRIL 2, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 7/15/10 PAGE
16

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM SUPERELEMENT 10

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4114 (OUTPX2)

DATA BLOCK GEOM3X WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 12 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT USING NDDL DESCRIPTION FOR GEOM30, TRL =

103 0 0 64 8 256

NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS GEOM3

(MAXIMUM POSSIBLE FORTRAN RECORD SIZE = 16386 WORDS.)

(MAXIMUM SIZE OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN = 303 WORDS.)

(NUMBER OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN = 30 RECORDS.)

(TOTAL DATA WRITTEN FOR DATA BLOCK = 380 WORDS.)

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4114 (OUTPX2)

DATA BLOCK GEOM4X WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 12 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT USING NDDL DESCRIPTION FOR GEOM470, TRL =

104 0 0 0 32 16

NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS GEOM4

(MAXIMUM POSSIBLE FORTRAN RECORD SIZE = 16386 WORDS.)

(MAXIMUM SIZE OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN = 7 WORDS.)

(NUMBER OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN = 25 RECORDS.)

(TOTAL DATA WRITTEN FOR DATA BLOCK = 48 WORDS.)

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4114 (OUTPX2)

DATA BLOCK EPTX WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 12 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT USING NDDL DESCRIPTION FOR EPT0, TRL =

105 0 512 0 0 0

NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS EPT

(MAXIMUM POSSIBLE FORTRAN RECORD SIZE = 16386 WORDS.)

(MAXIMUM SIZE OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN = 14 WORDS.)

Main Index
 164 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single-Level Analysis Using List Superelements

(NUMBER OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN = 20 RECORDS.)

(TOTAL DATA WRITTEN FOR DATA BLOCK = 45 WORDS.)

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4114 (OUTPX2)

DATA BLOCK MPTS WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 12 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT USING NDDL DESCRIPTION FOR MPT, TRL =

101 32768 0 0 0 0

NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS MPTS

(MAXIMUM POSSIBLE FORTRAN RECORD SIZE = 16386 WORDS.)

(MAXIMUM SIZE OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN = 15 WORDS.)

(NUMBER OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN = 20 RECORDS.)

(TOTAL DATA WRITTEN FOR DATA BLOCK = 46 WORDS.)

^^^ USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 9044 (PHASE0)

^^^ BULK DATA AND CASE CONTROL PARTITIONING, RESTART CHECKING, AND UNDEFORMED PLOTTING IS

^^^ INITIATED FOR SUPERELEMENT 20

[Continues for each superelement]

Listing 3-9 PHASE 0 Output2 Datablocks.

After the Phase 0 processing is complete for each superelement, the Phase 1 processing begins. Again a
superelement loop is used and each superelement is processed in the order determined by the SEMAP. The
Phase 1 processing includes the following operations:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 165
Single Level Superelement Analysis

Figure 3-22 Phase 1 Superelement Reduction Process Schematic

To relate this process to the operations performed by MSC Nastran and the associated output in the .f06 file,
this example performs the following operations:
 Formulation of global stiffness matrix,  K jj  , for the elements of superelement
 Element Matrix Generation (EMG)
 Element Matrix Assembly (EMA)
 Formulation of global mass matrix,  M jj  , for each superelement
 .f06 output of Grid Point Weight Generator (GPWG)

Main Index
 166 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single-Level Analysis Using List Superelements

 Formulation of global loads matrix  K jj  , for each superelement

 .f06 output of OLOAD RESULTANT
 Static Condensation to boundary stiffness  K aa  , for each superelement
 .f06 output for statistics on DCMP of KOO – refer to Equation (1-6)
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 7325 (SEP2DR)

PROCESSING OF SUPERELEMENT 10 IS NOW INITIATED.

^^^ USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 9045 (PHASE1DR)

^^^ PHASE 1 - SUPERELEMENT GENERATION, ASSEMBLY AND REDUCTION.

MSC NASTRAN JOB CREATED ON 02-APR-11 AT 08:53:17 APRIL 2, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 7/15/10 CREATED
BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM SUPERELEMENT 10

O U T P U T F R O M G R I D P O I N T W E I G H T G E N E R A T O R

REFERENCE POINT = 0

M O

* 1.172800E-02 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -9.382400E-02 *

* 0.000000E+00 1.172800E-02 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -3.752960E-02 *

* 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 1.172800E-02 9.382400E-02 3.752960E-02 0.000000E+00 *

* 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 9.382400E-02 7.674803E-01 3.002368E-01 0.000000E+00 *

* 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 3.752960E-02 3.002368E-01 1.369830E-01 0.000000E+00 *

* -9.382400E-02 -3.752960E-02 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 9.044634E-01 *

* 1.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 *

* 0.000000E+00 1.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 *

* 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 1.000000E+00 *

DIRECTION

MASS AXIS SYSTEM (S) MASS X-C.G. Y-C.G. Z-C.G.

X 1.172800E-02 0.000000E+00 8.000000E+00 0.000000E+00

Y 1.172800E-02 -3.200000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00

Z 1.172800E-02 -3.200000E+00 8.000000E+00 0.000000E+00

I(S)

* 1.688832E-02 5.551115E-17 0.000000E+00 *

* 5.551115E-17 1.688832E-02 0.000000E+00 *

* 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 3.377664E-02 *

I(Q)

* 1.688832E-02 *

* 1.688832E-02 *

* 3.377664E-02 *

* 1.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 *

* 0.000000E+00 1.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 *

* 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 1.000000E+00 *

MSC NASTRAN JOB CREATED ON 02-APR-11 AT 08:53:17 APRIL 2, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 7/15/10

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 167
Single Level Superelement Analysis

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM SUPERELEMENT 10

RESULTANTS ABOUT ORIGIN OF SUPERELEMENT BASIC COORDINATE SYSTEM IN SUPERELEMENT BASIC SYSTEM COORDINATES.

OLOAD RESULTANT

SUBCASE/ LOAD

DAREA ID TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

1 FX 0.000000E+00 ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00

FY ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- 0.000000E+00

FZ ---- ---- 2.000000E+00 2.000000E+01 1.040000E+01 ----

MX ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- ----

MY ---- ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00 ----

MZ ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00

TOTALS 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 2.000000E+00 2.000000E+01 1.040000E+01 0.000000E+00

2 FX 0.000000E+00 ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00

FY ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- 0.000000E+00

FZ ---- ---- 2.000000E+00 2.000000E+01 1.040000E+01 ----

MX ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- ----

MY ---- ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00 ----

MZ ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00

TOTALS 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 2.000000E+00 2.000000E+01 1.040000E+01 0.000000E+00

3 FX 0.000000E+00 ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00

FY ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- 0.000000E+00

FZ ---- ---- -1.600000E+01 -1.280000E+02 -5.120000E+01 ----

MX ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- ----

MY ---- ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00 ----

MZ ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00

TOTALS 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -1.600000E+01 -1.280000E+02 -5.120000E+01 0.000000E+00

*** SYSTEM INFORMATION MESSAGE 4159 (DFMSA)

THE DECOMPOSITION OF KOO YIELDS A MAXIMUM MATRIX-TO-FACTOR-DIAGONAL RATIO OF 5.006693E+00

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 5293 (SSG3A)

FOR DATA BLOCK KOO

LOAD SEQ. NO. EPSILON EXTERNAL WORK EPSILONS LARGER THAN 0.001 ARE FLAGGED WITH ASTERI

1 8.5530295E-15 1.1700904E-05

2 6.9137383E-15 1.1700904E-05

3 6.9176406E-15 9.7933684E-05

MSC NASTRAN JOB CREATED ON 02-APR-11 AT 08:53:17 APRIL 2, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 7/15/10

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM SUPERELEMENT 20

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 7325 (SEP2DR)

PROCESSING OF SUPERELEMENT 20 IS NOW INITIATED.

^^^ USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 9045 (PHASE1DR)

^^^ PHASE 1 - SUPERELEMENT GENERATION, ASSEMBLY AND REDUCTION.

Main Index
 168 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single-Level Analysis Using List Superelements

[Continues for each superelement]

Listing 3-10 Phase 1 Superelement Processing (typical)

Note that the results are on a superelement basis, so we cannot compare the Grid Point Weight Generator or
OLOAD RESULTANT to the baseline run. Also note that these tables do not contain the data from
upstream superelements, so the residual structure will only contain mass and loads associated with the
processing of its partition.
For some superelements, there will be no loading. A warning message 3204 is provided to the user. If there
are not supposed to be any loads associated with the superelement, then the message can be safely ignored.

MSC NASTRAN JOB CREATED ON 02-APR-11 AT 08:53:17 APRIL 2, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 7/15/10

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM SUPERELEMENT 40

*** USER WARNING MESSAGE 3204 (SSG1)

UNABLE TO FIND SELECTED SET ( 303) IN TABLE (SLT ) IN SUBROUTINE (SSG1).

*** USER WARNING MESSAGE 3204 (SSG1)

UNABLE TO FIND SELECTED SET ( 305) IN TABLE (SLT ) IN SUBROUTINE (SSG1).

*** USER WARNING MESSAGE 3204 (SSG1)

UNABLE TO FIND SELECTED SET ( 307) IN TABLE (SLT ) IN SUBROUTINE (SSG1).

Listing 3-11 Example of Warning Message 3204 Issued when there are no Loads on a Superelement

After all of the upstream superelements are processed, the data is brought into the residual structure and
solved. Data recovery is performed on the residual:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 169
Single Level Superelement Analysis

Figure 3-23 Residual Structure Processing Schematic

Note that in static analysis, the  K aa  matix is further reduced to the  K ll  matrix in order to account for
any dof associated with the reference set (R-set), which is most commonly associated with inertia relief.

Main Index
 170 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single-Level Analysis Using List Superelements

Thus, the decomposition statistics are associated with matrix  K ll  . After the solution of the residual,
normal back expansion to the G-Set matrices is performed and data recovery is calculated. The results are
also placed on the output2 file. In this case, since there are no SPC Forces in the residual structure, the output
is for displacement and stress.

Table 3-3 Result Datablock Names for Output2

Data Block Name Output Quantity
OUG1 Displacements
OES1X1 Element Stresses
OQG1 SPC Forces

For a more comprehensive listing of output2 datablocks, refer to PARAM,POST in the Quick Reference
Guide.
MSC NASTRAN JOB CREATED ON 02-APR-11 AT 08:53:17 APRIL 2, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 7/15/10

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM SUPERELEMENT 0

SUBCASE 1

*** SYSTEM INFORMATION MESSAGE 4159 (DFMSA)

THE DECOMPOSITION OF KLL YIELDS A MAXIMUM MATRIX-TO-FACTOR-DIAGONAL RATIO OF 2.280555E+02

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 5293 (SSG3A)

FOR DATA BLOCK KLL

LOAD SEQ. NO. EPSILON EXTERNAL WORK EPSILONS LARGER THAN 0.001 ARE FLAGGED WITH ASTERISKS

1 -2.3362402E-13 1.5033779E-03

2 -7.3558232E-14 1.2672746E-03

3 -1.0165675E-13 4.9308721E-02

MSC NASTRAN JOB CREATED ON 02-APR-11 AT 08:53:17 APRIL 2, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 7/15/10

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM SUPERELEMENT 0

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 7321 (SEDRDR)

DATA RECOVERY FOR SUPERELEMENT 0 IS NOW INITIATED.

MSC NASTRAN JOB CREATED ON 02-APR-11 AT 08:53:17 APRIL 2, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 7/15/10

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM SUPERELEMENT 0

MAXIMUM DISPLACEMENTS

SUBCASE/

DAREA ID T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

1 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 3.4402413E-04 9.5935357E-05 1.5204940E-05 0.0000000E+00

2 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 3.4337837E-04 3.8530961E-05 8.5337437E-05 0.0000000E+00

3 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 1.9924592E-03 5.5037666E-04 2.8907216E-05 0.0000000E+00

MSC NASTRAN JOB CREATED ON 02-APR-11 AT 08:53:17 APRIL 2, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 7/15/10

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM SUPERELEMENT 0

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 171
Single Level Superelement Analysis

MAXIMUM APPLIED LOADS

SUBCASE/

DAREA ID T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

1 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00

2 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00

3 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4114 (OUTPX2)

DATA BLOCK OUG1 WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 12 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT USING NDDL DESCRIPTION FOR OUG, TRL =

101 0 288 0 0 0

NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS OUG1

(MAXIMUM POSSIBLE FORTRAN RECORD SIZE = 16386 WORDS.)

(MAXIMUM SIZE OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN = 146 WORDS.)

(NUMBER OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN = 40 RECORDS.)

(TOTAL DATA WRITTEN FOR DATA BLOCK = 775 WORDS.)

DOUBLE FLYSWATTER MODEL APRIL 2, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 7/15/10

IN PHASE LOADS SUPERELEMENT 0

SUBCASE 1

D I S P L A C E M E N T V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

13 G 0.0 0.0 1.142174E-04 5.814735E-05 6.925292E-07 0.0

14 G 0.0 0.0 1.142174E-04 5.814735E-05 -6.925292E-07 0.0

19 G 0.0 0.0 1.939904E-04 8.944685E-05 9.119628E-06 0.0

20 G 0.0 0.0 1.859524E-04 8.734564E-05 8.727956E-06 0.0

Etc.

DOUBLE FLYSWATTER MODEL APRIL 2, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 7/15/10

IN PHASE LOADS SUPERELEMENT 0 , 1

SUBCASE 1

S T R E S S E S I N Q U A D R I L A T E R A L E L E M E N T S ( Q U A D 4 ) OPTION = BILIN

ELEMENT FIBER STRESSES IN ELEMENT COORD SYSTEM PRINCIPAL STRESSES (ZERO SHEAR)

ID GRID-ID DISTANCE NORMAL-X NORMAL-Y SHEAR-XY ANGLE MAJOR MINOR VON MISES

5 CEN/4 -5.000000E-01 4.440042E+01 5.761679E+01 -3.128198E-11 -90.0000 5.761679E+01 4.440042E+01 5.227697E+01

5.000000E-01-4.440042E+01 -5.761679E+01 3.128198E-11 0.0000 -4.440042E+01 -5.761679E+01 5.227697E+01

13 -5.000000E-01 4.325489E+01 5.761679E+01 -3.127998E-11 -90.0000 5.761679E+01 4.325489E+01 5.194682E+01

5.000000E-01-4.325489E+01 -5.761679E+01 3.127998E-11 0.0000 -4.325489E+01 -5.761679E+01 5.194682E+01

14 -5.000000E-01 4.325489E+01 5.761679E+01 -3.128264E-11 -90.0000 5.761679E+01 4.325489E+01 5.194682E+01

5.000000E-01-4.325489E+01 -5.761679E+01 3.128264E-11 0.0000 -4.325489E+01 -5.761679E+01 5.194682E+01

etc.

Main Index
 172 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single-Level Analysis Using List Superelements

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4114 (OUTPX2)

DATA BLOCK OES1X1 WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 12 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT USING NDDL DESCRIPTION FOR OES1X, TRL =

101 63 4 2 11 0 1

NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS OES1X1

(MAXIMUM POSSIBLE FORTRAN RECORD SIZE = 16386 WORDS.)

(MAXIMUM SIZE OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN = 146 WORDS.)

(NUMBER OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN = 40 RECORDS.)

(TOTAL DATA WRITTEN FOR DATA BLOCK = 748 WORDS.)

Listing 3-12 Solution and Data Recovery of the Residual Structure

Following the data recovery of the residual, the boundary solution for each superelement is partitioned, and
data recovery for the superelement is performed. Schematically, this is represented as:

Figure 3-24 Superelement Data Recovery Schematic

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 173
Single Level Superelement Analysis

In the MSC Nastran .f06 file, the data recovery for each superelement is as follows:
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 7321 (SEDRDR)

DATA RECOVERY FOR SUPERELEMENT 10 IS NOW INITIATED.

MSC NASTRAN JOB CREATED ON 02-APR-11 AT 08:53:17 APRIL 2, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 7/15/10

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM SUPERELEMENT 10

MAXIMUM DISPLACEMENTS

SUBCASE/

DAREA ID T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

1 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 7.6338986E-04 9.9121149E-05 1.6829072E-05 0.0000000E+00

2 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 6.4533821E-04 4.1716754E-05 8.6961452E-05 0.0000000E+00

3 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 4.2660381E-03 5.5805803E-04 2.8907216E-05 0.0000000E+00

MSC NASTRAN JOB CREATED ON 02-APR-11 AT 08:53:17 APRIL 2, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 7/15/10

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM SUPERELEMENT 10

MAXIMUM APPLIED LOADS

SUBCASE/

DAREA ID T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

1 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 2.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00

2 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 2.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00

3 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 6.3999999E-01 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4114 (OUTPX2)

DATA BLOCK OUG1 WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 12 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT USING NDDL DESCRIPTION FOR OUG, TRL =

101 0 864 0 0 0

NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS OUG1

(MAXIMUM POSSIBLE FORTRAN RECORD SIZE = 16386 WORDS.)

(MAXIMUM SIZE OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN = 288 WORDS.)

(NUMBER OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN = 40 RECORDS.)

(TOTAL DATA WRITTEN FOR DATA BLOCK = 1351 WORDS.)

DOUBLE FLYSWATTER MODEL APRIL 2, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 7/15/10

IN PHASE LOADS SUPERELEMENT 10, 1

SUBCASE 1

D I S P L A C E M E N T V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

33 G 0.0 0.0 3.683764E-04 9.794447E-05 1.543324E-05 0.0

34 G 0.0 0.0 3.560836E-04 9.801662E-05 1.548379E-05 0.0

35 G 0.0 0.0 3.440241E-04 9.593536E-05 1.486124E-05 0.0

36 G 0.0 0.0 3.321574E-04 9.586434E-05 1.520494E-05 0.0

37 G 0.0 0.0 3.192997E-04 9.717572E-05 1.586828E-05 0.0

etc.

Main Index
 174 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single-Level Analysis Using List Superelements

DOUBLE FLYSWATTER MODEL APRIL 2, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 7/15/10 PAGE 73

IN PHASE LOADS SUPERELEMENT 10 , 1

SUBCASE 1

S T R E S S E S I N Q U A D R I L A T E R A L E L E M E N T S ( Q U A D 4 ) OPTION = BILIN

ELEMENT FIBER STRESSES IN ELEMENT COORD SYSTEM PRINCIPAL STRESSES (ZERO SHEAR)

ID GRID-ID DISTANCE NORMAL-X NORMAL-Y SHEAR-XY ANGLE MAJOR MINOR VON MISES

18 CEN/4 -5.000000E-01 1.147215E+00 5.651187E-01 -1.174470E+00 -38.0409 2.066162E+00 -3.538281E-01 2.263909E+00

5.000000E-01 -1.147215E+00 -5.651187E-01 1.174470E+00 51.9591 3.538281E-01 -2.066162E+00 2.263909E+00

33 -5.000000E-01 -7.783450E-01 4.400495E+00 -1.174470E+00 -77.8013 4.654397E+00 -1.032246E+00 5.247230E+00

5.000000E-01 7.783450E-01 -4.400495E+00 1.174470E+00 12.1987 1.032246E+00 -4.654397E+00 5.247230E+00

34 -5.000000E-01 -7.783450E-01 -3.270258E+00 -1.174470E+00 -21.6541 -3.120555E-01 -3.736547E+00 3.590704E+00

5.000000E-01 7.783450E-01 3.270258E+00 1.174470E+00 68.3459 3.736547E+00 3.120555E-01 3.590704E+00

etc.

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4114 (OUTPX2)

DATA BLOCK OES1X1 WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 12 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT USING NDDL DESCRIPTION FOR OES1X, TRL =

101 63 4 2 11 0 1

NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS OES1X1

(MAXIMUM POSSIBLE FORTRAN RECORD SIZE = 16386 WORDS.)

(MAXIMUM SIZE OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN = 2175 WORDS.)

(NUMBER OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN = 40 RECORDS.)

(TOTAL DATA WRITTEN FOR DATA BLOCK = 7012 WORDS.)

Listing 3-13 Data Recovery for Superelements (typical)

RESULTANTS ABOUT ORIGIN OF SUPERELEMENT BASIC COORDINATE SYSTEM IN SUPERELEMENT BASIC SYSTEM COORDINATES.

SPCFORCE RESULTANT

SUBCASE/ LOAD

DAREA ID TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

1 FX 0.000000E+00 ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00

FY ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- 0.000000E+00

FZ ---- ---- -4.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -9.208634E-12 ----

MX ---- ---- ---- -4.000000E+01 ---- ----

MY ---- ---- ---- ---- -1.234923E-11 ----

MZ ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00

TOTALS 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -4.000000E+00 -4.000000E+01 -2.155787E-11 0.000000E+00

2 FX 0.000000E+00 ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00

FY ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- 0.000000E+00

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 175
Single Level Superelement Analysis

FZ ---- ---- -3.943512E-12 0.000000E+00 -8.907443E+00 ----

MX ---- ---- ---- -2.762679E-11 ---- ----

MY ---- ---- ---- ---- -1.189256E+01 ----

MZ ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00

TOTALS 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -3.943512E-12 -2.762679E-11 -2.080000E+01 0.000000E+00

3 FX 0.000000E+00 ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00

FY ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- 0.000000E+00

FZ ---- ---- 3.200000E+01 0.000000E+00 5.097167E-11 ----

MX ---- ---- ---- 2.560000E+02 ---- ----

MY ---- ---- ---- ---- 6.834711E-11 ----

MZ ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00

TOTALS 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 3.200000E+01 2.560000E+02 1.193188E-10 0.000000E+00

MSC NASTRAN JOB CREATED ON 02-APR-11 AT 08:53:17 APRIL 2, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 7/15/10

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM

MAXIMUM DISPLACEMENTS

SUBCASE/

DAREA ID T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

1 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 7.6338986E-04 9.9121149E-05 1.6829072E-05 0.0000000E+00

2 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 6.4533821E-04 4.1716754E-05 8.6961452E-05 0.0000000E+00

3 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 4.2660381E-03 5.5805803E-04 3.4896173E-05 0.0000000E+00

MSC NASTRAN JOB CREATED ON 02-APR-11 AT 08:53:17 APRIL 2, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 7/15/10

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM

MAXIMUM APPLIED LOADS

SUBCASE/

DAREA ID T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

1 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 2.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00

2 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 2.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00

3 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 6.3999999E-01 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00

MSC NASTRAN JOB CREATED ON 02-APR-11 AT 08:53:17 APRIL 2, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 7/15/10
CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM

RESULTANTS ABOUT ORIGIN OF SUPERELEMENT BASIC COORDINATE SYSTEM IN SUPERELEMENT BASIC SYSTEM COORDINATES.

APP LOAD RESULTANT

SUBCASE/ LOAD

DAREA ID TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

1 FX 0.000000E+00 ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00

FY ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- 0.000000E+00

FZ ---- ---- 4.000000E+00 4.000000E+01 0.000000E+00 ----

MX ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- ----

MY ---- ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00 ----

MZ ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00

TOTALS 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 4.000000E+00 4.000000E+01 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00

Main Index
 176 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single-Level Analysis Using List Superelements

2 FX 0.000000E+00 ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00

FY ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- 0.000000E+00

FZ ---- ---- 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 2.080000E+01 ----

MX ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- ----

MY ---- ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00 ----

MZ ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00

TOTALS 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 2.080000E+01 0.000000E+00

3 FX 0.000000E+00 ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00

FY ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- 0.000000E+00

FZ ---- ---- -3.200000E+01 -2.560000E+02 0.000000E+00 ----

MX ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- ----

MY ---- ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00 ----

MZ ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00

TOTALS 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -3.200000E+01 -2.560000E+02 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00

DOUBLE FLYSWATTER MODEL APRIL 2, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 7/15/10

IN PHASE LOADS

E Q U I L I B R I U M C H E C K

RESULTANT LOADS IN BASIC COORDINATE SYSTEM

SUBCASE REFERENCE LOAD T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

NO. POINT TYPE

1 ORIGIN APP-LOAD 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 4.000000E+00 4.000000E+01 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00

F-OF-SPC 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -4.000000E+00 -4.000000E+01 -2.155787E-11 0.000000E+00

------------- ------------- ------------- ------------- ------------- -------------

*TOTALS* 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -2.155787E-11 0.000000E+00

2 ORIGIN APP-LOAD 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 2.080000E+01 0.000000E+00

F-OF-SPC 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -3.943512E-12 -2.762679E-11 -2.080000E+01 0.000000E+00

------------- ------------- ------------- ------------- ------------- -------------

*TOTALS* 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -3.943512E-12 -2.762679E-11 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00

3 ORIGIN APP-LOAD 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -3.200000E+01 -2.560000E+02 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00

F-OF-SPC 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 3.200000E+01 2.560000E+02 1.193188E-10 0.000000E+00

------------- ------------- ------------- ------------- ------------- -------------

*TOTALS* 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 1.193188E-10 0.000000E+00

Listing 3-14 Listing

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 177
Single Level Superelement Analysis

Figure 3-25 Deflections for Pressure Loads – SESET Model

Figure 3-26 Deflections for In Phase Point Loads – SESET Model

Main Index
 178 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single-Level Analysis Using List Superelements

Figure 3-27 Deflections for Opposing Point Loads – SESET Model

Figure 3-28 Stress Tensor for Pressure Load (max = 1.79E+3) – SESET Model

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 179
Single Level Superelement Analysis

Figure 3-29 Stress Tensor for In-Phase Loads (Max = 2.87E+02) – SESET Model

Figure 3-30 Stress Tensor for Opposing Loads (Max = 1.59E+02) – SESET Model

Main Index
 180 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single-Level Analysis Using PART Superelements

Single-Level Analysis Using PART Superelements

The PART superelement equivalent will be generated in Patran.

Static Example using Patran (flyswatter)

The PART superelement process follows the list superelement process in Patran with the exception of writing
the input file. For the case of PART superelements, be sure that the “Write Part Superelement” box is checked
on the Select Superelements form:

Figure 3-31 Example of Selecting SESET Superelements for an Analysis

The resulting bulk data includes the residual bulk data followed by the BEGIN SUPER = SEID for each of
the superelements:
BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 181
Single Level Superelement Analysis

PARAM POST -1

PARAM GRDPNT 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

$ Elements and Element Properties for region : pshell.10

PSHELL 10 10 1. 10 10

$ Pset: "pshell.10" will be imported as: "pshell.10"

CQUAD4 5 10 13 14 24 23 0. 0.

$ Referenced Material Records

$ Material Record : mat1.10

$ Description of Material :

MAT1* 10 3.+7 1.15385+7 .3

* 7.33-4

$ Nodes of Group :

GRID 13 -.4 3.6 0.

GRID 14 .4 3.6 0.

GRID 23 -.4 4.4 0.

GRID 24 .4 4.4 0.

$ Loads for Load Case : _IN_PHASE_LOADS.SC201

$ Loads for Load Case : _OPPOSING_LOADS.SC301

$ Loads for Load Case : _PRESSURE_LOAD.SC101

$ Pressure Loads of Load Set : pload2.101.2D

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

$ Superelement Name: SE.10

BEGIN SUPER = 10

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST -1

PARAM GRDPNT 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

$ Elements and Element Properties for region : pshell.1

PSHELL 1 1 1. 1 1

$ Pset: "pshell.1" will be imported as: "pshell.1"

CQUAD4 18 1 33 34 46 45 0. 0.

CQUAD4 19 1 34 35 47 46 0. 0.

CQUAD4 20 1 35 36 48 47 0. 0.

CQUAD4 21 1 36 37 49 48 0. 0.

Etc.

GRID 97 -2. 10. 0.

GRID 98 -1.2 10. 0.

$ Loads for Load Case : _IN_PHASE_LOADS.SC201

LOAD 303 1. 1. 201

$ Loads for Load Case : _OPPOSING_LOADS.SC301

Main Index
 182 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single-Level Analysis Using PART Superelements

LOAD 305 1. 1. 301

$ Loads for Load Case : _PRESSURE_LOAD.SC101

LOAD 307 1. 1. 101

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : force.201

FORCE 201 93 0 2. 0. 0. 1.

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : force.301

FORCE 301 93 0 2. 0. 0. 1.

$ Pressure Loads of Load Set : pload2.101.2D

PLOAD4 101 18 -1. THRU 42

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

$ Superelement Name: SE.20

BEGIN SUPER = 20

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST -1

PARAM GRDPNT 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

$ Elements and Element Properties for region : pshell.2

PSHELL 2 2 1. 2 2

$ Pset: "pshell.2" will be imported as: "pshell.2"

CQUAD4 43 2 39 40 52 51 0. 0.

CQUAD4 44 2 40 41 53 52 0. 0.

CQUAD4 45 2 41 42 54 53 0. 0.

Listing 3-15 Partial Listing of PART Superelement Input File

The SEMAP is in a different format for the PART superelement than it is for the main bulk data section list
superelement. However, the partitions for these two models are exactly the same.
SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE (SORTED BY SEID)

PRIMARY PROCESS DOWNSTREAM

SUPERELEMENT SUPERELEMENT ORDER SUPERELEMENT TYPE LABEL

------------ ------------ ------- ------------ ----------------------------- ------------------------

0 0 8 0 RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

10 0 1 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

20 0 2 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

30 0 3 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

40 0 4 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

50 0 5 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

60 0 6 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

70 0 7 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE (SORTED BY PROCESS ORDER)

PRIMARY PROCESS DOWNSTREAM

SUPERELEMENT SUPERELEMENT ORDER SUPERELEMENT TYPE LABEL

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 183
Single Level Superelement Analysis

------------ ------------ ------- ------------ ----------------------------- ------------------------

10 0 1 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

20 0 2 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

30 0 3 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

40 0 4 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

50 0 5 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

60 0 6 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

70 0 7 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

0 0 8 0 RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

TABLE OF DOWNSTREAM SUPERELEMENTS FOR EACH SUPERELEMENT

SUPERELEMENT DOWNSTREAM SUPERELEMENTS IN DOWNSTREAM ORDER

------------ --------------------------------------------------------------------------------

10 0

20 0

30 0

40 0

50 0

60 0

70 0

MSC NASTRAN JOB CREATED ON 02-APR-11 AT 13:36:21 APRIL 2, 2011 MSC NASTR

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM

S U P E R E L E M E N T T R E E

( CONFIGURATION = SINGLE LEVEL NO. LEVELS = 1 NO. TIPS = 7 )

TIP LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL L

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -

1 10

2 20

3 30

4 40

5 50

6 60

7 70

MSC NASTRAN JOB CREATED ON 02-APR-11 AT 13:36:21 APRIL 2, 2011 MSC NASTR

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM

Main Index
 184 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single-Level Analysis Using PART Superelements

BOUNDARY SEQUENCE ASSIGNMENT TABLE

BOUNDARY

SEQUENCE ID --------------------------------- ASSIGNED TO POINT ID (SUPERELEMENT) --------------------

1B 35 ( 10) 35 ( 30)

2B 36 ( 10) 36 ( 30)

3B 41 ( 20) 41 ( 40)

4B 42 ( 20) 42 ( 40)

5B 19 ( 30) 19 ( 50)

6B 20 ( 30) 20 ( 50)

7B 27 ( 40) 27 ( 60)

8B 28 ( 40) 28 ( 60)

9B 13 ( 0) 13 ( 50) 13 ( 70)

10B 23 ( 0) 23 ( 50)

11B 14 ( 0) 14 ( 60) 14 ( 70)

12B 24 ( 0) 24 ( 60)

MSC NASTRAN JOB CREATED ON 02-APR-11 AT 13:36:21 APRIL 2, 2011 MSC NASTR

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM

POINT/SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST (SORTED BY POINT ID - "B" INDICATES BOUNDA

INTERIOR TO

POINT ID TYPE SUPERELEMEMT ------------------------------- CONNECTED TO SUPERELEMENT ---

1B G 0 10 30

2B G 0 10 30

3B G 0 20 40

4B G 0 20 40

5B G 0 30 50

6B G 0 30 50

7B G 0 40 60

8B G 0 40 60

9B G 0 50 70

10B G 0 50

11B G 0 60 70

12B G 0 60

MSC NASTRAN JOB CREATED ON 02-APR-11 AT 13:36:21 APRIL 2, 2011 MSC NASTR

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM

POINT/SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST (SORTED BY FIRST POINT ID - "B" INDICATES B

FIRST INTERIOR TO

COUNT POINT ID TYPE SUPERELEMEMT ------------------------------- CONNECTED TO SUPERELEMENT ---

2 1B 0 10 30

2 3B 0 20 40

2 5B 0 30 50

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 185
Single Level Superelement Analysis

2 7B 0 40 60

1 9B 0 50 70

1 10B 0 50

1 11B 0 60 70

1 12B 0 60

MSC NASTRAN JOB CREATED ON 02-APR-11 AT 13:36:21 APRIL 2, 2011 MSC NASTR

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM

POINT/SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST (SORTED BY COUNT - "B" INDICATES BOUNDARY S

FIRST INTERIOR TO

COUNT POINT ID TYPE SUPERELEMEMT ------------------------------- CONNECTED TO SUPERELEMENT ---

1 12B 0 60

1 10B 0 50

1 11B 0 60 70

1 9B 0 50 70

2 1B 0 10 30

2 5B 0 30 50

2 3B 0 20 40

2 7B 0 40 60

MSC NASTRAN JOB CREATED ON 02-APR-11 AT 13:36:21 APRIL 2, 2011 MSC NASTR

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM

POINT/SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST (SORTED BY INTERIOR SUPERELEMENT - "B" INDI

FIRST INTERIOR TO

COUNT POINT ID TYPE SUPERELEMEMT ------------------------------- CONNECTED TO SUPERELEMENT ---

1 12B 0 60

2 5B 0 30 50

2 3B 0 20 40

2 1B 0 10 30

1 9B 0 50 70

1 11B 0 60 70

1 10B 0 50

2 7B 0 40 60

Listing 3-16 SEMAP of Process Order for PART Superelement Example

SUPERELEMENT 0

TYPE = RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

LIST OF INTERIOR POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF INTERIOR POINT = 12 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

Main Index
 186 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single-Level Analysis Using PART Superelements

1 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B

11 11B 12B

SUPERELEMENT 0

TYPE = RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

LIST OF ELEMENTS ( TOTAL NO. OF ELEMENTS = 1 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 5

SUPERELEMENT 10

TYPE = PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

LIST OF EXTERIOR POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF EXTERIOR POINT = 2 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 1B 2B

SUPERELEMENT 20

TYPE = PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

LIST OF EXTERIOR POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF EXTERIOR POINT = 2 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 3B 4B

SUPERELEMENT 30

TYPE = PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

LIST OF EXTERIOR POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF EXTERIOR POINT = 4 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 1B 2B 5B 6B

SUPERELEMENT 40

TYPE = PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

LIST OF EXTERIOR POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF EXTERIOR POINT = 4 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 3B 4B 7B 8B

SUPERELEMENT 50

TYPE = PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

LIST OF EXTERIOR POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF EXTERIOR POINT = 4 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 5B 6B 9B 10B

SUPERELEMENT 60

TYPE = PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

LIST OF EXTERIOR POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF EXTERIOR POINT = 4 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 7B 8B 11B 12B

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 187
Single Level Superelement Analysis

SUPERELEMENT 70

TYPE = PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

LIST OF EXTERIOR POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF EXTERIOR POINT = 2 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 9B 11B

Listing 3-17 SEMAP of External Grids for PART Superelement Example

Note that the remainder of the processing (Phase 0, Phase 1, Phase 2, and Phase 3) and .f06 file output
follows the List Superlement Example.
Also, the Patran post-processing plots are the same as for the List Superelement example

Single-Level Analysis Using External Superelements

External superelements provide another useful method of solving this model. The advantage of external
superelements to the practitioner is that different organizations can generate the external superelement w/o
divulging proprietary geometry or proprietary material properties.

Static Example Using Patran (flyswatter)

For this example the same model of the flyswatter is used. It should be noted that even though this is a
complete model, in general, the models of the individual parts will be generated completely separately. In
this example, the 2-Step Method using MATRIXDB method will be used. Patran provides a convenient
method of generating external superelements. For example, to create an external superelement of
superelement 10, the following procedure can be performed in Patran.
First, the user defines the boundary points by creating the ASET entries. This is accomplished in the
Meshing Tab by selecting the “DOF List” icon. Next, select the dof to use and the boundary nodes as shown
below.

Main Index
 188 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single-Level Analysis Using External Superelements

Figure 3-32 Creating the Boundary D0F with an ASET for Superelement 10

When creating the analysis, the group associate with each external superelement is selected:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 189
Single Level Superelement Analysis

Figure 3-33 Select the Group Associated with Superelement 10

The form for setting up the external superelement creation is straight forward. In Translation Parameters,
the user selects “Ext. Superelement Spec…” and defines the parameters for the reduction. These parameters
closely mirror the EXTSEOUT case control command.

Main Index
 190 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single-Level Analysis Using External Superelements

Figure 3-34 Defining an External Superelement in Patran (EXTSEOUT)

The user must also select the boundary dof (ASET) in the Solution Parameters form:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 191
Single Level Superelement Analysis

Figure 3-35 Define the Appropriate ASET by selecting the Appropriate DOF List

Finally, the Output Transformation Matrices (OTMs) are based on the output requests. Note that only
displacement, spcforce, element stress, and element strain are supported. Also note that “bilin” is not
supported for element stresses, but “center” is supported (refer to OTM Limitations).

Main Index
 192 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single-Level Analysis Using External Superelements

Figure 3-36 Set the Stress Output to “Center”

The resulting bdf file includes the EXTSEOUT case control and ASET bulk data entries necessary to
generate an external superelement for SE 10.
SOL 101

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = MSC NASTRAN job created on 02-Apr-11 at 19:25:07

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

ECHO = NONE

EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK,EXTBULK,EXTID=10,MATRIXDB)

SUBCASE 1

TITLE=DOUBLE FLYSWATTER MODEL

SUBTITLE=IN PHASE LOADS

LOAD = 303

DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 193
Single Level Superelement Analysis

STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,CENTER)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

SUBCASE 2

TITLE=DOUBLE FLYSWATTER MODEL

SUBTITLE=OPPOSING LOADS

LOAD = 305

DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,CENTER)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

SUBCASE 3

TITLE=DOUBLE FLYSWATTER MODEL

SUBTITLE=PRESSURE LOAD

LOAD = 307

DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,CENTER)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST -1

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

$ Elements and Element Properties for region : pshell.1

PSHELL 1 1 1. 1 1

$ Pset: "pshell.1" will be imported as: "pshell.1"

CQUAD4 18 1 33 34 46 45 0. 0.

[Remainder of model definition]

GRID 98 -1.2 10. 0.

$ Loads for Load Case : _IN_PHASE_LOADS.SC201

LOAD 303 1. 1. 201

$ Loads for Load Case : _OPPOSING_LOADS.SC301

LOAD 305 1. 1. 301

$ Loads for Load Case : _PRESSURE_LOAD.SC101

LOAD 307 1. 1. 101

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : force.201

FORCE 201 93 0 2. 0. 0. 1.

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : force.301

FORCE 301 93 0 2. 0. 0. 1.

$ Pressure Loads of Load Set : pload2.101.2D

PLOAD4 101 18 -1. THRU 42

ASET1 123456 35 36

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

ENDDATA

Main Index
 194 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single-Level Analysis Using External Superelements

Listing 3-18 .bdf File for External Superelement 10 Creation Run

Similar steps are followed for the remainder of the superelements, with the exception of the residual structure.
Note that since MATRIXDB is the method, the reduction runs must be made with SCR=NO on the
command line in order to save the database so that it can be used in the assembly step (step 2).
Note that each model should select all 3 subcases even if there is no load on the superelement for a specific
subcase. This is discussed more in Mechanical Loads in Static Analysis (Ch. 4).
Each reduction run will produce a .MASTER/.DBALL file which contains the reduced matrices and a “.asm”
file which contains the assembly instructions for MSC Nastran. An example of the .asm file is:
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$

$ ASSEMBLY PUNCH (.ASM) FILE FOR EXTERNAL SUPERELEMENT 10

$ -------------------------------------------------------------

$ THIS FILE CONTAINING BULK DATA ENTRIES PERTAINING TO

$ EXTERNAL SUPERELEMENT 10 IS MEANT FOR INCLUSION

$ ANYWHERE IN THE MAIN BULK DATA PORTION OF THE ASSEMBLY RUN

$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$

$--------------------------- COLUMN NUMBERS ----------------------------

$00000000111111111122222222223333333333444444444455555555556666666666777

$23456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012

$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$

SEBULK 10EXTERNAL MANUAL

SECONCT 10 0

35 35 36 36

$ BOUNDARY GRID DATA

GRID 35 -3.6 6. 0.

GRID 36 -2.8 6. 0.

$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$

Listing 3-19 .asm File Contents for Superelement 10

Note that in this case, the GRIDs in the external superelement creation run have the same IDs as the GRIDs
in the assembly run. If this were not the case, either the SEBULK AUTO option could be used, or the user
could update the SECONCT the grid pairs to match the situation.
After all of the parts have been reduced, the assembly run will attach the reduced models and perform the
solution and data recovery. The group selected for this run is “pshell.10” (the residual structure). In order
to attach the external superelement databases, the File Management Section must have the appropriate
“ASSIGN” and “DBLOCATE” statements as shown below:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 195
Single Level Superelement Analysis

Figure 3-37 File Management Section Direct Text Input required for Assembly Run

In order for the results of all superelements to be placed on the op2 file, PARAM,POST,-1 must be specified
for each superelement. The most convenient way to accomplish this is to add it to the case control:

Main Index
 196 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single-Level Analysis Using External Superelements

Figure 3-38 Assembly Run needs PARAM,POST,-1 in Case Control to Obtain Output for Each Superelement

In addition, the bulk data section must include the “.asm” files for the attachment instructions:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 197
Single Level Superelement Analysis

Figure 3-39 Bulk Data Section Direct Text Input required for Assembly Run

The resulting bdf file for the assembly run will look like this:
$ Direct Text Input for File Management Section

assign se10m='create-ext10.MASTER'

DBLOCATE DATABLK=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=10) LOGI=se10m

assign se20m='create-ext20.MASTER'

DBLOCATE DATABLK=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=20) LOGI=se20m

assign se30m='create-ext30.MASTER'

DBLOCATE DATABLK=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=30) LOGI=se30m

assign se40m='create-ext40.MASTER'

DBLOCATE DATABLK=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=40) LOGI=se40m

assign se50m='create-ext50.MASTER'

DBLOCATE DATABLK=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=50) LOGI=se50m

assign se60m='create-ext60.MASTER'

DBLOCATE DATABLK=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=60) LOGI=se60m

assign se70m='create-ext70.MASTER'

DBLOCATE DATABLK=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=70) LOGI=se70m

$ Direct Text Input for Executive Control

$ Linear Static Analysis, Database

SOL 101

CEND

Main Index
 198 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single-Level Analysis Using External Superelements

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

param,post,-1

TITLE = MSC NASTRAN job created on 02-Apr-11 at 19:25:07

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

ECHO = NONE

SUBCASE 1

TITLE=DOUBLE FLYSWATTER MODEL

SUBTITLE=IN PHASE LOADS

DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,CENTER)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

SUBCASE 2

TITLE=DOUBLE FLYSWATTER MODEL

SUBTITLE=OPPOSING LOADS

DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,CENTER)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

SUBCASE 3

TITLE=DOUBLE FLYSWATTER MODEL

SUBTITLE=PRESSURE LOAD

DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,CENTER)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

include 'create-ext10.asm'

include 'create-ext20.asm'

include 'create-ext30.asm'

include 'create-ext40.asm'

include 'create-ext50.asm'

include 'create-ext60.asm'

include 'create-ext70.asm'

PARAM POST 0

PARAM GRDPNT 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

$ Elements and Element Properties for region : pshell.10

PSHELL 10 10 1. 10 10

$ Pset: "pshell.10" will be imported as: "pshell.10"

CQUAD4 5 10 13 14 24 23 0. 0.

$ Referenced Material Records

$ Material Record : mat1.10

$ Description of Material :

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 199
Single Level Superelement Analysis

MAT1* 10 3.+7 1.15385+7 .3

* 7.33-4

$ Nodes of Group : pshell.10

GRID 13 -.4 3.6 0.

GRID 14 .4 3.6 0.

GRID 23 -.4 4.4 0.

GRID 24 .4 4.4 0.

$ Loads for Load Case : _IN_PHASE_LOADS.SC201

$ Loads for Load Case : _OPPOSING_LOADS.SC301

$ Loads for Load Case : _PRESSURE_LOAD.SC101

$ Pressure Loads of Load Set : pload2.101.2D

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

ENDDATA

Listing 3-20 Input file for Assembly Run

The SEMAP indicates a single-level superelement tree. Also note that the “TYPE” indicates an external
superelement.
SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE (SORTED BY SEID)

PRIMARY PROCESS DOWNSTREAM

SUPERELEMENT SUPERELEMENT ORDER SUPERELEMENT TYPE LAB

------------ ------------ ------- ------------ ----------------------------- --------------------

0 0 8 0 RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

10 10 1 0 EXTERNAL (SEBULK (A-SET))

20 20 2 0 EXTERNAL (SEBULK (A-SET))

30 30 3 0 EXTERNAL (SEBULK (A-SET))

40 40 4 0 EXTERNAL (SEBULK (A-SET))

50 50 5 0 EXTERNAL (SEBULK (A-SET))

60 60 6 0 EXTERNAL (SEBULK (A-SET))

70 70 7 0 EXTERNAL (SEBULK (A-SET))

SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE (SORTED BY PROCESS ORDE

PRIMARY PROCESS DOWNSTREAM

SUPERELEMENT SUPERELEMENT ORDER SUPERELEMENT TYPE LAB

------------ ------------ ------- ------------ ----------------------------- --------------------

10 10 1 0 EXTERNAL (SEBULK (A-SET))

20 20 2 0 EXTERNAL (SEBULK (A-SET))

30 30 3 0 EXTERNAL (SEBULK (A-SET))

40 40 4 0 EXTERNAL (SEBULK (A-SET))

50 50 5 0 EXTERNAL (SEBULK (A-SET))

60 60 6 0 EXTERNAL (SEBULK (A-SET))

70 70 7 0 EXTERNAL (SEBULK (A-SET))

0 0 8 0 RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

Main Index
 200 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single-Level Analysis Using External Superelements

TABLE OF DOWNSTREAM SUPERELEMENTS FOR EACH SUPERELEMENT

SUPERELEMENT DOWNSTREAM SUPERELEMENTS IN DOWNSTREAM ORDER

------------ --------------------------------------------------------------------------------

10 0

20 0

30 0

40 0

50 0

60 0

70 0

MSC NASTRAN JOB CREATED ON 02-APR-11 AT 19:25:07 APRIL 2, 2011 MSC N

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM

S U P E R E L E M E N T T R E E

( CONFIGURATION = SINGLE LEVEL NO. LEVELS = 1 NO. TIPS = 7

TIP LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9-

1 10

2 20

3 30

4 40

5 50

6 60

7 70

Listing 3-21 Listing

These files can be found in doc/seug/chapter3/ext-2-step-dmigpch

Table 3-4 External Superelement Example files

File
create-set10.bdf
create-set20.bdf
create-set30.bdf
create-set40.bdf

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 201
Single Level Superelement Analysis

Table 3-4 External Superelement Example files

File
create-set50.bdf
create-set60.bdf
create-set70.bdf
assembly.bdf

Figure 3-40 Displacements for In Phase Loads (Max = 7.63E-04) – EXTSEOUT Model

Main Index
 202 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single-Level Analysis Using External Superelements

Figure 3-41 Displacements for Opposing Loads (Max = 6.45E-04) – EXTSEOUT Model

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 203
Single Level Superelement Analysis

Figure 3-42 Displacements for Pressure Loads (Max = 4.27E-03) – EXTSEOUT Model

Main Index
 204 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single-Level Analysis Using External Superelements

Figure 3-43 Stress Tensor for In Phase Loads (Max = 2.72E+02) – EXTSEOUT Model

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 205
Single Level Superelement Analysis

Figure 3-44 Stress Tensor for Opposing Loads (Max = 1.51E+02) – EXTSEOUT Model

Main Index
 206 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Comparison of Methods

Figure 3-45 Stress Tensor for Pressure Loads (Max = 1.72E+02) – EXTSEOUT Model

Comparison of Methods
Even though the answers are effectively the same, a thorough review of the .f06 files indicates there are some
differences the user should be aware of.
 GRID POINT WEIGHT GENERATOR – The Grid Point Weight Generator (GPWG) is
presented on a per-superelement basis. There is no ‘roll-up’ of the GPWG. A complete discussion
of GPWG can be found in the Grid Point Weight Generator (Ch. 19) in the MSC Nastran Linear Static
Analysis User’s Guide.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 207
Single Level Superelement Analysis

 An alternative to PARAM,GRDPNT is the case control command WEIGHTCHECK. In static

analysis only the J-Set is available. The G-Set is available for dynamic analysis which will provide
the ‘roll-up’ at the residual. Recall that the J-Set matrices are the elements for the current
superelement and the G-Set matrices include the upstream data.
 Inertia loads (ACCEL, ACCEL1, GRAV, RFORCE) are calculated as load vectors for each
superelement and brought down to the residual.
 OLOAD RESULTANT - The OLOAD Resultant is also on a per-superelement basis. There is no
‘roll-up’ of the total applied loads for any of the superelement methods. A comprehensive discussion
of the OLOAD Resultant can be found in the Model Verification (Ch. 10) in the MSC Nastran Linear
Static Analysis User’s Guide.
 DCMP – Messages associated with the Decomposition of the stiffness matrices:
 *** SYSTEM INFORMATION MESSAGE 4159 (DFMSA)
 *** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 5293 (SSG3A)
 For more information on these messages, refer to Mechanisms and Singularities (Ch. 10) in the MSC
Nastran Linear Static Analysis User’s Guide.
 Non-Superelement Model
 DCMP is only performed for the residual – KLL (the left-over set).
 SESET and PART Superelements
 DCMP is performed for each superelement reduction – KOO (the omitted set)
 DCMP is performed for the residual structure – KLL (the left-over set)
 External Superelements
 DCMP is performed when generating each external superelement - KOO
 DCMP is performed for the residual structure – KLL

Main Index
 208 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Comparison of Methods

For this example, the DCMP statistics associated with KLL can be compared. The Epsilon and External
Work are reported for each of the 3 subcases.

Table 3-5 Comparison of Max Ratio, Epsilon, and External Work

Model KLL Max Ratio Epsilon External Work
Baseline 1.133766E+03 -4.6426305E-12 4.9504608E-02

-4.5038209E-12 1.5267804E-03

-2.1373923E-12 1.2906785E-03
SESET 2.280555E+02 -2.3362402E-13 1.5033779E-03

-7.3558232E-14 1.2672746E-03

-1.0165675E-13 4.9308721E-02
PART 3.737677E+02 -1.9596399E-14 1.5033779E-03

-1.4003384E-13 1.2672746E-03

-4.2464950E-14 4.9308721E-02
EXTSEOUT 3.737677E+02 -8.9743771E-14 1.5033779E-03

-1.3249746E-13 1.2672746E-03

-1.0808809E-13 4.9308721E-02

Note that the Max Ratio changes slightly for each method. This can be expected based on the roundoff
associated with reducing superelements and should not cause any concern to the practitioner. The Epsilon
values are a measure of the solution accuracy and are all numeric zero, which indicates a solid numerical
solution. The External Work is based on the work performed by the matrix available in the residual structure.
It is noted that the external work for all superelement solutions is exactly the same indicating the methods
have generated the same solution.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 209
Single Level Superelement Analysis

 SPCFORCE Resultant. The SPCFORCE Resultant is also on a per-superelement basis. There is no

‘roll-up’ of the total applied loads for any of the superelement methods. A comprehensive discussion
of the SPCFORCE Resultant can be found in the Model Verification (Ch. 10) in the MSC Nastran
Linear Static Analysis User’s Guide. In this example, only superelement 70 has the SPCFORCE
Resultant. This can be compared for each model:

Table 3-6 Comparison of SPCFORCE Resultant

Model T3 Total R1 Total R2 Total
Baseline -4.000000E+00 -4.000000E+01 zero

zero zero -2.080000E+01

3.200000E+01 2.560000E+02 zero

SESET -4.000000E+00 -4.000000E+01 zero

zero zero -2.080000E+01

3.200000E+01 2.560000E+02 zero

PART -4.000000E+00 -4.000000E+01 zero

zero zero -2.080000E+01

3.200000E+01 2.560000E+02 zero

EXTSEOUT Not available Not available Not available

Note that “zero” is numeric 0.000 and values were reported as E-11 to E-13. Also note that for the
EXTSEOUT solution, the SPCFORCE Resultant is not available, but the SPCFORCES match the
SPCFORCES for all other solutions.
 EQUILIBRIUM Check. Although not part of this example, a note is appropriate. The
EQUILIBRIUM Check is only available for non-superelement models. For further details, refer to
Equilibrium Checks (Ch. 10) in the MSC Nastran Linear Static Analysis User’s Guide.
 MAXIMUM SPCFforces, MAXIMUM Displacements, and MAXIMUM Applied Loads. These
values are output on a per-superelement basis.

Main Index
 210 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Comparison of Methods

 DISPLACEMENT, SPCFORCE, ELSTRESS, and ELFORCE. Again, these quantities are output
on a per-superelement basis. For displacements, GRID 13 is in the residual for each solution and
GRID 93 has the maximum displacement. These values are compared here for each of the 3
subcases:

Table 3-7 Comparisons of Displacements – Residual dof and Max Displacement dof

Model Disp 13-T3 Disp 93-T3

Baseline 1.142174E-04 7.633902E-04

2.691105E-05 6.453393E-04

-7.091641E-04 -4.266040E-03
SESET 1.142174E-04 7.633899E-04

2.691100E-05 6.453382E-04

-7.091641E-04 -4.266038E-03
PART 1.142174E-04 7.633899E-04

2.691100E-05 6.453382E-04

-7.091641E-04 -4.266038E-03
EXTSEOUT 1.142174E-04 7.633899E-04

2.691100E-05 6.453382E-04

-7.091641E-04 -4.266038E-03

Comparisons of the stresses are similar EXCEPT that the external superelement is limited to (CENTER)
stresses as described in 2-Step Method (Ch. 2).
Since the external superelement used MATRIXDB, the precision of the external superelement is based on
machine precision, thus the solution vector is exactly the same as for both SESET and PART superelements.
If the user had selected DMIGPCH, there would have been small truncation errors because of the ASCII
format of the DMIG entries.
1.

Main Index
 Chapter 4: Loads, Constraints, Case Control, and Parameters in Static Analysis
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User’s Guide

4 Loads, Constraints, Case

Control, and Parameters in
Static Analysis

Introduction

Mechanical Loads in Static Analysis

Thermal Loads in Static Analysis

Boundary Conditions in Static Analysis

Case Control

Parameter Controls

Special Considerations

Main Index
 212 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Introduction

Introduction
A very simple first approach to using superelements in static analysis was presented in CHAPTER 1. In this case,
only a single superelement and load was defined. These concepts can be expanded to cover a multitude of
loadings and different settings on each component. As a review, a simplified superelement reduction is shown
here:

Figure 4-1 Simplified Depiction of Superelement Reduction, Solution, and Data Recovery

In Chapter 3, multiple superelements and loadings were introduced for single-level superelement analysis.
This Chapter will expose the user to more advanced capabilities available for static analysis. For instance, we
will describe mechanical loads, thermal loads, boundary conditions, advanced case control, advanced
parameter specification and special considerations for curved parts.
The key to understanding the MSC Nastran methodology is to understand how the loads, constraints, and
parameters are partitioned and applied. Just like the geometric partitioning described in detail in Superelement
Partitioning (Ch. 2), the loads, constraints, and parameters are partitioned for each Load Sequence. The user is
encouraged to review Key Concepts in Superelement Partitions (Ch. 1).

Mechanical Loads in Static Analysis

Recall from Equation (1-12), that when processing loads on a superelement, the load vector is reduced to the
physical boundary using the static condensation transformation matrix.
T
 P t  =  G ot   P o  +  P t  (4-1)

Main Index
 213
Loads, Constraints, Case Control, and Parameters in Static Analysis

Where the subscript “t” indicates retained boundary (exterior) dof and subscript “o” indicates omitted
(interior) dof. The loads are summed to the residual load vector  P g  by adding the upstream load
up
contributions  P t  to the residual loads  P j  . This can be expressed as:

n up
 Pg  =  Pj  + i = 1  Pt i (4-2)

After the loads for the residual G-set are known, the solution follows the standard load reduction for a non-
superelement solution. The loads are partitioned to each superelement based on a set of rules described in
the subsections.
A detailed description of loads can be found in the Applied Loads (Ch. 5) in the MSC Nastran Reference Guide.

List Superelements
The mechanical loads for List Superelement are handled differently depending on whether the loading is grid
based, element based, or inertial based.

Point Loads
Point loads are applied to grids or spoints and include DAREA, FORCE, FORCE1, FORCE2, FORCEAX,
MOMENT, MOMENT1, MOMENT2, and MOMENTAX entries.
Loads applied to points for List Superelements are partitioned in the same manner as the grid points and
elements. That is, point loads applied to interior points of a superelement are placed into the Bulk Data
Section for that superelement and processed accordingly. If a grid is exterior to one superelement and interior
to another, the grid based loads applied to the grid are ignored for the exterior grid and the load is applied to
the interior grid of the most downstream superelement for that grid.

Element Based Loads

Element based loads include distributed loads such as PLOAD, PLOAD1, PLOAD2, PLOAD4, and
PLOADAX.
Any loadings applied on an element are assigned to the superelement to which the element assigned. Thus,
a pressure load on a boundary element will result in a load on both the interior and exterior grids of the
element and the load will be calculated and assigned to the superelement.

Inertial Loads
Inertial loads include loads that are applied to the mass properties such as ACCEL, ACCEL1, GRAV, and
RFORCE.
Just as in element loading, the inertia loads are calculated as the superelement is processed.

Main Index
 214 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Mechanical Loads in Static Analysis

Example of Load Partitioning for List Superelements

Figure 4-2 Sample Loading for List Superelement Analysis

Each element is 10 units long with a cross sectional area of 1.0. There is a -3.0y force on grid 3 and -6.0y
force on grid 6. A distributed load of -0.5y force/length is applied to elements 3 and 4. An inertial load of
-1.0y is applied to the entire model. For convenience of determining how the loads are applied, they are
separated into 3 subcases – one for point loads, one for element loads, and one for the inertial load.
This model, with the SESET entry shown, describes a single-level superelement problem with superelements
10 and 0. The input file can be found at /doc/seug/chapter4/list-loads-sample.bdf.

SUBCASE 1

$ Subcase name : Forces

SUBTITLE=Forces

SPC = 2

LOAD = 2

DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

OLOAD(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,BILIN)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

SUBCASE 2

$ Subcase name : Pressure

SUBTITLE=Pressure

SPC = 2

LOAD = 5

DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

OLOAD(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,BILIN)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

SUBCASE 3

$ Subcase name : Gravity

Main Index
 215
Loads, Constraints, Case Control, and Parameters in Static Analysis

SUBTITLE=Gravity

SPC = 2

LOAD = 7

DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

OLOAD(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,BILIN)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST -1

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

$ Elements and Element Properties for region : unit

PBARL 1 1 BAR

1. 1.

$ Pset: "unit" will be imported as: "pbarl.1"

CBAR 1 1 1 2 0. 1. 0.

CBAR 2 1 2 3 0. 1. 0.

CBAR 3 1 3 4 0. 1. 0.

CBAR 4 1 4 5 0. 1. 0.

CBAR 5 1 5 6 0. 1. 0.

$ Referenced Material Records

$ Material Record : sample

$ Description of Material : Date: 08-Apr-11 Time: 19:45:12

MAT1 1 1.+6 .3 1.

$ Nodes of the Entire Model

GRID 1 0. 0. 0.

GRID 2 10. 0. 0.

GRID 3 20. 0. 0.

GRID 4 30. 0. 0.

GRID 5 40. 0. 0.

GRID 6 50. 0. 0.

$ seid.10

SESET 10 4 5 6

$ Loads for Load Case : Forces

SPCADD 2 5

LOAD 2 1. 1. 1 1. 3

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : fixed

SPC1 5 123456 1

$ Loads for Load Case : Pressure

LOAD 5 1. 1. 4

$ Loads for Load Case : Gravity

LOAD 7 1. 1. 6

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : P3

FORCE 1 3 0 3. 0. -1. 0.

Main Index
 216 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Mechanical Loads in Static Analysis

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : P6

FORCE 3 6 0 6. 0. -1. 0.

$ Gravity Loading of Load Set : g

GRAV 6 0 1. 0. -1. 0.

$ Distributed Loads of Load Set : press

PLOAD1 4 3 FYE FR 0. -.5 1. -.5

PLOAD1 4 4 FYE FR 0. -.5 1. -.5

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

ENDDATA

Listing 4-1 Input for Sample List Superelement Loading Model

The SEMAP for the model follows:

Table 4-1 SEMAP for Sample List Superelement Loading Model

Superelement Exterior Grids Interior Grids Elements
0 - 1, 2, 3 1, 2
10 3 4, 5, 6 3, 4, 5

The Bulk Data entries for the applied loadings are partitioned as follows:
 Force -6.0y is applied to grid 6. Since grid point 6 is interior to superelement 10, the load is applied
to superelement 10.
1
 P 6  = – 6.0 (4-3)

 Force -3.0y is applied on grid point 3. Since grid point 3 is interior to the residual structure, the
load is assigned to the residual structure Bulk Data.
0
 P 3  = – 3.0 (4-4)

 The pressure load, p, is applied on elements that belong to superelement 10; therefore, pressure W is
partitioned into the Bulk Data for superelement 1.
10 1 1
 P3  = ---  p  l 34 = ---  – 0.5  10.0 = – 2.5 (4-5)
2 2
10 1 1 1 1
 P4  = ---  p  l 34 + ---  p  l 45 = ---  – 0.5  10.0 + ---  – 0.5  10.0 = – 5.0 (4-6)
2 2 2 2
10 1
 P5  = ---  p  l 45 = – 2.5 (4-7)
2
 If a GRAV entry were applied to this model, g, the loads for each grid would be:

Main Index
 217
Loads, Constraints, Case Control, and Parameters in Static Analysis

0 1 1 (4-8)
 P 1  = ---  g  p  l 12  A 12 = ---  1.0  – 1.0  10.0  1.0 = – 5.0
2 2
0 1 1
 P 2  = --- g  p  l 12  A 12 + --- g  p  l 23  A 23 = – 10 (4-9)
2 2
0 1
 P 3  = --- g  p  l 23  A 23 = – 5.0 (4-10)
2
10 1
 P3  = --- g  p  l 34  A 34 = – 5.0 (4-11)
2
10
 P4  = – 10.0 (4-12)

10
 P5  = – 10.0 (4-13)

10
 P6  = – 5.0 (4-14)

Review of the MSC Nastran solution confirms the manual calculations:

FORCES SUPERELEMENT 0

SUBCASE 1

L O A D V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

3 G 0.0 -3.000000E+00 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

MSC Nastran JOB CREATED ON 08-APR-11 AT 20:33:55 APRIL 8, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10

GRAVITY SUPERELEMENT 0

SUBCASE 3

L O A D V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

1 G 0.0 -5.000000E+00 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

2 G 0.0 -1.000000E+01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

3 G 0.0 -5.000000E+00 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

FORCES SUPERELEMENT 10

SUBCASE 1

L O A D V E C T O R

Main Index
 218 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Thermal Loads in Static Analysis

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

6 G 0.0 -6.000000E+00 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

MSC Nastran JOB CREATED ON 08-APR-11 AT 20:33:55 APRIL 8, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10 P

PRESSURE SUPERELEMENT 10

SUBCASE 2

L O A D V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

3 G 0.0 -2.500000E+00 0.0 0.0 0.0 -4.166667E+00

4 G 0.0 -5.000000E+00 0.0 0.0 0.0 -2.664535E-15

5 G 0.0 -2.500000E+00 0.0 0.0 0.0 4.166667E+00

MSC Nastran JOB CREATED ON 08-APR-11 AT 20:33:55 APRIL 8, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10 P

GRAVITY SUPERELEMENT 10

SUBCASE 3

L O A D V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

3 G 0.0 -5.000000E+00 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

4 G 0.0 -1.000000E+01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

5 G 0.0 -1.000000E+01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

6 G 0.0 -5.000000E+00 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

Listing 4-2 Loads for Sample List Superelement Loading Model

PART Superelements
Loads applied to grids or elements for PART Superelements are always applied to the PART and reduced to
the physical boundary (i.e. the  P t  matrix).

External Superelements
Loads applied to grids or elements for External Superelements are always applied and reduced to the physical
boundary (i.e. the  P t  matrix).

Thermal Loads in Static Analysis

Thermal loads must also be partitioned and associated to the appropriate superelement dof in order to obtain
correct results. In statics, the thermal load is converted to forces at grids points by assuming a ‘fixed wall’.
For example, a simple rod element subjected to thermal loads will have equivalent mechanical forces
calculated by the following:

Main Index
 219
Loads, Constraints, Case Control, and Parameters in Static Analysis

 Calculate the thermal strains

 Temp =   T (4-15)

 Calculate the thermal stresses for fixed grid

 = E   Temp (4-16)

 Calculate the equivalent mechanical forces

F equiv =   A (4-17)

After the equivalent mechanical forces are calculated, they are added to the matrix and normal reductions
are made to the loads.
The displacement solution is calculated using the mechanical loads and thermal loads. The total strain
matrix is calculated as normal, but the stresses must account for the thermal strain. For the rod element:
 Total =  Mech +  Temp (4-18)

Of course, the mechanical strain is the only component of the strain matrix that causes stress. Thus, the stress
can be expressed as
 = E    Total –  Temp  = E    Total –   T  (4-19)

Thermal loads can be applied to the model by defining temperatures at the grids with TEMP or TEMP1
entries, or applied to the model by defining element temperatures with TEMPP1 or TEMPRB.

List Superelements
For list superelements, temperatures described by grid points are partitioned and assigned to BOTH the
interior and exterior grids of each superelement the grid is associated to. Of course, this makes sense because
the temperature loading is converted to the equivalent mechanical force on an elemental basis and the
element must have the T for all of its nodes.
Temperatures defined by elements are partitioned to the superelement the element belongs to.

Example of Thermal Load Partitioning for List Superelements

Consider the following model with E=1.E6,  =1ppm/°, and the cross sectional area of the beam = 1.0. A
temperature load of +25º is applied. There are two boundary conditions considered 1) cantilever, 2) fixed-
fixed.

Main Index
 220 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Thermal Loads in Static Analysis

Figure 4-3 Sample Temperature Loading for List Superelement Analysis

The sample input files for both boundary conditions are located at: /doc/seug/chapter4/thermal-loading/list-
temperature-sample1.bdf (cantilever) and -sample2.bdf (fixed-fixed). The input for the fixed-fixed example
is as follows:
SOL 101

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = MSC Nastran job created on 08-Apr-11 at 20:33:55

SUBTITLE = created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

ECHO = NONE

TEMPERATURE(INITIAL) = 1

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Thermal

SPC = 2

TEMPERATURE(LOAD) = 2

DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

OLOAD(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,BILIN)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

$ Elements and Element Properties for region : unit

PBARL 1 1 BAR

1. 1.

$ Pset: "unit" will be imported as: "pbarl.1"

CBAR 1 1 1 2 0. 1. 0.

CBAR 2 1 2 3 0. 1. 0.

Main Index
 221
Loads, Constraints, Case Control, and Parameters in Static Analysis

CBAR 3 1 3 4 0. 1. 0.

CBAR 4 1 4 5 0. 1. 0.

CBAR 5 1 5 6 0. 1. 0.

$ Referenced Material Records

$ Material Record : sample

$ Description of Material : Date: 08-Apr-11 Time: 19:45:12

MAT1 1 1.+6 .3 1. 1.-6

$ Nodes of the Entire Model

GRID 1 0. 0. 0.

GRID 2 10. 0. 0.

GRID 3 20. 0. 0.

GRID 4 30. 0. 0.

GRID 5 40. 0. 0.

GRID 6 50. 0. 0.

$ seid.10

SESET 10 4 5 6

$ Loads for Load Case : Thermal

SPCADD 2 1 3

$ Grid Point Temperature Field Default for Load Case : Thermal

TEMPD 2 25.

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : fixed

SPC1 1 123456 1

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : fixed2

SPC1 3 123456 1 6

$ Default Initial Temperature

TEMPD 1 0.

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

ENDDATA

Listing 4-3 Sample List Superelement Temperature Loading Model (fixed-fixed)

In this case, the thermal load on each element will cause an expansion of the element – thus the equivalent
mechanical load will be a tensile load. Considering the equations for element 1:
6 –6
 Temp =   T = 1.  10   25. – 0.  = 25.  10 (4-20)

6 –6
 = E   Temp = 1.  10  25.  10 = 25. (4-21)

F equiv =   A = 25.  1.0 = 25. (4-22)

Since this is a tensile load, the nodal loads for element 1 are

Main Index
 222 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Thermal Loads in Static Analysis

 P1   
P elemTemp = P 1Temp =  ------  =  – 25.  (4-23)
 P 2 1Temp  25. 
Similarly, for the remainder of the elements:

 P2     P3     P4 
 -----
- =  – 25.   ------  =  – 25.   ------  (4-24)
 P 3 2Temp  25.   P 4 3Temp  25.   P 5 4Temp
   P5   
=  – 25.   ------  =  – 25. 
 25.   P 6 5Temp  25. 
Considering the G-set load vector for each superelement:

 
 P1   – 25.   – 25. 
0      
 P  =  P 2  =  – 25. + 25.  =  0.  (4-25)
     
 P3   25   25. 
 
Similarly, for superelement 10:

 
 P3   
   – 25. 
10  P4   0. 
P =   =   (4-26)
 P5   0. 
   25. 
 P6   
 
For the cantilever case, the thermal displacements are unrestrained, so the tip displacement will be
·– 6 –3
 =   T  L = 1.  10  25. – 0.   50 = 1.250  10 (4-27)
The mechanical strain is calculated by removing the thermal strain from the total strain. In this case, there
will be zero strain, resulting in zero stress.
THERMAL SUPERELEMENT 0

SUBCASE 1

L O A D V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

1 G -2.500000E+01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

3 G 2.500000E+01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

Main Index
 223
Loads, Constraints, Case Control, and Parameters in Static Analysis

MSC Nastran JOB CREATED ON 08-APR-11 AT 20:33:55 APRIL 9, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10

THERMAL SUPERELEMENT 10

SUBCASE 1

L O A D V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

3 G -2.500000E+01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

6 G 2.500000E+01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

Listing 4-4 .f06 Loads for Sample List Superelement Temperature Loading Model

The results are expected for each boundary condition

THERMAL (Cantilever Boundary Conditions) SUPERELEMENT 0

SUBCASE 1

D I S P L A C E M E N T V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

1 G 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

2 G 2.500000E-04 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

3 G 5.000000E-04 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

S T R E S S E S I N B A R E L E M E N T S ( C B A R )

ELEMENT SA1 SA2 SA3 SA4 AXIAL SA-MAX SA-MIN M.S

ID. SB1 SB2 SB3 SB4 STRESS SB-MAX SB-MIN M.S

1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

THERMAL SUPERELEMENT 10

SUBCASE 1

D I S P L A C E M E N T V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

3 G 5.000000E-04 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

4 G 7.500000E-04 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

5 G 1.000000E-03 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

Main Index
 224 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Thermal Loads in Static Analysis

6 G 1.250000E-03 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

S T R E S S E S I N B A R E L E M E N T S ( C B A R )

ELEMENT SA1 SA2 SA3 SA4 AXIAL SA-MAX SA-MIN M.S

ID. SB1 SB2 SB3 SB4 STRESS SB-MAX SB-MIN M.S

3 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

4 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

Listing 4-5 Output for Sample List Superelement Temperature Loading Model (Cantilever)

THERMAL2 (Fixed-Fixed Boundary Conditions) SUPERELEMENT 0

SUBCASE 1

D I S P L A C E M E N T V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

1 G 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

2 G 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

3 G 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

F O R C E S O F S I N G L E - P O I N T C O N S T R A I N T

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

1 G 2.500000E+01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

S T R E S S E S I N B A R E L E M E N T S ( C B A R )

MENT SA1 SA2 SA3 SA4 AXIAL SA-MAX SA-MIN M.

D. SB1 SB2 SB3 SB4 STRESS SB-MAX SB-MIN M.

1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -2.500000E+01 -2.500000E+01 -2.500000E+01

0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -2.500000E+01 -2.500000E+01

2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -2.500000E+01 -2.500000E+01 -2.500000E+01

0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -2.500000E+01 -2.500000E+01

THERMAL2 SUPERELEMENT 10

SUBCASE 1

Main Index
 225
Loads, Constraints, Case Control, and Parameters in Static Analysis

D I S P L A C E M E N T V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

3 G 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

4 G 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

5 G 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

6 G 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

F O R C E S O F S I N G L E - P O I N T C O N S T R A I N T

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

6 G -2.500000E+01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

S T R E S S E S I N B A R E L E M E N T S ( C B A R )

MENT SA1 SA2 SA3 SA4 AXIAL SA-MAX SA-MIN M.

D. SB1 SB2 SB3 SB4 STRESS SB-MAX SB-MIN M.

3 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -2.500000E+01 -2.500000E+01 -2.500000E+01

0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -2.500000E+01 -2.500000E+01

4 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -2.500000E+01 -2.500000E+01 -2.500000E+01

0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -2.500000E+01 -2.500000E+01

5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -2.500000E+01 -2.500000E+01 -2.500000E+01

0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -2.500000E+01 -2.500000E+01

Listing 4-6 Output for Sample List Superelement Temperature Loading Model (Fixed-Fixed)

PART Superelements
Thermal loads applied to grids or elements for PART Superelements are always applied to the PART,
converted to mechanical forces and reduced to the physical boundary (i.e. the  P t  matrix).

The above examples are re-created for PART superelements and are located at: /doc/seug/chapter4/thermal-
loading/part-temperature-sample1.bdf (cantilever) and sample2.bdf (fixed-fixed).

External Superelements
Thermal loads applied to grids or elements for External Superelements converted to mechanical forces and
reduced to the physical boundary (i.e. the  P t  matrix).

The above examples are re-created for External superelements (MATRIXDB option) and are located at:
/doc/seug/chapter4/thermal-loading/ext-create-temperature-sample1.bdf, ext_assem-temperature-
sample1.bdf (cantilever) and -sample2.bdf (fixed-fixed).

Main Index
 226 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Boundary Conditions in Static Analysis

Boundary Conditions in Static Analysis

Boundary conditions in static analysis include Single Point Constraints (SPCs), Multi Point Constraints
(MPCs) and Contact. In the case of contact, there are two types: touching contact and glued contact.
Contact is only supported in the residual structure, so it will not be discussed further in this Guide. If contact
is specified in a static run errors similar to this may be produced:
*** USER FATAL MESSAGE 1 (GP1M3DC)

*** USER FATAL MESSAGE 1 (%2)

0*** SYSTEM FATAL MESSAGE 3062 MODULE = GP1

FAILURE OCCURRED IN UTILITY CALLED IN SUBROUTINE GP1M3DC .

0FATAL ERROR

Listing 4-7 Sample Error When Contact is Specified with Superelements

Note that MSC Nastran offers the user the flexibility of defining multiple constraints in the separate subcases
of an analysis. This feature is not currently supported with superelements and if the user attempts to change
the SPCs or MPCs between subcases, the following errors will occur:
^^^ USER FATAL MESSAGE 9072 (PHASE0)

^^^ MULTIPLE BOUNDARY CONDITIONS ARE NOT ALLOWED FOR SUPERELEMENTS.

Listing 4-8 Error Message when User Attempt to Solve with Multiple Boundary Conditions

Single Point Constraints (SPCs)

Single Point Constraints (SPCs) are the fixed points in the solution. These can be defined with SPC, SPC1,
or on the GRID PS field. The SPC entries are activated with the SPC case control command, while the
GRID PS field are always active.
In addition to explicitly defined constraints, PARAM,AUTOSPC,YES will automatically constrain singular
dof. For detailed information on PARAM,AUTOSPC refer to the Automatic Application of Single-Point Constraints
(AUTOSPC) (Ch. 6) in the MSC Nastran Linear Static Analysis User’s Guide.

List Superelements
Constraints applied to points for List Superelements are partitioned in the same manner as the grid points.
That is, constraints applied to interior points of a superelement are placed into the Bulk Data Section for that
superelement and processed accordingly. If a grid is exterior to one superelement and interior to another, the
constraint applied to the grid are ignored for the exterior grid and the constraint is applied to the interior grid
of the most downstream superelement for that grid.

Main Index
 227
Loads, Constraints, Case Control, and Parameters in Static Analysis

PART Superelements
As with List Superelements, the constraints on interior dof of a part superelement are processed with the
superelement. However, constraints on exterior dof (i.e boundary grids) are carried down to the residual
structure. When this occurs, the user is reminded with a clear message in the .f06 file:
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 7552 (BNDSP3)

BOUNDARY GRID 1B WILL INHERIT ITS CONTRAINTS FROM UPSTREAM SUPERELEMENT(S).

Listing 4-9 Info Message Issued Part Superelement Constraints are Applied to Boundary dof

It is possible that either an explicit constraints or automatic constraints will be applied to a boundary grid.
In this case, as long as the analysis coordinate frames (CD on the GRID entry) are congruent between the
superelement components at the attachment grids, there is no problem. However, if the analysis coordinate
frames are not congruent, the following error will be issued:
*** USER FATAL MESSAGE 6804 (BNDSP3)

THE DISPLACEMENT COORDINATE SYSTEM (CD FIELD ON GRID ENTRY) SPECIFIED FOR BOUNDARY GRID ID 1 B

IN SUPERELEMENT 0 IS NOT CONGRUENT WITH DISPLACEMENT COORDINATE SYSTEMS IN OTHER CONNECTING SUPERELEMENTS.

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 7552 (BNDSP3)

BOUNDARY GRID 1B WILL INHERIT ITS CONTRAINTS FROM UPSTREAM SUPERELEMENT(S).

^^^

^^^ USER FATAL MESSAGE 9032 (PHASE0)

^^^ RUN IS TERMINATED DUE TO MESSAGE(S) ABOVE ON THE RESIDUAL STRUCTURE AND/OR THE SUPERELEMENT(S).

^^^

Listing 4-10 Error Issued When Part Superelement Constraints are Applied in Non-Congruent Coordinate
Systems

External Superelements
For external superelements, constraints will be applied and processed during the stiffness reduction. The
external superelement process will automatically transform the external stiffness from its original coordinate
frame to the residual coordinate frame. Boundary grids that have constraints should be applied in the
downstream superelement.

Grid Point Singularity Processing

Because each superelement is processed independently, it is possible to turn AUTOSPC on and off, for each
superelement (refer to section Parameter Controls below). Typically, AUTOSPC is applied to the entire model
(all superelements). PARAM,AUTOSPC,YES is the default for all superelement solutions (except the
nonlinear solutions).
When the grid point singularity processor (AUTOSPC) is applied to superelements, MSC Nastran will only
process the interior points of each superelement. Any points that are exterior to a superelement are defined
as belonging to the A-set for that superelement. AUTOSPC will not constrain an A-set DOF. This logic
makes sense because the exterior points of a superelement can have elements connected to them from other

Main Index
 228 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Boundary Conditions in Static Analysis

superelements; therefore, to constrain these points before we have a chance to attach all elements might over
constrain the structure. AUTOSPC will process these grid points when processing the downstream
superelement that contains them as interior points.

Multipoint Constraints (MPCs) and Rigid Elements

Multi Point Constraints (MPCs) define dof dependencies in the solution. These can be defined with MPC,
RBAR, RBEi, RSPLINE, RTRPLT, or RSSCON. The rigid elements are automatically applied to every
solution, whereas the MPCs must be activated with the MPC case control command.
The parameter AUTOMSET can be used to rewrite the MPC equations to avoid set conflicts.
PARAM,AUTOMSET,YES is applicable to superelement analysis and will be processed in each superelement
if requested by the user.

List Superelements
R-type elements (RBE2, RBE3, RBAR, RSSCON, etc.) in the main Bulk Data are treated as elements; i.e.,
their connectivity is used to determine which superelement partition the elements are assigned to. The rules
to determine exterior points are the same as if these were flexible elements.
MPCs are not used to define superelement exterior points, so when they are near a boundary, the user may
have to specify the exterior grids. Recall from Chapter 2 that element connectivity is used to determine the
exterior points for a superelement. Because MPC sets are called in Case Control and different MPC sets can
be used in each SUBCASE, MPC sets are not used in the definition of superelements. MPC entries are
partitioned according to the interior points of superelements. An MPC entry is assigned to the highest
upstream superelement (based on the processing order) to which it connects.
Special care must be taken when an MPC or R-type element is connected to exterior points of a superelement.
Because the exterior points are in the A-set for the superelement, these points cannot be listed as dependent
(M-set) on an MPC or R-type element because a Set membership conflict will occur. Note that
PARAM,AUTOMSET,YES can often be used to resolve the set conflicts associated with dependent dof.
A common modeling situation is to have two coincident grids at a superelement boundary as shown in the
following figure. In this case, MPC’s or Rigid Elements are often used to connect the grids. Note that if
flexible elements such as CELAS or CBUSH are used, they will be partitioned as any other flexible element
and the following subsections are irrelevant.

Main Index
 229
Loads, Constraints, Case Control, and Parameters in Static Analysis

Figure 4-4 Sample Model with Coincident Grids at Superelement Boundary

Rigid Element (RBAR) Connection

Suppose the user wants to connect the coincident grids with an RBAR and maintain grid 3 as the boundary
grid for superelement 10. In this case grid 3 must contain all of the independent dof and grid 11 will contain
all of the dependent dof and the RBAR is as follows:

Figure 4-5 Patran Definition of RBAR 101 Connecting Coincident Nodes.

The Patran superelement partitioning does not recognize MPCs or Rigid Elements when defining
superelement boundaries. Since there are no flexible elements connecting grids 3 and 11, when the user
attempts to define superelement 10 in Patran, a clear warning is issued and the user must specifically select
the boundary grids:

Main Index
 230 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Boundary Conditions in Static Analysis

Figure 4-6 Patran Example Warning When Defining Superelements that are Connected with MPC or Rigid
Elements

Since the non-MPC elements only connect to grid 11 (and not grid 3), the user is obligated to select grid 11.
If the user attempt to select grid 3, the following error is issued

Figure 4-7 Example of Selecting a Node that is not Connected to a Group’s Element

Patran allows the user to select grid 11 –

Main Index
 231
Loads, Constraints, Case Control, and Parameters in Static Analysis

Figure 4-8 Selecting an Acceptable Boundary Node

Note: Patran has a logical set of rules for the most common use cases. This example is contained in
/doc/seug/chapter4/rigid-elem/rbar-connection1.bdf. The resulting SESET for this case is:
RBAR 101 11 3 123456 123456

SESET 10 12 13

Listing 4-11 RBAR and SESET for rbar-connection1.bdf

And the SEMAP for this case is:

Table 4-2 SEMAP for Coincident Nodes at Boundary – rbar-connection1.bdf

Superelement Interior Grids Exterior Grids Elements
Residual 1, 2, 3, 11 - 1, 2, 101
10 12, 13 11 11, 12

The astute reader may be wondering why there is not a set conflict because grid 11 is dependent and an
exterior grid – i.e. an A-Set point for superelement 10. The answer is that grid 11 is part of the A-Set for
superelement 10 and processed accordingly. Then the boundary point is added to Superelement 0 before the
MPCs are processed; i.e. recall equation 1-13:
 K gg  =  K jj  +   K aa 

Main Index
 232 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Boundary Conditions in Static Analysis

So, grid 11 is part of the A-set in Superelement 10, then it is part of the M-set in Superelement 0, which is
perfectly legal.
Suppose the user wants the RBAR to be part of superelement 10, what can be done? If the user defines a
PLOTEL (Element ID 14) between grid 3 and 11 and adds it to the superelement 10 group, then Patran will
allow grid 3 to be the exterior grid.

Figure 4-9 Automatic Boundary When PLOTEL is Added to Superelement Group

The resulting bdf for this case is located at /doc/seug/chapter4/rigid-elem/rbar-connection1p.bdf. The

SESET entry for this case becomes
PLOTEL 14 3 11

RBAR 101 11 3 123456 123456

$ Super10.10

SESET 10 11 12 13

Figure 4-10 PLOTEL, RBAR, and SESET for rbar-connection1p.bdf

Here the user must ensure that grid 3 is the independent grid on the RBAR (or MPC) in order to avoid a set
conflict. In this case, the SEMAP shows that PLOTEL 14 and RBAR 101 are assigned to Superelement 10.

Table 4-3 SEMAP for rbar-connection1p.bdf

Superelement Interior Grids Exterior Grids Elements
Residual 1,2,3 - 1, 2
10 11, 12, 13 3 11, 12, 14, 101

Main Index
 233
Loads, Constraints, Case Control, and Parameters in Static Analysis

MPC Connections
Another method for connecting the model shown in Figure 4-4 is to use explicit MPCs.
$ Multipoint Constraints of the Entire Model

MPCADD 207 201 202 203 204 205 206

MPC 201 11 1 -1. 3 1 -1.

MPC 202 11 2 -1. 3 2 -1.

MPC 203 11 3 -1. 3 3 -1.

MPC 204 11 4 -1. 3 4 -1.

MPC 205 11 5 -1. 3 5 -1.

MPC 206 11 6 -1. 3 6 -1.

$ Super10.10

SESET 10 12 13

Listing 4-12 MPC and SESET entries for mpc-connection1.bdf

The SEMAP is similar to the RBAR case, except that there is no map entry for the explicit MPCs:

Table 4-4 SEMAP for Coincident Nodes at Boundary – mpc-connection1.bdf

Superelement Interior Grids Exterior Grids Elements
Residual 1, 2, 3, 11 - 1, 2
10 12, 13 11 12, 13

Like the RBAR example, the user could add PLOTEL 14 between grids 3 and 11 and assign grid 3 as the
boundary grids. In this case the modified bulk data and SEMAP follow:
PLOTEL 14 3 11

$ Multipoint Constraints of the Entire Model

MPCADD 207 201 202 203 204 205 206

MPC 201 11 1 -1. 3 1 -1.

MPC 202 11 2 -1. 3 2 -1.

MPC 203 11 3 -1. 3 3 -1.

MPC 204 11 4 -1. 3 4 -1.

MPC 205 11 5 -1. 3 5 -1.

MPC 206 11 6 -1. 3 6 -1.

$ Super10.10

SESET 10 11 12 13

Main Index
 234 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Boundary Conditions in Static Analysis

Listing 4-13 Listing

Table 4-5 SEMAP for Coincident Nodes at Boundary – mpx-connection1p.bdf

Superelement Interior Grids Exterior Grids Elements
Residual 1, 2, 3 - 1, 2
10 11, 12, 13 3 11, 12, 14

Assigning Exterior Points (CSUPEXT)

MSC Nastran is offers an additional control for the user to define the exterior points of a superelement. The
user could use the CSUPEXT entry instead of defining PLOTELs. This may be more convenient for models
with dozens or hundreds of boundaries.

CSUPEXT Superelement Exterior Point Definition

Assigns exterior points to a superelement.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CSUPEXT SEID GP1 GP2 GP3 GP4 GP5 GP6 GP7

Example:
CSUPEXT 2 147 562 937

Alternate Format and Example:

CSUPEXT SEID GP1 THRU GP2
”
CSUPEXT 5 12006 THRU 12050

Field Contents
SEID Identification number of a primary superelement. (Integer > 0)
GPi Grid or scalar point identification number in the downstream superelement or residual
structure. (Integer > 0 or “THRU”; For “THRU” option, GP1<GP2)
For the RBAR or MPC example, the SESET entry is modified to include grid 11 and the CSUPEXT entry
specifies GRID 3 as the exterior point. The modified models are: /doc/seug/chapter4/rigid-elem/rbar-
connection1.bdf and mpc-connnection1-csupext.bdf.
Super10.10

$ modify SESET and add CSUPEXT

SESET 10 11 12 13

CSUPEXT 10 3

Main Index
 235
Loads, Constraints, Case Control, and Parameters in Static Analysis

Listing 4-14 Modifications for CSUPEXT Definition of Exterior Points

The corresponding SEMAPs are as follows:

Table 4-6 SEMAP for Coincident Nodes at Boundary – rbar-connection1-csupext.bdf

Superelement Interior Grids Exterior Grids Elements
Residual 1, 2, 3 - 1, 2
10 11, 12, 13 3 11, 12, 101

Table 4-7 SEMAP for Coincident Nodes at Boundary – mpc-connection1-csupext.bdf

Superelement Interior Grids Exterior Grids Elements
Residual 1, 2, 3 - 1, 2
10 11, 12, 13 3 11, 12

PART Superelements
When PART superelements are used, the user must ensure that the exterior boundary points are part of the
A-Set. This means that if grid 3 is selected as the boundary, the user must ensure that it contains the
independent dof of the MPC or RBAR. Patran does not recognize MPCs on the boundary of PART
superelements, so the user can export the model for each group and then manually assemble the model with
INCLUDE statements.
For example, the PART superelement bdf for the RBAR configuration contained in Superelement 10 can be
written from the Analysis Form as follows:

Figure 4-11 Writing an Individual Part bdf Model from Patran

Main Index
 236 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Boundary Conditions in Static Analysis

This will result in a bulk data file containing the following entries:
PBARL 1 1 BAR

1. 1.

$ Pset: "bar" will be imported as: "pbarl.1"

CBAR 11 1 11 12 0. 1. 0.

CBAR 12 1 12 13 0. 1. 0.

$ Referenced Material Records

$ Material Record : sample

$ Description of Material : Date: 09-Apr-11 Time: 16:42:01

MAT1 1 1.+6 .3 .1 1.-6

$ Multipoint Constraints of Group : SE10

RBAR 101 11 3 123456 123456

$ Nodes of Group : SE10

GRID 3 20. 0. 0.

GRID 11 20. 0. 0.

GRID 12 30. 0. 0.

GRID 13 40. 0. 0.

$ Loads for Load Case : Default

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : axial

FORCE 1 13 0 1000. 1. 0. 0.

Listing 4-15 PART bdf for Superelement 10 Containing the RBAR, part10-rbar.bdf

The residual solution can be written with an INCLUDE file for the PART. Note that since there is a BEGIN
SUPER, the Direct Text Input for the Bulk Data must be written at the END of the bulk data section. In
addition, since there are duplicate boundary nodes, the user must specify SEBNDRY in order to avoid User
Fatal Message 6794.
*** USER FATAL MESSAGE 6794 (SEPSEB)

DUPLICATE BOUNDARY POINTS DETECTED IN UPSTREAM SUPERELEMENT 10 WHILE SEARCHING 0 AT GRID 3.

LIST FOLLOWS:

11 3

0FATAL ERROR

Listing 4-16 Example of Error 6794 When There are Duplicate Boundary Nodes

Main Index
 237
Loads, Constraints, Case Control, and Parameters in Static Analysis

Figure 4-12 Example of SECONCT, BEGIN SUPER, and INCLUDE for PART Superelement

Since the loads must be consistent across all superelements, and the only loads are defined by the FORCE
entry in the part superelement, a LOAD entry must be added to the subcase.

Main Index
 238 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Boundary Conditions in Static Analysis

Figure 4-13

The resulting residual bulk data file is:

SOL 101

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = MSC Nastran job created on 09-Apr-11 at 17:43:48

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

ECHO = NONE

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Default

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

LOAD = 1

SPC = 2

DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,BILIN)=ALL

BEGIN BULK

PARAM POST -1

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

Main Index
 239
Loads, Constraints, Case Control, and Parameters in Static Analysis

$ Elements and Element Properties for region : bar

PBARL 1 1 BAR

1. 1.

$ Pset: "bar" will be imported as: "pbarl.1"

CBAR 1 1 1 2 0. 1. 0.

CBAR 2 1 2 3 0. 1. 0.

$ Referenced Material Records

$ Material Record : sample

$ Description of Material : Date: 09-Apr-11 Time: 16:42:01

MAT1 1 1.+6 .3 .1 1.-6

$ Nodes of Group : residual

GRID 1 0. 0. 0.

GRID 2 10. 0. 0.

GRID 3 20. 0. 0.

$ Loads for Load Case : Default

SPCADD 2 1

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : fixed

SPC1 1 123456 1

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

SEBNDRY,10,0,3

BEGIN SUPER = 10

include 'part10-rbar.bdf'

ENDDATA

Listing 4-17 Residual Bulk Data File for rbar-residual.bdf

A similar process can be followed for explicit MPCs. Note that since the MPC’s are in the PART
superelement an MPCADD must be added. In this example, the MPCADD is placed in the direct text input
for the part superelement export:

Main Index
 240 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Boundary Conditions in Static Analysis

Figure 4-14 Combining Explicit MPCs with MPCADD

In addition, the MPCs will need to be activated by adding MPC=200 to the Direct Text Input for Case
Control.

Main Index
 241
Loads, Constraints, Case Control, and Parameters in Static Analysis

Figure 4-15 Activating MPCs for the PART Superelement Solution

The resulting input files are located at: /doc/seug/chapter4/rigid-elem/ext10-mpc.bdf and mpc-residual.bdf.

External Superelements
Defining the external superelement is similar to defining the PART superelement, except that the ASET and
EXTSEOUT entries must be defined.
Recall from Single-Level Analysis Using External Superelements (Ch. 3) that the ASET is easily defined from the
Meshing tab using the DOF List:

Main Index
 242 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Boundary Conditions in Static Analysis

Figure 4-16 Defining the ASET for External Superelement 10

Also recall from Single-Level Analysis Using External Superelements (Ch. 3)that the EXTSEOUT parameters are
set when defining the Analysis in the Solution Parameters Form. In this case, the MATRIXDB option is used
for the external file format.

Main Index
 243
Loads, Constraints, Case Control, and Parameters in Static Analysis

Figure 4-17 Defining the EXTSEOUT for Superelement 10

For the RBAR case, the example files are: doc/seug/chapter4/rigid-elem/ext10-rbar.bdf and assemble-
rbar.bdf.
For the MPC case, the example files are: doc/seug/chapter4/rigid-elem/ext10-mpc.bdf and assemble-
mpc.bdf.

Case Control
MSC Nastran has several superelement-unique Case Control commands that allow the user maximum
flexibility in superelement solutions. These commands include manual processing commands such as
SEMG, SELG, SEKR, SELR, SEMR, SEALL, and SEDR. A brief description of these entries is in the table
below. For detailed descriptions on usage, refer to the Quick Reference Guide Case Control section. For

Main Index
 244 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Case Control

detailed description of the operations for each command, refer to the appropriate section in the MSC Nastran
Reference Guide.

Table 4-8 Manual Superelement Processing Case Control Directives

Case Control Command Purpose
SEMGenerate Superelement Element Matrix Generation – generate and
assemble the structural matrices ( K jj , M jj , B jj , etc.)

SELGenerate Superelement Loads Generation – generate loads matrix ( P j )

SEKReduce Superelement Stiffness Reduction

K gg K nn K ff
SELReduce Superelement Load Reduction P g P l
SEMReduce Superelement Mass Reduction K gg K aa
SEALL Perform all “Generate” and “Reduce” operations on specified
superelements
SEDRecovery Superelement Data Recovery

Information in this section refers to the Structured Solution Sequences (SSS), SOLs 100 through 200. The
manual processing commands are not of particular interest in these solutions, because these solutions have
automatic superelement processing. In prior versions of MSC Nastran, Solutions 61 through 99
(Unstructured Solution Sequences, USS) were manual solutions, and in those solutions the use of the manual
processing commands was mandatory. Therefore, with the exception of SEDR, the details of these
commands are not covered in detail in this User Guide.
Case Control commands that are unique to superelement analysis are SEEXclude (SEEX), SEFINAL, and
(the most important Case Control command for superelements) SUPER. The SEFINAL and SEEX
commands are processing commands that control processing order (SEFINAL) and inclusion (SEEX). Their
description and use is beyond the scope of this User Guide, but experienced superelement users may find
them useful for debugging and advanced operations.

The SUPER command is the command used to partition the Case Control into a unique subset for each
superelement. The understanding and use of the SUPER Case Control command is extremely important in
both static and dynamic analysis. This Chapter will discuss the SUPER command as it relates to statics.
For a general refresher on the Case Control section in statics, refer to the The Case Control Section (Ch. 2) in the
MSC Nastran Linear Static Analysis User’s Guide.

Main Index
 245
Loads, Constraints, Case Control, and Parameters in Static Analysis

The SUPER Command

The SUPER Case Control command is used to partition the Case Control into a unique subset for each
superelement. The purpose of the SUPER command is to partition the Case Control in a manner similar to
the Bulk Data partitioning. That is, each superelement has its own unique set of Case Control created, based
on the use of the SUPER command. During the processing of each superelement, its unique Case Control
will be used.
At the risk of sounding redundant, the SUPER command is the most important Case
Control command for superelements. It is also the most frequently misused command, and when it is
misused, either incorrect results, fatal errors, or no output can occur. Therefore, strict attention must be paid
to the use of the SUPER command.
For most cases, condensed case control (described below) is all that is required the SUPER command can be
omitted since SUPER=ALL is the default. The following subsections describe the SUPER use for cases when
different loadings, output requests, or processing requests are used for individual superelements.

SUPER Superelement Subcase Assignment

Assigns a subcase(s) to a superelement or set of superelements.

Format:

 
 ALL 
 
SUPER =   setid   (4-28)
   lseqid  
   seid   
 
Examples:
SUPER=17,3
SUPER=15
SUPER=ALL

Field Contents
seid Superelement identification number (Integer > 0).
ALL The subcase is assigned to all superelements and all loading conditions (Default).
setid Set identification number of a previously appearing SET command. The subcase is
assigned to all superelements with identification numbers that appear on this SET
command (Integer > 0).
lseqid Load sequence number (Integer > 0; Default=1).

Main Index
 246 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Case Control

The SUPER command can occur in each SUBCASE and can appear before the first SUBCASE (in which
case it is a default behavior for all subcases without a SUPER entry). The purpose of the SUPER command
is to allow different loadings, constraints, and output requests for individual superelements.
In superelement analysis Case Control is treated differently than in conventional analysis. Internally, MSC
Nastran creates a separate Case Control set for each superelement (called CASES); thus, each superelement
can have its own unique SUBCASE for each loading condition.
A SUBCASE must exist for the residual structure for each loading condition. An internal counter (lseqid) is
based on the load sequence of residual structure SUBCASEs, which is in contrast with conventional analysis,
where each SUBCASE defines a unique loading condition (or solution).
Another way of describing this is that there are “n” load vectors for the residual that result in “n” solution
vectors. Thus, at the final reduction level for statics, the L-set:
 P l  =  K ll   U l  (4-29)

Expanding to “n” load vectors:

  P l1   P l2   P l3   P ln   =  K ll    U l1   U l2   U l3   U ln   (4-30)

Where  P li  and  U li  are the load vector and solution vector for load sequence i (a.k.a. lseqid). These
are stored in ascending SUBCASE ID order for the residual subcases.
The user must ensure that there is a superelement load vector for each residual load vector. This is where the
understanding of the SUPER=seid,lseqid becomes important.

Note: MSC Nastran stores data blocks on the database with Qualifier. For example, each superelement
has a  P g  vector, but how is MSC Nastran supposed to know which one is associated to a
particular superelement? The answer is that the MSC Nastran database has metadata
associated with each data block. This metadata is in the form of Qualifiers. For instance, the
Qualifiers for  P g  include SEID, P2G, and MTEMP to name a few. For a detailed
description on qualifiers, refer to the PATH description in the MSC Nastran DMAP
Programmers Manual, Chapter 3.2. The full path descriptors can be found in the installation
“del” directory, file nddl.dmap.

The full description of the  P g  path qualifiers are:

Table 4-9 NDDL PATH Qualifiers for

NDDL Path Qualifiers
PG SEID,PEID,MTEMP,DESITER,PVALID,APRCH,QCPLD,adjoint,
HIGHQUAL,P2G,K2GG,M2GG,inertia,DELTA,auxmid,bndshp,
isolapp,desinc,discrete,partname $

The scope of this document limits us to explore only a few of these qualifiers.

Main Index
 247
Loads, Constraints, Case Control, and Parameters in Static Analysis

Condensed Case Control

A simple example of condensed Case Control is:
DISP=ALL

STRESS=ALL

SPC=2

SUBCASE 101

LOAD = 15

SUBCASE 201

LOAD = 3

SUBCASE 301

LOAD = 77

Listing 4-18 Simple Example of Condensed Case Control

Assuming that, in addition to the residual structure, there are 2 superelements (SEID=1 and SEID=2), the
Case Control partition (CASES) for each Superelement is as follows:

Table 4-10 Internal Partitioning (CASES) of Simple Example of Condensed Case Control
Load Sequence ID (lseqid)
SEID Case Control (Column number in  P g  )

1 2 3
0 SUBCASE 101 201 301

ID
LOAD 15 3 77

ID
SPC ID SPC=2 SPC=2 SPC=2

MPC ID (MPC=0) (MPC=0) (MPC=0)

Output DISP=ALL, DISP=ALL, DISP=ALL,
Requests STRESS=ALL STRESS=ALL STRESS=ALL

Main Index
 248 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Case Control

Table 4-10 Internal Partitioning (CASES) of Simple Example of Condensed Case Control
Load Sequence ID (lseqid)
SEID Case Control (Column number in  P g  )
1 SUBCASE 101 201 301

ID
LOAD 15 3 77

ID
SPC ID SPC=2 SPC=2 SPC=2

MPC ID
Output DISP=ALL, DISP=ALL, DISP=ALL,
Requests STRESS=ALL STRESS=ALL STRESS=ALL
2 SUBCASE 101 201 301

ID
LOAD 15 3 77

ID
SPC ID SPC=2 SPC=2 SPC=2

MPC ID
Output DISP=ALL, DISP=ALL, DISP=ALL,
Requests STRESS=ALL STRESS=ALL STRESS=ALL

Since there are no explicit MPCs activated by the case control, the Case Control does not include an MPC
qualifier. Similarly, there are no PARAMs, so all PARAM statements will be based on the bulk data or default
values. Examples for PARAMs are included in Parameter Controls.

Expanded Case Control

While condensed case control is sufficient for most applications, there is flexibility afforded to the user with
expanded case control. In statics, the common reasons for using expanded case control are:
 SPCs have different ID’s in different superelements for the same load sequence
 MPCs have different ID’s in different superelements for the same load sequence
 LOADs have different ID’s in different superelements for the same load sequence
 Different output is requested for different superelements
 Different PARAMeters apply to different superelements (see Parameter Controls)
 Different Eigenfrequency cutoffs are required for different superelement (i.e. the METHOD case
control used in dynamics)

Main Index
 249
Loads, Constraints, Case Control, and Parameters in Static Analysis

For all of these conditions, the correct application of SUBCASE / SUPER is required for the proper results.
At worst, the user will get wrong results; at best, results will be missing.
The following examples demonstrate expanded case control and the internal CASES for each superelement.
These examples can be found in the installation: /doc/seug/chapter4/expanded-casecc-ex1.dat, expanded-
casecc-ex2.dat, and expanded-casecc-ex3.dat
DISP=ALL
STRESS=ALL
SUBCASE 11 SUBCASE 21 SUBCASE 31
SUPER=10,1 SUPER=20,3 SUPER=0,1
SPC=3 SPC=3 SPC=2
SUBCASE 12 LOAD=21 LOAD=1
SUPER=10,2 SUBCASE 22 SUBCASE 32
SUBCASE 13 SUPER=20,2 SUPER=0,2
SUPER=10,3 SPC=3 SPC=2
LOAD=542 LOAD=22 LOAD=29
SUBCASE 23 SUBCASE 33
SUPER=20,1 SUPER=0,3
SPC=3 SPC=2
LOAD=3

Listing 4-19 Expanded Case Control Example 1

Table 4-11 Expanded Case Control Example 1 Internal Partitioning (CASES)

Load Sequence ID (lseqid)
SEID Case Control (Column number in  P g  )

1 2 3
0 SUBCASE 31 32 33
ID
LOAD 1 29 3
ID
SPC ID 2 2 2

Main Index
 250 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Case Control

Table 4-11 Expanded Case Control Example 1 Internal Partitioning (CASES)

Load Sequence ID (lseqid)
SEID Case Control (Column number in  P g  )
1 SUBCASE 11 12 13
ID
LOAD - - 542
ID
SPC ID 3 - -

2 SUBCASE 23 22 21
ID
LOAD - 22 21
ID
SPC ID 3

This particular example will result in a multitude of errors:

^^^ USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 9044 (PHASE0)

^^^ BULK DATA AND CASE CONTROL PARTITIONING, RESTART CHECKING, AND UNDEFORMED PLOTTING IS

^^^ INITIATED FOR SUPERELEMENT 10

^^^

^^^ USER FATAL MESSAGE 9072 (PHASE0)

^^^ MULTIPLE BOUNDARY CONDITIONS ARE NOT ALLOWED FOR SUPERELEMENTS.

^^^

^^^ USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 9044 (PHASE0)

^^^ BULK DATA AND CASE CONTROL PARTITIONING, RESTART CHECKING, AND UNDEFORMED PLOTTING IS

^^^ INITIATED FOR SUPERELEMENT 20

*** USER FATAL MESSAGE 7323 (SEP2D)

SUBCASES FOR SUPERELEMENT 20 HAS A LOAD SEQUENCE NUMBER = 2 WHICH IS OUT OF ORDER.

*** USER FATAL MESSAGE 7323 (SEP2D)

SUBCASES FOR SUPERELEMENT 20 HAS A LOAD SEQUENCE NUMBER = 1 WHICH IS OUT OF ORDER.

^^^ USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 9044 (PHASE0)

^^^ BULK DATA AND CASE CONTROL PARTITIONING, RESTART CHECKING, AND UNDEFORMED PLOTTING IS

^^^ INITIATED FOR SUPERELEMENT 0

*** USER WARNING MESSAGE 2053 (GP4)

UNDEFINED SINGLE-POINT CONSTRAINT SET 2

^^^

^^^ USER FATAL MESSAGE 9032 (PHASE0)

^^^ RUN IS TERMINATED DUE TO MESSAGE(S) ABOVE ON THE RESIDUAL STRUCTURE AND/OR THE SUPERELEMENT(S).

^^^

Main Index
 251
Loads, Constraints, Case Control, and Parameters in Static Analysis

Listing 4-20 Errors for Expanded Case Control Example 1

The first error is that multiple boundary conditions are not allowed for superelements. This is because
Superelement 10 has SPC=3 for SUBCASE 10/lseqid=1, and no SPCs for the other subcase / load sequences.
The next error is because the load sequence number is out of order for superelement 20. A corrected version
of the case control is as follows:
DISP=ALL
STRESS=ALL
SUBCASE 11 SUBCASE 21 SUBCASE 31
SUPER=10,1 SUPER=20,1 SUPER=0,1
SPC=3 SPC=3 SPC=2
SUBCASE 12 LOAD=23 LOAD=1
SUPER=10,2 SUBCASE 22 SUBCASE 32
SPC=3 SUPER=20,2 SUPER=0,2
SUBCASE 13 SPC=3 SPC=2
SUPER=10,3 LOAD=22 LOAD=29
LOAD=542 SUBCASE 23 SUBCASE 33
SPC=3 SUPER=20,3 SUPER=0,3
SPC=3 SPC=2
LOAD=21 LOAD=3

Table 4-12 Expanded Case Control Example 2 Internal Partitioning (CASES)

Load Sequence ID (lseqid)
SEID Case Control (Column number in  P g  )

1 2 3
0 SUBCASE 31 32 33

ID
LOAD 1 29 3

ID
SPC ID 2 2 2

Main Index
 252 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Case Control

Table 4-12 Expanded Case Control Example 2 Internal Partitioning (CASES)

Load Sequence ID (lseqid)
SEID Case Control (Column number in  P g  )
10 SUBCASE 11 12 13

ID
LOAD - - 542

ID
SPC ID 3 3 3

20 SUBCASE 21 22 23

ID
LOAD - 22 21

ID
SPC ID 3 3 3

The Example 2 Case Control produces a valid case control. The astute reader will notice that the SPC IDs
are changed. This does not lead to a fatal message because the SPC IDs are consistent within a superelement,
which is the only requirement. Also, if the user runs this model, he will note that AUTOSPC captures the
“6” dof for superelement 20, but not for grids 111 and 211 in superelement 10, nor the residual structure.
The following example is a variation that produces the same residual solution as Example 2:
DISP=ALL
STRESS=ALL
$ Constraints or Loads above 1st subcase applies to all subcases
$ unless superseded by a callout within the subcase
SPC=3

SUBCASE 13 SUBCASE 21 SUBCASE 31

SUPER=10,3 SUPER=20,1 SUPER=0,1
LOAD=542 LOAD=23 SPC=2
SUBCASE 22 LOAD=1
SUPER=20,2 SUBCASE 32
LOAD=22 SUPER=0,2
SUBCASE 23 SPC=2
SUPER=20,3 LOAD=29
LOAD=21 SUBCASE 33
SUPER=0,3
SPC=2
LOAD=3

Listing 4-21 Expanded Case Control Example 3

Main Index
 253
Loads, Constraints, Case Control, and Parameters in Static Analysis

Note that the SPCs are automatically propagated to the ‘missing’ SUPER=I,J subcases. However, this is not
true for the output requests as discussed in the next section.

Output Control
The output control (DISPLACEMENT, STRESS, FORCE, etc.) has similar rules to the loads and
constraints, but there are some clear differences. For Example 2 above (expanded-casecc-ex2.dat), there is a
subcase for each superelement and load sequence, so the output request above the first subcase applies to
every subcase unless an individual subcase requests more output or a different set of output (i.e. DISP=ALL
vs DISP=setid).

Table 4-13 Expanded Case Control Example 2 Output Requests

Load Sequence ID (lseqid)
SEID Case Control (Column number in  P g  )

1 2 3
0 SUBCASE 31 32 33

ID
DISP ALL ALL ALL

STRESS ALL ALL ALL

10 SUBCASE 11 12 13

ID
DISP ALL ALL ALL

STRESS ALL ALL ALL

20 SUBCASE 21 22 23

ID
DISP ALL ALL ALL

STRESS ALL ALL ALL

Main Index
 254 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Case Control

In the case of Expanded Case Control Example 3 (expanded-casecc-ex3.dat ) above it is not required to
specify an expanded subcase for a SEID/lseqid combination that does not have loads. However, omitting the
subcase altogether will result in the omission of all output requests for that subcase. This omission will not
cause incorrect answers but will prevent obtaining any output for that superelement for that loading
condition
.

Table 4-14 Expanded Case Control Example 3 Output Requests

Load Sequence ID (lseqid)
SEID Case Control (Column number in  P g  )

1 2 3
0 SUBCASE 31 32 33

ID
DISP ALL ALL ALL

STRESS ALL ALL ALL

10 SUBCASE 11 12 13

ID
DISP x x ALL

STRESS x x ALL

20 SUBCASE 21 22 23

ID
DISP ALL ALL ALL

STRESS ALL ALL ALL

Since there was no SUBCASE specified for SUPER=10,2 or SUPER=10,3, the output is null for these
SEID/lseqid combinations.
Another output control provided to the user is the SEDR case control command. The SEDR command is
used to select which superelements will have data recovery. By default, every superelement will have data

Main Index
 255
Loads, Constraints, Case Control, and Parameters in Static Analysis

recovery based on the case control. However, the user can turn off all output requests associated with a
superelement by specifying the SEDR Case Control command.

SEDR Superelement Data Recovery

Specifies the superelement identification numbers for which data recovery will be performed.
Format:

 ALL 
 
SEDR =  i  (4-31)
 
 n 
Examples:

SEDR=ALL
SEDR=7

Field Contents
ALL Performs data recovery for all superelements.
n Set identification number of a previously appearing SET command. Data recovery will be
performed for superelements with identification numbers that appear on this SET
command (Integer > 0).
i Identification number of a single superelement for which data recovery will be performed
(Integer > 0).

Vector Output
Vector output such as DISPLACEMENT, VELOCITY, and ACCELERATION can be based on SORT1
or SORT2 requests. SORT1 means that output will be presented as a tabular listing of grid points for each
load, frequency, eigenvalue, or time, depending on the solution sequence. A SORT2 request means output
will be presented as a tabular listing of load, frequency, or time for each grid point.
The defaults for SORT1 and SORT2 depend on the type of analysis:
 SORT1 is the default in static analysis, frequency response, steady state heat transfer analysis, real
and complex eigenvalue analysis, flutter analysis, and buckling analysis.

Main Index
 256 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Parameter Controls

 SORT2 is the default in transient response analysis (structural and heat transfer). SORT2 is not
available for real eigenvalue (including buckling), complex eigenvalue, or flutter analysis. If SORT1
is selected in a transient solution for one or more of the commands ACCE, DISP, ENTH, FORC,
HDOT, MPCF, OLOA, SPCF, STRA, STRE, and VELO, then the remaining commands will also
be output in SORT1 format. If SORT2 is selected in a static or frequency response solution for one
or more of the commands ACCE, DISP, FORC, MPCF, OLOA, SPCF, STRA, STRE, and VELO,
then the remaining commands will also be output in SORT2 format.
 XYPLOT plot requests forces SORT2 and overrides SORT1 requests!

Tensor Output
The tensor output requests for STRESS and FORCE can have different output options. The location
options CENTER, CORNER, CUBIC, SGAGE, and BILIN are recognized only in the first subcase, and
determine the option to be used in all subsequent subcases with the STRESS, STRAIN, and FORCE
commands. In superelement analysis, the first subcase refers to the first subcase of each superelement.
Therefore, it is recommended that these options be specified above all subcases. Consequently, options
specified in subcases other than the first subcase will be ignored. See also Remark 8 under the FORCE Case
Control command for further discussion.

Parameter Controls
In addition to loads, constraints, and output, the case control can be used to specify different PARAMeters
associated with each superelement. For example, the user may be assembling models that were generated by
different organizations and each organization may have used a different mass density. Rather than modify
each material entry for each component, the assembly model could use expanded case control in conjunction
with PARAM,WTMASS to control the mass density for each superelement.
With MSC Nastran the user can specify parameters in Case Control. Many-but not all parameters can be
specified in Case Control. For a listing of which parameters can be specified in the case control, refer to the
Parameter Applicability Tables (Ch. 6) in the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
Because the user can specify values in Case Control, a different value can be specified for each superelement.
As with output requests, PARAM entries can be specified above the subcase level or within individual
subcases.
For the linear solutions, the value used in the first subcase appearing for a superelement is used for that
superelement for all subcases. If a parameter appears above the first subcase, the value given is a default value
and is used for all subcases (if not changed inside individual subcases). The value used for any parameter
when processing a superelement is determined with a strict set of rules. These rules state that the value used
for a parameter will be:
 The value from the first subcase for that superelement
 The default value specified before the first subcase (if not in the subcase)
 The value specified in the Bulk Data (if not either of the above)
 The default value of the parameter (if none of the above). Note that the default value can vary
between solutions. For instance, PARAM,AUTOSPC,YES is the default for SOL 101, b

Main Index
 257
Loads, Constraints, Case Control, and Parameters in Static Analysis

Due to this hierarchy, if you wish to use different values for parameters for different superelements, it is
recommend that the user specify a default value above the first subcase and specify any exceptions inside the
appropriate subcases.

List Superelements
For List Superelements defined in a model with BEGIN BULK, a PARAM defined in the bulk data is
applicable to every superelement unless overridden by the same PARAM defined in the case control.

PART Superelements
For PART superelements defined with BEGIN SUPER, either each bulk data must have the desired
PARAMs, or they must be specified in the case control. A common misconception is that PARAM,POST
defined in the main bulk data section is applicable to all superelement. To the contrary, PARAM,POST (and
any other PARAM) entry must be specified either within the BEGIN SUPER section or in the case control.
Often, it is easier to define the PARAMs in the case control.

External Superelements
For External Superelements, there is very little flexibility to change PARAMs after the reduction is
performed. During the superelement reduction step (EXTSEOUT), the PARAM entries associated with
stiffness generation and reduction (or mass / load generation and reduction) are applied. PARAMs associated
with other operations are ignored. During the assembly run, there are very few PARAMs that are recognized
and applied. For instance, PARAM,SNORM will affect the reduction run, but will never be applied to the
reduced superelement in the assembly run.

Special Considerations
Most of the examples in this manual are presented with a non-superelement solution, a list superelement
solution, a part element solution to demonstrate that the same answers are achieved for any method. Up to
this point, the only entries that were required for superelements have been those associated with partitioning
the grids and elements. This section covers special considerations for models with curved shells.

SNORM for PART or External Superelements

PARAM,SNORM provides a special situation that must be handled by the user for External superelements.
SNORM was introduced in V68.2 and became the default in V2001. The purpose of SNORM is to generate
unique grid point normals for adjacent shell elements as shown below. These unique grid point normals are
generated for the CQUAD4, CTRIA3, CQUADR, and CTRIAR elements. The grid point normal is the
average of the local normals from all adjacent shell elements including CQUAD8 and CTRIA6 elements.
When grid point normals are present, they are used in all element calculations of the CQUAD4, CTRIA3,
CQUADR, and CTRIAR elements and improve the solution.

Main Index
 258 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Special Considerations

Figure 4-18 Unique Grid Point Normal for Adjacent Shell Elements

More details on SNORM can be found in Shell Models and Shell Normal in the MSC Nastran Reference Guide.

Example of Curved Shells

The example for this section comes from the Surface Elements (Ch. 3) in the MSC Nastran Reference Guide.
The 8x8 mesh will be used as shown here (note: the Reference Guide uses symmetry, so the 8x8 refers to the
elements within a 90° arc and ½ height).

Main Index
 259
Loads, Constraints, Case Control, and Parameters in Static Analysis

Figure 4-19 SNORM Example Model

Main Index
 260 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Special Considerations

Figure 4-20 Boundary Grids Between Superelement 4 and Superelement 1

The following example files are included in the installation in /doc/seug/chapter4/quadr-8x8-*.bdf. Using
the defaults, it is easy to see that the external superelement produces inconsistent results with respect to the
baseline, list superelements, and part superelements.

Table 4-15 SNORM Example Deflection Comparison Using Default Values

Filename Superelement Type Grid 1 Radial Deflection
quadr-8x8-baseline.bdf Residual Only 4.738975E-01
quadr-8x8-seset.bdf List Superelement - BEGIN BULK 4.738975E-01
quadr-8x8-partse.bdf PART Superelement BEGIN SUPER 4.738975E-01
quadr-8x8-extse-q1.bdf External generation (EXTSEOUT) n/a
quadr-8x8-extse-q2.bdf External generation (EXTSEOUT) n/a
quadr-8x8-extse-q3.bdf External generation (EXTSEOUT) n/a
quadr-8x8-extse-q4.bdf External generation (EXTSEOUT) n/a
quadr-8x8-assembly.bdf External assembly 5.350466E-01

Main Index
 261
Loads, Constraints, Case Control, and Parameters in Static Analysis

So, why is the external superelement solution so much different? The answer is the values of SNORM. For
the Residual Only, List Superelement, and Part Superelement solutions, MSC Nastran has enough
information to form SNORM based on all of the elements attaching to each grid – even if they are not in
the current superelement. In the case of External Superelements, MSC Nastran has no information about
what is beyond the boundary, and bases the SNORM value on the elements it knows about. For all of these
example cases, PARAM,SNORMPRT,1 was turned on so that the SNORM direction cosines are output to
the .pch file. Examination of these values for grid 1 indicates that there is a significant difference between
the internal and external solutions:

Table 4-16 SNORM Example Direction Cosine Comparison Using Default Values
Filename Grid 1 SNORM Direction Vector
Nx Ny Nz
quadr-8x8-baseline.bdf -1.00000 0.00000 0.00000
quadr-8x8-seset.bdf -1.00000 0.00000 0.00000
quadr-8x8-partse.bdf -1.00000 0.00000 0.00000
quadr-8x8-extse-q1.bdf 0.99518 0.09802 0.00000
quadr-8x8-extse-q4.bdf 0.99518 -0.09802 0.00000
quadr-8x8-assembly.bdf n/a n/a n/a

To correct these values, the user must manually define the SNORM direction cosines for each grid on the
boundary that is affected. For the grids shown in Figure 4-20, these entries are:
SNORM 1 -1.00000 0.00000 0.00000

SNORM 10 -1.00000 0.00000 0.00000

SNORM 19 -1.00000 0.00000 0.00000

SNORM 28 -1.00000 0.00000 0.00000

SNORM 37 -1.00000 0.00000 0.00000

SNORM 46 -1.00000 0.00000 0.00000

SNORM 55 -1.00000 0.00000 0.00000

SNORM 64 -1.00000 0.00000 0.00000

SNORM 73 -1.00000 0.00000 0.00000

SNORM 82 -1.00000 0.00000 0.00000

SNORM 91 -1.00000 0.00000 0.00000

SNORM 100 -1.00000 0.00000 0.00000

SNORM 109 -1.00000 0.00000 0.00000

SNORM 118 -1.00000 0.00000 0.00000

SNORM 127 -1.00000 0.00000 0.00000

SNORM 136 -1.00000 0.00000 0.00000

SNORM 145 -1.00000 0.00000 0.00000

Listing 4-22 SNORM Correction Entries for Grids at =0.0

Main Index
 262 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Special Considerations

To complete the example problem suite, the following files are contained in the /doc/seug/chapter4/snorm
directory:

1.

Main Index
 Chapter 5: Inertia Relief Analysis Using Superelements
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User’s Guide
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User’s Guide

5 Inertia Relief Analysis Using

Superelements

Introduction

The Concept of Inertia Relief

Interface for Inertia Relief Using Superelements

Inertia Relief Examples (Freedom)

Main Index
 264 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Introduction

Introduction
Inertia relief is a subset of static analysis that can be used to let the body inertia react the applied loads.
Common applications include free-free aircraft where the aeroelastic loads are known and the mass is used to
balance the loads. Automotive applications can include applying known loads at the axles and allowing the
inertia of the structure to balance the loads.
Inertia relief is normally used to find the static solution of models that are not fully constrained. That is, if a
structure has possible mechanisms or rigid body motion, a static analysis cannot be performed using
conventional methods. Inertia relief provides an approach that can solve problems containing mechanisms or
rigid body modes by applying supports in order to calculate an equivalent set of body accelerations. These
body accelerations are applied equal and opposite to the applied loads. The supports allow a stable solution
while the body accelerations ensure that a zero net reaction load is realized at the support locations.
The reader is encouraged to review the following reference documentation for further description and
theoretical discussion:
 Inertia Relief (Ch. 11) in the MSC Nastran Linear Static Analysis User’s Guide
 Rigid Body Supports (Ch. 6) in the MSC Nastran Reference Guide
 Static Condensation in SubDMAPs SEKR and SEMR2 (Ch. 7) in the MSC Nastran Reference Guide

The Concept of Inertia Relief

Users can use inertia relief to obtain a static solution for a structure that is not stable, but is in a state of
equilibrium under loading. Examples of structures in this state are aircraft in flight, cars in motion, and
spacecraft in orbit. Each of these structures has one or more unconstrained, rigid body motions possible.
Therefore, it is not possible to solve these problems using conventional static analysis. In inertia relief the
structure is in a state of static equilibrium under applied loading and inertial loads.
When inertia relief is invoked, the program will calculate the summation of all loads and the mass properties
about the reference degrees-of-freedom (DOFs), and then the inertial loads required to put the structure in
a state of static equilibrium will be calculated. The program applies the static loads and these accelerations
simultaneously. The model is now in a state of equilibrium, and a set of constraints must be added that can
prevent any rigid body motion or mechanisms. The program accomplishes this task by constraining the
reference DOFs and performing the solution. If the structure is capable of rigid body motion or mechanisms
and the reference DOFs can prevent these, then the reaction forces at the reference DOFs will be zero.
The inertia relief implementation in SOL 101 allows a maximum of six reference dof can be specified. This
is in contrast to SOL 1 (non-superelement solution) which has a general implementation and allows for any
number and combination of rigid-body modes and mechanisms. The intent of SOL 101 is to allow the
solution of structures that are free-free (or to allow rigid body motion) and not to resolve structures that have
additional mechanisms. At the superelement level, SOL 101 calculates additional inertia loadings (beyond
those specified in the Case Control Section). Each of these loads corresponds to a unit acceleration of the
superelement mass about the reference point (PARAM,GRDPNT). The procedure used to solve the inertia
relief problem is described in detail in General Operations (Ch. 7) in the MSC Nastran Reference Guide.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 5 265
Inertia Relief Analysis Using Superelements

Interface for Inertia Relief Using Superelements

Inertia relief is only applicable in static analysis. The inertia relief path is invoked when the user specifies
PARAM,INREL. There are two options available as described in the following sections.

Manual Definition of Reference Points

In SOL 101 the manual definition of inertia relief is invoked by using a SUPORT or SUPORT1 with
SUPORT1 case control and PARAM,INREL,-1. The SUPORT and SUPORT1 entries are as follows:

SUPORT / SUPORT1 Fictitious Support

Defines determinate reaction degrees-of-freedom (r-set) in a free body analysis.

SUPORT1 must be requested by the SUPORT1 Case Control command.
Format(s):
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SUPORT ID1 C1 ID2 C2 ID3 C3 ID4 C4
SUPORT1 SID ID1 C1 ID2 C2 ID3 C3

Examples:

SUPORT 16 123456
SUPORT1 5 16 123456

Field Contents
SID Identification number of the support set.
Idi Grid or scalar point identification numbers.
Ci Component numbers. (Integer zero or blank for scalar points, or any unique
combinations of the Integers 1 through 6 for grid points with no embedded blanks.)

If a SUPORT entry is used and PARAM,INREL is not set to -1, MSC Nastran will treat the SUPORT
entries the same as SPC1 constraints on the specified dof and the static solution with the reference
(SUPORT) DOFs constrained and will not calculate the acceleration loads required for equilibrium.
If PARAM,GRDPNT is specified in an inertial relief run, it must be specified for all superelements, and the
location of the reference grid point must be identical for all superelements. Otherwise a FATAL message will
be issued. NOTE: this is one potential issue with specifying PART Superelements with inertia relief in

Main Index
 266 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Interface for Inertia Relief Using Superelements

Patran. Unless the user removes the PARAM,GRDPNT from the input file, the following message will likely
occur:
^^^

^^^ USER FATAL MESSAGE 9006 (PHASE0)

^^^ GRID POINT 501 ON PARAM,GRDPNT IS NOT KNOWN TO THE CURRENT SUPERELEMENT. THIS IS NOT ALLOWED IN INERTIA RELIEF.

^^^

An additional Bulk Data entry, DMIG,UACCEL, is available so user-specified accelerations can be used in
place of the ones calculated for equilibrium. When using DMIG,UACCEL, the user must specify the point
about which the accelerations will be applied (this point must appear on a SUPORT entry). A different
acceleration can be specified for each subcase. In this case, uniform accelerations are applied to the model,
and the solution is found. Uniform accelerations are useful for situations, such as spacecraft liftoff and landing
loadings, which are often specified as static accelerations.

DMIG,UACCEL Direct Matrix Input of Enforced Static Acceleration

Defines rigid body accelerations in the basic coordinate system.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DMIG UACCEL “0" “9" TIN NCOL
DMIG UACCEL L G1 C1 X1
G2 C2 X2 G3 C3 X3

Example:

DMIG UACCEL 0 9 1 4
DMIG UACCEL 2 2 3 386.4
DMIG UACCEL 3 2 4 3.0
DMIG UACCEL 4 2 6 1.0

Field Contents
TIN Type of matrix being input. (Integer 1 or 2)
1 Real, single precision (One field is used per element.)
2 Real, double precision (One field is used per element.)
NCOL Number of columns, see Remark 2. Default is the number of columns specified. (Integer
> 0)
L Load sequence number. (Integer > 0)

Main Index
 CHAPTER 5 267
Inertia Relief Analysis Using Superelements

Field Contents
Gi Grid point identification number of a single reference point. (Integer > 0)
Ci Component number for Gi in the basic coordinate system. See Remark 4. (0 <
Integer < 6)
Xi Value of enforced acceleration term in the basic coordinate system. (Real)

The following rules apply to manual specification of inertia relief in superelement analysis:
 PARAM,INREL,-1
 List Superelements: PARAM,INREL,-1 must be specified in the Main Bulk Data Section or the
Case Control.
 PART Superelements: PARAM,INREL,-1 must appear in each bulk data section or in the case
control (above the first subcase will apply to each superelement).
 SUPORT, SUPORT1 must be specified in the Main Bulk Data Section and refer to grids points in
the residual structure
 DMIG UACCEL entries must be in the Main Bulk Data Section and refer to grid points in the
residual structure.
 PARAM,GRDPNT must be specified for the same grid and must be defined in each superelement.
 External Superelements produce incorrect results.

Automatic Definition of Reference Points

An alternative method to defining the SUPORT / SUPORT1 entries for the manual method is to specify
the automatic method with PARAM,INREL,-2. This method was introduced in Version 2004 and is the
recommended inertia relief method. The user does not have to specify the SUPORT entry. The user can
simply specify PARAM,INREL,-2 in the input file. The method is designed for models with exactly 6 rigid
body modes. The reference frame is selected automatically, in a manner that poor solutions are unlikely
because of the choice of reference frame variables. Details of the automatic inertia relief method can be found
in Section 3.18 of the V2004 Release Guide and General Operations (Ch. 7) in the MSC Nastran Reference
Guide
The following features are not supported for the Automatic Inertia Relief Method:
 The DMIG,UACCEL option
 The Iterative Solver
 External Superelements produce incorrect answers
The automatic method is supported for List Superelements, PART Superelements.

Inertia Relief Examples (Freedom)

The ‘freedom’ aircraft model will be used as the example for inertia relief. Recall from Chapter 3, the model
is broken into superelements as follows:

Main Index
 268 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Inertia Relief Examples (Freedom)

Figure 5-1 Freedom Superelement Model

For this example there are some fictitious pressure loads on the wings and tail section as well as loads on the
engine as follows:

Figure 5-2 Applied Loads to Freedom Model for Inertia Relief Example

For the manual case, grid 501, attached to an RBE3 on the wingbox, is SUPORTed in all 6dof.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 5 269
Inertia Relief Analysis Using Superelements

Baseline Residual Example

The baseline model is prepared as normal with elements, properties, and loading. In order to specify inertia
relief in Patran, the user selects Inertia Relief and Node i.d. for Wt. Gener. in the Solution Parameters Form.
Note that in Patran, the SUPORT dof are exported as 123456 on the node specified. Nastran does allow the
user to specify the SUPORT dof on multiple grids as long as the dof are statically determinate.

Figure 5-3 Defining Inertia Relief (PARAM,INREL,-1) and SUPORT dof in Patran

The input for the baseline model contains the standard input plus the loading and the highlighted entries
shown below. This file is part of the delivery in /doc/seug/chapter5/inrel1/freedom-baseline.bdf.
$ Linear Static Analysis, Database

SOL 101

Main Index
 270 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Inertia Relief Examples (Freedom)

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = Freedom - Inertia Relief Example

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = Non-Superelement Model

ECHO = NONE

SUBCASE 1

$ Subcase name : Inertia-Relief

SUBTITLE=Inertia-Relief

LOAD = 2

DISPLACEMENT(plot,SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

STRESS(plot,SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,BILIN)=ALL

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST -1

PARAM INREL -1

PARAM GRDPNT 501

SUPORT 501 123456

Listing 5-1 Entries Generated by Patran for Inertia Relief

Note that PARAM,GRDPNT is not required for inertia relief, but Patran will write it along with the
SUPORT entry.
The solution for the baseline model follows the standard inertia relief algorithms. The data related to inertia
relief include the QRR, QRL, and URA matrices (refer to Inertia Relief (Ch. 11) in the MSC Nastran Linear
Static Analysis User’s Guide for additional detail.)
FREEDOM - INERTIA RELIEF EXAMPLE APRIL 17, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM

NON-SUPERELEMENT MODEL SUBCASE 1

INTERMEDIATE MATRIX ... QRR

COLUMN 1

1 3.045757E+00 2.947638E-11 -1.327679E-10 -1.546296E-09 2.367779E+01 -1.145002E-07

COLUMN 2

1 -6.334501E-11 3.045757E+00 -3.512300E-11 -2.367779E+01 3.891883E-09 1.823758E+02

COLUMN 3

1 6.758991E-10 -1.071598E-10 3.045757E+00 1.324432E-07 -1.823758E+02 -2.236083E-08

COLUMN 4

1 4.486149E-09 -2.367779E+01 1.265905E-07 1.681446E+04 -5.012229E-04 -5.598023E+03

Main Index
 CHAPTER 5 271
Inertia Relief Analysis Using Superelements

COLUMN 5

1 2.367779E+01 3.133308E-08 -5.173908E+02 -5.168224E-04 5.337467E+04 3.782013E-04

COLUMN 6

1 -1.417457E-07 5.173908E+02 -1.166995E-08 -8.202438E+03 3.731522E-04 6.687310E+04

INTERMEDIATE MATRIX ... QRL

COLUMN 1

1 4.503087E+01 1.140729E-07 -2.206303E+03 -1.281470E-05 1.877806E+05 2.372100E-05

INTERMEDIATE MATRIX ... URA

COLUMN 1

1 4.578611E+00 -3.485217E-06 3.012699E+02 -7.474066E-08 -2.490782E+00 1.708873E-08

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 5293 (SSG3A)

FOR DATA BLOCK KLL

LOAD SEQ. NO. EPSILON EXTERNAL WORK EPSILONS LARGER THAN 0.001 ARE FLAGGED WITH ASTERISKS

1 -1.1948665E-12 6.1499340E+01

Listing 5-2 QRR, QRL, and URA matrices for Freedom Baseline Inertia Relief Example

FREEDOM - INERTIA RELIEF EXAMPLE APRIL 19, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10 PAGE

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM

NON-SUPERELEMENT MODEL, AUTOMATIC SUPORT SUBCASE 1

INTERMEDIATE MATRIX ... QRR

COLUMN 1

1 3.045757E+00 -2.168404E-18 6.938894E-18 2.664535E-15 2.367779E+01 -1.202130E-07

COLUMN 2

1 -8.673617E-19 3.045757E+00 3.989864E-17 -2.367779E+01 -4.440892E-15 5.173908E+02

COLUMN 3

1 -1.040834E-17 -8.673617E-19 3.045757E+00 1.202130E-07 -5.173908E+02 0.000000E+00

Main Index
 272 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Inertia Relief Examples (Freedom)

COLUMN 4

1 2.664535E-15 -2.367779E+01 1.202130E-07 1.681446E+04 -5.140536E-04 -8.202438E+03

COLUMN 5

1 2.367779E+01 1.110223E-16 -5.173908E+02 -5.140536E-04 1.102846E+05 3.718374E-04

COLUMN 6

1 -1.202130E-07 5.173908E+02 4.440892E-15 -8.202438E+03 3.718374E-04 1.237830E+05

INTERMEDIATE MATRIX ... QRL

COLUMN 1

1 4.503087E+01 5.995204E-14 -2.206303E+03 2.740799E-11 4.304607E+05 2.065903E-12

INTERMEDIATE MATRIX ... URA

COLUMN 1

1 4.578611E+00 -3.486766E-06 3.012699E+02 -7.487090E-08 -2.490782E+00 1.709939E-08

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 5293 (SSG3A)

FOR DATA BLOCK KLL

LOAD SEQ. NO. EPSILON EXTERNAL WORK EPSILONS LARGER THAN 0.001 ARE FLAGGED WITH ASTERISKS

1 3.0007746E-11 6.1499340E+01

Listing 5-3 QRR, QRL, and URA matrices for Freedom Baseline Inertia Relief Example – Automatic SUPORT

Note that the displacements are always relative to the SUPORT points. Of course this makes sense because the
SUPORT points are the fictitious constraints used during the inertia relief process, so their displacements are
zero. Since the SUPORT points are statically determinate, the relative displacements in the structure will be
the same. Thus, the element strains and subsequent stresses will be unaffected by the choice of SUPORT
dof. Even though the QRR and QRL matrices are different (in rotations), the net solution for URA and
relative displacements is exactly the same whether manual or automatic SUPORT points are used. Of course,
the external work is exactly the same, as expected.

List Superelement Example

The list superelement (SESET) setup for this model is the same as described in Defining List Superelements
(Ch. 2). The inertia relief definition is the same as shown in Figure 5-3. The resulting input file is the same
as the baseline model with the addition of the SESET entries:
SOL 101

CEND

Main Index
 CHAPTER 5 273
Inertia Relief Analysis Using Superelements

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = Freedom - Inertia Relief Example

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = SESET Model

param,grdpnt,0

ECHO = NONE

SUBCASE 1

$ Subcase name : Inertia-Relief

SUBTITLE=Inertia-Relief

LOAD = 2

DISPLACEMENT(plot,SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

STRESS(plot,SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,BILIN)=ALL

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST -1

PARAM INREL -1

$PARAM GRDPNT 501

SUPORT 501 123456

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

$ tail.10

SESET 10 10001 THRU 10142

SESET 10 10163 THRU 10434

$ engine.20

SESET 20 20001 THRU 20010

SESET 20 20012 THRU 20224

SESET 20 20241

SESET 20 20501 THRU 20510

SESET 20 20512 THRU 20724

SESET 20 20741

$ aft-fuselage.30

SESET 30 30055 THRU 30078

SESET 30 30103 THRU 30811

$ wings.40

SESET 40 40009 THRU 40552

SESET 40 45009 THRU 45552

$ cabin.50

SESET 50 50025 THRU 50781

$ nose.60

SESET 60 60025 THRU 60241

Listing 5-4 Entries Generated by Patran for Inertia Relief SESET Example

Main Index
 274 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Inertia Relief Examples (Freedom)

Note that PARAM,GRDPNT,501 is manually commented to avoid User Fatal Message 6009 described in
Manual Definition of Reference Points above. The results of this solution are exactly the same as the baseline model:

FREEDOM - INERTIA RELIEF EXAMPLE APRIL 18, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10 PAGE

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM SUPERELEMENT 0

SESET MODEL SUBCASE 1

INTERMEDIATE MATRIX ... QRR

COLUMN 1

1 3.045757E+00 -2.316819E-11 -5.672507E-11 5.707202E-10 2.367779E+01 -1.241147E-07

COLUMN 2

1 -6.210241E-11 3.045757E+00 8.054769E-13 -2.367779E+01 -1.651148E-09 1.823758E+02

COLUMN 3

1 -7.951607E-11 8.219830E-11 3.045757E+00 1.193610E-07 -1.823758E+02 1.274564E-08

COLUMN 4

1 3.622851E-09 -2.367779E+01 1.209920E-07 1.681446E+04 -5.007371E-04 -5.598023E+03

COLUMN 5

1 2.367779E+01 -2.480283E-08 -5.173908E+02 -5.136385E-04 5.337467E+04 3.679409E-04

COLUMN 6

1 -1.413612E-07 5.173908E+02 2.598918E-10 -8.202438E+03 3.712929E-04 6.687310E+04

INTERMEDIATE MATRIX ... QRL

COLUMN 1

1 4.503087E+01 -8.756203E-08 -2.206303E+03 9.046338E-07 1.877806E+05 -1.354397E-05

INTERMEDIATE MATRIX ... URA

COLUMN 1

1 4.578611E+00 -3.486443E-06 3.012699E+02 -7.484697E-08 -2.490782E+00 1.710076E-08

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 5293 (SSG3A)

FOR DATA BLOCK KLL

LOAD SEQ. NO. EPSILON EXTERNAL WORK EPSILONS LARGER THAN 0.001 ARE FLAGGED WITH ASTERISKS

1 -3.5960325E-12 2.5560770E+01

Main Index
 CHAPTER 5 275
Inertia Relief Analysis Using Superelements

Listing 5-5 QRR, QRL, and URA matrices for Freedom SESET Inertia Relief Example, Manual SUPORT

FREEDOM - INERTIA RELIEF EXAMPLE APRIL 19, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10 PAGE

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM SUPERELEMENT 0

SESET MODEL, AUTOMATIC SUPORT SUBCASE 1

INTERMEDIATE MATRIX ... QRR

COLUMN 1

1 3.045757E+00 -4.340937E-13 6.695174E-13 4.467154E-11 2.367779E+01 -1.204133E-07

COLUMN 2

1 -6.561843E-13 3.045757E+00 -6.132841E-13 -2.367779E+01 8.992702E-11 5.173908E+02

COLUMN 3

1 2.177562E-12 -2.058131E-12 3.045757E+00 1.208757E-07 -5.173908E+02 -7.164146E-10

COLUMN 4

1 3.561191E-10 -2.367779E+01 1.209224E-07 1.681446E+04 -5.141476E-04 -8.202438E+03

COLUMN 5

1 2.367779E+01 2.840832E-10 -5.173908E+02 -5.141501E-04 1.102846E+05 3.719388E-04

COLUMN 6

1 -1.204577E-07 5.173908E+02 -1.673694E-10 -8.202438E+03 3.718660E-04 1.237830E+05

INTERMEDIATE MATRIX ... QRL

COLUMN 1

1 4.503087E+01 2.076625E-09 -2.206303E+03 -6.944076E-07 4.304607E+05 7.571039E-07

INTERMEDIATE MATRIX ... URA

COLUMN 1

1 4.578611E+00 -3.486421E-06 3.012699E+02 -7.485668E-08 -2.490782E+00 1.709656E-08

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 5293 (SSG3A)

FOR DATA BLOCK KLL

LOAD SEQ. NO. EPSILON EXTERNAL WORK EPSILONS LARGER THAN 0.001 ARE FLAGGED WITH ASTERISKS

1 -8.9810836E-13 2.5560770E+01

Main Index
 276 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Inertia Relief Examples (Freedom)

Listing 5-6 QRR, QRL, and URA matrices for Freedom SESET Inertia Relief Example, Automatic SUPORT

Note that the external work is different than the non-superelement example. This is because the external
work is calculated for the residual solution only.

PART Superelement Example

The PART superelement setup for this model is the same as described in Defining PART Superelements (Ch. 2).
The inertia relief definition is the same as shown in Figure 5-3. The resulting input file is the same as a PART
superelement model except PARAM,INREL,-1, PARAM,GRDPNT,501, and the SUPORT entries are in
each PART superelement. This input would result in a fatal message 9006 described above. But if the
PARAM,GRDPNT and SUPORT entries are commented from each PART superelement, the model will
solve as expected.
FREEDOM - INERTIA RELIEF EXAMPLE APRIL 19, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10 PAGE

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM SUPERELEMENT 0

PART MODEL, MANUAL SUPORT SUBCASE 1

INTERMEDIATE MATRIX ... QRR

COLUMN 1

1 3.045757E+00 -2.289200E-11 -5.686449E-11 5.693241E-10 2.367779E+01 -1.240983E-07

COLUMN 2

1 -6.284509E-11 3.045757E+00 5.457716E-13 -2.367779E+01 -1.620809E-09 1.823758E+02

COLUMN 3

1 -6.685159E-11 8.156821E-11 3.045757E+00 1.193249E-07 -1.823758E+02 1.271673E-08

COLUMN 4

1 3.657268E-09 -2.367779E+01 1.209012E-07 1.681446E+04 -5.007266E-04 -5.598023E+03

COLUMN 5

1 2.367779E+01 -2.459625E-08 -5.173908E+02 -5.136293E-04 5.337467E+04 3.679520E-04

COLUMN 6

1 -1.416112E-07 5.173908E+02 1.727775E-10 -8.202438E+03 3.713032E-04 6.687310E+04

INTERMEDIATE MATRIX ... QRL

COLUMN 1

1 4.503087E+01 -8.689504E-08 -2.206303E+03 9.421889E-07 1.877806E+05 -1.351392E-05

Main Index
 CHAPTER 5 277
Inertia Relief Analysis Using Superelements

INTERMEDIATE MATRIX ... URA

COLUMN 1

1 4.578611E+00 -3.486449E-06 3.012699E+02 -7.484717E-08 -2.490782E+00 1.710085E-08

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 5293 (SSG3A)

FOR DATA BLOCK KLL

LOAD SEQ. NO. EPSILON EXTERNAL WORK EPSILONS LARGER THAN 0.001 ARE FLAGGED WITH ASTERISKS

1 -3.1166439E-12 2.5560770E+01

Listing 5-7 QRR, QRL, and URA matrices for Freedom PART Inertia Relief Example, Manual SUPORT

FREEDOM - INERTIA RELIEF EXAMPLE APRIL 19, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10 PAGE

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM SUPERELEMENT 0

PART MODEL, AUTOMATIC SUPORT SUBCASE 1

INTERMEDIATE MATRIX ... QRR

COLUMN 1

1 3.045757E+00 -4.344630E-13 6.695105E-13 4.467153E-11 2.367779E+01 -1.204133E-07

COLUMN 2

1 -6.562398E-13 3.045757E+00 -6.132425E-13 -2.367779E+01 8.984531E-11 5.173908E+02

COLUMN 3

1 2.177479E-12 -2.058378E-12 3.045757E+00 1.208757E-07 -5.173908E+02 -7.163629E-10

COLUMN 4

1 3.561466E-10 -2.367779E+01 1.209225E-07 1.681446E+04 -5.141476E-04 -8.202438E+03

COLUMN 5

1 2.367779E+01 2.840672E-10 -5.173908E+02 -5.141501E-04 1.102846E+05 3.719388E-04

COLUMN 6

1 -1.204578E-07 5.173908E+02 -1.672735E-10 -8.202438E+03 3.718659E-04 1.237830E+05

INTERMEDIATE MATRIX ... QRL

COLUMN 1

1 4.503087E+01 2.076575E-09 -2.206303E+03 -6.944107E-07 4.304607E+05 7.572106E-07

Main Index
 278 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Inertia Relief Examples (Freedom)

INTERMEDIATE MATRIX ... URA

COLUMN 1

1 4.578611E+00 -3.486420E-06 3.012699E+02 -7.485668E-08 -2.490782E+00 1.709656E-08

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 5293 (SSG3A)

FOR DATA BLOCK KLL

LOAD SEQ. NO. EPSILON EXTERNAL WORK EPSILONS LARGER THAN 0.001 ARE FLAGGED WITH ASTERISKS

1 -3.9768788E-13 2.5560770E+01

Listing 5-8 QRR, QRL, and URA matrices for Freedom PART Inertia Relief Example, Automatic SUPORT

Notice that the PART superelement solution matches the List Superelement solution for both the manual
and automatic SUPORT solutons.

External Superelement Example

As noted in Comparison of Methods (Ch. 3), inertia loads (ACCEL, ACCEL1, GRAV, RFORCE) are calculated
as load vectors for each superelement and brought down to the residual. As a consequence, inertia loads
(ACCEL, ACCEL1, GRAV and RFORCE) are not applied to external superelements during the assembly
run. Similarly, inertia relief calculations will not include the external superelement mass matrix. Since external
superelements produce incorrect answers for inertia relief, the examples are withheld.

Comparison of results
The key results are summarized below. The files are located in the MSC Nastran delivery subdirectory
/doc/seug/chapter5. Note that the URA (acceleration) numbers are exactly the same for the baseline, List
Superelement (SESET) and PART Superelements. The key stress is reported for element 30715 von Mises
at the Center +Z. Note that the only key value that changes is the External Work value. The External Work

Main Index
 CHAPTER 5 279
Inertia Relief Analysis Using Superelements

value is calculated for the residual structure, so it makes sense that the superelement values are different (and
lower) than the residual structure only solution.

Table 5-1 Inertia Relief Comparison Matrix

File INREL URA-Tx URA-Tz URA-Ry Ext Work Stress
Freedom- -1 4.578611E+00 3.012699E+02 -2.490782E+00 6.1499340E+01 1.240841E+03
baseline-
inrel.bdf
Freedom- -2 4.578611E+00 3.012699E+02 -2.490782E+00 6.1499340E+01 1.240841E+03
baseline-
inrel2.bdf
Freedom- -1 4.578611E+00 3.012699E+02 -2.490782E+00 2.5560770E+01 1.240841E+03
partse-
continuous-
inrel.bdf
Freedom- -2 4.578611E+00 3.012699E+02 -2.490782E+00 2.5560770E+01 1.240841E+03
partse-
continuous-
inrel2.bdf
Freedom- -1 4.578611E+00 3.012699E+02 -2.490782E+00 2.5560770E+01 1.240841E+03
seset-
inrel.bdf
Freedom- -2 4.578611E+00 3.012699E+02 -2.490782E+00 2.5560770E+01 1.240841E+03
seset-
inrel2.bdf

From the data presented in this chapter, it can be concluded that inertia relief works equally well for internal
superelement solutions as residual-only solutions.

1.

Main Index
 280 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Inertia Relief Examples (Freedom)

Main Index
 Chapter 6: Multiple Loading in Static Analysis
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User’s Guide
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User’s Guide

6 Multiple Loading in Static

Analysis

Introduction

Internal Case Control Partitioning

Examples for Multiple Loading Conditions (cantilever plate)

Main Index
 282 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Introduction

Introduction
Although Case Control (Ch. 4) discussed multiple loadings, this chapter clarifies how the Case Control is
handled in static analysis with multiple loading conditions. If multiple load cases exist in a static solution, a
separate subcase must exist for the residual structure for each load condition or boundary condition. Separate
subcases can exist for the superelements for each solution. This section describes how the program internally
partitions the Case Control into separate sections for each superelement.

Internal Case Control Partitioning

As discussed in Superelement Partitioning (Ch. 2), MSC Nastran divides the Bulk Data into separate sections
(internal tables) based on the superelement definitions. Similarly, the Case Control is also partitioned into
separate sets for each superelement. The name of this separate datablock is CASES in the DMAP. Section
4.x discusses how the the SUPER command is used to determine which SUBCASEs apply to which
superelements. This command is also used in partitioning the Case Control.
Based the specification of the SUPER command, a separate set of Case Control is created for each
superelement. One set is for the residual structure. The residual Case Control controls the final solution of
 P t  =  K tt   U t  (6-1)

As described in The SUPER Command (Ch. 4), a SUBCASE must be defined for the residual structure for each
loading condition (or boundary condition) which will be solved. As mentioned before, the program actually
copies any SUBCASEs that reference superelement 0 into a CASES table, which is qualified with SEID = 0
(refer to the qualifier discussion in The SUPER Command (Ch. 4)). When processing the residual structure
(PHASE 1), the program uses this copy of the Case Control. The program creates a separate CASES table for
each superelement in the model (qualified with SEID=seid). The SEP2CT module creates this table during
execution of the PHASE0 subDMAP in the program.
The following examples demonstrate (in an idealized form) the Case Control partitioning.

Use of Load Sequences

As a review, refer to The SUPER Command (Ch. 4) for a detailed description of load sequences with the SUPER
command.

Condensed Case Control

As discussed in Condensed Case Control (Ch. 4), condensed Case Control provides a single set of case control
instructions that apply to every superelement for each load sequence.
A simple example of condensed Case Control is:
DISP=ALL

STRESS=ALL

SPC=2

SUBCASE 101

LOAD = 15

Main Index
 CHAPTER 6 283
Multiple Loading in Static Analysis

SUBCASE 201

LOAD = 3

SUBCASE 301

LOAD = 77

Listing 6-1 Simple Example of Condensed Case Control

Expanded Case Control

Expanded Case Control (Ch. 4) discussed the aspects of expanded control and how the loads, constraints,
parameters, and output can be more precisely applied to each superelement. An example of expanded case
control is:
ISPL=ALL

STRESS=ALL

SUBCASE 11

SUPER=10,1

SPC=3

SUBCASE 12

SUPER=10,2

SUBCASE 13

SUPER=10,3

LOAD=542

SUBCASE 21

SUPER=20,3

SPC=3

LOAD=21

SUBCASE 22

SUPER=20,2

SPC=3

LOAD=22

SUBCASE 23

SUPER=20,1

SPC=3

SUBCASE 31

SUPER=0,1

SPC=2

LOAD=1

SUBCASE 32

SUPER=0,2

SPC=2

LOAD=29

SUBCASE 33

SUPER=0,3

Main Index
 284 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Examples for Multiple Loading Conditions (cantilever plate)

SPC=2

LOAD=3

Listing 6-2 Example of Expanded Case Control

Examples for Multiple Loading Conditions (cantilever

plate)
In this Section, the Expanded Case Control Example 2 from Case Control (Ch. 4) will be expanded to include
List Superelements, PART Superelement, and External Superelements. Comparison of Results will summarize
the results.
A slight variant of the cantilever plate that was used in Defining List Superelements (Ch. 2) will be used here.
The differences are in the applied loads, constraints, and parameters.

Figure 6-1 Geometry for Expanded Case Control Example

The geometry and properties for this model are as follows:

$.......2.......3.......4.......5.......6.......7.......8.......9.......0

$ Cantilevered Beam Made of Plates Model

$ /201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211

$ Y /*----*----*----*----*----*----*----*----*----*----*

$ ^ /| | | | | | | | | | |

$ | /| 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 |

$ | /| | | | | | | | | | |

$ +--->X /*----*----*----*----*----*----*----*----*----*----*

$ /101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111

$.......2.......3.......4.......5.......6.......7.......8.......9.......0

GRID 101 0. 0. 0.

GRID 102 1. 0. 0.

GRID 103 2. 0. 0.

GRID 104 3. 0. 0.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 6 285
Multiple Loading in Static Analysis

GRID 105 4. 0. 0.

GRID 106 5. 0. 0.

GRID 107 6. 0. 0.

GRID 108 7. 0. 0.

GRID 109 8. 0. 0.

GRID 110 9. 0. 0.

GRID 111 10. 0. 0.

GRID 201 0. 1. 0.

GRID 202 1. 1. 0.

GRID 203 2. 1. 0.

GRID 204 3. 1. 0.

GRID 205 4. 1. 0.

GRID 206 5. 1. 0.

GRID 207 6. 1. 0.

GRID 208 7. 1. 0.

GRID 209 8. 1. 0.

GRID 210 9. 1. 0.

GRID 211 10. 1. 0.

$.......2.......3.......4.......5.......6.......7.......8.......9.......0

CQUAD4 1 1 101 102 202 201

CQUAD4 2 1 102 103 203 202

CQUAD4 3 1 103 104 204 203

CQUAD4 4 1 104 105 205 204

CQUAD4 5 1 105 106 206 205

CQUAD4 6 2 106 107 207 206

CQUAD4 7 2 107 108 208 207

CQUAD4 8 2 108 109 209 208

CQUAD4 9 2 109 110 210 209

CQUAD4 10 2 110 111 211 210

$.......2.......3.......4.......5.......6.......7.......8.......9.......0

MAT1 1 10.E6 .3 2.588-4 1.E-6 0.

PSHELL 1 1 .1 1

PSHELL 2 1 .1 1

Listing 6-3 Geometry and Properties for Expanded Case Control Example

The loadings and constraints are as follows:

Main Index
 286 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Examples for Multiple Loading Conditions (cantilever plate)

Figure 6-2 Constraints for Expanded Case Control Example

Figure 6-3 Load Sequence 1 for Expanded Case Control Example

Figure 6-4 Load Sequence 2 for Expanded Case Control Example

Main Index
 CHAPTER 6 287
Multiple Loading in Static Analysis

Figure 6-5 Load Sequence 3 for Expanded Case Control Example

For simplicity of comparing input files, the loads and boundary conditions retain the same values and
comments – the loads on the residual structure are defined in the bulk data section as follows:
$ all spc's are applied to all subcases

spcadd,99,2,3

$ SE 20 SPC's

spc1,3,123456,101,201

$ SE 10 SPCs

spc1,3,6,111,211

$ SE 0 SPCs

spc1,2,6,101,thru,211

$ 1st load sequence = force 1 + force 23

load,1001,1.,1.,1,1.,23

$ 2nd load sequence = force 22 + force 29

load,1002,1.,1.,22,1.,29

$ 3rd load sequence = force 542 + force 21 + force 3

load,1003,1.,1.,3,1.,21,1.,542

$ SE 20 loads

$.......2.......3.......4.......5.......6.......7.......8.......9.......0

FORCE 21 203 21. 0. 1. 0.

FORCE 22 203 22. 1. 0. 0.

$ SE 10 loads

FORCE 542 211 542. 1. 0. 0.

$ SE 0 loads

FORCE 1 206 1. 0. 0. 1.

FORCE 29 206 29. 1. 0. 0.

FORCE 3 206 3. 0. 1. 0.

Main Index
 288 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Examples for Multiple Loading Conditions (cantilever plate)

Listing 6-4 Loads and Constraints for Expanded Case Control Example

In addition, DISP=ALL and STRESS=ALL are the output requests and PARAM,K6ROT,0. is the only non-
default parameter specified.

Baseline Residual Example

The case control for the baseline model (/doc/seug/chapter6/Expanded-Case-Control/ex2-baseline.dat) is as
follows:
DISPL=ALL

STRESS=ALL

spc = 99

SUBCASE 1

LOAD = 1001

SUBCASE 2

LOAD = 1002

SUBCASE 3

LOAD = 1003

Listing 6-5 Baseline Case Control

The spc=99 points to the SPCADD entry that combines all of the constraints. The LOAD =100x points to
the corresponding LOAD bulk data entries that combine the individual FORCEs.

List Superelements
The list superelement example (/doc/seug/chapter6/Expanded-Case-Control/ex2 -seset.dat)uses expanded
case control to place the appropriate loads and constraints with each superelement. Note that there is a
superelement subcase for each load sequence, even if there is no load.
SUBCASE 11

SUPER=10,1

SPC=3

SUBCASE 12

SUPER=10,2

SPC=3

SUBCASE 13

SUPER=10,3

LOAD=542

SPC=3

SUBCASE 21

SUPER=20,1

SPC=3

Main Index
 CHAPTER 6 289
Multiple Loading in Static Analysis

LOAD=23

SUBCASE 22

SUPER=20,2

SPC=3

LOAD=22

SUBCASE 23

SUPER=20,3

SPC=3

LOAD=21

SUBCASE 31

SUPER=0,1

SPC=2

LOAD=1

SUBCASE 32

SUPER=0,2

SPC=2

LOAD=29

SUBCASE 33

SUPER=0,3

SPC=2

LOAD=3

SESET,10,108,thru,111

SESET,10,208,thru,211

SESET,20,101,thru,103

SESET,20,201,thru,203

Listing 6-6 List Superelement (SESET) Expanded Case Control and SESET Entries

PART Superelements
The PART superelement model (/doc/seug/chapter6/Expanded-Case-Control/ex2 -part.dat) is broken into
its constituent sections. The case control is exactly the same as shown in Listing 6-1. Below is the bulk data
listing for the PART superelement. Note that param,k6rot is specified within each bulk data section. Also
note that the loads and constraints are only defined in the relevant superelement bulk data section.
BEGIN BULK

param,k6rot,0.

GRID 104 3. 0. 0.

GRID 105 4. 0. 0.

Main Index
 290 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Examples for Multiple Loading Conditions (cantilever plate)

GRID 106 5. 0. 0.

GRID 107 6. 0. 0.

GRID 204 3. 1. 0.

GRID 205 4. 1. 0.

GRID 206 5. 1. 0.

GRID 207 6. 1. 0.

CQUAD4 4 1 104 105 205 204

CQUAD4 5 1 105 106 206 205

CQUAD4 6 2 106 107 207 206

$.......2.......3.......4.......5.......6.......7.......8.......9.......0

MAT1 1 10.E6 .3 2.588-4 1.E-6 0.

PSHELL 1 1 .1 1

PSHELL 2 1 .1 1

$ SE 0 SPCs

spc1,2,6,101,thru,211

$ SE 0 loads

FORCE 1 206 1. 0. 0. 1.

FORCE 29 206 29. 1. 0. 0.

FORCE 3 206 3. 0. 1. 0.

BEGIN SUPER = 10

param,k6rot,0.

GRID 107 6. 0. 0.

GRID 108 7. 0. 0.

GRID 109 8. 0. 0.

GRID 110 9. 0. 0.

GRID 111 10. 0. 0.

GRID 207 6. 1. 0.

GRID 208 7. 1. 0.

GRID 209 8. 1. 0.

GRID 210 9. 1. 0.

GRID 211 10. 1. 0.

CQUAD4 7 2 107 108 208 207

CQUAD4 8 2 108 109 209 208

CQUAD4 9 2 109 110 210 209

CQUAD4 10 2 110 111 211 210

$.......2.......3.......4.......5.......6.......7.......8.......9.......0

MAT1 1 10.E6 .3 2.588-4 1.E-6 0.

PSHELL 2 1 .1 1

$ SE 10 SPCs

spc1,3,6,111,211

$ SE 10 loads

FORCE 542 211 542. 1. 0. 0.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 6 291
Multiple Loading in Static Analysis

BEGIN SUPER = 20

param,k6rot,0.

GRID 101 0. 0. 0.

GRID 102 1. 0. 0.

GRID 103 2. 0. 0.

GRID 104 3. 0. 0.

GRID 201 0. 1. 0.

GRID 202 1. 1. 0.

GRID 203 2. 1. 0.

GRID 204 3. 1. 0.

$.......2.......3.......4.......5.......6.......7.......8.......9.......0

CQUAD4 1 1 101 102 202 201

CQUAD4 2 1 102 103 203 202

CQUAD4 3 1 103 104 204 203

$.......2.......3.......4.......5.......6.......7.......8.......9.......0

MAT1 1 10.E6 .3 2.588-4 1.E-6 0.

PSHELL 1 1 .1 1

$ SE 20 SPC's

spc1,3,123456,101,201

$ SE 20 loads

$.......2.......3.......4.......5.......6.......7.......8.......9.......0

FORCE 21 203 21. 0. 1. 0.

FORCE 22 203 22. 1. 0. 0.

Listing 6-7 PART Superelement Bulk Data for Expanded Case Control Example

External Superelements
The external superelement example is broken into its constituent superelement component models
(/doc/seug/chapter6/Expanded-Case-Control/ex2 –extout10.dat, and -extout20.dat). The bulk data for
each superelement differs from the bulk data in the corresponding PART superelement shown above because
the SUPER entry is removed. Remember, during the reduction step, there are no superelements. The Case
Control for each External Superelment creation run is shown below. The boundaries are defined with
appropriate ASET1 entries. In this case, the MATDB (a.k.a. MATRIXDB) method is used to store the
external superelement matrices.
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK,EXTBULK,EXTID=10,MATDB)

SUBCASE 11

SPC=3

SUBCASE 12

SPC=3

SUBCASE 13

Main Index
 292 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Examples for Multiple Loading Conditions (cantilever plate)

LOAD=542

SPC=3

BEGIN BULK

aset1,123456,107,207

Listing 6-8 Case Control for External Superelement 10 in Expanded Case Control Example
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK,EXTBULK,EXTID=20,MATDB)

SUBCASE 21

SPC=3

LOAD=23

SUBCASE 22

SPC=3

LOAD=22

SUBCASE 23

SPC=3

LOAD=21

BEGIN BULK

aset1,123456,104,204

Listing 6-9 Case Control for External Superelement 20 in Expanded Case Control Example

Note that the Case Control sections for the external superelements are exactly the same as for the internal List
and PART superelements. One of the key things to notice is that subcases are required for each Residual Load
Sequence, even if there are no loads in the external superelement.
The assembly run (/doc/seug/chapter6/Expanded-Case-Control/ex2 -assemble.dat) requires additional FMS
to attach the external superelements. The SUPER command is not strictly required, but is retained in the
example for completeness. Finally, the assembly information from the .asm file is included in the bulk data
section.
assign se10m='expanded-casecc-ex2-extout10.MASTER'

DBLOCATE DATABLK=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=20) LOGI=se20m

assign se20m='expanded-casecc-ex2-extout20.MASTER'

DBLOCATE DATABLK=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=10) LOGI=se10m

SOL 101 $ Linear Statics

CEND

TITLE = CANTILEVERED BEAM MADE OF PLATES

Subtitle = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

Label = External Superelement Example - Assembly

Main Index
 CHAPTER 6 293
Multiple Loading in Static Analysis

DISPL=ALL

STRESS=ALL

SUBCASE 11

SUPER=10,1

SUBCASE 12

SUPER=10,2

SUBCASE 13

SUPER=10,3

SUBCASE 21

SUPER=20,1

SUBCASE 22

SUPER=20,2

SUBCASE 23

SUPER=20,3

SUBCASE 31

SUPER=0,1

SPC=2

LOAD=1

SUBCASE 32

SUPER=0,2

SPC=2

LOAD=29

SUBCASE 33

SUPER=0,3

SPC=2

LOAD=3

BEGIN BULK

include 'expanded-casecc-ex2-extout10.asm'

include 'expanded-casecc-ex2-extout20.asm'

Listing 6-10 Case Control for the Assembly Run in Expanded Case Control Example

If the user removes the super commands from the assembly run, then only SUBCASEs 31, 32, and 33 are
required to obtain output for all superelements. The modified input file is as follows
(/doc/seug/chapter6/Expanded-Case-Control/ex2 –assemble-alt.dat):
assign se10m='expanded-casecc-ex2-extout10.MASTER'

DBLOCATE DATABLK=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=20) LOGI=se20m

assign se20m='expanded-casecc-ex2-extout20.MASTER'

DBLOCATE DATABLK=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=10) LOGI=se10m

Main Index
 294 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Examples for Multiple Loading Conditions (cantilever plate)

SOL 101 $ Linear Statics

CEND

TITLE = CANTILEVERED BEAM MADE OF PLATES

Subtitle = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

Label = External Superelement Example - Assembly

DISPL=ALL

STRESS=ALL

SUBCASE 31

SPC=3

LOAD=1

SUBCASE 32

SPC=3

LOAD=29

SUBCASE 33

SPC=3

LOAD=3

BEGIN BULK

include 'expanded-casecc-ex2-extout10.asm'

include 'expanded-casecc-ex2-extout20.asm'

Listing 6-11 Case Control for the Assembly Run in Expanded Case Control Example – Alternate Condensed
Case Control

Comparison of Results
To compare the results, a displacement and stress component within each superelement for each load
sequence is tabulated below. The answers are exactly the same regardless of method.

Comparison of Results for Expanded Case Control Example – Load Sequence 1

Solution U z203 U z206 U z211  m1  m5  m8
Baseline 1.046790E-02 5.013979E-02 1.244254E-01 2.557507E+03 3.738639E+02 5.389776E+00

SESET 1.046790E-02 5.013979E-02 1.244254E-01 2.557507E+03 3.738639E+02 5.389776E+00

PART 1.046790E-02 5.013979E-02 1.244254E-01 2.557507E+03 3.738639E+02 5.389776E+00

External 1.046790E-02 5.013979E-02 1.244254E-01 2.557507E+03 3.738639E+02 5.389776E+00

Main Index
 CHAPTER 6 295
Multiple Loading in Static Analysis

Comparison of Results for Expanded Case Control Example – Load Sequence 2

Solution U y203 U y206 U y211  m1  m5  m8
Baseline -6.175009E-04 -3.233154E-03 -8.900994E-03 4.860896E+02 2.826428E+02 1.130378E+00

SESET -6.175009E-04 -3.233154E-03 -8.900994E-03 4.860896E+02 2.826428E+02 1.130378E+00

PART -6.175009E-04 -3.233154E-03 -8.900994E-03 4.860896E+02 2.826428E+02 1.130378E+00

External -6.175009E-04 -3.233154E-03 -8.900994E-03 4.860896E+02 2.826428E+02 1.130378E+00

Comparison of Results for Expanded Case Control Example – Load Sequence 3

Solution U y203 U y206 U y211  m1  m5  m8
Baseline -5.509641E-03 -3.695509E-02 -1.541361E-01 5.174318E+03 5.411604E+03 5.419734E+03

SESET -5.509641E-03 -3.695509E-02 -1.541361E-01 5.174318E+03 5.411604E+03 5.419734E+03

PART -5.509641E-03 -3.695509E-02 -1.541361E-01 5.174318E+03 5.411604E+03 5.419734E+03

External -5.509641E-03 -3.695509E-02 -1.541361E-01 5.174318E+03 5.411604E+03 5.419734E+03

1.

Main Index
 296 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Examples for Multiple Loading Conditions (cantilever plate)

Main Index
 Chapter 7: Multi-Level Superelement Analysis
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User’s Guide
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User’s Guide

7 Multi-Level Superelement
Analysis

Introduction

Comparison of Single- and Multi-Level Superelements

User Interface

Example – Multi-Level Superelement Solved Manually
 Example – Multi-Level Superelement (Freedom)

Main Index
 298 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Introduction

Introduction
The preceding chapters have described superelements in the context of single level a single-level superelement
tree; that is each superelement is reduced and attached directly to the residual structure. This chapter will
provide more information for the analysis for superelements that are broken into multiple layers.
The first section of this chapter compares the single- and multi-level superelement analysis.
The remainder of the chapter will provide details about the user interface, work through a manual solution
of multi-level superelement analysis, and walk the user through a few examples of using MSC Nastran to solve
multi-level superelements.

Comparison of Single- and Multi-Level Superelements

There are many circumstances when the user may want to reduce superelements in a ‘tree’ rather than a line.
For these situations, multi-level superelement analysis is available. In the multi-level superelement technique,
the superelements can be chained together in logical branches. In a single-level analysis, all superelements are
processed independently of each other; however, all superelements have to be processed before the residual
structure can be processed. In multi-level the user can create assemblies of superelements. That is, the exterior
points of several superelements can be interior to a downstream collector superelement.
In order to compare single and multi-level superelement analysis, the flyswatter example from chapter 3 will
be used as an illustrative example. Recall the model from Chapter 3:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 7 299
Multi-Level Superelement Analysis

Figure 7-1 Flyswatter Example Showing Grids Assigned to Residual in Single-Level Superelement Analysis

The method of single-level superelement analysis covered in Chapter 3. In this method, each superelement
is connected directly to the residual structure, as depicted in the diagram below.

Main Index
 300 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Comparison of Single- and Multi-Level Superelements

Figure 7-2 Single Level Superelement Analysis of Flyswatter

For example, the model shown in Figure 7-1 could be arranged into a multi-level tree as illustrated in Figure 7-3.

Figure 7-3 Multi-Level Superelement Tree of Flyswatter

Consider the left branch of the superelement tree:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 7 301
Multi-Level Superelement Analysis

Figure 7-4 Left Branch of Flyswatter Superelement Tree with Boundary Grids Labeled

The solution for the left branch of the superelement tree can be broken down into the reduction and data
recovery phases as shown below:

Main Index
 302 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Comparison of Single- and Multi-Level Superelements

Figure 7-5 Multi-Level Reduction Steps for Left Branch of Flyswatter Tree

Main Index
 CHAPTER 7 303
Multi-Level Superelement Analysis

Figure 7-6 Multi-Level Data Recovery Steps for Left Branch of Flyswatter Tree

A detailed description of the static solution for the left branch of the tree proceeds as follows:
 Reduce tip Superelement 10
• The stiffness and loads are reduced to grids 35 and 36 which are on the boundary between
Superelement 10 and Superelement 30

Main Index
 304 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Comparison of Single- and Multi-Level Superelements

10 10
• Generate boundary matrices  K aa    Pa  10
 fixed 
• Calculate fixed boundary solution at grids 35 and 36,  U o 
 
fixed  o –1
• Recall Equation (1-8),  U o  =  U o  =  K oo   P o 
 
 Assemble Superelement 30
• The reduced matrices of Superelement 10 are added to the element stiffness and nodal loads on
Superelement 30

30 30 10 30 30 10
•  K gg  =  K jj  +  K aa    Pg  =  Pj  +  Pa 
 Reduce Superelement 30 Assembly
• The assembled stiffness and loads are reduced to grids 19 and 20 which are on the boundary with
Superelement 50

Main Index
 CHAPTER 7 305
Multi-Level Superelement Analysis

30 30
• Generate boundary matrices ,  K aa    Pa  30
 fixed 
• Calculate fixed boundary solution at grids 19 and 20,  U o 
 Assemble Superelement 50  
• The reduced matrices of Superelement 30 are added to the element stiffness and nodal loads on
Superelement 50

50 50 30 50 50 30
•  K gg  =  K jj  +  K aa    Pg  =  Pj  +  Pa 
 Reduce Superelement 50 Assembly
• The assembled stiffness and loads are reduced to grids 13 and 23 which are on the boundary with
Superelement 0 (Residual)

50 50
• Generate boundary matrices  K aa    Pa  50
 fixed 
• Calculate fixed boundary solution at grids 13 and 23,  U o 

 SE 70single-level]
[Similar reduction is performed for the SE 20-40-60 tree and
 Assemble Residual – Superelement 0
• The reduced matrices of Superelement 5, 6, and 7 are added to the element stiffness and nodal
loads of Superelement 0

Main Index
 306 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Comparison of Single- and Multi-Level Superelements

0 0 50 60 70
  K gg  =  K jj  +  K aa  +  K aa  +  K aa  ,

0 0 50 60 70
 Pg  =  Pj  +  Pa  +  Pa  +  Pa 
 Solve the residual solution
• Perform standard reductions (apply MPC’s, SPC’s)
• Solve for  K ll   U ll  =  P l 
• Back expand to G-Set solution vector,  Ug 
 Data recovery for Residual
• Calculate and output user requested displacements, stresses, etc.
 Data Recovery for Superelement 50 50
 free 
• Obtain free boundary solution at grids 13 and 23,  Ua  by copying displacements of
grids 13 and 23 from Superelement 0  

50
 free 
• Calculate interior displacement for free solution based on boundary displacements,  U o 
 
free
• Recall equation 1-7, , (in statics the A-Set is equivalent to the T-Set)  U o  =  G ot   U t 
50
 total 
• Combine free-boundary and fixed boundary solution,  U o 
 
total free fixed
• Recall equation 1-9,  Uo  =  Uo  +  Uo 
• Calculate total Solution for Superelement 50,
total free fixed
• Recall Equation 1-9,  U o  =  Uo  +  Uo 
• The total G-Set solution is obtained by combining the A-Set and O-Set displacement vectors,
 
 Ua 
 Ug  =  
 Uo 
 
Main Index
 CHAPTER 7 307
Multi-Level Superelement Analysis

• Calculate and output user requested displacements, stresses, etc.

 Data Recovery for Superelement 30 30
 free 
• Obtain free boundary solution at grids 19 and 20,  U a  by copying displacements of
grids 13 and 23 from Superelement 50  

30
• Calculate total Solution for Superelement 30,  Ug 
• Calculate and output user requested displacements, stresses, etc.
 Data Recovery for Superelement 10 10
 free 
• Obtain free boundary solution at grids 35 and 35,  U a  by copying displacements of
grids 35 and 36 from Superelement 0  

10
• Calculate total Solution for Superelement 10,  Ug 

Main Index
 308 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
User Interface

• Calculate and output user requested displacements, stresses, etc.

 [Data recovery for Superelement Tree 20-40-60 and Superelement 70 is performed similarly]

User Interface
By default, MSC Nastran will perform a single-level superelement analysis – that is, every superelement is
attached to the residual structure by default. In multi-level superelement analysis, one superelement can be
directly connected to another.
The superelement tree is defined with either the DTI, SETREE or SETREE entries.

DTI,SETREE Superelement Tree Definition

Specifies superelement tree that determines the superelement processing order.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DTI SETREE “1” SEUP1 SEDWN1 SEUP2 SEDWN2 SEUP3 SEDWN3
SEUP4 SEDWN4 SEUP5 SEDWN5 -etc.-

Example:
DTI SETREE 1 1 14 2 14 3 14
4 14 14 0

Field Contents
SEUPi Identification number of the superelement upstream from SEDWNi. (Integer > 0)
SEDWNi Identification number of the uperelement into which SEUPi is assembled. (Integer 0)

In the example above, the following superelement tree is defined:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 7 309
Multi-Level Superelement Analysis

Figure 7-7 DTI, SETREE Schematic Example

A more convenient input format is the SETREE entry.

SETREE Superelement Tree Definition (Alternate Form of DTI,SETREE)

Specifies superelement reduction order.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SETREE SEID SEUP1 SEUP2 SEUP3 SEUP4 SEUP5 SEUP6 SEUP7
SEUP8 SEUP9 -etc.-

Example:
SETREE 400 10 20 30 40

Field Contents
SEID Partitioned superelement identification number of a downstream superelement. (Integer
> 0)
SEUPi Identification number of superelements that are upstream of SEID. (Integer > 0)

In the example above, the following superelement tree is defined:

Main Index
 310 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
User Interface

Figure 7-8 SETREE Schematic Example

If a superelement is not referenced on the DTI,SETREE or SETREE entry, then the manner in which it is
handled depends on the type of that superelement.

List Superelements
DTI, SETREE
 A List Superelement that is unreferenced in the DTI,SETREE will be automatically attached to the
residual structure if all of its exterior points belong to the residual. However, if one or more of its
exterior points do not belong to the residual, then the program will terminate with a user fatal error
complaining that one of more of the superelements are not in the same path.
SETREE
 SETREE will only be processed if the new superelement partitioning is requested by using BEGIN
SUPER. (for details refer to the note on BEGIN SUPER vs. BEGIN BULK Superelement Partitioning)
 A List Superelement that is unreferenced in the SETREE will be automatically attached to the residual
structure if all of its exterior points belong to the residual. However, if one or more of its exterior
points do not belong to the residual, then the program will terminate with a user fatal error
complaining that one of more of the superelements are not in the same path.

PART Superelements
DTI, SETREE
 A PART Superelement that is unreferenced in the DTI,SETREE will be automatically attached to
the residual structure if all of its exterior points belong to the residual. However, if one or more of its
exterior points do not belong to the residual, then the program will terminate with a user fatal error
complaining that one of more of the superelements are not in the same path.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 7 311
Multi-Level Superelement Analysis

SETREE
 SETREE will only be processed if the new superelement partitioning is requested by using BEGIN
SUPER. (for details refer to the note on BEGIN SUPER vs. BEGIN BULK)
 A PART Superelement that is unreferenced in the SETREE will be automatically attached to the
residual structure if all of its exterior points belong to the residual. However, if one or more of its
exterior points do not belong to the residual, then the program will terminate with a user fatal error
complaining that one of more of the superelements are not in the same path.

External Superelements
The external superelement process for multi-level superelement processing can be thought of as a manual
reduction at each level. This type of solution sounds cumbersome at first, but for a large program such as an
aircraft or spacecraft, it is a practical method for creating sub-assemblies and assemblies that have reduced
dof size while retaining full fidelity of the component model.

Example – Multi-Level Superelement Solved Manually

An example solved by hand is the best demonstration of how multilevel superelements are processed. Since
solving large problems by hand is not practical, a simple fixed-fixed beam using uniaxial springs will be is
divided into multilevel superelements and solved by hand. The model is shown in the figure below.

Figure 7-9 Multi-Level Superelement Example – Spring Model and Superelement Tree

Main Index
 312 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Example – Multi-Level Superelement Solved Manually

This problem can be solved with either List (SESET) Superelements or PART superelements. The entries
required to use the List superelement option are:
SESET,1,6,7

SESET,2,4,5

DTI,SETREE,1,2,0,1,2

Listing 7-1 Entries for Multi-Level Spring Example using List Superelements

BEGIN BULK

SETREE 2 1

[residual bulk data omitted]

$ Superelement Name: SEID.1

BEGIN SUPER = 1

[superelement 1 bulk data omitted]

$ Superelement Name: SEID.2

BEGIN SUPER = 2

[superelement 2 bulk data omitted]

ENDDATA f0fd6b01

Listing 7-2 Entries for Multi-Level Spring Example using PART Superelements

The corresponding MSC Nastran input files for this example are located at
/doc/seug/chapter7/spring/baseline.bdf, /doc/seug/chapter7/spring/seset-setree.bdf, and
/doc/seug/chapter7/spring/part-setree.bdf.
Using this superelement definition, the following SEMAP is generated:

Table 7-1 SEMAP for Multi-Level Spring Example

Superelement Exterior Grids Interior Grids Elements
1 5 6,7 5,6
2 3 4,5 3,4
0 - 1,2,3 1,2

Main Index
 CHAPTER 7 313
Multi-Level Superelement Analysis

Figure 7-10 Superelement 1 Grids and Elements for Spring Example

Figure 7-11 Superelement 2 Grids and Elements for Spring Example

Figure 7-12 Superelement 0 Grids and Elements for Spring Example

NOTE: for this example, only 1 dof per grid is used.

SUPERELEMENT 1 REDUCTION
The first step in processing the superelement is to generate the matrices associated with the physical elements
contained within the superelement, i.e. the J-Set matrictes. The following stiffness and loading matrices are
generated for superlement 1.

 
1. – 1. 0.  U 5 
 
 K jj  = – 1. 2. – 1. in term of  U 6  (7-1)
 
0. – 1. 1.  U7 
 

Main Index
 314 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Example – Multi-Level Superelement Solved Manually

 0. 
 
 P j  =  4.  (7-2)
 
 0. 
Next, the reduced matrices of the upstream superelement (the A-Set boundary matrices) are added to the
physical elements to generate the G-Set matrices. In this case, there are no superelements upstream of
superelement 1, so the G-Set matrices are equivalent to the J-Set matrices. (Note that for this situation, where
two matrices are identical, MSC Nastran stores only one matrix in the database and will create a pointer for
the second matrix, which points to the stored data. Therefore, the database files do not become excessively
large with duplicated data.)
Following the standard reduction process for statics:
 Remove MPC Dependencies.
• if there were any MPC-type relations (MPCs, RBE2, RBAR, etc), the program would apply and
process these relations, and the G-Set matrices would be reduced to N-Set matrices. In this case,
the N-Set is equivalent to the G-Set.
 Apply SPC Constraints
• For superelement 1, grid point 7 is constrained; thus, terms associated with this grid point are
removed from the matrices to apply that constraint. After applying the constraints, the matrices
are defined for the F-set.

K aa K ao
 K ff  = 1.0 – 1. = (7-3)
– 1. 2.0 K oa K oo

  Pa
 P f  =  0.  = (7-4)
 4.  Po

At this point, the static condensation is performed. The matrices are partitioned into A-Set and O-Set DOFs
and then transformed. This process is the same as described in Manual Solution of a Small Superelement Example
(Ch. 1).
–1
 G oa  = –  K oo   K oa  = –  0.5    – 1.  =  0.5  (7-5)

T
 K aa  =  K aa  +  K oa   G oa  =  1.  –  0.5  =  0.5  (7-6)

 P a  =  P a  +  G oa  T  P o  =  2.0  (7-7)

The stiffness and loads for Superelement 1 have been reduced and are available to attach to the downstream
superelement (in this case Superelement 2)

Main Index
 CHAPTER 7 315
Multi-Level Superelement Analysis

SUPERELEMENT 2 REDUCTION
Once again, the J-Set matrices are generated for the physical model of the superelement.

 
1.0 – 1.0 0.0  0.   U3 
   
 K jj  = – 1. 2.0 – 1.  P j  =  0.  in terms of  U 4  (7-8)
   
0.0 – 1.0 1.0  3.   U5 
 
Next, the reduced matrices of upstream Superelement 1 are connected to the appropriate dof to form the G-
Set matrices. In this case the stiffness and loads are added to Grid 5.
The reduced stiffness of .5 units is added to the existing term in that position (1.0) to get the assembly
stiffness of 1.5 in that DOF. The reduced load of 2.0 units is added to the physical load on grid 5 (3.0 units),
resulting in an assembly load of 5.0 units on that point. The resulting assembly stiffness and loading matrices
are shown below.

 
1.0 – 1.0 0.0  0.   U3 
   
 K gg  = – 1. 2.0 – 1.0  P g  =  0.  in terms of  U4  (7-9)
   
0.0 – 1.0 1.5  5   U5 
 
This superelement has no MPCs and constraints applied, so we proceed to the reduction process.

1.0 – 1.0 0.0

 K ff  = – 1.0 2.0 – 1.0 1.5 (7-10)

0.0 1.0

 G oa  = –  K oo   K oa  = – 0.75 0.5 – 1. = 0.75

–1
(7-11)
0.5 1. 0.0 0.50

T
 K aa  =  K aa  +  K oa   G oa  =  0.25  (7-12)

 P a  =  P a  +  G oa  T  P o  = 0. + 2.5 =  2.5  (7-13)

RESIDUAL STRUCTURE SOLUTION

The residual structure consists of elements 1 and 2 plus the reduced assembly matrices from superelement 2.
Once again, the physical matrices are generated, providing the following:

Main Index
 316 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Example – Multi-Level Superelement Solved Manually

1.0 – 1.0 0.0  0.  U1

 
 K jj  = – 1. 2.0 – 1.  P j  =  1.  in terms of U2 (7-14)
 
0.0 – 1.0 1.  2.  U3

Now the reduced matrices are added from upstream assembly superelement 2. The reduced stiffness value of
.25 units is added into the term for dof 3, resulting in a diagonal term in the stiffness of 1.25 units. The
reduced loads are added into the loading vector at the appropriate location, providing a resulting load of 4.5
units (2.5+2.0) at dof 3.

1.0 – 1.0 0.0  0. 

 
 K gg  = – 1. 2.0 – 1.0  P g  =  1.  (7-15)
 
0.0 – 1.0 1.25  4.5 
Following the standard reduction process for statics, the MPC and SPCs are applied, resulting in the
constrained stiffness matrix and loading matrix.

   
 K ff  =  2.0 – 1.  P f  =  1.  (7-16)
 – 1. 1.25   4.5 
Because there are no additional reductions or inertia relief the F-Set, A-Set, and L-Set are equivalent. Solving
the equations produces the displacements for the residual structure.

 
 K ff   U f  =  P f  which gives  U f  =  3.833  (7-17)
 6.667 
This solution is then expanded to G-Set size, providing the solution vector for the residual structure.

 
 0.   U1 
   
 U g  =  3.833  =  U 2  (7-18)
   
 6.667   U3 
 
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE DATA RECOVERY
Following the solution phase, the data recovery phase can be started. The solution vector (displacements) for
the superelement can be used to calculate and output the user requested quantities such as stress, element
forces, SPC forces, etc. The actual data recovery will not be performed here since it follows standard
procedures.
DATA RECOVERY FOR SUPERELEMENT 2

Main Index
 CHAPTER 7 317
Multi-Level Superelement Analysis

The superelement directly above the residual structure is Superelement 2, thus the data recovery must be
performed for Superelement 2 first (i.e. the reverse of the reduction process). The data recovery follows the
process outlined in Manual Solution of a Small Superelement Example (Ch. 1). The reader is encouraged to review
the equations and formulation in Chapter 1 if the equations below seem unfamiliar.
The total displacements for the interior dof are based on the free-boundary solution (i.e. the displacement
vector cause by boundary motion) and the fixed-boundary solution (i.e. the displacements with the boundary
fixed with interior loads applied). The total interior solution is:

U o = U oo + G ot U a (7-19)

First, the boundary solution for Superelement 2 is partitioned form the solution for the residual structure.
 U 3  =  6.667  =  U a  (7-20)

The interior dof solution is found by applying constraint modes to the boundary motion.
free
 
a 0.75  5.0   U4 
 U o  =  G ot   U a  =  6.667  =   =   (7-21)
0.5  3.33   U5 
 
The fixed-boundary solution
fixed
 
o –1 0.75 0.5  0.   2.5   U4 
 U o  =  K oo   P o  =   =   =   (7-22)
0.5 1.  5.   5.0   U5 
 
Combining the two, we obtain the solution for displacements of superelement 2.
total
 
a o  7.5   U4 
 Uo  =  Uo  +  Uo  =   =   (7-23)
 8.333   U5 
 
Combining the boundary solution to the interior solution yields

 
 6.666   U3 
   
 U g  =  7.5  =  U 4  (7-24)
   
 8.333   U5 
 

Main Index
 318 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Example – Multi-Level Superelement Solved Manually

The solution vector (displacements) for the superelement can be used to calculate and output the user
requested quantities such as stress, element forces, SPC forces, etc. Again, the actual data recovery will not
be performed here since it follows standard procedures.
DATA RECOVERY FOR SUPERLEMENT 1
The same process for data recovery is applied to Superelement 1; the boundary solution at the exterior points
(in this case grid 5).
 U 5  =  8.333  =  U a  (7-25)

The free boundary solution is generated from the boundary displacements:

free
 U oa  =  G ot   U a  =  0.5   8.333  =  4.166  =  U 6  (7-26)

Finally, we calculate the fixed boundary solution. Then we combine this result with the solution due to the
boundary motion to get the displacements for superelement 1.
–1 fixed
 U oo  =  K oo   P o  =  0.5   4.0  =  2.0  =  U 6  (7-27)

total
 U o  =  U oa  +  U oo  =  4.166  +  2.0  =  6.166  =  U 6  (7-28)

Since grid 7 is constrained, its displacement is 0.0. Combining the displacements, the solution vector for
Superelement 1 is obtained:

 
 8.333   U5 
   
 U g  =  6.166  =  U 6  (7-29)
   
 0.0   U7 
 
Data recovery for stresses, spcforces, etc. follow standard data recovery procedures.
For comparison, if the problem is solved without superelements, the solution matrices are:

 
 U2   
2. – 1. 0. 0. 0.    1. 
– 1. 2. – 1. 0. 0.  U3   2. 
   
 K ff   U f  =  P f  = 0. – 1. 2. – 1. 0.  U 4  =  0.  (7-30)
   
0. 0. – 1. 2. – 1.  U5   3. 
0. 0. 0. – 1. 1.    4. 
 U6   
 
Which produces:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 7 319
Multi-Level Superelement Analysis

 
 U2   
   3.833 
 U3   6.667 
   
 U 4  =  7.5  (7-31)
   
 U5   8.333 
   6.166 
 U6   
 
The two approaches give identical answers, verifying that, for statics, using multi-level superelements for the
solution does not introduce any approximation.

Example – Multi-Level Superelement (Freedom)

In this section, the model used in Static Example Input Using Freedom (Ch. 2), will be used to demonstrate the
different techniques available in MSC Nastran to solve multi-level superelements. The examples will include
solving multi-level superelements with List (SESET) Superelements, PART Superelements, and External
Superelements. As a refresher, the model definition is:

Figure 7-13 Freedom Plane Sections

NOTE: in this solution PARAM,SNORM,0.0 is used. This simplifies the solution process because shell
normals for boundaries do not have to be calculated for the external superelement solution. For further
details on the impact of SNORM, refer to SNORM for PART or External Superelements (Ch. 4).

Main Index
 320 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Example – Multi-Level Superelement (Freedom)

The baseline solutions for Non-Superelement, and single-level List and PART Superelements can be found
at /doc/seug/chapter7/freedom/baseline:

Table 7-2 Files for Non-Superelement and Single-Level Superelement Baselines

Filename Description
freedom-baseline.bdf Baseline solution without superelements
freedom-seset.bdf List superelement solution
freedom-partse-discontinuous.bdf PART Superelement solution, discontinuous grid
ids at boundary

The baseline solutions will be used to demonstrate that the multi-level superelement solutions provide the
same results.
The superelement tree used for the multi-level superelement solutions will be based on a hypothetical project
that separates its functional groups based on major components. Below is a depiction of the superelement
tree that will be used:

Figure 7-14 Superelement Tree used for Freedom Example

Main Index
 CHAPTER 7 321
Multi-Level Superelement Analysis

Baseline Residual Solution

For comparison, a few key results will be used: the displacement of grid 40465, and stresses for element
30849, and the constraint forces for grids 30398, 40093, and 45093. In addition, the external work will be
compared. The results from the .f06 file for the non-superelement solution are shown below:
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 5293 (SSG3A)

FOR DATA BLOCK KLL

LOAD SEQ. NO. EPSILON EXTERNAL WORK EPSILONS LARGER THAN 0.001 ARE FLAGGED WITH ASTERISKS

1 2.4914695E-10 7.5310065E+02

D I S P L A C E M E N T V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

40465 G -4.159350E-03 -6.231965E-03 -4.670197E-02 7.550971E-04 -3.095922E-04 1.120664E-05

F O R C E S O F S I N G L E - P O I N T C O N S T R A I N T

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

30398 G 0.0 0.0 4.444910E+02 0.0 0.0 0.0

40093 G -1.049091E-08 1.357353E-08 4.657378E+02 0.0 0.0 0.0

45093 G -1.708439E-08 0.0 4.657378E+02 0.0 0.0 0.0

S T R E S S E S I N Q U A D R I L A T E R A L E L E M E N T S ( Q U A D 4 ) OPTION = BILIN

ELEMENT STRESSES IN ELEMENT COORD SYSTEM PRINCIPAL STRESSES (ZERO SHEAR)

ID GRID-ID NORMAL-X NORMAL-Y SHEAR-XY ANGLE MAJOR MINOR VON MISES

30849 CEN/4 -3.129590E+04 -1.111215E+04 -1.175186E+03 -86.6789 -1.104395E+04 -3.136409E+04 2.755525E+04

3.214362E+04 1.387658E+04 -2.111494E+03 -6.5085 3.238451E+04 1.363569E+04 2.816209E+04

30744 -3.665192E+04 -8.794149E+03 -1.224859E+03 -87.4873 -8.740398E+03 -3.670568E+04 3.320962E+04

2.832415E+04 8.950524E+03 -2.293816E+03 -6.6611 2.859203E+04 8.682644E+03 2.538973E+04

30752 -3.547250E+04 -1.325342E+04 -1.302092E+03 -86.6576 -1.317738E+04 -3.554854E+04 3.112725E+04

2.917080E+04 1.841779E+04 -2.066394E+03 -10.5118 2.955423E+04 1.803437E+04 2.580114E+04

30751 -2.723056E+04 -1.310064E+04 -1.142598E+03 -85.4066 -1.300884E+04 -2.732236E+04 2.367085E+04

3.504300E+04 1.810185E+04 -1.962243E+03 -6.5214 3.526731E+04 1.787754E+04 3.054336E+04

30737 -2.604683E+04 -8.940170E+03 -1.027284E+03 -86.5757 -8.878700E+03 -2.610830E+04 2.299276E+04

3.588052E+04 9.271286E+03 -2.143555E+03 -4.5762 3.605209E+04 9.099715E+03 3.247298E+04

Main Index
 322 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Example – Multi-Level Superelement (Freedom)

Listing 7-3 Freedom Non-Superelement Baseline Results

Note that the List and PART Superelement solutions produce the same results for displacements, SPC forces,
and stresses.

List Superelement Solution

For List (SESET) Superelements, the DTI,SETREE entry is required to define a superelement tree. The
definition of list superelements in Patran follows the procedure described in Demonstration of Defining Interior
Points in Patran (Ch. 2). However, Patran does not support the DTI,SETREE entry, so the user must use
Direct Text Input as shown below.
To define the superelement tree depicted in Figure 7-14, the following DTI,SETREE entry is required:
DTI,SETREE,1,10,30,20,30,30,50
,60,50,50,0,40,0

Figure 7-15 Defining DTI,SETREE in Patran with Direct Text Input

Main Index
 CHAPTER 7 323
Multi-Level Superelement Analysis

The resulting input file:

SUBCASE 1

$ Subcase name : Default

SUBTITLE=Default

SPC = 2

LOAD = 6

SET 1 = 40465

DISPLACEMENT(print,SORT1,REAL)=1

SET 2 = 30849

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

$ STRESS(plot,SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,BILIN)=ALL

STRESS(print,SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,BILIN)=2

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

DTI,SETREE,1,10,30,20,30,30,50

,60,50,50,0,40,0

PARAM POST -1

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

Listing 7-4 Resulting DTI,SETREE in .bdf file

The corresponding input file is found at: /doc/seug/chapter7/freedom/setree/seset-setree.bdf. The resulting

SEMAP is:
SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE

(SORTED BY SEID)

INDEX SUPERELEMENT PROCESS ORDER DOWNSTREAM SE SUPERELEMENT TYPE

0 0 7 0 RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

1 10 2 30 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

2 20 1 30 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

3 30 4 50 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

4 40 6 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

5 50 5 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

6 60 3 50 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE

(SORTED BY PROCESS ORDER)

INDEX SUPERELEMENT PROCESS ORDER DOWNSTREAM SE SUPERELEMENT TYPE

0 20 1 30 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

1 10 2 30 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

2 60 3 50 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

3 30 4 50 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

4 50 5 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

5 40 6 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

Main Index
 324 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Example – Multi-Level Superelement (Freedom)

6 0 7 0 RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

TABLE OF DOWNSTREAM CONNECTIONS FOR EACH SUPERELEMENT

INDEX SE ID ID-S OF DOWNSTREAM CONNECTIONS IN DOWNSTREAM ORDER

1 10 30 50 0

2 20 30 50 0

3 30 50 0

4 40 0

5 50 0

6 60 50 0

MSC Nastran JOB CREATED ON 29-MAR-11 AT 17:13:27 MAY 28, 2011 MSC Nastran

S U P E R E L E M E N T T R E E

**** TREE CONFIGURATION IS MULTILEVEL ****

( NO. LEVELS = 3 NO. TIPS = 4 * = PROCESS ORDER )

TIP L E V E L N U M B E R

INDEX

-1- -2- -3-

1 40

6*

2 50 30 10

5* 4* 2*

3 20

1*

4 60

3*

Listing 7-5 SEMAP Showing Multi-Level Superelement Processing Order for Freedom SESET Model

Investigation of the SEMAP confirms that the superelements are connected to one another as requested by
the DTI,SETREE defined above.
The output is partitioned to the appropriate superelements:
DEFAULT SUPERELEMENT 40 , 1

SUBCASE 1

D I S P L A C E M E N T V E C T O R

Main Index
 CHAPTER 7 325
Multi-Level Superelement Analysis

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

40465 G -4.159350E-03 -6.231965E-03 -4.670197E-02 7.550971E-04 -3.095922E-04 1.120664E-05

F O R C E S O F S I N G L E - P O I N T C O N S T R A I N T

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

40093 G -5.469864E-09 9.506579E-09 4.657378E+02 0.0 0.0 0.0

45093 G -9.333434E-09 0.0 4.657378E+02 0.0 0.0 0.0

DEFAULT SUPERELEMENT 30 , 1

SUBCASE 1

F O R C E S O F S I N G L E - P O I N T C O N S T R A I N T

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

30398 G 0.0 0.0 4.444910E+02 0.0 0.0 0.0

S T R E S S E S I N Q U A D R I L A T E R A L E L E M E N T S ( Q U A D 4 ) OPTION = BILIN

ELEMENT STRESSES IN ELEMENT COORD SYSTEM PRINCIPAL STRESSES (ZERO SHEAR)

ID GRID-ID NORMAL-X NORMAL-Y SHEAR-XY ANGLE MAJOR MINOR VON MISES

30849 CEN/4 -3.129590E+04 -1.111215E+04 -1.175186E+03 -86.6789 -1.104395E+04 -3.136409E+04 2.755525E+04

3.214362E+04 1.387658E+04 -2.111494E+03 -6.5085 3.238451E+04 1.363569E+04 2.816209E+04

30744 -3.665192E+04 -8.794149E+03 -1.224859E+03 -87.4873 -8.740398E+03 -3.670568E+04 3.320962E+04

2.832415E+04 8.950524E+03 -2.293816E+03 -6.6611 2.859203E+04 8.682644E+03 2.538973E+04

30752 -3.547250E+04 -1.325342E+04 -1.302092E+03 -86.6576 -1.317738E+04 -3.554854E+04 3.112725E+04

2.917080E+04 1.841779E+04 -2.066394E+03 -10.5118 2.955423E+04 1.803437E+04 2.580114E+04

30751 -2.723056E+04 -1.310064E+04 -1.142598E+03 -85.4066 -1.300884E+04 -2.732236E+04 2.367085E+04

3.504300E+04 1.810185E+04 -1.962243E+03 -6.5214 3.526731E+04 1.787754E+04 3.054336E+04

30737 -2.604683E+04 -8.940170E+03 -1.027284E+03 -86.5757 -8.878700E+03 -2.610830E+04 2.299276E+04

3.588052E+04 9.271286E+03 -2.143555E+03 -4.5762 3.605209E+04 9.099715E+03 3.247298E+04

Listing 7-6 Results for Multi-Level Solution of Freedom List Superelements

Note that the results are printed in reverse order of superelement reduction.

Main Index
 326 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Example – Multi-Level Superelement (Freedom)

PART Superelement Solution

Again, using the superelement tree shown in Figure 7-14, the same problem will be solved using PART
superelements. Patran provides a convenient form for defining the Superelement Tree for PART
Superelements as shown below.

Figure 7-16 Defining the SETREE for Part Superelements in Patran

The resulting input file: (ref /doc/seug/chapter7/freedom/partse-discontinuous-setree.bdf )

SOL 101

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = MSC Nastran job created on 29-Mar-11 at 17:13:27

ECHO = NONE

SUBCASE 1

$ Subcase name : Default

SUBTITLE=Default

SPC = 2

LOAD = 6

DISPLACEMENT(plot,SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

Main Index
 CHAPTER 7 327
Multi-Level Superelement Analysis

STRESS(plot,SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,BILIN)=ALL

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST -1

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

SETREE 30 10

SETREE 30 20

SETREE 50 30

SETREE 50 60

$ Elements and Element Properties for region : pbar.3

PBAR 3 4 1. 1.2 .5

Listing 7-7 Input File for Multi-Level PART Analysis with SETREE as Defined by Using Patran

Note that any SETREE entries that use SEID 0 (the residual structure) as the downstream superelement are
not written since the default is to attach superelements to the residual.
Note that the SEMAP indicates a slightly different processing order for the PART superelement, but every
superelement is processed before it is needed by its downstream connection, so the result is an equivalent
solution.
SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE (SORTED BY SEID)

PRIMARY PROCESS DOWNSTREAM

SUPERELEMENT SUPERELEMENT ORDER SUPERELEMENT TYPE LABEL

------------ ------------ ------- ------------ ----------------------------- ------------------------

0 0 7 0 RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

10 0 1 30 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

20 0 2 30 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

30 0 3 50 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

40 0 5 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

50 0 6 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

60 0 4 50 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE (SORTED BY PROCESS ORDER)

PRIMARY PROCESS DOWNSTREAM

SUPERELEMENT SUPERELEMENT ORDER SUPERELEMENT TYPE LABEL

------------ ------------ ------- ------------ ----------------------------- ------------------------

10 0 1 30 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

20 0 2 30 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

30 0 3 50 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

60 0 4 50 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

40 0 5 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

50 0 6 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

0 0 7 0 RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

TABLE OF DOWNSTREAM SUPERELEMENTS FOR EACH SUPERELEMENT

Main Index
 328 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Example – Multi-Level Superelement (Freedom)

SUPERELEMENT DOWNSTREAM SUPERELEMENTS IN DOWNSTREAM ORDER

------------ --------------------------------------------------------------------------------

10 30 50 0

20 30 50 0

30 50 0

40 0

50 0

60 50 0

FREEDOM PLANE EXAMPLE, MULTI-LEVEL PART SUPERELEMENT MAY 28, 2011

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM

DISCONTINUOUS NODES AT INTERFACES

S U P E R E L E M E N T T R E E

( CONFIGURATION = MULTILEVEL NO. LEVELS = 3 NO. TIPS = 4 )

TIP LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL L

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -

1 40

2 50 30 10

3 20

4 60

Listing 7-8 SEMAP Showing Multi-Level Superelement Processing Order for Freedom PART Model

The solution for the PART multi-level superelement model is equivalent to the List multi-level superelement
model.
FREEDOM PLANE EXAMPLE, MULTI-LEVEL PART SUPERELEMENT MAY 28, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10

DEFAULT SUPERELEMENT 40

DISCONTINUOUS NODES AT INTERFACES SUBCASE 1

D I S P L A C E M E N T V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

40465 G -4.159350E-03 -6.231965E-03 -4.670197E-02 7.550971E-04 -3.095922E-04 1.120664E-05

F O R C E S O F S I N G L E - P O I N T C O N S T R A I N T

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

40093 G 8.011156E-09 2.258071E-08 4.657378E+02 0.0 0.0 0.0

45093 G -2.125145E-08 0.0 4.657378E+02 0.0 0.0 0.0

Main Index
 CHAPTER 7 329
Multi-Level Superelement Analysis

FREEDOM PLANE EXAMPLE, MULTI-LEVEL PART SUPERELEMENT MAY 28, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10

DEFAULT SUPERELEMENT 30

DISCONTINUOUS NODES AT INTERFACES SUBCASE 1

F O R C E S O F S I N G L E - P O I N T C O N S T R A I N T

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

30374 G 0.0 0.0 4.444910E+02 0.0 0.0 0.0

S T R E S S E S I N Q U A D R I L A T E R A L E L E M E N T S ( Q U A D 4 ) OPTION = BILIN

LEMENT STRESSES IN ELEMENT COORD SYSTEM PRINCIPAL STRESSES (ZERO SHEAR)

ID GRID-ID NORMAL-X NORMAL-Y SHEAR-XY ANGLE MAJOR MINOR VON MISES

30849 CEN/4 -3.129590E+04 -1.111215E+04 -1.175186E+03 -86.6789 -1.104395E+04 -3.136409E+04 2.755525E+04

3.214362E+04 1.387658E+04 -2.111494E+03 -6.5085 3.238451E+04 1.363569E+04 2.816209E+04

30720 -3.665192E+04 -8.794149E+03 -1.224859E+03 -87.4873 -8.740398E+03 -3.670568E+04 3.320962E+04

2.832415E+04 8.950524E+03 -2.293816E+03 -6.6611 2.859203E+04 8.682644E+03 2.538973E+04

30728 -3.547250E+04 -1.325342E+04 -1.302092E+03 -86.6576 -1.317738E+04 -3.554854E+04 3.112725E+04

2.917080E+04 1.841779E+04 -2.066394E+03 -10.5118 2.955423E+04 1.803437E+04 2.580114E+04

30727 -2.723056E+04 -1.310064E+04 -1.142598E+03 -85.4066 -1.300884E+04 -2.732236E+04 2.367085E+04

3.504300E+04 1.810185E+04 -1.962243E+03 -6.5214 3.526731E+04 1.787754E+04 3.054336E+04

30713 -2.604683E+04 -8.940170E+03 -1.027284E+03 -86.5757 -8.878700E+03 -2.610830E+04 2.299276E+04

3.588052E+04 9.271286E+03 -2.143555E+03 -4.5762 3.605209E+04 9.099715E+03 3.247298E+04

Listing 7-9 Results for Multi-Level Solution of Freedom List Superelements

As with the List Superelements, the PART Superelement data recovery is performed in reverse order of the
reduction.

External Superelement Solution

The external superelement method provides the user the maximum flexibility when multiple organizations
are involved in a project, or there are many design changes in a few components. For a review of the external
superelement methods, the user is encouraged to review Demonstration of Defining Interior Points in Patran before
proceeding.

Main Index
 330 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Example – Multi-Level Superelement (Freedom)

3-Step External Superelement Method

For a review of the 3-Step External Superelement method, the user may want to review Using 3-Step External
Superelements.
When using the 3-step external superelement method for multi-level superelement reduction, the user
manually reduces and attaches each superelement in the tree. In order to reduce a collector superelement, the
reduced matrices from its constituent components must have already been reduced so that they can be
attached.
For the superelement tree defined in Figure 7-14, the steps in Table 7-3 must be performed in order. The files
in the table are located at /doc/seug/chapter7/Freedom/external-3-step. Note that for proper data recovery,
SCR=NO must be specified on the command line. (The default installation is SCR=NO, but if the user has
overwritten the default in a MSC Nastran rc file, SCR=NO must be specified on the command line.)

Table 7-3 Steps for Performing 3-Step Multi-Level Superelement Analysis of Freedom
Step Filename Comment
Reduce Tail create-tail.dat The tail must be reduced prior to
attaching the tail matrices to the aft-
fuselage
Reduce Engines create-engines.dat The engines must be reduced prior to
attaching the engine matrices to the aft-
fuselage.
Reduce Aft-Fuselage create-aft-fuselage.dat The tail and engines must be attached to
the aft-fuselage. The aft-fuselage must be
reduced prior to attaching the aft-fuselage
matrices to the cabin.
Reduce Nose create-nose.dat The nose must be reduced prior to
attaching the nose matrices to the cabin.
Reduce Cabin create-cabin.dat The aft-fuselage and nose must be
attached to the cabin. The cabin must be
reduced prior attaching the cabin
matrices to the wingbox.
Reduce Wings create-wings.dat The wings must be reduced prior to
attaching the wing matrices to the cabin.
Residual Solution and Data Recovery assemble-wingbox.dat The cabin and wings are attached to the
wingbox and the residual solution is
performed. Boundary solutions for the
cabin and wings are generated.
Wing Data Recovery recover-wings.dat The data recovery for the wings is
performed.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 7 331
Multi-Level Superelement Analysis

Table 7-3 Steps for Performing 3-Step Multi-Level Superelement Analysis of Freedom
Step Filename Comment
Cabin Data Recovery recover-cabin.dat The data recovery of the cabin is
performed. Boundary solution for the
nose and aft-fuselage are generated.
Nose Data Recovery recover-nose.dat The data recovery for the nose is
performed.
Aft Fuselage Data Recovery recover-aft-fuselage.dat The data recovery for the aft fuselage is
performed. Boundary solution for the
engines and tail is performed.
Engine Data Recovery recover-engines.dat The data recovery for the engines is
performed.
Tail Data Recovery recover-tail.dat The data recovery for the tail is
performed.

Schematically, the steps in Table 7-3, can be represented as follows:

Listing 7-10 Schematic of 3-Step Multi-Level Superelement Steps for Freedom

As an example of a tip superelement reduction, the ‘reduce-engines.dat’ file is shown below. A description
of the highlighted lines is as follows:

Main Index
 332 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Example – Multi-Level Superelement (Freedom)

 The assign master and assign dball statements define the MSC Nastran database which will be used
for data recovery.
 The assign output2 entry identifies the file that stores the reduced matrices of the engines. The unit
number matches the unit number on the EXTSEOUT command.
 The EXTSEOUT entry defines the EXTBULK, EXTID (superelement ID), and the matrix format
(DMIGOP2) and unit number to store the reduced matrices.
 The BNDFIX1 entry defines the boundary dof between the engines and the aft-fuselage.
assign master='engines.master' delete

assign dball ='engines.dball' delete

assign output2='engines_dmigop2.op2' unit=31 delete

SOL 101

CEND

TITLE = Freedom plane example, engines Reduction

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = Step 1 of 3-step External SE Reduction, Multi-Level

ECHO = NONE

param,snorm,0. $turn off SNORM processing

$ note: the unit number must be different than the unit for the tail

$ since both op2 files need to be attached in the aft-fuselage collector

EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK,EXTBULK,EXTID=20) DMIGOP2=31

DISP=ALL

STRESS=ALL

SPCF=ALL

SUBCASE 1

LOAD = 1

BEGIN BULK

$ define boundary dof

BNDFIX1,123456,20449,thru,20482

$ model and loads

include 'freedom-part-engines.bdf'

enddata

Listing 7-11 External Superelement Reduction of Engines (reduce-engines.dat) EXTSEOUT Method

The EXTBULK option on the EXTSEOUT entry creates a .pch file which will automatically create the
information necessary to attach the engines to the aft-fuselage. The contents of the .pch file are as follows:
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$

$ STANDARD PUNCH (.PCH) FILE FOR EXTERNAL SUPERELEMENT 20

$ -------------------------------------------------------------

Main Index
 CHAPTER 7 333
Multi-Level Superelement Analysis

$ THIS FILE CONTAINING BULK DATA ENTRIES PERTAINING TO

$ EXTERNAL SUPERELEMENT 20 IS MEANT FOR INCLUSION

$ AT THE VERY END OF THE MAIN BULK DATA PORTION OF THE ASSEMBLY RUN

$ NOTE

$ ----

$ USE OF THIS FILE IN THE ASSEMBLY RUN IS PURELY OPTIONAL SINCE

$ THIS INFORMATION IS ALSO STORED ON THE OP2 FILE GENERATED IN THE

$ EXTERNAL SUPERELEMENT CREATION RUN

$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$

$--------------------------- COLUMN NUMBERS ----------------------------

$00000000111111111122222222223333333333444444444455555555556666666666777

$23456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012

$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$

BEGIN SUPER 20

CORD2R 85 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. -1.

-1. 0. 0.

EXTRN 20449 123456 20450 123456 20451 123456 20452 123456

20453 123456 20454 123456 20455 123456 20456 123456

20457 123456 20458 123456 20459 123456 20460 123456

20461 123456 20462 123456 20463 123456 20464 123456

20465 123456 20466 123456 20467 123456 20468 123456

20469 123456 20470 123456 20471 123456 20472 123456

20473 123456 20474 123456 20475 123456 20476 123456

20477 123456 20478 123456 20479 123456 20480 123456

20481 123456 20482 123456

$ BOUNDARY GRID DATA

GRID 20449 242.97 -15.343 12.686

GRID 20450 246.303 -14.406 13.96

… (etc) …

GRID 20482 276.303 17.391 11.706 85

ASET 20449 123456 20450 123456 20451 123456 20452 123456

ASET 20453 123456 20454 123456 20455 123456 20456 123456

ASET 20457 123456 20458 123456 20459 123456 20460 123456

ASET 20461 123456 20462 123456 20463 123456 20464 123456

ASET 20465 123456 20466 123456 20467 123456 20468 123456

Main Index
 334 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Example – Multi-Level Superelement (Freedom)

ASET 20469 123456 20470 123456 20471 123456 20472 123456

ASET 20473 123456 20474 123456 20475 123456 20476 123456

ASET 20477 123456 20478 123456 20479 123456 20480 123456

ASET 20481 123456 20482 123456

$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$

Listing 7-12 .pch File Containing Mapping Information for Engines – Generated with EXTBULK Option on
EXTSEOUT entry

It is key to note in the .pch file the BEGIN SUPER command which is useful for the remainder of the reduce
files.
After the engines and tail are reduced, the aft-fuselage can be assembled and reduced. A description of the
highlighted lines is as follows:
 The assign master and assign dball statements define the MSC Nastran database which will be used
for data recovery.
 The assign output2 entry identifies the file that stores the reduced matrices of the aft-fuselage
assembly. The unit number matches the unit number on the EXTSEOUT command.
 The assign inputt2 entries identify the files that contain the stored matrices for the tail and engines.
The unit numbers match the unit numbers on the SEBULK entry
 The BNDFIX1 entry defines the boundary dof between the engines and the aft-fuselage.
 The EXTSEOUT entry defines the EXTBULK, EXTID (superelement ID), and the matrix format
(DMIGOP2) and unit number to store the reduced matrices.
 The SEBULK entry identifies that the tail and engines are external superelements with a DMIGOP2
format and the unit numbers
 The SECONCT entry defines the superelement connections. Note that when EXTSEOUT is used,
the connections must be made manually.
 The include .pch files define the EXTRN, GRID, and CORD2i entries for each superelement.
Since these have BEGIN SUPER entries, they must be included at the end of the input file.
assign master='aft-fuselage.master' delete

assign dball ='aft-fuselage.dball' delete

assign output2='aft-fuselage_dmigop2.op2' unit=31 delete

assign inputt2='tail_dmigop2.op2' unit=32

assign inputt2='engines_dmigop2.op2' unit=33

SOL 101

CEND

TITLE = Freedom plane example, aft-fuselage Reduction

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = Step 1 of 3-step External SE Reduction, Multi-Level

ECHO = NONE

param,snorm,0. $turn off SNORM processing

Main Index
 CHAPTER 7 335
Multi-Level Superelement Analysis

SPC=1

DISP=ALL

STRESS=ALL

SPCF=ALL

$ example use expanded case control

SUBCASE 10

SUPER = 10,1

SUBCASE 20

SUPER = 20,1

SUBCASE 30

SUPER = 0,1

LOAD = 1

EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK,EXTBULK,EXTID=30) DMIGOP2=31

BEGIN BULK

$ define boundary dof

BNDFIX1,123456,30788,thru,30811

$ model and loads

include 'freedom-part-aft-fuselage.bdf'

$ include assembly information

SEBULK 10 EXTOP2 MANUAL 32

SECONCT 10 0

,10415,thru,10434,30001,thru,30020

SEBULK 20 EXTOP2 MANUAL 33

SECONCT 20 0

,20449,thru,20482,30021,thru,30054

$ include bulk data for PARTS - these must be included LAST in the bdf

include 'reduce-tail.pch'

include 'reduce-engines.pch'

Listing 7-13 External Superelement Attachment of Tail and Engines to Aft-Fuselage and Reduction of Aft-
Fuselage (reduce-aft-fuselage.dat), EXTSEOUT method

The remaining ‘reduce’ files follow a similar format. The tail, engines, wings, and nose are tip superelements;
while the aft-fuselage and cabin are collector superelements that attach upstream superelements before they
are reduced.

Main Index
 336 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Example – Multi-Level Superelement (Freedom)

At the end of the tree, the wingbox is the residual structure. The attachment of the upstream superelements
is similar to the aft-fuselage listing above. In order to perform data recovery on the upstream superelements,
the boundary information must be partitioned and stored using the following entries:
 The assign output2 entries identify the files which will receive the boundary solution for the
respective superelements. The unit number matches the unit specified on EXTDROUT command.
 Expanded case control allows parameter control for each superelement. SUPER= defines the
superelement for the subcase.
 EXTDROUT command defines the format to store the external superelement boundary solution
and defines the unit to store the boundary solution for each respective superelement.
assign master='wingbox.master' delete

assign dball ='wingbox.dball' delete

assign inputt2='cabin_dmigop2.op2' unit=31

assign inputt2='wings_dmigop2.op2' unit=32

assign output2='wings-bndry-soln.op2' unit=35 delete

assign output2='cabin-bndry-soln.op2' unit=36 delete

SOL 101

CEND

TITLE = Freedom plane example, Wingbox Assembly

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = Step 2 of 3-step External SE Reduction, Multi-Level

ECHO = NONE

param,snorm,0. $turn off SNORM processing

DISP=ALL

STRESS(BILIN)=ALL

SPCF=ALL

SUBCASE 40

super = 40,1

EXTDROUT(DMIGOP2=35)

SUBCASE 50

super=50,1

EXTDROUT(DMIGOP2=36)

SUBCASE 99

super=0,1

LOAD = 1

Main Index
 CHAPTER 7 337
Multi-Level Superelement Analysis

BEGIN BULK

$ in this reduction, the wingbox is the residual and the final level of reduction

param,maxratio,1.e8

$ attach upstream se - wings

SEBULK 40 EXTOP2 MANUAL 32

SECONCT 40 0

,40001,thru,40008,171,thru,178

,45001,thru,45008,179,thru,186

$.......2.......3.......4.......5.......6.......7.......8.......9.......CONTINUE

$ 40001 171 40002 172 40003 173 40004 174

$ 40005 175 40006 176 40007 177 40008 178

$ 45001 179 45002 180 45003 181 45004 182

$ 45005 183 45006 184 45007 185 45008 186

$ attach upstream se - cabin collector

SEBULK 50 EXTOP2 MANUAL 31

SECONCT 50 0

,50001,thru,50037,187,thru,223

$ model and loads

include 'freedom-part-wingbox.bdf'

include 'reduce-wings.pch'

include 'reduce-cabin

Listing 7-14 External Superelement Residual Solution (assemble-wingbox.dat) With Directives for Upstream
Boundary Solution Storage

After the residual solution is obtained, and the boundary solutions are stored on appropriate files, the data
recovery for upstream superelements can begin. As an example, the cabin data recovery input file is shown
below. A description of the highlighted lines is as follows:
 The assign + restart entries define the database that was specified during the reduction run. This
database contains all of the grids, elements, coordinates, loading, constraints, etc., so there is no
need to specify any bulk data.
 The assign inputt2 entry defines the boundary solution written by the downstream superelement.
 The assign output2 entry defines the files that store the boundary solution of the upstream
superelements
 Expanded case control allows parameter control for each superelement. SUPER= defines the
superelement for the subcase.
 EXTDROUT command defines the format to store the external superelement boundary solution
and defines the unit to store the boundary solution for each respective superelement.

Main Index
 338 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Example – Multi-Level Superelement (Freedom)

 The output requests can specify any valid output request for a static solution as if it were run without
superelements.
assign se50='cabin.master'

restart logi=se50

assign inputt2='cabin-bndry-soln.op2' unit=31

$ define files to store boundary solution for upstream data recovery

assign output2='aft-fuselage-bndry-soln.op2' unit=35 delete

assign output2='nose-bndry-soln.op2' unit=36 delete

SOL 101 $ Linear Statics

DIAG 5,6,8,56

CEND

TITLE = Freedom plane example, Cabin Data Recovery

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = Step 3 of 3-step External SE Reduction, Multi-Level

$ output requests apply to all subcases unless overwritten

DISPL=ALL

STRESS(bilin)=ALL

SPCF=ALL

ECHO=NONE

$ specify data recovery from boundary solution

param,extdr,yes

param,extdrunt,31

$ use same case control from reduction run

param,snorm,0. $turn off SNORM processing

SUBCASE 30 $ aft-fuselage

super = 30,1

EXTDROUT(DMIGOP2=35)

SUBCASE 60 $ nose

super = 60,1

EXTDROUT(DMIGOP2=36)

SUBCASE 99

SUPER = 0,1

LOAD = 1

Main Index
 CHAPTER 7 339
Multi-Level Superelement Analysis

BEGIN BULK

$ no bulk data necessary

ENDDATA

Listing 7-15 Cabin Data Recovery Input (recover-cabin.dat) With Directives for Upstream Boundary Solution
Storage, EXTSEOUT method

The data recovery solutions are performed for every superelement that is desired. The data recovery for the
wings (recover-wings.dat and recover aft-fuselage.dat) demonstrates that the same solution is obtained for the
EXTSEOUT with EXTDROUT superelement process when compared to both the List and PART multi-
level superelement solutions. The solution is the same as shown in Listing 7-17.

Comparison of Results
When comparing results from all of the methods for multi-level superelement analysis described above, the
reader will notice that all elements have the exact same values for deflections and stresses. Below are tables
which summarize the results solved for in the methods discussed in this chapter.

Table 7-4 Results Comparison for Multi-Level Superelement Analysis Methods

Elm. 30849, Grid
Displacement Vector Maximum 30720 Von Mises
Model External Work (40465) SPCFORCES Stress
Baseline 7.5310065E+02 -4.670197E-02 4.6573779E+02 3.320962E+04
List Superelement 7.2700531E+02 -4.670197E-02 4.6573779E+02 3.320962E+04
PART Superelement 7.5153900E+02 -4.670197E-02 4.6573779E+02 3.320962E+04
Third Step External 7.2341473E+02 -4.670197E-02 4.6573779E+02 3.320962E+04
Superelement (restart)
Second Step External 7.2341473E+02 -4.670198E-02 4.6573779E+02 3.320962E+04
Superelement (OTM)

Table 7-5 Results Comparison for Multi-Level Superelement Analysis Methods

Model SPCF 30398 SPCF 40093 SPCF 45093
Baseline 4.444910E+02 4.657378E+02 4.657378E+02
List Superelement 4.444910E+02 4.657378E+02 4.657378E+02
PART Superelement 4.444910E+02 4.657378E+02 4.657378E+02
Third Step External Superelement (restart) 4.444910E+02 4.657378E+02 4.657378E+02
Second Step External Superelement (OTM) 4.444910E+02 4.657378E+02 4.657378E+02

Main Index
 340 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Example – Multi-Level Superelement (Freedom)

1.

Main Index
 Chapter 8: Output Description and Control in Static Superelement Analysis
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User’s Guide
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User’s Guide

8 Output Description and

Control in Static
Superelement Analysis

Introduction

Diagnostic/Connection Output

Part Superelement Diagnostic Output

List (SESET) Superelement Diagnostic Output
 Visualizing Model with OUTPUT(PLOT)

Result Output

Main Index
 342 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Introduction

Introduction
Up to this point, this guide provided snippets of output. The purpose of this chapter is to summarize and
consolidate the various MSC Nastran output in one convenient location. Additional output controls will be
discussed.

Note: BEGIN SUPER vs. BEGIN BULK Superelement Partitioning

MSC Nastran maintains two distinct paths for superelement processing in the solution
sequences. When a BEGIN SUPER entry is present the program uses the more modern
SEP1X module to make the SEMAP table used to control partition of superelements. When
there is a BEGIN BULK entry but no BEGIN SUPER entries a parallel path using the older
SEP1 module is used instead. For a more detailed discussion of these two methods, please refer
to Superelement Analysis (Ch. 7) in the MSC Nastran Reference Guide.

Diagnostic/Connection Output
MSC Nastran provides detailed diagnostics related to superelements and their connection to each other. The
sections below will discuss the superelement definition tables and output controls available to the user.

Superelement Definition Tables

Superelement definition tables list the superelement processing order used in the solution. The user can find
this table in the .f06 file when solving using list superelements and PART superelements.
For this section, the output for the flyswatter examples in CHAPTER 3 are investigated in more detail.

List Superelements
For list superelements, the superelement definition table is presented in two formats. The first table lists the
superelements by number (SEID). In the second table, the superelements are listed by processing order.
SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE

(SORTED BY SEID)

INDEX SUPERELEMENT PROCESS ORDER DOWNSTREAM SE SUPERELEMENT TYPE

0 0 8 0 RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

1 10 1 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

2 20 2 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

3 30 3 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

4 40 4 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

5 50 5 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

6 60 6 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

7 70 7 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE

(SORTED BY PROCESS ORDER)

INDEX SUPERELEMENT PROCESS ORDER DOWNSTREAM SE SUPERELEMENT TYPE

Main Index
 CHAPTER 8 343
Output Description and Control in Static Superelement Analysis

0 10 1 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

1 20 2 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

2 30 3 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

3 40 4 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

4 50 5 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

5 60 6 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

6 70 7 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

7 0 8 0 RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

Listing 8-1 List Superelement Definition Table (Ref output from: /doc/seug/chapter3/flyswatter-seset.bdf)

In the second column, the superelement number (SEID) is identified. In the third column, the order which
the superelements are processed is presented.

PART Superelements
With PART superelements, the superelement definition table is presented in two similar, but slightly
different formats from the list superelements. The PART superelements definition table includes a column
titled ‘Label’, which can define the superelement defined via the SELABEL bulk data entry.
SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE (SORTED BY SEID)

PRIMARY PROCESS DOWNSTREAM

SUPERELEMENT SUPERELEMENT ORDER SUPERELEMENT TYPE LABEL

------------ ------------ ------- ------------ ----------------------------- -----------------------------------------

0 0 8 0 RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

10 0 1 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

20 0 2 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

30 0 3 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

40 0 4 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

50 0 5 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

60 0 6 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

70 0 7 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE (SORTED BY PROCESS ORDER)

PRIMARY PROCESS DOWNSTREAM

SUPERELEMENT SUPERELEMENT ORDER SUPERELEMENT TYPE LABEL

------------ ------------ ------- ------------ ----------------------------- -----------------------------------------

10 0 1 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

20 0 2 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

30 0 3 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

40 0 4 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

50 0 5 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

60 0 6 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

70 0 7 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

0 0 8 0 RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

Main Index
 344 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Diagnostic/Connection Output

Listing 8-2 PART Superelement Definition Table (Ref output from: /doc/seug/chapter3/flyswatter-part.bdf)

For PART superelements, the first column lists the superelements. The third column lists the process order
and the fourth column lists and downstream elements, if applicable to the problem.

External Superelements
There are no definition tables for external superelements during the superelement generation run. When an
external superelement is attached in an assembly run, the external superelement is identified as an
“EXTERNAL” in the Superelement Definition Tables.
SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE (SORTED BY SEID)

PRIMARY PROCESS DOWNSTREAM

SUPERELEMENT SUPERELEMENT ORDER SUPERELEMENT TYPE LABEL

------------ ------------ ------- ------------ ----------------------------- ----------------------------

0 0 8 0 RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

10 10 1 0 EXTERNAL (SEBULK (A-SET))

20 20 2 0 EXTERNAL (SEBULK (A-SET))

30 30 3 0 EXTERNAL (SEBULK (A-SET))

40 40 4 0 EXTERNAL (SEBULK (A-SET))

50 50 5 0 EXTERNAL (SEBULK (A-SET))

60 60 6 0 EXTERNAL (SEBULK (A-SET))

70 70 7 0 EXTERNAL (SEBULK (A-SET))

SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE (SORTED BY PROCESS ORDER)

PRIMARY PROCESS DOWNSTREAM

SUPERELEMENT SUPERELEMENT ORDER SUPERELEMENT TYPE LABEL

------------ ------------ ------- ------------ ----------------------------- ----------------------------

10 10 1 0 EXTERNAL (SEBULK (A-SET))

20 20 2 0 EXTERNAL (SEBULK (A-SET))

30 30 3 0 EXTERNAL (SEBULK (A-SET))

40 40 4 0 EXTERNAL (SEBULK (A-SET))

50 50 5 0 EXTERNAL (SEBULK (A-SET))

60 60 6 0 EXTERNAL (SEBULK (A-SET))

70 70 7 0 EXTERNAL (SEBULK (A-SET))

0 0 8 0 RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

Listing 8-3 External Superelement Definition Table (Ref output from: /doc/seug/chapter3/assembly.bdf)

Controlling Diagnostic Output with PARAMs SEMAP, SEMAPOPT,

SEMAPPRT
The user has many of options to control the amount and type of Superelement diagnostic output. User
parameters SEMAP, SEMAPOPT, and SEMAPPRT control the diagnostic output.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 8 345
Output Description and Control in Static Superelement Analysis

PARAM,SEMAP
The user has four options for PARAM,SEMAP: SEMAPALL, SEMAPEST, SEMAPCON, SEMAPPUN.
A table with the PARAM,SEMAP options and their description is shown here:

Table 8-1 PARAM SEMAP Options for Controlling Superelement Diagnostic Output
SEMAP Value Output and Application
SEMAP (Default) ISM, SDT. The lengthy GPM is suppressed. This is the appropriate value for use after the model
is stable and only minor changes are to be made.
SEMAPALL GPM, ISM, SDT. All tables are printed. This value is useful on the initial debug run of a model
and when making extensive modeling changes.
SEMAPCON Only the summary tables of the GPM and the estimation data is output. This is a useful value
when iterating to an economic partitioning scheme for large, complex models.
SEMAPEST Only the estimation data is printed. This is useful when evaluating several alternative partitioning
schemes.
SEMAPPUN No output is printed. The exterior grid points of the superelement with a SEID that is input on
SEMAPOPT are placed on a CSUPER entry image on the PUNCH file, allowing the
superelement to be used as an external superelement. If SEMAPOPT > 0, the superelement entry
is given an SSID of SEMAPOPT. If SEMAPOPT < 0, the exterior points listed are those of the
residual structure, but the CSUPER entry is given an SSID of |SEMAPOPT|.

In the above table, there are three abbreviations which represent the output data displayed in the .f06 file.
ISM stands for the individual superelement map. In the .f06 file, this can be found by searching for the
superelement connectivity list. If a grid is attached to more than one superelement, the ISM identifies each
superelement.
The for list superelements, the superelement connectivity list (aka ISM) shows the grids attachments to each
superelement. .
[Individual Superelement Map (ISM)for SESET Superelements]

SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST ------------------------------------ CONNECTED TO --------------------------------

INDEX GRID ID TYPE INT.-TO-SE SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID

1 1 70

2 2 70

3 3 70

4 4 70

5 5 70

6 6 70

7 7 70 0

8 8 70 0

9 9 50 0

Main Index
 346 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Diagnostic/Connection Output

10 10 50 0

11 11 50 0

12 12 50 0

13 13 0 50 70

102 102 20

103 103 20

104 104 20

Listing 8-4 Individual Superelement Map (ISM) data from .f06 for SESETS

For Part superelements, the ISM identifies the boundary grids for each superelement – the boundary grid ids
(i.e. “1B, 2B,...) are related to their corresponding superelement grid ids via the grid point map.
[Individual Superelement Map (ISM) for PART Superelements]

SUPERELEMENT 0

TYPE = RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

LIST OF INTERIOR POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF INTERIOR POINT = 12 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9-

1 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B

11 11B 12B

SUPERELEMENT 0

TYPE = RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

LIST OF ELEMENTS ( TOTAL NO. OF ELEMENTS = 1 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9-

1 5

SUPERELEMENT 10

TYPE = PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

LIST OF EXTERIOR POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF EXTERIOR POINT = 2 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9-

1 1B 2B

SUPERELEMENT 20

TYPE = PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

LIST OF EXTERIOR POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF EXTERIOR POINT = 2 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9-

1 3B 4B

SUPERELEMENT 30

TYPE = PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

LIST OF EXTERIOR POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF EXTERIOR POINT = 4 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9-

1 1B 2B 5B 6B

Main Index
 CHAPTER 8 347
Output Description and Control in Static Superelement Analysis

SUPERELEMENT 40

TYPE = PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

LIST OF EXTERIOR POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF EXTERIOR POINT = 4 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9-

1 3B 4B 7B 8B

SUPERELEMENT 50

TYPE = PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

LIST OF EXTERIOR POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF EXTERIOR POINT = 4 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9-

1 5B 6B 9B 10B

SUPERELEMENT 60

TYPE = PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

LIST OF EXTERIOR POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF EXTERIOR POINT = 4 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9-

1 7B 8B 11B 12B

SUPERELEMENT 70

TYPE = PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

LIST OF EXTERIOR POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF EXTERIOR POINT = 2 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9-

1 9B 11B

Listing 8-5 Individual Superelement Map (ISM) data from .f06 for PARTS (Ref output from:
/doc/seug/chapter3/flyswatter-part.bdf)

The Superelement Definition Table (SDT) is next; it contains the SEID of every superelement in the model,
the processing order, and the superelement tree. Below is a sample SDT output.
[Superelement Definition Table (SDT) for SESET Superelements]

SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE

(SORTED BY SEID)

INDEX SUPERELEMENT PROCESS ORDER DOWNSTREAM SE SUPERELEMENT TYPE

0 0 8 0 RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

1 10 1 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

2 20 2 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

3 30 3 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

4 40 4 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

5 50 5 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

6 60 6 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

7 70 7 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

Main Index
 348 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Diagnostic/Connection Output

SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE

(SORTED BY PROCESS ORDER)

INDEX SUPERELEMENT PROCESS ORDER DOWNSTREAM SE SUPERELEMENT TYPE

0 10 1 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

1 20 2 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

2 30 3 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

3 40 4 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

4 50 5 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

5 60 6 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

6 70 7 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

7 0 8 0 RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

TABLE OF DOWNSTREAM CONNECTIONS FOR EACH SUPERELEMENT

INDEX SE ID ID-S OF DOWNSTREAM CONNECTIONS IN DOWNSTREAM ORDER

1 10 0

2 20 0

3 30 0

4 40 0

5 50 0

6 60 0

7 70 0

MSC Nastran JOB CREATED ON 02-APR-11 AT 08:53:17 JUNE 2, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10 PAGE 11

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM

S U P E R E L E M E N T T R E E

( NO. LEVELS = 1 NO. TIPS = 7 * = PROCESS ORDER )

TIP L E V E L N U M B E R

INDEX

-1-

1 10

1*

2 20

2*

3 30

3*

4 40

4*

5 50

5*

Main Index
 CHAPTER 8 349
Output Description and Control in Static Superelement Analysis

6 60

6*

7 70

7*

Listing 8-6 Superelement Definition Table (SDT) data from .f06 for SESETS (Ref output from:
/doc/seug/chapter3/flyswatter-seset.bdf)L

[Superelement Definition Table (SDT) for PART Superelements]

SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE (SORTED BY SEID)

PRIMARY PROCESS DOWNSTREAM

SUPERELEMENT SUPERELEMENT ORDER SUPERELEMENT TYPE LABEL

------------ ------------ ------- ------------ ----------------------------- ------------------------------------

0 0 8 0 RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

10 0 1 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

20 0 2 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

30 0 3 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

40 0 4 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

50 0 5 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

60 0 6 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

70 0 7 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE (SORTED BY PROCESS ORDER)

PRIMARY PROCESS DOWNSTREAM

SUPERELEMENT SUPERELEMENT ORDER SUPERELEMENT TYPE LABEL

------------ ------------ ------- ------------ ----------------------------- ------------------------------------

10 0 1 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

20 0 2 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

30 0 3 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

40 0 4 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

50 0 5 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

60 0 6 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

70 0 7 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

0 0 8 0 RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

TABLE OF DOWNSTREAM SUPERELEMENTS FOR EACH SUPERELEMENT

SUPERELEMENT DOWNSTREAM SUPERELEMENTS IN DOWNSTREAM ORDER

------------ --------------------------------------------------------------------------------

10 0

20 0

30 0

Main Index
 350 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Diagnostic/Connection Output

40 0

50 0

60 0

70 0

MSC Nastran JOB CREATED ON 02-APR-11 AT 13:36:21 JUNE 2, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10

S U P E R E L E M E N T T R E E

( CONFIGURATION = SINGLE LEVEL NO. LEVELS = 1 NO. TIPS = 7 )

TIP LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEV

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10- -11

1 10

2 20

3 30

4 40

5 50

6 60

7 70

Listing 8-7 Superelement Definition Table (SDT) data from .f06 for PARTS (Ref output from:
/doc/seug/chapter3/flyswatter-part.bdf)

Finally, the Grid Point Map (GPM) contains a list of each superelement’s boundary grid points . Below is a
sample of the GPM data.
[Grid Point Map (GPM) for SESET Superelements]

UNIQUE SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST ------------------------------------ CONNECTED TO ---------------------------

(SORTED BY 1ST GRD)

COUNT 1ST GRD TYPE INT.-TO-SE SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID

6 1 70

2 7 70 0

6 9 50 0

1 13 0 50 70

1 14 0 60 70

6 15 60 0

2 19 0 30 50

1 23 0 50

1 24 0 60

Main Index
 CHAPTER 8 351
Output Description and Control in Static Superelement Analysis

2 27 0 40 60

2 29 30 0

2 31 40 0

28 33 10

6 34 10 0

2 35 0 10 30

28 39 20

6 40 20 0

2 41 0 20 40

1 MSC Nastran JOB CREATED ON 02-APR-11 AT 08:53:17 JUNE 2, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10 PAGE
16

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM

0 UNIQUE SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST ------------------------------------ CONNECTED TO ----------------------------

(SORTED BY COUNT)

COUNT 1ST GRD TYPE INT.-TO-SE SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-
ID

1 13 0 50 70

1 14 0 60 70

1 23 0 50

1 24 0 60

2 7 70 0

2 19 0 30 50

2 27 0 40 60

2 29 30 0

2 31 40 0

2 35 0 10 30

2 41 0 20 40

6 1 70

6 9 50 0

6 15 60 0

6 34 10 0

6 40 20 0

28 33 10

28 39 20

1 MSC Nastran JOB CREATED ON 02-APR-11 AT 08:53:17 JUNE 2, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10 PAGE
17

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM

0 UNIQUE SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST ------------------------------------ CONNECTED TO ----------------------------

(SORTED BY SE-ID)

COUNT 1ST GRD TYPE INT.-TO-SE SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-
ID

1 13 0 50 70

2 27 0 40 60

Main Index
 352 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Diagnostic/Connection Output

2 35 0 10 30

2 19 0 30 50

1 24 0 60

1 23 0 50

1 14 0 60 70

2 41 0 20 40

28 33 10

6 34 10 0

6 40 20 0

28 39 20

2 29 30 0

2 31 40 0

6 9 50 0

6 15 60 0

6 1 70

2 7 70 0

Listing 8-8 Grid Point Map (GPM) data from .f06 for SESETS (Ref output from:
/doc/seug/chapter3/flyswatter-seset.bdf)

[Grid Point Map (GPM) for PART Superelements]

POINT/SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST (SORTED BY POINT ID - "B" INDICATES BOUNDARY SEQUENCE ID)

INTERIOR TO

POINT ID TYPE SUPERELEMEMT ------------------------------- CONNECTED TO SUPERELEMENT ------------------

1B G 0 10 30

2B G 0 10 30

3B G 0 20 40

4B G 0 20 40

5B G 0 30 50

6B G 0 30 50

7B G 0 40 60

8B G 0 40 60

9B G 0 50 70

10B G 0 50

11B G 0 60 70

12B G 0 60

MSC Nastran JOB CREATED ON 02-APR-11 AT 13:36:21 JUNE 2, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10

POINT/SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST (SORTED BY FIRST POINT ID - "B" INDICATES BOUNDARY SEQUENC

FIRST INTERIOR TO

COUNT POINT ID TYPE SUPERELEMEMT ------------------------------- CONNECTED TO SUPERELEMENT ------------------

Main Index
 CHAPTER 8 353
Output Description and Control in Static Superelement Analysis

2 1B 0 10 30

2 3B 0 20 40

2 5B 0 30 50

2 7B 0 40 60

1 9B 0 50 70

1 10B 0 50

1 11B 0 60 70

1 12B 0 60

MSC Nastran JOB CREATED ON 02-APR-11 AT 13:36:21 JUNE 2, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10

POINT/SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST (SORTED BY COUNT - "B" INDICATES BOUNDARY SEQUENCE ID)

FIRST INTERIOR TO

COUNT POINT ID TYPE SUPERELEMEMT ------------------------------- CONNECTED TO SUPERELEMENT ------------------

1 12B 0 60

1 10B 0 50

1 11B 0 60 70

1 9B 0 50 70

2 1B 0 10 30

2 5B 0 30 50

2 3B 0 20 40

2 7B 0 40 60

MSC Nastran JOB CREATED ON 02-APR-11 AT 13:36:21 JUNE 2, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10

POINT/SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST (SORTED BY INTERIOR SUPERELEMENT - "B" INDICATES BOUNDARY

FIRST INTERIOR TO

COUNT POINT ID TYPE SUPERELEMEMT ------------------------------- CONNECTED TO SUPERELEMENT ------------------

1 12B 0 60

2 5B 0 30 50

2 3B 0 20 40

2 1B 0 10 30

1 9B 0 50 70

1 11B 0 60 70

1 10B 0 50

2 7B 0 40 60

Listing 8-9 Grid Point Map (GPM) data from .f06 for PARTS(Ref output from: /doc/seug/chapter3/flyswatter-
part.bdf)

If the user would like to find more information on these options refer to the Quick Reference Guide.

Main Index
 354 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Diagnostic/Connection Output

PARAM,SEMAPOPT
PARAM,SEMAPOPT controls the amount of output for the SEMAP. The most common options are 0, 1,
or 2 as described in the table below.

Table 8-2 Common PARAM,SEMAPOPT options

SEMAPOPT Value Result
0 Both grid list and summaries of grid lists
1 Only grid list
2 Only Summaries of grid lists

Additional controls can be found in the MSC Nastran DMAP User’s Guide, TABPRT Module Description.
[PARAM,SEMAPOPT,1 Output]

SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST ------------------------------------ CONNECTED TO ------------------------------

INDEX GRID ID TYPE INT.-TO-SE SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID

1 1 70

2 2 70

3 3 70

13 13 0 50 70

14 14 0 60 70

15 15 60 0

16 16 60 0

101 101 20

102 102 20

103 103 20

104 104 20

Listing 8-10 PARAM,SEMAPOPT,1 Output (SESET)

[PARAM,SEMAPOPT,2 Output]

UNIQUE SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST ------------------------------------ CONNECTED TO ------------------------------

(SORTED BY 1ST GRD)

COUNT 1ST GRD TYPE INT.-TO-SE SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID

6 1 70

2 7 70 0

Main Index
 CHAPTER 8 355
Output Description and Control in Static Superelement Analysis

6 9 50 0

1 13 0 50 70

1 14 0 60 70

2 35 0 10 30

1 14 0 60 70

2 41 0 20 40

28 33 10

6 34 10 0

6 40 20 0

28 39 20

2 29 30 0

2 31 40 0

6 9 50 0

6 15 60 0

6 1 70

2 7 70 0

Listing 8-11 PARAM,SEMAPOPT,2 output (SESET shown)

PARAM,SEMAPPRT
PARAM,SEMAPPRT controls which data from the SEMAP that will be output as shown below.

Table 8-3 PARAM,SEMAPPRT Options

Input Code Output Information
PARAM,SEMAPPRT,-1 No output data
PARAM,SEMAPPRT,0 Superelement definition table, superelement tree, unique
superelement connectivity list, estimation data for
superelement
PARAM,SEMAPPRT,1 Superelement definition table, superelement tree
PARAM,SEMAPPRT,2 Superelement definition table, superelement tree, unique
superelement connectivity list
PARAM,SEMAPPRT,3 Superelement definition table, superelement tree, unique
superelement connectivity list, estimation data for
superelement
PARAM,SEMAPPRT,4 No output data
PARAM,SEMAPPRT,5 Superelement definition table, superelement tree, unique
superelement connectivity list, estimation data for
superelement

Main Index
 356 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Part Superelement Diagnostic Output

Part Superelement Diagnostic Output

Sorted Bulk Data

For PART superelements, the sorted bulk data is partitioned into separate sections for each superelement.
S O R T E D B U L K D A T A E C H O SUPER = 10

ENTRY

COUNT . 1 .. 2 .. 3 .. 4 .. 5 .. 6 .. 7 .. 8 .. 9 .. 10 .

1- CQUAD4 18 1 33 34 46 45 0. 0.

2- CQUAD4 19 1 34 35 47 46 0. 0.

3- CQUAD4 20 1 35 36 48 47 0. 0.

4- CQUAD4 21 1 36 37 49 48 0. 0.

5- CQUAD4 22 1 37 38 50 49 0. 0.

6- CQUAD4 23 1 45 46 58 57 0. 0.

7- CQUAD4 24 1 46 47 59 58 0. 0.

65- LOAD 305 1. 1. 301

66- LOAD 307 1. 1. 101

67- MAT1 *1 3.+7 1.15385+7 .3 +000001

68- *+0000017.33-4 +000002

69- PARAM GRDPNT 0

70- PARAM POST -1

71- PARAM PRTMAXIMYES

72- PLOAD4 101 18 -1. THRU 42

73- PSHELL 1 1 1. 1 1

ENDDATA

TOTAL COUNT= 74

INPUT BULK DATA ENTRY COUNT = 91

S O R T E D B U L K D A T A E C H O SUPER = 20

ENTRY

COUNT . 1 .. 2 .. 3 .. 4 .. 5 .. 6 .. 7 .. 8 .. 9 .. 10 .

1- CQUAD4 43 2 39 40 52 51 0. 0.

2- CQUAD4 44 2 40 41 53 52 0. 0.

3- CQUAD4 45 2 41 42 54 53 0. 0.

4- CQUAD4 46 2 42 43 55 54 0. 0.

5- CQUAD4 47 2 43 44 56 55 0. 0.

64- LOAD 303 1. 1. 201

65- LOAD 305 1. 1. 301

66- LOAD 307 1. 1. 101

67- MAT1 *2 3.+7 1.15385+7 .3 +000001

68- *+0000017.33-4 +000002

69- PARAM GRDPNT 0

Main Index
 CHAPTER 8 357
Output Description and Control in Static Superelement Analysis

70- PARAM POST -1

71- PARAM PRTMAXIMYES

72- PLOAD4 101 43 -1. THRU 67

73- PSHELL 2 2 1. 2 2

ENDDATA

TOTAL COUNT= 74

[listing for superelement 30,40,50,60 omitted]

S O R T E D B U L K D A T A E C H O SUPER = 70

ENTRY

COUNT . 1 .. 2 .. 3 .. 4 .. 5 .. 6 .. 7 .. 8 .. 9 .. 10 .

1- CQUAD4 1 7 1 2 4 3 0. 0.

2- CQUAD4 2 7 3 4 6 5 0. 0.

20- PSHELL 7 7 1. 7 7

21- SPC1 1 123456 1 2

22- SPCADD 2 1

ENDDATA

TOTAL COUNT= 23

Listing 8-12 PART Superelement Sorted Bulk Data

Boundary Grid Search Output

The boundary grids associated with each PART superelement are output the Boundary Sequence Assignment
Table. For example, the Figure below will generate the following Boundary Sequence assignment table.
BOUNDARY SEQUENCE ASSIGNMENT TABLE

BOUNDARY

SEQUENCE ID --------------------------------- ASSIGNED TO POINT ID (SUPERELEMENT) ---------------------------------

1B 35 ( 10) 35 ( 30)

2B 36 ( 10) 36 ( 30)

3B 41 ( 20) 41 ( 40)

4B 42 ( 20) 42 ( 40)

5B 19 ( 30) 19 ( 50)

6B 20 ( 30) 20 ( 50)

7B 27 ( 40) 27 ( 60)

8B 28 ( 40) 28 ( 60)

9B 13 ( 0) 13 ( 50) 13 ( 70)

10B 23 ( 0) 23 ( 50)

11B 14 ( 0) 14 ( 60) 14 ( 70)

12B 24 ( 0) 24 ( 60)

Main Index
 358 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Part Superelement Diagnostic Output

POINT/SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST (SORTED BY POINT ID - "B" INDICATES BOUNDARY SEQUENCE ID)

INTERIOR TO

POINT ID TYPE SUPERELEMEMT ------------------------------- CONNECTED TO SUPERELEMENT --------------------

1B G 0 10 30

2B G 0 10 30

3B G 0 20 40

4B G 0 20 40

5B G 0 30 50

6B G 0 30 50

7B G 0 40 60

8B G 0 40 60

9B G 0 50 70

10B G 0 50

11B G 0 60 70

12B G 0 60

POINT/SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST (SORTED BY FIRST POINT ID - "B" INDICATES BOUNDARY SEQUENCE ID)

FIRST INTERIOR TO

COUNT POINT ID TYPE SUPERELEMEMT ------------------------------- CONNECTED TO SUPERELEMENT --------------------

2 1B 0 10 30

2 3B 0 20 40

2 5B 0 30 50

2 7B 0 40 60

1 9B 0 50 70

1 10B 0 50

1 11B 0 60 70

1 12B 0 60

POINT/SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST (SORTED BY COUNT - "B" INDICATES BOUNDARY SEQUENCE ID)

FIRST INTERIOR TO

COUNT POINT ID TYPE SUPERELEMEMT ------------------------------- CONNECTED TO SUPERELEMENT --------------------

1 12B 0 60

1 10B 0 50

1 11B 0 60 70

1 9B 0 50 70

2 1B 0 10 30

2 5B 0 30 50

2 3B 0 20 40

2 7B 0 40 60

POINT/SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST (SORTED BY INTERIOR SUPERELEMENT - "B" INDICATES BOUNDARY SEQUENCE ID)

FIRST INTERIOR TO

COUNT POINT ID TYPE SUPERELEMEMT ------------------------------- CONNECTED TO SUPERELEMENT --------------------

1 12B 0 60

Main Index
 CHAPTER 8 359
Output Description and Control in Static Superelement Analysis

2 5B 0 30 50

2 3B 0 20 40

2 1B 0 10 30

1 9B 0 50 70

1 11B 0 60 70

1 10B 0 50

2 7B 0 40 60

Listing 8-13 PART Superelement Boundary Grid Search Output

Figure 8-1 Boundary Grid Illustration

Main Index
 360 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
List (SESET) Superelement Diagnostic Output

List (SESET) Superelement Diagnostic Output

Sorted Bulk Data

Just like non-superelement analysis, for List (SESET) Superelements the sorted bulk data echo is contained
in one section for the entire model.
S O R T E D B U L K D A T A E C H O

ENTRY

COUNT . 1 .. 2 .. 3 .. 4 .. 5 .. 6 .. 7 .. 8 .. 9 .. 10 .

1- CQUAD4 1 7 1 2 4 3 0. 0.

2- CQUAD4 2 7 3 4 6 5 0. 0.

3- CQUAD4 3 7 5 6 8 7 0. 0.

4- CQUAD4 4 7 7 8 14 13 0. 0.

5- CQUAD4 5 10 13 14 24 23 0. 0.

6- CQUAD4 6 5 9 10 20 19 0. 0.

7- CQUAD4 7 5 10 11 21 20 0. 0.

8- CQUAD4 8 5 11 12 22 21 0. 0.

9- CQUAD4 9 5 12 13 23 22 0. 0.

10- CQUAD4 10 6 14 15 25 24 0. 0.

11- CQUAD4 11 6 15 16 26 25 0. 0.

12- CQUAD4 12 6 16 17 27 26 0. 0.

13- CQUAD4 13 6 17 18 28 27 0. 0.

14- CQUAD4 14 3 19 20 30 29 0. 0.

15- CQUAD4 15 3 29 30 36 35 0. 0.

16- CQUAD4 16 4 27 28 32 31 0. 0.

17- CQUAD4 17 4 31 32 42 41 0. 0.

18- CQUAD4 18 1 33 34 46 45 0. 0.

19- CQUAD4 19 1 34 35 47 46 0. 0.

20- CQUAD4 20 1 35 36 48 47 0. 0.

201- PSHELL 3 3 1. 3 3

202- PSHELL 4 4 1. 4 4

203- PSHELL 5 5 1. 5 5

204- PSHELL 6 6 1. 6 6

205- PSHELL 7 7 1. 7 7

206- PSHELL 10 10 1. 10 10

207- SESET 10 33 34 37 38

208- SESET 10 45 THRU 50

209- SESET 10 57 THRU 62

210- SESET 10 69 THRU 74

211- SESET 10 81 THRU 86

212- SESET 10 93 THRU 98

213- SESET 20 39 40 43 44

214- SESET 20 51 THRU 56

Main Index
 CHAPTER 8 361
Output Description and Control in Static Superelement Analysis

215- SESET 20 63 THRU 68

216- SESET 20 75 THRU 80

217- SESET 20 87 THRU 92

218- SESET 20 99 THRU 104

219- SESET 30 29 30

220- SESET 40 31 32

221- SESET 50 9 THRU 12

222- SESET 50 21 22

223- SESET 60 15 THRU 18

224- SESET 60 25 26

225- SESET 70 1 THRU 8

226- SPC1 1 123456 1 2

227- SPCADD 2 1

ENDDATA

0 TOTAL COUNT= 228

Listing 8-14 List (SESET) Superelement Sorted Bulk Data

Boundary Grid Search Output

For SESET superelements, the boundary grid connectivity is displayed in one table called the Unique
Superelement Connectivity List.
0 UNIQUE SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST ------------------------------------ CONNECTED TO -----------------------------

(SORTED BY SE-ID)

COUNT 1ST GRD TYPE INT.-TO-SE SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID SE-ID

1 13 0 50 70

2 27 0 40 60

2 35 0 10 30

2 19 0 30 50

1 24 0 60

1 23 0 50

1 14 0 60 70

2 41 0 20 40

28 33 10

6 34 10 0

6 40 20 0

28 39 20

2 29 30 0

2 31 40 0

6 9 50 0

6 15 60 0

6 1 70

2 7 70 0

Main Index
 362 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Visualizing Model with OUTPUT(PLOT)

Listing 8-15 SESET Unique Superelements Connectivity List for Boundary Grids

Visualizing Model with OUTPUT(PLOT)

Visualizing the model is one of the most important verification steps in superelement analysis. In many cases,
preprocessing programs such as Patran are adequate to visualize the model and provide interactive feedback.
However, MSC Nastran supports imaged superelements (copies, mirrors, etc.) which are not always
supported by commercial preprocessors. In this case MSC Nastran provides an option to create a plot of the
model using OUTPUT(PLOT) commands. OUTPUT(PLOT) is covered in detail in Superelement Plotting
with PLOT (Ch. 19).

Result Output
The .f06 output (diagnostics, displacements, stresses, forces, etc.) for models with superelements is different
than a non-superelement analysis. Recall from Figure 1-9:

Figure 8-2 Flow Chart for Superelement Processing

Main Index
 CHAPTER 8 363
Output Description and Control in Static Superelement Analysis

The process order is determined by MSC Nastran modules SEP1 (list superelements) or SEP1X (PART
superelements) in Phase 1 operations and listed in the Superelement Definition Tables (refer to
Superelement Definition Tables). Each superelement is processed (reduced) in a loop according to the
process order. Phase 2 is the solution of the residual structure. The data recovery is performed in a loop in
Phase 3; that is, the data recovery for each superelement is performed in a loop that is in reverse order of
Phase 1 process order.
The selected output below comes from the Chapter 3 flyswatter examples.

List Superelements
The following listings show the output for list superelements. In this case, the output relative to Phase 1 and
Phase 3 operations is shown:
[PHASE 1 Output Associated with List Superelement 10]

SUPERELEMENT 10

** SYSTEM INFORMATION MESSAGE 4159 (DFMSA)

THE DECOMPOSITION OF KOO YIELDS A MAXIMUM MATRIX-TO-FACTOR-DIAGONAL RATIO OF 5.006693E+00

** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 5293 (SSG3A)

FOR DATA BLOCK KOO

LOAD SEQ. NO. EPSILON EXTERNAL WORK EPSILONS LARGER THAN 0.001 ARE FLAGGED WITH ASTER

1 8.5530295E-15 1.1700904E-05

2 6.9137383E-15 1.1700904E-05

3 6.9176406E-15 9.7933684E-05

[PHASE 1 Output Associated with List Superelement 20]

SUPERELEMENT 20

** SYSTEM INFORMATION MESSAGE 4159 (DFMSA)

THE DECOMPOSITION OF KOO YIELDS A MAXIMUM MATRIX-TO-FACTOR-DIAGONAL RATIO OF 5.006693E+00

** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 5293 (SSG3A)

FOR DATA BLOCK KOO

LOAD SEQ. NO. EPSILON EXTERNAL WORK EPSILONS LARGER THAN 0.001 ARE FLAGGED WITH ASTER

1 -2.3284101E-14 1.1700904E-05

2 -2.0241675E-14 1.1700904E-05

3 -1.6063905E-14 9.7933684E-05

[PHASE 3 Output Associated with List Superelement 10]

IN PHASE LOADS SUPERELEMENT 10

SUBCASE 1

D I S P L A C E M E N T V E C T O R

Main Index
 364 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Result Output

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

33 G 0.0 0.0 3.683764E-04 9.794447E-05 1.543324E-05 0.0

34 G 0.0 0.0 3.560836E-04 9.801662E-05 1.548379E-05 0.0

35 G 0.0 0.0 3.440241E-04 9.593536E-05 1.486124E-05 0.0

36 G 0.0 0.0 3.321574E-04 9.586434E-05 1.520494E-05 0.0

37 G 0.0 0.0 3.192997E-04 9.717572E-05 1.586828E-05 0.0

38 G 0.0 0.0 3.064635E-04 9.710126E-05 1.598421E-05 0.0

93 G 0.0 0.0 7.633899E-04 9.912115E-05 1.682907E-05 0.0

94 G 0.0 0.0 7.496271E-04 9.880464E-05 1.671144E-05 0.0

95 G 0.0 0.0 7.361663E-04 9.843080E-05 1.651792E-05 0.0

96 G 0.0 0.0 7.228653E-04 9.817738E-05 1.640466E-05 0.0

97 G 0.0 0.0 7.096976E-04 9.801870E-05 1.633151E-05 0.0

98 G 0.0 0.0 6.966225E-04 9.796763E-05 1.631299E-05 0.0

IN PHASE LOADS SUPERELEMENT 10

SUBCASE 1

S T R E S S E S I N Q U A D R I L A T E R A L E L E M E N T S ( Q U A D 4 )

ELEMENT STRESSES IN ELEMENT COORD SYSTEM PRINCIPAL STRESSES (ZERO SHEAR)

ID GRID-ID NORMAL-X NORMAL-Y SHEAR-XY ANGLE MAJOR MINOR VON MISES

18 CEN/4 1.147215E+00 5.651187E-01 -1.174470E+00 -38.0409 2.066162E+00 -3.538281E-01 2.263909E+00

-1.147215E+00 -5.651187E-01 1.174470E+00 51.9591 3.538281E-01 -2.066162E+00 2.263909E+00

19 CEN/4 9.589333E+00 1.521224E+01 -1.091012E+01 -52.2252 2.366733E+01 1.134244E+00 2.312109E+01

-9.589333E+00 -1.521224E+01 1.091012E+01 37.7748 -1.134244E+00 -2.366733E+01 2.312109E+01

Listing 8-16 Phase 1 and Phase 3 List Superelements Output

PART Superelements
PART Superelement analysis Phase 1 and Phase 3 operations are executed and reported the same way that
List Superelements are reported.
[PHASE 1 Output Associated with PART Superelement 10]

SUPERELEMENT 10

** SYSTEM INFORMATION MESSAGE 4159 (DFMSA)

THE DECOMPOSITION OF KOO YIELDS A MAXIMUM MATRIX-TO-FACTOR-DIAGONAL RATIO OF 5.006693E+00

** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 5293 (SSG3A)

FOR DATA BLOCK KOO

LOAD SEQ. NO. EPSILON EXTERNAL WORK EPSILONS LARGER THAN 0.001 ARE FLAGGED WITH ASTER

Main Index
 CHAPTER 8 365
Output Description and Control in Static Superelement Analysis

1 8.5530295E-15 1.1700904E-05

2 6.9137383E-15 1.1700904E-05

3 6.9176406E-15 9.7933684E-05

[PHASE 1 Output Associated with PART Superelement 20]

** SYSTEM INFORMATION MESSAGE 4159 (DFMSA)

THE DECOMPOSITION OF KOO YIELDS A MAXIMUM MATRIX-TO-FACTOR-DIAGONAL RATIO OF 5.006693E+00

** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 5293 (SSG3A)

FOR DATA BLOCK KOO

LOAD SEQ. NO. EPSILON EXTERNAL WORK EPSILONS LARGER THAN 0.001 ARE FLAGGED WITH ASTER

1 -2.3284101E-14 1.1700904E-05

2 -2.0241675E-14 1.1700904E-05

3 -1.6063905E-14 9.7933684E-05

[PHASE 3 Output Associated with PART Superelement 10]

IN PHASE LOADS SUPERELEMENT 10

SUBCASE 1

D I S P L A C E M E N T V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

33 G 0.0 0.0 3.683764E-04 9.794447E-05 1.543324E-05 0.0

34 G 0.0 0.0 3.560836E-04 9.801662E-05 1.548379E-05 0.0

35 G 0.0 0.0 3.440241E-04 9.593536E-05 1.486124E-05 0.0

36 G 0.0 0.0 3.321574E-04 9.586434E-05 1.520494E-05 0.0

37 G 0.0 0.0 3.192997E-04 9.717572E-05 1.586828E-05 0.0

38 G 0.0 0.0 3.064635E-04 9.710126E-05 1.598421E-05 0.0

93 G 0.0 0.0 7.633899E-04 9.912115E-05 1.682907E-05 0.0

94 G 0.0 0.0 7.496271E-04 9.880464E-05 1.671144E-05 0.0

95 G 0.0 0.0 7.361663E-04 9.843080E-05 1.651792E-05 0.0

96 G 0.0 0.0 7.228653E-04 9.817738E-05 1.640466E-05 0.0

97 G 0.0 0.0 7.096976E-04 9.801870E-05 1.633151E-05 0.0

98 G 0.0 0.0 6.966225E-04 9.796763E-05 1.631299E-05 0.0

IN PHASE LOADS SUPERELEMENT 10

SUBCASE 1

S T R E S S E S I N Q U A D R I L A T E R A L E L E M E N T S ( Q U A D 4 )

ELEMENT STRESSES IN ELEMENT COORD SYSTEM PRINCIPAL STRESSES (ZERO SHEAR)

Main Index
 366 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Result Output

ID GRID-ID NORMAL-X NORMAL-Y SHEAR-XY ANGLE MAJOR MINOR VON MISES

18 CEN/4 1.147215E+00 5.651187E-01 -1.174470E+00 -38.0409 2.066162E+00 -3.538281E-01 2.263909E+00

-1.147215E+00 -5.651187E-01 1.174470E+00 51.9591 3.538281E-01 -2.066162E+00 2.263909E+00

19 CEN/4 9.589333E+00 1.521224E+01 -1.091012E+01 -52.2252 2.366733E+01 1.134244E+00 2.312109E+01

-9.589333E+00 -1.521224E+01 1.091012E+01 37.7748 -1.134244E+00 -2.366733E+01 2.312109E+01

Listing 8-17 Phase 1 and Phase 3 PART Superelement Output

External Superelements
External Superelements Phase 1 operations are performed in a reduction run. In a single-level reduction run,
there are no superelement diagnostics.
During the Phase 2 operations, the external superelements are attached to the residual structure and the
system solution is performed.
During Phase 3 operations, there are two possible paths depending on the method employed:
 2-Step Method: Data recovery is performed in the same run as the solution
 3-Step Method: Data recovery is performed in a RESTART of the reduction run.
The following sections describe the diagnostic and results output for each method.

External Superelement 2-Step Method

The assembly run contains the Superelement Definition Table.
SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE (SORTED BY SEID)

PRIMARY PROCESS DOWNSTREAM

SUPERELEMENT SUPERELEMENT ORDER SUPERELEMENT TYPE LABEL

------------ ------------ ------- ------------ ----------------------------- -----------------------------------

0 0 8 0 RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

10 10 1 0 EXTERNAL (SEBULK (A-SET))

20 20 2 0 EXTERNAL (SEBULK (A-SET))

30 30 3 0 EXTERNAL (SEBULK (A-SET))

40 40 4 0 EXTERNAL (SEBULK (A-SET))

50 50 5 0 EXTERNAL (SEBULK (A-SET))

60 60 6 0 EXTERNAL (SEBULK (A-SET))

70 70 7 0 EXTERNAL (SEBULK (A-SET))

SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE (SORTED BY PROCESS ORDER)

PRIMARY PROCESS DOWNSTREAM

SUPERELEMENT SUPERELEMENT ORDER SUPERELEMENT TYPE LABEL

------------ ------------ ------- ------------ ----------------------------- -----------------------------------

10 10 1 0 EXTERNAL (SEBULK (A-SET))

20 20 2 0 EXTERNAL (SEBULK (A-SET))

30 30 3 0 EXTERNAL (SEBULK (A-SET))

Main Index
 CHAPTER 8 367
Output Description and Control in Static Superelement Analysis

40 40 4 0 EXTERNAL (SEBULK (A-SET))

50 50 5 0 EXTERNAL (SEBULK (A-SET))

60 60 6 0 EXTERNAL (SEBULK (A-SET))

70 70 7 0 EXTERNAL (SEBULK (A-SET))

0 0 8 0 RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

TABLE OF DOWNSTREAM SUPERELEMENTS FOR EACH SUPERELEMENT

SUPERELEMENT DOWNSTREAM SUPERELEMENTS IN DOWNSTREAM ORDER

------------ --------------------------------------------------------------------------------

10 0

20 0

30 0

40 0

50 0

60 0

70 0

Listing 8-18 External Superelement 2-Step Method Superelement Definition Table

Note that this output is in the same format as the Superelement Definition Table for PART Superelements
and that the external superelements are identified in the “TYPE” column.
Since Phase 1 operations were performed in the reduction step, there is no additional reduction necessary for
the external superelements. However, there will be diagnostic messages associated with the retrieval of the
reduced matrices. The results output for the 2-Step method will be reported the same as results output for
internal superelements. The diagnostic output will depend on the storage method defined on the
EXTSEOUT case control entry (i.e. MATRIXDB, DMIGDB, DMIGOP2, DMIGPCH, or MATOP4).
[Diagnostic Output Associated with Attaching MATRIXDB External Superelements]

$ DIRECT TEXT INPUT FOR FILE MANAGEMENT SECTION

ASSIGN SE10M='create-ext10.MASTER'

DBLOCATE DATABLK=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=10) LOGI=SE10M

ASSIGN SE20M='create-ext20.MASTER'

DBLOCATE DATABLK=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=20) LOGI=SE20M

ASSIGN SE30M='create-ext30.MASTER'

DBLOCATE DATABLK=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=30) LOGI=SE30M

ASSIGN SE40M='create-ext40.MASTER'

DBLOCATE DATABLK=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=40) LOGI=SE40M

ASSIGN SE50M='create-ext50.MASTER'

DBLOCATE DATABLK=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=50) LOGI=SE50M

ASSIGN SE60M='create-ext60.MASTER'

DBLOCATE DATABLK=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=60) LOGI=SE60M

ASSIGN SE70M='create-ext70.MASTER'

DBLOCATE DATABLK=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=70) LOGI=SE70M

$ DIRECT TEXT INPUT FOR EXECUTIVE CONTROL

Main Index
 368 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Result Output

$ LINEAR STATIC ANALYSIS, DATABASE

N A S T R A N E X E C U T I V E C O N T R O L E C H O

SOL 101

CEND

*** SYSTEM INFORMATION MESSAGE 482 (LCDRVR)

1 DATABLOCK(S) HAVE BEEN LOCATED ON THE SE10M DATABASE.

*** SYSTEM INFORMATION MESSAGE 482 (LCDRVR)

1 DATABLOCK(S) HAVE BEEN LOCATED ON THE SE20M DATABASE.

*** SYSTEM INFORMATION MESSAGE 482 (LCDRVR)

1 DATABLOCK(S) HAVE BEEN LOCATED ON THE SE30M DATABASE.

*** SYSTEM INFORMATION MESSAGE 482 (LCDRVR)

1 DATABLOCK(S) HAVE BEEN LOCATED ON THE SE40M DATABASE.

*** SYSTEM INFORMATION MESSAGE 482 (LCDRVR)

1 DATABLOCK(S) HAVE BEEN LOCATED ON THE SE50M DATABASE.

*** SYSTEM INFORMATION MESSAGE 482 (LCDRVR)

1 DATABLOCK(S) HAVE BEEN LOCATED ON THE SE60M DATABASE.

*** SYSTEM INFORMATION MESSAGE 482 (LCDRVR)

1 DATABLOCK(S) HAVE BEEN LOCATED ON THE SE70M DATABASE.

Listing 8-19 Diagnostic Output Associated with Attaching MATRIXDB External Superelements

[Phase 1 Diagnostic Output Associated with Attaching DMIGOP2 External Superelements]

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 7325 (SEP2DR)

PROCESSING OF SUPERELEMENT 10 IS NOW INITIATED.

^^^ USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 9045 (PHASE1DR)

^^^ PHASE 1 - SUPERELEMENT GENERATION, ASSEMBLY AND REDUCTION.

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4105 (INPTX2)

DATA BLOCK DUMMY RETRIEVED FROM FORTRAN UNIT 31 (GENERATED IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT) IN NATIVE BINARY FORMAT

NAME OF DATA BLOCK WHEN PLACED ON FORTRAN UNIT WAS XSOP2DIR.

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4105 (INPTX2)

DATA BLOCK EXTDB RETRIEVED FROM FORTRAN UNIT 31 (GENERATED IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT) IN NATIVE BINARY FORMAT

NAME OF DATA BLOCK WHEN PLACED ON FORTRAN UNIT WAS GEOM1X .

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4105 (INPTX2)

DATA BLOCK EXTDB RETRIEVED FROM FORTRAN UNIT 31 (GENERATED IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT) IN NATIVE BINARY FORMAT

NAME OF DATA BLOCK WHEN PLACED ON FORTRAN UNIT WAS GEOM2X .

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4105 (INPTX2)

DATA BLOCK EXTDB RETRIEVED FROM FORTRAN UNIT 31 (GENERATED IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT) IN NATIVE BINARY FORMAT

NAME OF DATA BLOCK WHEN PLACED ON FORTRAN UNIT WAS GEOM4X .

Main Index
 CHAPTER 8 369
Output Description and Control in Static Superelement Analysis

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4105 (INPTX2)

DATA BLOCK EXTDB RETRIEVED FROM FORTRAN UNIT 31 (GENERATED IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT) IN NATIVE BINARY FORMAT

NAME OF DATA BLOCK WHEN PLACED ON FORTRAN UNIT WAS MATK .

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4105 (INPTX2)

DATA BLOCK EXTDB RETRIEVED FROM FORTRAN UNIT 31 (GENERATED IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT) IN NATIVE BINARY FORMAT

NAME OF DATA BLOCK WHEN PLACED ON FORTRAN UNIT WAS MATM .

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4105 (INPTX2)

DATA BLOCK EXTDB RETRIEVED FROM FORTRAN UNIT 31 (GENERATED IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT) IN NATIVE BINARY FORMAT

NAME OF DATA BLOCK WHEN PLACED ON FORTRAN UNIT WAS MATP .

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4105 (INPTX2)

DATA BLOCK EXTDB RETRIEVED FROM FORTRAN UNIT 31 (GENERATED IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT) IN NATIVE BINARY FORMAT

NAME OF DATA BLOCK WHEN PLACED ON FORTRAN UNIT WAS MATV .

Listing 8-20 Diagnostic Output Associated with Attaching DMIGOP2 External Superelements

[Phase 0 Diagnostic Output Associated with Attaching DMIGPCH External Superelements]

SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE (SORTED BY SEID)

PRIMARY PROCESS DOWNSTREAM

SUPERELEMENT SUPERELEMENT ORDER SUPERELEMENT TYPE LABEL

------------ ------------ ------- ------------ ----------------------------- -----------------------

0 0 8 0 RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

10 0 1 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

20 0 2 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

30 0 3 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

40 0 4 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

50 0 5 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

60 0 6 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

70 0 7 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE (SORTED BY PROCESS ORDER)

PRIMARY PROCESS DOWNSTREAM

SUPERELEMENT SUPERELEMENT ORDER SUPERELEMENT TYPE LABEL

------------ ------------ ------- ------------ ----------------------------- -----------------------

10 0 1 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

20 0 2 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

30 0 3 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

40 0 4 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

50 0 5 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

60 0 6 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

70 0 7 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

0 0 8 0 RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

Main Index
 370 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Result Output

[Phase 1 Diagnostic Output Associated with Attaching DMIGPCH External Superelements]

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 7325 (SEP2DR)

PROCESSING OF SUPERELEMENT 10 IS NOW INITIATED.

^^^ USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 9045 (PHASE1DR)

^^^ PHASE 1 - SUPERELEMENT GENERATION, ASSEMBLY AND REDUCTION.

MSC Nastran JOB CREATED ON 02-APR-11 AT 19:25:07 APRIL 6, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM SUPERELEMENT 10

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 7310 (VECPRN)

ORIGIN OF SUPERELEMENT BASIC COORDINATE SYSTEM WILL BE USED AS REFERENCE LOCATION.

RESULTANTS ABOUT ORIGIN OF SUPERELEMENT BASIC COORDINATE SYSTEM IN SUPERELEMENT BASIC SYSTEM COORDINATES.

OLOAD RESULTANT

SUBCASE/ LOAD

DAREA ID TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

1 FX 0.000000E+00 ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00

FY ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- 0.000000E+00

FZ ---- ---- 2.000000E+00 1.200000E+01 7.500952E+00 ----

MX ---- ---- ---- 8.000000E+00 ---- ----

MY ---- ---- ---- ---- 2.899048E+00 ----

MZ ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00

TOTALS 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 2.000000E+00 2.000000E+01 1.040000E+01 0.000000E+00

2 FX 0.000000E+00 ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00

FY ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- 0.000000E+00

FZ ---- ---- 2.000000E+00 1.200000E+01 7.500952E+00 ----

MX ---- ---- ---- 8.000000E+00 ---- ----

MY ---- ---- ---- ---- 2.899048E+00 ----

MZ ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00

TOTALS 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 2.000000E+00 2.000000E+01 1.040000E+01 0.000000E+00

3 FX 0.000000E+00 ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00

FY ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- 0.000000E+00 ---- 0.000000E+00

FZ ---- ---- -1.600000E+01 -9.600000E+01 -5.120000E+01 ----

MX ---- ---- ---- -3.200000E+01 ---- ----

MY ---- ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00 ----

MZ ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- 0.000000E+00

TOTALS 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -1.600000E+01 -1.280000E+02 -5.120000E+01 0.000000E+00

MSC Nastran JOB CREATED ON 02-APR-11 AT 19:25:07 APRIL 6, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM SUPERELEMENT 20

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 7325 (SEP2DR)

PROCESSING OF SUPERELEMENT 20 IS NOW INITIATED.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 8 371
Output Description and Control in Static Superelement Analysis

Listing 8-21 Diagnostic Output Associated with Attaching DMIPCH External Superelements

IN PHASE LOADS SUPERELEMENT 10

SUBCASE 1

D I S P L A C E M E N T V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

33 G 0.0 0.0 3.683764E-04 9.794447E-05 1.543324E-05 0.0

34 G 0.0 0.0 3.560836E-04 9.801662E-05 1.548379E-05 0.0

35 G 0.0 0.0 3.440241E-04 9.593536E-05 1.486124E-05 0.0

36 G 0.0 0.0 3.321574E-04 9.586434E-05 1.520494E-05 0.0

37 G 0.0 0.0 3.192997E-04 9.717572E-05 1.586828E-05 0.0

38 G 0.0 0.0 3.064635E-04 9.710126E-05 1.598422E-05 0.0

93 G 0.0 0.0 7.633899E-04 9.912116E-05 1.682907E-05 0.0

94 G 0.0 0.0 7.496271E-04 9.880464E-05 1.671144E-05 0.0

95 G 0.0 0.0 7.361663E-04 9.843080E-05 1.651792E-05 0.0

96 G 0.0 0.0 7.228653E-04 9.817738E-05 1.640465E-05 0.0

97 G 0.0 0.0 7.096976E-04 9.801870E-05 1.633151E-05 0.0

98 G 0.0 0.0 6.966225E-04 9.796763E-05 1.631299E-05 0.0

OPPOSING LOADS SUPERELEMENT 10

SUBCASE 1

S T R E S S E S I N Q U A D R I L A T E R A L E L E M E N T S ( Q U A D 4 )

ELEMENT STRESSES IN ELEMENT COORD SYSTEM PRINCIPAL STRESSES (ZERO SHEAR)

ID. NORMAL-X NORMAL-Y SHEAR-XY ANGLE MAJOR MINOR VON MISES

18 1.147401E+00 5.651970E-01 -1.174603E+00 -38.0404 2.066437E+00 -3.538384E-01 2.264188E+00

-1.147401E+00 -5.651970E-01 1.174603E+00 51.9596 3.538384E-01 -2.066437E+00 2.264188E+00

19 9.590242E+00 1.521231E+01 -1.091089E+01 -52.2236 2.366846E+01 1.134096E+00 2.312228E+01

-9.590242E+00 -1.521231E+01 1.091089E+01 37.7764 -1.134096E+00 -2.366846E+01 2.312228E+01

Listing 8-22 2-Step Method Superelements Data Recovery Output

The data recovery output for the 2-Step External Superelement process is the same format as for internal (List
or PART) superelements.

External Superelement 3-Step Method

Since the data recovery is the 3rd step of the 3-step method, there is no ‘superelement’ processing associated
with the data recovery run.

Main Index
 372 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Result Output

Controlling Results Output with SEDR

The user can limit the results output by using the SEDR case control entry in conjunction with a SET of
superelements. For example, if the user desired output for the residual and superelements 10 and 20 only, a
SET is defined as: SET 99=0,10,20. In the resulting .f06 file (and corresponding .op2 or .xdb files), the Phase
3 data recovery is only be performed superelements 0, 10 and 20. A sample input is shown in Listing 8-20.
SOL 101

CEND

SET 99 = 0,10,20

SEDR=99

SUBCASE 1

TITLE=DOUBLE FLYSWATTER MODEL

SUBTITLE=IN PHASE LOADS

SPC = 2

LOAD = 303

DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,BILIN)=ALL

Listing 8-23 Using SEDR to Limit the Data Recovery for Specific Superelements

1.

Main Index
 Chapter 9: Introduction to Dynamic Analysis Using Superelements
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User’s Guide
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User’s Guide

9 Introduction to Dynamic
Analysis Using
Superelements

Introduction

Description of Dynamic Reduction Process

Illustrative Example

Nastran Set Definitions – The USET Table

Main Index
 374 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Introduction

Introduction
Dynamic reduction is an optional numerical approach that can be used in MSC Nastran to reduce a dynamic
model to one with fewer degrees-of-freedom. Typically, the intent of dynamic reduction is to increase the
efficiency of a dynamic solution by working with smaller matrices while maintaining the dynamic
characteristics of the system.
As demonstrated in the preceding chapters, superelements in statics produce an exact solution (within
machine precision). The static reduction process replaces the physical representation of the superelement
model with reduced matrices that have the same properties. Therefore, in static analysis no approximation
is introduced by using superelements. That is, the full static response of the superelement can be represented
by the reduced matrices. In statics the fixed boundary solution, added on to the boundary solution. Recall
the total static solution developed in Static Condensation Process (Ch. 1). Equation (1-7) thru Equation (1-9) and
Figure 1-6 are repeated here:

total
· –1
 Uo  =  G ot    U t  +  K oo    P o  (Static Solutions) (9-1)

Figure 9-1 Pictorial Representation of Static Superelement Solution

fixed
In static analysis, the interior motion,  U o  , is represented by the fixed boundary solution generated
by the loads. But in classic modal analysis, the mass matrix is required and there are no loads to be considered.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 9 375
Introduction to Dynamic Analysis Using Superelements

The static reduction process produces approximate (and often poor) results in dynamics despite preserving
the mass properties of the reduced structure. The biggest deficiency in static reduction is that the dynamic
mass is not retained. Therefore, the static reduction must be augmented with terms to account for the
dynamic mass. This is done by representing the interior dynamic mass with modes at the fixed boundary
with a dynamic transformation matrix, G oq . Thus, the total solution for the superelement modal
displacements becomes:
total
 Uo  =  G ot    U t  +  G oq    U q  (9-2)

Where
 G ot  = Constraint Modes (same as in statics)

 U t  = Superelement Boundary Physical DOF Solution

 G oq  = Dynamic Transformation Matrix

 U q  = Superelement Modal DOF Solution

The Physical and Modal DOF Solution will be developed in Description of Dynamic Reduction Process.
Graphically, mode 1 of a cantilever beam can be represented as:

Figure 9-2 Pictorial Representation of Modal Superelement Solution

Main Index
 376 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Description of Dynamic Reduction Process

Description of Dynamic Reduction Process

The following information explains the internal operations used in MSC Nastran when reducing
superelement matrices for a dynamic solution. The user interface is shown in the next section.
Before developing the theory, recall from basic dynamic theory the following facts:
 Dynamic dof must have mass
 A state of vibration will be a linear combination of the dynamic modes shapes available
Also, combining the physical (t) and modal (q) dof in Equation (9-2),

 
 U ot  G ot  U 
 Uo  =   =  t  (9-3)
 U oq  G oq  Uq 
 

The total boundary transformation matrix,  G oa  is defined as:

 G oa  = G ot G oq (9-4)

Static Condensation
The default approach in superelement dynamic analysis is to use static condensation, commonly known as
Guyan[] reduction. In this case, the dynamic transformation matrix,  G oq  , is ignored and the superelement
motion of the free boundary solution is
 U o  =  G ot    U t  (9-5)

The stiffness, mass, damping, and loads applied to the superelement are transformed into the reduced
matrices using only the static transformation matrix  G ot  . Recall from Equation (1-6), that the constraint
modes are:
–1
 G ot  = –  K oo   K ot  (9-6)

And from Equation 1-11, the physical reduced stiffness matrix is

T
 K tt  =  K ot   G ot  +  K tt  (9-7)

Similar manipulations can be performed on the mass matrix, producing the physical reduced mass matrix
(refer to General Operations (Ch. 7) in the MSC Nastran Reference Guide)
T T
 M tt  =  G ot    M oo    G ot  +  M ot   +   M ot    G ot  +  M tt   (9-8)

Main Index
 CHAPTER 9 377
Introduction to Dynamic Analysis Using Superelements

Note that the  M tt  matrix preserves the rigid body mass properties of the superelement provided no mass

is removed during constraint processing. The structural damping  B tt  and viscous damping  K tt4 
matrices are reduced similarly. For more details on the damping reduction, refer to the MATREDU (Ch. ) in
the MSC Nastran DMAP Programmer’s Guide description.
Static condensation can provide adequate dynamic results in a few cases. For instance, a small avionics box
that is included in a aircraft dynamic landing analysis may have modal frequencies higher than the range of
interest and will respond ‘statically.’ In this case the physical stiffness and mass of the box are important, but
the dynamic mass (i.e. local frequencies) are irrelevant to the solution objective.
Another case when static condensation is sufficient for dynamic analysis is when the physical dof that are
retained are sufficient to represent the dynamic response of interest. For example, a simply supported beam
with 100 grids that is statically reduced to 50 grids (i.e. every other grid) will be sufficient for dynamic
analysis that only requires a few dozen modes.
Other than the examples described, it is usually required to add modal dof in order to capture system
dynamics adequately. This will be described in subsequent subsections.

Example of Constraint Modes

As described in Static Condensation Process (Ch. 1),  G ot  , represent the superelement physical influence
coefficients (or superelement physical shape functions) for the free boundary solution. That is, each column
of this matrix represents the motion of the interior points when one boundary dof is moved one unit while
the other boundary points are held constrained. Therefore, the transformation matrix has one column for
each exterior (boundary) dof (the Aset for the superelement), and the number of rows are equal to the
number of interior dof (the O-set for the superelement).
So, what does a constraint mode look like? This is best described by figures for a simple example. Consider
the structure shown here:

Main Index
 378 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Description of Dynamic Reduction Process

Figure 9-3 Geometry for Constraint Mode Example, Boundary Grids 501 and 502

For this case, the superelement boundary dof are specified at the independent grid (501 and 502) for the
RBE2 at each end of the model. Accordingly, the constraint modes are as follows:

Figure 9-4 Pictorial Representation of Constraint Modes for Boundary Grid 501

Main Index
 CHAPTER 9 379
Introduction to Dynamic Analysis Using Superelements

Figure 9-5 Pictorial Representation of Constraint Modes for Boundary Grid 502

This example is contained in /doc/seug/chapter9/Baseline/Component-Modes.bdf.

Recall that a dynamic shape is a linear combination of the shapes available. Thus, the static condensation
shapes would have difficulty representing the 1st bending mode of the structure, let alone a 2nd or 3rd order
mode.

Dynamic Reduction – Component Modes Synthesis

Dynamic reduction consists of calculating additional dynamic superelement influence coefficients (or
superelement dynamic shape functions),  G oq  , to improve the approximation used to reduce a
superelement for dynamic analysis.
Structural dynamicists are familiar with modal solutions where the physical space is transformed to the modal
space for efficient solutions. The MSC Nastran modal solutions include: Modal Complex Eigenvalues (SOL
110), Modal Frequency Response (SOL 111), Modal Transient Response (SOL 112), and Aerodynamic
Flutter (SOL 145). When a modal transformation is used and all modes of a structure are used, no
approximation occurs in this transformation. However, there is no computational advantage to retaining all
of the modes in a modal solution, because a direct solution would not carry the burden of modal calculation.
Thus, the dilemma is to select the cutoff frequency to use in the modal solution. Some guidelines on the
cutoff frequency can be found in the Mode Truncation in Modal Transient Response Analysis (Ch. 5) in the MSC
Nastran Dynamic Analysis User’s Guide.

Main Index
 380 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Description of Dynamic Reduction Process

Dynamic reduction of superelements is similar to the transformation of a structure into modal coordinates.
However, the transformation involves the use of both static and dynamic shapes. MSC Nastran offers
Component Modes Synthesis (CMS) for dynamic reduction. As with the modal solutions, the frequency cutoff
is an important consideration in dynamic reduction.
The flow chart introduced in Superelement Analysis (Ch. 1) is valid for both statics and dynamics.

Figure 9-6 Flowchart for Dynamic Superelement Processing

Chapter 1 discussed the static condensation required to form the  K aa  matrix. For statics, the  K aa 
matrix is the same as the  K tt  matrix as describe in Static Condensation Process (Ch. 1). In Component
Modes Synthesis, the process is modified by adding the dynamic mass and stiffness  K qq  a mass reduction
for  M aa  that includes both the static mass matrix  M tt  and the dynamic mass matrix from the
component modes  M qq  . The flowchart for the dynamic superelement reduction can be expanded to
include the component modes synthesis detail as follows:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 9 381
Introduction to Dynamic Analysis Using Superelements

Figure 9-7 Dynamic Superelement Reduction Flowchart

The synthesis step forms the total boundary matrices as follows:

K tt K tq
 K aa  = (9-9)
K qt K qq

M tt M tq
 M aa  = (9-10)
M qt M qq

The “q” subscript represents the MSC Nastran Q-Set, which is designated to store the computed component
modes. The “qt” and “tq” matrices represent the coupling matrices between the physical T-Set and modal
Q-Set.
Since the static condensation process provides an exact solution for statics, there is no coupling between the
constraint modes and the component modes, so Equation (9-9) becomes:

Main Index
 382 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Description of Dynamic Reduction Process

K tt 0
 K aa  = (9-11)
0 K qq

For simplicity, this manual will describe the equations necessary for the fixed boundary reduction described
in Fixed-Boundary Reduction (Craig-Bampton Method). For a more detailed discussion of all component modes
calculations, refer to Real Eigenvalue Analysis in SubDMAPs SEMR3 and MODERS (Ch. 7) in the MSC Nastran
Reference Guide.

Fixed-Boundary Reduction (Craig-Bampton Method)

The most popular form of Component Modes Synthesis is the Fixed Boundary Method. This method is also
known as the Craig-Bampton Method[] . In this technique, the dof that are used for the static condensation
are fixed during the normal mode calculations which are necessary to capture the dynamic mass in the
Component Modes Synthesis method. The physical dof in the F-Set are partitioned into the A-Set and O-
Set. In static reduction we defined the T-Set as the physical boundary dof for the superelement. In dynamic
fixed boundary reduction, the superelement physical boundary dof are fixed during component modes
calculations. The dof fixed during component modes synthesis are designated the B-Set. So, for fixed-
boundary CMS, the T-Set is equivalent to the B-Set. Also, the omitted dof are designated as the V-set, or
“free to vibrate” set. So, in fixed-boundary CMS, the O-Set is equivalent to the V-Set.
Starting from the F-Set:
 K ff   U f  =  P f  (9-12)

Recall from Equation (1-3) in the static reduction solution, the F-Set is partitioned to the retained and omitted
sets.

   
 K oo   K ot    U     Po  
o
T   =   (9-13)
 K ot   K tt    U t    Pt  
   
For Fixed-Boundary, the T-Set is equivalent to the B-Set. Also, substitute the symbol for static displacement
 U  with static mode shape    . Note that since we are solving the constraint modes for a unit boundary
b b
displacement,  b = Ib . Also, the applied loads on the O-Set are zero for normal modes.

   
 b   b 
 K oo   K ob   o    Po  =  0  
T   =   (9-14)
 K ob   K bb   b b   b 
 b = Ib    Pb  
   
Extracting the first line of the equation:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 9 383
Introduction to Dynamic Analysis Using Superelements

b b
 K oo    o  +  K ob   I b  = 0 (9-15)

Solving for the internal constraint modes:

b –1 b
 o  = –  K oo    K ob   I b  (9-16)

Thus, the full static constraint mode matrix is assembled as:

 
 b 
b   o  
 b  =   (9-17)
 b 
  Ib  
 
For the component modes, the F-Set is partitioned similarly. The free-to-vibrate set, designated as the V-Set
, is equivalent to the O-Set. Both the mass and stiffness are required for normal modes:

K oo K ot K vv K vb
 K ff  = = (9-18)
K to K tt K bv K bb

M oo M ot M vv M vb
 M ff  = = (9-19)
M to M tt M bv M bb

The normal modes calculated for component modes synthesis are based on the V-Set, or free-to-vibrate set,
using the familiar Eigenvalue equation:
  K vv  –   M vv     v  =  0  (9-20)

Each column in   v  contains a mode shape vector for the physical dof in the V-set. Since for fixed
boundary component modes, the O-Set is equivalent to the V-Set,
 G oq  =   v  (9-21)

The generalized mass and stiffness for the Q-set modal dof are calculated as:
T (9-22)
 K qq  =  G oq   K oo   G oq 
T
 M qq  =  G oq   M oo   G oq  (9-23)

Main Index
 384 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Description of Dynamic Reduction Process

For mode shapes which are mass-normalized (the “NORM” field on the EIGRL entry), these matrices take
on special properties. The generalized stiffness is a diagonal matrix with the Eigenvalue,  i , for each mode
on the diagonal.

(9-24)
The generalized mass becomes the identity matrix:
 M qq  =  I  (9-25)

The dynamic mass is accounted for by the coupling of the modal dof to the physical dof. Because of
symmetry, only the  M qt  matrix needs to be computed:

T
 M qt  =  G oq   M ot  +  M oo   G oa  (9-26)

Finally, the A-Set matrices are formed by assembling the physical and component modes:

K bb K bq
 K aa  = (9-27)
K qb K qq

M bb M bq
 M aa  = (9-28)
M qb M qq

And for mass normalized modes, the fixed-boundary component modes synthesis A-Set matrices become:

(9-29)

M tt M tq
 M aa  = (9-30)
M qt  I 

Manual Example
For this example, we will revisit the model used in Manual Solution of a Small Superelement Example (Ch. 1).
However, the fixed-fixed boundary condition will be replaced with a cantilever boundary condition as
follows:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 9 385
Introduction to Dynamic Analysis Using Superelements

Figure 9-8 Model for Manual Example of Component Modes Synthesis

In this example,
 K of each spring is 1.0
 M of each mass is 1.0 on each grid
 Grid 1 is defined as external to superelement 2 and internal to the residual.
 Grid 3 is external to both superelement 1 and 2, and internal to the residual.
The conventional analysis model is: /doc/seug/chapter9/Baseline/simple-modes-conventional1.bdf and the
superelement solution is: /doc/seug/chapter9/CMS-Fixed-Boundary/simple-fixed-boundary1.bdf.
The input file for the conventional analysis is as follows:
SOL 103

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = Simple Modes - Conventional Analysis

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = Baseline Model

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = NO

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Normal Modes

METHOD = 1

SPC = 2

VECTOR(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

EIGRL 1 10 0 MASS

$ Elements and Element Properties for region : spring

PELAS 1 1.

$ Pset: "spring" will be imported as: "pelas.1"

CELAS1 1 1 1 1 2 1

Main Index
 386 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Description of Dynamic Reduction Process

CELAS1 2 1 2 1 3 1

CELAS1 3 1 3 1 4 1

CELAS1 4 1 4 1 5 1

$ Elements and Element Properties for region : Unit_Mass

CONM2 5 1 1.

CONM2 6 2 1.

CONM2 7 3 1.

CONM2 8 4 1.

CONM2 9 5 1.

$ Nodes of the Entire Model

GRID 1 0. 0. 0.

GRID 2 1. 0. 0.

GRID 3 2. 0. 0.

GRID 4 3. 0. 0.

GRID 5 4. 0. 0.

$ Loads for Load Case : Dynamic

SPCADD 2 1 3

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : RyRzMxMyMz

SPC1 1 23456 1 2 3 4 5

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : Cantilever-Fixed

SPC1 3 1 1

Listing 9-1 Input for Simple Dynamic Example (Non Superelement)

The MSC Nastran Solution for this example is as follows:

R E A L E I G E N V A L U E S

MODE EXTRACTION EIGENVALUE RADIANS CYCLES GENERALIZED GENERALIZED

NO. ORDER MASS STIFFNESS

1 1 1.206148E-01 3.472964E-01 5.527393E-02 1.000000E+00 1.206148E-01

2 2 1.000000E+00 1.000000E+00 1.591549E-01 1.000000E+00 1.000000E+00

3 3 2.347296E+00 1.532089E+00 2.438395E-01 1.000000E+00 2.347296E+00

4 4 3.532089E+00 1.879385E+00 2.991135E-01 1.000000E+00 3.532089E+00

SIMPLE MODES - CONVENTIONAL ANALYSIS MAY 1, 2011 MSC Nastran

NORMAL MODES

BASELINE MODEL

EIGENVALUE = 1.206148E-01

CYCLES = 5.527393E-02 R E A L E I G E N V E C T O R N O . 1

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

1 G 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

2 G 2.280134E-01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

3 G 4.285251E-01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

4 G 5.773503E-01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

5 G 6.565385E-01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

Main Index
 CHAPTER 9 387
Introduction to Dynamic Analysis Using Superelements

EIGENVALUE = 1.000000E+00

CYCLES = 1.591549E-01 R E A L E I G E N V E C T O R N O . 2

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

1 G 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

2 G 5.773503E-01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

3 G 5.773503E-01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

4 G 2.065163E-16 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

5 G -5.773503E-01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

EIGENVALUE = 2.347296E+00

CYCLES = 2.438395E-01 R E A L E I G E N V E C T O R N O . 3

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

1 G 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

2 G -6.565385E-01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

3 G 2.280134E-01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

4 G 5.773503E-01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

5 G -4.285251E-01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

EIGENVALUE = 3.532089E+00

CYCLES = 2.991135E-01 R E A L E I G E N V E C T O R N O . 4

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

1 G 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

2 G 4.285251E-01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

3 G -6.565385E-01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

4 G 5.773503E-01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

5 G -2.280134E-01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

Listing 9-2 Solution for Simple Dynamic Example (Non Superelement)

The manual solution for the fixed-boundary component modes synthesis is as follows. The MSC Nastran
solution can be found in file /doc/seug/chapter9/CMS-Fixed-Boundary/simple-fixed-boundary1.bdf and
the output will be presented to compare to the manual solution.
The component modes are stored in SPOINT dof which are part of the QSET dof for the superelement.
The superelement QSET dof are specified with either SEQSET or SEQSET1 entries described here.

SPOINT Scalar Point Definition

Defines Scalar Points

Main Index
 388 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Description of Dynamic Reduction Process

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SPOINT ID1 ID2 ID3 …

Example:
SPOINT 125 126 127 501

Alternate Format and Example:

SPOINT ID1 “THRU: ID2
SEELT 5001 THRU 5025

Field Contents
IDi Scalar point identification numbers. (Integer > 0 or “THRU”; for “THRU”
option ID1 < ID2)

SEQSET1 Superelement Generalized Degree-of-Freedom, Alternate Form

Defines the generalized degrees-of-freedom of the superelement to be used in generalized dynamic reduction
or component mode synthesis.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SEQSET1 SEID C G1 G2 G3 G4 GS G6
G7 G8 -etc.-

Example:
SEQSET1 15 123456 1 7 9 22 105 6
52 53

Alternate Format and Example:

SEQSET1 SEID C G1 “THRU” G2
SEQSET1 16 0 101 THRU 110

Main Index
 CHAPTER 9 389
Introduction to Dynamic Analysis Using Superelements

Field Contents
SEID Superelement identification number. Must be a primary superelement. (Integer > 0)
C Component numbers. (Any unique combination of the Integers 1 through 6 with no
embedded blanks for grid points; Integer 0 or blank for scalar points.)
Gi Grid or scalar point identification numbers. Must be exterior points. (Integer > 0 or
“THRU”; for THRU option G1 < G2.)

In this example, the baseline solution is modified by adding the appropriate superelement entries shown here:
spoint,11,12
seqset1,1,0,11,12
spoint,21
seqset1,2,0,21
seset,1,4,5
seset,2,2

Figure 9-9 SESET, SPOINT, and SEQSET1 Entries for Fixed-Boundary Reduction Example

SUPERELEMENT 1 REDUCTION
For superelement 1, grid 3 is the exterior grid:

+ SPOINT 11, 12

Figure 9-10 Superelement 1 for Fixed-Boundary Manual Solution

The constraint modes are solved in the same manner as in Section 1.5.2.1.
Notes:
 The G-Set and J-Set for superelement 1 are equivalent since there are no upstream superelements.
 The G-Set and A-Set include SPOINTs 11 and 12 which are used to store the component mode
mass and stiffness after they are calculated. (SPOINTs 11 and 12 are part of the Q-Set)
The physical dof are reduced independently of the dynamic dof, so the physical reduction presented here
does not include the Q-Set dof:

Main Index
 390 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Description of Dynamic Reduction Process

K 34 – K 34 0
1 –1 0
1
 K gg  = – K 34 K 34 + K 45 – K 45 = – 1 +2 – 1 (9-31)
0 – K 45 K 45 0 –1 1

1 K 34 + K 45 – K 45
 K oo  = = 2 –1 (9-32)
– K 45 K 45 –1 1

Similarly,
1 –1 1
 o  = –  K oo    K ob   I b  (9-33)

 
1 1 – 1  10   1   u4 
= –   =   =   (9-34)
12 0  01   1   u5 
 

   
 1   1   u4 
1   o      
 o  =   =  1  =  u5  (9-35)
 b     
  Ib    1   u3 
   
Rearranging:

 1  u3
1 1  
 G ot  =  b  =  1  u4 (9-36)
 
 1  u5

Recall that the constraint modes represent the internal shape when the boundary dof are each moved by a
unit displacement. In this case, the boundary is dof u 3 , so a unit displacement of the boundary results in
unit displacements of the other dof. So the numbers bear out the statement.
Solving the fixed-boundary component modes requires the mass matrix:

M3 0 000 0
1
 M jj  = 0 M4 0 = 0 1 0 (9-37)
0 0 M5 001

Main Index
 CHAPTER 9 391
Introduction to Dynamic Analysis Using Superelements

Note that M 3 is an element (i.e. CONM2), therefore, it is considered a boundary element and automatically
assigned to the downstream superelement – in this case, superelement 0. Partitioning the mass and stiffness
to the V-Set:

1 1 M4 0
 M vv  =  M oo  = = 10 (9-38)
0 M5 01

And

1 1 K 34 + K 45 – K 45
 K vv  =  K oo  = = 2 –1 (9-39)
– K 45 K 45 –1 1

The Eigenvalue equation is:

  K vv  –   M vv     v  =  0  (9-40)

 
2 –1 –  1 0  4   0 
  =   (9-41)
–1 1 0 1  5   0 
 
Solving the determinate:

det 2 –  – 1 (9-42)
–1 1 – 
Produces the quadratic equation:
2
 2 –    1 –   –  – 1   – 1  =  – 3 + 1 = 0 (9-43)
With the following roots:

 
 1   
  =  0.3819  (9-44)
 2   2.618 
 q11
The mass normalized mode coefficients are stored in the Q-Set dof (SPOINT 11 and 12):

Main Index
 392 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Description of Dynamic Reduction Process

 
 1   
  =  – 0.8507 
 2   0.5257 
 q12

u 11 u 12

 G oq  =   v  =  0.5257 – 0.8507  u 11
 (9-45)
 0.8507 0.5257  u
12

Forming the modal mass and stiffness matrices:

u 11 u 12

 K qq  =  G oq   K oo   G oq  =  0.3819 0 u 11
T
 (9-46)
0 2.618  u 12

 M qq  =  G oq   M oo   G oq  = 1 0
T
(9-47)
01

u3

 M qt  =  G oq   M ot  +  M oo   G oa  = 1.3764 u 11
T
(9-48)
0.3249 u 12

And the assembled matrices:

u 3 u 11 u 12
 
0 0 0  u 3 
 K aa  = (9-49)
0 0.3819 0  u 11 
 
0 0 2.618  u 
12
 

2.0 1.3764 – 0.3249

 M aa  1.3764 1.0 0 (9-50)
– 0.3249 0 1.0

Main Index
 CHAPTER 9 393
Introduction to Dynamic Analysis Using Superelements

There are some interesting facts that are observable in the reduced matrices. First, notice that the physically
reduced stiffness (the 1-1 term) is 0.0 for this superelement. This superelement is a special case, where the
interface between the superelement and the rest of the structure is determinate. In this case the reduced
stiffness is 0. This can be explained by examining the static transformation vector. If point 3 moves 1.0 units,
then points 4 and 5 also move 1.0 units. The static transformation is a rigid-body vector. The reaction at the
interface when the structure moves in this shape is 0.0, indicating that the reduced stiffness is null. Statically,
there is no reaction force when the interface moves, but this does not mean that the superelement is not
connected to the rest of the structure.
Also notice that there are no coupling terms between the modal and physical DOFs in the stiffness matrix,
showing that if the superelement moves (or is loaded) statically, the modes are not excited. The coupling
between modal and physical DOFs occurs in the mass matrix (which is not used in statics), showing that if
the interface is moved in a dynamic analysis, the modes respond dynamically. The physical mass matrix of
the omitted dof is preserved (2.0).
The MSC Nastran solution for superelement 1 (/doc/seug/chapter9/CMS-Fixed-Boundary/simple-fixed-
boundary1.bdf ) is:
SIMPLE MODES - SUPERELEMENT ANALYSIS MAY 8, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM SUPERELEMENT 1

SUPERELEMENT MODEL 1, FIXED BOUNDARY CMS SUBCASE 1

R E A L E I G E N V A L U E S

MODE EXTRACTION EIGENVALUE RADIANS CYCLES GENERALIZED GENERALIZED

NO. ORDER MASS STIFFNESS

1 1 3.819660E-01 6.180340E-01 9.836316E-02 1.000000E+00 3.819660E-01

2 2 2.618034E+00 1.618034E+00 2.575181E-01 1.000000E+00 2.618034E+00

Listing 9-3 MSC Nastran Modal Solution for Fixed-Boundary Modes of Superelement 1

SUPERELEMENT 2 REDUCTION
Superelement 2 is processed next:

+ SPOINT 21

Figure 9-11 Superelement 2 for Fixed-Boundary Manual Solution

The formulation for superelement 2 follows similarly. Again, note that the mass terms are assigned to the
downstream superelement. Also, note that the constraints are applied on the downstream superelement.

Main Index
 394 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Description of Dynamic Reduction Process

2 1 –1 0 2 000
 K gg  = – 1 2 – 1   M gg  = 0 1 0 (9-51)
0 –1 1 000
The static constraint modes are:
u1 u3
 1 0  u1
2 2
 G ot  =  b  =  0.5 
0.5  u2 (9-52)
 
 0 1  u3

Investigating this matrix, the u 1 column represents the constraint mode when u 1 is moved a unit

displacement, and u 3 is held fixed. It follows that u 2 is 0.5. Similarly, the u 3 column represents the

motion when u 3 is moved a unit displacement and u 1 is held fixed.

For the constraint modes, the V-Set is partitioned producing:

2 2
 M vv  =  1   K vv  = 2 (9-53)

  K vv  –   M vv     v  =   2  –   1     v  =  0  (9-54)

Which yields as solution of  = 2.0  G oq  =   v  =  1  for a mass-normalized eigenvector.

Synthesizing the A-Set matrices from the physical and modal components:
u 1 u 3 u 21

 1 0 0  u1
 G oa  =   (9-55)
 0.5 0.5 1  u2
 
 0 1 0  u3

0.5 – 0.5 0 u 1
2
 K aa  = – 0.5 0.5 0 u 3 (9-56)
0 0 2 u
21

Main Index
 CHAPTER 9 395
Introduction to Dynamic Analysis Using Superelements

0.25 0.25 0.50 u 1

2
 M aa  = 0.25 0.25 0.50 u 3 (9-57)
0.50 0.50 1.0 u
21

The MSC Nastran solution for superelement 2 (/doc/seug/chapter9/CMS-Fixed-Boundary/simple-fixed-

boundary1.bdf ) is:
SIMPLE MODES - SUPERELEMENT ANALYSIS MAY 8, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10 P

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM SUPERELEMENT 2

SUPERELEMENT MODEL 1, FIXED BOUNDARY CMS SUBCASE 1

R E A L E I G E N V A L U E S

MODE EXTRACTION EIGENVALUE RADIANS CYCLES GENERALIZED GENERALIZED

NO. ORDER MASS STIFFNESS

1 1 2.000000E+00 1.414214E+00 2.250791E-01 1.000000E+00 2.000000E+00

Listing 9-4 MSC Nastran Modal Solution for Fixed-Boundary Modes of Superelement 2

RESIDUAL STRUCTURE ASSEMBLY AND SOLUTION

The residual structure includes grids 1, 3, and SPOINTs 11, 12, and 21.

+ SPOINT 11, 12, 21

Figure 9-12 Residual Structure for Fixed-Boundary Manual Solution

From Equation (1-13), the assembled stiffness matrix is:

 K gg  =  K jj  +   K aa  (9-58)

The J-Set residual structure stiffness and mass matrices include only the mass and stiffness of elements that
are interior to the residual structure. Thus,

Main Index
 396 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Description of Dynamic Reduction Process

u1
0 0 0 0 0 100 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 010 0 0 u3
 K jj  = 0 0 0 0 0   M jj  = 000 0 0 u 11
0 0 0 0 0 000 0 0 u
12
0 0 0 0 0 000 0 0 u
21

Note that the residual structure contains the physical DOFs associated with points 1 and 3 and the
generalized DOFs representing the upstream superelement modes on SPOINTs 11, 12, and 21.
The upstream A-Set matrices are added to the appropriate ij terms to form the G-Set matrices for the residual
structure:

u1
0.5 – 0.5 0 0 0
0 – 0.5 0.5 0 0 0 u3
 K gg  = 0 0 0.3819 0 0 u 11 (9-59)
0 0 0 2.618 0 u
12
0 0 0 0 2.0 u
21

u1
1.25 0.25 0 0 0.5
0 0.25 3.25 1.3764 – 0.3249 0.5 u 3
 M gg  = 0 1.3764 1.0 0 0 u 11 (9-60)
0 – 0.3249 0 1.0 0 u
12
0.50 0.50 0 0 1.0 u
21

Applying the constraints (i.e. removing the rows and columns of u 1 ), the F-Set matrices become:

u3
0.5 0 0 0
0
 K ff  = 0 0.3819 0 0 u 11 (9-61)
0 0 0.2618 0 u 12
0 0 0 2.0 u
21

Main Index
 CHAPTER 9 397
Introduction to Dynamic Analysis Using Superelements

u3
3.25 1.3764 – 0.3249 0.5
0
 M ff  = 1.3764 1.0 0 0 u 11 (9-62)
– 0.3249 0 1.0 0 u 12
0.5 0 0 1.0 u
21

The Eigenvalue problem:

  K ff  –   M ff     f  =  0  (9-63)

Produces

 
 0.1206 
 
  i  =  1.00  (9-64)
 2.3473 
 3.5321 
 
The MSC Nastran solution for superelement 1 (/doc/seug/chapter9/CMS-Fixed-Boundary/simple-fixed-
boundary1.bdf ) is:
SIMPLE MODES - SUPERELEMENT ANALYSIS MAY 8, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10 P

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM SUPERELEMENT 0

SUPERELEMENT MODEL 1, FIXED BOUNDARY CMS SUBCASE 1

R E A L E I G E N V A L U E S

MODE EXTRACTION EIGENVALUE RADIANS CYCLES GENERALIZED GENERALIZED

NO. ORDER MASS STIFFNESS

1 1 1.206148E-01 3.472964E-01 5.527393E-02 1.000000E+00 1.206148E-01

2 2 1.000000E+00 1.000000E+00 1.591549E-01 1.000000E+00 1.000000E+00

3 3 2.347296E+00 1.532089E+00 2.438395E-01 1.000000E+00 2.347296E+00

4 4 3.532089E+00 1.879385E+00 2.991135E-01 1.000000E+00 3.532089E+00

Listing 9-5 MSC Nastran Modal Solution for Fixed-Boundary Modes of Residual

In this example, the solution provides an exact solution because there is no modal truncation – i.e. all of the
modes are retained during the reduction process. For practical models, this will not be the case. For example,
a superelement with a million dof may be reduced to a boundary with a few dozen physical dof and a few
hundred modal dof which will produce an approximate residual solution because of the modal truncation.
The Solution Eigenvectors:

Main Index
 398 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Description of Dynamic Reduction Process

1 2 3 4

  u3
0  0.4285 – 0.5773 – 0.2280 – 0.6565 
  ff  =   u 11 (9-65)
0.2722 – 1.2858 0.3748 – 1.0132
  u 12
 – 0.0067 – 0.1159 0.6423 0.8243 
 0.1137 – 0.2887 0.7705 – 0.7568  u 21
 
DATA RECOVERY FOR RESIDUAL STRUCTURE
The data recovery for the residual structure involves simply partitioning the residual dof from the solution
and expanding back to the G-Set. For this model, residual mode 1 is:

u1
0.0
0 0.4285 u 3
  1  = 0.2722 u 11 (9-66)
– 0.0067 u
12
0.0137 u
21

The MSC Nastran solution /doc/seug/chapter9/CMS-Fixed-Boundary/simple-fixed-boundary1.bdf

From the MSC Nastran solution of /doc/seug/chapter9/CMS-Fixed-Boundary/simple-fixed-boundary1.bdf

SIMPLE MODES - SUPERELEMENT ANALYSIS MAY 8, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10 P

NORMAL MODES SUPERELEMENT 0

SUPERELEMENT MODEL 1, FIXED BOUNDARY CMS SUBCASE 1

EIGENVALUE = 1.206148E-01

CYCLES = 5.527393E-02 R E A L E I G E N V E C T O R N O . 1

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

1 G 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

3 G 4.285251E-01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

11 S 2.722018E-01 -6.724520E-03

21 S 1.375089E-02

EIGENVALUE = 1.000000E+00

CYCLES = 1.591549E-01 R E A L E I G E N V E C T O R N O . 2

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

1 G 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

3 G 5.773503E-01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

11 S -1.285778E+00 -1.159385E-01

21 S 2.886751E-01

Main Index
 CHAPTER 9 399
Introduction to Dynamic Analysis Using Superelements

EIGENVALUE = 2.347296E+00

CYCLES = 2.438395E-01 R E A L E I G E N V E C T O R N O . 3

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

1 G 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

3 G -2.280134E-01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

11 S 3.748278E-01 6.423264E-01

21 S 7.705452E-01

EIGENVALUE = 3.532089E+00

CYCLES = 2.991135E-01 R E A L E I G E N V E C T O R N O . 4

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

1 G 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

3 G 6.565385E-01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

11 S -1.013219E+00 8.243195E-01

21 S -7.567943E-01

Listing 9-6 MSC Nastran Eigenvectors for Fixed-Boundary Modes of Residual

DATA RECOVERY FOR SUPERELEMENT 2

The boundary solution of superelement 2 is extracted from the residual structure solution. In this case, the
boundary solution for mode 1 is:

 0  u1
2  
  a1  =  0.4285  u 3 (9-67)
 
 0.0137  u 21

To obtain the interior solution, the transformation matrix  G oa  is applied to the boundary solution.
Considering mode 1:

 1 0 0  0   0  u1
2     
 1  =  G oa    a1  =  0.5 0.5 1  0.4285  =  0.2280  u2 (9-68)
    
 1 1 0  0.0137   0.4285  u3

From the MSC Nastran solution of /doc/seug/chapter9/CMS-Fixed-Boundary/simple-fixed-boundary1.bdf

NORMAL MODES SUPERELEMENT 2

SUPERELEMENT MODEL 1, FIXED BOUNDARY CMS SUBCASE 1

EIGENVALUE = 1.206148E-01

CYCLES = 5.527393E-02 R E A L E I G E N V E C T O R N O . 1

Main Index
 400 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Description of Dynamic Reduction Process

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

1 G 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

2 G 2.280134E-01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

3 G 4.285251E-01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

21 S 1.375089E-02

SIMPLE MODES - SUPERELEMENT ANALYSIS MAY 8, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10

NORMAL MODES SUPERELEMENT 2

SUPERELEMENT MODEL 1, FIXED BOUNDARY CMS SUBCASE 1

EIGENVALUE = 1.000000E+00

CYCLES = 1.591549E-01 R E A L E I G E N V E C T O R N O . 2

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

1 G 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

2 G 5.773503E-01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

3 G 5.773503E-01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

21 S 2.886751E-01

SIMPLE MODES - SUPERELEMENT ANALYSIS MAY 8, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10

NORMAL MODES SUPERELEMENT 2

SUPERELEMENT MODEL 1, FIXED BOUNDARY CMS SUBCASE 1

EIGENVALUE = 2.347296E+00

CYCLES = 2.438395E-01 R E A L E I G E N V E C T O R N O . 3

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

1 G 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

2 G 6.565385E-01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

3 G -2.280134E-01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

21 S 7.705452E-01

SIMPLE MODES - SUPERELEMENT ANALYSIS MAY 8, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10

NORMAL MODES SUPERELEMENT 2

SUPERELEMENT MODEL 1, FIXED BOUNDARY CMS SUBCASE 1

EIGENVALUE = 3.532089E+00

CYCLES = 2.991135E-01 R E A L E I G E N V E C T O R N O . 4

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

1 G 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

2 G -4.285251E-01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

3 G 6.565385E-01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

21 S -7.567943E-01

Listing 9-7 MSC Nastran Eigenvectors for Fixed-Boundary Modes of Superelement 2

DATA RECOVERY FOR SUPERELEMENT 1

The same procedure is performed on superelement 1, producing the following solution for mode 1:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 9 401
Introduction to Dynamic Analysis Using Superelements

 0.4285  u 3
1  
 1  =  0.5773  u 4 (9-69)
 
 0.6564  u 5

From the MSC Nastran solution of /doc/seug/chapter9/CMS-Fixed-Boundary/simple-fixed-boundary1.bdf

SIMPLE MODES - SUPERELEMENT ANALYSIS MAY 8, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10

NORMAL MODES SUPERELEMENT 1

SUPERELEMENT MODEL 1, FIXED BOUNDARY CMS SUBCASE 1

EIGENVALUE = 1.206148E-01

CYCLES = 5.527393E-02 R E A L E I G E N V E C T O R N O . 1

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

3 G 4.285251E-01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

4 G 5.773503E-01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

5 G 6.565385E-01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

11 S 2.722018E-01 -6.724520E-03

SIMPLE MODES - SUPERELEMENT ANALYSIS MAY 8, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10

NORMAL MODES SUPERELEMENT 1

SUPERELEMENT MODEL 1, FIXED BOUNDARY CMS SUBCASE 1

EIGENVALUE = 1.000000E+00

CYCLES = 1.591549E-01 R E A L E I G E N V E C T O R N O . 2

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

3 G 5.773503E-01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

4 G 3.469447E-16 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

5 G -5.773503E-01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

11 S -1.285778E+00 -1.159385E-01

SIMPLE MODES - SUPERELEMENT ANALYSIS MAY 8, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10

NORMAL MODES SUPERELEMENT 1

SUPERELEMENT MODEL 1, FIXED BOUNDARY CMS SUBCASE 1

EIGENVALUE = 2.347296E+00

CYCLES = 2.438395E-01 R E A L E I G E N V E C T O R N O . 3

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

3 G -2.280134E-01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

4 G -5.773503E-01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

5 G 4.285251E-01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

11 S 3.748278E-01 6.423264E-01

SIMPLE MODES - SUPERELEMENT ANALYSIS MAY 8, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10

NORMAL MODES SUPERELEMENT 1

SUPERELEMENT MODEL 1, FIXED BOUNDARY CMS SUBCASE 1

EIGENVALUE = 3.532089E+00

CYCLES = 2.991135E-01 R E A L E I G E N V E C T O R N O . 4

Main Index
 402 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Description of Dynamic Reduction Process

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

3 G 6.565385E-01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

4 G -5.773503E-01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

5 G 2.280134E-01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

11 S -1.013219E+00 8.243195E-01

Listing 9-8 MSC Nastran Eigenvectors for Fixed-Boundary Modes of Superelement 1

Note: Note that the data recovery for superelements is based on the Eigenvector normalization used
for the residual structure regardless of the Eigenvalue normalization method requested for the
superelement.

Fixed Boundary Mode Shapes with PARAM FIXEDB

The MSC Nastran solution for /doc/seug/chapter9/CMS-Fixed-Boundary/simple-fixed-boundary1.bdf will
report the Eigenvectors of the system solution. In some cases, such as during model checkout, the user may
want to view the component modes that are calculated rather than the system modes. To do this, the user
can specify PARAM,FIXEDB,-1 to request an uncoupled solution. (see example /doc/seug/chapter9/CMS-
Fixed-Boundary/simple-fixed-boundary2.bdf ). The solution for the component modes of superelement
1can be compared to Equation (9-45).

SIMPLE MODES - SUPERELEMENT ANALYSIS MAY 8, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10

NORMAL MODES SUPERELEMENT 1

SUPERELEMENT MODEL 1, FIXED BOUNDARY CMS, PARAM,FIXEDB,-1 SUBCASE 1

EIGENVALUE = 3.819660E-01

CYCLES = 9.836316E-02 R E A L E I G E N V E C T O R N O . 1

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

3 G 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

4 G 5.257311E-01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

5 G 8.506508E-01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

11 S 0.0 0.0

SIMPLE MODES - SUPERELEMENT ANALYSIS MAY 8, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10

NORMAL MODES SUPERELEMENT 1

SUPERELEMENT MODEL 1, FIXED BOUNDARY CMS, PARAM,FIXEDB,-1 SUBCASE 1

EIGENVALUE = 2.618034E+00

CYCLES = 2.575181E-01 R E A L E I G E N V E C T O R N O . 2

POINT ID. TYPE T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3

3 G 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

4 G -8.506508E-01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

5 G 5.257311E-01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

11 S 0.0 0.0

Main Index
 CHAPTER 9 403
Introduction to Dynamic Analysis Using Superelements

Listing 9-9 Solution with PARAM,FIXEDB,-1

Free-Boundary Dynamic Reduction

The free-free dynamic reduction technique assumes that the physical boundary dof are free to vibrate during
the component modes synthesis solution. That is the V-Set includes both the interior dof and the exterior
dof of a superelement. In MSC Nastran, boundary dof are designated to be part of the V-Set by placing them
in the C-Set. If any constraints are applied on interior points, they are included when performing the
dynamic reduction.
The internal operations performed for free-free reduction are more complicated than those for fixed-
boundary reduction. When a fixed-boundary reduction is performed, the dynamic transformation vectors
are independent of the static transformation vectors, because the exterior points are held constrained while
the dynamic transformation vectors are found. When a free-free reduction is performed, one or more of the
dynamic transformation vectors may be (actually, probably will be) a linear combination of the static vectors.
If there are no internal constraints, the rigid-body modes of a free-free component can be used as an example.
These shapes are a linear combination of the static transformation vectors. More simply, the static
transformation vectors are capable of describing any possible rigid-body motion of the component.
If any dynamic transformation vector that is a linear combination of the static vectors (or of any of the
transformation vectors, for that matter) is used, the reduced matrices will be singular, and the problem will
fail. Three methods of preventing this problem are provided in MSC Nastran:
 Do not calculate the rigid-body modes. Simply, do not request the rigid body Eigenvectors during
the calculation of the dynamic transformations. This can be accomplished by specifying a value
greater than 0.0 for the lowest frequency of interest on the EIGRL entry.
 Calculate the rigid-body modes, let MSC Nastran will remove them. Logic is included in the
program that attempts to remove any dynamic transformation vectors that are a linear combination
of the static transformations. This logic is shown later in this section.
 Calculate the rigid-body modes, but remove them manually using a SESUP or SUPORT (PARTs)
entry (described in the next section). Any exterior DOFs defined on a SESUP entry are not
constrained during the calculation of the dynamic transformation vectors. For each DOF listed on
an SESUP, MSC Nastran throws away one dynamic transformation vector, starting with the first
one (lowest frequency). MSC does not recommend this approach, because the program does not
check to verify that the thrown away vectors are actually a linear combination of the static
transformation vectors. Therefore, elastic modes may be removed unintentionally.
Of the three approaches, setting the frequency cutoff greater than 0.0 is the recommended approach for free-
free CMS calculations.
As mentioned above, the processing of models with free boundaries (C-Set) is much more involved than the
fixed-boundary (Craig-Bampton) method. For details on this method, the read can refer to the Dynamic
Reduction and Component Mode Synthesis in SubDMAP SEMR3 (Ch. 7) in the MSC Nastran Reference Guide.

Main Index
 404 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Description of Dynamic Reduction Process

Manual Example
The example model for the free-free (CSET) Component Modes Synthesis (CMS) example is similar to the
fixed-boundary (BSET) CMS model, except that mass density has been added to the elements. The problem
descriptions is as follows:

Figure 9-13 Sample Model for Free-Free Component Modes Synthesis

 K 12 = K 23 = K 34 = K 45 = 1.0

 M 1 = M 2 = M 3 = M 4 = M 5 = 1.0

  12 =  12 =  12 =  12 = 2.0
The conventional analysis model is: /doc/seug/chapter9/Baseline/simple-modes-conventional2.bdf. As in the
fixed-boundary solution, grids 1 and 3 are assigned to the residual structure. To make the boundary points
free-free, they must be placed in the C-Set by using the SECSET or SECSET1 entry which follow a familiar
format:

SECSET / SECSET1 Free Boundary Degree-of-Freedom

Defines boundary degrees-of-freedom to be free (c-set) during generalized dynamic reduction or component
mode synthesis calculations.
Formats:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SECSET SEID G1 C1 G2 C2 G3 C3
SECSET1 SEID C G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6
G7 G8 G9 -etc.-

Examples:
SECSET 3 124 1 5 23 6 15
SECSET1 5 2 135 14 6 23 24 25
122 127

Main Index
 CHAPTER 9 405
Introduction to Dynamic Analysis Using Superelements

Field Contents
SEID Superelement identification number. (Integer > 0)
C, Ci Component numbers of degree-of-freedoms. (Any unique combination of the Integers
1 through 6 with no embedded blanks for grid points; Integer 0 or blank for scalar
points.)
Gi Grid or scalar point identification number. (Integer > 0)

In this example, SECSET1 is used as follows:

SECSET1,1,123456,3
SECSET1,2,123456,1,3
SUPERELMENT 1 REDUCTION
The first step is to reduce superelement 1. The G-Set mass and stiffness matrices are:

1 1 –1 0 1 100
 K gg  = – 1 2 – 1   M gg  = 0 3 0 (9-70)
0 –1 1 002

Note that the m 3 mass is not contained in superelement 1 because the mass is on a boundary element and,
therefore, assigned to the residual structure.
The static constraint modes are calculated exactly as they are for the fixed-boundary solution in the previous
section, i.e.

 1  u3
1  
 b  =  1  u4 (9-71)
 
 1  u5

Partitioning the O-Set:

  u
 G oc  =  1  4 (9-72)
 1  u5

For free-free CMS, the V-Set is the O-Set + C-Set. For this example, the V-Set is the same as the G-Set,
therefore the Eigenvalue equation becomes:
  K   –   M        =  0  (9-73)

Main Index
 406 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Description of Dynamic Reduction Process

 
1 –1 0 1 0 0   3   0 
–1 2 –1 –  0 3 0  4  =   (9-74)
   0 
0 –1 1 002   
5
 
From which the determinate is:

1 –  –1 0
det – 1 2 – 3 – 1 (9-75)
0 –1 1 – 
Which produces the following roots:

 
 1   0.0 
   
  2  =  0.6667  (9-76)
   
 3   1.500 
 
The first eigenvalue (0.0) is a rigid-body mode, which is a linear combination of the static vectors. In this
case the rigid-body mode is identical to the static transformation vector and therefore needs to be removed.
These eigenvectors (normalized to unit generalized mass) are

 – 0.4082   0.5477   0.7303 

     
 1 =  – 0.4082   2 =  0.1825   3 =  – 0.3651  (9-77)
     
 – 0.4082   – 0.5477   0.1825 
Or,

 – 0.4082 0.5477 0.7303 

1  
v =  – 0.4082 0.1825 – 0.3651  (9-78)
 
 – 0.4082 – 0.5477 0.1826 
Since mode 1 is a linear combination of the constraint mode, it must be removed. The operations for this are
described in the Orthogonalization (Ch. 7) in the MSC Nastran Reference Guide beginning with Equation 7-227.
The linear algebra for this follows:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 9 407
Introduction to Dynamic Analysis Using Superelements

– 0.4082 0.5477 0.7303  1 

1  
G oz = – 0.4082 0.1825 – 0.3651 –  1  – 0.4082 0.5477 0.7303  (9-79)
 
– 0.4082 – 0.5477 0.1826  1 

0 0 0
= 0 – 0.7303 – 1.0954 (9-80)
0 – 1.0954 – 0.5477
The first mode is null and is removed. The matrix is partitioned

 x = – 0.7303 – 1.0954 (9-81)

z
– 1.0954 – 0.5477
Now an additional filter is performed to remove any remaining vectors which might
not be independent. First, we transform the o-set mass using  x .
z

M zz =  x M oo  x = 2.8 2.4
T
(9-82)
2 z z
2.4 4.2

A scaling matrix is found using the diagonals of M zz

2

= 0.5976 0.
12
scale =  diagonalM zz  (9-83)
0. 0.4879
What remains of the eigenvectors as scaled by this
  x   scale  =  x (9-84)
z

The generalized mass is scaled also

T
M zz =  scale   M zz   scale  = 1. 0.6988 (9-85)
2
0.6988 1.
Now the final filter is done. The reduced mass matrix is passed through the DECOMP
module.

(9-86)

Main Index
 408 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Description of Dynamic Reduction Process

the terms on the matrix diagonal are compared to the values on the factor diagonal.

M zz
RATIO i = ----------i for this problem,  Ratio  = 1.0 0 (9-87)
di 0 1.96
If Ratio exceeds a filter (PARAM,RESVRAT-default=1.E8), the associated vector is
removed.
For this example, none exceeded the allowable ratio, and both vectors are kept.
A final orthogonalization is performed on the remaining vectors. First, the stiffness is
transformed

K zz =  x k oo  x = 0.2381 0
T
(9-88)
0 0.3571
the eigenvalue problem

 K zz – M zz  zz = 0  zz = 0.6693 – 1.2296 (9-89)

0.4099 1.3387
is solved for all roots (these eigenvalues are not printed). The final transformation
vectors are found by:

G oq =   x    zz  = – 0.3651 – 0.4472 (9-90)

– 0.5477 0.4472
The transformation matrix is then
u 3 u 1001 u 1002

1. 0 0 u3
1
 G oa  =  G ot G oq  = 1 – 0.3651 – 0.4472 = 1. – 0.3651 – 0.4472 u4 (9-91)
1 – 0.3651 0.4472
1. – 0.3651 0.4472 u5

Using this to transform the stiffness and mass provides:

1 6.0 0 – 2.1909 – 0.4472

T
 M aa  =  G oa   M oo   G oa  = 1. 1.0 0 (9-92)
– 0.4472 0 1.0

Main Index
 CHAPTER 9 409
Introduction to Dynamic Analysis Using Superelements

1 0 0 0
T
 K aa  =  G a   K oo   G oa  = 0 0.1667 0 (9-93)
0 0 1.0

SUPERELEMENT 2 REDUCTION
Next, Superelement 2 reduction is performed. Superelement 2 has grids 1,2, and 3 of which 1 and 3 are on
the boundary.

Figure 9-14 Superelement 2, Free-Free Component Modes Synthesis

The static (Guyan) reduction produces the following:

1 –1 0 1 0 0 u1 1 0
K gg = – 1 2 – 1 ;M gg = 0 3 0 u 2 ; b = 0.5 0.5 (9-94)
0 –1 1 001 u 0 1
3

Grids 1 and 3 are part of the C-Set, therefore, part of the V-Set and are included in the modal solution.
 K vv – M vv    v  = 0 (9-95)

 1 –1 0 – 0 0 
 
 –1 2 –1 + 0 – 3 0   v  = 0 (9-96)
 
 0 –1 1 0 0 – 

1 –  –1 0
det – 1 2 – 3 – 1 = 0 (9-97)
0 –1 1 – 
which produces the roots:
 = 0. 1. 1.667 (9-98)
The Eigenvectors (normalized to unit mass) are

Main Index
 410 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Description of Dynamic Reduction Process

 – 0.4472   0.7071   0.5477 

     
 1 =  – 0.4472   2 =  0   3 =  – 0.3651  (9-99)
     
 – 0.4472   – 0.7071   0.5477 
Removing linear combinations of the static constraint modes:

– 0.4722 0.7071 0.5477  1 0 

 
G oz = – 0.4722 0.0 – 0.3651 –  0.5 0.5  – 0.4472 0.7071 0.5477
2
  – 0.4472 – 0.7071 0.5477
– 0.4722 0.7071 0.5477  0 1 

00 0
= 0 0 – 0.9129 (9-100)
00 0
Since the first two eigenvectors are a linear combination of the static transformation, they are removed. Only
a single eigenvector remains. It is normalized to unit generalized mass producing:
G oq =  0.5773 u 2 (9-101)

or transformation matrix
G oq =  0.5 0.5– 0.5773  (9-102)

We now have our transformation matrix for superelement 2:

u1 u3 u 21

1 0 0 u1
 G oq  = 0.5 0.5 – 0.5773 u2 (9-103)
0 1 0. u3

Notice that the filtering removed both the rigid-body mode and one of the elastic modes. The remaining
mode has motion only for grid point 2 and looks similar to the mode from the fixed-boundary CMS. In
general, this will not be the case, but in this example all eigenvectors of the superelement are calculated.
The transformation is used to reduce the stiffness and mass matrix. The dynamic transformation vector is
represented in the reduced model by SPOINT 21.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 9 411
Introduction to Dynamic Analysis Using Superelements

2 0.5 – 0.5 0
T
 M aa  =  G oa   M oo   G oa  = – 0.5 0.5 0 (9-104)
0 0 0.6667

1.75 0.75 – 0.866 u1

2 T
 M aa  =  G oa   M oo   G oa  = 0.75 1.75 – 0.866 u3 (9-105)
– 0.866 – 0.866 1.0 u 22

RESIDUAL STRUCTURE SOLUTION

The internal grids of residual structure are 1 and 3, and the upstream superelements are attached.
Schematically:

+SPOINT 11, 12, 22

Figure 9-15 Residual Structure for Free-Free CMS

All the remaining grid points are in this model (points 1 and 3). All elements have been placed in upstream
superelements, and there are two sets of reduced matrices representing superelements 1 and 2. We also have
scalar points (SPOINTs) 11, 12 and 22 representing the modes from the superelements.

The physical mass and stiffness for the residual structure are generated. Since there are no stiffness elements,
the K jj matrix is null. However, the mass matrix includes the CONM2’s on grids 1 and 3.

0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
K jj = 0 0 0 0 0 (9-106)
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0

Main Index
 412 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Description of Dynamic Reduction Process

u1
1 0 0 0 0
0 1 0 0 0 u3
M jj = 0 0 0 0 0 u 11 (9-107)
0 0 0 0 0 u
12
0 0 0 0 0 u
22

Add the reduced matrices from superelement 1:

u1
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 u3
K gg = 0 0 0.1667 0 0 u 11 (9-108)
0 0 0 1.0 0 u
12
0 0 0 0 0 u
22

u1
1 0 0 0 0
0 7.0 – 2.1090 – 0.4472 0 u3
M gg = 0 – 2.1909 1.0 0 0 u 11 (9-109)
0 – 0.4472 0 1.0 0 u
12
0 0 0 0 0 u
22

Add the reduced matrices from superelement 2:

u1
0.5 – 0.5 0 0 0
– 0.5 0.5 0 0 0 u3
K gg = 0 0 0.1667 0 0 u 11 (9-110)
0 0 0 1.0 0 u 12
0 0 0 0 0.6667 u
22

Main Index
 CHAPTER 9 413
Introduction to Dynamic Analysis Using Superelements

u1
2.75 0.75 0 0 – 0.866
0.75 8.75 – 2.1090 – 0.4472 – 0.866 u 3
M gg = 0 – 2.1909 1.0 0 0 u 11 (9-111)
0 – 0.4472 0 1.0 0 u 12
– 0.866 – 0.866 0 0 1.0 u 22

Apply constraint at dof 1:

u3
0.5 0 0 0
u 11
K ff = 0 0.1667 0 0 (9-112)
0 0 1.0 0 u 12
0 0 0 0.6667 u
22

u3
8.75 – 2.1090 – 0.4472 – 0.866
u 11
M ff = – 2.1909 1.0 0 0 (9-113)
– 0.4472 0 1.0 0 u 12
– 0.866 0 0 1.0 u 22

Solve the eigenvalue problem:

 K ff – M ff    f  = 0 yilelds  = 0.0468 0.38 0.856 1.217 (9-114)

Just like the fixed-boundary solution, since all of the modes are retained during Component Modes
Synthesis, the solution does not have any modal truncation and matches the non-superelement solution
exactly.
The resulting residual structure eigenvectors are:

u3
0.2735 – 0.3085 0.2121 – 0.344
 f = – 0.2338 – 1.2041 0.5772 – 0.8731 u 11 (9-115)
0.006 – 0.0845 – 0.5634 – 0.8614 u 12
– 0.0179 – 0.3541 0.8311 – 0.6585 u
22

Physical eigenvectors for the residual structure are:

Main Index
 414 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Description of Dynamic Reduction Process

0 0 0 0 0 u1
 = (9-116)
– 0.27355 – 0.3085 0.2121 – 0.344 u 3

SUPERELEMENT 1 DATA RECOVERY

The superelement 1 boundary dof are extracted from the residual solution:

1 – 0.2735 – 0.3085 0.2121 – 0.344 u 3

  boundary  = 0.2338 – 1.2041 0.5772 – 0.8731 u 11 (9-117)
0.006 – 0.0845 – 0.5634 – 0.8614 u
12

Then the internal solution is calculated using the transformation:

1 1 1
 =  G oa    boundary  (9-118)

Numerically:

1 1. 0 0 0.2735 – 0.3085 0.2121 – 0.344

 = 1. – 0.3651 – 0.4472 0.2338 – 1.2041 0.5772 – 0.8731 (9-119)
1. – 0.5477 – 0.4472 0.006 0.0845 – 0.5634 – 0.8614
which produces the physical eigenvectors for superelement 1.

1 – 0.2735 – 0.3085 0.2121 – 0.344 u 3

 = – 0.3616 0.09343 0.2533 0.36 u 4 (9-120)
– 0.3989 0.3889 – 0.356 – 0.251 u
5

SUPERELMENT 2 DATA RECOVERY

Repeating the process,

0 0 0 0 u1
2
   boundary = – 0.2735 – 0.3085 0.2121 – 0.344 u 3 (9-121)
0.0179 0.3541 0.8311 – 0.6585 u
22

2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
 = 0.5 0.5 – 0.5773 0.27355 – 0.3085 0.2121 – 0.344 (9-122)
0.5 0 0 0.0179 0.3541 0.8311 – 0.6585

Main Index
 CHAPTER 9 415
Introduction to Dynamic Analysis Using Superelements

0 0 0 0 u1
2
 = – 0.1471 – 0.3587 – 0.37385 0.2083 u 2 (9-123)
– 0.27355 – 0.3085 0.2121 – 0.344 u
3
The solution for the entire structure is:

u1
0 0 0 0
– 0.1471 – 0.3587 – 0.37385 0.2083 u2
   FULLBYHAND = – 0.2735 – 0.3085 0.2121 – 0.344 u3 (9-124)
– 0.3616 0.09343 0.2533 0.36 u4
– 0.3989 0.3889 – 0.356 – 0.251 u5

which compares to the results from an MSC Nastran run for this model (/doc/seug/chapter9/CMS-
Free/simple-free-boundary.bdf )

u1
0 0 0 0
0.1471 0.3587 0.37385 0.2083 u2
   MSC  NASTRAN = 0.2735 0.3085 – 0.2121 – 0.344 u3 (9-125)
0.3616 – 0.09343 – 0.2533 0.3601 u4
0.3989 – 0.3888 0.3559 – 0.2510 u5

Mixed-Boundary Dynamic Reduction

MSC Nastran offers the user the option of combining fixed-boundary (B-Set) and free-free (C-Set)
Component Modes Synthesis. Although the theory is not presented here, example file
/doc/seug/chapter9/CMS-Mixed/simple-mixed-boundary.bdf is available to the user for study.

MHRED Reduction
An alternate reduction method is available to users using free-boundary solutions or mixed-boundary
solutions. This method was developed by Dr. Arya Majed and Ed Henkel and implemented in MSC Nastran
Version 2004. For further details, refer to the MSC Nastran Release Guide Section 3.19 and the Real
Eigenvalue Analysis in SubDMAPs SEMR3 and MODERS (Ch. 7) in the MSC Nastran Reference Guide.

Residual Vectors
During Component Modes Synthesis reduction, it is likely that, for practical models, the combination of
constraint modes and component modes are not sufficient to represent a static deformed shape under the
applied loading. MSC Nastran uses the Residual Vector technique to add high-frequency vectors so that the
linear combination of static constraint modes + dynamic component modes + residual vectors is capable of

Main Index
 416 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Illustrative Example

representing the static deformation of the structure for the applied loads. This method is described in detail
in the Modal Augmentation Methods (Ch. 13) in the MSC Nastran Dynamic Analysis User’s Guide.

Illustrative Example
As an illustrative example of the importance of component modes, we will compare the solution modal
solution for the flat plate example shown in Figure 9-3 for a List Superelement (SESET) with and without
component modes synthesis.

Accuracy Improvements with CMS

In this example, the superelement boundary is selected as the two end grids – 501 and 502. In the residual
structure, grid 501 will be constrained in all 6 dof and grid 502 will be free; i.e. this will be a cantilever plate
solution.

Comparison of results
The baseline solution w/o superelements will be compared to the solution with constraint modes only, versus
constraint modes plus the first 10 component modes. The first 10 flexible modes of the cantilever solution
will be compared.

Baseline Solution w/o Superelements

The baseline solution is prepared as a regular normal modes solution. Since this is a basic modal setup in
Patran, the setup is not shown. The example file is located at c. The first 10 mode shapes are shown below:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 9 417
Introduction to Dynamic Analysis Using Superelements

Figure 9-16 Baseline Cantilever Plate Mode Shapes

The first 10 Eigenvalues are reported in the .f06 file:

BASELINE CANTILEVER PLATE MODAL SOLUTION APRIL 27, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM

SUBCASE 1

R E A L E I G E N V A L U E S

MODE EXTRACTION EIGENVALUE RADIANS CYCLES GENERALIZED GENERALIZED

NO. ORDER MASS STIFFNESS

1 1 4.024357E+04 2.006080E+02 3.192775E+01 1.000000E+00 4.024357E+04

2 2 1.576860E+06 1.255731E+03 1.998557E+02 1.000000E+00 1.576860E+06

3 3 3.927420E+06 1.981772E+03 3.154088E+02 1.000000E+00 3.927420E+06

4 4 1.235382E+07 3.514801E+03 5.593979E+02 1.000000E+00 1.235382E+07

5 5 1.303454E+07 3.610338E+03 5.746031E+02 1.000000E+00 1.303454E+07

6 6 4.744861E+07 6.888295E+03 1.096306E+03 1.000000E+00 4.744861E+07

7 7 1.183608E+08 1.087938E+04 1.731506E+03 1.000000E+00 1.183608E+08

8 8 1.297454E+08 1.139059E+04 1.812868E+03 1.000000E+00 1.297454E+08

9 9 1.413472E+08 1.188895E+04 1.892185E+03 1.000000E+00 1.413472E+08

10 10 2.897126E+08 1.702095E+04 2.708968E+03 1.000000E+00 2.897126E+08

Main Index
 418 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Illustrative Example

Listing 9-10 Baseline Modal Solution

List Superelement
The setup for a dynamic superelement requires both the physical and component modes definition. To review
the List Superelement (SESET) setup for the physical dof, refer to Defining List Superelements (Ch. 2). To add
the component modes, the user must define the Eigensolution parameters with the EIGRL entry and add
dof to store the component modes.
A convenient alternative to defining SPOINT and SEQSET or SEQSET1 entries, is to request that MSC
Nastran automatically generate the SPOINT and QSET internally. This can be done by specifying
PARAM,AUTQSET,YES. Another semi-automatic method is SENQSET.

SENQSET Superelement Internal Generalized Degree-of-Freedom

Defines number of internally generated scalar points for superelement dynamic reduction.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SENQSET SEID N

Example:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SENQSET 110 45

Field Contents
SEID Partitioned superelement identification number. See Remark 3. (Integer > 0 or
Character = “ALL”)
N Number of internally generated scalar points for dynamic reduction generalized
coordinates. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)

In Patran, the modal dof are easily defined using the PARAM,AUTOQSET option as follows:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 9 419
Introduction to Dynamic Analysis Using Superelements

Figure 9-17 Defining Superelement Component Modes Automatic QSET in Patran

The resulting bdf file is located at /doc/seug/chapter9/Baseline/SESET-Modes-With-CMS.bdf . The

resulting bdf file has the appropriate entries as highlighted here:
SOL 103

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = SESET with CMS Cantilever Plate Modal Solution

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

ECHO = NONE

PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES

RESVEC = NO

SUBCASE 1

Main Index
 420 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Illustrative Example

SUBTITLE=Cantilever Modes - Baseline

METHOD = 1

SPC = 2

VECTOR(PLOT,SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(PLOT,SORT1,REAL)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

EIGRL 1 10 0 MASS

$ Elements and Element Properties for region : shell

PSHELL 1 1 .1 1 1

$ SE10.10

SESET 10 1 THRU 205

$ Loads for Load Case : Cantilever

SPCADD 2 1

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : fixed-501

SPC1 1 123456 501

Listing 9-11 Component Modes Superelement Example

The SEMAP is similar to the SEMAP for a static solution. The exception is that there are boundary dof
associated with the component modes. When PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES is specified, these dof are not
exposed to the user. However, if the user uses SPOINT and SEQSET entries, the dof will show up in the
SEMAP. MSC Nastran will first calculate the component modes for the superelement by setting the
boundary dof fixed. In this example the component modes are as follows:
SESET WITH CMS CANTILEVER PLATE MODAL SOLUTION APRIL 27, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM SUPERELEMENT 10

SUBCASE 1

R E A L E I G E N V A L U E S

MODE EXTRACTION EIGENVALUE RADIANS CYCLES GENERALIZED GENERALIZED

NO. ORDER MASS STIFFNESS

1 1 1.646070E+06 1.282993E+03 2.041946E+02 1.000000E+00 1.646070E+06

2 2 1.249204E+07 3.534408E+03 5.625185E+02 1.000000E+00 1.249204E+07

3 3 4.800166E+07 6.928323E+03 1.102677E+03 1.000000E+00 4.800166E+07

4 4 5.470990E+07 7.396614E+03 1.177208E+03 1.000000E+00 5.470990E+07

5 5 1.312258E+08 1.145538E+04 1.823181E+03 1.000000E+00 1.312258E+08

6 6 1.436465E+08 1.198526E+04 1.907514E+03 1.000000E+00 1.436465E+08

7 7 2.217674E+08 1.489186E+04 2.370113E+03 1.000000E+00 2.217674E+08

8 8 2.929962E+08 1.711713E+04 2.724276E+03 1.000000E+00 2.929962E+08

Main Index
 CHAPTER 9 421
Introduction to Dynamic Analysis Using Superelements

9 9 5.099344E+08 2.258173E+04 3.593994E+03 1.000000E+00 5.099344E+08

10 10 5.717190E+08 2.391065E+04 3.805498E+03 1.000000E+00 5.717190E+08

Listing 9-12 Component Modes for Superelement 10

A physical representation of the first 3 component modes is as follows:

Figure 9-18 First 3 Component Modes for List Superelement

The residual structure solution is as follows:

SESET WITH CMS CANTILEVER PLATE MODAL SOLUTION APRIL 27, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM SUPERELEMENT 0

SUBCASE 1

R E A L E I G E N V A L U E S

MODE EXTRACTION EIGENVALUE RADIANS CYCLES GENERALIZED GENERALIZED

NO. ORDER MASS STIFFNESS

1 1 4.024365E+04 2.006082E+02 3.192779E+01 1.000000E+00 4.024365E+04

Main Index
 422 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Illustrative Example

2 2 1.576960E+06 1.255771E+03 1.998621E+02 1.000000E+00 1.576960E+06

3 3 3.931224E+06 1.982731E+03 3.155615E+02 1.000000E+00 3.931224E+06

4 4 1.235836E+07 3.515446E+03 5.595005E+02 1.000000E+00 1.235836E+07

5 5 1.304375E+07 3.611614E+03 5.748062E+02 1.000000E+00 1.304375E+07

6 6 4.749556E+07 6.891702E+03 1.096848E+03 1.000000E+00 4.749556E+07

7 7 1.192018E+08 1.091796E+04 1.737647E+03 1.000000E+00 1.192018E+08

8 8 1.299789E+08 1.140083E+04 1.814498E+03 1.000000E+00 1.299789E+08

9 9 1.430148E+08 1.195888E+04 1.903314E+03 1.000000E+00 1.430148E+08

10 10 2.904264E+08 1.704190E+04 2.712302E+03 1.000000E+00 2.904264E+08

Listing 9-13 Residual Structure Solution with 10 Superelement Component Modes

If the component modes are eliminated from the solution, only the physical dof will remain. The resulting
bdf file is located at /doc/seug/chapter9/Baseline/SESET-Modes-NO-CMS.bdf . The resulting modes are:
SESET WITHOUT CMS CANTILEVER PLATE MODAL SOLUTION APRIL 27, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM SUPERELEMENT 0

SUBCASE 1

R E A L E I G E N V A L U E S

MODE EXTRACTION EIGENVALUE RADIANS CYCLES GENERALIZED GENERALIZED

NO. ORDER MASS STIFFNESS

1 1 4.061991E+04 2.015438E+02 3.207669E+01 1.000000E+00 4.061991E+04

2 2 3.872860E+06 1.967958E+03 3.132103E+02 1.000000E+00 3.872860E+06

3 3 3.969939E+06 1.992470E+03 3.171115E+02 1.000000E+00 3.969939E+06

4 4 1.552354E+07 3.939993E+03 6.270693E+02 1.000000E+00 1.552354E+07

5 5 3.594094E+08 1.895810E+04 3.017275E+03 1.000000E+00 3.594094E+08

6 6 1.159474E+09 3.405105E+04 5.419392E+03 1.000000E+00 1.159474E+09

Listing 9-14 Residual Structure Solution with No Superelement Component Modes

But the EIGRL requested 10 modes, how come there are only 6? The answer is that after the constraints are
applied to grid 501, there remain only 6 dynamic dof at grid 501. Recall that a dynamic dof must have mass
and that the reduction process will preserve the rigid body mass matrix, therefore there are 3 translational and
3 rotational masses computed at grid 502 as a result of the mass reduction. Furthermore, investigation of the
residual mode shapes reveals that the modes are a linear combination of the constraint modes in Figure 9-5.
More specifically:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 9 423
Introduction to Dynamic Analysis Using Superelements

Table 9-1 Relation of Residual Modes to Constraint Modes when Component Modes are Not Calculated
Residual Mode Frequency (Hz) Constraint Mode(s) Scale Factor(s)
1 32.1 502-Tz, 502-Ry -134.29, 17.357
2 313.2 502-Tz, 502-Ry -239.94, 132.08
3 317.1 502-Ty, 502-Rz -133.64, -17.114
4 627.1 502-Rx -347.99
5 3017.3 502-Ty, 502-Rz 231.44, 128.62
6 5419.4 502-Tx -107.52

Finally, a comparison of the Baseline, Non-CMS, and CMS solutions reveals that the CMS solution closely
approximates the Baseline solution, but the Non-CMS solution does inadequate job of representing the
structural modes:

Table 9-2 Comparison of Non-Superelement, List Superelement with CMS, and List Superelement Without
CMS Solutions
Residual Baseline SESET CMS SESET Non CMS
Mode Frequency Frequency Frequency
1 3.192775E+01 3.192779E+01 3.207669E+01
2 1.998557E+02 1.998621E+02 3.132103E+02
3 3.154088E+02 3.155615E+02 3.171115E+02
4 5.593979E+02 5.595005E+02 6.270693E+02
5 5.746031E+02 5.748062E+02 3.017275E+03
6 1.096306E+03 1.096848E+03 5.419392E+03
7 1.731506E+03 1.737647E+03 -
8 1.812868E+03 1.814498E+03 -
9 1.892185E+03 1.903314E+03 -
10 2.708968E+03 2.712302E+03 -

The CMS solution will improve if more component modes are calculated for the superelement.
Note that when PARAM,AUTOQSET is specified, there is an additional modal solution of the residual
structure that does not include the effects of the upstream superelements. This may be undesirable as it will
add solution time, therefore most applications to practical models use either the SPOINT/SEQSET or
SENQSET method.

Main Index
 424 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Nastran Set Definitions – The USET Table

Nastran Set Definitions – The USET Table

Throughout this manual several MSC Nastran Sets were defined during the superelement reduction process:
A-Set, B-Set, C-Set, T-Set, Q-Set, O-Set, V-Set. This section provides a comprehensive description of the
various sets used in the superelement reduction process. This description can also be found in the Degree-of-
Freedom Sets (Ch. 8) in the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
The full set description can be found in the following figure.

Figure 9-19 MSC Nastran Degree of Freedom Sets

The superelement reduction is concerned with forming the reduced matrices at the A-Set, i.e. ,

, , etc. In order to accomplish this, several auxiliary sets are used. The sets on the left
side of Figure 9-19 are called Mutually Exclusive Set. That is to say, that a dof that is a member of one mutually
exclusive set cannot be a member of another mutually exclusive set.
In addition to the sets above, there are additional sets that are used during the dynamic reduction; specifically
the W-Set and the X-Set. The W-Set is used to identify and remove massless dof from the problem prior to
normal modes calculations. This operation is described in the Real Eigenvalue Analysis in SubDMAPs SEMR3 and
MODERS (Ch. 7) in the MSC Nastran Reference Guide. The Y-Set is used for Auto-Support operations when
residual vectors are applied to a free-free structure. The Z-Set is used during the Orthogonalization process.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 9 425
Introduction to Dynamic Analysis Using Superelements

Table 9-3 Dof Sets Used in Superelement Reduction

Dof Set Description
b Physical dof fixed during Component Modes Synthesis
c Physical dof free during Component Modes Synthesis
lm Lagrange multiplier dof created for Rigid elements by RIGID=LAGRANGE
r Physical dof in the Reference Set used to define free body motion.
q Modal dof used to store modes in Component Modes Synthesis
l=b+c+lm Physical dof in the “left-over” set. This is the lowest level of reduction in standard static
analysis.
t=l+r Physical dof in the “total” physical boundary for superelement analysis.
a=t+q Physical and Modal dof in the “analysis” set
v=o+c+r Physical dof free to “vibrate” in component modes synthesis
x Physical dof remaining after null masses are removed. This is the lowest level of reduction
in modal analysis.

The l-Set is the “left-over” set which consists of the B-Set + C-Set + lm-Set. The l-Set is the solution set for
a static solution. The B-Set and C-Set are the physical dof in the Fixed-Boundary and Free-Boundary
Component Modes Synthesis (CMS) calculations defined in this Chapter. The lm-Set are the Lagrange dof
associated with the dependent dof for Rigid Elements (RBE1, RBE2, RBE3, RBAR, RSPLINE) when
RIGID=LAGRANGE is specified in the case control. The use of this set in superelements is irrelevant,
therefore, it is not considered further in this manual. (See Note below regarding Lagrange dof). The R-Set
are the Reference dof defined on SUPORT or SUPORT1 entries. These are used in static analysis to define
inertia relief and in modal analysis to calculate ‘pure’ rigid body modes.
The user can request output the set definitions to the .f06 file by specifying PARAM,USETPRT and
PARAM,USETSTRi. As an example, the mixed boundary example in Mixed-Boundary Dynamic Reduction
(/doc/seug/chapter9/CMS-Mixed/simple-mixed-boundary.bdf ), included the following entries:
PARAM,USETPRT,11

PARAM,USETSTR1,a:b:c:q

PARAM,USETSTR2,v:t

Listing 9-15 Example of USET Print Request

Which produced the following output for superelement 2:
SIMPLE MODES - SUPERELEMENT ANALYSIS MAY 8, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM SUPERELEMENT 2

SUPERELEMENT MODEL 3, MIXED BOUNDARY CMS SUBCASE 1

U S E T D E F I N I T I O N T A B L E ( E X T E R N A L S E Q U E N C E , C O L U M N S O R T )

Main Index
 426 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Nastran Set Definitions – The USET Table

EXT GP. DOF INT DOF INT GP. A B C Q V T

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

1 - 1 1- 1 G 1 1 1

- 2 2- 2 2 2

- 3 3- 3 3 3

- 4 4- 4 4 4

- 5 5- 5 5 5

- 6 6- 6 6 6

2 - 1 7- 2 G 1

- 2 8-

- 3 9-

- 4 10-

- 5 11-

- 6 12-

3 - 1 13- 3 G 7 1 2 7

- 2 14- 8 7 8

- 3 15- 9 8 9

- 4 16- 10 9 10

- 5 17- 11 10 11

- 6 18- 12 11 12

21 - 0 19- 4 S 13 1

22 - 0 20- 5 S 14 2

23 - 0 21- 6 S 15 3

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

EXT GP. DOF INT DOF INT GP. A B C Q V T

---- C O L U M N T O T A L S ---- 15 11 1 3 2 12 0 0 0 0 0 0

Listing 9-16 Example .f06 Output for PARAM, USETPRT

Note that in this example, grid 1, dof 1 is in the B-Set, i.e. fixed for Component Modes Synthesis
Calculations. Grid 2, dof1 is in the V-Set, i.e. this was originally part of the O-Set and is free to vibrate in
Component Modes Synthesis. Grid 3, dof1 is in the C-Set which is also part of the V-Set. The spoints in
this model were all assigned to the Q-Set. The table also provides a list of dof in the T-Set (physical dof ) and
A-Set (analysis set). In this case, the dof for grids 1 and 3 are assigned to the T-Set and A-Set because
AUTOSPC is not applied to boundary dof during superelement reduction.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 9 427
Introduction to Dynamic Analysis Using Superelements

Note: Lagrange Rigid Element Processing. Typically, the dependent dof associated with RBE’s are
placed in the “mr” set, while the dependent dof associated with MPC’s are placed in the “mp”
set; which collectively define the M-Set. However, if the user specifies RIGID=LAGRAN in
the case control, the dependent dof are carried into the ASET as part of the “lm” dof.
Currently the MSC Nastran processing does not handle the RIGID=LAGRAN for
superelements and the following message will appear in the .f06 output:
** Warning ** Rigid elements for the upstream superelements have been moved to the
residual. Currently this is a restriction which may be relaxed in the future. This action is
necessary when RIGID=LAGRAN is specified or implied and rigid elements are present in
upstream superelements.
Typically this leads to subsequent FATAL messages because the grids attaching to the RBE are
not in the residual structure.
A slightly different path is taken when an external superelement is reduced. This is not legal
and a FATAL message will ensue:
*** USER FATAL MESSAGE 4349 (GP4)
THERE ARE LAGRANGE RIGID ELEMENTS IN THE MODEL (RBAR, RBE1, RBE2,
RBE3, RJOINT, RROD, RPRPLT) AND AN EXTERNAL SUPERELEMENT GENERATION
REQUEST (EXTSEOUT OR PARAM,EXTOUT).
USER INFORMATION: AN EXTERNAL SUPERELEMENT (CREATED WITH THE
EXTSEOUT CASE CONTROL COMMAND OR THE EXTOUT PARAMETER)
CANNOT CONTAIN LAGRANGE RIGID ELEMENTS.
Therefore, the remainder of this guide will NOT be concerned with RIGID=LAGRAN
processing and consider that all dependent dof belong to the M-Set (either the “mr” or “mp”
set).

1.

Main Index
 428 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Nastran Set Definitions – The USET Table

Main Index
 Chapter 10: Input and Output for Dynamic Reduction
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User’s Guide
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User’s Guide

10 Input and Output for

Dynamic Reduction

Introduction

Case Control for Dynamic Reduction

Single Level Dynamic Reduction

Multi-Level Dynamic Reduction

Main Index
 430 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Introduction

Introduction
This chapter describes the controls for the dynamic processing of superelements, along with the output
associated with dynamic reduction.
In CHAPTER 9, a description of the process and equations required to perform dynamic reduction for fixed-
boundary, free-boundary, and mixed-boundary Component Modes Synthesis was presented. This chapter
will provide more depth in the application of the various methods along with a description of the output.
The first section of this chapter describes the Case Control commands associated with dynamic reduction.
The Case Control commands are the same whether you are using PARTs or main bulk data List
superelements.
The remaining sections provide detailed examples for Single-Level and Multi-Level dynamic reduction.
Dynamic reduction is invoked when both the necessary Case Control commands and Bulk Data entries are
present. If either set of information is missing, a static reduction will be performed.

Case Control for Dynamic Reduction

The Case Control for dynamic reduction is an extension of the Case Control in static analysis. The reader is
encouraged to review Case Control (Ch. 4), [for static analysis] before continuing with this section. In
particular, Expanded Case Control (Ch. 4) is particularly important in dynamic analysis because most practical
applications in dynamic superelement analysis will use expanded Case Control.
The Case Control commands SEMG, SELG, SEKR, SELR, SEMR, SEALL, and SEDR are applicable in
both static and dynamic analysis. A brief summary of these commands is available in Table 4-8 and in the
Superelement Control (Ch. 5) in the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide. A more detailed description of each
command is found in the specific Case Control entries found in the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide,
therefore, they will not be discussed further in this chapter. The SEEXCLUDE and SEFINAL commands
are also the same for statics and dynamics and are described in Case Control (Ch. 4) [for static analysis].
The most used Case Control command for dynamic analysis is the SUPER command. This was also
described in detail in The SUPER Command (Ch. 4) and the format is repeated here because of its importance to
dynamic analysis and its extensive use in this chapter.

SUPER Superelement Subcase Assignment

Assigns a subcase(s) to a superelement or set of superelements.

Format:

 ALL 
 
 
SUPER =     (10-1)
  setid   ,lseqid  
  seid  
 
Examples:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 10 431
Input and Output for Dynamic Reduction

SUPER=17,3
SUPER=15
SUPER=ALL

Field Contents
seid Superelement identification number (Integer > 0).
ALL The subcase is assigned to all superelements and all loading conditions (Default).
setid Set identification number of a previously appearing SET command. The subcase is
assigned to all superelements with identification numbers that appear on this SET
command (Integer > 0).
lseqid Load sequence number (Integer > 0; Default=1).

Note that the lseqid is relevant only in static analysis and frequency response analysis when there are multiple
loading conditions. This Chapter concentrates on dynamic reduction, therefore, there are no examples using
lseqid in this Chapter.
The only other case control command required for dynamic reduction is the METHOD entry. The
METHOD selects the ID of either an EIGR or EIGRL bulk data entry. The EIGR and EIGRL entries
define parameters for the Eigenvalue extraction calculations. Refer to the MSC Nastran Dynamics Users
Guide, Chapter 3 for more details on these entries and their usage.
The EXTSEOUT Case Control entry is used to export the reduced superelement matrices for use in external
superelement analysis. The general usage of EXTSEOUT for dynamic analysis is the same as in static analysis
as described in Defining and Attaching External Superelements (Ch. 2), and Single-Level Analysis Using PART
Superelements (Ch. 3). However, in external superelement analysis in dynamic reduction the modal (or

Main Index
 432 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single Level Dynamic Reduction

generalized) dof must be defined as part of the Q-Set. MSC Nastran offers several methods of specifying the
Q-Set dof as follows:

Table 10-1 Methods for Defining Q-Set dof for Component Modes Synthesis
Method Convenience Comments
SPOINT + SEQSET / SEQSET1 Manual Definition For use with List (SESET) Superelements.
Offers maximum control over SPOINT /
Q-Set dof definition
SPOINT + QSET / QSET1 Manual Definition For use with PART and External
Superelements. Offers maximum control
over SPOINT / Q-Set dof definition
SENQSET Semi-Automatic For use with PART Superelements. Allows
the user to specify the number of Q-Set
without reference to SPOINTs
PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES Fully Automatic Fully automatic definition of Q-Set dof in
all Superelement types. After the number of
component modes are determined, the
program generates internal dof for the Q-
Set. Component Modes Synthesis will be
performed on the Residual structure.

In static reduction, only the stiffness and loads are required, however, in dynamic reduction the mass is
required. Additional reduced matrices in external superelements for dynamic analysis include the damping
(BAA), and material damping (K4AA).

Single Level Dynamic Reduction

Just as in static single-level superelement analysis, the dynamic single-level superelement analysis is processed
so that the superelements attach directly to the residual structure. Therefore, along with the physical dof, the
component modes dof are passed to the residual structure for the system solution.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 10 433
Input and Output for Dynamic Reduction

Figure 10-1 Schematic Representation of Single-Level Superelement Analysis

Just as in static analysis, the boundary dof are exterior to the superelement and interior to the residual
structure. In statics, the boundary dof included physical dof only. However, in dynamic analysis the
component modes dof must be accounted for. As described in CHAPTER 9, the component modes are
designated as Q-Set dof by the user. These Q-Set dof are part of the superelement A-Set – and therefore, the
modal dof in single-level superelement analysis are exterior to the superelement and interior to the residual
structure.
The following subsections demonstrate how to define the Case Control and Q-Set dof for dynamic
superelement reduction using a simple model. These are intended to be boilerplate examples that users can
modify and adapt to their specific applications.
The examples in this Chapter will use the same example defined in Simple Example using Cantilever Plate (Ch. 2).
The Superelements, grids, and elements for this example are as follows:

Figure 10-2 Cantilever Plate Model Used in Dynamic Superelement Examples

Main Index
 434 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single Level Dynamic Reduction

The non-superelement solution for this model is located at /doc/seug/chapter10/cantilever-

beam/baseline/modes.bdf. The basic bulk data (grids, elements, materials) are the same as the example
described in Simple Example using Cantilever Plate (Ch. 2); the entries required for a dynamic solution are
highlighted.
SOL 103

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = Baseline modal solution

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = YES

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Default

METHOD = 1

SPC = 2

VECTOR(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST -1

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

EIGRL 1 10 0 MASS

Listing 10-1 Entries Required for Modal Analysis

Note that residual vectors are not required for this solution, but they have been calculated. For more
information on residual vectors, refer to the Residual Vector (Modal Augmentation) (Ch. 7) in the MSC Nastran
Dynamic Analysis User’s Guide.
For comparison purposes, the Eigenvalue solution for the first 10 modes is:
BASELINE MODAL SOLUTION MAY 12, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 12/15/10

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM

SUBCASE 1

R E A L E I G E N V A L U E S

(BEFORE AUGMENTATION OF RESIDUAL VECTORS)

MODE EXTRACTION EIGENVALUE RADIANS CYCLES GENERALIZED GENERALIZED

NO. ORDER MASS STIFFNESS

1 1 3.985089E+04 1.996269E+02 3.177160E+01 1.000000E+00 3.985089E+04

2 2 1.533628E+06 1.238397E+03 1.970970E+02 1.000000E+00 1.533628E+06

3 3 3.876550E+06 1.968896E+03 3.133595E+02 1.000000E+00 3.876550E+06

4 4 5.065938E+06 2.250764E+03 3.582202E+02 1.000000E+00 5.065938E+06

5 5 1.184051E+07 3.441004E+03 5.476528E+02 1.000000E+00 1.184051E+07

6 6 4.487429E+07 6.698827E+03 1.066151E+03 1.000000E+00 4.487429E+07

7 7 4.523558E+07 6.725740E+03 1.070435E+03 1.000000E+00 4.523558E+07

Main Index
 CHAPTER 10 435
Input and Output for Dynamic Reduction

8 8 1.212137E+08 1.100971E+04 1.752250E+03 1.000000E+00 1.212137E+08

9 9 1.243649E+08 1.115190E+04 1.774880E+03 1.000000E+00 1.243649E+08

10 10 1.352188E+08 1.162836E+04 1.850711E+03 1.000000E+00 1.352188E+08

Listing 10-2 Baseline Eigenvalue Solution for Cantilever Plate Model

List Superelements
The examples in this section are for dynamic reduction of list (SESET) superelements.

Defining Physical Boundary and Modal Dof

The physical dof for List superelement dynamic reduction are defined the same way they are defined for
superelement static reduction. For a review of defining physical dof, refer to Defining List Superelements
(Ch. 2). As a summary, the following bulk data entries can be used:

Table 10-2 Summary of Bulk Data Entries that Define Physical Grids for a Superelement
Entry Comment
SESET Defines the interior grids for a superelement
GRID “SEID” field Defines interior grid points for a superelement
SEELT With BEGIN BULK defines the superelement ID assignment of
boundary elements
SEELT With BEGIN SUPER defines all elements within a superelement

The partitioning of the superelements is described in detail in Superelement Partitioning (Ch. 2).

Example – Cantilever Plate

The following sections demonstrate the definitions required to perform modal analysis of List Superelements
using fixed-boundary, free-free boundary, and mixed boundary solutions. In each case the superelement
interior physical grids are defined exactly the way they are defined for static analysis. These details are defined
in detail in Demonstration of Defining Interior Points in Patran (Ch. 2), and therefore, will not be duplicated here.
Instead, these sections will concentrate on the additional steps required to define the input associated with
Component Modes Synthesis.

Fixed-Boundary Component Modes Synthesis

AUTOQSET METHOD
Patran supports the fixed-boundary Component Modes Synthesis formulation for modal solutions with the
PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES technique. To select this method, the user can select the “Calculate Component
Modes (AUTOQSET)” button as shown below.

Main Index
 436 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single Level Dynamic Reduction

Figure 10-3 Example of Selecting the AUTOQSET Method in Patran

The associated Superelement and Component Modes Synthesis entries are shown in the following listing (ref
/doc/seug/chapter10/cantilever-beam/seset/modes.bdf):
SOL 103

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = List Superelement (SESET) Solution

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = AUTOQSET Method

ECHO = NONE

PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES

RESVEC = YES

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Default

METHOD = 1

SPC = 2

Main Index
 CHAPTER 10 437
Input and Output for Dynamic Reduction

VECTOR(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST -1

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

EIGRL 1 10 0 MASS

$ Tip.10

SESET 10 108 THRU 111

SESET 10 208 THRU 211

$ Base.20

SESET 20 101 102 103 201 202 203

Listing 10-3 Input File (partial) for AUTOQSET Method

For the AUTOQSET method, the SEMAP does not contain any information about the Q-Set modal dof for
each superelement because they are not generated or assigned until after the Component Modes Synthesis
calculation is complete.
LIST SUPERELEMENT (SESET) SOLUTION MAY 12, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 12/15/10 PAGE

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM

AUTOQSET METHOD

SUPERELEMENT 10

LIST OF INTERIOR GRID POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF INTERIOR POINTS = 8 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 108 109 110 111 208 209 210 211

SUPERELEMENT 10

LIST OF EXTERIOR POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF EXTERIOR POINTS = 2 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 107 207

SUPERELEMENT 10

LIST OF ELEMENT ID-S ( TOTAL NO. OF ELEMENTS = 4 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 7 8 9 10

SUPERELEMENT 20

LIST OF INTERIOR GRID POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF INTERIOR POINTS = 6 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 101 102 103 201 202 203

SUPERELEMENT 20

Main Index
 438 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single Level Dynamic Reduction

LIST OF EXTERIOR POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF EXTERIOR POINTS = 2 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 104 204

SUPERELEMENT 20

LIST OF ELEMENT ID-S ( TOTAL NO. OF ELEMENTS = 3 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 1 2 3

SUPERELEMENT 0

LIST OF INTERIOR GRID POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF INTERIOR POINTS = 8 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 104 105 106 107 204 205 206 207

SUPERELEMENT 0

LIST OF ELEMENT ID-S ( TOTAL NO. OF ELEMENTS = 3 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

Listing 10-4 SEMAP for List Superelement AUTOQSET Method

The Component Modes Synthesis processing produces a modal solution for each fixed-boundary
superelement. These Q-Set dof are automatically carried down to the residual solution.
LIST SUPERELEMENT (SESET) SOLUTION MAY 12, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 12/15/10 P

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM SUPERELEMENT 10

AUTOQSET METHOD SUBCASE 1

R E A L E I G E N V A L U E S

(AFTER AUGMENTATION OF RESIDUAL VECTORS)

MODE EXTRACTION EIGENVALUE RADIANS CYCLES GENERALIZED GENERALIZED

NO. ORDER MASS STIFFNESS

1 1 1.506281E+06 1.227306E+03 1.953318E+02 1.000000E+00 1.506281E+06

2 2 3.384791E+07 5.817896E+03 9.259468E+02 1.000000E+00 3.384791E+07

3 3 5.259718E+07 7.252392E+03 1.154254E+03 1.000000E+00 5.259718E+07

4 4 1.331114E+08 1.153739E+04 1.836233E+03 1.000000E+00 1.331114E+08

5 5 2.981700E+08 1.726760E+04 2.748224E+03 1.000000E+00 2.981700E+08

6 6 3.776630E+08 1.943355E+04 3.092946E+03 1.000000E+00 3.776630E+08

7 7 7.868719E+08 2.805124E+04 4.464493E+03 1.000000E+00 7.868719E+08

8 8 1.176342E+09 3.429784E+04 5.458670E+03 1.000000E+00 1.176342E+09

9 9 3.065455E+09 5.536655E+04 8.811859E+03 1.000000E+00 3.065455E+09

10 10 3.264128E+09 5.713255E+04 9.092927E+03 1.000000E+00 3.264128E+09

11 11 6.010233E+09 7.752570E+04 1.233860E+04 1.000000E+00 6.010233E+09

12 12 1.552301E+10 1.245914E+05 1.982933E+04 1.000000E+00 1.552301E+10

13 13 4.541589E+10 2.131100E+05 3.391752E+04 1.000000E+00 4.541589E+10

Main Index
 CHAPTER 10 439
Input and Output for Dynamic Reduction

LIST SUPERELEMENT (SESET) SOLUTION MAY 12, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 12/15/10 P

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM SUPERELEMENT 20

AUTOQSET METHOD SUBCASE 1

R E A L E I G E N V A L U E S

(BEFORE AUGMENTATION OF RESIDUAL VECTORS)

MODE EXTRACTION EIGENVALUE RADIANS CYCLES GENERALIZED GENERALIZED

NO. ORDER MASS STIFFNESS

1 1 2.113386E+08 1.453749E+04 2.313713E+03 1.000000E+00 2.113386E+08

2 2 3.167098E+08 1.779634E+04 2.832376E+03 1.000000E+00 3.167098E+08

3 3 1.145855E+09 3.385048E+04 5.387471E+03 1.000000E+00 1.145855E+09

4 4 9.807771E+09 9.903419E+04 1.576178E+04 1.000000E+00 9.807771E+09

5 5 1.529802E+10 1.236851E+05 1.968510E+04 1.000000E+00 1.529802E+10

6 6 3.483048E+10 1.866292E+05 2.970297E+04 1.000000E+00 3.483048E+10

7 7 3.864021E+10 1.965711E+05 3.128527E+04 1.000000E+00 3.864021E+10

8 8 5.855620E+10 2.419839E+05 3.851293E+04 1.000000E+00 5.855620E+10

9 9 6.722251E+10 2.592730E+05 4.126459E+04 1.000000E+00 6.722251E+10

10 10 8.492655E+10 2.914216E+05 4.638119E+04 1.000000E+00 8.492655E+10

^^^

^^^ USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 9037 (RESLOAD )

^^^ THE RESIDUAL VECTOR LOADS AND INITIAL CONDITIONS ARE NOT LINEARLY INDEPENDENT WITH MODAL VECTORS OR

NO RESIDUAL VECTOR LOADS AND INITIAL CONDITIONS WERE FOUND AFTER FILTERING AND SWEEPING.

^^^ USER INFORMATION: RESIDUAL VECTORS WILL NOT BE ADDED TO THE MODAL VECTORS.

LIST SUPERELEMENT (SESET) SOLUTION MAY 12, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 12/15/10 P

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM SUPERELEMENT 0

AUTOQSET METHOD SUBCASE 1

R E A L E I G E N V A L U E S

(AFTER AUGMENTATION OF RESIDUAL VECTORS)

MODE EXTRACTION EIGENVALUE RADIANS CYCLES GENERALIZED GENERALIZED

NO. ORDER MASS STIFFNESS

1 1 4.060261E+04 2.015009E+02 3.206986E+01 1.000000E+00 4.060261E+04

2 2 1.997386E+06 1.413289E+03 2.249320E+02 1.000000E+00 1.997386E+06

3 3 3.955553E+06 1.988857E+03 3.165365E+02 1.000000E+00 3.955553E+06

4 4 5.513270E+06 2.348035E+03 3.737014E+02 1.000000E+00 5.513270E+06

5 5 2.525060E+07 5.024998E+03 7.997532E+02 1.000000E+00 2.525060E+07

6 6 7.125292E+07 8.441145E+03 1.343450E+03 1.000000E+00 7.125292E+07

7 7 1.666736E+08 1.291021E+04 2.054724E+03 1.000000E+00 1.666736E+08

8 8 1.776582E+08 1.332885E+04 2.121352E+03 1.000000E+00 1.776582E+08

9 9 2.846538E+08 1.687169E+04 2.685212E+03 1.000000E+00 2.846538E+08

Main Index
 440 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single Level Dynamic Reduction

10 10 8.146163E+08 2.854148E+04 4.542518E+03 1.000000E+00 8.146163E+08

11 11 8.285748E+08 2.878497E+04 4.581271E+03 1.000000E+00 8.285748E+08

12 12 1.051970E+09 3.243408E+04 5.162044E+03 1.000000E+00 1.051970E+09

13 13 1.903192E+09 4.362559E+04 6.943228E+03 1.000000E+00 1.903192E+09

14 14 2.225433E+09 4.717449E+04 7.508053E+03 1.000000E+00 2.225433E+09

15 15 9.740678E+09 9.869488E+04 1.570778E+04 1.000000E+00 9.740678E+09

LIST SUPERELEMENT (SESET) SOLUTION MAY 12, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 12/15/10 P

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM SUPERELEMENT 0

AUTOQSET METHOD SUBCASE 1

R E A L E I G E N V A L U E S

(AFTER AUGMENTATION OF RESIDUAL VECTORS)

MODE EXTRACTION EIGENVALUE RADIANS CYCLES GENERALIZED GENERALIZED

NO. ORDER MASS STIFFNESS

1 1 3.985089E+04 1.996269E+02 3.177160E+01 1.000000E+00 3.985089E+04

2 2 1.533628E+06 1.238397E+03 1.970970E+02 1.000000E+00 1.533628E+06

3 3 3.876551E+06 1.968896E+03 3.133595E+02 1.000000E+00 3.876551E+06

4 4 5.065942E+06 2.250765E+03 3.582203E+02 1.000000E+00 5.065942E+06

5 5 1.184070E+07 3.441031E+03 5.476571E+02 1.000000E+00 1.184070E+07

6 6 4.488045E+07 6.699287E+03 1.066225E+03 1.000000E+00 4.488045E+07

7 7 4.525008E+07 6.726818E+03 1.070606E+03 1.000000E+00 4.525008E+07

8 8 1.212216E+08 1.101007E+04 1.752307E+03 1.000000E+00 1.212216E+08

9 9 1.246714E+08 1.116563E+04 1.777066E+03 1.000000E+00 1.246714E+08

10 10 1.352230E+08 1.162854E+04 1.850740E+03 1.000000E+00 1.352230E+08

11 11 2.732663E+08 1.653077E+04 2.630954E+03 1.000000E+00 2.732663E+08

12 12 3.360361E+08 1.833129E+04 2.917515E+03 1.000000E+00 3.360361E+08

13 13 5.672505E+08 2.381702E+04 3.790597E+03 1.000000E+00 5.672505E+08

14 14 9.171191E+08 3.028397E+04 4.819844E+03 1.000000E+00 9.171191E+08

15 15 9.621873E+08 3.101914E+04 4.936850E+03 1.000000E+00 9.621873E+08

16 16 3.295050E+09 5.740253E+04 9.135896E+03 1.000000E+00 3.295050E+09

Listing 10-5 Component Modes and Residual Solution for AUTOQSET Method

Note that there are two solutions for the residual structure. The first residual solution is for the residual
structure including the upstream physical dof only and Q-Set dof for the residual are generated for these dof.
The second residual solution is for the residual structure including all component modes. The first 10 modes
of the final residual solution track the non-superelement solution in Listing 10-2 with only minor differences
in the frequencies in the higher frequencies. Note that the first 10 modes of the first residual solution do not
track the non-superelement solution very well – this is the solution if there were no components calculated,
thus reinforcing the concept that component modes are required for a good dynamic solution.
In this case, the OP2 file was the output format requested – when reading the OP2 into Patran, the mode
shape of the assembled solution is displayed properly.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 10 441
Input and Output for Dynamic Reduction

Figure 10-4 Mode 1 of Superelement Solution as Displayed in Patran

SENQSET METHOD
The SENQSET method is not supported for List Superelements (SESET).
SPOINT / SEQSET1 METHOD
The maximum flexibility in defining the Q-Set for Component Modes Synthesis is with the SPOINT /
SEQSET1 method. In this method, the user defines the dof with the SPOINT entry and assigns them to
the Q-Set with the SEQSET1 entry (SEQSET could also be used, but SEQSET1 is the most common
method because of its convenient input format).
Since Patran does not support the SPOINT / SEQSET1 method directly, the user can specify the SPOINT
/ SEQSET1 entries in Direct Text Input as shown below:

Main Index
 442 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single Level Dynamic Reduction

Figure 10-5 Example of Defining the SPOINT / SEQSET1 Method in Patran

In this case, the number of modes requested is 10. The reason that 16 Q-Set dof are allocated for each
superelement is because there are 6 dof added for Residual Vectors. Since there are no explicit static loads,
there could be a possibility of only 6 residual vectors associated with inertia loads. Refer to the RESVEC Case
Control command and the Residual Vector (Modal Augmentation) (Ch. 7) in the MSC Nastran Dynamic Analysis
User’s Guide for more details on residual vectors. The Direct Text Input for SPOINT / SEQSET1 are added
to the input file as shown here (ref /doc/seug/chapter10/cantilever-beam/seset/modes2.bdf ):
SOL 103

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = List Superelement (SESET) Solution

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = SPOINT / SEQSET1 Method

ECHO = NONE

Main Index
 CHAPTER 10 443
Input and Output for Dynamic Reduction

RESVEC = YES

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Default

METHOD = 1

SPC = 2

VECTOR(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

SPOINT,1001,thru,1016

SEQSET1,10,0,1001,thru,1016

SPOINT,2001,thru,2016

SEQSET1,20,0,2001,thru,2016

Listing 10-6 Input File (partial) for SPOINT / SEQSET1 Method

For the SPOINT / SEQSET1 method, the SEMAP reflects the dof as shown below.
LIST SUPERELEMENT (SESET) SOLUTION MAY 12, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 12/15/10 PAGE

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM

SPOINT / SEQSET1 METHOD

SUPERELEMENT 10

LIST OF INTERIOR GRID POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF INTERIOR POINTS = 8 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 108 109 110 111 208 209 210 211

SUPERELEMENT 10

LIST OF EXTERIOR POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF EXTERIOR POINTS = 18 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 107 207 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008

11 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016

SUPERELEMENT 10

LIST OF ELEMENT ID-S ( TOTAL NO. OF ELEMENTS = 4 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 7 8 9 10

LIST SUPERELEMENT (SESET) SOLUTION MAY 12, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 12/15/10 PAGE

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM

SPOINT / SEQSET1 METHOD

SUPERELEMENT 20

LIST OF INTERIOR GRID POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF INTERIOR POINTS = 6 )

Main Index
 444 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single Level Dynamic Reduction

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 101 102 103 201 202 203

SUPERELEMENT 20

LIST OF EXTERIOR POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF EXTERIOR POINTS = 18 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 104 204 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008

11 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016

SUPERELEMENT 20

LIST OF ELEMENT ID-S ( TOTAL NO. OF ELEMENTS = 3 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 1 2 3

LIST SUPERELEMENT (SESET) SOLUTION MAY 12, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 12/15/10 PAGE

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM

SPOINT / SEQSET1 METHOD

SUPERELEMENT 0

LIST OF INTERIOR GRID POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF INTERIOR POINTS = 40 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 104 105 106 107 204 205 206 207 1001 1002

11 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012

21 1013 1014 1015 1016 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006

31 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016

SUPERELEMENT 0

LIST OF ELEMENT ID-S ( TOTAL NO. OF ELEMENTS = 3 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 4 5 6

Listing 10-7 SEMAP for SPOINT / SEQSET1 Method

The results of the component modes calculations for the upstream superelements are exactly the same as the
results of the AUTOQSET method. The residual structure, however, does not undergo Component Modes
Synthesis calculations and there is only one set of before and after modal augmentation Eigenvalues. As with
the AUTOQSET method, the first 10 modes of the final residual solution for the SPOINT / SENQSET1
method track the non-superelement solution in Listing 10-2 with only minor differences in the frequencies in
the higher frequencies.
EXPANDED CASE CONTROL WITH SPOINT / SENQSET1 METHOD

Main Index
 CHAPTER 10 445
Input and Output for Dynamic Reduction

As with statics, Patran exports condensed case control for dynamic superelements. MSC Nastran offers the
user more control over superelement reduction by using expanded case control. The reader is encouraged to
review Expanded Case Control (Ch. 4) [for statics]. In dynamic superelement reduction expanded Case Control
can be used to control the number of modes or frequency cutoff for each superelement by changing the
METHOD for each superelement. Just as in statics, expanded Case Control can also be used to specify
PARAM entries that are desired for each individual superelement processing. As an example, the fixed-
boundary solution above is reworked by specifying different modal extraction methods for each
superelement. Note that the number of Q-Set points is adjusted accordingly. The modified input file as
shown here (ref /doc/seug/chapter10/ cantilever-beam/seset/modes2e.bdf )
TITLE = List Superelement (SESET) Solution

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = SPOINT / SEQSET1 Method, Expanded Case Control

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = YES

$ output request is valid for all superelements

VECTOR(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SUBCASE 10

super = 10

SUBTITLE=CMS of SEID 10

METHOD = 10

SUBCASE 20

super = 20

SUBTITLE=CMS of SEID 20

METHOD = 20

$ only superelement 20 has constraints

SPC = 2

SUBCASE 30

super = 0

SUBTITLE=Solution of Residual

METHOD = 30

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

SPOINT,1001,thru,1021

SEQSET1,10,0,1001,thru,1021

SPOINT,2001,thru,2018

SEQSET1,20,0,2001,thru,2018

$ specify a different number of extraction modes for each superelement

EIGRL 10 15 0 MASS

EIGRL 20 12 0 MASS

EIGRL 30 10 0 MASS

Main Index
 446 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single Level Dynamic Reduction

Listing 10-8 Expanded Case Control for SPOINT / SENQSET1 Method

In this case, there is no appreciable change in the residual solution indicating that there is little effect of modal
truncation.

Free-Free Component Modes Synthesis

As discussed in Section 10.3.1.2.1, Patran supports a fixed-boundary solution only. That is to say, the
physical boundary dof are automatically assigned to the B-Set. In order to re-assign the physical boundary
dof to the C-Set, the user must manually re-assign them with the SECSET or SECSET1 entries. Free-
Boundary Dynamic Reduction (Ch. 9) discusses the theory and provides a manual solution for free-free
Component Modes Synthesis.

SECSET / SECSET1 Free Boundary Degree-of-Freedom

Defines boundary degrees-of-freedom to be free (c-set) during generalized dynamic reduction or component
mode synthesis calculations.
Formats:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SECSET SEID G1 C1 G2 C2 G3 C3
SECSET1 SEID C G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6
G7 G8 G9 -etc.-

Examples:
SECSET 3 124 1 5 23 6 15

SECSET1 5 2 135 14 6 23 24 25
122 127

Field Contents
SEID Superelement identification number. (Integer > 0)
C, Ci Component numbers of degree-of-freedoms. (Any unique combination of the Integers
1 through 6 with no embedded blanks for grid points; Integer 0 or blank for scalar
points.)
Gi Grid or scalar point identification number. (Integer > 0)

Main Index
 CHAPTER 10 447
Input and Output for Dynamic Reduction

Note: The AUTOQSET method is incompatible with free-free Component Modes Synthesis. If
boundary dof are placed in the C-Set, the following error will be issued

^^^

^^^ USER FATAL MESSAGE 9205 (PHASE0)

^^^ PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES IS REQUESTED IN THE PRESENCE OF SUPERELEMENTS WITH SECSETI OR SESUP BULK DATA

ENTRIES OR PART SUPERELEMENTS WITH CSETI, BNDFREEI OR SUPORTI ENTRIES.

^^^

Listing 10-9 Fatal Message Issued When AUTOQSET and C-Set are Specified

Therefore, for List Superelements with any boundary dof specified as free for Component Modes Synthesis,
the SPOINT / SEQSET1 method must be used.
Demonstration of Defining Interior Points in Patran (Ch. 2) demonstrates how to create the physical dof for a
superelement based on Patran Groups. Patran will automatically determine the boundary grids based on the
element connectivity. In order to perform a free-free Component Modes Synthesis, these boundary grids
must be placed in the C-Set. Patran provides a convenient method of determining the boundary grids via
the Select Boundary Nodes form as shown here.

Main Index
 448 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single Level Dynamic Reduction

Figure 10-6 Showing Boundary Grids in Patran

For List Superelements (SESET), the user can place these grids / dof into the C-Set with the SECSET1 when
creating the analysis job via direct text input.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 10 449
Input and Output for Dynamic Reduction

Figure 10-7 Defining SECSET1 in Patran for List Superelements

The resulting input file is shown here with the SECSET1 entries highlighted (ref /doc/seug/chapter10/
cantilever-beam/seset/modes2-f.bdf ):
SOL 103

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = List Superelement (SESET) Solution

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = SPOINT / SEQSET1 Method

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = YES

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Default

METHOD = 1

SPC = 2

VECTOR(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

Main Index
 450 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single Level Dynamic Reduction

SPOINT,1001,thru,1016

SEQSET1,10,0,1001,thru,1016

SPOINT,2001,thru,2016

SEQSET1,20,0,2001,thru,2016

$ place boundary in C-Set

SECSET1,10,123456,107,207

SECSET1,20,123456,104,204

Listing 10-10 Input File (partial) with SECSET1 Entries

The SEMAP does not change from the one shown in Listing 10-7 because the C-Set does not change the
physical boundary dof. The C-Set does, however, change the solution by placing the boundary dof into the
V-Set. Recall from the description of MSC Nastran Sets, in Nastran Set Definitions – The USET Table (Ch. 9), that
the V-Set defines the physical dof that are free to vibrate during Component Modes Synthesis. Of course,
this affects the component modes calculated for each superelement as shown below.
LIST SUPERELEMENT (SESET) SOLUTION MAY 13, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 12/15/10

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM SUPERELEMENT 10

SPOINT / SEQSET1 METHOD WITH C-SET SUBCASE 1

R E A L E I G E N V A L U E S

(BEFORE AUGMENTATION OF RESIDUAL VECTORS)

MODE EXTRACTION EIGENVALUE RADIANS CYCLES GENERALIZED GENERALIZED

NO. ORDER MASS STIFFNESS

1 1 -8.791685E-06 2.965078E-03 4.719067E-04 1.000000E+00 -8.791685E-06

2 2 -4.172325E-06 2.042627E-03 3.250942E-04 1.000000E+00 -4.172325E-06

3 3 4.202127E-06 2.049909E-03 3.262532E-04 1.000000E+00 4.202127E-06

4 4 4.440546E-06 2.107260E-03 3.353809E-04 1.000000E+00 4.440546E-06

5 5 4.753470E-06 2.180245E-03 3.469968E-04 1.000000E+00 4.753470E-06

6 6 1.049042E-05 3.238891E-03 5.154856E-04 1.000000E+00 1.049042E-05

7 7 4.536248E+07 6.735167E+03 1.071935E+03 1.000000E+00 4.536248E+07

8 8 1.172746E+08 1.082934E+04 1.723543E+03 1.000000E+00 1.172746E+08

9 9 2.994234E+08 1.730386E+04 2.753994E+03 1.000000E+00 2.994234E+08

10 10 4.257892E+08 2.063466E+04 3.284108E+03 1.000000E+00 4.257892E+08

LIST SUPERELEMENT (SESET) SOLUTION MAY 13, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 12/15/10

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM SUPERELEMENT 20

SPOINT / SEQSET1 METHOD WITH C-SET SUBCASE 1

R E A L E I G E N V A L U E S

(AFTER AUGMENTATION OF RESIDUAL VECTORS)

MODE EXTRACTION EIGENVALUE RADIANS CYCLES GENERALIZED GENERALIZED

NO. ORDER MASS STIFFNESS

Main Index
 CHAPTER 10 451
Input and Output for Dynamic Reduction

1 1 4.594047E+06 2.143373E+03 3.411284E+02 1.000000E+00 4.594047E+06

2 2 6.219975E+07 7.886682E+03 1.255204E+03 1.000000E+00 6.219975E+07

3 3 1.489042E+08 1.220263E+04 1.942109E+03 1.000000E+00 1.489042E+08

4 4 3.783261E+08 1.945061E+04 3.095660E+03 1.000000E+00 3.783261E+08

5 5 5.401025E+08 2.324011E+04 3.698778E+03 1.000000E+00 5.401025E+08

6 6 9.494821E+08 3.081367E+04 4.904147E+03 1.000000E+00 9.494821E+08

7 7 2.000750E+09 4.472974E+04 7.118959E+03 1.000000E+00 2.000750E+09

8 8 6.904783E+09 8.309502E+04 1.322498E+04 1.000000E+00 6.904783E+09

9 9 1.048266E+10 1.023849E+05 1.629506E+04 1.000000E+00 1.048266E+10

10 10 3.013517E+10 1.735948E+05 2.762848E+04 1.000000E+00 3.013517E+10

11 11 5.496186E+10 2.344395E+05 3.731220E+04 1.000000E+00 5.496186E+10

12 12 6.854768E+10 2.618161E+05 4.166933E+04 1.000000E+00 6.854768E+10

13 13 8.205459E+10 2.864517E+05 4.559021E+04 1.000000E+00 8.205459E+10

LIST SUPERELEMENT (SESET) SOLUTION MAY 13, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 12/15/10

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM SUPERELEMENT 0

SPOINT / SEQSET1 METHOD WITH C-SET SUBCASE 1

R E A L E I G E N V A L U E S

(AFTER AUGMENTATION OF RESIDUAL VECTORS)

MODE EXTRACTION EIGENVALUE RADIANS CYCLES GENERALIZED GENERALIZED

NO. ORDER MASS STIFFNESS

1 1 4.013306E+04 2.003324E+02 3.188389E+01 1.000000E+00 4.013306E+04

2 2 1.640732E+06 1.280910E+03 2.038632E+02 1.000000E+00 1.640732E+06

3 3 3.955552E+06 1.988857E+03 3.165364E+02 1.000000E+00 3.955552E+06

4 4 5.091842E+06 2.256511E+03 3.591349E+02 1.000000E+00 5.091842E+06

5 5 1.233339E+07 3.511893E+03 5.589351E+02 1.000000E+00 1.233339E+07

6 6 4.581940E+07 6.769002E+03 1.077320E+03 1.000000E+00 4.581940E+07

7 7 4.598342E+07 6.781108E+03 1.079247E+03 1.000000E+00 4.598342E+07

8 8 1.060017E+08 1.029571E+04 1.638613E+03 1.000000E+00 1.060017E+08

9 9 1.243820E+08 1.115267E+04 1.775002E+03 1.000000E+00 1.243820E+08

10 10 1.336136E+08 1.155913E+04 1.839693E+03 1.000000E+00 1.336136E+08

Listing 10-11 Free-Boundary Component Modes and Residual Solution

Note that the free-boundary component modes are drastically different than the fixed-boundary component
modes shown in Listing 10-5. Also note that the residual solution is not as accurate as the fixed-boundary
solution.
But why is the free-boundary solution not as accurate? Mode 1 of the free-boundary solutios is 31.83 Hz,
but it should be 31.77Hz and mode 2 is 203.9Hz, but it should be 197.1 Hz.

Main Index
 452 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single Level Dynamic Reduction

Investigation of the solution indicates that after filtering, only 4 independent component modes for
superelement 10 are retained and brought down to the residual structure. This is verified by reviewing the
Grid Point Singularity Table for Superelement 0:
LIST SUPERELEMENT (SESET) SOLUTION MAY 13, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 12/15/10

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM SUPERELEMENT 0

SPOINT / SEQSET1 METHOD WITH C-SET SUBCASE 1

G R I D P O I N T S I N G U L A R I T Y T A B L E

POINT TYPE FAILED STIFFNESS OLD USET NEW USET

ID DIRECTION RATIO EXCLUSIVE UNION EXCLUSIVE UNION

1005 S 0 0.00E+00 B F SB S *

1006 S 0 0.00E+00 B F SB S *

1007 S 0 0.00E+00 B F SB S *

1008 S 0 0.00E+00 B F SB S *

1009 S 0 0.00E+00 B F SB S *

1010 S 0 0.00E+00 B F SB S *

1011 S 0 0.00E+00 B F SB S *

1012 S 0 0.00E+00 B F SB S *

1013 S 0 0.00E+00 B F SB S *

1014 S 0 0.00E+00 B F SB S *

1015 S 0 0.00E+00 B F SB S *

1016 S 0 0.00E+00 B F SB S *

2014 S 0 0.00E+00 B F SB S *

2015 S 0 0.00E+00 B F SB S *

2016 S 0 0.00E+00 B F SB S *

Listing 10-12 Residual Structure Grid Point Singularity Table for Free-Boundary Solution

It makes sense that there are only 4 modes retained for Superelement 10 because there are 6 rigid body modes
only 4 flexible modes. Since the rigid body modes can be described by the physical dof, they are filtered
during residual vector calculations. Also there are no residual vectors added for this superelement.
FREE-BOUNDARY SOLUTION WITH EXPANDED CASE CONTROL
This indicates that there may be modal truncation – that is, there are not a sufficient number of component
modes to accurately capture the dynamic mass. Therefore, the number of modes may need to be increased
for Superelement 10. This could be accomplished by increasing the total number of modes extracted for
every superelement, but this carries the burden of calculating modes that are not necessary. Instead, expanded
Case Control can be used to modify the number of modes calculated for Superelement 10 (ref
/doc/seug/chapter10/cantilever-beam/seset/modes2-f2.bdf):
SOL 103

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = List Superelement (SESET) Solution

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = SPOINT / SEQSET1 Method with C-SET, Expanded Case Control

ECHO = NONE

Main Index
 CHAPTER 10 453
Input and Output for Dynamic Reduction

RESVEC = YES

$ output request is valid for all superelements

VECTOR(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SUBCASE 10

super = 10

SUBTITLE=CMS of SEID 10

METHOD = 10

SUBCASE 20

super = 20

SUBTITLE=CMS of SEID 20

METHOD = 20

$ only superelement 20 has constraints

SPC = 2

SUBCASE 30

super = 0

SUBTITLE=Solution of Residual

METHOD = 30

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

SPOINT,1001,thru,1026

SEQSET1,10,0,1001,thru,1026

SPOINT,2001,thru,2016

SEQSET1,20,0,2001,thru,2016

$ place boundary in C-Set

SECSET1,10,123456,107,207

SECSET1,20,123456,104,204

$ specify a different number of extraction modes for each superelement

EIGRL 10 20 0 MASS

EIGRL 20 10 0 MASS

EIGRL 30 10 0 MASS

Listing 10-13 Input for Free-Boundary Solution with Expanded Case Control

The solution of the residual structure computes the system modes as follows:
LIST SUPERELEMENT (SESET) SOLUTION MAY 13, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 12/15/10 P

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM SUPERELEMENT 0

SPOINT / SEQSET1 METHOD WITH C-SET, EXPANDED CASE CONTROL SUBCASE 30

R E A L E I G E N V A L U E S

(AFTER AUGMENTATION OF RESIDUAL VECTORS)

Main Index
 454 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single Level Dynamic Reduction

MODE EXTRACTION EIGENVALUE RADIANS CYCLES GENERALIZED GENERALIZED

NO. ORDER MASS STIFFNESS

1 1 4.008070E+04 2.002017E+02 3.186308E+01 1.000000E+00 4.008070E+04

2 2 1.617656E+06 1.271871E+03 2.024245E+02 1.000000E+00 1.617656E+06

3 3 3.890399E+06 1.972409E+03 3.139187E+02 1.000000E+00 3.890399E+06

4 4 5.065938E+06 2.250764E+03 3.582202E+02 1.000000E+00 5.065938E+06

5 5 1.219360E+07 3.491934E+03 5.557585E+02 1.000000E+00 1.219360E+07

6 6 4.523552E+07 6.725735E+03 1.070434E+03 1.000000E+00 4.523552E+07

7 7 4.581753E+07 6.768865E+03 1.077298E+03 1.000000E+00 4.581753E+07

8 8 1.243532E+08 1.115138E+04 1.774797E+03 1.000000E+00 1.243532E+08

9 9 1.299757E+08 1.140069E+04 1.814476E+03 1.000000E+00 1.299757E+08

10 10 1.386618E+08 1.177548E+04 1.874125E+03 1.000000E+00 1.386618E+08

Listing 10-14 Free-Boundary Residual Solution – Expanded Case Control

Note that in this case there is only slight improvement in the calculated modes at the residual structure. This
indicates that, for this problem, the fixed-boundary solution is superior to the free-boundary solution using
standard reduction techniques.
FREE-BOUNDARY SOLUTION WITH MHRED REDUCTION
In MSC Nastran Version 2004 an alternate method of C-Set reduction was introduced. This method was
the default in Versions 2004 through 2008, but the original method was restored in Version 2010. The
mathematical formulation is presented in the Real Eigenvalue Analysis in SubDMAPs SEMR3 and MODERS (Ch. 7) in
the MSC Nastran Reference Guide. The user interface is to simply add PARAM,MHRED,YES. This can be
done in either the Case Control or bulk data sections of the input file. When this PARAM is added to the
free-boundary solution with expanded case control, the results are much more precise when compared to the
baseline solution (ref /doc/seug/chapter10/cantilever-beam/seset/modes2-f3.bdf ).
LIST SUPERELEMENT (SESET) SOLUTION MAY 13, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 12/15/10

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM SUPERELEMENT 0

SPOINT / SEQSET1 METHOD WITH C-SET, EXPANDED CASE CONTROL, MHRED SUBCASE 30

R E A L E I G E N V A L U E S

(AFTER AUGMENTATION OF RESIDUAL VECTORS)

MODE EXTRACTION EIGENVALUE RADIANS CYCLES GENERALIZED GENERALIZED

NO. ORDER MASS STIFFNESS

1 1 3.985089E+04 1.996269E+02 3.177160E+01 1.000000E+00 3.985089E+04

2 2 1.533627E+06 1.238397E+03 1.970970E+02 1.000000E+00 1.533627E+06

3 3 3.876548E+06 1.968895E+03 3.133594E+02 1.000000E+00 3.876548E+06

4 4 5.065922E+06 2.250760E+03 3.582196E+02 1.000000E+00 5.065922E+06

5 5 1.184046E+07 3.440997E+03 5.476517E+02 1.000000E+00 1.184046E+07

6 6 4.487408E+07 6.698812E+03 1.066149E+03 1.000000E+00 4.487408E+07

7 7 4.523500E+07 6.725697E+03 1.070428E+03 1.000000E+00 4.523500E+07

8 8 1.211685E+08 1.100766E+04 1.751923E+03 1.000000E+00 1.211685E+08

9 9 1.243561E+08 1.115150E+04 1.774817E+03 1.000000E+00 1.243561E+08

10 10 1.352106E+08 1.162801E+04 1.850655E+03 1.000000E+00 1.352106E+08

Main Index
 CHAPTER 10 455
Input and Output for Dynamic Reduction

Listing 10-15 Free-Boundary Residual Solution with MHRED – Expanded Case Control

Mixed-Boundary CMS
The mixed-boundary solution implies that the physical boundary dof are split between B-Set (fixed) and C-
Set (free). The method for defining C-Set dof is the same as for the free-boundary solution above.
The expanded Case Control with MHRED example is modified so that one physical boundary grid is in the
B-Set and one grid is in the C-Set as follows (ref /doc/seug/chapter10/ cantilever-beam/seset/modes2-
m.bdf):
SOL 103

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = List Superelement (SESET) Solution

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = SPOINT / SEQSET1 Method, Mixed-Boundary, Expanded Case Control, MHRED

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = YES

param,mhred,yes

$ output request is valid for all superelements

VECTOR(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SUBCASE 10

super = 10

SUBTITLE=CMS of SEID 10

METHOD = 10

SUBCASE 20

super = 20

SUBTITLE=CMS of SEID 20

METHOD = 20

$ only superelement 20 has constraints

SPC = 2

SUBCASE 30

super = 0

SUBTITLE=Solution of Residual

METHOD = 30

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

SPOINT,1001,thru,1026

SEQSET1,10,0,1001,thru,1026

SPOINT,2001,thru,2016

SEQSET1,20,0,2001,thru,2016

Main Index
 456 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single Level Dynamic Reduction

$ place 104 and 107 boundary in C-Set

SECSET1,10,123456,107

SECSET1,20,123456,104

$ specify a different number of extraction modes for each superelement

EIGRL 10 20 0 MASS

EIGRL 20 10 0 MASS

EIGRL 30 10 0 MASS

$ Tip.10

SESET 10 108 THRU 111

SESET 10 208 THRU 211

$ Base.20

SESET 20 101 102 103 201 202 203

Listing 10-16 Input for Mixed-Boundary Solution with Expanded Case Control

Again, the residual solution compares favorably with the baseline solution.
LIST SUPERELEMENT (SESET) SOLUTION MAY 13, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 12/15/10 P

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM SUPERELEMENT 0

SPOINT / SEQSET1 METHOD, MIXED-BOUNDARY, EXPANDED CASE CONTROL, SUBCASE 30

R E A L E I G E N V A L U E S

(AFTER AUGMENTATION OF RESIDUAL VECTORS)

MODE EXTRACTION EIGENVALUE RADIANS CYCLES GENERALIZED GENERALIZED

NO. ORDER MASS STIFFNESS

1 1 3.985089E+04 1.996269E+02 3.177160E+01 1.000000E+00 3.985089E+04

2 2 1.533628E+06 1.238397E+03 1.970970E+02 1.000000E+00 1.533628E+06

3 3 3.876551E+06 1.968896E+03 3.133595E+02 1.000000E+00 3.876551E+06

4 4 5.065938E+06 2.250764E+03 3.582202E+02 1.000000E+00 5.065938E+06

5 5 1.184051E+07 3.441004E+03 5.476528E+02 1.000000E+00 1.184051E+07

6 6 4.487427E+07 6.698826E+03 1.066151E+03 1.000000E+00 4.487427E+07

7 7 4.523568E+07 6.725748E+03 1.070436E+03 1.000000E+00 4.523568E+07

8 8 1.212124E+08 1.100965E+04 1.752240E+03 1.000000E+00 1.212124E+08

9 9 1.243596E+08 1.115167E+04 1.774843E+03 1.000000E+00 1.243596E+08

10 10 1.352187E+08 1.162836E+04 1.850711E+03 1.000000E+00 1.352187E+08

Listing 10-17 Free-Boundary Residual Solution with MHRED – Expanded Case Control

PART Superelements
Whether using List Superelements or PART Superelements, the reduction process of the solution is exactly
the same. However, the input and user interface for the PART Superelements varies from the List
Superelements.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 10 457
Input and Output for Dynamic Reduction

Defining Physical Boundary and Modal DOF

The physical dof for PART superelement dynamic reduction are defined the same way they are defined for
superelement static reduction. For a review of defining physical dof, refer to Defining PART Superelements
(Ch. 2).
There are several methods available for defining the modal dof associated with Component Modes Synthesis.
PART Superelements support AUTOQSET. PARTs have a convenient method of defining the number of
modal dof with the SENQSET entry, which is an advantage compared to the List Superelements. PARTs
also support manual definition, but the format is by specifying the modal dof and Q-Set within the PART
bulk data section. The user may also connect modal dof to downstream superelements other than the
residual in mult-level superelement analysis with PARTs. These input methods are described in detail in the
sections below.

Example – Cantilever Plate

Fixed-Boundary CMS
AUTOQSET METHOD
Just as in List Superelement, Patran supports AUOTQSET for PART superelements. The Select
Superelement form provides the option to write PART superelements and select AUTOQSET as shown
below:

Figure 10-8 Selecting PART Superelements and AUTOQSET in Patran

Main Index
 458 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single Level Dynamic Reduction

The resulting input file is similar to a static input file with the exception of the entries required for modal
analysis and the AUTOQSET option (ref /doc/seug/chapter10/ cantilever-beam/parts/modes.bdf):
SOL 103

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = PART Superelement Solution

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = AUTOQSET Method

ECHO = NONE

PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES

RESVEC = YES

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Default

METHOD = 1

SPC = 2

VECTOR(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST -1

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

EIGRL 1 10 0 MASS

$ Elements and Element Properties for region : pshell.2

$ Superelement Name: Tip.10

BEGIN SUPER = 10

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST -1

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

EIGRL 1 10 0 MASS

$ Elements and Element Properties for region : pshell.3

$ Superelement Name: Base.20

BEGIN SUPER = 20

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST -1

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

EIGRL 1 10 0 MASS

$ Elements and Element Properties for region : pshell.1

ENDDATA

Main Index
 CHAPTER 10 459
Input and Output for Dynamic Reduction

Listing 10-18 Partial Input File for PART Superelement with AUTOQSET

Because the processing is performed by the PART superelement partitioning module (SEP1X – refer to
Introduction (Ch. 2)), the SEMAP is different from the List superelement partitioning. Note, as with the List
superelements, the Q-Set dof are not reported for AUTOQSET. Even though the format is reported
differently, the partitioning is exactly the same as the List superelement example.
PART SUPERELEMENT SOLUTION MAY 13, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 12/15/10 PAGE

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM

AUTOQSET METHOD

BOUNDARY SEQUENCE ASSIGNMENT TABLE

BOUNDARY

SEQUENCE ID --------------------------------- ASSIGNED TO POINT ID (SUPERELEMENT) ---------------------------------

1B 107 ( 0) 107 ( 10)

2B 207 ( 0) 207 ( 10)

3B 104 ( 0) 104 ( 20)

4B 204 ( 0) 204 ( 20)

POINT/SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST (SORTED BY POINT ID - "B" INDICATES BOUNDARY SEQUENCE ID)

INTERIOR TO

POINT ID TYPE SUPERELEMEMT ------------------------------- CONNECTED TO SUPERELEMENT ------------------------

1B G 0 10

2B G 0 10

3B G 0 20

4B G 0 20

POINT/SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST (SORTED BY FIRST POINT ID - "B" INDICATES BOUNDARY SEQUENCE ID)

FIRST INTERIOR TO

COUNT POINT ID TYPE SUPERELEMEMT ---------------------------- CONNECTED TO SUPERELEMENT ------------------------

2 1B 0 10

2 3B 0 20

POINT/SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST (SORTED BY COUNT - "B" INDICATES BOUNDARY SEQUENCE ID)

FIRST INTERIOR TO

COUNT POINT ID TYPE SUPERELEMEMT ---------------------------- CONNECTED TO SUPERELEMENT ------------------------

2 1B 0 10

2 3B 0 20

POINT/SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST (SORTED BY INTERIOR SUPERELEMENT - "B" INDICATES BOUNDARY SEQUEN

FIRST INTERIOR TO

COUNT POINT ID TYPE SUPERELEMEMT ---------------------------- CONNECTED TO SUPERELEMENT ------------------------

Main Index
 460 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single Level Dynamic Reduction

2 1B 0 10

2 3B 0 20

SUPERELEMENT 0

TYPE = RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

LIST OF INTERIOR POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF INTERIOR POINT = 4 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9-

1 1B 2B 3B 4B

SUPERELEMENT 0

TYPE = RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

LIST OF ELEMENTS ( TOTAL NO. OF ELEMENTS = 3 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9-

1 4 5 6

SUPERELEMENT 10

TYPE = PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

LIST OF EXTERIOR POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF EXTERIOR POINT = 2 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9-

1 1B 2B

SUPERELEMENT 20

TYPE = PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

LIST OF EXTERIOR POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF EXTERIOR POINT = 2 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9-

1 3B 4B

Listing 10-19 SEMAP for PART Superelement with AUTOQSET

The superelement reduction, residual assembly, solution, and data recovery follow the same path as the List
Superelement example with AUTOQSET and the answers are exactly the same as shown in Listing 10-5 and
therefore, will not be repeated here.
SENQSET METHOD
Since Patran does not support the SENQSET method directly, the entries must be added manually. (Note:
any Direct Text Input that is entered in the Patran bulk data section will be specified in every superelement.
The SENQSET entry is only valid in the main bulk data section, so using Patran Direct Text Input for
SENQSET will result in a FATAL message).
In this case, the number of modes requested is 10. The Q-Set dof allocation for each superelement should
be large enough to account for normal modes plus Residual Vectors. Since there are no explicit static loads,
there could be a possibility of only 6 residual vectors associated with inertia loads. Refer to the RESVEC Case
Control command and the Residual Vector (Modal Augmentation) (Ch. 7) in the MSC Nastran Dynamic Analysis
User’s Guide for more details on residual vectors. The manual modification to the input file is shown here
(ref /doc/seug/chapter10/cantilever-beam/parts modes2.bdf)

Main Index
 CHAPTER 10 461
Input and Output for Dynamic Reduction

:
SOL 103

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = PART Superelement Solution

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = SENQSET Method

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = YES

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Default

METHOD = 1

SPC = 2

VECTOR(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

$ manually add these entries to the main bulk data section

SENQSET,10,16

SENQSET,20,16

Listing 10-20 Input File (partial) for SENQSET Method

The SEMAP lists the internally generated Q-Set dof when SENQSET is used.
PART SUPERELEMENT SOLUTION MAY 13, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 12/15/ CREATED
BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM

SENQSET METHOD

SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE (SORTED BY SEID)

PRIMARY PROCESS DOWNSTREAM

SUPERELEMENT SUPERELEMENT ORDER SUPERELEMENT TYPE LABEL

------------ ------------ ------- ------------ ----------------------------- -----------------------------------------

0 0 3 0 RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

10 0 1 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

20 0 2 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE (SORTED BY PROCESS ORDER)

PRIMARY PROCESS DOWNSTREAM

SUPERELEMENT SUPERELEMENT ORDER SUPERELEMENT TYPE LABEL

------------ ------------ ------- ------------ ----------------------------- -----------------------------------------

10 0 1 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

20 0 2 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

0 0 3 0 RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

TABLE OF DOWNSTREAM SUPERELEMENTS FOR EACH SUPERELEMENT

Main Index
 462 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single Level Dynamic Reduction

SUPERELEMENT DOWNSTREAM SUPERELEMENTS IN DOWNSTREAM ORDER

------------ --------------------------------------------------------------------------------

10 0

20 0

PART SUPERELEMENT SOLUTION MAY 13, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 12/15/10

S U P E R E L E M E N T T R E E

( CONFIGURATION = SINGLE LEVEL NO. LEVELS = 1 NO. TIPS = 2 )

TIP LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 10

2 20

BOUNDARY SEQUENCE ASSIGNMENT TABLE

BOUNDARY

SEQUENCE ID --------------------------------- ASSIGNED TO POINT ID (SUPERELEMENT) ---------------------------------

1B 107 ( 0) 107 ( 10)

2B 207 ( 0) 207 ( 10)

3B 104 ( 0) 104 ( 20)

4B 204 ( 0) 204 ( 20)

POINT/SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST (SORTED BY POINT ID - "B" INDICATES BOUNDARY SEQUENCE ID)

INTERIOR TO

POINT ID TYPE SUPERELEMEMT ------------------------------- CONNECTED TO SUPERELEMENT --------------------

1B G 0 10

2B G 0 10

3B G 0 20

4B G 0 20

147477001B Q 0 20 {these are the internally generated Q-Set dof}

147477002B Q 0 20

147477003B Q 0 20

147477004B Q 0 20

147477005B Q 0 20

147477006B Q 0 20

147477007B Q 0 20

147477008B Q 0 20

147477009B Q 0 20

147477010B Q 0 20

147477011B Q 0 20

147477012B Q 0 20

147477013B Q 0 20

147477014B Q 0 20

147477015B Q 0 20

Main Index
 CHAPTER 10 463
Input and Output for Dynamic Reduction

147477016B Q 0 20

147480001B Q 0 10

147480002B Q 0 10

147480003B Q 0 10

147480004B Q 0 10

147480005B Q 0 10

147480006B Q 0 10

147480007B Q 0 10

147480008B Q 0 10

147480009B Q 0 10

147480010B Q 0 10

147480011B Q 0 10

147480012B Q 0 10

147480013B Q 0 10

147480014B Q 0 10

147480015B Q 0 10

147480016B Q 0 10

POINT/SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST (SORTED BY FIRST POINT ID - "B" INDICATES BOUNDARY SEQUENCE ID)

FIRST INTERIOR TO

COUNT POINT ID TYPE SUPERELEMEMT ------------------------------- CONNECTED TO SUPERELEMENT --------------------

18 1B 0 10

18 3B 0 20

POINT/SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST (SORTED BY COUNT - "B" INDICATES BOUNDARY SEQUENCE ID)

FIRST INTERIOR TO

COUNT POINT ID TYPE SUPERELEMEMT ------------------------------- CONNECTED TO SUPERELEMENT ---------------------

18 1B 0 10

18 3B 0 20

POINT/SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST (SORTED BY INTERIOR SUPERELEMENT - "B" INDICATES BOUNDARY SEQUENCE ID)

FIRST INTERIOR TO

COUNT POINT ID TYPE SUPERELEMEMT ------------------------------- CONNECTED TO SUPERELEMENT ----------------

18 1B 0 10

18 3B 0 20

SUPERELEMENT 0

TYPE = RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

LIST OF INTERIOR POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF INTERIOR POINT = 36 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 1B 2B 3B 4B 147477001B 147477002B 147477003B 147477004B 147477005B 147477006B

11 147477007B 147477008B 147477009B 147477010B 147477011B 147477012B 147477013B 147477014B 147477015B

147477016B

21 147480001B 147480002B 147480003B 147480004B 147480005B 147480006B 147480007B 147480008B 147480009B

147480010B

Main Index
 464 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single Level Dynamic Reduction

31 147480011B 147480012B 147480013B 147480014B 147480015B 147480016B

SUPERELEMENT 0

TYPE = RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

LIST OF ELEMENTS ( TOTAL NO. OF ELEMENTS = 3 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9-

1 4 5 6

SUPERELEMENT 10

TYPE = PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

LIST OF EXTERIOR POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF EXTERIOR POINT = 18 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 1B 2B 147480001B 147480002B 147480003B 147480004B 147480005B 147480006B 147480007B

147480008B

11 147480009B 147480010B 147480011B 147480012B 147480013B 147480014B 147480015B 147480016B

SUPERELEMENT 20

TYPE = PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

LIST OF EXTERIOR POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF EXTERIOR POINT = 18 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 3B 4B 147477001B 147477002B 147477003B 147477004B 147477005B 147477006B 147477007B

147477008B

11 147477009B 147477010B 147477011B 147477012B 147477013B 147477014B 147477015B 147477016B

Listing 10-21 SEMAP for PART Superelement with SENQSET

The superelement reduction, residual assembly, solution, and data recovery follow the same path as the List
Superelement example with SPOINT / SEQSET1 and the answers compare favorable to the baseline solution
in Listing 10-2, and therefore, will not be repeated here.
SPOINT / QSET1 METHOD WITH CMS ON RESIDUAL
The maximum flexibility in defining the Q-Set for PART Superelement Component Modes Synthesis is with
the SPOINT / QSET1 method. In this method, the user defines the dof with the SPOINT entry and assigns
them to the Q-Set with the QSET1 entry (QSET could also be used, but QSET1 is the most common
method because of its convenient input format).
Since Patran does not support the SPOINT / QSET1 method directly, the user can specify the SPOINT /
QSET1 entries in Direct Text Input as shown below:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 10 465
Input and Output for Dynamic Reduction

Figure 10-9 Example of Defining the SPOINT / QSET1 Method in Patran

In this case, the number of modes requested is 10. The reason that 16 Q-Set dof are allocated for each
superelement is because there are 6 dof added for Residual Vectors. Since there are no explicit static loads,
there could be a possibility of only 6 residual vectors associated with inertia loads. Refer to the RESVEC
Case Control command and the Residual Vector (Modal Augmentation) (Ch. 7) in the MSC Nastran Dynamic
Analysis User’s Guide for more details on residual vectors. The Direct Text Input for SPOINT / QSET1 are
added to the input file as shown here (ref /doc/seug/chapter10/cantilever-beam/parts/modes3.bdf):
SOL 103

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = PART Superelement Solution

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = SPOINT / QSET1 Method

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = YES

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Default

METHOD = 1

SPC = 2

VECTOR(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

Main Index
 466 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single Level Dynamic Reduction

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

SPOINT,1001,thru,1016

QSET1,0,1001,thru,1016

PARAM POST -1

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

EIGRL 1 10 0 MASS

$ Superelement Name: Tip.10

BEGIN SUPER = 10

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

SPOINT,1001,thru,1016

QSET1,0,1001,thru,1016

PARAM POST -1

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

EIGRL 1 10 0 MASS

$ Superelement Name: Base.20

BEGIN SUPER = 20

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

SPOINT,1001,thru,1016

QSET1,0,1001,thru,1016

PARAM POST -1

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

EIGRL 1 10 0 MASS

ENDDATA

Listing 10-22 Partial Input File for SPOINT / QSET1 Method

Note that the Direct Text Input is applied to the bulk data section for the residual and each PART. This
means that the solution will also perform Component Modes Synthesis on the residual structure (the same
solution operations as the AUTOQSET method).
Even though the SPOINT IDs are common among superelements, the SEMAP keeps track of the IDs and
assigns different boundary sequence numbers to each.
PART SUPERELEMENT SOLUTION MAY 13, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 12/15/10 PAGE

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM

SPOINT / QSET METHOD

BOUNDARY SEQUENCE ASSIGNMENT TABLE

BOUNDARY

SEQUENCE ID --------------------------------- ASSIGNED TO POINT ID (SUPERELEMENT) ---------------------------------

1B 1001 ( 10)

2B 1002 ( 10)

Main Index
 CHAPTER 10 467
Input and Output for Dynamic Reduction

3B 1003 ( 10)

4B 1004 ( 10)

5B 1005 ( 10)

6B 1006 ( 10)

7B 1007 ( 10)

8B 1008 ( 10)

9B 1009 ( 10)

10B 1010 ( 10)

11B 1011 ( 10)

12B 1012 ( 10)

13B 1013 ( 10)

14B 1014 ( 10)

15B 1015 ( 10)

16B 1016 ( 10)

17B 107 ( 0) 107 ( 10)

18B 207 ( 0) 207 ( 10)

19B 1001 ( 20)

20B 1002 ( 20)

21B 1003 ( 20)

22B 1004 ( 20)

23B 1005 ( 20)

24B 1006 ( 20)

25B 1007 ( 20)

26B 1008 ( 20)

27B 1009 ( 20)

28B 1010 ( 20)

29B 1011 ( 20)

30B 1012 ( 20)

31B 1013 ( 20)

32B 1014 ( 20)

33B 1015 ( 20)

34B 1016 ( 20)

35B 104 ( 0) 104 ( 20)

36B 204 ( 0) 204 ( 20)

POINT/SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST (SORTED BY POINT ID - "B" INDICATES BOUNDARY SEQUENCE ID)

INTERIOR TO

POINT ID TYPE SUPERELEMEMT ------------------------------- CONNECTED TO SUPERELEMENT ---------------------

1B SQ 0 10

2B SQ 0 10

3B SQ 0 10

4B SQ 0 10

5B SQ 0 10

6B SQ 0 10

Main Index
 468 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single Level Dynamic Reduction

7B SQ 0 10

8B SQ 0 10

9B SQ 0 10

10B SQ 0 10

11B SQ 0 10

12B SQ 0 10

13B SQ 0 10

14B SQ 0 10

15B SQ 0 10

16B SQ 0 10

17B G 0 10

18B G 0 10

19B SQ 0 20

20B SQ 0 20

21B SQ 0 20

22B SQ 0 20

23B SQ 0 20

24B SQ 0 20

25B SQ 0 20

26B SQ 0 20

27B SQ 0 20

28B SQ 0 20

29B SQ 0 20

30B SQ 0 20

31B SQ 0 20

32B SQ 0 20

33B SQ 0 20

34B SQ 0 20

35B G 0 20

36B G 0 20

POINT/SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST (SORTED BY FIRST POINT ID - "B" INDICATES BOUNDARY SEQUENCE ID)

FIRST INTERIOR TO

COUNT POINT ID TYPE SUPERELEMEMT ------------------------------- CONNECTED TO SUPERELEMENT ---------------------

18 1B 0 10

18 19B 0 20

POINT/SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST (SORTED BY COUNT - "B" INDICATES BOUNDARY SEQUENCE ID)

FIRST INTERIOR TO

COUNT POINT ID TYPE SUPERELEMEMT ------------------------------- CONNECTED TO SUPERELEMENT ---------------------

18 1B 0 10

18 19B 0 20

Main Index
 CHAPTER 10 469
Input and Output for Dynamic Reduction

POINT/SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST (SORTED BY INTERIOR SUPERELEMENT - "B" INDICATES BOUNDARY SEQUEN

FIRST INTERIOR TO

COUNT POINT ID TYPE SUPERELEMEMT ------------------------------- CONNECTED TO SUPERELEMENT ---------------------

18 1B 0 10

18 19B 0 20

SUPERELEMENT 0

TYPE = RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

LIST OF EXTERIOR POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF EXTERIOR POINT = 32 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9-

1 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B

11 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B 16B 19B 20B 21B

21 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B 28B 29B 30B 31B

31 33B 34B

SUPERELEMENT 0

TYPE = RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

LIST OF INTERIOR POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF INTERIOR POINT = 4 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9-

1 17B 18B 35B 36B

SUPERELEMENT 0

TYPE = RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

LIST OF ELEMENTS ( TOTAL NO. OF ELEMENTS = 3 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9-

1 4 5 6

SUPERELEMENT 10

TYPE = PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

LIST OF EXTERIOR POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF EXTERIOR POINT = 18 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9-

1 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B

11 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B 16B 17B 18B

SUPERELEMENT 20

TYPE = PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

LIST OF EXTERIOR POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF EXTERIOR POINT = 18 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9-

1 19B 20B 21B 22B 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B

11 29B 30B 31B 32B 33B 34B 35B 36B

Listing 10-23 SEMAP for SPOINT / QSET1 Method

Main Index
 470 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single Level Dynamic Reduction

As mentioned above, this model is equivalent to the AUTOQSET method. Therefore, the superelement
reduction, residual assembly, solution, and data recovery follow the same path as the List Superelement
example with AUTOQSET and the answers are exactly the same as shown in Listing 10-5, and therefore, will
not be repeated here.
SPOINT / QSET1 METHOD WITHOUT CMS ON RESIDUAL
It is not necessary to perform Component Modes Synthesis on the residual structure, so the SPOINT /
QSET1 entries can be removed from the main bulk data section. This solution will follow the same path as
the SPOINT / SEQSET1 solution and is not included here. The example file is /doc/seug/chapter10/
cantilever-beam/parts/modes4.bdf.

Free-Boundary CMS
As discussed in Fixed-Boundary Component Modes Synthesis, Patran supports a fixed-boundary solution only.
That is to say, the physical boundary dof are automatically assigned to the B-Set. For PART superelements,
in order to re-assign the physical boundary dof to the C-Set, the user must manually re-assign them with the
CSET, CSET1, BNDFREE, or BNDFRE1 entries. Free-Boundary Dynamic Reduction (Ch. 9) discusses the
theory and provides a manual solution for free-free Component Modes Synthesis.

BNDFRFEE, BNDFRE1, CSET, CSET1 Free Boundary Degrees-of-Freedom

Defines analysis set (a-set) degrees-of-freedom to be free (c-set) during generalized dynamic reduction or
component mode synthesis calculations.
Formats:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BNDFREE ID1 C1 ID2 C2 ID3 C3 ID4 C4
CSET ID1 C1 ID2 C2 ID3 C3 ID4 C4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BNDFRE1 C ID1 ID2 ID3 ID4 ID5 ID6 ID7
ID8 ID9 -etc.-
CSET1 C ID1 ID2 ID3 ID4 ID5 ID6 ID7
ID8 ID9 ID10 -etc.-

Examples:
BNDFREE 124 1 5 23 6 16
CSET 124 1 5 23 6 16

Main Index
 CHAPTER 10 471
Input and Output for Dynamic Reduction

BNDFRE1 124 1 5 7 6 9 12 122

127
CSET1 124 1 5 7 6 9 12 122
127

Alternate Formats and Example:

BNDFIX1 C ID1 THRU ID2
”
BNDFIX1 3 6 THRU 32

CSET1 C ID1 THRU” ID2

CSET1 3 6 THRU 32

CSET1 “ALL”
CSET1 ALL

Field Contents
C Component numbers. (Integer zero or blank for scalar points, or any unique
combinations of the Integers 1 through 6 for grid points with no embedded blanks.)
IDi Grid or scalar point identification numbers. (Integer > 0; For “THRU” option, ID1<
ID2)

As discussed in the previous section, the Patran Direct Text Input for PART superelements will apply to each
superelement, so the user must modify the input file manually. The examples shown below are similar to the
examples for the Fixed-Boundary Component Modes Synthesis in the List Superelement sections above, with
the addition of the SENQSET Method which is only available with PART Superelements.
FREE BOUNDARY SOLUTION WITH AUTOQSET METHOD
As noted before the AUTOQSET Method is incompatible with the C-Set.
FREE-BOUNDARY SOLUTION WITH SENQSET METHOD and MHRED
In this example, the Fixed-Boundary SENQSET is modified to add the appropriate BNDFRE1 entries. The
alternate reduction method MHRED is used as described in the List superelement section above and the
number of component modes for Superelement 10 is set to 20. Note that Patran can be used to display the

Main Index
 472 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single Level Dynamic Reduction

boundary grids as shown in Figure 10-6. The example file is at /doc/seug/chapter10/cantilever-

beam/parts/modes2.bdf.
SOL 103

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = PART Superelement Solution

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = SENQSET Method, Free-Boundary CMS

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = YES

param,mhred,yes

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Default

METHOD = 1

SPC = 2

VECTOR(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

$ manually add these entries to the main bulk data section

SENQSET,10,26

SENQSET,20,16

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST -1

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

EIGRL 1 10 0 MASS

$ Superelement Name: Tip.10

BEGIN SUPER = 10

$ Manually add the BNDFRE1 entry

BNDFRE1,123456,107,207

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST -1

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

EIGRL 1 20 0 MASS

$ Superelement Name: Base.20

BEGIN SUPER = 20

$ Manually add the BNDFRE1 entry

BNDFRE1,123456,104,204

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST -1

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

EIGRL 1 10 0 MASS

Main Index
 CHAPTER 10 473
Input and Output for Dynamic Reduction

ENDDATA

Listing 10-24 PART Superelement Free-Boundary Input File with SENQSET

SPOINT / BNDFRE1 METHOD

The manual SPOINT, BNDFRE1 method is set up similarly (ref /doc/seug/chapter10/cantilever-
beam/parts/modes-f2.bdf)

SPOINT / BNDFRE1 METHOD

The manual SPOINT, BNDFRE1 method is set up similarly (ref /doc/seug/chapter10/ cantilever-beam/parts/modes-f2.bdf)

SOL 103

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = PART Superelement Solution

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = SPOINT / QSET Method, Free-Boundary CMS

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = YES

param,mhred,yes

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Default

METHOD = 1

SPC = 2

VECTOR(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST -1

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

EIGRL 1 10 0 MASS

$ Superelement Name: Tip.10

BEGIN SUPER = 10

$ Manually add the SPOINT, QSET1, and BNDFRE1 entries

BNDFRE1,123456,107,207

SPOINT,1001,thru,1026

QSET1,0,1001,thru,1026

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST -1

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

EIGRL 1 20 0 MASS

$ Superelement Name: Base.20

Main Index
 474 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single Level Dynamic Reduction

BEGIN SUPER = 20

$ Manually add the SPOINT, QSET1, and BNDFRE1 entries

BNDFRE1,123456,104,204

SPOINT,1001,thru,1016

QSET1,0,1001,thru,1016

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST -1

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

EIGRL 1 10 0 MASS

ENDDATA

Listing 10-25 PART Superelement Free-Boundary Input File with SPOINT /QSET1

SPOINT / BNDFRE1 METHOD, EXPANDED CASE CONTROL

The equivalent expanded Case Control model is /doc/seug/chapter10/cantilever-beam/parts/modes-f3.bdf:
SOL 103

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = PART Superelement Solution

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = SPOINT / QSET Method, Free-Boundary CMS, Expanded Case Control

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = YES

param,mhred,yes

$ output request is valid for all superelements

VECTOR(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SUBCASE 10

super = 10

SUBTITLE=CMS of SEID 10

METHOD = 10

SUBCASE 20

super = 20

SUBTITLE=CMS of SEID 20

METHOD = 20

$ only superelement 20 has constraints

SPC = 2

SUBCASE 30

super = 0

SUBTITLE=Solution of Residual

METHOD = 30

Main Index
 CHAPTER 10 475
Input and Output for Dynamic Reduction

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST -1

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

EIGRL 30 10 0 MASS

$ Superelement Name: Tip.10

BEGIN SUPER = 10

$ Manually add the SPOINT, QSET1, and BNDFRE1 entries

BNDFRE1,123456,107,207

SPOINT,1001,thru,1026

QSET1,0,1001,thru,1026

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST -1

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

EIGRL 10 20 0 MASS

$ Superelement Name: Base.20

BEGIN SUPER = 20

$ Manually add the SPOINT, QSET1, and BNDFRE1 entries

BNDFRE1,123456,104,204

SPOINT,1001,thru,1016

QSET1,0,1001,thru,1016

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST -1

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

EIGRL 20 10 0 MASS

ENDDATA

Listing 10-26 PART Superelement Free-Boundary Input File with SPOINT / QSET1 and Expanded Case Control

Mixed-Boundary CMS
The mixed-boundary solution implies that the physical boundary dof are split between B-Set (fixed) and C-
Set (free). The method for defining C-Set dof is the same as for the free-boundary solution above.
The expanded Case Control with MHRED example is modified so that one physical boundary grid is in the
B-Set and one grid is in the C-Set as follows (ref /doc/seug/chapter10/ cantilever-beam/parts/modes-m.bdf )
SOL 103

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = PART Superelement Solution

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

Main Index
 476 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Single Level Dynamic Reduction

LABEL = SPOINT / QSET Method, Mixed Boundary CMS, Expanded Case Control

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = YES

param,mhred,yes

$ output request is valid for all superelements

VECTOR(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SUBCASE 10

super = 10

SUBTITLE=CMS of SEID 10

METHOD = 10

SUBCASE 20

super = 20

SUBTITLE=CMS of SEID 20

METHOD = 20

$ only superelement 20 has constraints

SPC = 2

SUBCASE 30

super = 0

SUBTITLE=Solution of Residual

METHOD = 30

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST -1

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

EIGRL 30 10 0 MASS

$ Superelement Name: Tip.10

BEGIN SUPER = 10

$ Manually add the SPOINT, QSET1, and BNDFRE1 entries

BNDFRE1,123456,107

SPOINT,1001,thru,1026

QSET1,0,1001,thru,1026

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST -1

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

EIGRL 10 20 0 MASS

$ Superelement Name: Base.20

BEGIN SUPER = 20

$ Manually add the SPOINT, QSET1, and BNDFRE1 entries

BNDFRE1,123456,104

Main Index
 CHAPTER 10 477
Input and Output for Dynamic Reduction

SPOINT,1001,thru,1016

QSET1,0,1001,thru,1016

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST -1

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

EIGRL 20 10 0 MASS

ENDDATA

Listing 10-27 PART Superelement Mixed-Boundary Input File with SPOINT / QSET1 and Expanded Case
Control

External Superelements
The Component Modes Synthesis examples for External Superelements are contained in Chapter 12,
External Superelement Examples in Modal Examples (Ch. 12).

Multi-Level Dynamic Reduction

Multi-level dynamic reduction is desirable for many models, though not required. As in static analysis, using
a multi-level reduction reduces the size of the residual structure (resulting in a faster solution time for model
change restarts). However, in dynamic analysis multi-level reduction can be used to determine how sub-
assemblies perform before performing the full system-level solution.
A good example of a multi-level reduction is the human arm. The hand cantilevers from the wrist, thus fixed-
boundary modes of the hand behave expected. Then, looking at the forearm, it makes sense to create a sub-
assembly (also referred to as a collector superelement) that includes the effects of both the forearm and the
hand. Once the component modes of the hand-forearm sub-assembly are computed, it is attached to the
upper arm for the final assembly modes.
In contrast, as single-level reduction of the arm will reduce the hand independently of the forearm. Each
reduction will occur independently and the coupled effects are not computed until the final assembly. This
means that the user may not need to carry more component modes of the forearm since they are calculated
with a fixed-boundary. When using a collector superelement sub-assembly, the dynamic behavior and modal
cut-off frequency is much easier to understand.
This section builds on the static muli-level superelement reduction contained in CHAPTER 7. The only
difference between static multi-level superelement analysis and dynamic multi-level superelement analysis is
in defining the entries associated to Component Modes Synthesis described in the preceding sections.

Defining the Superelement Tree

By default, MSC Nastran will perform a single-level superelement analysis – that is, every superelement is
attached to the residual structure by default. In multi-level superelement analysis, one superelement can be
directly connected to another.

Main Index
 478 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Multi-Level Dynamic Reduction

As with multi-level static superelements, the superelement tree for multi-level dynamic List (SESET)
Superelements is defined with the DTI, SETREE entry.

DTI,SETREE Superelement Tree Definition

Specifies superelement tree that determines the superelement processing order.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DT SETREE “1” SEUP1 SEDWN1 SEUP2 SEDWN2 SEUP3 SEDWN3
I
SEUP4 SEDWN4 SEUP5 SEDWN5 -etc.-

Example:
DTI SETREE 1 1 14 2 14 3 14
4 14 14 0

Field Contents
SEUPi Identification number of the superelement upstream from SEDWNi. (Integer > 0)
SEDWNi Identification number of the uperelement into which SEUPi is assembled. (Integer 0)

In the example above, the following superelement tree is defined:

Figure 10-10 DTI, SETREE Schematic Example

Main Index
 CHAPTER 10 479
Input and Output for Dynamic Reduction

Multi-Level PART superelements offer a more convenient input format with the SETREE entry.

SETREE Superelement Tree Definition (Alternate Form of DTI,SETREE)

Specifies superelement reduction order.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SETREE SEID SEUP1 SEUP2 SEUP3 SEUP4 SEUP5 SEUP6 SEUP7
SEUP8 SEUP9 -etc.-

Example:
SETREE 400 10 20 30 40

Field Contents
SEID Partitioned superelement identification number of a downstream superelement.
(Integer > 0)
SEUPi Identification number of superelements that are upstream of SEID. (Integer > 0)

In the example above, the following superelement tree is defined:

Figure 10-11 SETREE Schematic Example

Main Index
 480 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Multi-Level Dynamic Reduction

If a superelement is not referenced on the DTI,SETREE or SETREE entry, then the manner in which it is
handled depends on the type of that superelement.

List Superelements
DTI, SETREE
 A List Superelement that is unreferenced in the DTI,SETREE will be automatically attached to the
residual structure if all of its exterior points belong to the residual. However, if one or more of its
exterior points do not belong to the residual, then the program will terminate with a user fatal error
complaining that one of more of the superelements are not in the same path.
SETREE
 SETREE will only be processed if the new superelement partitioning is requested by using BEGIN
SUPER. (for details refer to the note on SEP1X – in Introduction (Ch. 2))
 A List Superelement that is unreferenced in the SETREE will be automatically attached to the
residual structure if all of its exterior points belong to the residual. However, if one or more of its
exterior points do not belong to the residual, then the program will terminate with a user fatal error
complaining that one of more of the superelements are not in the same path.

PART Superelements
DTI, SETREE
 A PART Superelement that is unreferenced in the DTI,SETREE will be automatically attached to
the residual structure if all of its exterior points belong to the residual. However, if one or more of its
exterior points do not belong to the residual, then the program will terminate with a user fatal error
complaining that one of more of the superelements are not in the same path.
SETREE
 SETREE will only be processed if the new superelement partitioning is requested by using BEGIN
SUPER. (for details refer to the note on SEP1X – in Introduction (Ch. 2))
 A PART Superelement that is unreferenced in the SETREE will be automatically attached to the
residual structure if all of its exterior points belong to the residual. However, if one or more of its
exterior points do not belong to the residual, then the program will terminate with a user fatal error
complaining that one of more of the superelements are not in the same path.

Multi-Level Superelement Component Modes Synthesis Connection

As with the single-level dynamic reduction examples above, the modal dof associated to the Component
Modes Synthesis must be assigned. In multi-level superelement analysis, the user has the option of connecting
the superelement component modes to the downstream superelement or to the residual. Common practice
is to assign the component modes as interior dof in the next downstream superelement of the superelement
tree, although it is possible to assign the component modes as internal dof to the residual structure from any
level. The examples will only consider assigning modal dof to the next downstream superelement in the tree.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 10 481
Input and Output for Dynamic Reduction

Note that for a model with BEGIN BULK and List Superelements only can use either GRIDs or SPOINTs
to store the component modes. However, MSC Nastran requires that component modes defined with
SPOINTs must be connected directly to internal dof of the residual structure. In order
However, a model with BEGIN SUPER requires that SPOINTs are used to store the Q-Set component
modes. Models with BEGIN SUPER are permitted to pass SPOINTs to the downstream superelement
(instead of the residual).

Multi-Level Modal Reduction Example (fly swatter)

For this set of examples, the double headed flyswatter model introduced in Superelement Partitioning (Ch. 2),
will be used.

Figure 10-12 Flyswatter Model for Dynamic Multi-Level Superelement Reduction Examples

In the example below, the following figure demonstrates the schematic of the superelement tree that will be
used.

Main Index
 482 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Multi-Level Dynamic Reduction

Figure 10-13 Flyswatter Multi-Level Superelement Reduction Schematic

The first 10 system modes for a non-superelement baseline solution are as follows (ref
/doc/seug/chapter10/flyswatter/baseline/modes.bdf )
R E A L E I G E N V A L U E S

MODE EXTRACTION EIGENVALUE RADIANS CYCLES GENERALIZED GENERALIZED

NO. ORDER MASS STIFFNESS

1 1 5.771180E+02 2.402328E+01 3.823424E+00 1.000000E+00 5.771180E+02

2 2 1.053431E+03 3.245661E+01 5.165629E+00 1.000000E+00 1.053431E+03

3 3 1.582892E+03 3.978558E+01 6.332071E+00 1.000000E+00 1.582892E+03

4 4 3.441425E+03 5.866366E+01 9.336612E+00 1.000000E+00 3.441425E+03

5 5 1.816830E+04 1.347899E+02 2.145247E+01 1.000000E+00 1.816830E+04

6 6 3.090139E+04 1.757879E+02 2.797752E+01 1.000000E+00 3.090139E+04

7 7 4.377879E+04 2.092338E+02 3.330060E+01 1.000000E+00 4.377879E+04

8 8 5.775877E+04 2.403305E+02 3.824979E+01 1.000000E+00 5.775877E+04

9 9 5.928398E+04 2.434830E+02 3.875153E+01 1.000000E+00 5.928398E+04

10 10 8.165628E+04 2.857556E+02 4.547942E+01 1.000000E+00 8.165628E+04

Listing 10-28 Flyswatter Baseline Modal Solution (No Superelements)

The mode shapes are as follows:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 10 483
Input and Output for Dynamic Reduction

Figure 10-14 Flyswatter Baseline Mode Shapes (No Superelements)

List Superelements
The superelements are defined in Patran by using Groups, refer to Demonstration of Defining Interior Points in
Patran (Ch. 2) to review the superelement creation in Patran. In the case of List (SESET) Superelements with
BEGIN BULK, the DTI,SETREE must be used to specify multi-level superelement analysis. Patran does
not support DTI,SETREE with a form, so it must be entered into the Direct Text Input as follows:

Main Index
 484 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Multi-Level Dynamic Reduction

Figure 10-15 Defining DTI,SETREE for List Superelements in Patran

The resulting input file is shown below (ref /doc/seug/chapter10/flyswatter/seset/modes-autoq.bdf)

SOL 103

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = Flyswatter Modes

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = List (SESET), Multi-Level, AUTOQSET

ECHO = NONE

PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES

RESVEC = NO

SUBCASE 1

$ Subcase name : Default

SUBTITLE=Default

METHOD = 1

SPC = 2

VECTOR(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

DTI,SETREE,1,1,3,3,5,5,0,

,2,4,4,6,6,0

PARAM POST -1

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

EIGRL 1 10 0

$ Elements and Element Properties for region : pshell.1

PSHELL 1 1 1. 1 1

$[superelement seset definitions below]

Main Index
 CHAPTER 10 485
Input and Output for Dynamic Reduction

$ SEID.1

SESET 1 33 34 37 38

SESET 1 45 THRU 50

SESET 1 57 THRU 62

SESET 1 69 THRU 74

SESET 1 81 THRU 86

SESET 1 93 THRU 98

$ SEID.2

SESET 2 39 40 43 44

SESET 2 51 THRU 56

SESET 2 63 THRU 68

SESET 2 75 THRU 80

SESET 2 87 THRU 92

SESET 2 99 THRU 104

$ SEID.3

SESET 3 29 30

$ SEID.4

SESET 4 31 32

$ SEID.5

SESET 5 9 THRU 12

SESET 5 21 22

$ SEID.6

SESET 6 15 THRU 18

SESET 6 25 26

$ SEID.7

SESET 7 1 THRU 8

$ Loads for Load Case : Default

SPCADD 2 1

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : grid.ps

SPC1 1 123456 1 2

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

ENDDATA e4104518

Listing 10-29 Input File for Multi-Level List Superelement

The SEMAP for superelement tree shows that the superelements are attached in a multi-level tree.
*** USER WARNING MESSAGE 4183 (SEP1A)

TABLE SETREE DID NOT SPECIFY DOWNSTREAM CONNECTION FOR THE FOLLOWING SUPERELEMENTS.

USER INFORMATION: A RESIDUAL-ONLY MODEL IS ASSUMED.

FLYSWATTER MODES MAY 15, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 12/15/10

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM

LIST (SESET), MULTI-LEVEL, AUTOQSET

SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE

Main Index
 486 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Multi-Level Dynamic Reduction

(SORTED BY SEID)

INDEX SUPERELEMENT PROCESS ORDER DOWNSTREAM SE SUPERELEMENT TYPE

0 0 8 0 RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

1 1 2 3 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

2 2 1 4 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

3 3 4 5 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

4 4 3 6 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

5 5 7 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

6 6 6 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

7 7 5 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE

(SORTED BY PROCESS ORDER)

INDEX SUPERELEMENT PROCESS ORDER DOWNSTREAM SE SUPERELEMENT TYPE

0 2 1 4 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

1 1 2 3 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

2 4 3 6 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

3 3 4 5 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

4 7 5 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

5 6 6 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

6 5 7 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

7 0 8 0 RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

TABLE OF DOWNSTREAM CONNECTIONS FOR EACH SUPERELEMENT

INDEX SE ID ID-S OF DOWNSTREAM CONNECTIONS IN DOWNSTREAM ORDER

1 1 3 5 0

2 2 4 6 0

3 3 5 0

4 4 6 0

5 5 0

6 6 0

7 7 0

S U P E R E L E M E N T T R E E

**** TREE CONFIGURATION IS MULTILEVEL ****

( NO. LEVELS = 3 NO. TIPS = 3 * = PROCESS ORDER )

TIP L E V E L N U M B E R

INDEX

-1- -2- -3-

1 5 3 1

7* 4* 2*

Main Index
 CHAPTER 10 487
Input and Output for Dynamic Reduction

2 6 4 2

6* 3* 1*

3 7

5*

Listing 10-30 SETREE for Multi-Level List Superelement Modes Example

Note that in this case, the component modes are passed directly to the residual structure. The final solution
indicates that the solution matches the baseline solution.
In order to pass the component modes to the downstream superelement rather than the residual structure,
GRID points must be used to store the Q-Set dof. The goal of the next example is to demonstrate that the
same residual solution and subsequent data recovery are achieved for multi-level dynamic reduction by
combining all of the previous examples and using expanded Case Control. The process is described as
follows:
 The left leg of the superelement tree (SEID 1, 3, and 5, refer to Figure 10-13 ) will be performed by
passing the modal Q-Set dof from the upstream to the downstream superelement. In addition, this
side of the tree will perform a mixed-boundary Component Modes Synthesis by placing the ‘upper’
grids into the C-Set. In this manner, the component modes of SEID 5 can be compared directly
with a solution of the ‘left’ side fixed at grids 13 and 23.
 The right leg of the superelement tree (SEID 2, 4, and 6) will be processed with a fixed-boundary
solution. The component modes modes will also be passed to the downstream superelement.
For comparison purposes, an intermediate model is prepared as shown below (ref
/doc/seug/chapter10/flyswatter/baseline/seid135-fixedbase.bdf).

Main Index
 488 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Multi-Level Dynamic Reduction

Figure 10-16 Submodel for Fixed Boundary of Superelements 1, 3, 5

The solution for the Submodel is performed without superelements. The Eigensolution is as follows:
FLYSWATTER MODES, COLLECTOR SUPERELEMENT 5 BREAKOUT MODEL MAY 15, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 12/15/10

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM

BASELINE MODES SUBCASE 1

R E A L E I G E N V A L U E S

MODE EXTRACTION EIGENVALUE RADIANS CYCLES GENERALIZED GENERALIZED

NO. ORDER MASS STIFFNESS

1 1 3.714080E+03 6.094325E+01 9.699420E+00 1.000000E+00 3.714080E+03

2 2 4.080678E+03 6.388018E+01 1.016685E+01 1.000000E+00 4.080678E+03

3 3 4.793354E+04 2.189373E+02 3.484495E+01 1.000000E+00 4.793354E+04

4 4 7.292526E+04 2.700468E+02 4.297928E+01 1.000000E+00 7.292526E+04

5 5 3.250839E+05 5.701613E+02 9.074398E+01 1.000000E+00 3.250839E+05

6 6 7.722886E+05 8.787995E+02 1.398653E+02 1.000000E+00 7.722886E+05

7 7 2.382625E+06 1.543575E+03 2.456676E+02 1.000000E+00 2.382625E+06

8 8 4.861385E+06 2.204855E+03 3.509136E+02 1.000000E+00 4.861385E+06

9 9 1.051328E+07 3.242419E+03 5.160469E+02 1.000000E+00 1.051328E+07

10 10 1.500208E+07 3.873252E+03 6.164473E+02 1.000000E+00 1.500208E+07

Listing 10-31 Solution of Submodel for Fixed Boundary of Superelements 1, 3, 5

Main Index
 CHAPTER 10 489
Input and Output for Dynamic Reduction

The full model for this example is as follows (ref /doc/seug/chapter10/flyswatter/seset/modes-multi-

seqset1.bdf )
SOL 103

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = Flyswatter Modes

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = List (SESET), Multi-Level, SEQSET1

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = NO

param,mhred,yes

SET 246=2,4,6

VECTOR(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Subcase for FOR SEID 1

SUPER = 1

METHOD = 1

SUBCASE 3

SUBTITLE=Subcase for FOR SEID 3

SUPER = 3

METHOD = 3

SUBCASE 5

SUBTITLE=Subcase for FOR SEID 5

SUPER = 5

METHOD = 5

SUBCASE 7

SUBTITLE=Subcase for FOR SEID 7

SUPER=7

METHOD=7

SPC = 2

SUBCASE 9

SUBTITLE=Subcase for FOR SEID 2, 4, and 6

SUPER = 246

METHOD = 1

SUBCASE 10

SUBTITLE = Subcase for Residual

SUPER=0

METHOD=1

Main Index
 490 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Multi-Level Dynamic Reduction

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

DTI,SETREE,1,1,3,3,5,5,0,

,2,4,4,6,6,0

$ define grids to store component modes of SE 1

$ allocate enough to store 10 modes + 6 Resvec

GRID,1001

GRID,1002

GRID,1003

$ place these grids as INTERIOR TO SE 3

seset,3,1001,thru,1003

$ define the grids as Q-Set dof for SE 1

seqset1,1,123456,1001,thru,1003

$ define grids to store component modes of SE 3

$ allocate enough to store 15 modes + 6 Resvec

GRID,3001

GRID,3002

GRID,3003

GRID,3004

$ place these grids as INTERIOR TO SE 5

seset,5,3001,thru,3004

$ define the grids as Q-Set dof for SE 1

seqset1,3,123456,3001,thru,3004

$ place grids 35, 36 into C-Set

secset1,3,123456,35,36

$ define grids to store component modes of SE 5

$ allocate enough to store 20 modes + 6 Resvec

GRID,5001

GRID,5002

GRID,5003

GRID,5004

GRID,5005

$ place these grids as INTERIOR TO SE 0

seset,0,5001,thru,5005

$ define the grids as Q-Set dof for SE 1

seqset1,5,123456,5001,thru,5005

$ place grids 19, 20, 35, and 36 into C-Set

secset1,5,123456,19,20,35,36

$ define grids to store component modes of SE 2

Main Index
 CHAPTER 10 491
Input and Output for Dynamic Reduction

$ allocate enough to store 10 modes + 6 Resvec

GRID,2001

GRID,2002

GRID,2003

$ place these grids as INTERIOR TO SE 4

seset,4,2001,thru,2003

$ define the grids as Q-Set dof for SE 2

seqset1,2,123456,2001,thru,2003

$ define grids to store component modes of SE 4

$ allocate enough to store 10 modes + 6 Resvec

GRID,4001

GRID,4002

GRID,4003

$ place these grids as INTERIOR TO SE 6

seset,6,4001,thru,4003

$ define the grids as Q-Set dof for SE 4

seqset1,4,123456,4001,thru,4003

$ define grids to store component modes of SE 6

$ allocate enough to store 10 modes + 6 Resvec

GRID,6001

GRID,6002

GRID,6003

$ place these grids as INTERIOR TO SE 0

seset,0,6001,thru,6003

$ define the grids as Q-Set dof for SE 6

seqset1,6,123456,6001,thru,6003

$ define SPOINTs to store component modes of SE 7

$ allocate enough to store 10 modes + 6 Resvec

SPOINT,7001,thru,7016

seqset1,7,0,7001,thru,7016

PARAM POST -1

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

EIGRL 1 10 0

EIGRL 3 15 0

EIGRL 5 20 0

EIGRL 7 12 0

$ SEID.1

SESET 1 33 34 37 38

SESET 1 45 THRU 50

Main Index
 492 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Multi-Level Dynamic Reduction

SESET 1 57 THRU 62

SESET 1 69 THRU 74

SESET 1 81 THRU 86

SESET 1 93 THRU 98

$ SEID.2

SESET 2 39 40 43 44

SESET 2 51 THRU 56

SESET 2 63 THRU 68

SESET 2 75 THRU 80

SESET 2 87 THRU 92

SESET 2 99 THRU 104

$ SEID.3

SESET 3 29 30

$ SEID.4

SESET 4 31 32

$ SEID.5

SESET 5 9 THRU 12

SESET 5 21 22

$ SEID.6

SESET 6 15 THRU 18

SESET 6 25 26

$ SEID.7

SESET 7 1 THRU 8

ENDDATA

Listing 10-32 Input for List Superelement Example using Grids to Pass Component Modes to the Downstream
Superelement (instead of residual)

The SEMAP and SETREE have not changed from the previous example – refer to Listing 10-30. Since the
structure is symmetric, the solution of the mixed-boundary leg at Superelement 5 can be directly compared
to the Submodel shown in Figure 10-16, and for contrast, it can also be compared directly to the fixed-
boundary leg at Superelement 6. The effects on residual solution and final mode shapes can also be compared
to the baseline solution.
FLYSWATTER MODES MAY 15, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 12/15/10 P

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM SUPERELEMENT 6

LIST (SESET), MULTI-LEVEL, SEQSET1 SUBCASE 9

R E A L E I G E N V A L U E S

(BEFORE AUGMENTATION OF RESIDUAL VECTORS)

MODE EXTRACTION EIGENVALUE RADIANS CYCLES GENERALIZED GENERALIZED

NO. ORDER MASS STIFFNESS

1 1 1.928906E+05 4.391931E+02 6.989976E+01 1.000000E+00 1.928906E+05

2 2 2.065030E+05 4.544260E+02 7.232414E+01 1.000000E+00 2.065030E+05

3 3 7.289379E+05 8.537786E+02 1.358831E+02 1.000000E+00 7.289379E+05

Main Index
 CHAPTER 10 493
Input and Output for Dynamic Reduction

4 4 4.834193E+06 2.198680E+03 3.499308E+02 1.000000E+00 4.834193E+06

5 5 6.997852E+06 2.645345E+03 4.210197E+02 1.000000E+00 6.997852E+06

6 6 7.082520E+06 2.661301E+03 4.235591E+02 1.000000E+00 7.082520E+06

7 7 1.486210E+07 3.855140E+03 6.135646E+02 1.000000E+00 1.486210E+07

8 8 1.508492E+07 3.883931E+03 6.181468E+02 1.000000E+00 1.508492E+07

9 9 1.759065E+07 4.194122E+03 6.675151E+02 1.000000E+00 1.759065E+07

10 10 2.454850E+07 4.954645E+03 7.885562E+02 1.000000E+00 2.454850E+07

FLYSWATTER MODES MAY 15, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 12/15/10

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM SUPERELEMENT 5

LIST (SESET), MULTI-LEVEL, SEQSET1 SUBCASE 5

R E A L E I G E N V A L U E S

(BEFORE AUGMENTATION OF RESIDUAL VECTORS)

MODE EXTRACTION EIGENVALUE RADIANS CYCLES GENERALIZED GENERALIZED

NO. ORDER MASS STIFFNESS

1 1 3.714080E+03 6.094325E+01 9.699420E+00 1.000000E+00 3.714080E+03

2 2 4.080678E+03 6.388018E+01 1.016685E+01 1.000000E+00 4.080678E+03

3 3 4.793354E+04 2.189373E+02 3.484495E+01 1.000000E+00 4.793354E+04

4 4 7.292526E+04 2.700468E+02 4.297928E+01 1.000000E+00 7.292526E+04

5 5 3.250839E+05 5.701613E+02 9.074398E+01 1.000000E+00 3.250839E+05

6 6 7.722886E+05 8.787995E+02 1.398653E+02 1.000000E+00 7.722886E+05

7 7 2.382625E+06 1.543575E+03 2.456676E+02 1.000000E+00 2.382625E+06

8 8 4.861387E+06 2.204855E+03 3.509136E+02 1.000000E+00 4.861387E+06

9 9 1.051441E+07 3.242594E+03 5.160748E+02 1.000000E+00 1.051441E+07

10 10 1.500237E+07 3.873289E+03 6.164531E+02 1.000000E+00 1.500237E+07

FLYSWATTER MODES MAY 15, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 12/15/10

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM SUPERELEMENT 0

LIST (SESET), MULTI-LEVEL, SEQSET1 SUBCASE 10

R E A L E I G E N V A L U E S

(BEFORE AUGMENTATION OF RESIDUAL VECTORS)

MODE EXTRACTION EIGENVALUE RADIANS CYCLES GENERALIZED GENERALIZED

NO. ORDER MASS STIFFNESS

1 1 5.771180E+02 2.402328E+01 3.823424E+00 1.000000E+00 5.771180E+02

2 2 1.053431E+03 3.245661E+01 5.165629E+00 1.000000E+00 1.053431E+03

3 3 1.582892E+03 3.978558E+01 6.332071E+00 1.000000E+00 1.582892E+03

4 4 3.441425E+03 5.866366E+01 9.336612E+00 1.000000E+00 3.441425E+03

5 5 1.816831E+04 1.347899E+02 2.145247E+01 1.000000E+00 1.816831E+04

6 6 3.090142E+04 1.757880E+02 2.797753E+01 1.000000E+00 3.090142E+04

7 7 4.377881E+04 2.092339E+02 3.330060E+01 1.000000E+00 4.377881E+04

8 8 5.775886E+04 2.403307E+02 3.824982E+01 1.000000E+00 5.775886E+04

Main Index
 494 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Multi-Level Dynamic Reduction

9 9 5.928398E+04 2.434830E+02 3.875153E+01 1.000000E+00 5.928398E+04

10 10 8.165640E+04 2.857558E+02 4.547945E+01 1.000000E+00 8.165640E+04

Listing 10-33 Solution of List Superelement Example using Grids to Pass Component Modes to the
Downstream Superelement (instead of residual)

The superelement component modes solution of SEID 6 is drastically different than SEID 5. The reason is
that SEID 5 uses a mixed-boundary solution by placing the physical grids that are not at the boundary with
the residual into the C-Set. If SEID 6 had been exported as an external superelement and then imported to
a model without additional structure, and fixed at the grids that attach to the residual (i.e. grids 14 and 24),
then the solution would give the same results as SEID 5.
When the superelement component modes of SEID 5 are compared to the Submodel modes, it is clear that
the same modal solution is attained. Furthermore, comparison of the residual modes to the baseline modes
indicates a match.
It should also be noted that the solution sequence is based on the SUPERELMENT PROCESSING
ORDER shown in the SETREE rather than the SUBCASE number.
When the solution results are read into Patran and displayed, it is clear that the correct data recovery has been
performed as shown below (only mode 1 is shown).

Figure 10-17 Mode 1 of List Superelement Example using Grids to Pass Component Modes to the
Downstream Superelement (instead of residual)

PART Superelements
Patran provides a convenient form for defining the Superelement Tree for PART Superelements as shown
below.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 10 495
Input and Output for Dynamic Reduction

Figure 10-18 Defining the SETREE for PART Superelements in Patran

The resulting file for the AUTOQSET option is (ref /doc/seug/chapter10/flyswatter/parts/modes-multi-

autoq.bdf)
SOL 103

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = Flyswatter Modes

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = Part Superelement, Multi-Level Tree, AUTOQSET

ECHO = NONE

PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES

RESVEC = YES

SUBCASE 1

$ Subcase name : Default

SUBTITLE=Default

METHOD = 1

SPC = 2

VECTOR(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST -1

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

Main Index
 496 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Multi-Level Dynamic Reduction

EIGRL 1 10 0

SETREE 3 1

SETREE 5 3

SETREE 4 2

SETREE 6 4

Listing 10-34 Input File for Multi-Level PART Analysis with SETREE as Defined by Using Patran; AUTOQSET
Method

Note that any SETREE entries that use SEID 0 (the residual structure) as the downstream superelement are
not written since the default is to attach superelements to the residual. The solution for this model is the
same as the equivalent List Superelement model and produce the same answers as the baseline model. Since
the solution goes through the PART partitioning (SEP1X), the superelement processing order is slightly
different than the List Superelement processing order shown in Listing 10-30. Even so, the solution is the same.
FLYSWATTER MODES MAY 15, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 12/15/10

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM

PART SUPERELEMENT, MULTI-LEVEL TREE, AUTOQSET

SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE (SORTED BY SEID)

PRIMARY PROCESS DOWNSTREAM

SUPERELEMENT SUPERELEMENT ORDER SUPERELEMENT TYPE LABE

------------ ------------ ------- ------------ ----------------------------- ---------------------

0 0 8 0 RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

1 0 1 3 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

2 0 2 4 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

3 0 3 5 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

4 0 4 6 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

5 0 5 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

6 0 6 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

7 0 7 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE (SORTED BY PROCESS ORDER

PRIMARY PROCESS DOWNSTREAM

SUPERELEMENT SUPERELEMENT ORDER SUPERELEMENT TYPE LABE

------------ ------------ ------- ------------ ----------------------------- ---------------------

1 0 1 3 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

2 0 2 4 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

3 0 3 5 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

4 0 4 6 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

5 0 5 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

6 0 6 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

7 0 7 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

0 0 8 0 RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

TABLE OF DOWNSTREAM SUPERELEMENTS FOR EACH SUPERELEMENT

Main Index
 CHAPTER 10 497
Input and Output for Dynamic Reduction

SUPERELEMENT DOWNSTREAM SUPERELEMENTS IN DOWNSTREAM ORDER

------------ --------------------------------------------------------------------------------

1 3 5 0

2 4 6 0

3 5 0

4 6 0

5 0

6 0

7 0

FLYSWATTER MODES MAY 15, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 12/15/10

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM

PART SUPERELEMENT, MULTI-LEVEL TREE, AUTOQSET

S U P E R E L E M E N T T R E E

( CONFIGURATION = MULTILEVEL NO. LEVELS = 3 NO. TIPS = 3 )

TIP LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9-

1 5 3 1

2 6 4 2

3 7

The same model can be solved with SENQSET instead of AUTOQSET. As noted in Fixed-Boundary
Component Modes Synthesis, the input file must be manually modified to add the SENQSET entries. The
example file is (ref /doc/seug/chapter10/flyswatter/parts/modes-multi-senqset.bdf )
SOL 103

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = Flyswatter Modes

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = Part Superelement, Multi-Level, SENQSET

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = YES

SUBCASE 1

$ Subcase name : Default

SUBTITLE=Default

METHOD = 1

SPC = 2

VECTOR(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

BEGIN BULK

$ senqset must be added manually.

Main Index
 498 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Multi-Level Dynamic Reduction

senqset,1,16

senqset,2,16

senqset,3,16

senqset,4,16

senqset,5,16

senqset,6,16

senqset,7,16

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST -1

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

EIGRL 1 10 0

SETREE 3 1

SETREE 5 3

SETREE 4 2

SETREE 6 4

Listing 10-35 Input File for Multi-Level PART Analysis with SETREE as Defined by Using Patran; SENQSET
Method

Again the results match the baseline solution. But both the AUTOQSET and SENQSET method pass the
component modes for each superelement directly to the residual. In order to pass the Q-Set to the next
downstream superelement, the SECONCT entry must be used. Using a similar solution as the List
Superelement solution above (Listing 10-32), the modes are passed down for the ‘left’ leg of the superelement
tree using SPOINTs. (ref /doc/seug/chapter10/flyswatter/parts/modes-multi-seconct.bdf)
SOL 103

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = Flyswatter Modes

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = Part Superelement, Multi-Level, SECONCT

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = YES

param,mhred,yes

SET 246=2,4,6

VECTOR(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Subcase for FOR SEID 1

SUPER = 1

METHOD = 1

SUBCASE 3

SUBTITLE=Subcase for FOR SEID 3

SUPER = 3

Main Index
 CHAPTER 10 499
Input and Output for Dynamic Reduction

METHOD = 3

SUBCASE 5

SUBTITLE=Subcase for FOR SEID 5

SUPER = 5

METHOD = 5

SUBCASE 7

SUBTITLE=Subcase for FOR SEID 7

SUPER=7

METHOD=7

SPC = 2

SUBCASE 9

SUBTITLE=Subcase for FOR SEID 2, 4, and 6

SUPER = 246

METHOD = 1

SUBCASE 10

SUBTITLE = Subcase for Residual

SUPER=0

METHOD=1

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST -1

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

EIGRL 1 10 0

SETREE 3 1

SETREE 5 3

SETREE 4 2

SETREE 6 4

$ SECONCT must be used to pass Q-Set component modes to a downstream SE

$ The default for boundary search of physical grids is SEBULK entry "AUTO"

$ only the modal dof need to be connected explicitly

SECONCT,1,3

,1001,thru,1016,31001,thru,31016

SECONCT,3,5

,3001,thru,3021,53001,thru,53021

$ allow default processing (i.e. send modal dof to residual) for other SE

SENQSET,2,16

SENQSET,4,16

SENQSET,5,26

SENQSET,6,16

Main Index
 500 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Multi-Level Dynamic Reduction

SENQSET,7,16

$ Superelement Name: SEID.1

BEGIN SUPER = 1

$ define spoints to store component modes of SE 1

$ allocate enough to store 10 modes + 6 Resvec

spoint,1001,thru,1016

qset1,0,1001,thru,1016

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST -1

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

EIGRL 1 10 0

$ Superelement Name: SEID.2

BEGIN SUPER = 2

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST -1

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

EIGRL 1 10 0

$ Superelement Name: SEID.3

BEGIN SUPER = 3

$ define spoints to store component modes of SE 3

$ allocate enough to store 16 modes + 6 Resvec

spoint,3001,thru,3021

qset1,0,3001,thru,3021

$ define spoints to receive upstream component modes from SE 1

spoint,31001,thru,31016

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST -1

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

EIGRL 3 15 0

$ Superelement Name: SEID.4

BEGIN SUPER = 4

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST -1

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

EIGRL 1 10 0

$ Superelement Name: SEID.5

BEGIN SUPER = 5

$ define points to receive component modes from SE 3

spoint,53001,thru,53021

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

Main Index
 CHAPTER 10 501
Input and Output for Dynamic Reduction

PARAM POST -1

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

EIGRL 5 20 0

$ Superelement Name: SEID.6

BEGIN SUPER = 6

$ define spoints to receive upstream component modes from SE 4

spoint,64001,thru,64016

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST -1

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

EIGRL 1 10 0

$ Superelement Name: SEID.7

BEGIN SUPER = 7

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST -1

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

EIGRL 7 10 0

ENDDATA

Listing 10-36 Input for PART Superelement Example using SPOINTS / SECONCT to Pass Component Modes
to the Downstream Superelement (instead of residual)

Because each Partitioned Bulk Data Section is treated separately, the same numbers could be re-used for the
SPOINTS in the downstream superelement that are used in the upstream superelement. In either case the
use of a SECONCT entry is required to attach the modes from an upstream to downstream superelement,
otherwise they are assigned to the residual. The upstream modes are attached to these DOFs by the use of
the SECONCT entry in the Main Bulk Data Section. However, in this example different SPOINT IDs were
used for clarity.
The selected output is:
FLYSWATTER MODES MAY 15, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 12/15/10

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM SUPERELEMENT 5

PART SUPERELEMENT, MULTI-LEVEL, SECONCT SUBCASE 5

R E A L E I G E N V A L U E S

(BEFORE AUGMENTATION OF RESIDUAL VECTORS)

MODE EXTRACTION EIGENVALUE RADIANS CYCLES GENERALIZED GENERALIZED

NO. ORDER MASS STIFFNESS

1 1 3.714080E+03 6.094325E+01 9.699420E+00 1.000000E+00 3.714080E+03

2 2 4.080678E+03 6.388018E+01 1.016685E+01 1.000000E+00 4.080678E+03

3 3 4.793354E+04 2.189373E+02 3.484495E+01 1.000000E+00 4.793354E+04

4 4 7.292526E+04 2.700468E+02 4.297928E+01 1.000000E+00 7.292526E+04

5 5 3.250839E+05 5.701613E+02 9.074398E+01 1.000000E+00 3.250839E+05

Main Index
 502 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Multi-Level Dynamic Reduction

6 6 7.722886E+05 8.787995E+02 1.398653E+02 1.000000E+00 7.722886E+05

7 7 2.382625E+06 1.543575E+03 2.456676E+02 1.000000E+00 2.382625E+06

8 8 4.861387E+06 2.204855E+03 3.509136E+02 1.000000E+00 4.861387E+06

9 9 1.051441E+07 3.242594E+03 5.160748E+02 1.000000E+00 1.051441E+07

10 10 1.500237E+07 3.873290E+03 6.164532E+02 1.000000E+00 1.500237E+07

FLYSWATTER MODES MAY 15, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 12/15/10

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM SUPERELEMENT 6

PART SUPERELEMENT, MULTI-LEVEL, SECONCT SUBCASE 9

R E A L E I G E N V A L U E S

(BEFORE AUGMENTATION OF RESIDUAL VECTORS)

MODE EXTRACTION EIGENVALUE RADIANS CYCLES GENERALIZED GENERALIZED

NO. ORDER MASS STIFFNESS

1 1 4.771979E+03 6.907951E+01 1.099435E+01 1.000000E+00 4.771979E+03

2 2 4.838306E+03 6.955793E+01 1.107049E+01 1.000000E+00 4.838306E+03

3 3 8.975424E+04 2.995901E+02 4.768125E+01 1.000000E+00 8.975424E+04

4 4 1.469312E+05 3.833160E+02 6.100664E+01 1.000000E+00 1.469312E+05

5 5 1.198461E+06 1.094743E+03 1.742337E+02 1.000000E+00 1.198461E+06

6 6 6.358247E+06 2.521556E+03 4.013181E+02 1.000000E+00 6.358247E+06

7 7 2.954034E+07 5.435103E+03 8.650234E+02 1.000000E+00 2.954034E+07

8 8 3.230597E+07 5.683834E+03 9.046102E+02 1.000000E+00 3.230597E+07

9 9 3.739612E+07 6.115237E+03 9.732701E+02 1.000000E+00 3.739612E+07

10 10 7.022938E+07 8.380298E+03 1.333766E+03 1.000000E+00 7.022938E+07

FLYSWATTER MODES MAY 15, 2011 MSC NASTRAN 12/15/10

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM SUPERELEMENT 0

PART SUPERELEMENT, MULTI-LEVEL, SECONCT SUBCASE 10

R E A L E I G E N V A L U E S

(BEFORE AUGMENTATION OF RESIDUAL VECTORS)

MODE EXTRACTION EIGENVALUE RADIANS CYCLES GENERALIZED GENERALIZED

NO. ORDER MASS STIFFNESS

1 1 5.771180E+02 2.402328E+01 3.823424E+00 1.000000E+00 5.771180E+02

2 2 1.053431E+03 3.245661E+01 5.165629E+00 1.000000E+00 1.053431E+03

3 3 1.582892E+03 3.978558E+01 6.332071E+00 1.000000E+00 1.582892E+03

4 4 3.441425E+03 5.866366E+01 9.336612E+00 1.000000E+00 3.441425E+03

5 5 1.816830E+04 1.347899E+02 2.145247E+01 1.000000E+00 1.816830E+04

6 6 3.090139E+04 1.757879E+02 2.797752E+01 1.000000E+00 3.090139E+04

7 7 4.377879E+04 2.092338E+02 3.330060E+01 1.000000E+00 4.377879E+04

8 8 5.775877E+04 2.403305E+02 3.824979E+01 1.000000E+00 5.775877E+04

9 9 5.928398E+04 2.434830E+02 3.875153E+01 1.000000E+00 5.928398E+04

10 10 8.165628E+04 2.857556E+02 4.547942E+01 1.000000E+00 8.165628E+04

Main Index
 CHAPTER 10 503
Input and Output for Dynamic Reduction

Listing 10-37 Solution for PART Superelement Example using SPOINTS / SECONCT to Pass Component Modes
to the Downstream Superelement (instead of residual)

As with the List Superelement solution in Listing 10-33, the PART superelement component modes solution
of SEID 6 is different than SEID 5. But, the PART component modes for SEID 6 do not match the List
Superelement component modes for SEID 6.
When the superelement component modes of SEID 5 are compared to the Submodel modes, it is clear that
the same modal solution is attained. Furthermore, comparison of the residual modes to the baseline modes
indicates a match.
It should also be noted that the solution sequence is based on the SUPERELMENT PROCESSING
ORDER shown in the SETREE rather than the SUBCASE number.
When the solution results are read into Patran and displayed, it is clear that the correct data recovery has been
performed.
Examination of the SEMAP indicates significant differences between the PART solution and the List
(SESET) Solution.
Isolating the SEMAP for SEID 5 between the two solutions; refer to Figure 10-12 for the geometry.

Table 10-3 Comparison of SEMAP for SEID 5 between List and PART Superelements
Superelement Type Exterior Grids Interior Grids
List (BEGIN BULK) 13, 19, 20, 23, 35, 36 9, 10, 11, 12, 21, 22
PART (BEGIN SUPER) 13, 23 9, 10, 11, 12, 19, 20 21, 22

This means that the exterior grids for both upstream superelements for the List superelements were carried
to Superelement 5 and attached to the residual as physical dof. This is why they needed to be placed in the
C-Set for the component modes of Superelement 5 to match the Subassembly results. In contrast, the PART
superelement processing only allows the grids to be exterior to one and only one superelement.

1.

Main Index
 504 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Multi-Level Dynamic Reduction

Main Index
 Chapter 11: Dynamic Loading on Superelements
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User’s Guide

11 Dynamic Loading on
Superelements

Introduction
 Direct Reference to EXCITEID

Indirect Reference to EXCITEDID: LOADSET / LSEQ Method

Superelement Damping

Modal Transient Illustrative Example

Frequency Response Illustrative Example

External Superelement Dynamic Loading

Main Index
 506 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Introduction

Introduction
This chapter describes methods available in MSC Nastran for applying dynamic loading to models with
superelements. This Chapter is not intended to be a comprehensive review of dynamic analysis and dynamic
response, but rather a review of how to use superelements in conjunction with dynamic loading and response
for models that incorporate superelements. For a full review of the dynamic capabilities in MSC Nastran,
the reader is encouraged to refer to these sections in the MSC Nastran Dynamic Analysis Users Guide (Dyn.
UG) and MSC Nastran Reference Guide (Ref. Man.):
 Frequency Response Analysis (Ch. 4) in the MSC Nastran Dynamic Analysis User’s Guide
 Transient Response Analysis (Ch. 5) in the MSC Nastran Dynamic Analysis User’s Guide
 Damping (Ch. 6) in the MSC Nastran Dynamic Analysis User’s Guide
 Enforced Motion (Ch. 7) in the MSC Nastran Dynamic Analysis User’s Guide
 Formulation of Dynamic Equations in SubDMAP GMA (Ch. 7) in the MSC Nastran Reference Guide
 Frequency Response and Random Analysis in SubDMAP FREQRS (Ch. 7) in the MSC Nastran Reference Guide
 Transient Response in SubDMAPs SEDTRAN and SEMTRAN (Ch. 7) in the MSC Nastran Reference Guide
Superelement analysis with random vibration is an extension of frequency response and is covered in detail
in CHAPTER 18 of this manual. Note that MSC Nastran supports acoustics, nonlinear harmonic response,
rotor dynamics, and cyclic symmetry, but these topics are beyond the scope of this User Guide.
Typical dynamic input entries for transient and frequency response are shown in the tables below. Note that
these tables are not exhaustive lists, but they cover many dynamic analysis applications.

Table 11-1 Typical Dynamic Input for Transient Analysis

Dynamic Definition Examples Input Entries
Load Amplitude Forces, Pressures, Inertia TLOADi FORCEi, PLOADi, GRAV,
Loads, Temperatures, Base RFORCE, TEMP, SPCD, etc.
Motion
Temporal Scaling Time history tables, start TABLEDi, DELAY
timing
Initial Conditions Initial displacements, Initial IC TIC
velocities
Load Combinations Combine various loading DLOAD
Integration Time Interval, Time Time increment, output TSTEP
Output Control interval

Main Index
 CHAPTER 11 507
Dynamic Loading on Superelements

Table 11-1 Typical Dynamic Input for Transient Analysis

Dynamic Definition Examples Input Entries
Damping Viscous dampers PDAMPi, PBUSH
Structural PARAM,G + PARAM,W3
Material MATi (GE) + PARAM,W4
Rayleigh PARAM, APLPHi
Hybrid Damping, general DAMPING, DAMPING
parameters
SEDAMP PARAM,SESDAMP
Modal Schedule SDAMPING TABDMP1
Modal Extraction Frequency range of interest EIGRL

Table 11-2 Typical Dynamic Input for Frequency Response Analysis

Dynamic Definition Examples Input Entries
Load Amplitude Forces, Pressures, Inertia RLOADi FORCEi, PLOADi, GRAV,
Loads, Temperatures, Base RFORCE, TEMP, SPCD, etc.
Motion
Frequency Scaling Frequency scaling tables – TABLEDi
real/imag or mag/phase
Phasing Delays, Phasing DELAY, DPHASE
Load Combinations Combine various loading DLOAD
Frequency Output Control Frequency increment FREQi
Damping Viscous dampers PDAMPi, PBUSH
Structural PARAM,G
Material MATi (GE)
Rayleigh PARAM, APLPHi
Hybrid Damping, general DAMPING, DAMPING
parameters
SEDAMP PARAM,SESDAMP
Modal Schedule SDAMPING TABDMP1
Modal Extraction Frequency range of interest EIGRL

Main Index
 508 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Introduction

For modal solutions, modal damping on a per-superelement basis can be defined using expanded case control
with PARAM,SESDAMP.
There are two methods for defining the dynamic load in MSC Nastran:
 Direct Reference to TLOADi, RLOADi, or DLOAD
 Indirect Reference via the LOADSET / LSEQ Method
In either case, the DLOAD, TLOADi, and RLOADi entries define the dynamic loading.

DLOAD Dynamic Load Combination or Superposition

Defines a dynamic loading condition for frequency response or transient response problems as a linear
combination of load sets defined via RLOAD1 or RLOAD2 entries for frequency response or TLOAD1 or
TLOAD2 entries for transient response. The overall load vector is defined by

 P  = Scale  Scale i  P i (11-1)

i
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DLOAD SID Scale Scale1 LID1 Scale2 LID2 Scale3 LID3
Scale4 LID4 -etc.-

Example:
DLOAD 17 1.0 2.0 6 -2.0 7 2.0 8
-2.0 9 1.5 3

Field Contents
SID Load set identification number selected with DLOAD case control
Scale Overall Scale Factor
Scalei Individual Scale Factors applied to LIDi
LIDi Load set identification number of RLOAD1, RLOAD2, TLOAD1, or TLOAD2
entries

TLOAD1 Transient Response Dynamic Excitation, Form 1, Tabular Input

Defines a frequency dependent dynamic load in the form

Main Index
 CHAPTER 11 509
Dynamic Loading on Superelements

Pt = A  Ft –  (11-2)

for use in transient response or frequency response problems.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TLOAD1 SID EXCITEID DELAYI/ TYPE TID US0 VS0

DELAYR

Example:
TLOAD1 5 7 15 LOAD 13

Field Contents
SID Set identification number. (Integer > 0)
EXCITEID ID of the DAREA or SPCD or static load (LOAD, FORCE, GRAV, etc.) entry that
defines {A}
DELAYI ID of the DELAY entry that defines the time delay  (allows variable delay per dof )
DELAYR Real value of the time delay  (applies constant delay to all dof in EXCITEDID)
TYPE Defines TYPE of dynamic loading (load, displacement, velocity, or acceleration)
TID ID of TABLEDi that defines F  t 
US0 Scale factor for initial displacements for enforced motion analysis
VS0 Scale factor for initial velocities in enforced motion analysis

TLOAD2 Transient Response Dynamic Excitation, Form 2 – Analytical Function

Defines a time dependent dynamic load in the form

0 , t   T1 +   or  t   T2 +   
Pf = (11-3)
Ct̃
 A t̃ B e cos  2Ft̃ + P  ,  T1 +    t   T2 +   

for use in transient response problems, where t̃ = t – T1 – 

Main Index
 510 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Introduction

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TLOAD1 SID EXCITEID DELAYI/ TYPE T1 T2 F P

DELAYR
C B US0 VS0

Example:
TLOAD1 4 10 5.0 2.1 4.7 12.0
2.0

Field Contents
SID Set identification number. (Integer > 0)
EXCITEID ID of the DAREA or SPCD or static load (LOAD, FORCE, GRAV, etc.) entry that
defines {A}
DELAYI ID of the DELAY entry that defines the time delay  (allows variable delay per dof)
DELAYR Real value of the time delay  (applies constant delay to all dof in EXCITEDID)
TYPE Defines TYPE of dynamic loading (load, displacement, velocity, or acceleration)
T1, T2 Time constants (  T1  0 T2  T1  )
F Frequency in cycles per unit time
P Phase angle in degrees
C Exponential coefficient
B Growth Coefficient

RLOAD1 Frequency Response Dynamic Excitation, Form 1

Defines a frequency dependent dynamic load in the form

i   – 2f 
 P  f   =  A   C  f  + iD  f e  (11-4)
for use in frequency response problems.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RLOAD1 SID EXCITEID DELAYI/ DPHASEI/ TC TD TYPE

DELAYR DPHASER

Main Index
 CHAPTER 11 511
Dynamic Loading on Superelements

Example:
RLOAD1 5 3 2.0 10 1

Field Contents
SID Set identification number. (Integer > 0)
EXCITEID ID of the DAREA or SPCD or static load (LOAD, FORCE, GRAV, etc.) entry that
defines {A}
DELAYI ID of the DELAY entry that defines the time delay 
DELAYR Real value of the time delay  (applies constant delay to all dof in EXCITEDID)
DPHASEI ID of the DPHASE entry that defines the phase angle (allows variable phase per dof)
DPHASER Real value of the phase angle (applies constant phase for all dof in EXCITEDID)
TC ID of the TABLEDi entry that defines C  f 
TD ID of the TABLEDi entrie that defines D  f 
TYPE Defines TYPE of dynamic loading (load, displacement, velocity, or acceleration)

RLOAD2 Frequency Response Dynamic Excitation, Form 2

Defines a frequency dependent dynamic load in the form

i    f  +  – 2f 
 P  f   =  A   B  f e (11-5)
for use in frequency response problems.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RLOAD1 SID EXCITEID DELAYI/ DPHASEI/ TB TP TYPE

DELAYR DPHASER

Example:
RLOAD1 5 3 15 5.0 7

Field Contents
SID Set identification number. (Integer > 0)
EXCITEID ID of the DAREA or SPCD entry that defines {A}

Main Index
 512 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Direct Reference to EXCITEID

Field Contents
DELAYI ID of the DELAY entry that defines the time delay 
DELAYR Real value of the time delay (applies constant delay to all dof in EXCITEDID)
DPHASEI ID of the DPHASE entry that defines the phase angle (allows variable phase per dof)
DPHASER Real value of the phase angle (applies constant phase for all dof in EXCITEDID)
TB ID of the TABLEDi entry that defines  f 
TP ID of the TABLEDi entrie that defines   f 
TYPE Defines TYPE of dynamic loading (load, displacement, velocity, or acceleration)

The TYPE of loading above can be an applied load, enforced displacement, enforced velocity, or enforced
displacement with the following format:

Table 11-3 TYPE of Dynamic Loading defined on RLOADi or TLOADi Entries

TYPE Dynamic Excitation
0, L, LO, LOA, or LOAD Applied Load (any static load such as FORCE,
MOMENT, PLOADi, GRAV, etc.)
1, D, DI, DIS, or DISP Enforced displacement using large mass method or
SPC/SPCD method
1, V, VE, VEL, or VELO Enforced velocity using large mass method or
SPC/SPCD method
1, A, AC, ACC, or ACCE Enforced acceleration using large mass method or
SPC/SPCD method

Direct Reference to EXCITEID

The dynamic loading in MSC Nastran is defined for transient and frequency response by selecting a dynamic
load excitation set in the case control with the DLOAD case control entry. The setid on the DLOAD case
control selects the excitation setid defined on a DLOAD, TLOAD1, TLOAD2, RLOAD1, or RLOAD2
bulk data entry shown above.
In the direct reference to TLOADi, RLOADi, the static load vectors are referenced directly by the EXCITEID
field on the TLOADi or RLOADi entries as illustrated in the figure below.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 11 513
Dynamic Loading on Superelements

Figure 11-1 Direct Method of Relating Static Load Vector to EXCITEID Field on the RLOADi / TLOADi Entries

If the TYPE of loading is applied load (see Table 11-3), the EXCITEID on the RLOADi or TLOADi entries
may reference DAREA, static (FORCE, PLOADi, GRAV, etc.) or thermal (TEMP, TEMPP1, TEMPRB)
entries.
If the TYPE of loading is enforced motion, the EXCITEID must reference the SETID on SPCD entries.
Examples for the case control and simple dynamic load definition for direct and modal frequency and
transient response are shown below.
SOL 108 $ Direct Frequency Response

CEND

DISP=ALL

SUBCASE 10801

DLOAD = 10801

FREQ = 10802

BEGIN BULK

$ Harmonic Load, Output Frequencies, and Damping PARAMs for SOL 108/

$ Direct Frequency Response

RLOAD1 10801 10803 10804

Main Index
 514 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Direct Reference to EXCITEID

FREQ1 10802 500. 250. 10

FORCE 10803 105 0 100. 0. 0. 100.

TABLED1 10804

0. 0. 10. 1. 2000. 1. 3000. 0.

99999. 0. ENDT

PARAM G .08

ENDDATA

Listing 11-1 Direct Method Example Dynamic Loading and Structural Damping for Direct Frequency
Response

SOL 109 $ Direct Transient Response

CEND

DISPL=ALL

SUBCASE 10901 $ Direct Transient Response

DLOAD = 10901

TSTEP = 10902

BEGIN BULK

$ Transient Load, Time Step for SOL 109/Direct Transient Response

TLOAD1 10901 10903 0 10904

TSTEP 10902 19 .01 1

FORCE 10903 105 100. 0. 0. 100.

TABLED1 10904

0. 0. .05 0. .08 1. .14 -1.

.17 0. 99999. 0. ENDT

PARAM W3 1000.

PARAM G .08

ENDDATA

Listing 11-2 Direct Method Example Dynamic Loading and Structural Damping for Direct Transient Response

SOL 111 $ Modal Frequency Response

CEND

DISPL=ALL

SUBCASE 11101 $ Modal Frequency Response

METHOD = 11101

SDAMP = 11102

DLOAD = 11103

FREQ = 11104

Main Index
 CHAPTER 11 515
Dynamic Loading on Superelements

BEGIN BULK

$ Harmonic Load, Output Frequencies, and Damping PARAMs for SOL 111/

$ Modal Frequency Response

EIGRL 11101 -.1 2000. 10

TABDMP1 11102 CRIT

0. .06 99999. 0.6 ENDT

RLOAD1 11103 11105 11106

FREQ1 11104 500. 250. 10

FORCE 11105 105 100. 0. 0. 100.

TABLED1 11106

0. 0. 10. 1. 2000. 1. 3000. 0.

99999. 0. ENDT

ENDDATA

Listing 11-3 Direct Method Example Dynamic Loading and Modal Damping for Modal Frequency Response
SOL 112 $ Modal Transient Response

CEND

DISPL=ALL

SUBCASE 11201 $ Modal Transient Response

METHOD = 11201

SDAMP = 11202

DLOAD = 11203

TSTEP = 11204

BEGIN BULK

$ Transient Load, Time Step for SOL 112/Modal Transient Response

EIGRL 11201 -.1 2000. 10

TABDMP1 11202 CRIT

0. .06 99999. 0.6 ENDT

TLOAD1 11203 11205 0 11206

TSTEP 11204 19 .01 1

FORCE 11205 105 100. 0. 0. 1.

TABLED1 11206

0. 0. .05 0. .08 1. .14 -1.

.17 0. 99999. 0. ENDT

ENDDATA

Listing 11-4 Direct Method Example Dynamic Loading and Modal Damping for Modal Transient Response

Main Index
 516 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Indirect Reference to EXCITEDID: LOADSET / LSEQ Method

Indirect Reference to EXCITEDID: LOADSET / LSEQ

Method
As with the Direct Reference Method, the dynamic loading in MSC Nastran is defined for transient and
frequency response by selecting a dynamic load excitation set in the case control with the DLOAD case
control entry. The setid on the DLOAD case control selects the excitation setid defined on a DLOAD,
TLOAD1, TLOAD2, RLOAD1, or RLOAD2 bulk data entries shown above. However, in the Indirect
Method, the static load vectors are referenced indirectly by defining an LSEQ entry and adding the
LOADSET case control command.

LSEQ Static Load Set Definition

Defines a sequence of static or thermal load sets.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
LSEQ LSID EXCITE LID TID
ID

Example:
LSEQ 99 105 1 55

Field Contents
LSID Load Sequence Identification number (referenced by LOADSET case control
entry in dynamic analysis)
EXCITEID The EXCITEID set identification number of the static load vector – Links to
EXCITEID on RLOADi or TLOADi entries
LID Load set identification number of a set of static load entries
TID Temperature set identification number of a set of thermal load entries

The Indirect Method is illustrated in the figure below.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 11 517
Dynamic Loading on Superelements

Figure 11-2 Indirect Method (LOADSET/LSEQ) of Relating Static Load Vectors to EXCITEID Field on the
RLOADi / TLOADi Entries

For multiple loadings, as many LSEQ entries as necessary may be specified.

If the TYPE of loading is applied load (see Table 11-3) , the EXCITEID on the RLOADi or TLOADi entries
are linked to the EXCITEID on the LSEQ entry. The LSEQ entry, in turn, may reference DAREA, static
(FORCE, PLOADi, GRAV, etc.) or thermal (TEMP, TEMPP1, TEMPRB) entries. The LOADSET entry
is used to activate the Load Sequence ID (LSID) on the LSEQ entry.
If the TYPE of loading is enforced motion, the EXCITEID is linked to the EXCITEID on the LSEQ entry.
In turn, the LSEQ entry must reference the SETID on SPCD entries. The LOADSET entry is used to
activate the LSID on the LSEQ entry.

Examples for the case control and simple dynamic load definition for direct and modal frequency and
transient response are shown below.
SOL 108 $ Direct Frequency Response

CEND

Main Index
 518 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Indirect Reference to EXCITEDID: LOADSET / LSEQ Method

TITLE = CANTILEVERED BEAM MADE OF PLATES

LOADSET = 999

DISPL=ALL

SUBCASE 10801 $ Direct Frequency Response w/ Random

DLOAD = 10801

FREQ = 10802

BEGIN BULK

$ Harmonic Load, Output Frequencies, and Damping PARAMs for SOL 108/

$ Direct Frequency Response

FORCE 888 105 100. 0. 0. 1.

LSEQ 999 10803 888

RLOAD1 10801 10803 10804

FREQ1 10802 500. 250. 10

TABLED1 10804

0. 0. 10. 1. 2000. 1. 3000. 0.

99999. 0. ENDT

PARAM W3 1000.

PARAM G .08

ENDDATA

Listing 11-5 Indirect Method (LOADSET/LSEQ) Example Dynamic Loading and Structural Damping for Direct
Frequency Response
SOL 109 $ Direct Transient Response

CEND

LOADSET = 999

DISPL=ALL

SUBCASE 10901 $ Direct Transient Response

DLOAD = 10901

TSTEP = 10902

BEGIN BULK

$ Transient Load, Time Step for SOL 109/Direct Transient Response

FORCE 888 105 100. 0. 0. 1.

LSEQ 999 10903 888

TLOAD1 10901 10903 0 10904

TSTEP 10902 19 .01 1

TABLED1 10904

0. 0. .05 0. .08 1. .14 -1.

.17 0. 99999. 0. ENDT

PARAM W3 1000.

PARAM G .08

ENDDATA

Main Index
 CHAPTER 11 519
Dynamic Loading on Superelements

Listing 11-6 Indirect Method (LOADSET/LSEQ) Example Dynamic Loading and Structural Damping for Direct
Transient Response
SOL 111 $ Modal Frequency Response

CEND

LOADSET=999

DISPL=ALL

SUBCASE 11101 $ Modal Frequency Response

METHOD = 11101

SDAMP = 11102

DLOAD = 11103

FREQ = 11104

BEGIN BULK

$ Harmonic Load, Output Frequencies, and Damping PARAMs for SOL 111/

$ Modal Frequency Response

FORCE 888 105 100. 0. 0. 1.

LSEQ 999 11105 888

EIGRL 11101 -.1 2000. 10

TABDMP1 11102 CRIT

0. .06 99999. 0.6 ENDT

RLOAD1 11103 11105 11106

FREQ1 11104 500. 250. 10

TABLED1 11106

0. 0. 10. 1. 2000. 1. 3000. 0.

99999. 0. ENDT

ENDDATA

Listing 11-7 Indirect Method (LOADSET/LSEQ) Example Dynamic Loading and Modal Damping for Modal
Frequency Response
SOL 112 $ Modal Transient Response

CEND

LOADSET=999

DISPL=ALL

SUBCASE 11201 $ Modal Transient Response

METHOD = 11201

SDAMP = 11202

DLOAD = 11203

TSTEP = 11204

BEGIN BULK

$ Transient Load, Time Step for SOL 112/Modal Transient Response

FORCE 888 105 100. 0. 0. 1.

LSEQ 999 11205 888

EIGRL 11201 -.1 2000. 10

Main Index
 520 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Superelement Damping

TABDMP1 11202 CRIT

0. .06 99999. 0.6 ENDT

TLOAD1 11203 11205 0 11206

TSTEP 11204 19 .01 1

TABLED1 11206

0. 0. .05 0. .08 1. .14 -1.

.17 0. 99999. 0. ENDT

ENDDATA

Listing 11-8 Indirect Method (LOADSET/LSEQ) Example Dynamic Loading and Modal Damping for Modal
Transient Response

Superelement Damping
By default modal damping for the modal solutions is only applied to the residual structure modes. In order
to specify modal damping for a superelement PARAM,SESDAMP,YES must be specified along with the
appropriate SDAMP/TABDMP1 and SEDAMP/DAMPING entries. Expanded case control can be used to
apply different modal damping to each superelement. Refer to Expanded Case Control (Ch. 4) for more details
on expanded case control.
Note that damping is additive; that is, modal damping is applied to the upstream mode, and additional modal
damping will be applied to system (residual) modes. Applying modal damping to an upstream superelement
may lead to an over-damped component.

Modal Transient Illustrative Example

Patran supports the pre- and post-processing of dynamic results with Superelements. For this example, the
cantilever plate introduced in Simple Example using Cantilever Plate (Ch. 2), will be used to demonstrate the use
of Patran to generate and post-process a modal transient solution. The grid ids, element ids, and
superelement partitioning are shown in the figure below.

Figure 11-3 Cantilever Plate Model used for Dynamic Examples

The user is urged to review the superelement definition process outlined in detail in Demonstration of Defining
Interior Points in Patran (Ch. 2) since this chapter assumes the user is familiar with defining superelements in
Patran and will only focus on the procedures necessary for using superelements in dynamic analysis.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 11 521
Dynamic Loading on Superelements

Non-Superelement Solution
The procedure for generating a modal transient input file for a superelement model is very similar to the
procedure for generating a modal transient input file for a non-superelement model. The required forms,
resulting MSC Nastran input file, and output are detailed in this section. The superelement solutions are
shown in subsequent sections.
First, the user must define a time dependent load case in the Loads/BCs tab as shown in the figure below.

Figure 11-4 Creating a Transient Load Case in Patran

For this example, two dynamic loads are specified; one time varying point load for superelement 10 (grid
211) and one for superelement 0 (grid 105) :
 A sinusoidal input at grid 211 tuned to the first bending mode
 A sinusoidal input at grid 105 tuned to the second bending mode
The loading history is shown in the figure below. For the user’s convenience, an excel spreadsheet of the input
loadings is included at /doc/seug/chapter11/transient-response/baseline/time.xlsx. In this spreadsheet, the
input values for a TLOAD2 entry are converted to tabular input. The tabular input is then saved to CSV
files for convenient input to Patran (ref: files /doc/seug/chapter11/transient-response/baseline/time105.csv
and time211.csv)

Main Index
 522 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Modal Transient Illustrative Example

Figure 11-5 Time History Loading for Grids 211 and 105

Patran provides a convenient method of importing CSV files to a time dependent field. In the Loads/BCs
tab, the user can use the “Create Non-Spatial” field icon to bring up the Fields form where the field name is
entered and the CSV file can be imported as shown below.

Figure 11-6 Importing a Time-Dependent CSV File to a Patran Field

Main Index
 CHAPTER 11 523
Dynamic Loading on Superelements

Next, the load is applied to the appropriate grids. This is similar to the process of defining a point load in
statics except that the time-dependent field must be specified.

Note: for a time-dependent load case, the input data form is double-wide as shown below. The form
will initially appear as a single-wide form with a slidebar on the bottom, but the user may
manually resize the form to show the additional input depicted below.

Figure 11-7 Defining a Time-Dependent Point Load in Patran

The time-dependent load definition procedure outlined above is applicable to Direct or Modal Transient
Response for non-superelement, list (SESET) superelement, and PART superelement models.
To define a modal transient solution, open the Analysis tab and select Solution Type… as shown below:

Main Index
 524 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Modal Transient Illustrative Example

Figure 11-8 Accessing the Solution Type Form in Patran

To define a modal transient response, the Solution Type form is set as shown below.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 11 525
Dynamic Loading on Superelements

Figure 11-9 Defining a Modal Transient Solution Type in Patran

Next, the integration time step is defined in the appropriate Subcase Parameters forms shown below. This
will generate the TSTEP entries in the MSC Nastran input file.

Main Index
 526 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Modal Transient Illustrative Example

Figure 11-10 Defining Integration Time Step in Patran

In this example, the modal damping is defined as 2% Critical damping over the frequency range. The
appropriate forms are shown below. This will generate TABDMP1 entries in the MSC Nastran input file.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 11 527
Dynamic Loading on Superelements

Figure 11-11 Defining Modal Damping in Patran

The user can define the desired output in the Output Requests form:

Main Index
 528 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Modal Transient Illustrative Example

Figure 11-12 Defining Modal Transient Output Requests in Patran

The appropriate subcase must be selected for the solution:

Figure 11-13 Selecting the Appropriate Subcase for Modal Transient Analysis

Main Index
 CHAPTER 11 529
Dynamic Loading on Superelements

Patran will generate an input file (.bdf ) using the indirect LOADSET/LSEQ method described in Indirect
Reference to EXCITEDID: LOADSET / LSEQ Method. The input file is detailed below (ref:
/doc/seug/chapter11/transient-response/baseline/modal-transient.bdf )
SOL 112

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = Cantilever Beam Modal Transient Solution

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = Baseline, No Superelements

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = YES

LOADSET = 1

SDAMPING = 1

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Modal-Transient

METHOD = 1

TSTEP = 1

SPC = 2

DLOAD = 2

DISPLACEMENT(PLOT,SORT2,REAL)=ALL

VELOCITY(PLOT,SORT2,REAL)=ALL

ACCELERATION(PLOT,SORT2,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(PLOT,SORT2,REAL)=ALL

OLOAD(PLOT,SORT2,REAL)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

TSTEP 1 5000 2.-4

TABDMP1 1 CRIT

0. .02 2000. .02 ENDT

EIGRL 1 10 0

$ Elements and Element Properties for region : pshell.1

PSHELL 1 1 .1 1 1. .833333

$ Loads for Load Case : Modal-Transient

SPCADD 2 1

TLOAD1 5 6 1

LSEQ 1 6 3

TLOAD1 7 8 2

LSEQ 1 8 4

DLOAD 2 1. 1. 5 1. 7

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : grid.ps

SPC1 1 123456 101 201

Main Index
 530 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Modal Transient Illustrative Example

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f211

FORCE 4 211 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f105

FORCE 3 105 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

$ Referenced Dynamic Load Tables

$ Dynamic Load Table : time211

TABLED1 2

0. 0. 2.-4 0. 4.-4 0. 6.-4 0.

.0312 0. .0314 0. .0316 -.025 .0318 -.0649

.032 -.105 .0322 -.144 .0324 -.184 .0326 -.223

.0328 -.261 .033 -.3 .0332 -.338 .0334 -.375

.0336 -.412 .0338 -.448 .034 -.483 .0342 -.518

.1992 0. .1994 0. .1996 0. .1998 0.

.2 0. ENDT

$ Dynamic Load Table : time105

TABLED1 1

0. 0. 2.-4 0. 4.-4 0. 6.-4 0.

.0304 0. .0306 -.195 .0308 -.429 .031 -.637

.0312 -.807 .0314 -.927 .0316 -.991 .0318 -.994

.032 -.936 .0322 -.822 .0324 -.657 .0326 -.452

.0328 -.219 .033 .0264 .0332 .271 .0334 .498

.1992 0. .1994 0. .1996 0. .1998 0.

.2 0. ENDT

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

ENDDATA 987c7626

Listing 11-9 Non-Superelement Modal Transient Input File

After running MSC Nastran, the .xdb file can be attached to Patran for post-processing. In addition to
animations and fringe plots, dynamic results are often graphed vs. time. A convenient method of selecting
multiple results (in this case 5000 time steps) is accomplished by using the filtering option as shown below.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 11 531
Dynamic Loading on Superelements

Figure 11-14 Using Filter Option to Select Multiple Results Time Steps

To view the applied load history for grids 105 and 211, the Applied Loads, Translational is selected. Next,
the “Target Entities” is used to select the desired nodes.

Main Index
 532 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Modal Transient Illustrative Example

Figure 11-15 Selecting Nodes for Graphing Results

Figure 11-16 Applied Load Time History for Grids 105 and 211 (t=0.0 to 0.2 seconds)

Note that the applied load matches the expected applied loads shown in Figure 11-5.
The following figures show results for displacements and accelerations of grids 105 and 211 (the load
application points).

Main Index
 CHAPTER 11 533
Dynamic Loading on Superelements

Figure 11-17 Displacement Time History for Grids 105 and 211 (time = 0-1.0 seconds)

Figure 11-18 Displacement Time History for Grids 105 and 211 (time = 0-0.2 seconds)

Main Index
 534 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Modal Transient Illustrative Example

Figure 11-19 Acceleration Time History for Grids 105 and 211 (time = 0-0.2 seconds)

List Superelement LOADSET / LSEQ Reference to EXCITEDID

To define a List (SESET) Superelement model for modal transient response analysis, the SESET entries and
component modes (Q-set dof ) for each superelement must be defined. Component modes can be defined
so that the Q-Set dof are automatically generatated (AUTOQSET) or manually defined
(SPOINT/SEQSET1). The following sections show the input for these two methods.

Component modes with AUTOQSET

To define a List (SESET) Superelement model, the SESET entries and QSET dof must be defined. This is
easily accomplished in Patran by using the Select Superelements form as shown below:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 11 535
Dynamic Loading on Superelements

Figure 11-20 Defining List Superelements and AUTOQSET for Modal Transient Solution

The resulting input file only differs from the baseline model by adding the PARAM,AUTOQSET and
SESET entries which are highlighted below (ref: /doc/seug/chapter11/transient-response/seset/modal-
transient-lseq-autoq.bdf )
SOL 112

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = Cantilever Beam Modal Transient Solution

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = SESET Solution

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = YES

LOADSET = 1

SDAMPING = 1

PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Modal-Transient

METHOD = 1

TSTEP = 1

SPC = 2

DLOAD = 2

Main Index
 536 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Modal Transient Illustrative Example

DISPLACEMENT(PLOT,SORT2,REAL)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

TSTEP 1 5000 2.-4

TABDMP1 1 CRIT

0. .02 2000. .02 ENDT

EIGRL 1 10 0

$ Tip.10

SESET 10 108 THRU 111

SESET 10 208 THRU 211

$ Base.20

SESET 20 101 102 103 201 202 203

$ Loads for Load Case : Modal-Transient

SPCADD 2 1

TLOAD1 5 6 105

LSEQ 1 6 3

TLOAD1 7 8 211

LSEQ 1 8 4

DLOAD 2 1. 1. 5 1. 7

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : grid.ps

SPC1 1 123456 101 201

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f211

FORCE 4 211 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f105

FORCE 3 105 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

$ Referenced Dynamic Load Tables

$ Dynamic Load Table : time211

include 'time211.dat'

$ Dynamic Load Table : time105

include 'time105.dat'

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

ENDDATA

Listing 11-10 List (SESET) Superelement Modal Transient Input File with AUTOQSET and LOADSET / LSEQ

Main Index
 CHAPTER 11 537
Dynamic Loading on Superelements

Component modes with SPOINT/SEQSET1

The component modes could be passed to the residual using manual definition of SPOINT/SEQSET1
entries. The proper input file for this method is as follows (ref: /doc/seug/chapter11/transient-
response/seset/modal-transient-lseq-seqset.bdf)
SOL 112

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = Cantilever Beam Modal Transient Solution

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = SESET Solution, LOADSET/LSEQ, SEQSET

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = YES

LOADSET = 1

SDAMPING = 1

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Modal-Transient

METHOD = 1

TSTEP = 1

SPC = 2

DLOAD = 2

DISPLACEMENT(PLOT,SORT2,REAL)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

SPOINT,1001,thru,1016

SEQSET1,10,0,1001,thru,1016

SPOINT,2001,thru,2016

SEQSET1,20,0,2001,thru,2016

PARAM POST 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

TSTEP 1 5000 2.-4

TABDMP1 1 CRIT

0. .02 2000. .02 ENDT

EIGRL 1 10 0

$ Tip.10

SESET 10 108 THRU 111

SESET 10 208 THRU 211

$ Base.20

SESET 20 101 102 103 201 202 203

$ Loads for Load Case : Modal-Transient

SPCADD 2 1

TLOAD1 5 6 1

Main Index
 538 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Modal Transient Illustrative Example

LSEQ 1 6 3

Listing 11-11 List (SESET) Superelement Modal Transient Input File with SEQSET1 and LOADSET / LSEQ

The results are the same as the baseline model.

List Superelement Direct Reference to EXCITEDID

List superelements also support the direct reference method described in Direct Reference to EXCITEID. In
this case, the EXCITEDID on the TLOAD1 entry points directly to the load identification number on a
static load entry (FORCE, PLOAD4, GRAV, etc.) or enforced motion entry (SPCD). The examples in the
previous section are modified for the direct reference method as listed below.

Component modes with AUTOQSET

The component modes for each LIST Superelement can be passed to the residual structure automatically by
specifying PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES. The proper input file for this method is as follows
SOL 112

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = Cantilever Beam Modal Transient Solution

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = SESET Solution, Direct Reference, AUTOQSET

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = YES

SDAMPING = 1

PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Modal-Transient

METHOD = 1

TSTEP = 1

SPC = 2

DLOAD = 2

DISPLACEMENT(PLOT,SORT2,REAL)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

TSTEP 1 5000 2.-4

TABDMP1 1 CRIT

0. .02 2000. .02 ENDT

EIGRL 1 10 0

Main Index
 CHAPTER 11 539
Dynamic Loading on Superelements

$ Tip.10

SESET 10 108 THRU 111

SESET 10 208 THRU 211

$ Base.20

SESET 20 101 102 103 201 202 203

$ Loads for Load Case : Modal-Transient

SPCADD 2 1

TLOAD1 5 3 105

TLOAD1 7 4 211

DLOAD 2 1. 1. 5 1. 7

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : grid.ps

SPC1 1 123456 101 201

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f211

FORCE 4 211 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f105

FORCE 3 105 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

$ Referenced Dynamic Load Tables

$ Dynamic Load Table : time211

include 'time211.dat'

$ Dynamic Load Table : time105

include 'time105.dat'

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

ENDDATA

Listing 11-12 List (SESET) Superelement Modal Transient Input File with AUTOQSET and Direct Reference to
EXCITEDID

Component modes with SPOINT/SEQSET1

If SEQSET1 entries are specified instead of PARAM,AUTOQSET (ref : /doc/seug/chapter11/transient-
response/seset/modal-transient-dir-autoq.bdf):
SOL 112

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = Cantilever Beam Modal Transient Solution

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = SESET Solution, Direct Reference, SEQSET

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = YES

SDAMPING = 1

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Modal-Transient

METHOD = 1

TSTEP = 1

Main Index
 540 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Modal Transient Illustrative Example

SPC = 2

DLOAD = 2

DISPLACEMENT(PLOT,SORT2,REAL)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

SPOINT,1001,thru,1016

SEQSET1,10,0,1001,thru,1016

SPOINT,2001,thru,2016

SEQSET1,20,0,2001,thru,2016

PARAM POST 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

TSTEP 1 5000 2.-4

TABDMP1 1 CRIT

0. .02 2000. .02 ENDT

EIGRL 1 10 0

$ Tip.10

SESET 10 108 THRU 111

SESET 10 208 THRU 211

$ Base.20

SESET 20 101 102 103 201 202 203

$ Loads for Load Case : Modal-Transient

SPCADD 2 1

TLOAD1 5 3 105

TLOAD1 7 4 211

DLOAD 2 1. 1. 5 1. 7

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : grid.ps

SPC1 1 123456 101 201

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f211

FORCE 4 211 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f105

FORCE 3 105 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

$ Referenced Dynamic Load Tables

$ Dynamic Load Table : time211

include 'time211.dat'

$ Dynamic Load Table : time105

include 'time105.dat'

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

ENDDATA

Listing 11-13 List (SESET) Superelement Modal Transient Input File with AUTOQSET and Direct Reference to
EXCITEDID

Main Index
 CHAPTER 11 541
Dynamic Loading on Superelements

Once again, the results are the same as the baseline model.

PART Superelement LOADSET / LSEQ Reference to EXCITEDID

For PART Superelements the transient load definition, integration time steps, and modal damping
(TLOADi, TABLEDi, TSTEP, and TABDMP1) entries must be defined in the main bulk data section.
Patran does not support these rules for PART superelements, so the user must manually modify the input
file.
In modal transient response analysis, the component modes (Q-set dof ) for each superelement must be
defined and passed to the downstream superelement. Component modes can be defined so that the Q-Set
dof are automatically generated and attached (AUTOQSET), semi-automatically generated and attached
(SENQSET) or manually defined and attached (SPOINT/QSET1 + SECONCT). The following sections
show the input for these three methods to define the component mode dof.

Component modes with AUTOQSET

The component modes for each PART Superelement can be passed to the residual structure automatically
by specifying PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES. The proper input file for this example is as follows (ref:
/doc/seug/chapter11/transient-response/parts/modal-transient-lseq-autoq.bdf)
SOL 112

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = Cantilever Beam Modal Transient Solution

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = PART SE Solution, LOADSET/LSEQ, AUTOQSET

ECHO = NONE

PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES

RESVEC = YES

LOADSET = 1

SDAMPING = 1

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Modal-Transient

METHOD = 1

TSTEP = 1

SPC = 2

DLOAD = 2

DISPLACEMENT(PLOT,SORT2,REAL)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

TSTEP 1 5000 2.-4

Main Index
 542 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Modal Transient Illustrative Example

TABDMP1 1 CRIT

0. .02 2000. .02 ENDT

EIGRL 1 10 0

$ Loads for Load Case : Modal-Transient

$ superelement 0 loads

TLOAD1 6 7 105

LSEQ 1 7 3

$ superelement 10 loads

TLOAD1 10 11 211

DLOAD 2 1. 1. 6 1. 10

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f105

FORCE 3 105 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

$ Referenced Dynamic Load Tables

$ Constant Load Table : time105

include 'time105.dat'

$ Dynamic Load Table : time211

include 'time211.dat'

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

$ Superelement Name: Tip.10

BEGIN SUPER = 10

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

EIGRL 1 10 0

LSEQ 1 11 5

FORCE 5 211 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

$ Superelement Name: Base.20

BEGIN SUPER = 20

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

EIGRL 1 10 0

$ Loads for Load Case : Modal-Transient

SPCADD 2 1

$ need to specify dummy LSEQ entry for each subcase,

$ i.e. fill a zero load column for this superelement

LSEQ 1 14 6

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : grid.ps

Main Index
 CHAPTER 11 543
Dynamic Loading on Superelements

SPC1 1 123456 101 201

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

ENDDATA

Listing 11-14 PART Superelement Modal Transient Input File with AUTOQSET and LOADSET / LSEQ

Component modes with SPOINT/QSET1

The component modes could be passed to the residual using manual definition of SPOINT/QSET1 entries
in the PART Superelement bulk data sections and SECONCT entries in the main bulk data section. The
proper input file for this example is as follows (ref: /doc/seug/chapter11/transient-response/parts/modal-
transient-lseq-qset.bdf )
SOL 112

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = Cantilever Beam Modal Transient Solution

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = PART SE Solution, LOADSET/LSEQ, QSET1

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = YES

LOADSET = 1

SDAMPING = 1

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Modal-Transient

METHOD = 1

TSTEP = 1

SPC = 2

DLOAD = 2

DISPLACEMENT(PLOT,SORT2,REAL)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

SPOINT,11001,thru,11016

SPOINT,12001,thru,12016

SECONCT 10 0

1001 THRU 1016 11001 THRU 11016

SECONCT 20 0

2001 THRU 2016 12001 THRU 12016

PARAM POST 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

TSTEP 1 5000 2.-4

TABDMP1 1 CRIT

0. .02 2000. .02 ENDT

EIGRL 1 10 0

Main Index
 544 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Modal Transient Illustrative Example

$ Loads for Load Case : Modal-Transient

$ superelement 0 loads

TLOAD1 6 7 105

LSEQ 1 7 3

$ superelement 10 loads

TLOAD1 10 11 211

DLOAD 2 1. 1. 6 1. 10

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f105

FORCE 3 105 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

$ Referenced Dynamic Load Tables

$ Constant Load Table : time105

include 'time105.dat'

$ Dynamic Load Table : time211

include 'time211.dat'

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

$ Superelement Name: Tip.10

BEGIN SUPER = 10

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

SPOINT,1001,thru,1016

QSET1,0,1001,thru,1016

PARAM POST 0

LSEQ 1 11 5

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f211

FORCE 5 211 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

$ Superelement Name: Base.20

BEGIN SUPER = 20

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

SPOINT,2001,thru,2016

QSET1,0,2001,thru,2016

PARAM POST 0

$ Loads for Load Case : Modal-Transient

SPCADD 2 1

$ need dummy LSEQ entry for subcase,

$ i.e. fill a zero load column for this superelement

LSEQ 1 14 6

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : grid.ps

SPC1 1 123456 101 201

Main Index
 CHAPTER 11 545
Dynamic Loading on Superelements

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

ENDDATA

Listing 11-15 PART Superelement Modal Transient Input File with QSET1 and LOADSET / LSEQ

Component modes with SENQSET

The component modes could be passed to the residual using semi-automatic definition of SENQSET entries
in the main bulk data section. The proper input file for this method is as follows (ref:
/doc/seug/chapter11/transient-response/parts/modal-transient-lseq-senqset.bdf ):
SOL 112

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = Cantilever Beam Modal Transient Solution

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = PART SE Solution, LOADSET/LSEQ, SENQSET

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = YES

LOADSET = 1

SDAMPING = 1

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Modal-Transient

METHOD = 1

TSTEP = 1

SPC = 2

DLOAD = 2

DISPLACEMENT(PLOT,SORT2,REAL)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

senqset,10,16

senqset,20,16

PARAM POST 0

$ Loads for Load Case : Modal-Transient

$ superelement 0 loads

TLOAD1 6 7 105

LSEQ 1 7 3

$ superelement 10 loads

TLOAD1 10 11 211

DLOAD 2 1. 1. 6 1. 10

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f105

FORCE 3 105 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

$ Referenced Dynamic Load Tables

Main Index
 546 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Modal Transient Illustrative Example

$ Constant Load Table : time105

include 'time105.dat'

$ Dynamic Load Table : time211

include 'time211.dat'

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

$ Superelement Name: Tip.10

BEGIN SUPER = 10

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST 0

LSEQ 1 11 5

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f211

FORCE 5 211 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

$ Superelement Name: Base.20

BEGIN SUPER = 20

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST 0

$ Loads for Load Case : Modal-Transient

SPCADD 2 1

$ need dummy LSEQ entry for subcase,

$ i.e. fill a zero load column for this superelement

LSEQ 1 14 6

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : grid.ps

SPC1 1 123456 101 201

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

ENDDATA

Listing 11-16 PART Superelement Modal Transient Input File with SENQSET and LOADSET / LSEQ

Once again, the results match the baseline.

PART Superelement Direct Reference to EXCITEDID

PART superelements also support the direct reference method described in Direct Reference to EXCITEID.
In this case, the EXCITEDID on the TLOAD1 entry points directly to the load identification number on a
static load entry (FORCE, PLOAD4, GRAV, etc.) or enforced motion entry (SPCD). The examples in the
previous section are modified for the direct reference method as listed below.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 11 547
Dynamic Loading on Superelements

Component modes with AUTOQSET

The component modes for each PART Superelement can be passed to the residual structure automatically
by specifying PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES. The proper input file for this example is as follows (ref:
/doc/seug/chapter11/transient-response/parts/modal-transient-dir-autoq.bdf)
SOL 112

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = Cantilever Beam Modal Transient Solution

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = PART SE Solution, Direct Reference, AUTOQSET

ECHO = NONE

PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES

RESVEC = YES

SDAMPING = 1

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Modal-Transient

METHOD = 1

TSTEP = 1

SPC = 2

DLOAD = 2

DISPLACEMENT(PLOT,SORT2,REAL)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

TSTEP 1 5000 2.-4

TABDMP1 1 CRIT

0. .02 2000. .02 ENDT

EIGRL 1 10 0

$ Loads for Load Case : Modal-Transient

$ superelement 0 loads

TLOAD1 6 3 105

$ superelement 10 loads

TLOAD1 10 5 211

DLOAD 2 1. 1. 6 1. 10

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f105

FORCE 3 105 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

$ Referenced Dynamic Load Tables

$ Constant Load Table : time105

include 'time105.dat'

$ Dynamic Load Table : time211

Main Index
 548 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Modal Transient Illustrative Example

include 'time211.dat'

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

$ Superelement Name: Tip.10

BEGIN SUPER = 10

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST 0

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f211

FORCE 5 211 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

$ Superelement Name: Base.20

BEGIN SUPER = 20

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST 0

$ Loads for Load Case : Modal-Transient

SPCADD 2 1

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : grid.ps

SPC1 1 123456 101 201

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

ENDDATA

Listing 11-17 PART Superelement Modal Transient Input File with AUTOQET and Direct Reference to
EXCITEDID

Component modes with SPOINT/QSET1

The component modes could be passed to the residual using manual definition of SPOINT/QSET1 entries
in the PART Superelement bulk data sections and SECONCT entries in the main bulk data section. The
proper input file for this example is as follows (ref: /doc/seug/chapter11/transient-response/parts/modal-
transient-dir-qset.bdf )
SOL 112

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = Cantilever Beam Modal Transient Solution

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = PART SE Solution, Direct Reference, QSET1

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = YES

SDAMPING = 1

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Modal-Transient

Main Index
 CHAPTER 11 549
Dynamic Loading on Superelements

METHOD = 1

TSTEP = 1

SPC = 2

DLOAD = 2

DISPLACEMENT(PLOT,SORT2,REAL)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

SPOINT,11001,thru,11016

SPOINT,12001,thru,12016

SECONCT 10 0

1001 THRU 1016 11001 THRU 11016

SECONCT 20 0

2001 THRU 2016 12001 THRU 12016

PARAM POST 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

TSTEP 1 5000 2.-4

TABDMP1 1 CRIT

0. .02 2000. .02 ENDT

EIGRL 1 10 0

$ Loads for Load Case : Modal-Transient

$ superelement 0 loads

TLOAD1 6 3 105

$ superelement 10 loads

TLOAD1 10 5 211

DLOAD 2 1. 1. 6 1. 10

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f105

FORCE 3 105 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

$ Referenced Dynamic Load Tables

$ Constant Load Table : time105

include 'time105.dat'

$ Dynamic Load Table : time211

include 'time211.dat'

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

$ Superelement Name: Tip.10

BEGIN SUPER = 10

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

SPOINT,1001,thru,1016

QSET1,0,1001,thru,1016

PARAM POST 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

Main Index
 550 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Modal Transient Illustrative Example

EIGRL 1 10 0

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f211

FORCE 5 211 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

$ Superelement Name: Base.20

BEGIN SUPER = 20

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

SPOINT,2001,thru,2016

QSET1,0,2001,thru,2016

PARAM POST 0

$ Loads for Load Case : Modal-Transient

SPCADD 2 1

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : grid.ps

SPC1 1 123456 101 201

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

ENDDATA

Listing 11-18 PART Superelement Modal Transient Input File with QSET1 and Direct Reference to EXCITEDID

Component modes with SENQSET

The component modes could be passed to the residual using semi-automatic definition of SENQSET entries
in the main bulk data section. The proper input file for this method is as follows (ref:
/doc/seug/chapter11/transient-response/parts/modal-transient-dir-senqset.bdf):
SOL 112

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = Cantilever Beam Modal Transient Solution

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = PART SE Solution, Direct Reference, SENQSET

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = YES

SDAMPING = 1

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Modal-Transient

METHOD = 1

TSTEP = 1

SPC = 2

DLOAD = 2

DISPLACEMENT(PLOT,SORT2,REAL)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

Main Index
 CHAPTER 11 551
Dynamic Loading on Superelements

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

senqset,10,16

senqset,20,16

PARAM POST 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

TSTEP 1 5000 2.-4

TABDMP1 1 CRIT

0. .02 2000. .02 ENDT

EIGRL 1 10 0

$ Loads for Load Case : Modal-Transient

$ superelement 0 loads

TLOAD1 6 3 105

$ superelement 10 loads

TLOAD1 10 5 211

DLOAD 2 1. 1. 6 1. 10

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f105

FORCE 3 105 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

$ Referenced Dynamic Load Tables

$ Constant Load Table : time105

include 'time105.dat'

$ Dynamic Load Table : time211

include 'time211.dat'

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

$ Superelement Name: Tip.10

BEGIN SUPER = 10

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST 0

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f211

FORCE 5 211 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

$ Superelement Name: Base.20

BEGIN SUPER = 20

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST 0

$ Loads for Load Case : Modal-Transient

SPCADD 2 1

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : grid.ps

SPC1 1 123456 101 201

Main Index
 552 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Frequency Response Illustrative Example

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

ENDDATA 621e13d3

Listing 11-19 PART Superelement Modal Transient Input File with SENQSET and Direct Reference to
EXCITEDID

Frequency Response Illustrative Example

Non-Superelement Solution
The procedure for generating a modal frequency response input file for a superelement model is very similar
to the procedure for generating a modal frequency response input file for a non-superelement model. The
required forms, resulting MSC Nastran input file, and output are detailed in this section. The superelement
solutions are shown in subsequent sections.
First, the user must define a frequency dependent load case in the Loads/BCs tab as shown in the figure below.

Figure 11-21 Creating a Frequency Response Load Case in Patran

For this example, a constant amplitude sine sweep from 0 to 2000 Hz will be applied as a force to two
locations: one point load for superelement 10 (grid 211) and one for superelement 0 (grid 105).

Main Index
 CHAPTER 11 553
Dynamic Loading on Superelements

Patran provides a convenient method of defining the frequency-dependent loads. In the Loads/BCs tab, the
user can use the “Create Non-Spatial” field icon to bring up the Fields form where the field name is entered
and the data can be defined as shown.

Figure 11-22 Defining a Frequency Dependent Load with a Patran Field

Next, the load is applied to the appropriate grids. This is similar to the process of defining a point load in
statics except that the frequency-dependent field must be specified. NOTE: for a frequency-dependent load
case, the input data form is double-wide as shown below. The form will initially appear as a single-wide form
with a slidebar on the bottom, but the user may manually resize the form to show the additional input
depicted below.

Main Index
 554 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Frequency Response Illustrative Example

Figure 11-23 Defining a Frequency-Dependent Point Load in Patran

The frequency-dependent load definition procedure outlined above is applicable to Direct or Modal
Frequency Response for non-superelement, list (SESET) superelement, and PART superelement models.
To define a modal frequency response solution, open the Analysis tab and select Solution Type… as shown
below:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 11 555
Dynamic Loading on Superelements

Figure 11-24 Accessing the Solution Type Form in Patran

To define a modal frequency response solution, the Solution Type form is set as shown below.

Main Index
 556 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Frequency Response Illustrative Example

Figure 11-25 Defining a Modal Transient Solution Type in Patran

Next, the frequency output intervals are defined in the appropriate Subcase Parameters forms shown below.
The forms as shown below will generate the FREQ2 and FREQ4 entries in the MSC Nastran input file for
a solution frequency range from 10 to 1000Hz. For more details on strategies for specifying frequency output
request intervals refer to the Solution Frequencies (Ch. 4) in the MSC Nastran Dynamic Analysis User’s Guide.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 11 557
Dynamic Loading on Superelements

Figure 11-26 Defining Frequency Output Intervals in Patran

In this example, the modal damping is defined as 3% Critical damping over the frequency range. The
appropriate forms are shown below. This will generate TABDMP1 entries in the MSC Nastran input file.

Main Index
 558 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Frequency Response Illustrative Example

Figure 11-27 Defining Modal Damping in Patran

The user can define the desired output in the Output Requests form:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 11 559
Dynamic Loading on Superelements

Figure 11-28 Defining Modal Frequency Response Output Requests in Patran

The appropriate subcase must be selected for the solution:

Main Index
 560 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Frequency Response Illustrative Example

Figure 11-29 Selecting the Appropriate Subcase for Modal Frequency Response Analysis

Patran will generate an input file (.bdf) using the indirect LOADSET/LSEQ method described in Indirect
Reference to EXCITEDID: LOADSET / LSEQ Method. The input file is detailed below (ref:
/doc/seug/chapter11/frequency-response/baseline/freq-resp.bdf)
SOL 111

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = Cantilever Plate Modal Frequency Response Solution

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = Baseline, no superelements

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = YES

LOADSET = 1

SDAMPING = 1

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Modal-Frequency

METHOD = 1

FREQUENCY = 1

SPC = 2

DLOAD = 2

DISPLACEMENT(PLOT,SORT1,PHASE)=ALL

Main Index
 CHAPTER 11 561
Dynamic Loading on Superelements

VELOCITY(PLOT,SORT1,REAL)=ALL

ACCELERATION(PLOT,SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(PLOT,SORT1,REAL)=ALL

STRESS(PLOT,SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,BILIN)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

$[output frequency requests]

FREQ2 1 10. 1000. 50

FREQ4 1 10. 1000. 5

$[modal damping schedule]

TABDMP1 1 CRIT

0. .03 2000. .03 ENDT

EIGRL 1 10 0

$ Loads for Load Case : Modal-Frequency

SPCADD 2 1

RLOAD1 5 6 1

LSEQ 1 6 3

RLOAD1 7 8 1

LSEQ 1 8 4

DLOAD 2 1. 1. 5 1. 7

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : grid.ps

SPC1 1 123456 101 201

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f105

FORCE 3 105 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f211

FORCE 4 211 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

$ Referenced Dynamic Load Tables

$ Dynamic Load Table : sine-sweep

TABLED1 1

0. 1. 2000. 1. ENDT

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

ENDDATA

Listing 11-20 Non-Superelement Modal Frequency Response Input File

After running MSC Nastran, the .xdb file can be attached to Patran for post-processing. In addition to
animations and fringe plots, dynamic results are often graphed vs. time. A convenient method of selecting
multiple results (in this case 78 output frequencies), is by using a filtering option as shown below.

Main Index
 562 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Frequency Response Illustrative Example

Figure 11-30 Using Filter Option to Select Multiple Results Frequencies

To view the acceleration output for grids 105 and 211, the Accelerations, Translational is selected. Next, the
“Target Entities” is used to select the desired nodes.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 11 563
Dynamic Loading on Superelements

Figure 11-31 Selecting Nodes for Graphing Results

The displacement and acceleration responses for grids 105 and 211 are shown below

Main Index
 564 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Frequency Response Illustrative Example

Figure 11-32 Acceleration Frequency Response for Grids 105 and 211 (10-100 Hz)

Figure 11-33 Displacement Frequency Response for Grids 105 and 211 (10-100 Hz)

Main Index
 CHAPTER 11 565
Dynamic Loading on Superelements

List Superelement LOADSET / LSEQ Reference to EXCITEDID

To define a List (SESET) Superelement model for modal frequency response analysis, the SESET entries and
component modes (Q-set dof) for each superelement must be defined. Component modes can be defined
so that the Q-Set dof are automatically generatated (AUTOQSET) or manually defined
(SPOINT/SEQSET1). The following sections show the input for these two methods.

Component modes with AUTOQSET

This is easily accomplished in Patran by using the Select Superelements form as shown below:

Figure 11-34 Defining List Superelements and AUTOQSET for Modal Frequency Response Solution

The resulting input file only differs from the baseline model by adding the PARAM,AUTOQSET and
SESET entries which are highlighted below (ref: /doc/seug/chapter11/ frequency-response/seset/freq-resp-
lseq-autoq.bdf )
SOL 111

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = Cantilever Beam Modal Frequency Response Solution

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = List superelements,LOADSET/LSEQ, AUTOQSET

ECHO = NONE

PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES

RESVEC = YES

LOADSET = 1

Main Index
 566 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Frequency Response Illustrative Example

SDAMPING = 1

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Modal-Frequency

METHOD = 1

FREQUENCY = 1

SPC = 2

DLOAD = 2

DISPLACEMENT(PLOT,SORT1,PHASE)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

FREQ2 1 10. 1000. 50

FREQ4 1 10. 1000. 5

TABDMP1 1 CRIT

0. .03 2000. .03 ENDT

EIGRL 1 10 0

$ Tip.10

SESET 10 108 THRU 111

SESET 10 208 THRU 211

$ Base.20

SESET 20 101 102 103 201 202 203

$ Loads for Load Case : Modal-Frequency

SPCADD 2 1

RLOAD1 5 6 1

LSEQ 1 6 3

RLOAD1 7 8 1

LSEQ 1 8 4

DLOAD 2 1. 1. 5 1. 7

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : grid.ps

SPC1 1 123456 101 201

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f105

FORCE 3 105 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f211

FORCE 4 211 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

$ Referenced Dynamic Load Tables

$ Dynamic Load Table : sine-sweep

TABLED1 1

0. 1. 2000. 1. ENDT

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

Main Index
 CHAPTER 11 567
Dynamic Loading on Superelements

ENDDATA 07282fbc

Listing 11-21 List (SESET) Superelement Frequency Response Input File with AUTOQSET and LOADSET /
LSEQ

Component modes with SPOINT/SEQSET1

The component modes could be passed to the residual using manual definition of the SPOINT/SEQSET1
entries – refer to Figure 11-34. The proper input file for this method is as follows (ref:
/doc/seug/chapter11/frequency-response/seset/freq-resp-lseq-seqset.bdf):
SOL 111

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = Cantilever Beam Modal Frequency Response Solution

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = List superelements, LOADSET/LSEQ, SEQSET1

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = YES

LOADSET = 1

SDAMPING = 1

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Modal-Frequency

METHOD = 1

FREQUENCY = 1

SPC = 2

DLOAD = 2

DISPLACEMENT(PLOT,SORT1,PHASE)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

SPOINT,1001,thru,1016

SEQSET1,10,0,1001,thru,1016

SPOINT,2001,thru,2016

SEQSET1,20,0,2001,thru,2016

PARAM POST 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

FREQ2 1 10. 1000. 50

FREQ4 1 10. 1000. 5

TABDMP1 1 CRIT

0. .03 2000. .03 ENDT

EIGRL 1 10 0

$ Tip.10

Main Index
 568 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Frequency Response Illustrative Example

SESET 10 108 THRU 111

SESET 10 208 THRU 211

$ Base.20

SESET 20 101 102 103 201 202 203

$ Loads for Load Case : Modal-Frequency

SPCADD 2 1

RLOAD1 5 6 1

LSEQ 1 6 3

RLOAD1 7 8 1

LSEQ 1 8 4

DLOAD 2 1. 1. 5 1. 7

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : grid.ps

SPC1 1 123456 101 201

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f105

FORCE 3 105 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f211

FORCE 4 211 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

$ Referenced Dynamic Load Tables

$ Dynamic Load Table : sine-sweep

TABLED1 1

0. 1. 2000. 1. ENDT

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

ENDDATA

Listing 11-22 List (SESET) Superelement Modal Frequency Response Input File with SEQSET1 and LOADSET
/ LSEQ

The results are the same as the baseline model.

List Superelement Direct Reference to EXCITEDID

List superelements also support the direct reference method described in Direct Reference to EXCITEID. In
this case, the EXCITEDID on the TLOAD1 entry points directly to the load identification number on a
static load entry (FORCE, PLOAD4, GRAV, etc.) or enforced motion entry (SPCD). The examples in the
previous section is modified for the direct reference method and listed below.

Component modes with AUTOQSET

The component modes for each List Superelement can be passed to the residual structure automatically by
specifying PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES. The proper input file for this method is as follows
SOL 111

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

Main Index
 CHAPTER 11 569
Dynamic Loading on Superelements

TITLE = Cantilever Beam Modal Frequency Response Solution

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = List superelements, Direct Reference, AUTOQSET

ECHO = NONE

PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES

RESVEC = YES

LOADSET = 1

SDAMPING = 1

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Modal-Frequency

METHOD = 1

FREQUENCY = 1

SPC = 2

DLOAD = 2

DISPLACEMENT(PLOT,SORT1,PHASE)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

FREQ2 1 10. 1000. 50

FREQ4 1 10. 1000. 5

TABDMP1 1 CRIT

0. .03 2000. .03 ENDT

EIGRL 1 10 0

$ Tip.10

SESET 10 108 THRU 111

SESET 10 208 THRU 211

$ Base.20

SESET 20 101 102 103 201 202 203

$ Loads for Load Case : Modal-Frequency

SPCADD 2 1

RLOAD1 5 3 1

RLOAD1 7 4 1

DLOAD 2 1. 1. 5 1. 7

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : grid.ps

SPC1 1 123456 101 201

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f105

FORCE 3 105 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f211

FORCE 4 211 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

$ Referenced Dynamic Load Tables

$ Dynamic Load Table : sine-sweep

Main Index
 570 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Frequency Response Illustrative Example

TABLED1 1

0. 1. 2000. 1. ENDT

ENDDATA

Listing 11-23 List (SESET) Superelement Modal Frequency response Input File with AUTOQSET and Direct
Reference to EXCITEDID

Component modes with SPOINT/SEQSET1

The component modes could be passed to the residual using manual definition of SPOINT/SEQSET1
entries. The proper input file for this method is as follows (ref : /doc/seug/chapter11/frequency-
response/seset/freq-resp-dir-seqset.bdf ):
SOL 111

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = Cantilever Beam Modal Frequency Response Solution

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = List superelements, LOADSET/LSEQ, SEQSET1

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = YES

SDAMPING = 1

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Modal-Frequency

METHOD = 1

FREQUENCY = 1

SPC = 2

DLOAD = 2

DISPLACEMENT(PLOT,SORT1,PHASE)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

SPOINT,1001,thru,1016

SEQSET1,10,0,1001,thru,1016

SPOINT,2001,thru,2016

SEQSET1,20,0,2001,thru,2016

PARAM POST 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

FREQ2 1 10. 1000. 50

FREQ4 1 10. 1000. 5

TABDMP1 1 CRIT

0. .03 2000. .03 ENDT

EIGRL 1 10 0

$ Tip.10

Main Index
 CHAPTER 11 571
Dynamic Loading on Superelements

SESET 10 108 THRU 111

SESET 10 208 THRU 211

$ Base.20

SESET 20 101 102 103 201 202 203

$ Loads for Load Case : Modal-Frequency

SPCADD 2 1

RLOAD1 5 3 1

RLOAD1 7 4 1

DLOAD 2 1. 1. 5 1. 7

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : grid.ps

SPC1 1 123456 101 201

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f105

FORCE 3 105 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f211

FORCE 4 211 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

$ Referenced Dynamic Load Tables

$ Dynamic Load Table : sine-sweep

TABLED1 1

0. 1. 2000. 1. ENDT

ENDDATA

Listing 11-24 List (SESET) Superelement Modal Frequency response Input File with AUTOQSET and Direct
Reference to EXCITEDID

Once again, the results are the same as the baseline model

PART Superelement LOADSET / LSEQ Reference to EXCITEDID

For PART Superelements the frequency load definition, frequency output intervals, and modal damping
(RLOADi, TABLEDi, FREQi, and TABDMP1) entries must be defined in the main bulk data section.
Patran does not support these rules for PART superelements, so the user must manually modify the input
file.
In modal frequency response analysis, the component modes (Q-set dof) for each superelement must be
defined and passed to the downstream superelement. Component modes can be defined so that the Q-Set
dof are automatically generated and attached (AUTOQSET), semi-automatically generated and attached
(SENQSET) or manually defined and attached (SPOINT/QSET1 + SECONCT). The following sections
show the input for these three methods to define the component mode dof.

Main Index
 572 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Frequency Response Illustrative Example

Component modes with AUTOQSET

The component modes for each PART Superelement can be passed to the residual structure automatically by
specifying PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES. The proper input file for this method is as follows (ref: /doc/seug/
frequency-response/chapter11/parts/freq-resp-lseq-autoq.bdf)
SOL 111

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = Cantilever Plate Modal Frequency Response Solution

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = PART Superelements, LOADSET/LSEQ, AUTOQSET

ECHO = NONE

PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES

RESVEC = YES

LOADSET = 1

SDAMPING = 1

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Modal-Frequency

METHOD = 1

FREQUENCY = 1

SPC = 2

DLOAD = 2

DISPLACEMENT(PLOT,SORT1,PHASE)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

FREQ2 1 10. 1000. 50

FREQ4 1 10. 1000. 5

TABDMP1 1 CRIT

0. .03 2000. .03 ENDT

EIGRL 1 10 0

$ Loads for Load Case : Modal-Frequency

RLOAD1 6 7 1

LSEQ 1 7 3

RLOAD1 10 11 1

DLOAD 2 1. 1. 6 1. 10

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f105

FORCE 3 105 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

$ Referenced Dynamic Load Tables

$ Dynamic Load Table : sine-sweep

TABLED1 1

0. 1. 2000. 1. ENDT

Main Index
 CHAPTER 11 573
Dynamic Loading on Superelements

$ Superelement Name: Tip.10

BEGIN SUPER = 10

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST 0

$ Loads for Load Case : Modal-Frequency

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f211

LSEQ 1 11 5

FORCE 5 211 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

BEGIN SUPER = 20

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST 0

$ Loads for Load Case : Modal-Frequency

SPCADD 2 1

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : grid.ps

SPC1 1 123456 101 201

$ dummy LSEQ

LSEQ 1 99 88

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

ENDDATA

Listing 11-25 PART Superelement Modal Frequency Response Input File with AUTOQSET and LOADSET /
LSEQ

Component modes with SPOINT/QSET1

The component modes could be passed to the residual using manual definition of SPOINT/QSET1 entries
in the PART Superelement bulk data sections and SECONCT entries in the main bulk data section. The
proper input file for this method is as follows (ref: /doc/seug/chapter11/frequency-response/parts/freq-resp-
lseq-qset.bdf)
SOL 111

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = Cantilever Plate Modal Frequency Response Solution

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = PART Superelements, LOADSET/LSEQ, QSET1

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = YES

LOADSET = 1

SDAMPING = 1

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Modal-Frequency

Main Index
 574 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Frequency Response Illustrative Example

METHOD = 1

FREQUENCY = 1

SPC = 2

DLOAD = 2

DISPLACEMENT(PLOT,SORT1,PHASE)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

SPOINT,11001,thru,11016

SPOINT,12001,thru,12016

SECONCT 10 0

1001 THRU 1016 11001 THRU 11016

SECONCT 20 0

2001 THRU 2016 12001 THRU 12016

PARAM POST 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

FREQ2 1 10. 1000. 50

FREQ4 1 10. 1000. 5

TABDMP1 1 CRIT

0. .03 2000. .03 ENDT

EIGRL 1 10 0

$ Loads for Load Case : Modal-Frequency

RLOAD1 6 7 1

LSEQ 1 7 3

RLOAD1 10 11 1

DLOAD 2 1. 1. 6 1. 10

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f105

FORCE 3 105 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

$ Referenced Dynamic Load Tables

$ Dynamic Load Table : sine-sweep

TABLED1 1

0. 1. 2000. 1. ENDT

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

$ Superelement Name: Tip.10

BEGIN SUPER = 10

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

SPOINT,1001,thru,1016

QSET1,0,1001,thru,1016

PARAM POST 0

$ Loads for Load Case : Modal-Frequency

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f211

Main Index
 CHAPTER 11 575
Dynamic Loading on Superelements

LSEQ 1 11 5

FORCE 5 211 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

$ Superelement Name: Base.20

BEGIN SUPER = 20

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

SPOINT,2001,thru,2016

QSET1,0,2001,thru,2016

PARAM POST 0

$ Loads for Load Case : Modal-Frequency

SPCADD 2 1

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : grid.ps

SPC1 1 123456 101 201

$ dummy LSEQ

LSEQ 1 99 88

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

ENDDATA

Listing 11-26 PART Superelement Modal Frequency Response Input File with QSET1 and LOADSET / LSEQ

Component modes with SENQSET

The component modes could be passed to the residual using semi-automatic definition of SENQSET entries
in the main bulk data section. The proper input file for this method is as follows (ref:
/doc/seug/chapter11/frequency-response/parts/freq-resp-lseq-senqset.bdf )
SOL 111

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = Cantilever Plate Modal Frequency Response Solution

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = PART Superelements, LOADSET/LSEQ, SENQSET

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = YES

LOADSET = 1

SDAMPING = 1

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Modal-Frequency

METHOD = 1

FREQUENCY = 1

SPC = 2

DLOAD = 2

DISPLACEMENT(PLOT,SORT1,PHASE)=ALL

Main Index
 576 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Frequency Response Illustrative Example

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

senqset,10,16

senqset,20,16

PARAM POST 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

FREQ2 1 10. 1000. 50

FREQ4 1 10. 1000. 5

TABDMP1 1 CRIT

0. .03 2000. .03 ENDT

$ Loads for Load Case : Modal-Frequency

RLOAD1 6 7 1

LSEQ 1 7 3

RLOAD1 10 11 1

DLOAD 2 1. 1. 6 1. 10

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f105

FORCE 3 105 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

$ Referenced Dynamic Load Tables

$ Dynamic Load Table : sine-sweep

TABLED1 1

0. 1. 2000. 1. ENDT

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

$ Superelement Name: Tip.10

BEGIN SUPER = 10

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST 0

$ Loads for Load Case : Modal-Frequency

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f211

LSEQ 1 11 5

FORCE 5 211 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

$ Superelement Name: Base.20

BEGIN SUPER = 20

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST 0

$ Loads for Load Case : Modal-Frequency

SPCADD 2 1

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : grid.ps

Main Index
 CHAPTER 11 577
Dynamic Loading on Superelements

SPC1 1 123456 101 201

$ dummy LSEQ

LSEQ 1 99 88

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

ENDDATA

Listing 11-27 PART Superelement Modal Frequency Response Input File with SENQSET and LOADSET / LSEQ

Once again, the results match the baseline.

PART Superelement Direct Reference to EXCITEDID

PART superelements also support the direct reference method described in Direct Reference to EXCITEID. In this
case, the EXCITEDID on the TLOAD1 entry points directly to the load identification number on a static
load entry (FORCE, PLOAD4, GRAV, etc.) or enforced motion entry (SPCD). The examples in the
previous section are modified for the direct reference method as listed below.

Component modes with AUTOQSET

The component modes for each PART Superelement can be passed to the residual structure automatically
by specifying PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES. The proper input file for this example is as follows (ref:
/doc/seug/chapter11/frequency-response/parts/freq-resp-dir-autoq.bdf )
SOL 111

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = Cantilever Plate Modal Frequency Response Solution

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = PART Superelements, Direct Reference, AUTOQSET

ECHO = NONE

PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES

RESVEC = YES

SDAMPING = 1

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Modal-Frequency

METHOD = 1

FREQUENCY = 1

SPC = 2

DLOAD = 2

DISPLACEMENT(PLOT,SORT1,PHASE)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

Main Index
 578 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Frequency Response Illustrative Example

PARAM POST 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

FREQ2 1 10. 1000. 50

FREQ4 1 10. 1000. 5

TABDMP1 1 CRIT

0. .03 2000. .03 ENDT

EIGRL 1 10 0

$ Loads for Load Case : Modal-Frequency

RLOAD1 6 3 1

RLOAD1 10 5 1

DLOAD 2 1. 1. 6 1. 10

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f105

FORCE 3 105 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

$ Referenced Dynamic Load Tables

$ Dynamic Load Table : sine-sweep

TABLED1 1

0. 1. 2000. 1. ENDT

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

$ Superelement Name: Tip.10

BEGIN SUPER = 10

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST 0

$ Loads for Load Case : Modal-Frequency

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f211

FORCE 5 211 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

$ Superelement Name: Base.20

BEGIN SUPER = 20

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST 0

$ Loads for Load Case : Modal-Frequency

SPCADD 2 1

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : grid.ps

SPC1 1 123456 101 201

ENDDATA

Listing 11-28 PART Superelement Modal Transient Input File with AUTOQET and Direct Reference to
EXCITEDID

Main Index
 CHAPTER 11 579
Dynamic Loading on Superelements

Component modes with SPOINT/QSET1

The component modes could be passed to the residual using manual definition of SPOINT/QSET1 entries
in the PART Superelement bulk data sections and SECONCT entries in the main bulk data section. The
proper input file for this example is as follows (ref: /doc/seug/chapter11/frequency-response/parts/freq-resp-
dir-qset.bdf )
SOL 111

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = Cantilever Plate Modal Frequency Response Solution

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = PART Superelements, LOADSET/LSEQ, QSET1

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = YES

SDAMPING = 1

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Modal-Frequency

METHOD = 1

FREQUENCY = 1

SPC = 2

DLOAD = 2

DISPLACEMENT(PLOT,SORT1,PHASE)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

SPOINT,11001,thru,11016

SPOINT,12001,thru,12016

SECONCT 10 0

1001 THRU 1016 11001 THRU 11016

SECONCT 20 0

2001 THRU 2016 12001 THRU 12016

PARAM POST 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

FREQ2 1 10. 1000. 50

FREQ4 1 10. 1000. 5

TABDMP1 1 CRIT

0. .03 2000. .03 ENDT

EIGRL 1 10 0

$ Loads for Load Case : Modal-Frequency

RLOAD1 6 3 1

RLOAD1 10 5 1

DLOAD 2 1. 1. 6 1. 10

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f105

Main Index
 580 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Frequency Response Illustrative Example

FORCE 3 105 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

$ Referenced Dynamic Load Tables

$ Dynamic Load Table : sine-sweep

TABLED1 1

0. 1. 2000. 1. ENDT

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

$ Superelement Name: Tip.10

BEGIN SUPER = 10

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

SPOINT,1001,thru,1016

QSET1,0,1001,thru,1016

PARAM POST 0

$ Loads for Load Case : Modal-Frequency

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f211

FORCE 5 211 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

$ Superelement Name: Base.20

BEGIN SUPER = 20

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

SPOINT,2001,thru,2016

QSET1,0,2001,thru,2016

PARAM POST 0

$ Loads for Load Case : Modal-Frequency

SPCADD 2 1

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : grid.ps

SPC1 1 123456 101 201

ENDDATA

Listing 11-29 PART Superelement Modal Transient Input File with QSET1 and Direct Reference to EXCITEDID

Component modes with SENQSET

The component modes could be passed to the residual using semi-automatic definition of SENQSET entries
in the main bulk data section. The proper input file for this method is as follows (ref: /doc/seug/frequency-
response/chapter11/parts/freq-resp-dir-senqset.bdf ):
SOL 111

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = Cantilever Plate Modal Frequency Response Solution

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = PART Superelements, Direct Reference, SENQSET

Main Index
 CHAPTER 11 581
Dynamic Loading on Superelements

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = YES

SDAMPING = 1

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Modal-Frequency

METHOD = 1

FREQUENCY = 1

SPC = 2

DLOAD = 2

DISPLACEMENT(PLOT,SORT1,PHASE)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

senqset,10,16

senqset,20,16

PARAM POST 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

FREQ2 1 10. 1000. 50

FREQ4 1 10. 1000. 5

TABDMP1 1 CRIT

0. .03 2000. .03 ENDT

EIGRL 1 10 0

$ Loads for Load Case : Modal-Frequency

RLOAD1 6 3 1

RLOAD1 10 5 1

DLOAD 2 1. 1. 6 1. 10

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f105

FORCE 3 105 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

$ Referenced Dynamic Load Tables

$ Dynamic Load Table : sine-sweep

TABLED1 1

0. 1. 2000. 1. ENDT

$ Superelement Name: Tip.10

BEGIN SUPER = 10

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

EIGRL 1 10 0

$ Loads for Load Case : Modal-Frequency

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f211

FORCE 5 211 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

Main Index
 582 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
External Superelement Dynamic Loading

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

$ Superelement Name: Base.20

BEGIN SUPER = 20

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

EIGRL 1 10 0

$ Loads for Load Case : Modal-Frequency

SPCADD 2 1

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : grid.ps

SPC1 1 123456 101 201

ENDDATA

Listing 11-30 PART Superelement Modal Frequency Response Input File with SENQSET and Direct Reference
to EXCITEDID

External Superelement Dynamic Loading

There are two common strategies for applying dynamic loads to external superelements:
 Apply the load in the reduction run and carry it downstream
 Keep physical dof at the load application points so that the load can be applied at the assembly level
The first method allows the user to define either point or distributed loads efficiently, while the second
method is only practical if there are only a few loading points.

Residual Vectors
One consideration for external superelements is the handling of residual vectors. A detailed description of
residual vectors can be found in the Modal Augmentation Methods (Ch. 13) in the MSC Nastran Dynamic Analysis
User’s Guide. Currently, MSC Nastran computes the flexible component modes and residual vectors and
combines them with the constraint modes. When the combined matrices are attached in a downstream
dynamic solution, the residual vectors are not distinguished from the flexible component modes and are used
in the computation of the assembly flexible modes. In this case, the upstream residual vectors will combine
with the system modes and become indistinguishable. The ramifications are that the upstream residual
vectors are allowed to respond dynamically in the system solution. In other words, RESVEC(NODYN) is
only applicable to residual vectors calculated for the residual structure. Remark 5 of the RESVEC case
control command states:
5. Caution needs to be exercised when allowing the residual vectors to respond dynamically in a modal
solution. The best approach is to always include enough normal modes to capture the dynamics of the
problem, and rely on the residual vectors to help account for the influence of the truncated modes on the
quasistatic portion of the response. This is not the default setting for this capability. When choosing to allow
the residual vectors to respond dynamically, it is important to be aware of the frequency content of the

Main Index
 CHAPTER 11 583
Dynamic Loading on Superelements

excitation, as it will have the ability to excite these augmentation modes. If this is undesirable, then the
forcing function should be filtered in advance to remove any undesired frequency content, or specify the
NODYNRSP keyword.

Applying a Dynamic Load an External Superelement

Dynamic loads are applied during the dynamic solution. In order to apply a dynamic loading to an external
superelement, the static load vector must have been generated during the reduction run. The static load can
be generated for normal modes, transient response, or frequency response solutions as detailed in the
following table:

Table 11-4 Defining Static Load Vector During External Superelement Creation Run
Static Load Vector Definition
Reduction Solution Case Control Bulk Data Loading
Normal Modes (SOL 103) LOAD=loadid FORCE, PLOAD4, GRAV, etc
Transient Response DLOAD=dynloadid DLOAD, TLOADi
 Direct, SOL 109
 Modal SOL 112
Frequency Response DLOAD=dynloadid DLOAD, RLOADi
 Direct, SOL 108
 Modal, SOL 111

A sample of the case control and bulk data necessary to define the static load vector for Normal Modes,
Modal Transient Response, and Modal Frequency Response external superelement creation are shown below:
assign output2='se10_dmig_103.op2' unit=31 delete

SOL 103

CEND

EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK,EXTBULK,EXTID=10) DMIGOP2=31

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Modes

METHOD = 1

$ define static load

LOAD=5

BEGIN BULK

spoint,1001,thru,1017

qset1,0,1001,thru,1017

aset1,123456,107,207

Main Index
 584 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
External Superelement Dynamic Loading

FORCE 5 211 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

EIGRL 1 10 0

Listing 11-31 Example of Defining a Static Load Vector in Normal Modes External Superelement Creation Run

assign output2='se10_dmig_112.op2' unit=31 delete

SOL 112

CEND

EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK,EXTBULK,EXTID=10) DMIGOP2=31

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Modal-Transient

METHOD = 1

$ not necessary during reduction

$ TSTEP = 1

DLOAD = 10

BEGIN BULK

spoint,1001,thru,1017

qset1,0,1001,thru,1017

aset1,123456,107,207

$ superelement 10 loads

TLOAD1 10 5 211

$ Dynamic Load Table : time211

include 'time211.dat'

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f211

FORCE 5 211 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

Listing 11-32 Example of Defining a Static Load Vector in Modal Transient External Superelement Creation
Run

assign output2='se10_dmig_111.op2' unit=31 delete

SOL 111

CEND

EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK,EXTBULK,EXTID=10) DMIGOP2=31

SUBCASE 1

Main Index
 CHAPTER 11 585
Dynamic Loading on Superelements

SUBTITLE=Modal-Transient

METHOD = 1

$ not necessary during reduction

$ FREQ = 1

DLOAD = 10

BEGIN BULK

spoint,1001,thru,1017

qset1,0,1001,thru,1017

aset1,123456,107,207

FREQ2 1 10. 1000. 50

FREQ4 1 10. 1000. 5

$ superelement 10 loads

RLOAD1 10 5 1

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f211

FORCE 5 211 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

$ Dynamic Load Table : sine-sweep

TABLED1 1

0. 1. 2000. 1. ENDT

Listing 11-33 Example of Defining a Static Load Vector in Modal Frequency Response External Superelement
Creation Run

Note that for the dynamic solution sequences, the time varying or frequency varying loads are not applied.
Another way of saying this is that only the static load vector is calculated for the external superelement.
More detailed examples are contained in CHAPTER 12.

Applying the Time History to the External Loading

Since only the static load vectors are calculated during external superelement creation, the dynamic loading
must be defined during the assembly run. The method applying dynamic load history to the external
superelement is the same as the LOADSET / LSEQ method for PART Superelements defined in Sections
PART Superelement LOADSET / LSEQ Reference to EXCITEDID and PART Superelement LOADSET
/ LSEQ Reference to EXCITEDID. This means that the DLOAD, TLOADi, and/or RLOADi entries for
the external superelement loads must be defined in the main bulk data section and that an LSEQ entry must
be defined in the BEGIN SUPER section associated with the external superelement. Examples for defining
dynamic loading on an external superelement for modal transient and modal frequency response are shown
below.
assign inputt2='se10_dmig_112.op2' unit=31

SOL 112

CEND

SDAMPING = 1

LOADSET=1

Main Index
 586 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
External Superelement Dynamic Loading

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Modal-Transient

METHOD = 1

TSTEP = 1

SPC = 2

DLOAD = 10

BEGIN BULK

TSTEP 1 5000 2.-4

TABDMP1 1 CRIT

0. .02 2000. .02 ENDT

EIGRL 1 10 0

$ superelement 10 loads

TLOAD1 10 5 211

$ Dynamic Load Table : time211

TABLED1 211

0. 0. 2.-4 0. 4.-4 0. 6.-4 0.

include 'create-se10-112.asm'

$ .pch file has BEGIN SUPER=10

include 'create-se10-112.pch'

$ need dummy LSEQ entry for subcase,

LSEQ 1 101 1

Listing 11-34 Defining the Dynamic Loading for an External Superelement in the Assembly Run for Modal
Transient Analysis
assign inputt2='se10_dmig_111.op2' unit=31

SOL 111

CEND

SDAMPING = 1

LOADSET=1

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Modal Frequency Response

METHOD = 1

FREQ= 1

SPC = 2

DLOAD = 10

BEGIN BULK

$ superelement 10 loads

RLOAD1 10 11 1

Main Index
 CHAPTER 11 587
Dynamic Loading on Superelements

$ Dynamic Load Table : sine-sweep

TABLED1 1

0. 1. 2000. 1. ENDT

include 'create-se10-111.asm'

$ .pch file has BEGIN SUPER=10

include 'create-se10-111.pch'

$ need dummy LSEQ entry for subcase,

LSEQ 1 101 1

Listing 11-35 Defining the Dynamic Loading for an External Superelement in the Assembly Run for Modal
Frequency Response Analysis

More detailed examples are contained in CHAPTER 12.

Combining External Superelement Dynamic Loads with Residual Dynamic

Loads
Combining external superelement dynamic loads with residual structure dynamic loads is accomplished by
using the DLOAD bulk data entry to combing multiple dynamic loads. The DLOAD bulk data entry must
be defined in the main bulk data section only. Examples for modal transient and modal frequency response
are shown below.l
assign inputt2='se10_dmig_112.op2' unit=31

SOL 112

CEND

SDAMPING = 1

LOADSET=1

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Modal-Transient

METHOD = 1

TSTEP = 1

SPC = 2

DLOAD = 2

BEGIN BULK

TSTEP 1 5000 2.-4

TABDMP1 1 CRIT

0. .02 2000. .02 ENDT

EIGRL 1 10 0

$ Loads for Load Case : Modal-Transient

$ superelement 0 loads

TLOAD1 6 7 105

LSEQ 1 7 3

Main Index
 588 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
External Superelement Dynamic Loading

$ superelement 10 loads

TLOAD1 10 5 211

DLOAD 2 1. 1. 6 1. 10

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f105

FORCE 3 105 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

$ Referenced Dynamic Load Tables

$ Constant Load Table : time105

include 'time105.dat'

$ Dynamic Load Table : time211

include 'time211.dat'

include 'create-se10-112.asm'

$ .pch file has BEGIN SUPER=10

include 'create-se10-112.pch'

$ need dummy LSEQ entry for subcase,

LSEQ 1 101 1

ENDDATA

Listing 11-36 Combining Dynamic Loads on External Superelement and Residual Structure with DLOAD Bulk
Data Entry for Modal Transient Response Analysis

assign inputt2='se10_dmig_111.op2' unit=31

SOL 111

CEND

SDAMPING = 1

LOADSET=1

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Modal Frequency Response

METHOD = 1

FREQ= 1

SPC = 2

DLOAD = 2

BEGIN BULK

FREQ2 1 10. 1000. 50

FREQ4 1 10. 1000. 5

TABDMP1 1 CRIT

0. .03 2000. .03 ENDT

EIGRL 1 10 0

$ Loads for Load Case : Modal-Transient

$ superelement 0 loads

Main Index
 CHAPTER 11 589
Dynamic Loading on Superelements

RLOAD1 6 7 1

LSEQ 1 7 3

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f105

FORCE 3 105 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

$ superelement 10 loads

RLOAD1 10 11 1

DLOAD 2 1. 1. 6 1. 10

$ Referenced Dynamic Load Tables

$ Dynamic Load Table : sine-sweep

TABLED1 1

0. 1. 2000. 1. ENDT

include 'create-se10-111.asm'

$ .pch file has BEGIN SUPER=10

include 'create-se10-111.pch'

$ need dummy LSEQ entry for subcase,

LSEQ 1 101 1

Listing 11-37 Combining Dynamic Loads on External Superelement and Residual Structure with DLOAD Bulk
Data Entry for Modal Frequency Response Analysis

Main Index
 590 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
External Superelement Dynamic Loading

External Superelements and Damping

Depending on the type of damping, damping applied directly to the external superelement must be defined
either during the superelement reduction run or the assembly run. A detailed discussion of damping can be
found in the Damping (Ch. 6) in the .

Table 11-5 Applying Damping to External Superelements

Damping Effect Case Control Entries Bulk Data Entries Comment
Structural Damping n/a PARAM,G Applied during
assembly run only
PARAM,W3
Material Damping n/a MATi, GE field Applied during
reduction run only.
PARAM,W4 Generates “K4”
matrices (i.e. K4AAX)
Modal Damping SDAMPING TABDMP1 Generated during
reduction run only.
PARAM,SESDAMP,YES Generates “BAA”
matrices (i.e. BAAX)
Rayleigh Damping SEDAMP DAMPING ALPHA1 Generated during
and ALPHA2 entries assembly run only.
Or Must use DMIGPCH
Or option.
n/a
PARAM,ALPHA1

PARAM,ALPHA2
Viscous Dampers n/a CDAMPi, PBUSH, etc. Generated during
assembly run only.

Generates “BAA”
matrices (i.e. BAAX)

Note: Damping is additive. This means that modal damping applied to a superelement component
modes and modal damping applied to the residual solution will be additive.

1.

Main Index
 Chapter 12: External Superelement Examples
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User’s Guide

12 External Superelement
Examples

Introduction
 Connections

Static Examples

Modal Examples

Transient Response Examples

Frequency Response Examples

External Superelement Usage in SOL 400

SOL 400 3-Step Method

Main Index
 592 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Introduction

Introduction
The purpose of this Chapter is to provide a single-source location for external superelement examples using
both the 2-Step and 3-Step methods. Although there have been many examples throughout this Guide, this
section provides the practioner with a single reference location for the common solutions and examples to
cover most of the methods that can be used to define and attach external superelements.
The model used throughout this section is intentionally simple so that the reader can concentrate on process
rather than geometry:

Figure 12-1 External Superelement Example Model Used Throughout Chapter 12

Section Connections provides a summary of the commands necessary to use external superelements, and section
Static Examples – Frequency Response Examples provides detailed examples for statics, normal modes, modal
transient response, and modal frequency response.
There are two methods for defining external superelements, the 2-Step Method and the 3-Step Method.
Section Defining and Attaching External Superelements (Ch. 2) should be reviewed for the basic differences between
the two methods and their implementation and limitations.

Connections
Patran provides an excellent interface for creating external superelements with the 2-Step method; and
creating the external superelements for the 3-Step method requires only a few extra entries to be entered
manually in the Direct Text Input section when creating an Analysis Job. However, Patran does not provide
a specific interface for connecting the external superelements to a downstream solution, so the user must enter
the connection information manually, either via the Direct Text Input section of Patran, or by manipulating
the input file by hand.
The following subsections describe the connection options and caveats for attaching external superelements
to an assembly run.

Automatic Connections
The easiest method for the user is to use the automatic boundary search option built in to MSC Nastran. In
the automatic search, the locations of the boundary are compared to the locations of all other grids in the

Main Index
 CHAPTER 12 593
External Superelement Examples

model, and if there is a geometric match (within tolerance), the grids are automatically connected in the
superelement map (refer to Section The Superelement Map – SEMAP (Ch. 2), for more details).
The SEBULK bulk data entry is used to define the external superelement (the TYPE field) and the
connection method (the METHOD field).

SEBULK Partitional Superelement Connection

Defines superelement boundary search options and a repeated, mirrored, or collector superelement.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SEBULK SEID TYPE RSEID METHO TOL LOC UNITN
D O

Example:
SEBULK 14 REPEAT 4 AUTO 1.0E-3

Field Contents
SEID Partitioned superelement identification number. See Remark 10. (Integer > 0)
TYPE Superelement type. (Character; no Default)
PRIMARY Primary

REPEAT Identical

MIRROR Mirror

COLLCTR Collector

EXTERNAL External

EXTOP2 External using an OUTPUT2 file created in an earlier run.

RSEID Identification number of the reference superelement, used if TYPE = “REPEAT” and
“MIRROR”. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)
METHOD Method to be used when searching for boundary grid points. (Character: “AUTO” or
“MANUAL”; Default = “AUTO”)
TOL Location tolerance to be used when searching for boundary grid points. (Real; Default =
10E-5)

Main Index
 594 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Connections

Field Contents
LOC Coincident location check option for manual connection option. (Character: “YES” or
“NO”; Default = “YES”)
UNITNO FORTRAN unit number for the OUTPUT2 file (applicable and meaningful only when
TYPE = “EXTOP2”).

When the AUTO method is chosen, MSC Nastran performs a boundary search for the external superelement
in the same manner as it does for internal PART superelements.

Manual Connections
The automatic attachment method to find boundary connections works in many applications, however, there
are circumstances when it will fail or provide unintended connections. An example where the automatic
connection logic will fail is when there are multiple coincident grids at the attachment points. In this case,
MSC Nastran cannot determine the user intention and will issue a FATAL message. Another example where
the automatic connection logic will provide unintended connections is when there are grids retained in the
reduction run that are not intended to be attached to an assembly. For instance, the user may retain
additional grids in the reduction so that relative displacements can be calculated between the component and
a grid that is in the assembly solution.
Fortunately, MSC Nastran has anticipated these cases and provides the user options to define the connections
manually. The following subsections describe the entries available to the user to handle the cases where there
are multiple coincident grids or grids that should not be connected.

SECONCT
The SECONCT entry is used to explicitly define the attachment grids (or spoints). The format is straight
forward as the user defines the superelements to be considered and the grid/spoint pairings.

SECONCT Partitioned Superelement Boundary-Point Connection

Explicitly defines grid and scalar point connection procedures for a partitioned superelement.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SECONCT SEIDA SEIDB TOL LOC
GIDA1 GIDB1 GIDA2 GIDB2 GIDA3 GIDB3 -etc.-

Example:
SECONCT 10 20 1.0E-4 YES
1001 4001 2222 4444

Main Index
 CHAPTER 12 595
External Superelement Examples

Alternate Format and Example:

SECONCT SEIDA SEIDB TOL LOC
GIDA1 ‘THRU’ GIDA2 GIDB1 ‘THRU’ GIDB2

SECONCT 10 20
101 ‘THRU’ 110 201 ‘THRU’ 210

Field Contents
SEIDA Identification number of superelement for connection to SEIDB. (Integer > 0)
SEIDB Identification number of superelement for connection to SEIDA. (Integer > 0)
TOL Location tolerance to be used when searching for or checking boundary grid points. (Real;
Default = 10E-5)
LOC Coincident location check option for manual connection. (Character; “YES” or “NO”;
Default = “YES”)
GIDAi Identification number of a grid or scalar point in superelement SEIDA, which will be
connected to GIDBi
GIDBi Identification number of a grid or scalar point in superelement SEIDB, which will be
connected to GIDAi

SEEXCLD
Rather than define a manual pairing (which is potentially a tedious process), the user has the option to
exclude grids from the automatic search with the SEEXCLD entry. The interface requires the superelement
pairings and the grids/spoints to be excluded in the search (on one side of the superelement interface).

SEEXCLD Partitioned Superelement Exclusion

Defines grids that will be excluded during the attachment of a partitioned superelement.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SEEXCLD SEIDA SEIDB GIDA1 GIDA2 GIDA3 GIDA4 GIDA5 GIDA6
GIDA7 GIDA8 -etc.-

Main Index
 596 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Connections

Example 1:
SEEXCLD 110 10 45 678 396

Example 2:
SEEXCLD 400 ALL 10 20 30 THRU 40

Field Contents
SEIDA Partitioned superelement identification number. (Integer > 0)
SEIDB Superelement identification. (Integer > 0 or Character = “ALL”; Default = “ALL”)
GIDAi Identification number of a grid in superelement SEIDA to be excluded from connection
to superelement SEIDB. (Integer > 0 or “THRU”; for “THRU” option GIDA1 <
GIDA2.)

SEBNDRY
Another method for removing conflicts (multiple grids) or unintentional connections is with the SEBNDRY
entry. In this case, the automatic boundary search is limited to the grids specified on the SEBNDRY entry.

SEBNDRY Superelement Boundary-Point Definition

Defines a list of grid points in a partitioned superelement for the automatic boundary search between a
specified superelement or between all other superelements in the model.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SEBNDRY SEIDA SEIDB GIDA1 GIDA2 GIDA3 GIDA4 GIDA5 GIDA6
GIDA7 GIDA8 -etc.-

Example:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SEBNDRY 400 4 10 20 30 40

This entry is used to limit the automatic search logic to selected grid points for certain PARTs. Any grid points
listed on this entry are the only grid points in SEIDA to which the automatic logic can connect grid points
in SEIDB.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 12 597
External Superelement Examples

Description of the fields on this entry:

Field Contents
SEIDA Partitioned superelement identification number. (Integer > 0)
SEIDB Superelement identification. See Remark 2. (Integer > 0 or Character “ALL”; Default =
“ALL”)
GIDAi Identification number of a boundary grid point in superelement SEIDA. (Integer > 0 or
“THRU”; For “THRU” option, G1 < G2.)

Potential Conflicts with SPC/MPC dof

During the superelement reduction, the boundary dof are defined with ASET/ASET1, BSET/BSET1,
CSET/CSET1, BNDFIX/BNDFIX1, BNDFREE/BNDFREE1, or QSET/QSET1 entries. The boundary
dof must be part of the MSC Nastran ASET; therefore, the boundary dof must not be SPC’d, MPC’d, or
AUTOSPC’d during the reduction process.

PARAM AUTOMSET
Boundary dof are often chosen at centerline grids for external superelement models. In many cases an RBE3
is used to spider the centerline grid dof to the physical grids as shown below.

Figure 12-2 Example of RBE3 Connecting Centerline Grid to Structural Grids

Main Index
 598 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Static Examples

In the case of an RBE3, the central grid is dependent by default; therefore if the user assigns this as an external
point, there will be conflicts between the dependent dof (M-Set) and the A-set dof and a FATAL message will
occur. To avoid the set conflict, the user has two options:
 Use the “UM” option on the RBE3 to reassign the dependent dof
 Use PARAM,AUTOMSET,YES to instruct MSC Nastran to resolve the conflict
For either option, the set conflict is resolved and the reduction to the boundary occurs without incident.

Lagrange MPCs
Typically, the dependent dof associated with RBE’s are placed in the “mr” set, while the dependent dof
associated with MPC’s are placed in the “mp” set; which collectively define the M-Set. However, if the user
specifies RIGID=LAGRAN in the case control, the dependent dof are carried into the ASET as part of the
“lm” dof. Currently the MSC Nastran processing does not handle the RIGID=LAGRAN for external
superelement reduction. This is not legal and a FATAL message will ensue:
*** USER FATAL MESSAGE 4349 (GP4)
THERE ARE LAGRANGE RIGID ELEMENTS IN THE MODEL (RBAR, RBE1, RBE2, RBE3,
RJOINT, RROD, RPRPLT) AND AN EXTERNAL SUPERELEMENT GENERATION REQUEST
(EXTSEOUT OR PARAM,EXTOUT).
USER INFORMATION: AN EXTERNAL SUPERELEMENT (CREATED WITH THE EXTSEOUT
CASE CONTROL COMMAND OR THE EXTOUT PARAMETER) CANNOT CONTAIN
LAGRANGE RIGID ELEMENTS.

Static Examples
The static examples are based on the model shown in Figure 12-1, section Defining and Attaching External
Superelements (Ch. 2) provides additional details about the commands.
The examples for each method described in this section are organized as follows in the MSC Nastran
installation directories /doc/seug/chapter12/statics:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 12 599
External Superelement Examples

Figure 12-3 Example Files for Static 2-Step External Superelement Method

Static Examples Using 2-Step Method (EXTSEOUT)

Baseline Solution Without Superelements
The baseline solution for the cantilever plate in Figure 12-1 was covered in section Simple Example using Cantilever
Plate (Ch. 2), and will not be revisited here. The baseline file can be found in
/doc/seug/chapter12/statics/baseline/cant-beam.bdf. This file will be used as the comparison point for all
examples detailed in this section.

Step 1: Creation of External Superelement

When using the 2-step method to create an external superelement, the EXTSEOUT provides different
formats of creating the reduced matrices and output transformation matrices:
 MATRIXDB* – store the matrices and output transformation matrices on the MASTER/DBALL
 DMIGDB* – store the matrices and output transformation matrices on the MASTER/DBALL in
DMIG binary format
 DMIGOP2 – store the matrices and output transformation matrices on an .op2 file
 MATOP4 – store the matrices and output transformation matrices on the .pch and .op4 files
 DMIGPCH – store the matrices and output transformation matrices on the .pch

Note: If the user selects MATRIXDB or DMIGDB method, the input file must be run with
SCRATCH=NO to save the .MASTER/.DBALL for the second step.

Main Index
 600 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Static Examples

The first step in creating an external superelement is to define the boundary dof by specifying the ASET
entries. Patran provides a convenient form to define the ASET. A representative example is shown below.

Figure 12-4 Defining Boundary dof in Patran

The Patran interface allow the user to select the desired method through the ‘Translation Parameters’ tab of
the Analysis form.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 12 601
External Superelement Examples

Figure 12-5 Selecting EXTSEOUT Method in Patran

Patran will export an MSC Nastran input file with the appropriate entries to perform the external
superelement creation:
SOL 101

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = MSC Nastran JOB CREATED ON 20-MAR-11 AT 12:28:00

ECHO = NONE

EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK,EXTBULK,EXTID=20,MATRIXDB)

SUBCASE 1

TITLE=MSC Nastran JOB CREATED ON 20-MAR-11 AT 12:28:00

SUBTITLE=DEFAULT

LABEL=SESET STATIC SOLUTION

SPC = 2

DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,CENTER)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

Main Index
 602 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Static Examples

ASET1 123456 104 204

ENDDATA

Listing 12-1 Static Reduction Run for MATRIXDB Method – 2-Step Method

In the .bdf file, the EXTSEOUT command is in the case control section.
The external creation runs for the various methods can be found in /doc/seug/chapter12/statics/external-2-
step/*/create-se10.bdf and create-se20.bdf; where *=dmigdb, dmigop2, dmigpch, matop4, or matrixdb.
If there is more than one superelement, the user will need to check the UNIT numbers that PATRAN has
automatically assigned. Since there are multiple superelements that will be attached in the assembly run, the
user will need to manually adjust the unit numbers in the DMIGOP2 or MATOP4 options to avoid conflicts
during the assembly. These necessary changes are highlighted in the listings below
ASSIGN OUTPUT4='extse10.op4',UNIT=35

SOL 101

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = MSC Nastran JOB CREATED ON 20-MAR-11 AT 12:28:00

ECHO = NONE

EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK,EXTBULK,EXTID=10,MATOP4=35)

SUBCASE 1

ASSIGN OUTPUT4='extse20.op4',UNIT=36

SOL 101

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = MSC Nastran JOB CREATED ON 20-MAR-11 AT 12:28:00

ECHO = NONE

EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK,EXTBULK,EXTID=10,MATOP4=36)

SUBCASE 1

Listing 12-2 Example Highlighting Changes to Input File Necessary to Avoid Conflicts in the Assembly Run
(MATOP4 shown, DMIGOP2 similar)

After running the reduction run, MSC Nastran will produce two files (.asm and .pch) that define the
necessary connection information. These files assume that the connection nodes in the assembly run will
have the same IDs as the grids in the reduction run. If this is not the case, the user can modify the SEBULK
entry to use the AUTO method, or manually provide the pairs.
An example of the .asm and .pch files defining the default external superelement connections are shown
below:
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$

$ ASSEMBLY PUNCH (.ASM) FILE FOR EXTERNAL SUPERELEMENT 10

$ -------------------------------------------------------------

Main Index
 CHAPTER 12 603
External Superelement Examples

$ THIS FILE CONTAINING BULK DATA ENTRIES PERTAINING TO

$ EXTERNAL SUPERELEMENT 10 IS MEANT FOR INCLUSION

$ ANYWHERE IN THE MAIN BULK DATA PORTION OF THE ASSEMBLY RUN

$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$

$--------------------------- COLUMN NUMBERS ----------------------------

$00000000111111111122222222223333333333444444444455555555556666666666777

$23456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012

$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$

SEBULK 10 EXTOP4 MANUAL 35

SECONCT 10 0

107 107 207 207

$ BOUNDARY GRID DATA

GRID 107 6. 0. 0.

GRID 207 6. 1. 0.

$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$

Listing 12-3 External Superelement “.asm” File Generated Automatically from the External Superelement
Reduction Run (ASMBULK option chosen)
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$

$ STANDARD PUNCH (.PCH) FILE FOR EXTERNAL SUPERELEMENT 10

$ -------------------------------------------------------------

$ THIS FILE CONTAINING BULK DATA ENTRIES PERTAINING TO

$ EXTERNAL SUPERELEMENT 10 IS MEANT FOR INCLUSION

$ AT THE VERY END OF THE MAIN BULK DATA PORTION OF THE ASSEMBLY RUN

$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$

$--------------------------- COLUMN NUMBERS ----------------------------

$00000000111111111122222222223333333333444444444455555555556666666666777

$23456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012

$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$

BEGIN SUPER 10

EXTRN 107 123456 207 123456

$ BOUNDARY GRID DATA

Main Index
 604 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Static Examples

GRID 107 6. 0. 0.

GRID 207 6. 1. 0.

ASET 107 123456 207 123456

Listing 12-4 External Superelement “.pch” File Generated Automatically from the External Superelement
Reduction Run (EXTBULK option chosen)

Note that if coordinate systems are necessary to define the grid placement or displacement coordinate
systems, then they would also be generated.

Step 2: Attachment of External Superelement with Data Recovery

To create the assembly input file, the user needs to define the appropriate File Management Section entries
to define the external superelement files and define the appropriate Bulk Data entries to define the external
superelement attachment information. The required entries can be entered manually by editing the assembly
input file or by defining the commands in the Direct Text Input when generating an Analysis file in Patran.
For the MATRIXDB method, the direct text is shown in the figures below.

Figure 12-6 Direct Text Input for the File Management Section Required to Attach the External
Superelements (MATRIXDB and DMIGDB Methods)

Main Index
 CHAPTER 12 605
External Superelement Examples

Figure 12-7 Direct Text Input for the Bulk Data Section Required to Attach the External Superelements (all
Methods)

Note: The Direct Text Input for the bulk data section must be written at the “END” of the input
file. The correct order is to include all of the .asm files, followed by the .pch files. Recall that
the .pch files have a BEGIN SUPER entry which means the entries after the include .pch will
be applicable to the superelement

The resulting assembly input file for the MATRIXDB method is shown below with the direct text inputs
highlighted.
$ Direct Text Input for Nastran System Cell Section

$ Direct Text Input for File Management Section

assign se10m='se_10_reduce_matrixdb.MASTER'

DBLOCATE DATABLK=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=10) LOGI=se10m

assign se20m='se_20_reduce_matrixdb.MASTER'

DBLOCATE DATABLK=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=20) LOGI=se20m

$ Direct Text Input for Executive Control

$ Linear Static Analysis, Database

SOL 101

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = MSC Nastran JOB CREATED ON 20-MAR-11 AT 12:28:00

ECHO = NONE

SUBCASE 1

TITLE=MSC Nastran JOB CREATED ON 20-MAR-11 AT 12:28:00

SUBTITLE=DEFAULT

LABEL=SESET STATIC SOLUTION

DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

Main Index
 606 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Static Examples

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,CENTER)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

include 'se_10_reduce_matrixdb.asm'

include 'se_20_reduce_matrixdb.asm'

include 'se_10_reduce_matrixdb.pch'

include 'se_20_reduce_matrixdb.pch'

ENDDATA

Listing 12-5 Static Assembly Input File for the MATRIXDB and DMIGDB Methods

The DMIGDB option uses the same FMS and BULK entries as the MATRIXDB method.
For the DMIGPCH file, the case control section must be modified to include the K2GG and P2G entries as
shown below:

Figure 12-8 Direct Text Input for the Case Control Section Required to Attach the External Superelements
(DMIGPCH Method)

For the DMIGOP2 assembly file, the File Management Section of direct text input must specify the file
names associated with each external superelement. Here, the user will define the ASSIGN INPUTT2 entries
with their associated unit numbers for the respective files.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 12 607
External Superelement Examples

Figure 12-9 Direct Text Input for the File Management Section Required to Attach the External
Superelements (DMIGOP2 Method)

The MATOP4 method uses similar File Management Section entries except INPUTT4 replaces INPUTT2.

Static Examples Using 3-Step Method

The 3-Step method of external superelement creation, assembly, and data recovery is not directly supported
by Patran. However, the required entries are reasonably straight forward and easily entered by hand.

Baseline Solution Without Superelements

The baseline solution is the same as described in Section Baseline Solution Without Superelements.

Step 1: Creation of External Superelement

The difference for the External Superelement Creation between the 2-step method and the 3-step method is
that the database must be saved in this step. Also, for EXTSEOUT export options DMIGDB and
MATRIXDB, the dbext keyword must be specified along with INIT dbext FMS statement.

Main Index
 608 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Static Examples

Table 12-1 Summary of FMS Statements and Case Control commands Required for Step 1 of 3-Step
Method
Export Option FMS Statements and Case Control Commands Comment
MATRIXDB or MATDB FMS: INIT dbext
Case: EXTSEOUT(MATDB=dbext …)
DMIGDB FMS: INIT dbext
Case: EXTSEOUT(DMIGDB=dbext …) Run with scr=no
DMIGOP2 FMS: ASSIGN OUTPUT2=… UNIT=unitop2
Case: EXTSEOUT(DMIGOP2=unitop2 …)
DMIGPCH Case: EXTSEOUT(DMIGPCH …)
MATRIXOP4 or FMS: ASSIGN OUTPUT4=… UNIT=unitop4
MATOP4 Case: EXTSEOUT(MATOP4=unitop4 …)

A sample.bdf for DMIGDB and DMIGOP2 reductions can be seen below. The following file may be found
at /doc/seug/chapter12/Statics/external-3-step/dmigdb.
ASSIGN MASTER='se_20_reduce_dmigdb.master' delete

ASSIGN DBALL='se_20_reduce_dmigdb.dball' delete

$ allocate dbset for boundary matrices and OTMs

ASSIGN extdb='se_20_reduce_dmigdb.extdb' delete

init extdb

SOL 101

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = Static, 3-Step external se, dmigdb, create se 20

ECHO = NONE

EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK,EXTID=20,DMIGDB=extdb)

SUBCASE 1

SPC = 2

DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,CENTER)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

...

ASET1 123456 104 204

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

ENDDATA

Listing 12-6 External Superelement Reduction Step for Step 1 of 3-Step Method - DMIGDB Export Option

Main Index
 CHAPTER 12 609
External Superelement Examples

The following file may be found at /doc/seug/chapter12/Statics/external-3-step/dmigop2.

ASSIGN MASTER='se_20_reduce_dmigdb.master' delete

ASSIGN DBALL='se_20_reduce_dmigdb.dball' delete

$ allocate dbset for boundary matrices and OTMs

ASSIGN extdb='se_20_reduce_dmigdb.extdb' delete

init extdb

SOL 101

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = Static, 3-Step external se, dmigdb, create se 20

ECHO = NONE

EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK,EXTID=20,DMIGDB=extdb)

SUBCASE 1

SPC = 2

DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,CENTER)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

...

ASET1 123456 107 207

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

ENDDATA

Listing 12-7 External Superelement Reduction for Step 1 of 3 Step Method – DMIGOP2 Export Option

Step 2: Attachment of External Superelement

In the creation of the residual solution assembly file, the user defines the FMS statements necessary to define
the files created in the Step 1 reduction. The user must also Specify the include statements for the .asm files
as shown in Listing 12-5.
In addition, the boundary solution must be saved for Step-3, data recovery. In order to save the boundary
solution, a file must be defined and EXTDROUT Case Control command must be defined in the bulk data
section for each external superelement for which data recovery is desired. The following table shows the FMS
statements and Case Control commands necessary to request and store the boundary solution matrices for
each export option.

Main Index
 610 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Static Examples

Table 12-2 Summary of FMS Statements and Case Control commands Required for Step 2 of 3-Step
Method
Export Option FMS Statements and Case Control Commands Comment
MATRIXDB or MATDB FMS: INIT dbext
Case: EXTDROUT(MATDB=dbext …) Run with scr=no
DMIGDB FMS: INIT dbext Run with scr=no
Case: EXTDROUT(DMIGDB=dbext …)
DMIGOP2 FMS: ASSIGN OUTPUT2=… UNIT=unitop2
Case: EXTDROUT(DMIGOP2=unitop2 …)
DMIGPCH Case: EXTDROUT(DMIGPCH …)
MATRIXOP4 or MATOP4 FMS: ASSIGN OUTPUT4=… UNIT=unitop4
Case: EXTDROUT(MATOP4=unitop4 …)

Sample input files for the DMIGDB and DMIGOP2 export options can be seen below. The following file
may be found at /doc/seug/chapter12/Statics/external-3-step/dmigdb.
ASSIGN SE10M='se_10_reduce_dmigdb.master'

DBLOCATE DB=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=10),LOGICAL=SE10M

ASSIGN SE20M='se_20_reduce_dmigdb.master'

DBLOCATE DB=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=20),LOGICAL=SE20M

ASSIGN MASTER='assemble_dmigdb.master' delete

ASSIGN DBALL='assemble_dmigdb.dball' delete

init se10dr

ASSIGN SE10DR='assemble_dmigdb.se10dr' delete

init se20dr

ASSIGN SE20DR='assemble_dmigdb.se20dr' delete

$ Direct Text Input for Executive Control

$ Linear Static Analysis, Database

SOL 101

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = Static, 3-Step external se, dmigdb, assembly

ECHO = NONE

DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,CENTER)=ALL

SUBCASE 1

super=10

extdrout(dmigdb=se10dr)

SUBCASE 2

Main Index
 CHAPTER 12 611
External Superelement Examples

super=20

extdrout(dmigdb=se20dr)

subcase 3

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

...

incl create-se10.asm

incl create-se20.asm

ENDDATA

Listing 12-8 Assembly Input File for DMIGDB Export Option - Step 2 of 3-Step Method

ASSIGN MASTER='assemble.master' delete

ASSIGN DBALL='assemble.dball' delete

ASSIGN INPUTT2='extse10.op2' unit=35

ASSIGN OUTPUT2='extse10bndry.op2' unit=37 DELETE

ASSIGN INPUTT2='extse20.op2' unit=36

ASSIGN OUTPUT2='extse20bndry.op2' unit=38 DELETE

$ Direct Text Input for Executive Control

$ Linear Static Analysis, Database

SOL 101

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = Static, 3-Step external se, dmigop2, assembly

ECHO = NONE

DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,CENTER)=ALL

SUBCASE 1

super=10

extdrout(dmigop2=37)

SUBCASE 2

super=20

extdrout(dmigop2=38)

subcase 3

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

...

$ define connection for SE 10 – uses AUTO connection

incl create-se10.asm

incl create-se20.asm

ENDDATA

Main Index
 612 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Static Examples

Listing 12-9 Assembly Input File for DMIGOP2 – Step 2 of 3 Step Method

The figure below show the Patran Direct Text Input necessary for the DMIGDB Export Option.

Figure 12-10 Definition of FMS Direct Text Input for DMIGDB Export Option – Step 2 of 3-Step Method

Step 3: External Data Recovery Restart

In the data recovery stage of the 3-step method, the user can obtain full data recovery (including Grid Point
Forces, MPCForces, etc.) and obtain .xdb output. In the recover files, it is necessary to restart from the Step
1 MSC Nastran database (.MASTER and .DBALL files). The user must define the files which contain the
boundary solution for each respective superelement from Step 2. The user must keep the case control
structure (SPC, MPC, LOAD, DEFORM, etc.) the same as the Step 1 solution, with the exception of data
recovery.
The following entries are required for the data recovery step:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 12 613
External Superelement Examples

Table 12-3 Summary of FMS Statements and Case Control commands Required for Step 3 of 3-Step
Method
Export Option FMS Statements and Case Control Commands Comment
MATRIXDB or FMS: ASSIGN DB1=SE_database from Step 1
MATDB RESTART LOGI=DB1
ASSIGN DB2=sol_database from Step 2
DBLOCATE LOGI=DB2
Case: EXTDRIN(MATDB)
DMIGDB FMS: ASSIGN DB1=SE_database from Step 1
RESTART LOGI=DB1
ASSIGN DB2=sol_database from Step 2 Read-only restart
DBLOCATE LOGI=DB2
Case: EXTDRIN(DMIGDB)
DMIGOP2 FMS: ASSIGN DB1=SE_database from Step 1
RESTART LOGI=DB1
ASSIGN INPUTT2=… UNIT=unitop2 from Step 2
Case: EXTDRIN(DMIGOP2=unitop2)
DMIGPCH FMS: ASSIGN DB1=SE_database from Step 1
RESTART LOGI=DB1
ASSIGN INPUTT4=… UNIT=unitop4 from Step 2
Case: EXTSEOUT(MATOP4=unitop4 …)

A sample.bdf for DMIGDB and DMIGOP2 export options for external superelement data recovery can be
seen below. The following file may be found at /doc/seug/chapter12/Statics/external-3-step/dmigdb.
ASSIGN SE10M='se_10_reduce_dmigdb.master'

RESTART LOGICAL=SE10M

ASSIGN ASSYM='assemble_dmigdb.master'

DBLOCATE DB=(EXTDB) WHERE(SEID=10),LOGICAL=ASSYM

SOL 101

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = Static, 3-Step external se, dmigdb, recovery se 10

ECHO = NONE

extdrin(dmigdb)

SUBCASE 1

Main Index
 614 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Modal Examples

LOAD = 3

DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,CENTER)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

ENDDATA

Listing 12-10 External Superelement Data Recovery Step of 3-Step Method - DMIGDB Export Option

The following file may be found at /doc/seug/chapter12/Statics/external-3-step/dmigop2.

ASSIGN SE10M='create-se10.MASTER'

ASSIGN SE10D='create-se10.DBALL'

RESTART LOGICAL=SE10M

ASSIGN INPUTT2='extse10bndry.op2' UNIT=37

SOL 101

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = Static, 3-Step external se, dmigop2, recovery se 10

ECHO = NONE

extdrin(dmigop2=37)

SUBCASE 1

LOAD = 3

DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,CENTER)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

ENDDATA

Listing 12-11 Data Recovery Input File for DMIGOP2 Method – Step 3 of 3 Step Method

Modal Examples
The modal examples are based on the model shown in Figure 12-1, section Defining and Attaching External
Superelements (Ch. 2) provides additional details.
The examples for each method described in this section are organized as follows in the MSC Nastran
installation directories /doc/seug/chapter12/modal:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 12 615
External Superelement Examples

Figure 12-11 Example Files for Static 2-Step External Superelement Method

The primary difference between a static reduction and a modal reduction is the definition of entries required
to store and attach the modal dof associated with Component Modes Synthesis. For more information on
Component Modes Synthesis, refer to Dynamic Reduction – Component Modes Synthesis (Ch. 9).

Modal Examples Using 2-Step Method (EXTSEOUT)

The modal examples are based on the model shown in Figure 12-1, section Defining and Attaching External
Superelements (Ch. 2) provides additional details.
The examples for each method described in this section are organized as follows in the MSC Nastran
installation directories /doc/seug/chapter12/modal:

Figure 12-12 Example Files for Static 3-Step External Superelement Method

The primary difference between a static reduction and a modal reduction is the definition of entries required
to store and attach the modal dof associated with Component Modes Synthesis. For more information on
Component Modes Synthesis, refer to Dynamic Reduction – Component Modes Synthesis (Ch. 9).

Main Index
 616 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Modal Examples

Baseline Solution Without Superelements

The baseline solution for the cantilever plate in Figure 12-1 was covered in Chapter 2 and will be revisited here.
The baseline file can be found in /doc/seug/chapter12/modal/baseline/modal.bdf. This file will be used as the
comparison point for all examples detailed in this section.

Step 1: Creation of External Superelement

When using the 2-step method to create an external superelement, the EXTSEOUT provides different
formats of creating the reduced matrices and output transformation matrices:
 MATRIXDB* – store the matrices and output transformation matrices on the MASTER/DBALL
 DMIGDB* – store the matrices and output transformation matrices on the MASTER/DBALL in
DMIG binary format
 DMIGOP2 – store the matrices and output transformation matrices on an .op2 file
 MATOP4 – store the matrices and output transformation matrices on the .pch and .op4 files
 DMIGPCH – store the matrices and output transformation matrices on the .pch

Note: If the user selects MATRIXDB or DMIGDB method, the input file must be run with
SCRATCH=NO to save the .MASTER/.DBALL for the second step.

The first step in creating an external superelement is to define the boundary dof by specifying the ASET and
SPOINT/QSET entries. Patran provides a convenient form to define the ASET. A representative example
is shown in Figure 12-4. Often SPOINTS and QSET dof are defined manually to control the IDs. In Patran,
the user can define the SPOINT and QSET entries in the Direct Text Input section for Bulk Data.
The Patran interface allow the user to select the desired method through the ‘Translation Parameters’ tab of
the Analysis form as shown in Figure 12-5.
Patran will export an MSC Nastran input file with the appropriate entries to perform the external
superelement creation, a MATRIXDB example is shown below:
SOL 103

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = MSC Nastran JOB CREATED ON 20-MAR-11 AT 12:28:00

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = YES

EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK=MANQ,EXTBULK,EXTID=10,MATRIXDB)

SUBCASE 1

$ Subcase name : DEFAULT.SC1

SUBTITLE=DEFAULT.SC1

METHOD = 1

VECTOR(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

Main Index
 CHAPTER 12 617
External Superelement Examples

BEGIN BULK

$ Loads for Load Case : DEFAULT.SC1

SPOINT 1001 THRU 1016

QSET1 1001 THRU 1016

ASET1 123456 107 207

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

ENDDATA

Listing 12-12 Modal Reduction Run for MATRIXDB Method – 2-Step Method

In the .bdf file, the EXTSEOUT command is in the case control section.
The external creation runs for the various methods can be found in /doc/seug/chapter12/modal/external-2-
step/*/create-se10.bdf and create-se20.bdf; where *=dmigdb, dmigop2, dmigpch, matop4, or matrixdb.
If there is more than one superelement, the user will need to check the UNIT numbers that PATRAN has
automatically assigned. Since there are multiple superelements that will be attached in the assembly run, the
user will need to manually adjust the unit numbers in the DMIGOP2 or MATOP4 options to avoid conflicts
during the assembly. These necessary changes are highlighted in the listings below
ASSIGN OUTPUT4='extse10.op4',UNIT=35

SOL 103

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = MSC Nastran JOB CREATED ON 20-MAR-11 AT 12:28:00

ECHO = NONE

EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK=manq,EXTBULK,EXTID=10,MATOP4=35)

SUBCASE 1

ASSIGN OUTPUT4='extse20.op4',UNIT=36

SOL 103

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = MSC Nastran JOB CREATED ON 20-MAR-11 AT 12:28:00

ECHO = NONE

EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK=manq,EXTBULK,EXTID=10,MATOP4=36)

SUBCASE 1

Listing 12-13 Example Highlighting Changes to Input File Necessary to Avoid Conflicts in the Assembly Run
(MATOP4 shown, DMIGOP2 similar)

After running the reduction run, MSC Nastran will produce two files (.asm and .pch) that define the
necessary connection information. These files assume that the connection nodes in the assembly run will
have the same IDs as the grids in the reduction run. If this is not the case, the user can modify the SEBULK
entry to use the AUTO method, or manually provide the pairs.

Main Index
 618 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Modal Examples

An example of the .asm and .pch files defining the default external superelement connections are shown
below:
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$

$ ASSEMBLY PUNCH (.ASM) FILE FOR EXTERNAL SUPERELEMENT 10

$ -------------------------------------------------------------

$ THIS FILE CONTAINING BULK DATA ENTRIES PERTAINING TO

$ EXTERNAL SUPERELEMENT 10 IS MEANT FOR INCLUSION

$ ANYWHERE IN THE MAIN BULK DATA PORTION OF THE ASSEMBLY RUN

$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$

$--------------------------- COLUMN NUMBERS ----------------------------

$00000000111111111122222222223333333333444444444455555555556666666666777

$23456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012

$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$

SEBULK 10 EXTOP4 MANUAL 35

SECONCT 10 0

107 107 207 207

1001 THRU 1016 1001 THRU 1016

SPOINT 1001 THRU 1016

$ BOUNDARY GRID DATA

GRID 107 6. 0. 0.

GRID 207 6. 1. 0.

$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$

Listing 12-14 External Superelement “.asm” File Generated Automatically from the External Superelement
Reduction Run (ASMBULK option chosen)

$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$

$ STANDARD PUNCH (.PCH) FILE FOR EXTERNAL SUPERELEMENT 10

$ -------------------------------------------------------------

$ THIS FILE CONTAINING BULK DATA ENTRIES PERTAINING TO

$ EXTERNAL SUPERELEMENT 10 IS MEANT FOR INCLUSION

$ AT THE VERY END OF THE MAIN BULK DATA PORTION OF THE ASSEMBLY RUN

$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$

Main Index
 CHAPTER 12 619
External Superelement Examples

$--------------------------- COLUMN NUMBERS ----------------------------

$00000000111111111122222222223333333333444444444455555555556666666666777

$23456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012

$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$

BEGIN SUPER 10

EXTRN 107 123456 207 123456

$ BOUNDARY GRID DATA

GRID 107 6. 0. 0.

GRID 207 6. 1. 0.

ASET 107 123456 207 123456

QSET1 0 1001 THRU 1016

SPOINT 1001 THRU 1016

Listing 12-15 External Superelement “.pch” File Generated Automatically from the External Superelement
Reduction Run (EXTBULK option chosen)

Note that if coordinate systems are necessary to define the grid placement or displacement coordinate
systems, then they would also be generated.

Step 2: Attachment of External Superelement with Data Recovery

To create the assembly input file, the user needs to define the appropriate File Management Section entries
to define the external superelement files and define the appropriate Bulk Data entries to define the external
superelement attachment information. The required entries can be entered manually by editing the assembly
input file or by defining the commands in the Direct Text Input when generating an Analysis file in Patran.
For the MATRIXDB method, the direct text is shown in the figures below.

Main Index
 620 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Modal Examples

Figure 12-13 Direct Text Input for the File Management Section Required to Attach the External
Superelements (MATRIXDB and DMIGDB Methods)

Figure 12-14 Direct Text Input for the Bulk Data Section Required to Attach the External Superelements (all
Methods)

Note: the Direct Text Input for the bulk data section must be written at the “END” of the input file. The
correct order is to include all of the .asm files, followed by the .pch files. Recall that the .pch files have a
BEGIN SUPER entry which means the entries after the include .pch will be applicable to the superelement.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 12 621
External Superelement Examples

The resulting assembly input file for the MATRIXDB method is shown below with the direct text inputs
highlighted.
$ Direct Text Input for Nastran System Cell Section

$ Direct Text Input for File Management Section

assign se10m='se_10_reduce_matrixdb.MASTER'

DBLOCATE DATABLK=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=10) LOGI=se10m

assign se20m='se_20_reduce_matrixdb.MASTER'

DBLOCATE DATABLK=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=20) LOGI=se20m

$ Direct Text Input for Executive Control

$ Linear Static Analysis, Database

SOL 103

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = MSC Nastran JOB CREATED ON 20-MAR-11 AT 12:28:00

ECHO = NONE

SUBCASE 1

TITLE=MSC Nastran JOB CREATED ON 20-MAR-11 AT 12:28:00

SUBTITLE=DEFAULT

METHOD = 1

DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,CENTER)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

include 'se_10_reduce_matrixdb.asm'

include 'se_20_reduce_matrixdb.asm'

include 'se_10_reduce_matrixdb.pch'

include 'se_20_reduce_matrixdb.pch'

ENDDATA

Listing 12-16 Static Assembly Input File for the MATRIXDB and DMIGDB Methods

The DMIGDB option uses the same FMS and BULK entries as the MATRIXDB method.
For the DMIGPCH file, the case control section must be modified to include the K2GG and P2G entries
as shown below:

Main Index
 622 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Modal Examples

Figure 12-15 Direct Text Input for the Case Control Section Required to Attach the External Superelements
(DMIGPCH Method)

For the DMIGOP2 assembly file, the File Management Section of direct text input must specify the file
names associated with each external superelement. Here, the user will define the ASSIGN INPUTT2 entries
with their associated unit numbers for the respective files.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 12 623
External Superelement Examples

Figure 12-16 Direct Text Input for the File Management Section Required to Attach the External
Superelements (DMIGOP2 Method)

The MATRIXDB export option uses the same FMS statements and Case Control commands as the
DMIGDB option. For the DMIGPCH option, the Case Control section must include the K2GG, M2GG,
B2GG, and P2G commands. For the DMIGOP2 assembly run, the File Management section must specify
the file names associated with each external superelement; i.e., ASSIGN INPUTT2 statements with their
associated unit numbers. The MATRIXOP4 option is almost identical to the DMIGOP2 option except
ASSIGN INPUTT2 is replaced by ASSIGN INPUTT4.

Modal Examples Using 3-Step Method

The 3-Step method of external superelement creation, assembly, and data recovery for modal analysis is
identical to that described in “Static Examples Using 3-Step Method”. The example files may be found at
/doc/seug/chapter12/Modal/external-3-step.

Transient Response Examples

The modal transient examples are based on the model shown in Figure 12-1.
The examples for each method described in this section are organized as follows in the MSC Nastran
installation directories /doc/seug/chapter12/modal-transient:

Main Index
 624 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Transient Response Examples

Figure 12-17 Example Files for Transient Response External Superelement Method

Transient Response Examples Using 2-Step Method (EXTSEOUT)

Baseline Solution Without Superelements
The boundary conditions and loading are based on the example files contained in Modal Transient Illustrative
Example (Ch. 11). As a review, the loading is as follows:

Figure 12-18 Time History Loading for Grids 211 and 105

Note that grid 211 is in external superelement 10, while grid 105 is in the residual structure.

Step 1: Creation of External Superelement

When using the 2-step method to create an external superelement, the EXTSEOUT provides different
formats of creating the reduced matrices and output transformation matrices:
 MATRIXDB* – store the matrices and output transformation matrices on the MASTER/DBALL

Main Index
 CHAPTER 12 625
External Superelement Examples

 DMIGDB* – store the matrices and output transformation matrices on the MASTER/DBALL in
DMIG binary format
 DMIGOP2 – store the matrices and output transformation matrices on an .op2 file
 MATOP4 – store the matrices and output transformation matrices on the .pch and .op4 files
 DMIGPCH – store the matrices and output transformation matrices on the .pch
*Note: If the user selects MATRIXDB or DMIGDB method, the input file must be run with
SCRATCH=NO to save the .MASTER/.DBALL for the second step.
The first step in creating an external superelement is to define the boundary dof by specifying the ASET and
SPOINT/QSET entries. Patran provides a convenient form to define the ASET. A representative example
is shown in Figure 12-4. Often SPOINTS and QSET dof are defined manually to control the IDs. In Patran,
the user can define the SPOINT and QSET entries in the Direct Text Input section for Bulk Data.
The Patran interface allow the user to select the desired method through the ‘Translation Parameters’ tab of
the Analysis form as shown in Figure 12-5.
For a modal transient solution, the user has the option of creating the external superelement with a modal
solution (SOL 103) or a modal transient solution (SOL 112). The example files cover both cases, but only
the SOL 103 reduction case will be covered in this text.
Patran will export an MSC Nastran input file with the appropriate entries to perform the external
superelement creation, a MATRIXDB example is shown below. Note that the LOAD for the superelement
is also referenced in the case control; this will create the load vector so that the transient time can be applied
to it during the assembly solution.
assign master='create-se10-103.master' delete

assign dball ='create-se10-103.dball' delete

SOL 103

CEND

TITLE = Cantilever Beam Modal Frequency Response - modal reduction

Subtitle = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

Label = External Superelement Example, SE 10 Creation, Step 1

DISPL=ALL

OLOAD=ALL

EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK=manq,EXTBULK,EXTID=10) MATRIXDB

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Modes

METHOD = 10

$ define static load

LOAD=5

Main Index
 626 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Transient Response Examples

BEGIN BULK

spoint,1001,thru,1017

qset1,0,1001,thru,1017

aset1,123456,107,207

$ superelement 10 loads

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f211

FORCE 5 211 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

ENDDATA

Listing 12-17 Modal Reduction Run for MATRIXDB Method – 2-Step Method

If there is more than one superelement, the user will need to check the UNIT numbers that PATRAN has
automatically assigned. Since there are multiple superelements that will be attached in the assembly run, the
user will need to manually adjust the unit numbers in the DMIGOP2 or MATOP4 options to avoid conflicts
during the assembly. These necessary changes are highlighted in the listings below

assign output2='se10_dmigop2_103.op2' unit=31 delete

SOL 103

CEND

TITLE = Cantilever Beam Modal Frequency Response - modal reduction

Subtitle = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

Label = External Superelement Example, SE 10 Creation, Step 1

DISPL=ALL

OLOAD=ALL

EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK=manq,EXTBULK,EXTID=10) DMIGOP2=31

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Modes

METHOD = 1

$ define static load

LOAD=5

BEGIN BULK

spoint,1001,thru,1017

qset1,0,1001,thru,1017

aset1,123456,107,207

Main Index
 CHAPTER 12 627
External Superelement Examples

$ superelement 10 loads

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f211

FORCE 5 211 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

assign output4='se10_dmigop4_103.op4' unit=31 delete

SOL 103

CEND

TITLE = Cantilever Beam Modal Frequency Response - modal reduction

Subtitle = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

Label = External Superelement Example, SE 10 Creation, Step 1

DISPL=ALL

OLOAD=ALL

EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK=manq,EXTBULK,EXTID=10) MATRIXOP4=31

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Modes

METHOD = 1

$ define static load

LOAD=5

BEGIN BULK

spoint,1001,thru,1017

qset1,0,1001,thru,1017

aset1,123456,107,207

$ superelement 10 loads

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f211

FORCE 5 211 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

Listing 12-18 Example Highlighting Changes to Input File Necessary to Avoid Conflicts in the Assembly Run
(MATOP4 shown, DMIGOP2 similar)

After running the reduction run, MSC Nastran will produce two files (.asm and .pch) that define the
necessary connection information. These files assume that the connection nodes in the assembly run will
have the same IDs as the grids in the reduction run. If this is not the case, the user can modify the SEBULK
entry to use the AUTO method, or manually provide the pairs.

Main Index
 628 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Transient Response Examples

An example of the .asm and .pch files defining the default external superelement connections are shown
below:
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$

$ ASSEMBLY PUNCH (.ASM) FILE FOR EXTERNAL SUPERELEMENT 10

$ -------------------------------------------------------------

$ THIS FILE CONTAINING BULK DATA ENTRIES PERTAINING TO

$ EXTERNAL SUPERELEMENT 10 IS MEANT FOR INCLUSION

$ ANYWHERE IN THE MAIN BULK DATA PORTION OF THE ASSEMBLY RUN

$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$

$--------------------------- COLUMN NUMBERS ----------------------------

$00000000111111111122222222223333333333444444444455555555556666666666777

$23456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012

$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$

SEBULK 10 EXTOP4 MANUAL 35

SECONCT 10 0

107 107 207 207

1001 THRU 1017 1001 THRU 1017

SPOINT 1001 THRU 1017

$ BOUNDARY GRID DATA

GRID 107 6. 0. 0.

GRID 207 6. 1. 0.

$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$

Listing 12-19 External Superelement “.asm” File Generated Automatically from the External Superelement
Reduction Run (ASMBULK option chosen)

$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$

$ STANDARD PUNCH (.PCH) FILE FOR EXTERNAL SUPERELEMENT 10

$ -------------------------------------------------------------

$ THIS FILE CONTAINING BULK DATA ENTRIES PERTAINING TO

$ EXTERNAL SUPERELEMENT 10 IS MEANT FOR INCLUSION

$ AT THE VERY END OF THE MAIN BULK DATA PORTION OF THE ASSEMBLY RUN

$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$

Main Index
 CHAPTER 12 629
External Superelement Examples

$--------------------------- COLUMN NUMBERS ----------------------------

$00000000111111111122222222223333333333444444444455555555556666666666777

$23456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012

$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$

BEGIN SUPER 10

EXTRN 107 123456 207 123456

$ BOUNDARY GRID DATA

GRID 107 6. 0. 0.

GRID 207 6. 1. 0.

ASET 107 123456 207 123456

QSET1 0 1001 THRU 1017

SPOINT 1001 THRU 1017

Listing 12-20 External Superelement “.pch” File Generated Automatically from the External Superelement
Reduction Run (EXTBULK option chosen)

Note that if coordinate systems are necessary to define the grid placement or displacement coordinate
systems, then they would also be generated.

Step 2: Attachment of External Superelement with Data Recovery

To create the assembly input file, the user needs to define the appropriate File Management Section entries
to define the external superelement files and define the appropriate Bulk Data entries to define the external
superelement attachment information. In addition, LSEQ entries must be placed in each superelement, even
if there is null loading for the superelement. The assembly input file for the MATRIXDB method is shown
below:
ASSIGN MASTER='assemble_dmigdb-112from103.master' delete

ASSIGN DBALL ='assemble_dmigdb-112from103.dball' delete

ASSIGN SE10M='create-se10-103.master'

ASSIGN SE10D='create-se10-103.dball'

DBLOCATE DB=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=10),LOGICAL=SE10M

ASSIGN SE20M='create-se20-103.master'

ASSIGN SE20D='create-se10-103.dball'

DBLOCATE DB=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=20),LOGICAL=SE20M

SOL 112

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

Main Index
 630 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Transient Response Examples

TITLE = Cantilever Beam Modal Transient Solution

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = External SE Assembly Run, SOL 112, LSEQ / LOADSET

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = YES

SDAMPING = 1

loadset=1

set 999=103,105,211

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Modal-Transient

METHOD = 1

TSTEP = 1

SPC = 2

DLOAD = 2

DISPLACEMENT(SORT2,REAL)=999

VELOCITY(SORT2,REAL)=999

ACCELERATION(SORT2,REAL)=999

SPCFORCES(SORT2,REAL)=999

OLOAD(SORT2,REAL)=999

BEGIN BULK

TSTEP 1 5000 2.-4

TABDMP1 1 CRIT

0. .02 2000. .02 ENDT

EIGRL 1 10 0

$ Loads for Load Case : Modal-Transient

$ superelement 0 loads

TLOAD1 6 7 105

LSEQ 1 7 3

$ superelement 10 loads

TLOAD1 10 5 211

DLOAD 2 1. 1. 6 1. 10

$DLOAD 2 1. 1. 6

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f105

FORCE 3 105 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

$ Referenced Dynamic Load Tables

$ Constant Load Table : time105

include 'time105.dat'

$ Dynamic Load Table : time211

include 'time211.dat'

include 'create-se10-112.asm'

include 'create-se20-112.asm'

Main Index
 CHAPTER 12 631
External Superelement Examples

include 'create-se10-112.pch'

$ need dummy LSEQ entry for subcase, points to column 1 of the reduced load matrix

LSEQ 1 101 1

include 'create-se20-112.pch'

$ need dummy LSEQ entry for subcase,

$ i.e. fill a zero load column for this superelement

LSEQ 1 201 1

ENDDATA

Listing 12-21 Static Assembly Input File for the MATRIXDB and DMIGDB Methods

The DMIGDB option uses the same FMS and BULK entries as the MATRIXDB method.
For the DMIGPCH file, the case control section must be modified to include the K2GG, M2GG, and P2G
case control commands.
For the DMIGOP2 assembly file, the File Management Section must specify the file names associated with
each external superelement. Here, the user will define the ASSIGN INPUTT2 entries with their associated
unit numbers for the respective files.
The MATOP4 method uses similar File Management Section entries except INPUTT4 replaces INPUTT2.

Transient Response Examples Using 3-Step Method

The 3-step method of external superelement creation, assembly, and data recovery for transient analysis is
identical to that described in "Static Examples Using 3-Step Method. The example files may be found at
/doc/seug/chapter12/Modal-Transient/external-3-step.

Frequency Response Examples

Frequency Response Examples Using 2-Step Method (EXTSEOUT)

The modal transient examples are based on the model shown in Figure 12-1.
The examples for each method described in this section are organized as follows in the MSC Nastran
installation directories /doc/seug/chapter12/Modal-Freq-Resp:

Main Index
 632 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Frequency Response Examples

Figure 12-19 Example Files for Transient Response External Superelement Method

Baseline Solution Without Superelements

The boundary conditions and loading are based on the example files contained in Frequency Response Illustrative
Example (Ch. 11). As a review, the loading is a sine-sweep with applied loads at grids 105 and 211. Note that
grid 211 is in external superelement 10, while grid 105 is in the residual structure.

Step 1: Creation of External Superelement

When using the 2-step method to create an external superelement, the EXTSEOUT provides different
formats of creating the reduced matrices and output transformation matrices:
 MATRIXDB* – store the matrices and output transformation matrices on the MASTER/DBALL
 DMIGDB* – store the matrices and output transformation matrices on the MASTER/DBALL in
DMIG binary format
 DMIGOP2 – store the matrices and output transformation matrices on an .op2 file
 MATOP4 – store the matrices and output transformation matrices on the .pch and .op4 files
 DMIGPCH – store the matrices and output transformation matrices on the .pch
*Note: If the user selects MATRIXDB or DMIGDB method, the input file must be run with
SCRATCH=NO to save the .MASTER/.DBALL for the second step.
The first step in creating an external superelement is to define the boundary dof by specifying the ASET and
SPOINT/QSET entries. Patran provides a convenient form to define the ASET. A representative example
is shown in Figure 12-4. Often SPOINTS and QSET dof are defined manually to control the IDs. In Patran,
the user can define the SPOINT and QSET entries in the Direct Text Input section for Bulk Data.
The Patran interface allow the user to select the desired method through the ‘Translation Parameters’ tab of
the Analysis form as shown in Figure 12-5.
For a modal transient solution, the user has the option of creating the external superelement with a modal
solution (SOL 103) or a modal transient solution (SOL 112). The example files cover both cases, but only
the SOL 103 reduction case will be covered in this text.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 12 633
External Superelement Examples

Patran will export an MSC Nastran input file with the appropriate entries to perform the external
superelement creation, a MATRIXDB example is shown below. Note that the LOAD for the superelement
is also referenced in the case control; this will create the load vector so that the sine-sweep can be applied to
it during the assembly solution.

assign master='create-se10-103.master' delete

assign dball ='create-se10-103.dball' delete

SOL 103

CEND

TITLE = Cantilever Beam Modal Frequency Response - modal reduction

Subtitle = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

Label = External Superelement Example, SE 10 Creation, Step 1

DISPL=ALL

OLOAD=ALL

EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK,EXTBULK,EXTID=10) MATRIXDB

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Modes

METHOD = 10

$ define static load

LOAD=5

BEGIN BULK

spoint,1001,thru,1017

qset1,0,1001,thru,1017

aset1,123456,107,207

$ superelement 10 loads

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f211

FORCE 5 211 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

EIGRL 10 10 0

ENDDATA

Listing 12-22 Modal Reduction Run for MATRIXDB Method – 2-Step Method

If there is more than one superelement, the user will need to check the UNIT numbers that PATRAN has
automatically assigned. Since there are multiple superelements that will be attached in the assembly run, the

Main Index
 634 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Frequency Response Examples

user will need to manually adjust the unit numbers in the DMIGOP2 or MATOP4 options to avoid conflicts
during the assembly. These necessary changes are highlighted in the listings below

assign output2='se10_dmigop2_103.op2' unit=31 delete

SOL 103

CEND

TITLE = Cantilever Beam Modal Frequency Response - modal reduction

Subtitle = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

Label = External Superelement Example, SE 10 Creation, Step 1

DISPL=ALL

OLOAD=ALL

EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK=manq,EXTBULK,EXTID=10) DMIGOP2=31

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Modes

METHOD = 1

$ define static load

LOAD=5

BEGIN BULK

spoint,1001,thru,1017

qset1,0,1001,thru,1017

aset1,123456,107,207

$ superelement 10 loads

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f211

FORCE 5 211 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

assign output4='se10_dmigop4_103.op4' unit=31 delete

SOL 103

CEND

TITLE = Cantilever Beam Modal Frequency Response - modal reduction

Subtitle = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

Label = External Superelement Example, SE 10 Creation, Step 1

DISPL=ALL

Main Index
 CHAPTER 12 635
External Superelement Examples

OLOAD=ALL

EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK=manq,EXTBULK,EXTID=10) MATRIXOP4=31

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Modes

METHOD = 1

$ define static load

LOAD=5

BEGIN BULK

spoint,1001,thru,1017

qset1,0,1001,thru,1017

aset1,123456,107,207

$ superelement 10 loads

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f211

FORCE 5 211 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

Listing 12-23 Example Highlighting Changes to Input File Necessary to Avoid Conflicts in the Assembly Run
(MATOP4 shown, DMIGOP2 similar)

After running the reduction run, MSC Nastran will produce two files (.asm and .pch) that define the
necessary connection information. These files assume that the connection nodes in the assembly run will
have the same IDs as the grids in the reduction run. If this is not the case, the user can modify the SEBULK
entry to use the AUTO method, or manually provide the pairs.
An example of the .asm and .pch files defining the default external superelement connections are shown
below:

$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$

$ ASSEMBLY PUNCH (.ASM) FILE FOR EXTERNAL SUPERELEMENT 10

$ -------------------------------------------------------------

$ THIS FILE CONTAINING BULK DATA ENTRIES PERTAINING TO

$ EXTERNAL SUPERELEMENT 10 IS MEANT FOR INCLUSION

$ ANYWHERE IN THE MAIN BULK DATA PORTION OF THE ASSEMBLY RUN

$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$

$--------------------------- COLUMN NUMBERS ----------------------------

$00000000111111111122222222223333333333444444444455555555556666666666777

$23456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012

$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$

Main Index
 636 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Frequency Response Examples

SEBULK 10 EXTOP4 MANUAL 35

SECONCT 10 0

107 107 207 207

1001 THRU 1017 1001 THRU 1017

SPOINT 1001 THRU 1017

$ BOUNDARY GRID DATA

GRID 107 6. 0. 0.

GRID 207 6. 1. 0.

$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$

Listing 12-24 External Superelement “.asm” File Generated Automatically from the External Superelement
Reduction Run (ASMBULK option chosen)

$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$

$ STANDARD PUNCH (.PCH) FILE FOR EXTERNAL SUPERELEMENT 10

$ -------------------------------------------------------------

$ THIS FILE CONTAINING BULK DATA ENTRIES PERTAINING TO

$ EXTERNAL SUPERELEMENT 10 IS MEANT FOR INCLUSION

$ AT THE VERY END OF THE MAIN BULK DATA PORTION OF THE ASSEMBLY RUN

$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$

$--------------------------- COLUMN NUMBERS ----------------------------

$00000000111111111122222222223333333333444444444455555555556666666666777

$23456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012

$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$

BEGIN SUPER 10

EXTRN 107 123456 207 123456

$ BOUNDARY GRID DATA

GRID 107 6. 0. 0.

GRID 207 6. 1. 0.

ASET 107 123456 207 123456

QSET1 0 1001 THRU 1017

Main Index
 CHAPTER 12 637
External Superelement Examples

SPOINT 1001 THRU 1017

Listing 12-25 External Superelement “.pch” File Generated Automatically from the External Superelement
Reduction Run (EXTBULK option chosen)

Note that if coordinate systems are necessary to define the grid placement or displacement coordinate
systems, then they would also be generated.

Step 2: Attachment of External Superelement with Data Recovery

To create the assembly input file, the user needs to define the appropriate File Management Section entries
to define the external superelement files and define the appropriate Bulk Data entries to define the external
superelement attachment information. The assembly input file for the MATRIXDB method is shown below:

ASSIGN MASTER='assemble_dmigdb-111from103.master' delete

ASSIGN DBALL ='assemble_dmigdb-111from103.dball' delete

ASSIGN SE10M='create-se10-103.master'

ASSIGN SE10D='create-se10-103.dball'

DBLOCATE DB=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=10),LOGICAL=SE10M

ASSIGN SE20M='create-se20-103.master'

ASSIGN SE20D='create-se20-103.dball'

DBLOCATE DB=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=20),LOGICAL=SE20M

SOL 111

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = Cantilever Beam Modal Frequency Response Solution

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = External SE Assembly Run, SOL 111, LSEQ / LOADSET

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = YES

SDAMPING = 1

set 999=103,105,211

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Modal-Freq Response

METHOD = 1

FREQ= 1

SPC = 2

DLOAD = 2

DISPLACEMENT(SORT2,PHASE)=999

VELOCITY(SORT2,PHASE)=999

Main Index
 638 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Frequency Response Examples

ACCELERATION(SORT2,PHASE)=999

SPCFORCES(SORT2,PHASE)=999

OLOAD(SORT2,PHASE)=999

BEGIN BULK

FREQ2 1 10. 1000. 50

FREQ4 1 10. 1000. 5

TABDMP1 1 CRIT

0. .03 2000. .03 ENDT

EIGRL 1 10 0

$ Loads for Load Case : Modal-Transient

$ superelement 0 loads

RLOAD1 6 7 1

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f105

FORCE 7 105 0 1. 0. 0. 1.

$ superelement 10 loads

RLOAD1 10 11 1

DLOAD 2 1. 1. 6 1. 10

$ Referenced Dynamic Load Tables

$ Dynamic Load Table : sine-sweep

TABLED1 1

0. 1. 2000. 1. ENDT

include 'create-se10-103.asm'

include 'create-se20-103.asm'

ENDDATA

Listing 12-26 Frequency Response Assembly Input File for the MATRIXDB and DMIGDB Methods

The DMIGDB option uses the same FMS and BULK entries as the MATRIXDB method.
For the DMIGPCH file, the case control section must be modified to include the K2GG, M2GG, and P2G
entries
For the DMIGOP2 assembly file, the File Management Section must specify the file names associated with
each external superelement. Here, the user will define the ASSIGN INPUTT2 entries with their associated
unit numbers for the respective files.
The MATOP4 method uses similar File Management Section entries except INPUTT4 replaces INPUTT2.

Frequency Response Examples Using 3-Step Method

The 3-step method of external superelement creation, assembly, and data recovery for transient analysis is
identical to that described in Static Examples Using 3-Step Method. The example files may be found at
/doc/seug/chapter12/Modal-Freq-Resp/external-3-step.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 12 639
External Superelement Examples

External Superelement Usage in SOL 400

Version 2021.1 extends the External Superelement capability to SOL 400 and includes several minor
enhancements to external superelement analysis in general. It is important to note that the program (MSC
Nastran) will create external part superelements with component mode reduction or Guyan reduction for
inclusion in a nonlinear analysis. All nonlinearities are assumed to exist in the residual structure only since it
is understood that part superelements will only have linear behavior. The following use cases are supported.
1. Create external superelements in linear solution sequences (SOLs 101 through 112) and assemble in
SOL 400 for both nonlinear and multidisciplinary analyses. The procedure is the same as for
assembly runs in the linear solution sequences for both nonlinear and multidisciplinary analyses. The
procedure is the same as for assembly runs in the linear solution sequences.
2. Create linear external superelements in a SOL 400 multidisciplinary analysis
a. With PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES
SOL 400
CEND
ANALYSIS = MODES $ doesn’t really matter which analysis type
PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES
EXTSEOUT
METHOD=300
BEGIN BULK
ASETi (static boundary points)
b. With QSETi/SPOINT
SOL 400
CEND
ANALYSIS = MODES $ doesn’t really matter which analysis type
EXTSEOUT
METHOD=300
BEGIN BULK
ASETi (static boundary points)
QSETI (dynamic boundary points)
SPOINT (component boundary points)
3. Create pre-stressed external superelements in a SOL 400 linear perturbation step.
a. With PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES
SOL 400
CEND
SUBCASE 100

Main Index
 640 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
External Superelement Usage in SOL 400

STEP 100
ANALYSIS=NLSTATICS
NLPARM = 1
STEP 200
ANALYSIS = MODES $ doesn’t really matter which analysis type
PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES
EXTSEOUT
METHOD=300
BEGIN BULK
ASETi (static boundary points)
b. With QSETi/SPOINT
SOL 400
CEND
SUBCASE 100
STEP 100
ANALYSIS=NLSTATICS
NLPARM = 1
STEP 200
ANALYSIS = MODES $ doesn’t really matter which analysis type
EXTSEOUT
METHOD=300
BEGIN BULK
ASETi (static boundary points)
QSETI (dynamic boundary points)
SPOINT (component boundary points)
4. Create pre-stressed external superelements with differential stiffness with STATSUB in the linear
solution sequences (SOLs 101-112). EXTSEOUT must be specified above all subcases.
a. With PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES
SOL 103
CEND
EXTSEOUT
SUBCASE 100
LOAD=100

Main Index
 CHAPTER 12 641
External Superelement Examples

SPC=10 $ should default be ASETi points?

SUBCASE 200
STATSUB=100
SPC=20
PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES
METHOD=300
BEGIN BULK
ASETi (static boundary points)
b. With QSETi/SPOINT
SOL 103
CEND
EXTSEOUT
SUBCASE 100
LOAD=100
SPC=10 $ should default be ASETi points?
SUBCASE 200
STATSUB=100
SPC=20
METHOD=300
BEGIN BULK
ASETi (static boundary points)
QSETI (dynamic boundary points)
SPOINT (component boundary points)
In general, the existing external superelement modeling capability of MSC Nastran is also available in SOL
400, which means the standard creation, assembly and solve and data recovery steps. The procedure is
described in the MSC Nastran Superelements and Modules User’s Guide and in the MSC Nastran Quick
Reference Guide under the description of EXTSEOUT (Case) Case Control command.
1. There are two methods of data recovery in the external superelement:
• 3-step method for external superelement generation, assembly and data recovery
• A simplified 2-step method in which the assembly and solve and data recovery steps are
consolidated into a single step.
Both the methods support export of full/reduced component model data for sharing with design groups or
vendors. Both methods support advanced nonlinear elements defined by PBARN1, PBEMN1, PRODN1,

Main Index
 642 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
SOL 400 3-Step Method

PSHLN1, PSLDN1, and PSHEARN entries.

2. A new keyword is added to the EXTSEOUT Case Control command to specify whether the q-set
(dynamic degrees-of-freedom) are defined on ASET1 or QSET1 entries in the exported file. By
default all q-set DOFs are written to QSET1 entries which means they will appear in the assembly
modes. By specifying ASET, the q-set DOFs are written to ASET1 entries and will be synthesized in
the assembly modes.
3. 3-step data recovery enhancements
Step 1: Creation run.
• Specify the EXTSEOUT Case Control command to export the boundary matrices.
• Specify scr=no on the command line to save the database for Step 3 restart
Step 2: Assembly run
• Attach the boundary matrices from Step 1.
• Specify EXTDROUT Case Control command to select the media to store the boundary
solution matrix (displacements, velocities, and accelerations) and labels; e.g., eigenvalues, time
steps, load factors, etc.
Step 3: Data recovery run
• Restart the database from Step 1.
• Attach the solution matrix and labels from Step 2.
• Specify EXTDRIN Case Control command.

SOL 400 3-Step Method

SOL 400 with multidisciplinary and linear perturbation analyses will produce multiple boundary solutions
in Step 2; i.e., a boundary solution for each SUBCASE with a unique ANALYSIS command. Hence in SOL
400 for Step 3 as soon as the boundary solutions have been imported, a summary of the boundary solutions
will be printed in the f06. Here is a sample:
===================================================================================================================
Assembly Run Solutions

==========|==========|==========|==========|==========|============================================================
Solution | Analysis | | | Super- |
ID | type | Subcase | Step | element | Title/Subtitle/Label

==========|==========|==========|==========|==========|============================================================
| | | | | MODEL T-6A (NTA) SEPARATION LOADS ANALYSIS, 270 KEAS
1 | STATICS | 2 | 0 | 100 | HALF AIRCRAFT MODEL WITH PYLON & HMP,CNTRLS LOCKED
| | | | | STATICS
| |----------|----------|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------
| | | | | MODEL T-6A (NTA) SEPARATION LOADS ANALYSIS, 270 KEAS
| | 5 | 0 | 100 | HALF AIRCRAFT MODEL WITH PYLON & HMP,CNTRLS LOCKED
| | | | | STATICS FOR BUCKLING ANALYSIS
----------|----------|----------|----------|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------
| | | | | MODEL T-6A (NTA) SEPARATION LOADS ANALYSIS, 270 KEAS
2 | MODES | 7 | 0 | 100 | HALF AIRCRAFT MODEL WITH PYLON & HMP,CNTRLS LOCKED
| | | | | NORMAL MODES - SOLVE ALL EIGENVALUES
----------|----------|----------|----------|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------
| | | | | MODEL T-6A (NTA) SEPARATION LOADS ANALYSIS, 270 KEAS
3 | BUCKLE | 6 | 0 | 100 | HALF AIRCRAFT MODEL WITH PYLON & HMP,CNTRLS LOCKED
| | | | | BUCKLING - SOLVE ALL EIGENVALUES
----------|----------|----------|----------|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------
| | | | | MODEL T-6A (NTA) SEPARATION LOADS ANALYSIS, 270 KEAS

Main Index
 CHAPTER 12 643
External Superelement Examples

4 | MODES | 3 | 0 | 100 | HALF AIRCRAFT MODEL WITH PYLON & HMP,CNTRLS LOCKED
| | | | | MODAL FREQUENCY - FOUR FREQUENCIES AND DELTA-F=.001 AND F1=1.04
----------|----------|----------|----------|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------
| | | | | MODEL T-6A (NTA) SEPARATION LOADS ANALYSIS, 270 KEAS
5 | MFREQ | 3 | 0 | 100 | HALF AIRCRAFT MODEL WITH PYLON & HMP,CNTRLS LOCKED
| | | | | MODAL FREQUENCY - FOUR FREQUENCIES AND DELTA-F=.001 AND F1=1.04
----------|----------|----------|----------|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------
| | | | | MODEL T-6A (NTA) SEPARATION LOADS ANALYSIS, 270 KEAS
6 | MODES | 1 | 0 | 100 | HALF AIRCRAFT MODEL WITH PYLON & HMP,CNTRLS LOCKED
| | | | | MODAL TRANSIENT - FIFTY TIME STEPS AND DELTA-T=.001
----------|----------|----------|----------|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------
| | | | | MODEL T-6A (NTA) SEPARATION LOADS ANALYSIS, 270 KEAS
7 | MTRAN | 1 | 0 | 100 | HALF AIRCRAFT MODEL WITH PYLON & HMP,CNTRLS LOCKED
| | | | | MODAL TRANSIENT - FIFTY TIME STEPS AND DELTA-T=.001
----------|----------|----------|----------|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------
| | | | | MODEL T-6A (NTA) SEPARATION LOADS ANALYSIS, 270 KEAS
8 | MCEIG | 4 | 0 | 100 | HALF AIRCRAFT MODEL WITH PYLON & HMP,CNTRLS LOCKED
| | | | | MODAL COMPLEX - SOLVE FOR FIRST FIVE EIGENVALUES
----------|----------|----------|----------|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------

The “Solution ID” column contains an arbitrary identification number which may be specified on the
SOLUTION Case Control command in Step 3 whose usage will be described below. The “Analysis Type”,
“Subcase”, and “Step” columns are the same as the ANALYSIS, SUBCASE, and STEP commands specified
on Step 2. The “Superelement” column pertains the external superelement ID processed in Step 2. The
“Title/Subtitle/Label” is taken from the TITLE, SUBTITLE, and LABEL commands specified in Step 2.
In Step 3, as with any restart, the Case Control must contain the same loads and boundary condition (LBC)
commands specified in Step 1 like LOAD, SPC, MPC, METHOD, etc. If there is only one subcase
specified in Step 3 then, by default, SOL 400 will perform external superelement data recovery for all
solutions above. Here is a sample Step 3 Case Control setup:
EXTDRIN ...
SPC=1
MPC=3
LOAD=5
$
DISP=ALL
STRESS=ALL
The displacement and element stress request for all solutions listed in the table above will be computed.
If, however, data recovery is desired at only a few solutions then a SUBCASE and SOLUTION command
pair is required to obtain data recovery at each of the desired solutions. The subcases may be specified in
any order and the SOLUTION command specifies the desired “Solution ID” from the table above. For
example,
EXTDRIN ...
SPC=1
MPC=3
SUBCASE 1
SOLUTION=5
STRESS=ALL
SUBCASE 2
SOLUTION=3
DISP=ALL
Alternatively, the ANALYSIS command may be used instead of the SOLUTION command. For
example,
EXTDRIN ...
SPC=1
MPC=3
SUBCASE 1

Main Index
 644 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
SOL 400 3-Step Method

ANALYSIS=MFREQ
STRESS=ALL
SUBCASE 2
ANALYSIS=BUCKLE
DISP=ALL
If there is more than on solution associated with a particular analysis type, then results will be computed for
all “Solution IDs” corresponding to that analysis type.
In Step 2, more than one external superelement may be processed by EXTDROUT. The following must be
noted if DMIGOP2 or MATOP4 is used.
a. In SOLs 101, 103, and 107 through 112, the user must specify separate EXTDROUT as shown
in the example below:
SUBCASE 1
SUPER=10
EXTDROUT(DMIGOP2=45)
SUBCASE 2
SUPER=20
EXTDROUT(DMIGOP2=46)
b. In SOL 400, the user may specify separate EXTDROUT as described above or the same
EXTDROUT command for all external superelements. If the user specifies the same
EXTDROUT, then in the 3rd step a fatal message will be issued as shown below:
===================================================================================================================
Assembly Run Solutions

==========|==========|==========|==========|==========|============================================================
Solution | Analysis | | | Super- |
ID | type | Subcase | Step | element | Title/Subtitle/Label

==========|==========|==========|==========|==========|============================================================
| | | | | MODAL, 3-STEP EXTERNAL SE, DMIGDB, ASSEMBLY
1 | MODES | 1 | 0 | 10 |
| | | | |
----------|----------|----------|----------|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------
| | | | | MODAL, 3-STEP EXTERNAL SE, DMIGDB, ASSEMBLY
2 | MODES | 1 | 0 | 20 |
| | | | |
----------|----------|----------|----------|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------
*** USER FATAL MESSAGE 22907 (EXTDRSUM)
The attached boundary solutions %1 contains solutions for more than one external superelement
and the desired superelement ID has not been selected.

USER ACTION: If the EXTDROUT Case Control command (or PARAM,EXTDROUT) specified DMIGOP2 or
MATOP4 then you must specify the superelement ID on the SUPER Case Control
command to select the appropriate boundary solution.

If EXTDROUT Case Control command (or PARAM,EXTDROUT) specified MATRIXDB or

DMIGDB then you must specify the superelement ID
a) On the SUPER Case Control command to select the appropiate boundary solution.
or
b) In the WHERE(SEID=superelement_ID) clause on the DBLOCATE statement of the
boundary solutions database to select the appropiate boundary solution.

The summary shows that the solution file contains solutions for superelements 10 and 20 and the message
indicates that only one solution may be processed. So the user must specify the SUPER command to select
the desired superelement; e.g.,
SUPER=10
EXTDRIN(DMIGOP2=45)

Main Index
 CHAPTER 12 645
External Superelement Examples

Alternatively for EXTDRIN(DMIGDB or MATRIXDB) only, the user may specify WHERE(SEID=10) on
the DBLOCATE statement of the boundary solution database.

Main Index
 646 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
SOL 400 3-Step Method

Main Index
 Chapter 13: Practical Image Superelements
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User’s Guide

13 Practical Image
Superelements

Introduction
 List Superelements

PART Superelements

External Superelements

Multiple Image Example for Electronic Components

Main Index
 648 Superelements User’s Guide
Introduction

Introduction
The purpose of this chapter is to document the capabilities of image superelements in MSC Nastran. The
following figures illustrate the possible types of image superelements. In Figure 13-1 a model of a portion of a
gear is shown. The physical model of one tooth can be represented as a superelement. This type is called a
primary superelement-one where the actual geometry for the superelement is defined in the bulk data. Other
gear teeth, as shown in Figure 13-1, are images of the first (primary) tooth. An image superelement is a
superelement that uses the geometry of another superelement to describe it for MSC Nastran. These image
superelements can save processing time in that they are able to re-use the reduced stiffness, mass, and damping
matrices from their primary superelement, which reduces the amount of calculations needed. Full data
recovery is available for image superelements. An image superelement can be an identical image, as shown in
Figure 13-1, or a mirror image, as shown in Figure 13-2. In Figure 13-1, the right side of the plate is a mirror
image copy of the primary. Please note that images can have their own unique loadings. Only the stiffness,
mass and damping is identical to the primary. Another type of superelement is the external superelement,
where a part of the model is represented by using matrices from an outside source (the matrices can come
from another MSC Nastran run). For these matrices no internal geometry information is available; only the
grid points to which the matrices are attached are known. An external superelement is shown in Figure 13-3.
In this figure the finite element model is on the left and the external superelement is represented by the dashed
lines on the right.

Figure 13-1 A Primary Superelement and Several Identical Images

Main Index
 CHAPTER 13 649
Practical Image Superelements

Figure 13-2 A Primary Superelement and its Mirror Image Superelement

Figure 13-3 An External Superelement

In static analysis the theory used in superelement processing is exact. In dynamics the reduction of the
stiffness is exact, but approximations occur during the reduction of the mass and damping matrices. The
dynamic solution can be improved dramatically by augmenting the static reduction with additional dynamic
degrees of freedom in a method called component modal synthesis, which is described in CHAPTER 10.
The following sections provide examples of image superelements for List (CSUPER), PART, and External
Superelements.

List Superelements
List superelements are defined by specifying a list (set) of the interior dof using the SESET entry. Readers
may want to review Defining List Superelements (Ch. 2) before proceeding with this section. As a quick review:
the superelement processing partitions of the model into separate sections based on a list of interior grid
points and/or elements defined by the user. The Main Bulk Data Section is defined as the ‘first’ bulk data
input section which occurs after BEGIN BULK or BEGIN SUPER [=0].

Main Index
 650 Superelements User’s Guide
List Superelements

Using CSUPER
In this Section, the CSUPER entry will be used to create images (copy and mirror) of List Superelements.
The CSUPER entry uses an encoded superelement id to define the type of image (copy, mirror) and the
attachment locations of the exterior dof of its parent superelement. The image superelement is also known
as a secondary superelement. Internally, MSC Nastran creates a copy of the reduced matrices and performs
the appropriate coordinate system transformations. Note that a mirror superelement will be mapped into a
left-handed coordinate system. The format of the CSUPER entry is shown below:

CSUPER Secondary Superelement Connnection

Defines the grid or scalar point connections for identical or mirror image superelements from an external
source. These are all known as secondary superelements.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CSUPER SSID PSID GP1 GP2 GP3 GP4 GP5 GP6
GP7 GP8 -etc.-

Example:

CSUPER 120003 21 3 6 4 10

Field Contents
SSID Coded identification number for secondary superelement. See Remark 1 (Integer>0)
PSID Identification number for referenced primary superelement. See Remark 2 (Integer>0 or
blank)
GPi Grid or scalar point identification number in the downstream superelement or residual
structure. (Integer > 0 or “THRU”; For “THRU” option, GP1<GP2)

Remarks:
1. The value of SSID is written in the form XXX000+n, where n is the referenced secondary
superelement identification number and n must be less than 10000 and XXX is a displacement
component sign reversal code as follows:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 13 651
Practical Image Superelements

The sign reversal code specifies the displacement component(s) normal to the plane of the mirror
through which the reflection is to be made
Blank or 0 no reversal for identical superelement. If PSID is preceded by a minus
sign and there is no xxx code on SSID, then a z-reversal mirror is
generated.
1 x-reversal
2 y-reversal
Mirror Images
3 z-reverasl
12 x and y-reversal
23 y and z-reversal
Identical Images
31 z and x-reversal
123 x, y, and z-reversal } Mirror Images

2. If PSID = 0 or blank, the superelement boundary matrices are obtained from an external source (such
as a database or external file). For more information, see PARAM, EXTDRUNT of the Quick
Reference Guide.
3. For identical or mirror image superelements, the grid point IDs, GPi, may appear in any order.
However, if they are not in the same order as the external GRIDs of the primary superelement, then
the SEQSEP entry is also required. In case of external superelements, the GRID IDs must be in the
order that the terms in the associated matrices occrur.
4. Image superelements and their primaries must be congruent. The identical or mirror image
superelement must have the same number of external grid points as its primary superelement
(including dof for the Q-set if cms has been performed on the primary). The exterior grid points of
the image superelement must have the same relative location to each other as do the corresponding
points of the primary superelement. The global coordinate directions of each exterior grid point of
the image superelement must have the same relative alignment as those of the corresponding grid
points of the primary superelement. If congruency is not satisfied because of round-off, then the
tolerance may be adjusted with PARAM, CONFAC or the congruence checking can be disabled by
using DIAG 37
5. For superelements from an external source, please refer to the Quick Reference Guide, PARAMS
EXTDR, EXTDRUNT, and EXTUNIT.

Example Using CSUPER

An example using CSUPER is shown below using the flyswatter example seen throughout this guide. The
grids and elements for the full model are shown below. Results for the baseline and single-level superelement
analysis can be found in Baseline Static Example using Patran (Ch. 3) (ref
/doc/seug/chapter3/baseline/baseline.bdf and /doc/seug/chapter3/seset/seset.bdf ).

Main Index
 652 Superelements User’s Guide
List Superelements

Figure 13-4 Flyswatter Baseline Model

The full model could be broken up into List superelements as shown in the figure below (ref
/doc/seug/chapter3/seset/seset.bdf ).

Main Index
 CHAPTER 13 653
Practical Image Superelements

Figure 13-5 Flyswatter Example for Full Model Internal Superelements (SESET)

However, it is computationally efficient to use image superelements for this model. For this example, half of
the flyswatter is removed from the whole so that proper duplication can be demonstrated. The primary
superelements are shown below:

Main Index
 654 Superelements User’s Guide
List Superelements

Figure 13-6 Flyswatter Primary Superelements

The following table lists the superelements that define the full model:

Table 13-1 Primary and Secondary Superelements for CSUPER Example

Superelement ID Type Description Comment
10 Primary Left Swatter Created in proper location
[000]20 Secondary Right Swatter Copy of SE 10
30 Primary Left Vertical Created in Proper Location
[000]40 Secondary Vertical Tail Copy of SE 30
50 Primary Left Horizontal Created in proper location
10060 Secondary Right Horizontal Mirror of SE 50
70 Primary Post Created in proper location

Note that the coded id number for superelement 20 and 40 is 000xx – indicating that these superelements
are simply relocated. The coded id number for superelement 60 is 10060 indicating that this superelement
is mirrored by reversing the X coordinates.
The user will note that the boundary grid points which are used to ‘catch’ (attach) the image superelements
are also retained.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 13 655
Practical Image Superelements

Figure 13-7 Selecting Superelements for Image Superelement Example

The secondary superelements are created by the CSUPER instructions shown in the input file below. Note
that Patran does not provide a form for CSUPER entry, so the Direct Text Input must be used as
demonstrated below:

Main Index
 656 Superelements User’s Guide
List Superelements

Figure 13-8 Defining CSUPER Entries and Unattached Secondary Boundary Grids in Patran

Note that Patran will not export grid points that are not attached to elements, so they must be defined in the
Direct Text Input section as shown in the figure above.
For this example, expanded case control is substituted for the condensed case control that Patran writes. For
a review of expanded case control, refer to section 4.2. The loads must be applied to the appropriate
grids/elements of the primary superelement id. In this case, the ‘outboard grid’ for image superelement 20 is
grid id 98 of the primary superelement 10. The elements of secondary superelement 20 are the same as
primary superelement 10.
The final input file is shown below (ref /doc/seug/chapter13/flyswatter/csuper/seset.bdf ).
$ NASTRAN input file created by the Patran 2010.2.3 64-Bit (MD Enabled)

$ input file translator on June 28, 2011 at 19:42:36.

$ Direct Text Input for Nastran System Cell Section

$ Direct Text Input for File Management Section

$ Direct Text Input for Executive Control

$ Linear Static Analysis, Database

SOL 101

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = MSC Nastran job created on 02-Apr-11 at 08:53:17

Main Index
 CHAPTER 13 657
Practical Image Superelements

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = CSUPER Example

ECHO = NONE

SET 20=20

SET 99=0,10,30,40,50,60,70

SUBCASE 1

SUPER=20,1

TITLE=DOUBLE FLYSWATTER MODEL

SUBTITLE=IN PHASE LOADS

SPC = 2

LOAD = 1303

DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,BILIN)=ALL

SUBCASE 2

SUPER=20,2

TITLE=DOUBLE FLYSWATTER MODEL

SUBTITLE=OPPOSING LOADS

SPC = 2

LOAD = 1305

DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,BILIN)=ALL

SUBCASE 3

SUPER=20,3

TITLE=DOUBLE FLYSWATTER MODEL

SUBTITLE=PRESSURE LOAD

SPC = 2

LOAD = 1307

DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,BILIN)=ALL

SUBCASE 11

SUPER=99,1

TITLE=DOUBLE FLYSWATTER MODEL

SUBTITLE=IN PHASE LOADS

SPC = 2

LOAD = 303

DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,BILIN)=ALL

SUBCASE 12

SUPER=99,2

TITLE=DOUBLE FLYSWATTER MODEL

Main Index
 658 Superelements User’s Guide
List Superelements

SUBTITLE=OPPOSING LOADS

SPC = 2

LOAD = 305

DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,BILIN)=ALL

SUBCASE 13

SUPER=99,3

TITLE=DOUBLE FLYSWATTER MODEL

SUBTITLE=PRESSURE LOAD

SPC = 2

LOAD = 307

DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,BILIN)=ALL

[view of full model including image superelements described in Chapter 19]

OUTPUT(PLOT)

CSCALE 1.0

PLOTTER NAST

SET 1= ALL

AXES x,y,z

$ front view

VIEW 0., 90., 90.

seupplot 0

ptitle = plot undeformed full model

find scale origin 1 set 1

plot set 1 label elements symbols 6

seupplot 0

ptitle = plot undeformed full model

find scale origin 1 set 1

plot set 1 label grids symbols 6

$ side view

VIEW 0., 0., 90.

seupplot 0

ptitle = plot deformed full model

find scale origin 1 set 1

plot static deformation set 1 origin 1 shape

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

$[secondary superelement 20 is a copy of primary superelement 10

$ mapped to boundary grids 41 and 42]

CSUPER 20 10 41 42

Main Index
 CHAPTER 13 659
Practical Image Superelements

$[secondary superelement 40 is a copy of primary superelement 30

$ mapped to grids 27, 28, 41, and 42]

CSUPER 40 30 27 28 41 42

$[secondary superelement 60 is a MIRROR IMAGE of primary superelement 50

$ mapped to grids 14, 28, 27 and 24]

CSUPER 10060 50 14 28 27 24

GRID 27 2.8 4.4 0.

GRID 28 3.6 4.4 0.

GRID 41 2.8 6. 0.

GRID 42 3.6 6. 0.

PARAM POST -1

PARAM GRDPNT 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

GRID 96 -2.8 10. 0.

GRID 97 -2. 10. 0.

GRID 98 -1.2 10. 0.

$ SE.10

SESET 10 33 34 37 38

SESET 10 45 THRU 50

SESET 10 57 THRU 62

SESET 10 69 THRU 74

SESET 10 81 THRU 86

SESET 10 93 THRU 98

$ SE.30

SESET 30 29 30

$ SE.50

SESET 50 9 THRU 12

SESET 50 21 22

$ SE.70

SESET 70 1 THRU 8

$ Loads for Load Case : _IN_PHASE_LOADS.SC201

SPCADD 2 1

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : spc1.1

SPC1 1 123456 1 2

$ Loads for Load Case : _OPPOSING_LOADS.SC301

LOAD 305 1. 1. 301

LOAD 1305 1. 1. 1301

$ Loads for Load Case : _PRESSURE_LOAD.SC101

LOAD 307 1. 1. 101

LOAD 1307 1. 1. 1101

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : force.201

FORCE 201 93 0 2. 0. 0. 1.

$ [for the image superelement the "top ouboard" grid is grid 98]

FORCE 1201 98 0 2. 0. 0. 1.

Main Index
 660 Superelements User’s Guide
List Superelements

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : force.301

FORCE 301 93 0 2. 0. 0. 1.

$ [for the image superelement the "top ouboard" grid is grid 98]

FORCE 1301 98 0 2. 0. 0. -1.

$ Pressure Loads of Load Set : pload2.101.2D

PLOAD4 101 18 -1. THRU 42

$ [for the image superelement, the element numbers are the same as the

$ original superelement]

PLOAD4 1101 18 -1. THRU 42

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

ENDDATA

Listing 13-1 Flyswatter Input File with CSUPER

The CSUPER commands highlighted in Listing 13-1 define the instructions for imaging and attaching the
primary superelement to its secondary superelement location. The first CSUPER command creates
superelement 20, duplicating superelement 10 and placing it on boundary grids 41 and 42. The second
CSUPER command creates superelement 40, duplicating superelement 30 and placing it on boundary grids
27, 28, 41, and 42. The third CSUPER command creates superelement 60 based on superelement 50. This
command calls for an ‘x-reversal’ of superelement 50 which is then placed onto the boundary grids 14, 28,
27, and 24. The order of the mirror is critical to the creation of the secondary superelement. In this mirror,
grid point 14 corresponds with grid point 13, 28 with 19, 27 with 20, and 24 with 23.
The SEMAP identifies the image superelements as “IDENTICAL” or “MIRROR” as shown below:

SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE

(SORTED BY SEID)

INDEX SUPERELEMENT PROCESS ORDER DOWNSTREAM SE SUPERELEMENT TYPE

0 0 8 0 RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

1 10 1 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

2 20 2 0 IDENTICAL SE NO RESEQ( PRIMARY SE = 10 )

3 30 3 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

4 40 4 0 IDENTICAL SE NO RESEQ( PRIMARY SE = 30 )

5 50 5 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

6 60 6 0 MIRROR SE WITH RESEQ( PRIMARY SE = 50 )

7 70 7 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE

(SORTED BY PROCESS ORDER)

INDEX SUPERELEMENT PROCESS ORDER DOWNSTREAM SE SUPERELEMENT TYPE

0 10 1 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

1 20 2 0 IDENTICAL SE NO RESEQ( PRIMARY SE = 10 )

2 30 3 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

3 40 4 0 IDENTICAL SE NO RESEQ( PRIMARY SE = 30 )

Main Index
 CHAPTER 13 661
Practical Image Superelements

4 50 5 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

5 60 6 0 MIRROR SE WITH RESEQ( PRIMARY SE = 50 )

6 70 7 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

7 0 8 0 RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

Listing 13-2 SEMAP for Flyswatter CSUPER Example

Currently Patran cannot display image superelements. The OUTPUT(POST) commands inserted at the
end of the Case Control section instruct Nastran to create .plt files which can be converted with the PLOTPS
(refer to Installation and Operations Guide for information on how to use PLOTPS) utility to generate PostScript
files. The details of the OUTPUT(POST) commands are included in CHAPTER 19 of this guide. The plots
show the original half of the flyswatter along with the duplicated half from the CSUPER command.

Figure 13-9 Undeformed Plot of Full Model in Final Position with Element IDs (CSUPER)

Main Index
 662 Superelements User’s Guide
List Superelements

Figure 13-10 Undeformed Plot of Full Model in Final Position with Grid IDs (CSUPER)

The reader will notice that all of the grid/element numbers on the right half of the flyswatter (i.e. the
secondary imaged superelements) match the grid/element numbers on the left half of the flyswatter (i.e. the
primary superelements). The plots below show a side view of the deformed plots.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 13 663
Practical Image Superelements

Figure 13-11 Flyswatter CSUPER Deformed Plot of Full Model, 3 Subcases

Modifying Connections with SEQSEP

The SEQSEP command can be used in conjunction with the CSUPER command to help define the grid
points for placing superelements.

SEQSEP Superelement Sequences

Used with the CSUPER entry to define the correspondence of the exterior grid points between an identical
or mirror-image superelement and its primary superelement.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SEQSEP SSID PSID GP1 GP2 GP3 GP4 GP5 GP6
GP7 GP8 -etc.-

Example:

SEQSEP 121 21 109 114 124 131

Main Index
 664 Superelements User’s Guide
List Superelements

Field Contents
SSID Identification number for secondary superelement. (Integer > 0).
PSID Identification number for the primary superelement. (Integer 0).
GPi Exterior grid point identification numbers for the primary superelement. (Integer > 0).

Remarks:
1. This entry is not needed if the grid points listed on the CSUPER entry with the same SSID are in the
order of the corresponding exterior grid points of the primary superelement.
2. In Figure 13-12 the exterior grid points of 10, 20, and 30 of SEID = 1 correspond to the points 13, 12,
and 11, respectively, of image SEID = 2. The CSUPER entry may be defined alone or with a SEQSEP
entry as shown in Figure 13-12

Figure 13-12 Grid Point Correspondence Between Primary and Secondary Superelements

CSUPER Entry Only:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CSUPER 2 1 13 12 11

CSUPER and SEQSEP Enties:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CSUPER 2 1 11 12 13
SEQSEP 2 1 30 20 10

Main Index
 CHAPTER 13 665
Practical Image Superelements

Using the CSUPER file from the previous section, the user could choose to order the GPi nodes in numerical
order by utilizing the SEQSEP command.

SUPER 20 10 41 42

$CSUPER 10060 50 14 28 27 24

CSUPER 10060 50 14 24 27 28

SEQSEP 60 50 13 23 20 19

CSUPER 40 30 27 28 41 42

Listing 13-3 Example using CSUPER with SEQSEP

PART Superelements
PART superelements are defined by defining each superelement in its own Partitioned Bulk Data section.
These separate sections of the bulk data are self-contained in that each section contains all geometry,
elements, properties, constraints, parameters, and loading data for that component of the model. When
PARTs are used the program works in a manner similar to an assembly process. That is, a series of separate
components are assembled into the final finite element model, i.e. the residual structure. Part Superelements
can be imaged (copied/mirrored) by using one or more of the following commands:
 SELOC – uses 3 points to position a PART superelement in a new location
 SEMPLN – defines a mirror plane for a PART superelement

Using SEBULK and SELOC to image a PART

The SEBULK entry can be used to create an image of a partitioned superelement.

SEBULK Partitional Superelement Connection

Defines superelement boundary search options and a repeated, mirrored, or collector superelement.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SEBULK SEID TYPE RSEID METHOD TOL LOC UNITN
O

Example:
SEBULK 14 REPEAT 4 AUTO 1.0E-3

Main Index
 666 Superelements User’s Guide
PART Superelements

Field Contents
SEID Partitioned superelement identification number. See Remark10. (Integer > 0)
TYPE Superelement type. (Character; no Default)
PRIMARY Primary

REPEAT Identical

MIRROR Mirror

COLLCTR Collector

EXTERNAL External

EXTOP2 External using an OUTPUT2 file created in an earlier run.

RSEID Identification number of the reference superelement, used if TYPE = “REPEAT” and
“MIRROR”. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)
METHOD

Method to be used when searching for boundary grid points. (Character: “AUTO” or
“MANUAL”; Default = “AUTO”)
TOL Location tolerance to be used when searching for boundary grid points. (Real; Default =
10E-5)
LOC Coincident location check option for manual connection option. (Character: “YES” or
“NO”; Default = “YES”)
UNITNO FORTRAN unit number for the OUTPUT2 file (applicable and meaningful only when
TYPE = “EXTOP2”).

The SELOC command is used to define a partitioned superelement relocation by listing three noncolinear
points in the superelement and defines three corresponding points not belonging to the superelement.

SELOC Partitioned Superelement Location

Defines a partitioned superelement relocation by listing three noncolinear points in the superelement and
three corresponding points not belonging to the superelement.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SELOC SEID PA1 PA2 PA3 PB1 PB2 PB3

Main Index
 CHAPTER 13 667
Practical Image Superelements

Example:
SELOC 110 10 100 111 1010 112 30

Field Contents
SEID Partitioned identification number of the partitioned superelement. (Integer > 0)
PAi Identification numbers of three noncolinear grids (GRID entry) or points (POINT
entry) which are in the partitioned superelement. (Integer > 0)
PBi Identification numbers of three grids (GRID entry) or points (POINT entry) defined in
the main Bulk Data Section to which PAi will be aligned. (Integer > 0)

Remarks

1. SELOC can be specified in the main Bulk Data Section and will cause a fatal error message if it
appears after the BEGIN SUPER=n command.
2. The superelement will be rotated and translated for alignment of the GAi and GBi locations.
3. The PAi and PBi can either be GRIDs or POINTs.
4. PA1, PA2, and PA3 must be contained in superelement SEID.
5. PB1, PB2, and PB3 must be specified in the main Bulk Data Section. If they belong to a
superelement that is also relocated, then the original (unmoved) positions of PB1, PB2, and PB3 are
used.
6. PB1, PB2, and PB3 must have the same relative locations as PA1, PA2, and PA3.
7. Three grids or points are required even if the superelement connects to only one or two exterior grids.
8. Coordinate systems, global displacement directions, and element coordinate systems for the
superelement will be rotated and translated.
9. The global coordinate directions of the boundary grid points of the upstream superelement will be
transformed internally to the global coordinate directions of the attachment grid points in the
downstream superelement. For displacement data recovery, the output will be in the original global
coordinate system.
10. The translation and rotation of the superelement to the new position is accomplished by defining
local rectangular coordinate systems based on the specified grid locations:
11. The local systems have their origin at PX1 and the x-axis points from PX1 to PX2.
12. The y-axis lies I nthe plane containing PX1, PX2, and PX3, is perpendicular to the x-axis, and points
towards PX3.
13. The z-axis is defined by the cross product of the x-axis into the y-axis.

Main Index
 668 Superelements User’s Guide
PART Superelements

14. The rotation and translation transformation aligns the local system defined by the superelement grids
with the local system defined by the main Bulk Data Section grids.
15. This entry will only work if PART superelements (BEGIN SUPER) exist.

Using SEMPLN to define a mirror plane

The SEMPLN entry is used to define a mirror plane for mirroring a partitioned superelement.

SEMPLN Superelement Mirror Plane

Defines a mirror plane for mirroring a partitioned superelement.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SEMPLN SEID “PLANE” P1 P2 P3

Example:
SEMPLN 110 PLANE 12 45 1125

Field Contents
SEID Partitioned superelement identification number. (Integer > 0).
“PLANE” Flag indicating that the plane is defined by three noncolinear points.
Pi GRID or POINT entry identification numbers of three noncolinear points.
(Integer > 0).

Remarks
1. SEMPLN can only be specified in the main Bulk Data Section and will cause a fatal error message if
it appears after the BEGIN SUPER=n command.
2. Grids or points referenced on this entry must be defined in the main Bulk Data Section

Example Using SEBULK, SELOC, and SEMPLN

An example using SELOC and SEMPLN is shown below using the flyswatter example shown in section Using
CSUPER.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 13 669
Practical Image Superelements

Table 13-2 Primary and Secondary Superelements for PART Example

Superelement ID Type Description Comment
10 Primary Left Swatter Created in proper location
20 Secondary Right Swatter Repeat of SE 10, relocated
with SELOC
30 Primary Left Vertical Created in Proper
Location
40 Secondary Vertical Tail Repeat of SE 30, relocated
with SELOC
50 Primary Left Horizontal Created in proper location
60 Secondary Right Horizontal Mirror of SE 50,
Mirrored with SEMPLN
and relocated with
SELOC
70 Primary Post Created in proper location

Note that all of the superelements are primary superelements. Superelements 20, 40, and 60 will re-use the
same bulk data as superelements 10, 30, and 50 respectively. However, superelements 20, 40, and 60 must
be repositioned using SELOC and superelement 60 is mirrored to follow the CSUPER example in section
Using CSUPER.
An example using PART superelements is shown below using the flyswatter example seen throughout this
guide. The grids and elements for the full model are shown below. Results for the baseline and single-level
superelement analysis can be found in Baseline Static Example using Patran (Ch. 3) (ref
/doc/seug/chapter3/baseline/baseline.bdf and /doc/seug/chapter3/part/part.bdf).

Main Index
 670 Superelements User’s Guide
PART Superelements

Figure 13-13 Flyswatter Baseline Model

The full model could be broken up into PART superelements as shown in the figure below (ref
/doc/seug/chapter3/part/part.bdf ).

Main Index
 CHAPTER 13 671
Practical Image Superelements

Figure 13-14 Flyswatter Example for Full Model Internal Superelements (PART)

However, it is convenient to use image superelements for this model. For this example, half of the flyswatter
is removed from the whole so that proper duplication can be demonstrated. The primary superelements are
shown below:

Main Index
 672 Superelements User’s Guide
PART Superelements

Figure 13-15 Flyswatter Primary Superelements for PART Image Superelement Example

The reader will notice that additional grids are retained so that the SELOC entry has points retained in the
residual structure necessary to locate each image superelement. The PART superelement input file is shown
below (ref /doc/seug/chapter13/flyswatter/part/seloc-sempln.bdf).

$ NASTRAN input file created by the Patran 2010.2.3 64-Bit (MD Enabled)

$ input file translator on April 03, 2011 at 17:54:16.

$ Direct Text Input for Nastran System Cell Section

$ Direct Text Input for File Management Section

$ Direct Text Input for Executive Control

$ Linear Static Analysis, Database

SOL 101

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

param,post,-1

TITLE = MSC Nastran job created on 02-Apr-11 at 19:25:07

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = PART Superelements with SELOC and SEMPLN images

ECHO = NONE

SPC=2

SUBCASE 1

TITLE=DOUBLE FLYSWATTER MODEL

Main Index
 CHAPTER 13 673
Practical Image Superelements

SUBTITLE=IN PHASE LOADS

LOAD = 303

DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,CENTER)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

SUBCASE 2

TITLE=DOUBLE FLYSWATTER MODEL

SUBTITLE=OPPOSING LOADS

LOAD = 305

DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,CENTER)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

SUBCASE 3

TITLE=DOUBLE FLYSWATTER MODEL

SUBTITLE=PRESSURE LOAD

LOAD = 307

DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,CENTER)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

OUTPUT(PLOT)

CSCALE 1.0

PLOTTER NAST

SET 1= ALL

$isometric view

VIEW 0., 90., 90.

$front view

$ view 0., 0., 180.

$ top view

$ view 0., 90., 180.

$ side view

$ view 270., 0., 180.

AXES x , y, z

$ FIND SCALE ORIGIN 1 SET 1

seupplot 0

ptitle = plot undeformed full model

find scale origin 1 set 1

plot set 1 label elements

seupplot 0

ptitle = plot deformed full model

Main Index
 674 Superelements User’s Guide
PART Superelements

find scale origin 1 set 1

plot static deformation set 1 origin 1 shape

BEGIN BULK

$ SE 20 is created in same location as SE 10 and must be

$ relocated by using the SELOC entry

SELOC 20 93 33 38 99 39 44

POINT 99 1.2 10. 0.

POINT 39 1.2 6. 0.

POINT 44 5.2 6. 0.

$ SE 40 is created in same location as SE 30 and must be

$ relocated by using the SELOC entry

SELOC 40 19 20 36 27 28 42

POINT 27 2.8 4.4 0.

POINT 28 3.6 4.4 0.

POINT 42 3.6 6. 0.

$ SE 60 is created in same location as SE 60 and must be

$ Mirrored with SEMPLN entry and relocated by using the SELOC entry

SEMPLN 60 Plane 1001 1002 1003

POINT 1001 0. 1.0 0.

POINT 1002 0. 0.0 0.

POINT 1003 0. 0.0 1.0

SELOC 60 13 23 19 14 24 28

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

include 'residual.bdf'

Begin Super=10

include'part10.bdf'

$ Loads for Load Case : _IN_PHASE_LOADS.SC201

LOAD 303 1. 1. 201

$ Loads for Load Case : _OPPOSING_LOADS.SC301

LOAD 305 1. 1. 301

$ Loads for Load Case : _PRESSURE_LOAD.SC101

LOAD 307 1. 1. 101

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : force.201

FORCE 201 93 0 2. 0. 0. 1.

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : force.301

FORCE 301 93 0 2. 0. 0. 1.

$ Pressure Loads of Load Set : pload2.101.2D

PLOAD4 101 18 -1. THRU 42

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

Begin Super=20

$ [SE 20 is created by using the same include file as SE 10

Main Index
 CHAPTER 13 675
Practical Image Superelements

$ the grids/elements must be relocated using SELOC in the main bulk section]

include'part10.bdf'

$ [The loads on SE 20 are put on the proper locations as the baseline]

$ Loads for Load Case : _IN_PHASE_LOADS.SC201

LOAD 303 1. 1. 201

$ Loads for Load Case : _OPPOSING_LOADS.SC301

LOAD 305 1. 1. 301

$ Loads for Load Case : _PRESSURE_LOAD.SC101

LOAD 307 1. 1. 101

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : force.201

FORCE 201 98 0 2. 0. 0. 1.

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : force.301

FORCE 301 98 0 2. 0. 0. -1.

$ Pressure Loads of Load Set : pload2.101.2D

PLOAD4 101 18 -1. THRU 42

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

Begin Super=30

include'part30.bdf'

Begin Super=40

$ [SE 40 is created by using the same include file as SE 20

$ the grids/elements must be relocated using SELOC in the main bulk section]

include'part30.bdf'

Begin Super=50

include'part50.bdf'

Begin Super=60

$ [SE 60 is created by using the same include file as SE 40

$ the superelement is mirrored using SEMPLN in the main bulk section

$ the grids/elements must be relocated using SELOC in the main bulk section]

include'part50.bdf'

Begin Super=70

include'part70.bdf'

Listing 13-4 Flyswatter Input File for PARTs with SELOC and SEMPLN

In the .bdf listing above, the SELOC commands place the ‘copied’ superelements 20 and 40 in their proper
location. The SEMPLN command creates a mirror plane for superelement 60 and the SELOC places it in
the correct position.
The SEMAP identifies “PRIMARY” and “REPEATED” Superelements as shown below:
SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE (SORTED BY SEID)

PRIMARY PROCESS DOWNSTREAM

SUPERELEMENT SUPERELEMENT ORDER SUPERELEMENT TYPE LABEL

------------ ------------ ------- ------------ ----------------------------- -------------------------------

0 0 8 0 RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

10 0 1 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

Main Index
 676 Superelements User’s Guide
PART Superelements

20 10 5 0 REPEATED (SEBULK)

30 0 2 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

40 30 6 0 REPEATED (SEBULK)

50 0 3 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

60 50 7 0 REPEATED (SEBULK)

70 0 4 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

Listing 13-5 SEMAP for PART Superelements with SEBULK and SELOC

Currently Patran cannot display duplicate grids or elements and does not recognize the SELOC or SEMPLN
entries. The OUTPUT(POST) commands inserted at the end of the Case Control section instruct Nastran
to create .plt files which can be converted with the PLOTPS (refer to Installation and Operations Guide for
information on how to use PLOTPS) utility to generate PostScript files. The details of the
OUTPUT(POST) commands are included in CHAPTER 13 of this guide. The plots show the original half of
the flyswatter along with the duplicated half from the CSUPER command.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 13 677
Practical Image Superelements

Figure 13-16 Undeformed Plot of Full Model in Final Position with Element IDs (PART)

Main Index
 678 Superelements User’s Guide
PART Superelements

Figure 13-17 Undeformed Plot of Full Model in Final Position with Grid IDs (PART)

The reader will notice that all of the grid/element numbers on the right half of the flyswatter (i.e. the
secondary imaged superelements) match the grid/element numbers on the left half of the flyswatter (i.e. the
primary superelements). This is expected since the same bulk data file is used for each of the PARTs that is
relocated / mirrored. The plots below show a side view of the deformed plots.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 13 679
Practical Image Superelements

Figure 13-18 Flyswatter PART Deformed Plot of Full Model, 3 Subcases

External Superelements
External Superelements are similar to PART superelements in many respects, except rather than solving the
model in a single run, the superelement can be processed and output for use at a later time. There are many
advantages of external superelements:
 the reduced matrices are compact and can be added to another structure while maintaining full
fidelity of the component behavior on the system
 they can be easily re-used as many times as necessary at a very low runtime cost
 they can protect design information (proprietary geometry) and material information (composite
layup)
 key results can be monitored without the need for full data recovery
 files can be easily shared and maintained across different organizations or design groups.
External superelements can be imaged (copied and moved or mirrored) and re-used many times just like
PART superelements. The SELOC and SEMPLN entries described earlier are as applicable to external
superelements as they are to PART superelements. Currently, the imaging of external superelements is
supported for the MATRIXDB, DMIGDB and DMIGOP2 options of the EXTSEOUT Case Control
command.
The following important points should be noted with regard to the usage of image superelements or external
superelements:
 The image or secondary superelement is an "A-set" copy of the primary external superelement.
Thus, the boundary, loads, constraints and reduction procedure of the image or secondary
superelement are set and are the same as those of its primary external superelement.

Main Index
 680 Superelements User’s Guide
External Superelements

 An image or secondary superelement requires the specification of either an SELOC entry or an

SEMPLN entry. If an SELOC entry is specified, then an identical copy of its primary external
superelement will be positioned at the location implied by the SELOC entry. If an SEMPLN entry
is specified, then a mirror image of the primary external superelement will be positioned.
 It should be noted that even a primary external superelement can be re-positioned in an assembly
run by use of an SELOC or SEMPLN entry.

Plate Example Using External superelement and SEBULK and SELOC Entries
This example deals with a rectangular plate with four appendages. One of the appendages is created via an
external superelement creation job as external superelement 10. For the final assembly, this primary external
superelement 10 is positioned via an SELOC entry. External superelements 20, 30 and 40 are then imaged
from the primary external superelement 10 via the use of SEBULK entries and are then properly positioned
via the use of SELOC entries.
The configuration of the plate example for the single shot run is shown in Figure 13-19 while that for the
external superelement approach is shown in Figure 13-20.

Figure 13-19 Plate structure for single-shot run

Main Index
 CHAPTER 13 681
Practical Image Superelements

Figure 13-20 Plate structure with residual and primary and secondary external superelements

Main Index
 682 Superelements User’s Guide
External Superelements

External SE 10 Creation Job

ASSIGN OUTPUT2='extse10_op2' UNIT=25 DELETE
ID TEST COPY $ EXTERNAL SE 10 CREATION
SOL 103
DIAG 8,15
CEND
TITLE = EXTERNAL SE 10 CREATION
EXTSEOUT (ASMBULK=AUTO, EXTBULK, EXTID=10, DMIGOP2=25)
METHOD = 1000
DISP(PLOT)=ALL
BEGIN BULK
EIGRL,1000,,,20
PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES
PARAM,WTMASS,.002589
ASET1, 123456, 403, 404, 405
$
PSHELL 102 1 .01 1 1
$
CQUAD4 401 102 403 404 407 406
CQUAD4 402 102 404 405 408 407
CQUAD4 403 102 406 407 410 409
CQUAD4 404 102 407 408 411 410
$
MAT1 1 1.+6 .26 .11
$
GRID 403 0. 1. 0.
GRID 404 2. 1. 0.
GRID 405 4. 1. 0.
GRID 406 0. 3. 0.
GRID 407 2. 3. 0.
GRID 408 4. 3. 0.
GRID 409 0. 5. 0.
GRID 410 2. 5. 0.
GRID 411 4. 5. 0.
ENDDATA

Main Index
 CHAPTER 13 683
Practical Image Superelements

External SE SOL 103 Assembly Job

ASSIGN INPUTT2='extse10_op2' UNIT=25
ID ASSEMBLY JOB $ ONE PRIMARY EXTERNAL SE & THREE SECONDARY EXTERNAL SES
SOL 103
TIME 5
DIAG 8,15
CEND
TITLE = EXTERNAL SE ASSEMBLY JOB
SUBT=JOB INVOLVES PRI. EXTERNAL SE 10 AND SEC. EXTERNAL SES 20, 30 & 40
SPC = 2
METHOD = 1000
BEGIN BULK
EIGRL,1000,,,20
PARAM,WTMASS,.002589
$
PSHELL 101 1 .01 1 1
$
CQUAD4 1 101 101 102 202 201
…..
…..
CQUAD4 20 101 210 211 311 310
$
MAT1 1 1.+6 .26 .11
$
GRID 101 0. -1. 0.
…..
…..
GRID 311 20. 1. 0.
$
SPCADD 2 1
SPC1 1 123456 101 201 301
$
$ Primary External SE 10
$
incl 'extse10.asm'
seloc, 10, 403, 404, 407, 303, 304, 10
point, 10, , 6.0, 3.0, 0.0
$
$ Image External SE 20
$
sebulk,20,repeat,10
seloc, 20, 403, 404, 407, 307, 308, 20
point, 20, , 14.0, 3.0, 0.0
$
$ Image External SE 30
$
sebulk,30,repeat,10
seloc, 30, 403, 404, 407, 107, 106, 30
point, 30, , 10.0, -3.0, 0.0
$
$ Image External SE 40
$
sebulk,40,repeat,10
seloc, 40, 403, 404, 407, 111, 110, 40
point, 40, , 18.0, -3.0, 0.0
$
incl 'extse10.pch'
POINT 407 2. 3. 0.
$
ENDDATA

Both static analysis (using SOL 101) and normal modes analysis (using SOL 103) have been performed on
the model for both the single shot configuration as well as for the external superelement configuration. For
static analysis, a vertical load is applied at the tip of the residual. The final results obtained for the tip
displacements, as shown in Table 1 below, show good agreement between the single-shot run and the external

Main Index
 684 Superelements User’s Guide
External Superelements

superelement run. Similarly, the modal frequencies shown in Table 2 using SOL 103 for the two cases also
match very well.

  For Assembly Run For Single-shot run

Grid Point T3 R1 R2 T3 R1 R2
111 -13064.40 -2.34 928.16 -13064.40 -2.34 928.16
311 -13062.22 4.00 929.51 -13062.22 4.00 929.51
211 -13065.06 1.40 934.94 -13065.06 1.40 934.94

Assembly Run Single Shot Run

Mode Number Frequencies (Hz) Mode Number Frequencies (Hz)

1 0.15 1 0.15

2 0.63 2 0.63

3 1.02 3 1.02

4 1.87 4 1.87

5 3.11 5 3.11

6 4.16 6 4.16

7 4.85 7 4.85

8 6.00 8 6.00

9 7.76 9 7.76

10 9.47 10 9.47

11 10.62 11 10.62

12 12.49 12 12.49

13 14.74 13 14.74

14 15.50 14 15.50

15 17.04 15 17.04

16 18.84 16 18.84

17 21.08 17 21.08

18 21.79 18 21.79

Main Index
 CHAPTER 13 685
Practical Image Superelements

19 25.15 19 25.15

20 25.72 20 25.72

The .dat files for the above example are in the …/tpl/extsecopy directory with names of the form
extcopy1_10*.dat.

Double Flyswatter Problem Using External superelement and SEBULK,

SELOC and SEMPLN Entries
This example deals with the double flyswatter problem. In this case, four distinct primary external
superelements, namely, external superelements 1, 3, 5 and 7, are defined and three image external
superelements, namely, external superelements 2, 4 and 6, are derived from the primary external
superelements 1, 3 and 5, respectively. An interesting feature of this model is the role of external superelement
7 which attaches to both the primary and image external superelements. In order to demonstrate the copy
and move / mirror capabilities in a single example, image external superelements 2 and 6 are created using
the copy and mirror (SEMPLN) feature, while image external superelement 4 is created using the copy and
move (SELOC) feature.
The configuration of the double flyswatter model for the single shot run is shown in Figure 13-21 while that
for the external superelement approach is shown in Figure 13-22.

Figure 13-21 Double flyswatter model for single shot run

Main Index
 686 Superelements User’s Guide
External Superelements

Figure 13-22 External superelement model for double flyswatter problem

External SE 1 Generation Job

ID DOUBLE FLYSWATTER MODEL $ EXTERNAL SE 1 CREATION
SOL 103
TIME 15
DIAG 8,15
CEND
TITLE = DOUBLE FLYSWATTER MODEL $ EXTERNAL SE 1 CREATION
SUBTITLE = S.E. NORMAL MODES ANALYSIS
EXTSEOUT (ASMBULK=AUTO, EXTBULK, EXTID=1)
PARAM,GRDPNT,0
PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES
$
METHOD = 100
$
BEGIN BULK
EIGRL,100,,,10
$
include 'prop.blk'
include 'se1.blk'
$
$ DEFINE BOUNDARY DOFS
$
ASET1,123456,35,36
$
enddata

Main Index
 CHAPTER 13 687
Practical Image Superelements

External SE 3 Generation Job

ID DOUBLE FLYSWATTER MODEL $ EXTERNAL SE 3 CREATION
SOL 103
TIME 15
DIAG 8,15
CEND
TITLE = DOUBLE FLYSWATTER MODEL $ EXTERNAL SE 3 CREATION
SUBTITLE = S.E. NORMAL MODES ANALYSIS
EXTSEOUT (ASMBULK=AUTO, EXTBULK, EXTID=3, DMIGDB)
PARAM,GRDPNT,0
PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES
$
METHOD = 100
$
BEGIN BULK
EIGRL,100,,,10
$
include 'prop.blk'
include 'se3.blk'
$
$ DEFINE BOUNDARY DOFS
$
ASET1,123456,19,20,35,36
$
enddata

External SE 5 Generation Job

ASSIGN OUTPUT2='extse5_op2' UNIT=27 DELETE
ID DOUBLE FLYSWATTER MODEL $ EXTERNAL SE 5 CREATION
SOL 103
TIME 15
DIAG 8,15
CEND
TITLE = DOUBLE FLYSWATTER MODEL $ EXTERNAL SE 5 CREATION
SUBTITLE = S.E. NORMAL MODES ANALYSIS
EXTSEOUT (ASMBULK=AUTO, EXTBULK, EXTID=5, DMIGOP2=27)
PARAM,GRDPNT,0
PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES
$
METHOD = 100
$
BEGIN BULK
EIGRL,100,,,10
$
include 'prop.blk'
include 'se5.blk'
$
$ DEFINE BOUNDARY DOFS
$
ASET1,123456,13,23,19,20
$
enddata

Main Index
 688 Superelements User’s Guide
External Superelements

External SE 7 Generation Job

ID DOUBLE FLYSWATTER MODEL $ EXTERNAL SE 7 CREATION
SOL 103
TIME 15
DIAG 8,15
CEND
TITLE = DOUBLE FLYSWATTER MODEL $ EXTERNAL SE 7 CREATION
SUBTITLE = S.E. NORMAL MODES ANALYSIS
EXTSEOUT (ASMBULK=AUTO, EXTID=7, DMIGSFIX=EXTID, DMIGPCH)
PARAM,GRDPNT,0
PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES
$
METHOD = 100
$
BEGIN BULK
EIGRL,100,,,10
$
include 'prop.blk'
include 'se7.blk'
$
$ DEFINE BOUNDARY DOFS
$
ASET1,123456,13,14
$
Enddata

External SE SOL 103 Assembly Job

ASSIGN XSE1='extse1.MASTER'
DBLOCATE DATABLK=(EXTDB) CONVERT=(SEID=1),
LOGICAL=XSE1
ASSIGN XSE3='extse3.MASTER'
DBLOCATE DATABLK=(EXTDB) CONVERT=(SEID=3),
LOGICAL=XSE3
ASSIGN INPUTT2='extse5_op2', UNIT=27
ID DOUBLE FLYSWATTER MODEL $ RESIDUAL / ASSEMBLY RUN
SOL 103
TIME 15
DIAG 8,15
CEND
TITLE = NORMAL MODES ANALYSIS - RESIDUAL / ASSEMBLY RUN
SUBT = ASSEMBLY JOB USING 4 PRIMARY EXT. SES AND 3 SECONDARY EXT. SES
PARAM,GRDPNT,0
$
K2GG = K7
M2GG = M7
$
METHOD = 100
$
BEGIN BULK
EIGRL,100,,,10
$
CQUAD4 5 1 13 14 24 23
GRID 13 -.4 3.6 0.
GRID 14 .4 3.6 0.
GRID 23 -.4 4.4 0.
GRID 24 .4 4.4 0.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 13 689
Practical Image Superelements

$
POINT 1027 2.8 4.4 0.
POINT 1028 3.6 4.4 0.
POINT 1041 2.8 6. 0.
POINT 1042 3.6 6. 0.
POINT 1054 3.6 6.8 0.
$
include 'prop.blk'
$
$ Primary External SE 1
$
include 'extse1.asm'
$
$ Image External SE 2
$
SEBULK,2,REPEAT,1
SELOC,2,35,36,1048,1041,1042,1054
$
$ Primary External SE 3
$
include 'extse3.asm'
$
$ Image External SE 4
$
SEBULK,4,REPEAT,3
SELOC,4,19,20,36,1027,1028,1042
$
$ Primary External SE 5
$
include 'extse5.asm'
$
$ Image External SE 6
$
SEBULK,6,REPEAT,5
SEMPLN,6,PLANE,1000,2000,3000
POINT,1000
POINT,2000,,,1.0
POINT,3000,,,,1.0
$
$ Primary External SE 7
$
include 'extse7.asm'
$
include 'extse1.pch'
POINT 1048 -2.8 6.8 0.
include 'extse3.pch'
include 'extse5.pch'
include 'extse7.pch'
$
enddata

For the static analysis performed in SOL 101, pressure load is applied to elements of superelement 1 and
superelement 2. For the external superelement analysis, the loading defined in superelement 1 is also copied
to superelement 2. The displacements obtained at the tip show good agreement between the assembly run
and the single-shot run, as shown in Table 3 below. Note that the grid IDs are the same for superelement 1
and superelement 2. Similarly, the modal frequencies obtained using SOL 103 analysis compare very well as
shown in Table 4 below.

Main Index
 690 Superelements User’s Guide
External Superelements

  Assembly Run   Single Shot Run

Grid ID T3 R1 R2 Grid ID T3 R1 R2
13 -5.56 -2.82 0.02 13 -5.56 -2.82 0.02

14 -5.56 -2.82 -0.02 14 -5.56 -2.82 -0.02

23 -7.86 -2.93 -0.10 23 -7.86 -2.93 -0.10

24 -7.86 -2.93 0.10 24 -7.86 -2.93 0.10

           

SE1, 93 -29.41 -3.68 -0.30 93 -29.41 -3.68 -0.30

SE 1, 98 -28.21 -3.68 -0.30 98 -28.21 -3.68 -0.30

SE 2, 93 -29.41 -3.68 -0.30 99 -28.21 -3.68 0.30

SE 2, 98 -28.21 -3.68 -0.30 104 -29.41 -3.68 0.30

Assembly Single Shot

Mode Number Eigenvalue (Hz) Eigenvalue (Hz)

1 5.44 5.44

2 9.35 9.35

3 31.74 31.74

4 39.28 39.28

5 54.79 54.79

6 75.13 75.13

7 76.34 76.34

8 180.36 180.36

9 183.46 183.46

10 244.25 244.25

The .dat files for the above example are in the …/tpl/extsecopy directory with names of the form
extcopy2_10*.dat. The INCLUDE files referenced by the .dat files are in the …/tpl/include directory

Main Index
 CHAPTER 13 691
Practical Image Superelements

Example of Airplane with Two Engines with Rotors Using External

superelement and SEBULK, SELOC and SEMPLN Entries
The model is a plane with two engines, each consisting of two axisymmetric rotors and engine casings
(stators). The rotors in the two engines are identical, but there are small differences in the left and right
engine casings. The left and engines are thus very similar, but not identical. This is demonstrated from the
eigenfrequencies for the two engines, computed from SOL 103 and shown in Table 5, which show that they
are very close.
In order to compare the results, three different cases are considered as indicated below.
a. Single-shot run: Here, the complete plane with both the engines is analyzed at once, without the
usage of external superelements (see Figure 13-23)
b. External superelement assembly run using two distinct and separate external superelements: In
this case, the left and right engines are part of two separate external superelements with IDs of
200 and 400, respectively. The model used for the creation run of the right engine is shown in
Figure 13-24. The model includes both rotating and non-rotating components.
The generation of the external superelements employs dynamic reduction. Thus, the A-set DOFs
of the external superelements include both physical boundary points (as shown in Figure 13-20)
and generalized coordinates (Q-set DOFs).
The model for the assembly run with the left and right engines included as external superelements
is shown in Figure 13-25. The direction of rotation is specified in the assembly run. For the analysis
performed here, both the rotors are rotating in the same direction.
c. External superelement assembly run using one external superelement and the mirror feature: In
this case, only the external superelement model for the right engine is used. The left engine is
attached to the residual structure by mirroring the right engine about the mirror plane as shown
in Figure 13-26. Since the engines are similar but not identical, the results for this case will be close,
but not identical, with those from case (b).

Figure 13-23 Model for single-shot run

Main Index
 692 Superelements User’s Guide
External Superelements

Figure 13-24 Engine model used for external superelement creation run

Figure 13-25 Model with engines as two external superelements

Main Index
 CHAPTER 13 693
Practical Image Superelements

Figure 13-26 Model with left engine obtained using mirror feature

External SE 200 Generation Job

ASSIGN OUTPUT2='extse200_op2' UNIT=35 DELETE
ID TEST FREEDOM $ CREATION RUN FOR LEFT ENGINE
$
DIAG 8,15
SOL 103
CEND
TITLE = EXTERNAL SE 200 CREATION
extseout(asmbulk=auto, extbulk, extid=200, dmigop2=35)
METHOD = 1
$
BEGIN BULK
EIGRL,1,,,80
PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES
$
include 'freedom_lft_pylon.bdf'
include 'freedom_prop_pylon.bdf'
$include 'freedom_lft_rotor.bdf'
$
$ ------ Rotor Models ------------
$
ROTORAX 6 PROP 297
ROTORAX 6 GRID 260111 260112
$
ROTORAX 5 PROP 298
ROTORAX 5 GRID 260106 260107
$
PAXSYMH 297 299 288 1
PAXSYMH 298 299 288 1
$
MAT1 299 1.07+5 .32 .1 0.5
CORD2R 288 95.5558 -72.7 -26.9 95.5558 -82.7 -26.9
95.5558 -72.7 -24.4
$

Main Index
 694 Superelements User’s Guide
External Superelements

CQUADX 400009 297 260115 260114 260117 260116

CQUADX 400010 297 260114 260113 260118 260117
CQUADX 400011 297 260113 260112 260119 260118
CQUADX 400012 297 260112 260111 260120 260119
CQUADX 400013 297 260111 260110 260121 260120
$
CQUADX 400014 298 2601101 260109 260122 2601211
CQUADX 400015 298 260109 260108 260123 260122
CQUADX 400016 298 260108 260107 260124 260123
CQUADX 400017 298 260107 260106 260125 260124
CQUADX 400018 298 260106 260105 260126 260125
$
GRID 260105 143.556 -72.7 -26.9
GRID 260106 138.756 -72.7 -26.9
GRID 260107 133.956 -72.7 -26.9
GRID 260108 129.156 -72.7 -26.9
GRID 260109 124.356 -72.7 -26.9
GRID 260110 119.556 -72.7 -26.9
$
GRID 2601101 119.556 -72.7 -26.9
GRID 260111 114.756 -72.7 -26.9
GRID 260112 109.956 -72.7 -26.9
GRID 260113 105.156 -72.7 -26.9
GRID 260114 100.356 -72.7 -26.9
GRID 260115 95.5558 -72.7 -26.9
$
GRID 260126 143.556 -72.7 -24.4
GRID 260125 138.756 -72.7 -24.4
GRID 260124 133.956 -72.7 -24.4
GRID 260123 129.156 -72.7 -24.4
GRID 260122 124.356 -72.7 -24.4
$
GRID 2601211 119.556 -72.7 -24.4
GRID 260121 119.556 -72.7 -24.4
GRID 260120 114.756 -72.7 -24.4
GRID 260119 109.956 -72.7 -24.4
GRID 260118 105.156 -72.7 -24.4
GRID 260117 100.356 -72.7 -24.4
GRID 260116 95.5558 -72.7 -24.4
$
GRID 260205 143.556 -72.7 -26.9
GRID 260215 95.5558 -72.7 -26.9
$
RBAX3D 400001 260205 260105
RBAX3D 400002 260215 260115
RBAX3D 400005 260208 260108
RBAX3D 400006 260209 260109
RBAX3D 400007 260210 260110
RBAX3D 400010 260213 260113
RBAX3D 400011 260214 260114
$
GRID 260206 138.756 -72.7 -26.9
GRID 260207 133.956 -72.7 -26.9
GRID 260208 129.156 -72.7 -26.9
GRID 260209 124.356 -72.7 -26.9
GRID 260210 119.556 -72.7 -26.9
$
GRID 2602101 119.556 -72.7 -26.9
GRID 260211 114.756 -72.7 -26.9
GRID 260212 109.956 -72.7 -26.9

Main Index
 CHAPTER 13 695
Practical Image Superelements

GRID 260213 105.156 -72.7 -26.9

GRID 260214 100.356 -72.7 -26.9
GRID 260215 95.5558 -72.7 -26.9
$
RBE2 812 260110 123456 2601101
RBE2 813 260121 123456 2601211
$ ------- RBE Connections for the rotor -----
$RBE3 700 160205 123456 1.0 123456 110331 110332
$ 110333 110334 110335 110388 110389 110390 110391 110444
$ 110445 110446 110447 110487 110488 110489
$
$RBE3 701 160215 123456 1.0 123456 110266 110267
$ 110268 110269 110270 110336 110337 110338 110339 110392
$ 110393 110394 110395 110448 110449 110450
$
$ ------- RBE Connections for the rotor -----
RBE3 802 260205 123456 1.0 123456 110065 110066
110067 110068 110069 110122 110123 110124 110125 110178
110179 110180 110181 110221 110222 110223
$
RBE3 803 260215 123456 1.0 123456 110000 110001
110002 110003 110004 110070 110071 110072 110073 110126
110127 110128 110129 110182 110183 110184
$
aset1,123456,50087,thru,50104
aset1,123456,260208,thru,260210
aset1,123456,260213,260214
aset1,123456,260106,260107
aset1,123456,260111,260112
enddata

External SE 400 Generation Job

ASSIGN OUTPUT2='extse400_op2' UNIT=36 DELETE
ID TEST FREEDOM $ CREATION RUN FOR RIGHT ENGINE
$
DIAG 8,15
SOL 103
CEND
TITLE = EXTERNAL SE 400 CREATION
extseout(asmbulk=auto, extbulk, extid=400, dmigop2=36)
METHOD = 1

BEGIN BULK
PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES

EIGRL 1 80 0
aset1,123456,60087,thru,60104
aset1,123456,160208,thru,160210
aset1,123456,160213,160214
aset1,123456,160106,160107
aset1,123456,160111,160112
$
include 'freedom_rgt_pylon.bdf'
include 'freedom_prop_pylon.bdf'
$include 'freedom_rgt_rotor.bdf'
$

Main Index
 696 Superelements User’s Guide
External Superelements

$ ------ Rotor Models ------------

$
ROTORAX 4 PROP 197
ROTORAX 4 GRID 160111 160112
$
ROTORAX 3 PROP 198
ROTORAX 3 GRID 160106 160107
$
PAXSYMH 197 99 88 1
PAXSYMH 198 99 88 1
$
MAT1 99 1.07+5 4.053+6 .32 .1 0.5
CORD2R 88 95.5558 72.7 -26.9 95.5558 82.7 -26.9
95.5558 72.7 -24.4
$
CQUADX 200009 197 160115 160114 160117 160116
CQUADX 200010 197 160114 160113 160118 160117
CQUADX 200011 197 160113 160112 160119 160118
CQUADX 200012 197 160112 160111 160120 160119
CQUADX 200013 197 160111 160110 160121 160120
$
CQUADX 200014 198 1601101 160109 160122 1601211
CQUADX 200015 198 160109 160108 160123 160122
CQUADX 200016 198 160108 160107 160124 160123
CQUADX 200017 198 160107 160106 160125 160124
CQUADX 200018 198 160106 160105 160126 160125
$
GRID 160105 143.556 72.7 -26.9
GRID 160106 138.756 72.7 -26.9
GRID 160107 133.956 72.7 -26.9
GRID 160108 129.156 72.7 -26.9
GRID 160109 124.356 72.7 -26.9
GRID 160110 119.556 72.7 -26.9
$
GRID 1601101 119.556 72.7 -26.9
GRID 160111 114.756 72.7 -26.9
GRID 160112 109.956 72.7 -26.9
GRID 160113 105.156 72.7 -26.9
GRID 160114 100.356 72.7 -26.9
GRID 160115 95.5558 72.7 -26.9
$
GRID 160126 143.556 72.7 -24.4
GRID 160125 138.756 72.7 -24.4
GRID 160124 133.956 72.7 -24.4
GRID 160123 129.156 72.7 -24.4
GRID 160122 124.356 72.7 -24.4
$
GRID 1601211 119.556 72.7 -24.4
GRID 160121 119.556 72.7 -24.4
GRID 160120 114.756 72.7 -24.4
GRID 160119 109.956 72.7 -24.4
GRID 160118 105.156 72.7 -24.4
GRID 160117 100.356 72.7 -24.4
GRID 160116 95.5558 72.7 -24.4
$
GRID 160205 143.556 72.7 -26.9
GRID 160215 95.5558 72.7 -26.9
$
RBAX3D 300001 160205 160105
RBAX3D 300002 160215 160115

Main Index
 CHAPTER 13 697
Practical Image Superelements

RBAX3D 300005 160208 160108

RBAX3D 300006 160209 160109
RBAX3D 300007 160210 160110
RBAX3D 300010 160213 160113
RBAX3D 300011 160214 160114
$
GRID 160206 138.756 72.7 -26.9
GRID 160207 133.956 72.7 -26.9
GRID 160208 129.156 72.7 -26.9
GRID 160209 124.356 72.7 -26.9
GRID 160210 119.556 72.7 -26.9
$
GRID 1602101 119.556 72.7 -26.9
GRID 160211 114.756 72.7 -26.9
GRID 160212 109.956 72.7 -26.9
GRID 160213 105.156 72.7 -26.9
GRID 160214 100.356 72.7 -26.9
GRID 160215 95.5558 72.7 -26.9
$
RBE2 712 160110 123456 1601101
RBE2 713 160121 123456 1601211
$
$ ------- RBE Connections for the rotor -----
RBE3 702 160205 123456 1.0 123456 110331 110332
110333 110334 110335 110388 110389 110390 110391 110444
110445 110446 110447 110487 110488 110489
$
RBE3 703 160215 123456 1.0 123456 110266 110267
110268 110269 110270 110336 110337 110338 110339 110392
110393 110394 110395 110448 110449 110450
$
enddata

External SE SOL 107 Assembly Job Using External SEs 200 and 400
ASSIGN INPUTT2='extse200_op2' UNIT=35 $
ASSIGN INPUTT2='extse400_op2' UNIT=36 $
ID ASSEMBLY JOB $ FOR FREEDOM PLANE WITH 2 EXTSE
DIAG 8,15
SOL 107
CEND
TITLE = SOL 107 ASSEMBLY JOB WITH TWO EXTERNAL SEs
CMETHOD = 1
SPC = 50
RGYRO =1
VECTOR(PLOT,REAL)=ALL
CAMPBELL = 15
PARAM,ROTSEKE,0
BEGIN BULK
SPC1 50 123456 10022 40004 40010
PARAM PRTMAXIM YES
EIGC 1 CLAN MAX
0. 0. 30
include 'freedom_resid.bdf'
CAMPBLL,15,SPEED,22,RPM
DDVAL,22,5000.,THRU,0.0,BY,-2500.
$-- Rotor Definitions ----

Main Index
 698 Superelements User’s Guide
External Superelements

Specify Rotordynamics Analysis Parameters$

RGYRO 1 ASYNC 4 RPM 10000. 400

$
$ Specify Spin Rates for Rotors in External SE 200
$
RSPINR 6 260111 260112 RPM 1.0 200
RSPINR 5 260106 260107 RPM 1.0 200
$
$ Specify Spin Rates for Rotors in External SE 400
$
RSPINR 4 160111 160112 RPM 1.0 400
RSPINR 3 160106 160107 RPM 1.0 400
$
$ External SE 200
$
include 'extse200.asm
$
$ External SE 400
$
include 'extse400.asm'
$
include 'extse200.pch'
include 'extse400.pch'

ENDDATA

External SE SOL 107 Assembly Job Using Primary External SE 400 and Image External SE 200
ASSIGN INPUTT2='extse400_op2' UNIT=36 $
ID ASSEMBLY JOB $ FOR FREEDOM PLANE WITH WITH MIRROR
$
$ JOB SETUP BY DEVESH KUMAR - JUNE 5, 2014
$
DIAG 8,15
SOL 107
CEND
TITLE = SOL 107 EXTERNAL SE ASSEMBLY JOB WITH MIRROR
CMETHOD = 1
SPC = 50
RGYRO =1
VECTOR(PLOT,REAL)=ALL
CAMPBELL = 15
PARAM,ROTSEKE,0
$
BEGIN BULK
$
$ Primary External SE 400
$
include 'extse400.asm'
$
$ Image External SE 200
$
sebulk,200,repeat,400
sempln,200,plane,800001,800002,800003
POINT 800001 0.0 0.0 0.0
POINT 800002 1.0 0.0 0.0
POINT 800003 0.0 0.0 1.0

Main Index
 CHAPTER 13 699
Practical Image Superelements

$
CAMPBLL,15,SPEED,22,RPM
DDVAL,22,5000.,THRU,0.0,BY,-2500.
$ ----------------
SPC1 50 123456 10022 40004 40010
PARAM PRTMAXIM YES
EIGC 1 CLAN MAX
0. 0. 30
include 'freedom_resid.bdf'
$
$-- Rotor Definitions ----
$
RGYRO 1 ASYNC 4 RPM 10000. 400
$
$ Rotors in Image EXTSE 200
$
RSPINR 4 160111 160112 RPM 1.0 200
RSPINR 3 160106 160107 RPM 1.0 200
$
$ Rotors in Primary EXTSE 400
$
RSPINR 4 160111 160112 RPM 1.0 400
RSPINR 3 160106 160107 RPM 1.0 400
$
include 'extse400.pch.pch'
$
ENDDATA

Freq # Left Engine Right Engine

(Hz) (Hz)

1 0.195 0.195

2 0.348 0.348

3 0.681 0.681

4 1.190 1.190

5 1.408 1.408

6 1.842 1.843

7 2.257 2.257
8 3.127 3.128

9 3.247 3.247

10 3.655 3.655

11 4.350 4.350

12 4.746 4.746

Main Index
 700 Superelements User’s Guide
External Superelements

13 5.159 5.159

14 6.066 6.066

15 6.593 6.594

The three different types of models described above are analyzed using SOL 107. The Campbell diagrams
obtained for the three cases, shown in Figure 13-27, Figure 13-28, and Figure 13-29 , are similar.

Figure 13-27 Campbell diagram for single-shot run (without tracking)

Main Index
 CHAPTER 13 701
Practical Image Superelements

Figure 13-28 Campbell diagram for the external superelement assembly run with two external
superelements (without tracking)

Main Index
 702 Superelements User’s Guide
Multiple Image Example for Electronic Components

Figure 13-29 Campbell Diagram for external superelement assembly run using mirror feature (without
tracking)

The .dat files for the above example are in the …/tpl/extsecopy directory with names of the form
freedom_10*.dat. The INCLUDE files referenced by the .dat files are in the …/tpl/include directory

Multiple Image Example for Electronic Components

As a more detailed example for image superelements, a model of an electronics board with repeated
components is worked for List, PART, and External Superelements. The example contains 16 solid-body
components attached to a board as shown in the figure below.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 13 703
Practical Image Superelements

Figure 13-30 Electronic Components on a Board Model (Full Model)

Baseline Solution (Full Model)

The analysis type for this assembly will be normal modes; a baseline example is located at
/doc/seug/chapter13/elec-board/baseline/elec-board.bdf. The solution of this model provides the following
modes and mode shapes:

Table 13-3 Frequencies for Electronic Components on a Board Model (Full

Model)
Mode Number Frequency
1 1.660131E+02
2 2.424249E+02
3 4.654807E+02
4 5.339022E+02
5 6.567084E+02
6 6.667377E+02
7 8.838094E+02
8 9.148818E+02
9 1.033836E+03
10 1.229055E+03

Main Index
 704 Superelements User’s Guide
Multiple Image Example for Electronic Components

Figure 13-31 Mode Shapes 1-4 for Electronic Components on a Board Model (Full Model)

CSUPER Image Superelement Solution

Since the electronic components are exact copies of each other, the CSUPER entry can be used to efficiently
replicate the original component. For this example, there is one component modeled in detail and 15
components that are imaged using CSUPER.

Figure 13-32 Electronic Components on a Board Model – CSUPER Images

Main Index
 CHAPTER 13 705
Practical Image Superelements

For this example, the component modes for the primary superelement are defined with SPOINT and
SEQSET1 entries. In addition to the physical dof connection, the component modes must be defined for
the secondary superelements. For a detailed discussion of Component Modes Synthesis, refer to Dynamic
Reduction – Component Modes Synthesis (Ch. 9)

Note: Neither PARAM,AUTOQSET nor SENQSET will work with CSUPER and component
modes synthesis. Therefore, the user must define component modes degree of freedom with
SPOINTS and SEQSETi.

Table 13-4 Primary and Secondary Superelements for Electric Board - CSUPER
Superelement ID Type Description Comment
10 Primary Original Component Created in proper location
20-80 Secondary Components on same Repeat of SE 10, located
side with CSUPER
110 - 180 Secondary Components on opposite Repeat of SE 10, located
side with CSUPER, encoded
[120110-120180]
with “12” for x and y
reversal

Listing 13-7, shows the CSUPER entries necessary to image and locate the primary superelement 15 times.
The components on the same side of the board as the primary are simple copies and do not require an
encoded identification number. However, the components on the opposite side of the board require an
encoded identification number of “12” to indicate an x and y-reversal of the attachment coordinates. Note
that this is not a mirror image, but a copy that has been rotated 180 degrees before being attached (see
Figure 13-32). The input file is shown below (ref: /seug/chapter13/elec-board/csuper/elec-board.bdf )

SOL 103

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = MSC Nastran job created on 22-Jun-11 at 16:14:40

ECHO = NONE

$PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES

RESVEC = NO

SUBCASE 1

$ Subcase name : Default

SUBTITLE=Default

METHOD = 1

SPC = 2

Main Index
 706 Superelements User’s Guide
Multiple Image Example for Electronic Components

VECTOR(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

BEGIN BULK

$ SPOINT Entries for component modes

$ [primary superelement requires SPOINT/SEQSET1 entries]

SPOINT,11001,THRU,11016

SEQSET1,10,0,11001,THRU,11016

$ [secondary superelements have SPOINTs to ‘catch’ the primary SPOINTs]

SPOINT,12001,THRU,12016

SPOINT,13001,THRU,13016

SPOINT,14001,THRU,14016

SPOINT,15001,THRU,15016

SPOINT,16001,THRU,16016

SPOINT,17001,THRU,17016

SPOINT,18001,THRU,18016

SPOINT,11101,THRU,11116

SPOINT,12101,THRU,12116

SPOINT,13101,THRU,13116

SPOINT,14101,THRU,14116

SPOINT,15101,THRU,15116

SPOINT,16101,THRU,16116

SPOINT,17101,THRU,17116

SPOINT,18101,THRU,18116

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

EIGRL 1 10 0

$ Chip.10

SESET 10 709 THRU 792

SESET 10 796 797 798 802 803 804

$ Loads for Load Case : Default

SPCADD 2 1

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : Screws

SPC1 1 123456 805 824 838 1383 1402 1416

$ CSUPER Entries

$ [secondary superelements define GRIDs and SPOINTs to map the primary dof]

CSUPER 20 10 878 881 1082 1085 12001 12002

12003 12004 12005 12006 12007 12008 12009 12010

12011 12012 12013 12014 12015 12016

CSUPER 30 10 882 885 1086 1089 13001 13002

13003 13004 13005 13006 13007 13008 13009 13010

Main Index
 CHAPTER 13 707
Practical Image Superelements

13011 13012 13013 13014 13015 13016

CSUPER 40 10 886 889 1090 1093 14001 14002

14003 14004 14005 14006 14007 14008 14009 14010

14011 14012 14013 14014 14015 14016

CSUPER 50 10 890 893 1094 1097 15001 15002

15003 15004 15005 15006 15007 15008 15009 15010

15011 15012 15013 15014 15015 15016

CSUPER 60 10 894 897 1098 1101 16001 16002

16003 16004 16005 16006 16007 16008 16009 16010

16011 16012 16013 16014 16015 16016

CSUPER 70 10 898 901 1102 1105 17001 17002

17003 17004 17005 17006 17007 17008 17009 17010

17011 17012 17013 17014 17015 17016

CSUPER 80 10 902 905 1106 1109 18001 18002

18003 18004 18005 18006 18007 18008 18009 18010

18011 18012 18013 18014 18015 18016

$ [secondary superelements on the opposite side require 12xxxx] to

$ specify the x and y reversal]

CSUPER 120110 10 1319 1316 1115 1112 11101 11102

11103 11104 11105 11106 11107 11108 11109 11110

11111 11112 11113 11114 11115 11116

CSUPER 120120 10 1323 1320 1119 1116 12101 12102

12103 12104 12105 12106 12107 12108 12109 12110

12111 12112 12113 12114 12115 12116

CSUPER 120130 10 1327 1324 1123 1120 13101 13102

13103 13104 13105 13106 13107 13108 13109 13110

13111 13112 13113 13114 13115 13116

CSUPER 120140 10 1331 1328 1127 1124 14101 14102

14103 14104 14105 14106 14107 14108 14109 14110

14111 14112 14113 14114 14115 14116

CSUPER 120150 10 1335 1332 1131 1128 15101 15102

15103 15104 15105 15106 15107 15108 15109 15110

15111 15112 15113 15114 15115 15116

CSUPER 120160 10 1339 1336 1135 1132 16101 16102

16103 16104 16105 16106 16107 16108 16109 16110

16111 16112 16113 16114 16115 16116

CSUPER 120170 10 1343 1340 1139 1136 17101 17102

17103 17104 17105 17106 17107 17108 17109 17110

17111 17112 17113 17114 17115 17116

CSUPER 120180 10 1347 1344 1143 1140 18101 18102

18103 18104 18105 18106 18107 18108 18109 18110

18111 18112 18113 18114 18115 18116

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

Main Index
 708 Superelements User’s Guide
Multiple Image Example for Electronic Components

ENDDATA

Listing 13-6 Electronic Components on a Board Model – CSUPER Images Input File

The results for the SEMAP and modal solution are shown below:
SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE

(SORTED BY SEID)

INDEX SUPERELEMENT PROCESS ORDER DOWNSTREAM SE SUPERELEMENT TYPE

0 0 17 0 RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

1 10 1 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

2 20 2 0 IDENTICAL SE NO RESEQ( PRIMARY SE = 10

3 30 3 0 IDENTICAL SE NO RESEQ( PRIMARY SE = 10

4 40 4 0 IDENTICAL SE NO RESEQ( PRIMARY SE = 10

5 50 5 0 IDENTICAL SE NO RESEQ( PRIMARY SE = 10

6 60 6 0 IDENTICAL SE NO RESEQ( PRIMARY SE = 10

7 70 7 0 IDENTICAL SE NO RESEQ( PRIMARY SE = 10

8 80 8 0 IDENTICAL SE NO RESEQ( PRIMARY SE = 10

9 110 9 0 IDENTICAL SE WITH RESEQ( PRIMARY SE = 10

10 120 10 0 IDENTICAL SE WITH RESEQ( PRIMARY SE = 10

11 130 11 0 IDENTICAL SE WITH RESEQ( PRIMARY SE = 10

12 140 12 0 IDENTICAL SE WITH RESEQ( PRIMARY SE = 10

13 150 13 0 IDENTICAL SE WITH RESEQ( PRIMARY SE = 10

14 160 14 0 IDENTICAL SE WITH RESEQ( PRIMARY SE = 10

15 170 15 0 IDENTICAL SE WITH RESEQ( PRIMARY SE = 10

16 180 16 0 IDENTICAL SE WITH RESEQ( PRIMARY SE = 10

SUPERELEMENT 0

SUBCASE 1

R E A L E I G E N V A L U E S

MODE EXTRACTION EIGENVALUE RADIANS CYCLES GENERALIZED GENERALIZED

NO. ORDER MASS STIFFNESS

1 1 1.088039E+06 1.043091E+03 1.660131E+02 1.000000E+00 1.088039E+06

2 2 2.320139E+06 1.523200E+03 2.424248E+02 1.000000E+00 2.320139E+06

3 3 8.553875E+06 2.924701E+03 4.654806E+02 1.000000E+00 8.553875E+06

4 4 1.125337E+07 3.354604E+03 5.339019E+02 1.000000E+00 1.125337E+07

5 5 1.702570E+07 4.126221E+03 6.567085E+02 1.000000E+00 1.702570E+07

6 6 1.754970E+07 4.189237E+03 6.667377E+02 1.000000E+00 1.754970E+07

7 7 3.083732E+07 5.553136E+03 8.838091E+02 1.000000E+00 3.083732E+07

8 8 3.304379E+07 5.748373E+03 9.148819E+02 1.000000E+00 3.304379E+07

9 9 4.219520E+07 6.495783E+03 1.033836E+03 1.000000E+00 4.219520E+07

10 10 5.963516E+07 7.722380E+03 1.229055E+03 1.000000E+00 5.963516E+07

Main Index
 CHAPTER 13 709
Practical Image Superelements

Listing 13-7 Electronic Components on a Board Model – CSUPER Images – SEMAP and Frequencies

The OUTPUT(POST) commands can be used to visualize the full model and results. OUTPUT(POST)
is described in CHAPTER 13.

Figure 13-33 OUTPUT(POST) plot of Mode 1 for CSUPER Image Superelement Solution of Electronics Board

PART Superelement Image Solution

For PART superelements the images are created by using the SEBULK entry; the imaged superelements are
either REPEAT or MIRROR. SELOC is required to reposition the imaged superelements and SEMPLN is
required for the mirrored superelement.

Main Index
 710 Superelements User’s Guide
Multiple Image Example for Electronic Components

Figure 13-34 Electronic Components on a Board Model – PART Images

For this example, the component modes for the primary superelement are defined with SPOINT and
SEQSET1 entries. In addition to the physical dof connection, the component modes must be defined for
the secondary superelements. For a detailed discussion of Component Modes Synthesis, refer to Dynamic
Reduction – Component Modes Synthesis (Ch. 9). In this example, PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES can be used.

Table 13-5 Primary and Secondary Superelements for Electric Board - PARTs
Superelement ID Type Description Comment
10 Primary Original Component Created in proper location
20-80 Secondary Components on same Repeat of SE 10 with
side SEBULK, relocated with
SELOC
110-180 Secondary Components on oposite Repeat of SE 10 with
side SEBULK, relocated with
SELOC

Listing 13-8 shows the SEBULK and SELOC entries necessary to image and locate the primary superelement
15 times. Note that this is not a mirror image, but a copy that has been rotated 180 degrees before being
attached (see Figure 13-32). The input file is shown below (ref: /seug/chapter13/elec-board/part/elec-
board.bdf )

SOL 103

CEND

Main Index
 CHAPTER 13 711
Practical Image Superelements

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = MSC Nastran job created on 22-Jun-11 at 16:14:40

ECHO = NONE

PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES

RESVEC = NO

SUBCASE 1

$ Subcase name : Default

SUBTITLE=Default

METHOD = 1

SPC = 2

VECTOR(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

BEGIN BULK

$ [component is copied to same side of board]

SEBULK,20,REPEAT,10,AUTO

SEBULK,30,REPEAT,10,AUTO

SEBULK,40,REPEAT,10,AUTO

SEBULK,50,REPEAT,10,AUTO

SEBULK,60,REPEAT,10,AUTO

SEBULK,70,REPEAT,10,AUTO

SEBULK,80,REPEAT,10,AUTO

SELOC 20 874 877 1078 878 881 1082

SELOC 30 874 877 1078 882 885 1086

SELOC 40 874 877 1078 886 889 1090

SELOC 50 874 877 1078 890 893 1094

SELOC 60 874 877 1078 894 897 1098

SELOC 70 874 877 1078 898 901 1102

SELOC 80 874 877 1078 902 905 1106

$ [component is copied to opposite side of board]

SEBULK,110,REPEAT,10,AUTO

SEBULK,120,REPEAT,10,AUTO

SEBULK,130,REPEAT,10,AUTO

SEBULK,140,REPEAT,10,AUTO

SEBULK,150,REPEAT,10,AUTO

SEBULK,160,REPEAT,10,AUTO

SEBULK,170,REPEAT,10,AUTO

SEBULK,180,REPEAT,10,AUTO

SELOC 110 874 877 1078 1319 1316 1115

SELOC 120 874 877 1078 1323 1320 1119

SELOC 130 874 877 1078 1327 1324 1123

SELOC 140 874 877 1078 1331 1328 1127

SELOC 150 874 877 1078 1335 1332 1131

SELOC 160 874 877 1078 1339 1336 1135

Main Index
 712 Superelements User’s Guide
Multiple Image Example for Electronic Components

SELOC 170 874 877 1078 1343 1340 1139

SELOC 180 874 877 1078 1347 1344 1143

include 'residualboard.bdf'

Begin Super=10

include'chiponly.bdf'

Listing 13-8 Electronic Components on a Board Model – PART Images Input File

The results for the SEMAP and modal solution are shown below:
SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE (SORTED BY SEID)

PRIMARY PROCESS DOWNSTREAM

SUPERELEMENT SUPERELEMENT ORDER SUPERELEMENT TYPE LABEL

------------ ------------ ------- ------------ ----------------------------- -------------------------------------

0 0 17 0 RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

10 0 1 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

20 10 2 0 REPEATED (SEBULK)

30 10 3 0 REPEATED (SEBULK)

40 10 4 0 REPEATED (SEBULK)

50 10 5 0 REPEATED (SEBULK)

60 10 6 0 REPEATED (SEBULK)

70 10 7 0 REPEATED (SEBULK)

80 10 8 0 REPEATED (SEBULK)

110 10 9 0 REPEATED (SEBULK)

120 10 10 0 REPEATED (SEBULK)

130 10 11 0 REPEATED (SEBULK)

140 10 12 0 REPEATED (SEBULK)

150 10 13 0 REPEATED (SEBULK)

160 10 14 0 REPEATED (SEBULK)

170 10 15 0 REPEATED (SEBULK)

180 10 16 0 REPEATED (SEBULK)

SUPERELEMENT 0

SUBCASE 1

R E A L E I G E N V A L U E S

MODE EXTRACTION EIGENVALUE RADIANS CYCLES GENERALIZED GENERALIZED

NO. ORDER MASS STIFFNESS

1 1 1.088176E+06 1.043157E+03 1.660235E+02 1.000000E+00 1.088176E+06

2 2 2.320748E+06 1.523400E+03 2.424566E+02 1.000000E+00 2.320748E+06

3 3 8.562537E+06 2.926181E+03 4.657162E+02 1.000000E+00 8.562537E+06

4 4 1.126605E+07 3.356494E+03 5.342026E+02 1.000000E+00 1.126605E+07

5 5 1.705888E+07 4.130240E+03 6.573481E+02 1.000000E+00 1.705888E+07

6 6 1.757955E+07 4.192797E+03 6.673043E+02 1.000000E+00 1.757955E+07

Main Index
 CHAPTER 13 713
Practical Image Superelements

7 7 3.094973E+07 5.563248E+03 8.854183E+02 1.000000E+00 3.094973E+07

8 8 3.315048E+07 5.757646E+03 9.163577E+02 1.000000E+00 3.315048E+07

9 9 4.239294E+07 6.510986E+03 1.036256E+03 1.000000E+00 4.239294E+07

10 10 6.007886E+07 7.751056E+03 1.233619E+03 1.000000E+00 6.007886E+07

Listing 13-9 Electronic Components on a Board Model – PART Images .f06 File

Figure 13-35 OUTPUT(POST) plot of Mode 1 for PART Image Superelement Solution of Electronics Board

External Superelement Image Solution

For external superelements the images are created by using the SEBULK entry; the imaged superelements are
either REPEAT or MIRROR. The images can be positioned using SELOC or SECONCT.
For external superelements, the first step is to reduce the component to the boundary dof. A detailed process
for generating a static external superelement with Patran is presented in Single-Level Analysis Using External
Superelements (Ch. 3). Below are the forms relevant to a modal reduction:

Main Index
 714 Superelements User’s Guide
Multiple Image Example for Electronic Components

Figure 13-36 External Superelement of Component

Main Index
 CHAPTER 13 715
Practical Image Superelements

Figure 13-37 Creating a DOF list for the External Superelement Reduction

Next, the External Superelement is created by defining the analysis forms necessary to generate the
EXTSEOUT case control entry:

Main Index
 716 Superelements User’s Guide
Multiple Image Example for Electronic Components

Figure 13-38 Defining Physical Boundary dof for External Superelement

A few modifications to the input file are suggested to make the assembly run easier, these are highlighted in
the listing below (ref /dog/seug/chapter13/elec-board/external/chip-create-external.bdf):
SOL 103

CEND

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = NO

$ [add MANQ]

$ oringialEXTSEOUT(ASMBULK,EXTBULK,EXTID=10,DMIGPCH)

EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK=MANQ,EXTBULK,EXTID=10,DMIGPCH)

SUBCASE 1

TITLE=MSC Nastran JOB CREATED ON 22-JUN-11 AT 16:14:40

SUBTITLE=DEFAULT

METHOD = 1

VECTOR(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

BEGIN BULK

PARAM POST 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

Main Index
 CHAPTER 13 717
Practical Image Superelements

EIGRL 1 10 0 MASS

$ Elements and Element Properties for region : chipconnector

PBUSH 1 K 1.+6 1.+6 1.+6 1.+6 1.+6 1.+6

RCV 1. 1. 1. 1.

GRID 1081 1. 2. 0.

$ Loads for Load Case : DEFAULT.SC1

$ [replace SPOINT ids with more convenient numbers]

$originalSPOINT 1082 THRU 1091

$originalQSET1 1082 THRU 1091

SPOINT 11001 THRU 11016

QSET1 11001 THRU 11016

ASET1 123456 874 877 1078 1081

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

ENDDATA

Listing 13-10 External Superelement Creation Input File

Figure 13-39 Electronic Components on a Board Model – External Superelement and its Images

For this example, the component modes for the external superelement are defined with SPOINT and
QSET1 entries. In addition to the physical dof connection, the component modes must be defined for the
secondary superelements. For a detailed discussion of Component Modes Synthesis, refer to Description of
Dynamic Reduction Process (Ch. 9). In this example, the SECONCT entries attach the imaged SPOINTs.

Main Index
 718 Superelements User’s Guide
Multiple Image Example for Electronic Components

Table 13-6 Primary and Secondary Superelements for Electric Board – External Superelements
Superelement ID Type Description Comment
10 External Original Component Created in proper location
20-80 Secondary Components on same Repeat of SE 10 with
side SEBULK, positioned with
SEBULK
110-180 Secondary Components on oposite Repeat of SE 10 with
side SEBULK, positioned with
SEBULK

Listing 13-11 contains the entries necessary attach the external superelement and image and locate it 15 times.
Note that this is not a mirror image, but a copy that has been rotated 180 degrees before being attached (see
Figure 13-39). The input file is shown below (ref: /seug/chapter13/elec-board/external/assemble-board-
chips.bdf )

SOL 103

CEND

RESVEC = NO

K2GG=KAAX

M2GG=MAAX

SUBCASE 1

$ Subcase name : Default

SUBTITLE=Default

METHOD = 1

SPC = 2

VECTOR(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

BEGIN BULK

SELOC 20 874 877 1078 878 881 1082

SELOC 30 874 877 1078 882 885 1086

SELOC 40 874 877 1078 886 889 1090

SELOC 50 874 877 1078 890 893 1094

SELOC 60 874 877 1078 894 897 1098

SELOC 70 874 877 1078 898 901 1102

SELOC 80 874 877 1078 902 905 1106

SELOC 110 874 877 1078 1319 1316 1115

SELOC 120 874 877 1078 1323 1320 1119

SELOC 130 874 877 1078 1327 1324 1123

Main Index
 CHAPTER 13 719
Practical Image Superelements

SELOC 140 874 877 1078 1331 1328 1127

SELOC 150 874 877 1078 1335 1332 1131

SELOC 160 874 877 1078 1339 1336 1135

SELOC 170 874 877 1078 1343 1340 1139

SELOC 180 874 877 1078 1347 1344 1143

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

include 'chip-create-external.asm'

SEBULK 20 REPEAT 10 MANUAL

SEBULK 30 REPEAT 10 MANUAL

SEBULK 40 REPEAT 10 MANUAL

SEBULK 50 REPEAT 10 MANUAL

SEBULK 60 REPEAT 10 MANUAL

SEBULK 70 REPEAT 10 MANUAL

SEBULK 80 REPEAT 10 MANUAL

SEBULK 110 REPEAT 10 MANUAL

SEBULK 120 REPEAT 10 MANUAL

SEBULK 130 REPEAT 10 MANUAL

SEBULK 140 REPEAT 10 MANUAL

SEBULK 150 REPEAT 10 MANUAL

SEBULK 160 REPEAT 10 MANUAL

SEBULK 170 REPEAT 10 MANUAL

SEBULK 180 REPEAT 10 MANUAL

SECONCT 20 0

874 878 877 881 1078 1082 1081 1085

11001 THRU 11016 12001 THRU 12016

SPOINT 12001 THRU 12016

SECONCT 30 0

874 882 877 885 1078 1086 1081 1089

11001 THRU 11016 13001 THRU 13016

SPOINT 13001 THRU 13016

SECONCT 40 0

874 886 877 889 1078 1090 1081 1093

11001 THRU 11016 14001 THRU 14016

SPOINT 14001 THRU 14016

SECONCT 180 0

874 1347 877 1344 1078 1143 1081 1140

11001 THRU 11016 18101 THRU 18116

SPOINT 18101 THRU 18116

include 'chip-create-external.pch'

Main Index
 720 Superelements User’s Guide
Multiple Image Example for Electronic Components

Listing 13-11 Electric Board Assembly Model – External Superelements

The results for the SEMAP and modal solution are shown below:
SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE (SORTED BY SEID)

PRIMARY PROCESS DOWNSTREAM

SUPERELEMENT SUPERELEMENT ORDER SUPERELEMENT TYPE LABEL

------------ ------------ ------- ------------ ----------------------------- ----------------------------

0 0 17 0 RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

10 0 1 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

20 10 2 0 REPEATED (SEBULK)

30 10 3 0 REPEATED (SEBULK)

40 10 4 0 REPEATED (SEBULK)

50 10 5 0 REPEATED (SEBULK)

60 10 6 0 REPEATED (SEBULK)

70 10 7 0 REPEATED (SEBULK)

80 10 8 0 REPEATED (SEBULK)

110 10 9 0 REPEATED (SEBULK)

120 10 10 0 REPEATED (SEBULK)

130 10 11 0 REPEATED (SEBULK)

140 10 12 0 REPEATED (SEBULK)

150 10 13 0 REPEATED (SEBULK)

160 10 14 0 REPEATED (SEBULK)

170 10 15 0 REPEATED (SEBULK)

180 10 16 0 REPEATED (SEBULK)

SUPERELEMENT 0

SUBCASE 1

R E A L E I G E N V A L U E S

MODE EXTRACTION EIGENVALUE RADIANS CYCLES GENERALIZED GENERALIZED

NO. ORDER MASS STIFFNESS

1 1 1.088039E+06 1.043091E+03 1.660131E+02 1.000000E+00 1.088039E+06

2 2 2.320139E+06 1.523200E+03 2.424248E+02 1.000000E+00 2.320139E+06

3 3 8.553875E+06 2.924701E+03 4.654806E+02 1.000000E+00 8.553875E+06

4 4 1.125337E+07 3.354604E+03 5.339019E+02 1.000000E+00 1.125337E+07

5 5 1.702570E+07 4.126221E+03 6.567085E+02 1.000000E+00 1.702570E+07

6 6 1.754970E+07 4.189237E+03 6.667377E+02 1.000000E+00 1.754970E+07

7 7 3.083732E+07 5.553136E+03 8.838091E+02 1.000000E+00 3.083732E+07

8 8 3.304379E+07 5.748373E+03 9.148819E+02 1.000000E+00 3.304379E+07

9 9 4.219520E+07 6.495783E+03 1.033836E+03 1.000000E+00 4.219520E+07

10 10 5.963516E+07 7.722380E+03 1.229055E+03 1.000000E+00 5.963516E+07

Listing 13-12 Listing

Main Index
 CHAPTER 13 721
Practical Image Superelements

Comparison of Results
The frequencies for the full model, List superelement with CSUPER images, PART Superelement with
SEBULK images, and External Superelement with SEBULK images indicate that the answer are very close
for each method:

Table 13-7 Frequency Comparison for Electronics Board Example

Mode Base Model CSUPER PART External
1 1.660131E+02 1.660131E+02 1.660131E+02 1.660131E+02
2 2.424249E+02 2.424248E+02 2.424248E+02 2.424248E+02
3 4.654807E+02 4.654806E+02 4.654806E+02 4.654806E+02
4 5.339022E+02 5.339019E+02 5.339019E+02 5.339019E+02
5 6.567084E+02 6.567085E+02 6.567085E+02 6.567085E+02
6 6.667377E+02 6.667377E+02 6.667377E+02 6.667377E+02
7 8.838094E+02 8.838091E+02 8.838093E+02 8.838091E+02
8 9.148818E+02 9.148819E+02 9.148820E+02 9.148819E+02
9 1.033836E+03 1.033836E+03 1.033836E+03 1.033836E+03
10 1.229055E+03 1.229055E+03 1.229057E+03 1.229055E+03

Note that the frequencies are nearly identical for each method. So the question becomes: which method is
most efficient from a computational standpoint? The answer is based on the processing methods used for
each method as summarized below:

Table 13-8 Comparison of Advantages and Disadvantage of Image Superelement Methods

Method Advantages Disadvantages
Full Model Single Model Cannot take advantage of Images
CSUPER Image Makes Images of the reduced CSUPER not directly supported
Superelement, very efficient by Patran
PART Image Easier to set up than CSUPER Makes an image of the unreduced
superelement
External Image Makes image of the reduce Cannot plot assembly model or
superelement, very efficient. results on assembly. Requires at
Easier to re-use components least 2 runs.

For computation, the CSUPER is probably the best for image superelements, although external
superelements is computationally the same; although for multiple runs that do not change the external

Main Index
 722 Superelements User’s Guide
Multiple Image Example for Electronic Components

superelements, the external superelement will realize significant computational advantage. The external
superelement method provides the maximum flexibility for re-use of an existing superelement.

1.

Main Index
 Chapter 14: Preparing Adams Flexible Bodies
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User’s Guide

14 Preparing Adams Flexible

Bodies

Introduction
 Creating a Flexible Body with ADAMSMNF

Additional Reference Material

Main Index
 724 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Introduction

Introduction
Adams is a multibody dynamics code for analyzing the loads and forces within a system with moving parts.
In its simplest implementation, Adams can be used to model the mechanics of systems using rigid bodies.
Typical models range from analyzing simple linkages to complex assemblies such as automobiles and
helicopters.
To add fidelity to the system, the parts can be represented with flexible bodies in order to capture the flexible
dynamic behavior of the multibody simulation to provide more accurate deformations and loads. Although
not technically a superelement in the traditional MSC Nastran definition, MSC Nastran can be used to create
the flexible bodies for use by Adams. The Modal Neutral File (MNF) is a file that defines a flexible body that
is used in ADAMS FLEX analysis. The MSC Nastran ADAMSMNF* (Case) case control command is used to
generate the MNF file. The interface is similar to generating an external superelement.

Creating a Flexible Body with ADAMSMNF

ADAMS flexible bodies contain physical boundary points and flexible modes, similar to a superelement for
dynamic analysis. The for the reduction of a single body, physical points for the flexible body are defined
with ASET entries and the modal dof are stored in SPOINT/QSETi entries; these entries are discussed in
detail in CHAPTER 9. For the definition of several flexible body in the same MSC Nastran run, superelements
are used to define the boundaries and component modes.
The ADAMSMNF* (Case) case control entry tells MSC Nastran to generate the MNF file; otherwise standard
processing of the ASET/SPOINT/QSETi entries is performed. Note that the definition for the physical
points could also be executed using the SESET entry to define the interior dof (leaving the remaining grids
as boundary grids), but this section will only concentrate on the ASET technique to define the boundary for
a single flexible body.
The ADAMSMNF entry has a plethora of options:

ADAMSMNF Control for Nastran/ADAMS Interface

Control for the Nastran/ADAMS modal neutral file (mnf ) interface

Format:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 14 725
Preparing Adams Flexible Bodies

 NO   YES 
ADAMSMNF FLEXBODY =    FLEXONLY =   
 YES   NO 

 NO   NO 
ADMCHECK =    ADMOUT =   
 YES   YES 

 YES   YES 
OUTGSTRS =    OUTGSTRN =   
 NO   NO 

 NO   NO 
OUTSTRS =    OUTSTRN =  
 YES   YES 
(14-1)
 – 1.0   1.0e8 
V1ORTHO =    V2ORTHO =   
 value1   value2 
PARTIAL
 
 CONSTANT 
 
MINVAR =  FULL 
 
 NONE 
 RIGID 

 NONE   MNF 
     YES 
PSETID =  setid plotel  EXPORT =  DB  MONITOR =  
     NO 
 ALL   BOTH 

Examples:
ADAMSMNF FLEXBODY=YES

Describer Meaining
FLEXBODY Requests that the Nastran/ADAMS interface be executed
FLEXONLY Requests standard DMAP solution and data recovery following Nastran/ADAMS interface
execution
ADMCHECK Requests Nastran/ADAMS diagnostic output
ADMOUT Requests that the Nastran/ADAMS interface outputs Nastran .op2 files.
OUTGSTRS Controls grid point stress output to the .op2, .mnf, or both

Main Index
 726 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Creating a Flexible Body with ADAMSMNF

Describer Meaining
OUTGSTRN Controls grid point strain output to the .op2, .mnf, or both
OUTSTRS Controls element stress output to the .op2 file
OUTSTRN Controls element strain output to the .op2 file
V1ORTHO Lower frequency bound of the Craig-Bampton modes (cycles/unit time)
V2ORTHO Upper frequency bound of the Craig-Bampton modes (cycles/unit time)
MINVAR Requests type of mass invariants to be computed
EXPORT Controls output to .mnf file, Nastran database or both
PSETID Selects a set of elements (including PLOTEL) whose grids are retained in the .mnf, and
whose connectivity defines face geometry for ADAMS display.

In addition to the ADAMSMNF case control entry, the user must specify the units for the model with the
DTI, UNITS bulk data entry:

DTI, UNITS Defines units for ADAMSMNF file.

Defines the mass, force, length, and time units for modal neutral files.
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DTI “UNITS” 1 MASS FORCE LENGT TIME
H

Example:
DTI UNITS 1 SLINCH LBF INCH S

Field Contents
MASS Defines mass units for the .mnf file.
FORCE Defines force units for the .mnf file.
LENGTH Defines length units for the .mnf file.
TIME Defines time units for the .mnf file.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 14 727
Preparing Adams Flexible Bodies

The valid units are defined in the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide ADAMSMNF case control entry
remark 7.
This section will concentrate on only the basic options. For details on the advanced options, refer to the
remarks for the ADAMSMNF* (Case) in the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide.

Simple Linkage Example

The following model represents a simple linkage used in a machine part.

Figure 14-1 Finite Element Model of Simple Linkage (element shrink on)

The interface grids for this model are 1001 and 1002 which are connected to the elements with RBE2 mpcs.
To define these nodes as interface nodes in Patran, a DOF List must be created as shown below.

Figure 14-2 Defining Physical Interface Nodes for ADAMSMNF Preparation

Main Index
 728 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Creating a Flexible Body with ADAMSMNF

The analysis is set up as a typical normal modes analysis, but with the additional steps of selecting the ASET
and defining the ADAMSMNF parameters as shown below:

Figure 14-3 Selecting ASET for ADAMSMNF Analysis

Main Index
 CHAPTER 14 729
Preparing Adams Flexible Bodies

Figure 14-4 Defining ADAMSMNF Parameters in Patran

The resulting input file includes the ADAMSMNF, DTI UNITS, ASET, SPOINT, and QSET entries
necessary to create the .mnf file:
SOL 103

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = Simple Linkage ADAMSMNF Creation

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = YES

ADAMSMNF FLEXBODY=YES,FLEXONLY=YES

SUBCASE 1

$ Subcase name : Default

SUBTITLE=Default

METHOD = 1

VECTOR(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

Main Index
 730 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Creating a Flexible Body with ADAMSMNF

PARAM POST 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

DTI UNITS 1 SLINCH LBF IN S

EIGRL 1 10 0

$ Loads for Load Case : Default

SPOINT 1003 THRU 1018

QSET1 1003 THRU 1018

ASET1 123456 1001 1002

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

ENDDATA

Listing 14-1 Input File for ADAMSMNF .mnf File Creation (ref: /doc/seug/chapter14/Create-ADAMSMNF.bdf)

The ADAMSMNF processing occurs after the calculation of normal modes and residual vector
augmentation. The .f06 listing includes typical ADAMSMNF output as shown below.
1 SIMPLE LINKAGE ADAMSMNF CREATION JULY 29, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10 P

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM

0 SUBCASE 1

R E A L E I G E N V A L U E S

(AFTER AUGMENTATION OF RESIDUAL VECTORS)

MODE EXTRACTION EIGENVALUE RADIANS CYCLES GENERALIZED GENERALIZED

NO. ORDER MASS STIFFNESS

1 1 1.649128E+06 1.284184E+03 2.043842E+02 1.000000E+00 1.649128E+06

2 2 1.259018E+07 3.548264E+03 5.647238E+02 1.000000E+00 1.259018E+07

3 3 2.118292E+07 4.602491E+03 7.325092E+02 1.000000E+00 2.118292E+07

4 4 4.866460E+07 6.976002E+03 1.110265E+03 1.000000E+00 4.866460E+07

5 5 8.422994E+07 9.177688E+03 1.460674E+03 1.000000E+00 8.422994E+07

6 6 1.334470E+08 1.155193E+04 1.838546E+03 1.000000E+00 1.334470E+08

7 7 1.471336E+08 1.212986E+04 1.930527E+03 1.000000E+00 1.471336E+08

8 8 1.890570E+08 1.374980E+04 2.188349E+03 1.000000E+00 1.890570E+08

9 9 2.959907E+08 1.720438E+04 2.738162E+03 1.000000E+00 2.959907E+08

10 10 3.394079E+08 1.842303E+04 2.932116E+03 1.000000E+00 3.394079E+08

11 11 6.073292E+08 2.464405E+04 3.922222E+03 1.000000E+00 6.073292E+08

12 12 6.390459E+08 2.527936E+04 4.023334E+03 1.000000E+00 6.390459E+08

13 13 9.539713E+08 3.088643E+04 4.915727E+03 1.000000E+00 9.539713E+08

14 14 1.033393E+09 3.214644E+04 5.116264E+03 1.000000E+00 1.033393E+09

15 15 3.481046E+09 5.900039E+04 9.390203E+03 1.000000E+00 3.481046E+09

16 16 3.860881E+09 6.213598E+04 9.889249E+03 1.000000E+00 3.860881E+09

^^^

^^^ NASTRAN/ADAMS INTERFACE DMAP INFORMATION MESSAGE:

^^^

^^^ READ MODULE IS BEING USED FOR A-SET ORTHONORMALIZATION

^^^

Main Index
 CHAPTER 14 731
Preparing Adams Flexible Bodies

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 5010 (LNCILD)

STURM SEQUENCE DATA FOR EIGENVALUE EXTRACTION.

TRIAL EIGENVALUE = -3.947842D+01, CYCLES = 1.000000D+00 NUMBER OF EIGENVALUES BELOW THIS VALUE = 0

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 5010 (LNCILD)

STURM SEQUENCE DATA FOR EIGENVALUE EXTRACTION.

TRIAL EIGENVALUE = 3.947842D+17, CYCLES = 9.999999D+07 NUMBER OF EIGENVALUES BELOW THIS VALUE = 28

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 5010 (LNCILD)

STURM SEQUENCE DATA FOR EIGENVALUE EXTRACTION.

TRIAL EIGENVALUE = 8.681144D+03, CYCLES = 1.482889D+01 NUMBER OF EIGENVALUES BELOW THIS VALUE = 6

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 5010 (LNCILD)

STURM SEQUENCE DATA FOR EIGENVALUE EXTRACTION.

TRIAL EIGENVALUE = 4.487633D+10, CYCLES = 3.371544D+04 NUMBER OF EIGENVALUES BELOW THIS VALUE = 27

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4158 (DFMSA)

---- STATISTICS FOR SPARSE DECOMPOSITION OF DATA BLOCK SCRATCH FOLLOW

NUMBER OF NEGATIVE TERMS ON FACTOR DIAGONAL = 28

MAXIMUM RATIO OF MATRIX DIAGONAL TO FACTOR DIAGONAL = 1.4E+11 AT ROW NUMBER 13

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 5010 (LNCILD)

STURM SEQUENCE DATA FOR EIGENVALUE EXTRACTION.

TRIAL EIGENVALUE = 2.780630D+11, CYCLES = 8.392508D+04 NUMBER OF EIGENVALUES BELOW THIS VALUE = 28

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 5010 (LNCILD)

STURM SEQUENCE DATA FOR EIGENVALUE EXTRACTION.

TRIAL EIGENVALUE = 3.013817D+11, CYCLES = 8.737326D+04 NUMBER OF EIGENVALUES BELOW THIS VALUE = 28

TABLE OF SHIFTS: (LNNRIGL)

SHIFT # SHIFT VALUE FREQUENCY, CYCLES # EIGENVALUES BELOW # NEW EIGENVALUES FOUND

1. -3.9478416E+01 -9.9999994E-01 0 0

2. 3.9478415E+17 1.0000000E+08 28 0

3. 8.6811436E+03 1.4828888E+01 6 17

4. 4.4876333E+10 3.3715438E+04 27 10

5. 2.7806302E+11 8.3925078E+04 FACTOR ERROR 0

6. 3.0138168E+11 8.7373258E+04 28 1

1 SIMPLE LINKAGE ADAMSMNF CREATION JULY 29, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10 P

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM

0 SUBCASE 1

E I G E N V A L U E A N A L Y S I S S U M M A R Y (READ MODULE)

BLOCK SIZE USED ...................... 7

Main Index
 732 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Creating a Flexible Body with ADAMSMNF

NUMBER OF DECOMPOSITIONS ............. 6

NUMBER OF ROOTS FOUND ................ 28

NUMBER OF SOLVES REQUIRED ............ 15

^^^

^^^ NASTRAN/ADAMS INTERFACE DMAP INFORMATION MESSAGE:

^^^

^^^ DURING A-SET ORTHONORMALIZATION,

^^^ A TOTAL OF 28 MODES WERE FOUND

^^^ OUT OF A POSSIBLE 28 .

^^^

^^^

^^^ NASTRAN/ADAMS EIGENVALUES FROM A-SET ORTHONORMALIZATION:

^^^ FOR SUPERELEMENT 0

^^^

1 SIMPLE LINKAGE ADAMSMNF CREATION JULY 29, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10 P

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM

0 SUBCASE 1

R E A L E I G E N V A L U E S

MODE EXTRACTION EIGENVALUE RADIANS CYCLES GENERALIZED GENERALIZED

NO. ORDER MASS STIFFNESS

1 1 -5.658196E-06 2.378696E-03 3.785812E-04 1.000000E+00 -5.658196E-06

2 2 -3.430378E-06 1.852128E-03 2.947753E-04 1.000000E+00 -3.430378E-06

3 3 -3.396903E-06 1.843069E-03 2.933335E-04 1.000000E+00 -3.396903E-06

4 4 -2.619190E-06 1.618391E-03 2.575750E-04 1.000000E+00 -2.619190E-06

5 5 1.746950E-06 1.321722E-03 2.103586E-04 1.000000E+00 1.746950E-06

6 6 2.873887E-06 1.695254E-03 2.698081E-04 1.000000E+00 2.873887E-06

7 7 1.519705E+06 1.232763E+03 1.962004E+02 1.000000E+00 1.519705E+06

8 8 1.114487E+07 3.338393E+03 5.313217E+02 1.000000E+00 1.114487E+07

9 9 1.933255E+07 4.396880E+03 6.997852E+02 1.000000E+00 1.933255E+07

10 10 4.156161E+07 6.446829E+03 1.026045E+03 1.000000E+00 4.156161E+07

11 11 7.645035E+07 8.743589E+03 1.391585E+03 1.000000E+00 7.645035E+07

12 12 1.107754E+08 1.052499E+04 1.675104E+03 1.000000E+00 1.107754E+08

13 13 1.340846E+08 1.157949E+04 1.842933E+03 1.000000E+00 1.340846E+08

14 14 1.718740E+08 1.311007E+04 2.086533E+03 1.000000E+00 1.718740E+08

15 15 2.421276E+08 1.556045E+04 2.476523E+03 1.000000E+00 2.421276E+08

16 16 3.010368E+08 1.735041E+04 2.761404E+03 1.000000E+00 3.010368E+08

17 17 4.809028E+08 2.192950E+04 3.490188E+03 1.000000E+00 4.809028E+08

18 18 5.041641E+08 2.245360E+04 3.573601E+03 1.000000E+00 5.041641E+08

19 19 8.011620E+08 2.830481E+04 4.504850E+03 1.000000E+00 8.011620E+08

20 20 9.049791E+08 3.008287E+04 4.787837E+03 1.000000E+00 9.049791E+08

21 21 9.457714E+08 3.075340E+04 4.894555E+03 1.000000E+00 9.457714E+08

Main Index
 CHAPTER 14 733
Preparing Adams Flexible Bodies

22 22 2.941369E+09 5.423439E+04 8.631671E+03 1.000000E+00 2.941369E+09

23 23 4.519138E+09 6.722454E+04 1.069912E+04 1.000000E+00 4.519138E+09

24 24 1.742660E+10 1.320098E+05 2.101002E+04 1.000000E+00 1.742660E+10

25 25 2.054814E+10 1.433462E+05 2.281426E+04 1.000000E+00 2.054814E+10

26 26 3.214366E+10 1.792865E+05 2.853434E+04 1.000000E+00 3.214366E+10

27 27 4.063801E+10 2.015887E+05 3.208384E+04 1.000000E+00 4.063801E+10

28 28 2.780630E+11 5.273168E+05 8.392506E+04 1.000000E+00 2.780630E+11

^^^ NASTRAN/ADAMS INTERFACE

^^^ CALLING ADAMS MNF MODULE

*** USER WARNING MESSAGE 7807 (AFERRM)

THE ADAMSMNF CASE CONTROL COMMAND HAS REQUESTED LOADING OF MODAL GRID POINT STRESS RESULTS THAT HAVE NOT BEEN

GENERATED. THE REQUEST IS IGNORED.

User Action:

Ensure that Case Control requests for grid point stress/strain are present if output is desired. The grid point

requests are placed in the OUTPUT(POST) section using SURFACE and VOLUME entries. There must also be standard

STRESS and/or STRAIN Case Control output requests present.

*** USER WARNING MESSAGE 7807 (AFERRM)

THE ADAMSMNF CASE CONTROL COMMAND HAS REQUESTED LOADING OF MODAL GRID POINT STRAIN RESULTS THAT HAVE NOT BEEN

GENERATED. THE REQUEST IS IGNORED.

User Action:

Ensure that Case Control requests for grid point stress/strain are present if output is desired. The grid point

requests are placed in the OUTPUT(POST) section using SURFACE and VOLUME entries. There must also be standard

STRESS and/or STRAIN Case Control output requests present.

MNF_Info: Title: SIMPLE LINKAGE ADAMSMNF CREATION

MNF_Info: Name : ./create-adamsmnf_0.mnf

MNF_Info: Type : MSC Nastran

MNF_Info: Comment 1:

MNF_Info: Comment 2: MNF created by the ADAMS/FLEX Toolkit Module Interface

MNF_Info: Comment 3:

MNF_Info: Temp modeshape file: c:/scratch/create-adamsmnf.T5652_1.mnf_01

MNF_Info: Exporting frequency range [-1.000000e+000,1.000000e+008]

MNF_Info: Shortened Shape mode file: c:/scratch/create-adamsmnf.T5652_1.mnf_02

MNF_Info:

MNF_Info: Creating a Modal Neutral File with the following information:

MNF_Info: Nodal Coords Yes

MNF_Info: Element Faces Yes

MNF_Info: Eigenvalues Yes

MNF_Info: Mode Shapes Yes

MNF_Info: Global Mass Properties Yes

MNF_Info: Nodal Masses Yes

MNF_Info: Nodal Inertias No

MNF_Info: Generalized Stiffness Yes

MNF_Info: Generalized Mass Yes

MNF_Info: Generalized Damping No

MNF_Info: Mode Transformation Yes

Main Index
 734 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Creating a Flexible Body with ADAMSMNF

MNF_Info: Stress Modes No

MNF_Info: Interface Nodes Yes

MNF_Info: Inertia Invariants Yes

MNF_Info: Modal Preload No

MNF_Info: Modal Loads No

MNF_Info: Strain Modes No

MNF_Info: Nodal Pre-Stress No

MNF_Info: Nodal Pre-Strain No

MNF_Info: Monitor Points No

MNF_Info: Matrix Operators No

MNF_Info: Modal Load Nodal No

MNF_Info:

MNF_Info: Node info:

MNF_Info: Count: 24

MNF_Info:

MNF_Info: Global body properties:

MNF_Info: Mass : 0.000259

MNF_Info: Center of Mass: 5.000000 0.500000 0.000000

MNF_Info: Inertia Tensor: 0.000129 0.000647 -0.000000

MNF_Info: 0.000647 0.008670 -0.000000

MNF_Info: -0.000000 -0.000000 0.008799

MNF_Info:

MNF_Info: Eigenvalue info:

MNF_Info: Modes: 28

MNF_Info:

MNF_Info: Trans Mode info:

MNF_Info: Modes: 28

MNF_Info: Nodes: 24

MNF_Info:

MNF_Info: Writing Mode Shapes

*** USER WARNING MESSAGE 7811 (MNF_Warning)

MNF MESSAGE: Found 2 massless node(s)

MNF_Info:

MNF_Info: Units:

MNF_Info: Mass: SLINCH

MNF_Info: Length: INCH

MNF_Info: Time: SECOND

MNF_Info: Force: POUND_FORCE

MNF_Info:

MNF_Info: Number of Element Faces: 14

*** SYSTEM INFORMATION MESSAGE 7801 (AFERRM)

THE ADAMS/FLEX MNF TOOLKIT SUCCESSFULLY CREATED A MODAL NEUTRAL FILE FOR SUPERELEMENT ID 0.

^^^

^^^ NASTRAN/ADAMS INTERFACE SHAPES COMPLETED

^^^ EXIT REQUESTED

Main Index
 CHAPTER 14 735
Preparing Adams Flexible Bodies

Listing 14-2 ADAMSMNF Processing Messages in the .f06 File

Additional Reference Material

The objective of this Chapter is to introduce the concepts and provide a simple example to generate a flexible
body for ADAMS FLEX use rather than try to recreate a comprehensive treatment of the subject. The reader
interested in more information and details about ADAMS FLEX and its theory, use, and applications can
refer to the following MSC Software documentation:
 MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide
• ADAMSMNF* (Case) case control entry description
 MSC Nastran Reference Guide
• Nastran/ADAMS Interface
 Welcome to Adams/Flex
• Translating FE Model Data
• FE Model Requirements
• Translating MSC.Nastran Data

1.

Main Index
 736 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Additional Reference Material

Main Index
 Chapter 15: Design Sensitivity and Optimization with Superelements
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User’s Guide

15 Design Sensitivity and

Optimization with
Superelements

Introduction

Main Index
 738 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Introduction

Introduction
The Design Sensitivity and Optimization User’s Guide provides comprehensive coverage of how superelements are
implemented in design sensitivity and optimization.
Specific sections related to superelements are:
 Superelement Optimization (Ch. 9)
 Automatic External Superelement Optimization (AESO) (Ch. 9)
 Case Control for Design Optimization (Ch. 3)
 Matrix Domain Automated Component Modal Synthesis (MDACMS) (Ch. 9)
 Design Variables in Superelement Design Modeling (Ch. 9)
 Twenty-Five Bar Truss, Superelement and Discrete Variable Optimization (Ch. 8)
Additionally, Design Sensitivity and Optimization of PART Superelements was added to MSC Nastran in
Version 2010. Details can be found in the MSC Nastran 2010 Release Guide Chapter 12, Part Superelement
Optimization Enhancements.

1.

Main Index
 Chapter 16: Superelements in Aeroelasticity
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User’s Guide

16 Superelements in
Aeroelasticity

Introduction
 Example of Swept Wing

Main Index
 740 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Introduction

Introduction
The Aeroelastic Analysis User’s Guide describes the theoretical aspects and the numerical techniques used to
perform aeroelastic analyses with MSC Nastran. The purpose of this chapter is to provide examples of how
superelements can be used in aeroelasticity and not a complete review of aeroelastic theory. Aeroelasticity in
MSC Nastran is used to model the interaction of aerodynamic, inertial, and structural forces.
Practitioners find that superelements in aeroelastic response provide a convenient method for determining
the effect of control surfaces and their sensitivity to the flutter solution. Therefore, it is common practice to
place the control surfaces into superelements so that the effect of modal stiffness and actuator stiffness can be
studied.
MSC Nastran provides an automated interpolation procedure to relate the aerodynamic to the structural
degrees of freedom so that loads can be passed from the aerodynamic dof to the structural dof and
displacements can be passed from the structural dof to the aerodynamic dof. Splining techniques for both
lines and surfaces are used to generate the transformation matrix from structural grid point deflections to
aerodynamic grid point deflections where local streamwise slopes are also computed. The transpose of this
matrix transfers the aerodynamic forces and moments at aerodynamic boxes to structural grid points.
The structural load distribution on an elastic vehicle in trimmed flight is determined by solving the equations
for static equilibrium. The solution process leads to aerodynamic stability derivatives, e.g., lift and moment
curve slopes and lift and moment coefficients due to control surface rotation, and trim variables, e.g., angle
of attack and control surface setting, as well as aerodynamic and structural loads, structural deflections, and
element stresses.
MSC Nastran supports the use of structural superelements in dynamic aeroelastic analysis: aeroelastic flutter
(SOL 145) and aeroelastic response (SOL 146). Splining to Superelements is not supported in static
aeroelasticity (SOL 144).
When superelements are present, the aeroelastic splines are handled as follows:
 List Superelements (SESET)
 All SPLINEi and corresponding SET1 entries are defined exactly the same as a non-superelement
analysis. Boundary points are assigned to the residual by default.
 PART Superelements
 SPLINEi and corresponding SET1 entries are defined in the superelement where the grids on the
SET1 reside
 Masses and loads on boundary points can be placed in the superelement, the residual, or split
between them with equal validity
 External Superelements
 Reduce the external superelement in a modal solution (i.e. SOL 103)
 Attache the SPLINEi and corresponding SET1 entries in the residual solution
All other aeroleasticity related entries (AERO, CAEROi, PAEROi, FLUTTER, and FLFACT) are defined in
the main Bulk Data Section for all superelement types. The entries associated with Component Modes
Synthesis (CMS) follow the same rules as defined in Dynamic Reduction – Component Modes Synthesis (Ch. 9).

Main Index
 CHAPTER 16 741
Superelements in Aeroelasticity

Note: It is recommended to use a consistent coordinate system when using PARTs or External
Superelements.

Example of Swept Wing

The example files used to demonstrated superelements in aeroelasticity are based on the model in Subsonic
Flutter Analysis of the 15-Degree Sweptback Wing by the KE-Method (Example HA145E) (Ch. 8) in the MSC Nastran:
Aeroelastic Analysis User’s Guide. The model is a flutter solution based on NASA TN D-1824, available from
the NASA Technical Report Server (NTRS) http://ntrs.nasa.gov/ .
A brief description of the model is taken from Section of the Aeroelastic Analysis User’s Guide:
The subsonic flutter characteristics of several flat-plate flutter models were reported by Tuovila and McCarty
(1955) and investigated further by Yates and Bennett (1963). The untapered wing with 15 deg of sweepback
was analyzed by Rodden, Harder, and Bellinger (1979) with its structure idealized as a “stick” model and with
aerodynamic forces calculated by the Doublet- Lattice method. Both the calculated flutter speed and
frequency were higher than test results in the earlier three-mode solution. The purpose of this example is to
reconsider the analysis of Rodden, Harder, and Bellinger (1979) with a structural plate model and to
demonstrate the KEmethod of flutter analysis.
The structure is modeled with a half-span model with quadrilateral elements with 7 span-wise elements and
4 chord-wise elements as shown below:

Figure 16-1 Structural Elements for 15 Degree Swept Wing Example

SOL 145 $ FLUTTER ANALYSIS

CEND

TITLE = EXAMPLE HA145E: HALF SPAN 15-DEG SWEPT UNTAPERED WING HA145SS1

SUBT = KE-METHOD FLUTTER ANALYSIS, DOUBLET-LATTICE AERO, 2 S.E.S

LABEL = 0.041 IN AL PLATE W/BEVELLED LEADING AND TRAILING EDGES

Main Index
 742 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Example of Swept Wing

ECHO = BOTH

SPC = 1 $ WING ROOT DEFLECTIONS AND PLATE IN-PLANE ROTATIONS FIXED

SDAMP = 2000

METHOD = 10 $ MODIFIED GIVENS METHOD OF REAL EIGENVALUE EXTRACTION

FMETHOD = 30 $ KE-FLUTTER METHOD

SVEC = ALL $ PRINT VIBRATION MODES. BROKEN IN ALTER

SET 100 = 1 THRU 1000 $ AVOID PRINTING THE AERO BOX CORNER POINTS

DISP = 100 $ OPPHIA DOCUMENTATION SAYS USE THIS, NOT SVEC

PARAM, USETPRT, 0 $ PRINT BOTH STRUCTURAL AND K-SET DOFS

OUTPUT(PLOT)

CSCALE 2.0

PLOTTER NASTRAN

SET 1 = QUAD4

PTITLE = STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS

FIND SCALE, ORIGIN 1, SET 1

PLOT MODAL 0 ORIGIN 1, SET 1

OUTPUT (XYOUT)

CSCALE 2.0

PLOTTER NASTRAN

CURVELINESYMBOL = 6

YTTITLE = DAMPING G

YBTITLE = FREQUENCY F Hz

XTITLE = VELOCITY V (FT/S)

XTGRID LINES = YES

XBGRID LINES = YES

YTGRID LINES = YES

YBGRID LINES = YES

UPPER TICS = -1

TRIGHT TICS = -1

BRIGHT TICS = -1

XYPLOT VG / 1(G,F) 2(G,F) 3(G,F)

BEGIN BULK

$ SID C G1 G2 ETC $

SPC1 1 12345 9

SPC1 1 12345 25

SPC1 1 6 1 THRU 40

$ N V1 V2 $

PARAM KDAMP -1

$ ID +TDP

TABDMP1 2000 +T2000

$ F1 G1 F2 G2 ETC ENDT

+T2000 0.0 0.01 1000.0 0.01 ENDT

$ ACSID VELOCITY REFC RHOREF SYMXZ SYMXY

AERO 0 2.0706 1.1092-7 1

Main Index
 CHAPTER 16 743
Superelements in Aeroelasticity

$ EID PID CP NSPAN NCHORD LSPAN LCHORD IGID

CAERO1 101 1 0 6 4 1 +CA101

$ ( FWD LEFT POINT ) ROOTCHORD ( FWD RIGHT POINT ) TIP CHORD

$ X1 Y1 Z1 X12 X4 Y4 Z4 X14

+CA101 .0 .0 .0 2.07055 1.48044 5.52510 0.0 2.07055

$ PID B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6

PAERO1 1

$ EID CAERO BOX1 BOX2 SETG DZ $

SPLINE1 100 101 101 124 100 .0

$ SID G1 G2 G3 G4 ETC

SET1 100 2 4 6 8 9 11 13 +S1

+S1 15 18 20 22 24 25 27 29 +S2

+S2 31 34 36 38 40

MKAERO1 0.45 +MK

$ K1 K2 K3 ETC

+MK .001 0.10 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.20

$ SID METHOD F1 F2 NO $

EIGRL, 10,

PARAM OPPHIPA 1

PARAM LMODES 4

$ SID METHOD DENS MACH VEL IMETH NVALUE EPS $

FLUTTER 30 KE 1 2 3 L

$ SID F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 $

FLFACT 1 0.967 DENSITY

FLFACT 2 .45 MACH NO

FLFACT, 3 .20000 .16667 .14286 $ .12500 .11111 .10000 RFREQ

$ N V1 V2

PARAM VREF 12.0

ENDDATA

Listing 16-1 Entries Necessary to Define Flutter Analysis - Baseline Example (ref:
/doc/seug/chapter16/ha145ss-baseline.dat)

The VG, VF plots for the baseline model are shown below:

Main Index
 744 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Example of Swept Wing

Figure 16-2 V-G and V-F Plots for 3 Loops – Baseline Model (ref: /doc/seug/chapter16/ha145e-baseline.dat)

For more details on XYPLOT commands, refer to CHAPTER 19 and the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide.

List Superelement
The list superelement model consists of two superelements: Superelement 10 is the inboard wing and
Superelement 20 is the outboard wing as shown below:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 16 745
Superelements in Aeroelasticity

Figure 16-3 List Superelements for 15 Degree Swept Wing Example

For List Superelements the aeroelastic entries remain the same, however, the structure is partitioned into
superelements with SESET entries and the corresponding entries necessary for Component Modes Synthesis
(refer to Dynamic Reduction – Component Modes Synthesis (Ch. 9) for more details on Component Modes
Synthesis in dynamic analysis). The required entries are shown below:
$ DATA ADDED FOR SUPERELEMENTS

$ PLACE INBOARD SECTION IN S.E. 10

SESET 10 1 THRU 5

SESET 10 10 THRU 13

SESET 10 17 THRU 21

SESET 10 25 THRU 29

SESET 10 33 THRU 37

$ OUTBOARD SECTION IN S.E. 20

SESET 20 7 8 15 16 23 24 31

SESET 20 32 39 40

$ GRID POINTS 6, 14, 22, 30, 38 ARE BOUNDARY POINTS, S.E. 0

$ GEN. COORDS FOR C.M.S.

SPOINT,1001,thru,1021 $ for se 10

SPOINT,2001,thru,2021 $ for se 20

SEQSET1,10,0,1001,thru,1021

SEQSET1,20,0,2001,thru,2021

Listing 16-2 Entries Necessary to Define Superelements with Component Modes Synthesis for List
Superelement Example (ref: /doc/seug/chapter16/ha145ss-seset.dat)

The VG, VF plots for the baseline model are shown below:

Main Index
 746 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Example of Swept Wing

Figure 16-4 V-G and V-F Plots for 3 Loops – List Superelement Model (ref: /doc/seug/chapter16/ha145ss-
seset.dat)

For more details on XYPLOT commands, refer to CHAPTER 19 and the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide.

PART Superelement
The Part superelement model consists of two superelements: Superelement 10 is the leading edge and
Superelement 20 is the trailing edge as shown below:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 16 747
Superelements in Aeroelasticity

Figure 16-5 PART Superelements for 15 Degree Swept Wing Example

For PART Superelements the aeroelastic entries remain the same, with the exception of the SPLINE and
SET1 entries, which must be placed in the appropriate superelement. The superelements are placed into
their respective PART sections with BEGIN SUPER entries. The corresponding entries necessary for
Component Modes Synthesis are defined with SENQSET entries (refer to Dynamic Reduction – Component
Modes Synthesis (Ch. 9) for more details on Component Modes Synthesis in dynamic analysis). The required
entries are shown below:
SOL 145 $ FLUTTER ANALYSIS

CEND

TITLE = EXAMPLE: HALF SPAN 15-DEG SWEPT UNTAPERED WING HA145SS2

SUBT = KE-METHOD FLUTTER ANALYSIS, DOUBLET-LATTICE AERO

LABEL = WING BROKEN INTO TWO PARTS

SPC = 1 $ WING ROOT DEFLECTIONS AND PLATE IN-PLANE ROTATIONS FIXED

ECHO = BOTH

SDAMP = 2000

METHOD = 10 $

FMETHOD = 30 $ KE-FLUTTER METHOD

SVEC = ALL $ PRINT VIBRATION MODES BROKEN. IN ALTER PACKAGE

SET 100 = 1 THRU 1000 $ AVOID PRINTING THE AERO BOX CORNER POINTS

DISP = 100 $ WITH PARAM, OPPHIA, PRINTS PHYSICAL DOF, AERO DOF MODES

PARAM, USETPRT, 0 $ PRINT ALL USER SETS FOR DIAGNOSTIC PURPOSES

BEGIN BULK $ MAIN BULK $ $ $ $ SE 0

$ MODES FOR TOTAL STRUCTURE

EIGRL, 10, , , 15

$SENQSET, SEID, N GENERALIZED COORDS FOR COMPONENT MODE SYNTHESIS

SENQSET, 10, 21

SENQSET, 20, 21

TABDMP1 2000 +T2000

$ F1 G1 F2 G2 ETC ENDT

+T2000 0.0 0.01 1000.0 0.01 ENDT

MKAERO1 0.45 +MK

Main Index
 748 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Example of Swept Wing

$ K1 K2 K3 ETC

+MK .001 0.10 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.20

$ SID METHOD DENS MACH VEL IMETH NVALUE EPS $

FLUTTER 30 KE 1 2 3 L

$ SID F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 $

FLFACT 1 0.967

FLFACT 2 .45 FLFACT 3 .20000 .16667 .14286

$ N V1 V2

PARAM VREF 12.0

$ ACSID VELOCITY REFC RHOREF SYMXZ SYMXY

AERO 0 2.0706 1.1092-7 1

$ EID PID CP NSPAN NCHORD LSPAN LCHORD IGID

$ CUT THE CAERO1 IN HALF, PUT ONE PART IN SE 10, ANOTHER IN SE 20.

$CAERO1 101 1 0 6 4 1 +CA101

$ ( FWD LEFT POINT ) ROOTCHORD ( FWD RIGHT POINT ) TIP CHORD

$ X1 Y1 Z1 X12 X4 Y4 Z4 X14

$+CA101 .0 .0 .0 2.07055 1.48044 5.52510 0.0 2.07055

$ CAERO1 FOR SE 10, ROOT CHORDS CUT IN HALF, NCHORD HALVED

CAERO1 101 1 0 6 2 1

$ ( FWD LEFT POINT ) ROOTCHORD ( FWD RIGHT POINT ) TIP CHORD

$ X1 Y1 Z1 X12 X4 Y4 Z4 X14

,.0 .0 .0 1.03527 1.48044 5.52510 0.0 1.03527

$ CAERO1 FOR SE 20 X1 AT GRID POINT 17, X4 AT POINT 24, ROOT CHORDS

$ CUT IN HALF, EID CHANGED, NCHORD HALVED, SPLINE CHANGED TO MATCH

CAERO1 201 1 0 6 2 1 +CA101

$ ( FWD LEFT POINT ) ROOTCHORD ( FWD RIGHT POINT ) TIP CHORD

$ X1 Y1 Z1 X12 X4 Y4 Z4 X14

+CA101, 1.03528 .0 .0 1.03527 2.51572 5.5251 0.0 1.03527

$ EID CAERO BOX1 BOX2 SETG DZ $

$ PID B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6

PAERO1 1

$ THE SPLINES ARE NOW IN THE SUPERELEMENTS

BEGIN SUPER=10 $

$ COMPONENT MODES FOR SE 10

EIGRL,10,,,15 $ USE THE MODERN METHOD

$ FOR SE 10, CHANGE BOX2 TO 112

$SPLINE1 100 101 101 124 100 .0

SPLINE1 100 101 101 112 100 .0

$ SID G1 G2 G3 G4 ETC

SET1 100 2 4 6 8 9 11 13 +S1

+S1, 15 18 20 22 24 $ 25 27 29 +S2

Main Index
 CHAPTER 16 749
Superelements in Aeroelasticity

BEGIN SUPER=20 $

$ COMPONENT MODES FOR SE 20

EIGRL,10,,,15

SPC1 1 12345 9

SPC1 1 12345 25

$SPC1 1 6 1 THRU 40

SPLINE1 200 201 201 212 100 .0

$ SID G1 G2 G3 G4 ETC

SET1, 100, 18 20 22 24 25 27 29 +S2

+S2 31 34 36 38 40

$ END OF SE 20 FILE

ENDDATA

Listing 16-3 Entries Necessary to Define Superelements with Component Modes Synthesis for PART
Superelement Example (ref: /doc/seug/chapter16/ha145ss-part.dat)

Figure 16-6 V-G and V-F Plots for 3 Loops – PART Superelement Model (ref: /doc/seug/chapter16/ha145ss-
part.dat)

Main Index
 750 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Example of Swept Wing

For more details on XYPLOT commands, refer to CHAPTER 19 and the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide.

External Superelement
The external superelement example is a derivative of the PART superelement example; the geometry is shown
below:

Figure 16-7 External Superelements for 15 Degree Swept Wing Example

The external superelement models generate the modal solution only, and contain the physical boundary
points for the structural grids which will be splined to in the assembly solution. The assembly model must
also contain the aeroelastic models and spline to the exterior points of the external superelements. In addition
the aeroelastic mesh point set (the K-Set) must be manually mapped into the assembly solution with
PARAM,FIRSTKI. To obtain the dof map for the K-Set, the user must insert the following parameters:
 PARAM,USETPRT,0 $ request dof map of the USET
 PARAM,OPGEOM,0 $ required if Aero dof are requested
 PARAM,USETSTR1,K $ request K-Set dof
Note that the user will not know the value of PARAM,FIRSTKI a priori so the first run will print out the
dof map from which FIRSTKI can be obtained.
The partial input for the reduction runs using the MATRIXDB method are shown below (ref:
/doc/seug/chapter16/reduce-leading.dat and reduce-trailing.dat):
assign master='reduce-leading103.master' delete

assign dball ='reduce-leading103.dball' delete

sol 103

CEND

TITLE = EXAMPLE: HALF SPAN 15-DEG SWEPT UNTAPERED WING

SUBT = KE-METHOD FLUTTER ANALYSIS, DOUBLET-LATTICE AERO

LABEL = LEADING EDGE EXTERNAL REDUCTION

EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK=MANQ,EXTBULK,EXTID=10,MATDB)

subcase 1

SPC = 1 $ WING ROOT DEFLECTIONS AND PLATE IN-PLANE ROTATIONS FIXED

METHOD = 10 $ CHANGED TO LANCZOS

Main Index
 CHAPTER 16 751
Superelements in Aeroelasticity

SET 100 = 1 THRU 1000 $ AVOID PRINTING THE AERO BOX CORNER POINTS

DISP(plot) = all

BEGIN BULK $ MAIN BULK $ $ $ $ SE 0

$ keep grids which will be splined in the assembly run

bndfix1,123456,2,4,6,8,9,11,13

bndfix1,123456,15,18,20,22,24

$ store component modes

spoint,1001,thru,1021

qset1,0,1001,thru,1021

$ DON'T ALLOW UNUSED GEN. COORDS TO BE AUTOSPCD

SPCOFF1,0,1001,thru,1021

$ MODES FOR TOTAL STRUCTURE

$EIGRL MID, F1, F2, NDES

EIGRL, 10, , , 15

Listing 16-4 Leading Edge External Superelement Reduction Input File

assign master='reduce-trailing103.master' delete

assign dball ='reduce-trailing103.dball' delete

sol 103

CEND

LABEL = TRAILING EDGE EXTERNAL REDUCTION

EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK=MANQ,EXTBULK,EXTID=20,MATDB)

subcase 1

SPC = 1 $ WING ROOT DEFLECTIONS AND PLATE IN-PLANE ROTATIONS FIXED

METHOD = 10 $ CHANGED TO LANCZOS

DISP(plot) = all

BEGIN BULK $ MAIN BULK $ $ $ $ SE 0

$ keep grids which will be splined in the assembly run

bndfix1,123456,18,20,22,24,25,27

bndfix1,123456,29,31,34,36,38,40

$ store component modes

spoint,2001,thru,2021

qset1,0,2001,thru,2021

$ DON'T ALLOW UNUSED GEN. COORDS TO BE AUTOSPCD

SPCOFF1,0,2001,thru,2021

$EIGRL MID, F1, F2, NDES

EIGRL, 10, , , 15

Main Index
 752 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Example of Swept Wing

Listing 16-5 Trailing Edge External Superelement Reduction Input File

Note that SPCOFF is used to turn off autospc processing of the SPOINTs. Although not necessary in this
example, it demonstrates a method for retaining unused SPONTs for use in the assembly run if desired.
The assembly run includes the entries necessary for attaching the external superelements as well as the
aeroelastic definition for the external superelements; that is the CAEROi entries from the external
superelement are copied to the assembly run. The internal sequence of the K-Set dof is a closed set starting
with 1. The lowest numbered CAEROi entries starts the internal sequence numbers, followed by a set of
numbers in the range NSPAN*NCORD-1 for the remaining points defined on the CAEROi entries. The
next lowered number CAEROi entry continues the internal sequence number of the K-Set. To obtain the
map the model must be run first to obtain the appropriate values for PARAM,FIRSTKI of each superelement
from the USET table.:

[parameters defined in the input file]

PARAM,USETPRT,0 $ request dof map of the USET

PARAM,OPGEOM,0 $ required if Aero dof are requested

PARAM,USETSTR1,K $ request K-Set dof

[corresponding output]

EXAMPLE: HALF SPAN 15-DEG SWEPT UNTAPERED WING HA145SS2 JULY 15, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10

KE-METHOD FLUTTER ANALYSIS, DOUBLET-LATTICE AERO SUPERELEMENT 0

K DISPLACEMENT SET

-1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1= 101-3 101-5 102-3 102-5 103-3 103-5 104-3 104-5 105-3 105-5

11= 106-3 106-5 107-3 107-5 108-3 108-5 109-3 109-5 110-3 110-5

21= 111-3 111-5 112-3 112-5 201-3 201-5 202-3 202-5 203-3 203-5

31= 204-3 204-5 205-3 205-5 206-3 206-5 207-3 207-5 208-3 208-5

Listing 16-6 USET Printout of K-Set dof Necessary to Define PARAM,FIRSTKI

The values of FIRSTKI are used to generate a partitioning vector that inserts the spline matrices of the
external superelements into the proper columns. After updating PARAM,FIRSTKI, the input file becomes
(ref: /doc/seug/chapter16/assemble.dat):
assign leadM='reduce-leading.master'

assign leadD='reduce-leading.dball'

assign trailM='reduce-trailing.master'

assign trailD='reduce-trailing.dball'

DBLOCATE DB=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=10) LOGI=leadM $

DBLOCATE DB=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=20) LOGI=trailM $

SOL 145 $ FLUTTER ANALYSIS

CEND

TITLE = EXAMPLE: HALF SPAN 15-DEG SWEPT UNTAPERED WING HA145SS2

Main Index
 CHAPTER 16 753
Superelements in Aeroelasticity

SUBT = KE-METHOD FLUTTER ANALYSIS, DOUBLET-LATTICE AERO

LABEL = ASSEMBLY MODEL

PARAM,USETPRT,0 $ request dof map of the USET

PARAM,OPGEOM,0 $ required if Aero dof are requested

PARAM,USETSTR1,K $ request K-Set dof

SPC = 1 $ WING ROOT DEFLECTIONS AND PLATE IN-PLANE ROTATIONS FIXED

SDAMP = 2000

METHOD = 10 $ CHANGED TO LANCZOS

FMETHOD = 30 $ KE-FLUTTER METHOD

SVEC = ALL $ PRINT VIBRATION MODES BROKEN. IN ALTER PACKAGE

SET 100 = 1 THRU 1000 $ AVOID PRINTING THE AERO BOX CORNER POINTS

DISP = 100 $ WITH PARAM, OPPHIA, PRINTS PHYSICAL DOF, AERO DOF MODES

OUTPUT (XYOUT)

CSCALE 2.0

PLOTTER NASTRAN

CURVELINESYMBOL = 6

YTTITLE = DAMPING G

YBTITLE = FREQUENCY F Hz

XTITLE = VELOCITY V (FT/S)

XTGRID LINES = YES

XBGRID LINES = YES

YTGRID LINES = YES

YBGRID LINES = YES

UPPER TICS = -1

TRIGHT TICS = -1

BRIGHT TICS = -1

XYPLOT VG / 1(G,F) 2(G,F) 3(G,F)

BEGIN super $ MAIN BULK $ $ $ $ SE 0

$ MODES FOR TOTAL STRUCTURE

$EIGRL MID, F1, F2, NDES

EIGRL, 10, , , 15

PARAM GRDPNT 17

PARAM KDAMP -1

TABDMP1 2000 +T2000

$ F1 G1 F2 G2 ETC ENDT

+T2000 0.0 0.01 1000.0 0.01 ENDT

MKAERO1 0.45 +MK

$ K1 K2 K3 ETC

+MK .001 0.10 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.20

PARAM LMODES 4

$ SID METHOD DENS MACH VEL IMETH NVALUE EPS $

FLUTTER 30 KE 1 2 3 L

Main Index
 754 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Example of Swept Wing

$ SID F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 $

FLFACT 1 0.967 DENSITY

FLFACT 2 .45 MACH NO

FLFACT, 3 .20000 .16667 .14286

$ N V1 V2

PARAM VREF 12.0

$ ACSID VELOCITY REFC RHOREF SYMXZ SYMXY

AERO 0 2.0706 1.1092-7 1

$ EID PID CP NSPAN NCHORD LSPAN LCHORD IGID

$ CUT THE CAERO1 IN HALF, PUT ONE PART IN SE 10, ANOTHER IN SE 20.

$CAERO1 101 1 0 6 4 1 +CA101

$ ( FWD LEFT POINT ) ROOTCHORD ( FWD RIGHT POINT ) TIP CHORD

$ X1 Y1 Z1 X12 X4 Y4 Z4 X14

$+CA101 .0 .0 .0 2.07055 1.48044 5.52510 0.0 2.07055

$ CAERO1 FOR SE 10, ROOT CHORDS CUT IN HALF, NCHORD HALVED

CAERO1 101 1 0 6 2 1

$ ( FWD LEFT POINT ) ROOTCHORD ( FWD RIGHT POINT ) TIP CHORD

$ X1 Y1 Z1 X12 X4 Y4 Z4 X14

, .0 .0 .0 1.03527 1.48044 5.52510 0.0 1.03527

$ CAERO1 FOR SE 20 X1 AT GRID POINT 17, X4 AT POINT 24, ROOT CHORDS

$ CUT IN HALF, EID CHANGED, NCHORD HALVED, SPLINE CHANGED TO MATCH

CAERO1 201 1 0 6 2 1 +CA101

$ ( FWD LEFT POINT ) ROOTCHORD ( FWD RIGHT POINT ) TIP CHORD

$ X1 Y1 Z1 X12 X4 Y4 Z4 X14

+CA101, 1.03528 .0 .0 1.03527 2.51572 5.5251 0.0 1.03527

$ EID CAERO BOX1 BOX2 SETG DZ $

$ PID B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6

PAERO1 1

$ include the upstream assembly data

include 'reduce-leading.asm'

include 'reduce-trailing.asm'

$ include the .pch files

include 'reduce-leading.pch'

param,firstki,1

include 'reduce-trailing.pch'

param,firstki,25

Listing 16-7 External Superelement Assembly Model for Aeroelasticity Example

Main Index
 CHAPTER 16 755
Superelements in Aeroelasticity

Figure 16-8 V-G and V-F Plots for 3 Loops – External Superelement Model (ref:
/doc/seug/chapter16/assemble.dat)

For more details on XYPLOT commands, refer to CHAPTER 19 and the Quick Reference Guide.

1.

Main Index
 756 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Example of Swept Wing

Main Index
 Chapter 17: Considerations in Nonlinear and Buckling Analysis
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User’s Guide

17 Considerations in Nonlinear
and Buckling Analysis

Introduction
 Superelement Limitations in Nonlinear and Buckling Analysis

Applying Loads on Upstream Superelements in Nonlinear Statics

Practical Buckling Example – Isolating and Individual Panel

Superelements in Heat Transfer

Main Index
 758 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Introduction

Introduction
Superelements can be used in nonlinear and buckling analysis, however, there are several characteristics that
must be considered to ensure a good solution. For instance, in contact analysis which is otherwise linear, a
superelement approach can provide an efficient and accurate solution. However, a very flexible structure that
requires large displacements is not a good candidate for superelements because the upstream superelement
remains small displacement and the coordinate frames are not updated for the large displacements at the
boundary. Even with its limitations, there are many applications for superelements in nonlinear and buckling
analysis. The remaining sections in the chapter are intended to highlight the limitations and practical
applications when using superelements in nonlinear and buckling analysis

Superelement Limitations in Nonlinear and Buckling

Analysis
The following list describes the important limitations of upstream superelements in nonlinear analysis; these
limitations do not apply to the residual structure.
 Superelements are small displacement
 Superelements have differential stiffness and follower force effects**
 Superelements have linear material properties
 Superelements cannot be used in contact analysis
 Superelements are linear in heat transfer analysis
** Differential stiffness is a stress-stiffening effect. For example, tightening a guitar string will increase its
frequency because of the stress-stiffening effect. Follower force stiffness is formulated from pressure loads.
Adding air to a soccer ball will increase its stiffness from both the stress-stiffening and follower force effects.
Neither of these events involves large displacements, so the nonlinearity caused by the differential stiffness
from higher stress and/or loading. The differential stiffness calculation is controlled by PARAM,LGDISP
and the follower force stiffness is controlled by PARAM,FOLLOWK. The table found in Differential Stiffness
and Follower Force Stiffness in Linear and Nonlinear Solution Sequences (Ch. C) in the MSC Nastran Reference Guide
shows the nonlinear effects included for the residual structure in traditional nonlinear static (SOL 106) and

Main Index
 CHAPTER 17 759
Considerations in Nonlinear and Buckling Analysis

normal modes (SOL 103). For completeness, the table is repeated below and expanded to show the
differences between the residual structure and upstream superelements.

Table 17-1 Effect of PARAM,LGDISP and FOLLOWK on the Element Force and Stiffness Matrices in Superelement Analysis
SOL 1## Restart
from SOL 106, SOL
Parameters Nonlinear Statics 400 Perturbation SOL 1## Cold Start
SOL 106 or SOL 400 STEP Using STATSUB
Residual Structure
LGDISP FOLLOWK Nonlinear Element Stiffness Stiffness Stiffness
Force
-1 YES l+M+Fs+C l+M+Fs+C l+M+Fs+C l+D+Fs
-1 NO l+M+C l+M+C l+M+C l+D
0 YES l+M+Fs+C l+M+Fs+C l+M+Fs+C l+D+Fs
0 NO l+M+C l+M+C l+M+C l+D
1 YES l+M+G+Fl+C l+M+G+Fl+C l+M+G+Fl+C l+D+Fs
1 NO l+M+G+Fl+C l+M+G+Fl+C l+M+G+Fl+C l+D
2 YES l+M+G+C l+M+G+C l+M+G+C l+D
2 NO l+M+G+C l+M+G+C l+M+G+C l+D
Upstream Superelements
-1 YES l+Fs l+Fs l+Fs l+D+Fs
-1 NO l l L L
0 YES l+D+Fs l+D+Fs l+D+Fs l+D+Fs
0 NO l+D l+D l+D l+D
1 YES l+D+Fs l+D+Fs l+D+Fs l+D+Fs
1 NO l+D+Fs l+D+Fs l+D+Fs l+D
2 YES l+D l+D l+D l+D
2 NO l+D l+D l+D l+D

Where:
l = Linear Contribution to Element Stiffness or Force
M = Material Nonlinear Contribution to Element Stiffness or Force
G = Differential Stiffness and Geometric Nonlinear Contribution to Element Stress or Stiffness with Large
Displacement
D = Differential Stiffness Contribution to Element Stiffness with Small Displacement

Main Index
 760 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Superelement Limitations in Nonlinear and Buckling Analysis

Fl = Follower Force Contribution to Element Stiffness or Force with Large Displacement

Fs = Follower Force Contribution to Element Stiffness or Force with Small Displacement
C = Contact Contribution to Element Stiffness or Force
SOL 1## = SOL 103, 105, 107 through 112, 115, and 116
Perturbation STEP = SOL 400 perturbation step. The perturbation analysis type is specified by ANALYSIS=
case control and will be based on the total stiffness of previous STEP. Refer to the Quick Reference Guide
ANALYSIS case control command for more details.
Differential stiffness is not calculated for SOL 129, Nonlinear Transient.
PARAM,SEKD can be used to control the calculation of the upstream superelement differential stiffness
matrix in SOL 106. The behavior of PARAM,SEKD is shown below:
 PARAM,SEKD,RSONLY – calculate the differential stiffness for the residual structure only
(Default)
 PARAM,SEKD,ALL – calculate and reduce the differential stiffness for all superelements and the
residual structure.
Note that even though superelements can calculate differential stiffness and follower force, the matrices are
reduced to the boundary using static condensation. As with dynamic analysis, the static condensation of the
differential stiffness is approximate (and quite poor). But unlike dynamic analysis, there is no correction that
can be applied to the differential stiffness reduction. (Refer to Dynamic Reduction – Component Modes Synthesis
(Ch. 9) for details on dynamic corrections to static condensation.) This limitation will be shown by
demonstration in the following subsection.

Buckling Example Showing Poor Approximation for Superelements

Consider the simple model below:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 17 761
Considerations in Nonlinear and Buckling Analysis

Figure 17-1 Model for Buckling Comparison, Non-Superelement Baseline

A detailed description of linear buckling can be found in the Linear Buckling (Ch. 13) in the MSC Nastran
Linear Static Analysis User’s Guide. The Patran setup for a buckling analysis is straight forward. The mesh,
loads, boundary conditions, and properties are set up the same as for a linear static analysis. In the analysis
form, the Solution Type is set to BUCKLING and the Eigenvalue Extraction parameters can be adjusted as
desired – in this case there will be 5 buckling modes extracted. The corresponding analysis forms are shown
below:

Main Index
 762 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Superelement Limitations in Nonlinear and Buckling Analysis

Figure 17-2 Patran Setup for Buckling Analysis (non-superelement)

The resulting MSC Nastran input file includes a static subcase and a buckling subcase for SOL 105 (ref:
/doc/seug/chapter17//euler-buckling/euler-baseline.bdf):
SOL 105

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = Euler Buckling Example

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = baseline model, 5 modes

ECHO = NONE

$[linear static subcase]

SUBCASE 1

$ Subcase name : Default

SUBTITLE=Default

SPC = 2

LOAD = 2

DISPLACEMENT(PLOT,SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(PLOT,SORT1,REAL)=ALL

$[buckling Eigenvalue extraction subcase]

SUBCASE 2

$ Subcase name : Default

Main Index
 CHAPTER 17 763
Considerations in Nonlinear and Buckling Analysis

SUBTITLE=Default

SPC = 2

METHOD = 1

VECTOR(PLOT,SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(PLOT,SORT1,REAL)=ALL

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

EIGRL 1 5 0

$ Loads for Load Case : Default

SPCADD 2 1

LOAD 2 1. 1. 1

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : fixed

SPC1 1 123456 1 12

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : unit-force

FORCE 1 11 0 .5 -1. 0. 0.

FORCE 1 22 0 .5 -1. 0. 0.

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

ENDDATA

Listing 17-1 Input File for Simple Buckling Example, Non-Superelement Baseline

The Eigenvalues from the .f06 file:

R E A L E I G E N V A L U E S

MODE EXTRACTION EIGENVALUE RADIANS CYCLES GENERALIZED GENERALIZED

NO. ORDER MASS STIFFNESS

1 1 2.071765E+01 4.551664E+00 7.244198E-01 1.233934E-01 2.556421E+00

2 2 1.899995E+02 1.378403E+01 2.193797E+00 2.759804E-01 5.243616E+01

3 3 5.479133E+02 2.340755E+01 3.725427E+00 7.309979E-01 4.005234E+02

4 4 1.135065E+03 3.369073E+01 5.362046E+00 1.369900E+00 1.554926E+03

5 5 2.014948E+03 4.488817E+01 7.144174E+00 2.212539E+00 4.458150E+03

Listing 17-2 Eigenvalues for Simple Buckling Example, Non-Superelement Baseline

The first 5 buckling modes for this model run as a residual-only solution are shown below:

Main Index
 764 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Superelement Limitations in Nonlinear and Buckling Analysis

Figure 17-3 Buckling Mode Shapes for Simple Buckling Example, Non-Superelement Baseline

To understand the behavior in Superelement analysis, the model is broken into one upstream superelement
and the residual structure as shown below:

Figure 17-4 Model for Buckling Comparison, Superelement Model

Main Index
 CHAPTER 17 765
Considerations in Nonlinear and Buckling Analysis

In Patran, the Analysis Forms for Buckling are set up as shown in Figure 17-2, and the superelements are
selected as shown below. For a more comprehensive example of setting up superelements in Patran, refer to
Section 2.4 for List Superelements and Defining PART Superelements (Ch. 2). This example shows the setup for
List Superelements:

Figure 17-5 Selecting Superelements in the Analysis Form (SESET)

The resulting MSC Nastran input file includes a static subcase and a buckling subcase for SOL 105 as well
as the SESET entries for the superelement definition (ref: /doc/seug/chapter17/euler-buckling/euler-
seset.bdf):
SOL 105

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = Euler Buckling Example

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = SESET model, 5 modes

ECHO = NONE

Main Index
 766 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Superelement Limitations in Nonlinear and Buckling Analysis

SUBCASE 1

$ Subcase name : Default

SUBTITLE=Default

SPC = 2

LOAD = 2

DISPLACEMENT(PLOT,SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(PLOT,SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SUBCASE 2

$ Subcase name : Default

SUBTITLE=Default

SPC = 2

METHOD = 1

VECTOR(PLOT,SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(PLOT,SORT1,REAL)=ALL

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

EIGRL 1 5 0

$ SEID.10

SESET 10 5 THRU 11

SESET 10 16 THRU 22

$ Loads for Load Case : Default

SPCADD 2 1

LOAD 2 1. 1. 1

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : fixed

SPC1 1 123456 1 12

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : unit-force

FORCE 1 11 0 .5 -1. 0. 0.

FORCE 1 22 0 .5 -1. 0. 0.

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

ENDDATA

Listing 17-3 Input File for Simple Buckling Example, Superelement Model (SESET)

The SEMAP and Eigenvalues from the .f06 file:

SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE

(SORTED BY SEID)

INDEX SUPERELEMENT PROCESS ORDER DOWNSTREAM SE SUPERELEMENT TYPE

0 0 2 0 RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

1 10 1 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE

(SORTED BY PROCESS ORDER)

Main Index
 CHAPTER 17 767
Considerations in Nonlinear and Buckling Analysis

INDEX SUPERELEMENT PROCESS ORDER DOWNSTREAM SE SUPERELEMENT TYPE

0 10 1 0 PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT

1 0 2 0 RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

SUPERELEMENT 10

LIST OF INTERIOR GRID POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF INTERIOR POINTS =

14

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 16 17 18

11 19 20 21 22

SUPERELEMENT 10

LIST OF EXTERIOR POINTS ( TOTAL NO. OF EXTERIOR POINTS = 2 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 4 15

SUPERELEMENT 10

LIST OF ELEMENT ID-S ( TOTAL NO. OF ELEMENTS = 7 )

INDEX -1- -2- -3- -4- -5- -6- -7- -8- -9- -10-

1 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

R E A L E I G E N V A L U E S

MODE EXTRACTION EIGENVALUE RADIANS CYCLES GENERALIZED GENERALIZED

NO. ORDER MASS STIFFNESS

1 1 3.486207E+01 5.904411E+00 9.397162E-01 3.437209E+00 1.198282E+02

2 2 1.106771E+03 3.326817E+01 5.294793E+00 4.191993E-01 4.639576E+02

3 3 3.471879E+03 5.892265E+01 9.377831E+00 3.313379E+00 1.150365E+04

4 4 5.328743E+03 7.299824E+01 1.161803E+01 2.008431E+00 1.070241E+04

5 5 1.061742E+04 1.030409E+02 1.639947E+01 2.959141E+00 3.141845E+04

Listing 17-4 SEMAP and Eigenvalues for Simple Buckling Example, Superelement Model (SESET)

The first 5 buckling modes for this model run as a superelement solution are shown below:

Main Index
 768 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Superelement Limitations in Nonlinear and Buckling Analysis

Figure 17-6 Buckling Mode Shapes for Simple Buckling Example, Superelement Model (SESET)

The reader will note a significant difference in the Eigenvalues as summarized in the table below:

Table 17-2 Comparison of Simple Buckling Example Eigenvalues for Non-Superelement and Superelement
Solutions
Mode Number Non-Superelement Eigenvalue Superelement Eigenvalue
1 2.071765E+01 3.486207E+01
2 1.899995E+02 1.106771E+03
3 5.479133E+02 3.471879E+03
4 1.135065E+03 5.328743E+03
5 2.014948E+03 1.061742E+04

So why are the Eigenvalues and Mode Shapes so different? The answer is that the differential stiffness
reduction for the superelement is based on static condensation (refer to Dynamic Reduction – Component Modes
Synthesis (Ch. 9) for a detailed theoretical discussion of static condensation.) In dynamic analysis static
condensation is augmented with component modes synthesis to account for the dynamic mass (refer to
Dynamic Reduction – Component Modes Synthesis (Ch. 9) for a detailed theoretical discussion of component modes
synthesis). There is no similar theory to augment the differential stiffness static condensation.
The following observations are made for this simple example of superelement reduction in linear buckling
analysis:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 17 769
Considerations in Nonlinear and Buckling Analysis

 The Eigenvalues are significantly different for the superelement solution because of the loss of
fidelity when differential stiffness is condensed to the boundary using static condensation
 The Eigenvectors (mode shapes) of the Superelement are not flexible (i.e. rigid) – the angle of the
rigid superelement buckling modes are based on the rotational dof at the boundary.
 The Buckling Eigenvectors are normalized to 1.0 for the A-Set of the residual structure. If the
superelement boundary rotations are large, the Eigenvector for the superelement can be larger than
1.0
Additionally, the same solution for the superelement case can be obtained by placing the dof in the residual
structure into the ASET for non-superelement model (ref: /doc/seug/chapter17/euler-aset.dat)
So does this mean that superelements have no place in linear buckling analysis? By all means, no. There are
many cases where the objective of the analysis is to obtain the buckling of a specific region of the structure.
The use of superelements will pass the linear stiffness and loads. The effect of the linear stiffness provides a
more realistic boundary condition rather than assuming a fixed or simply supported boundary condition.
The user must use caution and engineering judgment to determine the location and size of the superelement
in relation to the analysis objective. Section 17.4 will examine a case where superelements can be used to
isolate the buckling loads of an individual panel.

Applying Loads on Upstream Superelements in

Nonlinear Statics
MSC Nastran offers two nonlinear static solutions: SOL 106 and SOL 400 with ANALYSIS=NLSTATIC.
Both solutions provide the nonlinear capabilities of large displacement, differential stiffness, follower force
stiffness, material nonlinear, and contact. SOL 106 is limited to small strain theory and contact with CGAP
and slidelines. SOL 106 is not under active development. SOL 400 offers nonlinear capabilities of large
displacement, differential stiffness, follower force stiffness, material nonlinear (including large strain), and
contact. SOL 400 contact is general body-to-body contact and offers many ease-of-use capabilities with
respect to contact setup and solution. SOL 400 also has advanced convergence schemes and advanced
nonlinear formulations.
The method that superelements are implemented in SOL 106 and SOL 400 is similar as far as List
Superelements and PART Superelements with the exception of defining the loading on the upstream
superelement. Currently neither of the nonlinear static solutions support external superelements. The
following subsections describe the differences in applying loads to the upstream superelements for each
solution.

Superelement Loading in SOL 106

The case control for SOL 106 nonlinear statics is the same as the case control for linear statics with one
exception: static loads on upstream superelements cannot be directly referenced by the LOAD case control
command. Instead, the combinations of interior loads on upstream superelements must be combined with
the CLOAD / LOADSET / LSEQ commands.

Main Index
 770 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Applying Loads on Upstream Superelements in Nonlinear Statics

To apply loads in a SOL 106 nonlinear static analysis, the LOADSET, CLOAD, TEMP, and LOAD Case
Control commands are used in conjunction with the LSEQ and CLOAD bulk data entries along with typical
static load entries (FORCE, PLOAD4, TEMP, etc.).

LSEQ Static Load Set Definition

Defines a sequence of static or thermal load sets.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
LSEQ LSID EXCITEID LID TID

Example:
LSEQ 99 105 1 55

Field Contents
LSID Load Set Identification number
EXCITEID The EXCITEID set identification number of the static load vector – Links to
EXCITEID on RLOADi or TLOADi entries
LID Load set identification number of a set of static load entries
TID Temperature set identification number of a set of thermal load entries

CLOAD Static Load Combination for Superelement Loads (Superposition)

Defines a static load as a linear combination of previously calculated superelement loads defined by the LSEQ
entry in nonlinear static analysis (SOLs 106 or 153).
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CLOAD SID Scale Scale1 EXCITID1 Scale2 EXCITID2 Scale3 EXCITID3
Scale4 EXCITID4 -etc.-

Example:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 17 771
Considerations in Nonlinear and Buckling Analysis

CLOAD 25 1.0 25.0 10 -1.0 101 2.2 604

-62.0 62

Field Contents
SID Load set identification number selected with CLOAD case control
Scale Overall Scale Factor
Scalei Individual Scale Factors applied to EXCITIDi
EXCITIDi EXCITID number on LSEQ Entry

To demonstrate the loading required for upstream superelements in SOL 106, the following model and
loading will be used:

Figure 17-7 Model Used to Demonstrate Superelement Loading in SOL 106

Main Index
 772 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Applying Loads on Upstream Superelements in Nonlinear Statics

Figure 17-8 Uniform Pressure Loading (Loading 1)

Figure 17-9 Lateral Loading on Superelement Node Only (Loading 2)

Note: Patran does not support LOADSET / LSEQ / CLOAD, so the entries must be added
manually. The following listings demonstrate the entries required

SOL 106

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = nonlinear load example

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = 2 Loads

ECHO = NONE

LOADSET=999

param,sekd,all

SUBCASE 1

Main Index
 CHAPTER 17 773
Considerations in Nonlinear and Buckling Analysis

$ Subcase name : two-load

SUBTITLE=two-load

NLPARM = 1

SPC = 2

CLOAD=555

LOAD = 2

DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,BILIN)=ALL

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST 0

PARAM AUTOSPC NO

PARAM LGDISP 1

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

NLPARM 1 10 ITER 1 25 NO

$ SEID.10

SESET 10 5 THRU 11

SESET 10 16 THRU 22

$.......2.......3.......4.......5.......6.......7.......8.......9.......CONT

$LSEQ LSEQID EXCITID LOAD TEMP

LSEQ 999 101 1

LSEQ 999 201 3

$.......2.......3.......4.......5.......6.......7.......8.......9.......CONT

$CLOAD CLOADID Scale Scale1 EXCIT1 Scale2 EXCIT2 ...

CLOAD 555 1.0 1.0 101 1. 201

$ Loads for Load Case : two-load

SPCADD 2 1

LOAD 2 1. 1. 1 1. 3

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : fixed

SPC1 1 123456 1 12

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : force-lat

FORCE 1 11 0 20. 0. 1. 0.

$ Pressure Loads of Load Set : pressure

PLOAD4 3 1 -.1 THRU 10

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

ENDDATA

Listing 17-5 SOL 106 CLOAD Example for List Superelements (SESET) – (ref:
/doc/seug/chapter17/cload/sol-106/nlstat-106-cload-seset.bdf)

Main Index
 774 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Applying Loads on Upstream Superelements in Nonlinear Statics

SOL 106

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = nonlinear load example

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = 2 Loads

ECHO = NONE

LOADSET=999

param,sekd,all

SUBCASE 1

$ Subcase name : two-load

SUBTITLE=two-load

NLPARM = 1

SPC = 2

CLOAD=555

LOAD = 2

DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,BILIN)=ALL

BEGIN BULK

$.......2.......3.......4.......5.......6.......7.......8.......9.......CONT

$LSEQ LSEQID EXCITID LOAD TEMP

LSEQ 999 101 1

LSEQ 999 201 3

$.......2.......3.......4.......5.......6.......7.......8.......9.......CONT

$CLOAD CLOADID Scale Scale1 EXCIT1 Scale2 EXCIT2 ...

CLOAD 555 1.0 1.0 101 1. 201

$ Loads for Load Case : two-load

SPCADD 2 1

LOAD 2 1. 1. 1

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : fixed

SPC1 1 123456 1 12

$ Pressure Loads of Load Set : pressure

PLOAD4 1 1 -.1 THRU 3

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

$ Superelement Name: SEID.10

BEGIN SUPER = 10

$.......2.......3.......4.......5.......6.......7.......8.......9.......CONT

$LSEQ LSEQID EXCITID LOAD TEMP

LSEQ 999 101 1

Main Index
 CHAPTER 17 775
Considerations in Nonlinear and Buckling Analysis

LSEQ 999 201 3

$.......2.......3.......4.......5.......6.......7.......8.......9.......CONT

$CLOAD CLOADID Scale Scale1 EXCIT1 Scale2 EXCIT2 ...

CLOAD 555 1.0 1.0 101 1. 201

$ Loads for Load Case : two-load

LOAD 2 1. 1. 1 1. 3

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : force-lat

FORCE 1 11 0 20. 0. 1. 0.

$ Pressure Loads of Load Set : pressure

PLOAD4 3 4 -.1 THRU 10

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

ENDDATA

Listing 17-6 SOL 106 CLOAD Example for List Superelements (SESET) – (ref:
/doc/seug/chapter17/cload/sol-106/nlstat-106-cload-part.bdf

The following table compares the results of the baseline (ref: /doc/seug/chapter17/ cload/sol-106/nlstat-106-
baseline.bdf) and the List and PART Superelement solutions:

Table 17-3 Comparison of SOL 106 Results (non-superelement, List superelement, and PART
superelement)
File Displacement (grid 22)
nlstat-106-baseline.bdf -8.123199E-03 8.082805E-02 -1.706316E-01
nlstat-106-cload-seset.bdf -6.134006E-03 8.042346E-02 -1.558430E-01
nlstat-106-cload-part.bdf -6.134010E-03 8.042353E-02 -1.558490E-01

The effect of the linear behavior of the superelements accounts for the difference in results of the
superelement solutions compared to the non-superelement solution.

Superelement Loading in SOL 400

The load definition for nonlinear static analysis in SOL 400 does not require the LOADSET / LSEQ /
CLOAD entries which greatly simplifies the input. The equivalent SOL 400 input files for the model in the
previous subsection are shown below (ref: /doc/seug/chapter17/sol-400/nlstat-400-baseline.bdf, nlstat-400-
seset.bdf, and nlstat-400-part.bdf).
SOL 400

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = nonlinear load example

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = 2 Loads

Main Index
 776 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Applying Loads on Upstream Superelements in Nonlinear Statics

SUBCASE 1

STEP 1

SUBTITLE=two-load

ANALYSIS = NLSTATIC

NLPARM = 1

SPC = 2

LOAD = 2

DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,BILIN)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

PARAM LGDISP 1

NLPARM 1 ITER 1 25 UPW NO

$ SEID.10

SESET 10 5 THRU 11

SESET 10 16 THRU 22

$ Loads for Load Case : two-load

SPCADD 2 1

LOAD 2 1. 1. 1 1. 3

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : fixed

SPC1 1 123456 1 12

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : force-lat

FORCE 1 11 0 20. 0. 1. 0.

$ Pressure Loads of Load Set : pressure

PLOAD4 3 1 -.1 THRU 10

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

ENDDATA

Listing 17-7 SOL 400 List Superelement Loading Example

SOL 400

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = nonlinear load example

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = 2 Loads

SUBCASE 1

STEP 1

SUBTITLE=two-load

ANALYSIS = NLSTATIC

NLPARM = 1

Main Index
 CHAPTER 17 777
Considerations in Nonlinear and Buckling Analysis

SPC = 2

LOAD = 2

DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,BILIN)=ALL

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM AUTOSPC NO

PARAM LGDISP 1

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

NLPARM 1 10 ITER 1 25 NO

$ Loads for Load Case : two-load

SPCADD 2 1

LOAD 2 1. 1. 1

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : fixed

SPC1 1 123456 1 12

$ Pressure Loads of Load Set : pressure

PLOAD4 1 1 -.1 THRU 3

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

$ Superelement Name: SEID.10

BEGIN SUPER = 10

$ Loads for Load Case : two-load

LOAD 2 1. 1. 1 1. 3

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : force-lat

FORCE 1 11 0 20. 0. 1. 0.

$ Pressure Loads of Load Set : pressure

PLOAD4 3 4 -.1 THRU 10

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

ENDDATA

Listing 17-8 SOL 400 PART Superelement Loading Example

The following table compares the results of baseline, List, and PART Superelement solutions:

Table 17-4 Comparison of SOL 400 Results (non-superelement, List superelement, and PART
superelement)
File Displacement (grid 22)
nlstat-400-baseline.bdf -8.122266E-03 8.082759E-02 -1.705937E-01
nlstat-400-seset.bdf -6.134018E-03 8.042407E-02 -1.557857E-01
nlstat-400-part.bdf -6.134018E-03 8.042407E-02 -1.557857E-01

Main Index
 778 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Practical Buckling Example – Isolating and Individual Panel

The effect of the linear behavior of the superelements accounts for the difference in results of the
superelement solutions compared to the non-superelement solution.

Practical Buckling Example – Isolating and Individual

Panel
There are many cases where the buckling of a local structure is the objective of the analysis. In this case, the
overall buckling modes and/or buckling in adjacent or remote components is superfluous to the analysis at
hand and adds complication, computational time, and potential confusion. However, the influence of the
stiffness and loads from adjacent structure is necessary to characterize the loads and stress in the structure of
interest. Of course, this assumes that the buckling in adjacent or remote components does not significantly
affect the load path or stress in the local component of interest.
Consider the structure and loading shown below:

Figure 17-10 Example Model for Superelement Buckling Analysis

The loading on the model will put the top skin into compression. Since the panels are of similar size and
have a similar compressive loading, there will be many local panel modes. The input file for the baseline

Main Index
 CHAPTER 17 779
Considerations in Nonlinear and Buckling Analysis

solution contains the appropriate bulk data and case control to extract buckling modes in linear buckling
analysis, SOL 105 (ref: /doc/seug/chapter17/torquebox/torquebox-s105-compression.bdf )
SOL 105

$ Direct Text Input for Executive Control

CEND

TITLE = Torque Box Buckling Example

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = Baseline Model, no superelements

ECHO = NONE

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

SUBCASE 1

$ Subcase name : Default

SUBTITLE=Static Load

SPC = 2

LOAD = 2

DISPLACEMENT(PLOT,SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(PLOT,SORT1,REAL)=ALL

STRESS(PLOT,SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,BILIN)=ALL

subcase 2

SUBTITLE = Buckling Subcase

SPC=2

METHOD=105

DISPLACEMENT(PLOT,SORT1,REAL)=ALL

BEGIN BULK

eigrl,105,-.001,,125

PARAM POST 0

$ Loads for Load Case : Default

SPCADD 2 1 3 4

LOAD 2 1. 1. 1

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : Dy

SPC1 1 2 1 13 25 37 49 61

799 811 823 835 847 859 1597 1609

1621 1633 1645 1657 2287 2299 2311 2323

2335 2347 3085 3097 3109 3121 3133 3145

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : Dx

SPC1 3 1 1597 1609 1621 1633 1645 1657

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : Dz

SPC1 4 3 1 61 799 859 1597 1657

2287 2347 3085 3145

SPC1 4 3 3884 THRU 3890

SPC1 4 3 3929 THRU 3935

SPC1 4 3 3938 THRU 3945

SPC1 4 3 3988 THRU 3995

Main Index
 780 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Practical Buckling Example – Isolating and Individual Panel

SPC1 4 3 3998 THRU 4007

SPC1 4 3 4058 THRU 4067

SPC1 4 3 4070 THRU 4080

SPC1 4 3 4135 THRU 4145

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : Fz

FORCE 1 18213 0 1000. 0. 0. 1.

Listing 17-9 Torque Box Buckling Input File – Baseline Model, No Superelements

The first buckling mode is a local mode near the root of the structure; the panel of interest does not
participate in the buckling shape until modes 12 and 13.

Figure 17-11 Torque Box Buckling Mode Shapes – Baseline Model, No Superelements

The Eigenvalues are tightly spaced:

TORQUE BOX BUCKLING EXAMPLE

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM

BASELINE MODEL, NO SUPERELEMENTS

R E A L E I G E N V A L U E S

MODE EXTRACTION EIGENVALUE RADIANS CYCLES

NO. ORDER

1 1 2.553760E-01 5.053474E-01 8.042854E-02

2 2 2.693821E-01 5.190203E-01 8.260464E-02

3 3 2.981671E-01 5.460469E-01 8.690605E-02

4 4 3.057869E-01 5.529800E-01 8.800950E-02

5 5 3.188613E-01 5.646781E-01 8.987130E-02

6 6 3.197662E-01 5.654787E-01 8.999872E-02

7 7 3.331849E-01 5.772218E-01 9.186769E-02

8 8 3.340883E-01 5.780037E-01 9.199215E-02

Main Index
 CHAPTER 17 781
Considerations in Nonlinear and Buckling Analysis

9 9 3.522315E-01 5.934910E-01 9.445702E-02

10 10 3.534917E-01 5.945517E-01 9.462584E-02

11 11 3.685873E-01 6.071139E-01 9.662517E-02

12 12 3.730561E-01 6.107832E-01 9.720916E-02

13 13 3.976341E-01 6.305823E-01 1.003603E-01

14 14 4.059001E-01 6.371029E-01 1.013981E-01

15 15 4.127828E-01 6.424818E-01 1.022542E-01

16 16 4.268000E-01 6.532993E-01 1.039758E-01

17 17 4.271918E-01 6.535991E-01 1.040235E-01

18 18 4.340169E-01 6.587996E-01 1.048512E-01

19 19 4.425279E-01 6.652277E-01 1.058743E-01

20 20 4.447321E-01 6.668824E-01 1.061376E-01

Listing 17-10 Torque Box Buckling Eigenvalues – Baseline Model, No Superelements

Note that a large number of Eigenvalues are extracted in order to ensure that the buckling modes associated
with the panel of interest are calculated.
Next, the model is solved with List Superelements (SESET). In this example, the panel of interest is retained
in the residual structure and the remainder of the model is place in a superelement as shown below:

Figure 17-12 Torque Box Buckling Example – List Superelement (SESET) Model

SOL 105

$ Direct Text Input for Executive Control

CEND

Main Index
 782 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Practical Buckling Example – Isolating and Individual Panel

TITLE = Torque Box Buckling Example

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = List Superelement Model

ECHO = NONE

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

SUBCASE 1

$ Subcase name : Default

SUBTITLE=Static Load

SPC = 2

LOAD = 2

DISPLACEMENT(PLOT,SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(PLOT,SORT1,REAL)=ALL

STRESS(PLOT,SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,BILIN)=ALL

subcase 2

SUBTITLE = Buckling Subcase

SPC=2

METHOD=105

DISPLACEMENT(PLOT,SORT1,REAL)=ALL

BEGIN BULK

eigrl,105,-.001,,10

SESET 1 1 THRU 72

SESET 1 74 THRU 85

SESET 1 87 THRU 98

SESET 1 100 THRU 111

SESET 1 113 THRU 124

SESET 1 126 THRU 137

SESET 1 139 THRU 150

SESET 1 152 THRU 163

SESET 1 18202 THRU 18213

$ Loads for Load Case : Default

SPCADD 2 1 3 4

LOAD 2 1. 1. 1

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : Dy

SPC1 1 2 1 13 25 37 49 61

799 811 823 835 847 859 1597 1609

1621 1633 1645 1657 2287 2299 2311 2323

2335 2347 3085 3097 3109 3121 3133 3145

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : Dx

SPC1 3 1 1597 1609 1621 1633 1645 1657

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : Dz

SPC1 4 3 1 61 799 859 1597 1657

2287 2347 3085 3145

Main Index
 CHAPTER 17 783
Considerations in Nonlinear and Buckling Analysis

SPC1 4 3 3884 THRU 3890

SPC1 4 3 3929 THRU 3935

SPC1 4 3 3938 THRU 3945

SPC1 4 3 3988 THRU 3995

SPC1 4 3 3998 THRU 4007

SPC1 4 3 4058 THRU 4067

SPC1 4 3 4070 THRU 4080

SPC1 4 3 4135 THRU 4145

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : Fz

FORCE 1 18213 0 1000. 0. 0. 1.

Listing 17-11 Torque Box Buckling Input File – List Superelement (SESET) Model

The results of the buckling analysis are shown below:

Figure 17-13 Torque Box Buckling Shapes – List Superelement (SESET) Model

TORQUE BOX BUCKLING EXAMPLE

CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM

LIST SUPERELEMENT MODEL

R E A L E I G E N V A L U E S

MODE EXTRACTION EIGENVALUE RADIANS CYCLES

NO. ORDER

1 1 3.723077E-01 6.101702E-01 9.711160E-02

2 2 3.970236E-01 6.300981E-01 1.002832E-01

3 3 6.074531E-01 7.793928E-01 1.240442E-01

4 4 7.777352E-01 8.818929E-01 1.403576E-01

5 5 1.005842E+00 1.002917E+00 1.596191E-01

6 6 1.023911E+00 1.011885E+00 1.610465E-01

7 7 1.147565E+00 1.071245E+00 1.704939E-01

8 8 1.337936E+00 1.156692E+00 1.840932E-01

9 9 1.446782E+00 1.202822E+00 1.914351E-01

10 10 1.630566E+00 1.276936E+00 2.032307E-01

Main Index
 784 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Superelements in Heat Transfer

Listing 17-12 Torque Box Buckling Eigenvalues – List Superelement (SESET) Model

A comparison of the modes associated with the panel of interest is shown below:

Table 17-5 Torque Box Buckling Eigenvalues – Comparison of Full Model with List Superelement Model
Full Model Superelement Model
Mode Number Eigenvalue Mode Number Eigenvalue
12 .373 1 .372
13 .398 2 .397
43 .613 3 .607

The results for this model indicate that superelements are a good approach for isolating the local buckling
modes of a structural component. HOWEVER, the suitability of superelements for isolating a component
are dependent upon the structure and its surrounding support structure. The practitioner must consider the
suitability of superelements for his situation. It may be that the residual structure should include more
elements than the component of interest. The superelement approach does provide the advantage of
providing the back-up stiffness of adjacent structure which is generally more accurate than using assumed
boundary conditions (i.e. simply supported or fixed) that are used in local break-out models with applied
loads or enforced displacements.
So why would one want to use superelements in buckling analysis?
 Isolate structure or component of interest
 Easier to identify buckling modes associated with the component of interest
 Optimization – easier to identify the mode is calculated for the component of interest when
applying optimization constraints.

Superelements in Heat Transfer

Superelements have very limited applicability in nonlinear solutions (SOL 153 and SOL 159), but they can
be effectively utilized in linear heat transfer analysis (SOL 101 with ANALYSIS=HEAT).
Patran supports heat transfer by changing the analysis preference to “Thermal”

Main Index
 CHAPTER 17 785
Considerations in Nonlinear and Buckling Analysis

Figure 17-14 Setting Thermal Analysis Preference in Patran

The example file used for this section is a chip on a circuit board connected with pins as shown below:

Figure 17-15 Geometry for Thermal Analysis Example Problem

The boundary conditions for this model include a constant temperature of 20º on the bottom of the board
and a heat flux of 500 applied to the central element on the top of the chip.

Main Index
 786 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Superelements in Heat Transfer

The baseline input file is:

SOL 101

APP HEAT

CEND

ANALYSIS = HEAT

TITLE = Heat Transfer Example Problem

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = Baseline Model, No Superelements

ECHO = NONE

param,post,0

SUBCASE 1

$ Subcase name : Default

SUBTITLE=Default

SPC = 1

LOAD = 200

THERMAL(SORT1,PRINT)=ALL

FLUX(SORT1,PRINT)=ALL

BEGIN BULK

$ Material Record : pwb

MAT4 1 .6

$ Elements and Element Properties for region : pwb

PSOLID 1 1 0

PELAS 1 0.44

$ Elements and Element Properties for region : chip

PSOLID 2 2 0

$ Loads for Load Case : Default

$ Fixed Temperatures of Load Set : tempbc

SPC 1 244 1 20. 245 1 20.

SPC 1 246 1 20. 247 1 20.

$ Normal Heat Flux of Load Set : flux

$ CHBDYG Surface Elements

QHBDY,200,AREA4,500.0,,202,203,212,211

ENDDATA

Listing 17-13 Non Superelement Heat Transfer Model (ref: /seug/chapter17/heat-transfer/heat-xfer-

baseline.dat)

The solution temperatures are:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 17 787
Considerations in Nonlinear and Buckling Analysis

Figure 17-16 Temperature Contour for Heat Transfer Example Problem

The chip and the connectors are separated into superelements as shown in the figure below:

The List Superelement example is created by using BEGIN SUPER in conjunction with SEELT to define
the list associated with each superelement:
SOL 101

APP HEAT

CEND

ANALYSIS = HEAT

Main Index
 788 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Superelements in Heat Transfer

TITLE = Heat Transfer Example Problem

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = List Superelement Example, SEELT

ECHO = NONE

param,post,0

SUBCASE 1

$ Subcase name : Default

SUBTITLE=Default

SPC = 1

LOAD = 200

THERMAL(SORT1,PRINT)=ALL

FLUX(SORT1,PRINT)=ALL

BEGIN SUPER $ enable use of SEELT

SEELT,2,1,thru,128

SEELT,3,929,thru,1009

Listing 17-14 List Superelement (SEELT) Heat Transfer Model (ref: /seug/chapter17/heat-transfer/heat-xfer-
seelt.dat)
SOL 101

APP HEAT

CEND

ANALYSIS = HEAT

TITLE = Heat Transfer Example Problem

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = PART Superelement Example

ECHO = NONE

param,post,0

SUBCASE 1

$ Subcase name : Default

SUBTITLE=Default

SPC = 1

LOAD = 200

THERMAL(SORT1,PRINT)=ALL

FLUX(SORT1,PRINT)=ALL

BEGIN BULK

MAT4 1 .6

Begin super=2

$ Elements and Element Properties for region : chip

PSOLID 2 2 0

QHBDY,200,AREA4,500.0,,202,203,212,211

Begin super=3

$ Elements and Element Properties for region : celas2

Main Index
 CHAPTER 17 789
Considerations in Nonlinear and Buckling Analysis

PELAS 1 0.44

Listing 17-15 PART Superelement Heat Transfer Model (ref: /seug/chapter17/heat-transfer/heat-xfer-

part.dat)

The results for the List Superelement and PART Superelement models match the results for the baseline
model.

Note: External Superelements are not supported in heat transfer analysis.

1.

Main Index
 790 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Superelements in Heat Transfer

Main Index
 Chapter 18: Random Vibration with Superelements
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User’s Guide

18 Random Vibration with

Superelements

Introduction
 Enforced Motion (SPCD) Examples

Enforced Motion (Large Mass) Examples

Electronics Board Example

Main Index
 792 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Introduction

Introduction
This chapter describes methods available in MSC Nastran for applying random vibration loading to models
with superelements. This Chapter is not intended to be a comprehensive review of random response analysis,
but rather a review of how to use superelements in conjunction with random response for models that
incorporate superelements. For a full review of the random capabilities in MSC Nastran, the reader is
encouraged to refer to these sections in the MSC Nastran Dynamic Analysis User’s Guide (Dyn. UG) and MSC Nastran
Reference Guide (Ref. Guide):
 Random Analysis (Ch. 8) in the MSC Nastran Dynamic Analysis User’s Guide
 Frequency-Dependent Loads (Ch. 5) in the MSC Nastran Reference Guide
 Frequency Response and Random Analysis in SubDMAP FREQRS (Ch. 7) in the MSC Nastran Reference Guide
Another useful resource is the MSC Random Users’s Manual which is a dedicated procedure for random
analysis using MSC Nastran and Patran. MSC Random makes use of the xdb output file and, therefore, is
limited to internal superelements that do not contain images. The examples in this guide will not use MSC
Random, but users familiar with the interface may want to use it for superelements setup and limited data
recovery.
In MSC Nastran, random response analysis is treated as a data recovery procedure that is applied to the results
of a frequency response analysis. First, the frequency response analysis is performed for each loading as
independent subcases. The calculations of power spectral densities (PSDs) and autocorrelation functions for
the output quantities are performed in the random analysis module as a post-processing of the frequency
response results.
Each loading condition subcase represents a unique random load source, which may be applied to many grid
points. Typically, these loads are chosen to be unit loads such as unit “g” loads, unit pressures, or unit forces.
Since the input is unity, the output response is also known as Transfer Function. The probabilistic magnitude
of each load source is defined by spectral density functions on RANDPS input data. If the load subcases are
correlated, the coupling spectral density is also defined on one or more RANDPS functions. An example of
coupled spectral density would be the forces on four wheels of a vehicle traveling over a rough road.
As a recap of CHAPTER 11, the MSC Nastran entries for frequency response analysis include:

Table 18-1 Typical Dynamic Input for Frequency Response Analysis

Dynamic Definition Examples Input Entries
Load Amplitude Forces, Pressures, Inertia RLOADi FORCEi, PLOADi,
Loads, Temperatures, GRAV, RFORCE, TEMP,
Base Motion SPCD, etc.
Frequency Scaling Frequency scaling tables – TABLEDi
real/imag or mag/phase
Phasing Delays, Phasing DELAY, DPHASE
Load Combinations Combine various loading DLOAD
Frequency Output Control Frequency increment FREQi

Main Index
 CHAPTER 18 793
Random Vibration with Superelements

Table 18-1 Typical Dynamic Input for Frequency Response Analysis

Dynamic Definition Examples Input Entries
Damping Viscous dampers PDAMPi, PBUSH+
Structural PARAM,G
Material MATi (GE)
Rayleigh PARAM, APLPHi
Modal Schedule TABLEDi
Modal Extraction Frequency range of EIGRL
interest

To apply random loading to the frequency response results, the following entries are necessary:
 Case Control
 RANDOM entry points to RANDPS or RANDT1 entries
 Bulk Data
 RANDPS entries to apply power spectral densities and cross-correlation terms
 RANDT1 entries to define time lag constants for autocorrelation
 TABRND1 entries to define power spectral density (PSD) curves
 TABRNDG entries to define PSD of a gust for aeroelastic response analysis
 Parameters
 PARAM,RMSINT defines numerical integration scheme
A brief description of the input entries is shown below:

RANDOM Random Analysis Set Selection

Selects the RANDPS and RANDT1 bulk data entries to be used in random analysis
Format:

 
RANDOM =  n  (18-1)
 i 
Examples:
RANDOM=177
SET 10 = 100,110,120
RANDOM = 10

Main Index
 794 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Introduction

Field Contents
n Set identification number of a previously appearing SET command, which, in turn,
references multiple RANDPS/RANDT1 bulk data entries with different set
identification numbers.
i Set identification number of RANDPS and RANDT1 bulk data entries to be used in
random analysis

RANDPS Power Spectral Density Specification

Defines load set power spectral density functions for use in random analysis having the frequency dependent
form:
S jk  f  =  X + iY G  f  (18-2)

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RANDPS SID J K X Y TID

Example:
RANDPS 5 3 7 2.0 2.5 4

Field Contents
SID Random Set Identification number
J Subcase identification number of the excited load set.
K Subcase identification number of the applied load set.
X,Y Components of the complex number  X + iY 

TID Identification number of TABRNDi entries that defines G  f  .

RANDT1 Autocorrelation Function Time Lag

Defines time lag constants used in random analysis autocorrelation function calculation.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 18 795
Random Vibration with Superelements

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RANDT1 SID N T0 TMAX

Example:
RANDT1 5 10 3.2 9.6

Field Contents
SID Random Set Identification number
N Number of time lag intervals
T0 Starting time lag
TMAX Maximum time lag

TABRND1 Power Spectral Density Table

Defines power spectral density as a tabular function of frequency for use in random analysis. Referenced by
the RANDOM case control entry
Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TABRND1 TID XAXIS YAXIS
F1 G1 F2 G2 F3 G3 -.etc.-

Example:
TLOAD1 3 LOG LOG
2.5 .01057 2.6 .01362 ENDT

Field Contents
TID Table identification number. (Integer > 0)
XAXIS Specifies a linear or logarithmic interpolation for the x-axis. (Character: “LINEAR” or
“LOG”; Default = “LINEAR”)

Main Index
 796 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Enforced Motion (SPCD) Examples

Field Contents
YAXIS Specifies a linear or logarithmic interpolation for the Y-axis. (Character: “LINEAR” or
“LOG”; Default = “LINEAR”)
Fi Frequency value in cycles per unit time.
Gi Power Spectral Density corresponding to Fi.

PARAM,RMSINT,value
RMSINT specifies the interpolation method for numerical integration when computing both RMS (Root
Mean Square) and N0 (Number of Zero Crossings or Mean Frequency) from PSDF (Power Spectral Density
Function). RMSINT = LINEAR requests the trapezoidal approximation, which is the existing Nastran
approach. RMSINT = LOGLOG requests the Log-Log interpolation
In many industries, the most common application of random analysis is enforced motion, also known as base
motion. Enforced motion is the application of a random power spectral density input at the base of a
structure or structural component. Other applications include the application of pressures. The examples in
the following sections are based on enforced motion, although the concepts are similar for any applied
loading.
Note that MSC Nastran supports acoustics but this topic is beyond the scope of this User Guide.

Enforced Motion (SPCD) Examples

MSC Nastran provides two methods for applying enforce motion: constraints (SPCD) or large mass. This
section provides examples for the SPCD method. The internal superelements are based on a derivative of the
cantilever plate model used in Frequency Response Illustrative Example (Ch. 11).

Baseline Model, Cantilever Plate

The model used for the baseline solution is shown below:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 18 797
Random Vibration with Superelements

Figure 18-1 Example Model Used for Enforced Displacement Base Drive Random Vibration Analysis

In this case, the base drive analysis is an enforced acceleration applied to grid 999Z which is attached to the
structure with an RBE2 as shown in the figure above. The input power spectral density function is specified
from 10 – 2000Hz as shown below:

Table 18-2 Input Power Spectral Density

Frequency (Hz) G2/Hz
10 0.1
20 0.1
50 0.3
600 0.3
1500 0.12
2000 0.12

Main Index
 798 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Enforced Motion (SPCD) Examples

Figure 18-2 Input Power Spectral Density

The Patran setup for frequency response is discussed in Frequency Response Illustrative Example (Ch. 11); however
in this case the applied loads are an enforced acceleration at grid 999Z, so a unit gravity sine-sweep for the z-
acceleration is defined as shown below. The unit gravity is applied with a non-spatial field which will generate
TABLED1 entries:

Figure 18-3 Defining Unit Gravity Non-Spatial Field in Patran

Main Index
 CHAPTER 18 799
Random Vibration with Superelements

The loading is defined as an acceleration which will generate RLOAD1 entries with a loading type of ACCE
(for acceleration):

Figure 18-4 Applying Base Acceleration in Patran

Next, the frequency output intervals are defined in the appropriate Subcase Parameters forms shown below.
The forms as shown below will generate the FREQ2 and FREQ4 entries in the MSC Nastran input file for
a solution frequency range from 10 to 2000Hz. For more details on strategies for specifying frequency
output request intervals refer to the Solution Frequencies (Ch. 4) in the MSC Nastran Dynamic Analysis User’s
Guide.

Main Index
 800 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Enforced Motion (SPCD) Examples

Figure 18-5 Defining Solution Output Frequencies in Patran

In this example, the modal damping is defined as 3% Critical damping over the frequency range. The
appropriate forms are shown below. This will generate TABDMP1 entries in the MSC Nastran input file.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 18 801
Random Vibration with Superelements

Figure 18-6 Defining Modal Damping in Patran

 Once again, Patran provides the MSC Random (Tools Menu) to perform random analysis as a post-
processing step for a frequency response solution using the xdb file. In order to perform the random
analysis in MSC Nastran, the RANDOM, RANDPS, TABRND1, and PARAM,RMSINT entries
must be placed into Direct Text Input. Note: the I and J fields of RANDPS entry must correspond
to the subcases that Patran writes. Typically, Patran writes subcases sequentially starting with
SubcaseID=1.

Main Index
 802 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Enforced Motion (SPCD) Examples

Figure 18-7

Patran will generate an input file (.bdf) using the indirect LOADSET/LSEQ method described in Indirect
Reference to EXCITEDID: LOADSET / LSEQ Method (Ch. 11). The input file is detailed below (ref:
/doc/seug/chapter18/cant-plate-spcd/baseline/freq-resp-spcd-random.bdf )
SOL 111

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

RANDOM=33

TITLE = cantilever plate enforced motion - 1g sine sweep + random

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = Baseline - no superelements

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = YES

LOADSET = 1

SDAMPING = 1

SUBCASE 1

Main Index
 CHAPTER 18 803
Random Vibration with Superelements

SUBTITLE=SPCD-enforced-acceleration

METHOD = 1

FREQUENCY = 1

SPC = 2

DLOAD = 2

DISPLACEMENT(PLOT,SORT2,PHASE)=ALL

ACCELERATION(PLOT,SORT2,PHASE)=ALL

SPCFORCES(PLOT,SORT2,PHASE)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

OUTPUT(XYPLOT)

XLOG YES

XGRID LINES YES

YLOG YES

YGRID LINES YES

XTITLE Frequency (Hz)

YTITLE Grid 211 Acceleration (in/sec^2)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT ACCE/211(T3RM)

YTITLE PSD - Grid 211 (G^2/Hz)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,PSDF,ACCE /211(T3) $ ignored if no random

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

$randps,sid,j,k,x,y,tid

RANDPS,33,1,1,1.,0.,44

PARAM,RMSINT,LOGLOG

TABRND1,44,log,log

+,10.,0.1,20.,0.1,50.,0.3,600.,0.3

+,1500.,0.12,2000.,0.12,ENDT

PARAM POST 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

FREQ2 1 10. 2000. 50

FREQ4 1 10. 2000. .3 3

TABDMP1 1 CRIT

0. .03 3000. .03 ENDT

EIGRL 1 0. 3000. 0

$ Loads for Load Case : SPCD-enforced-acceleration

SPCADD 2 1 3

RLOAD1 4 5 1 ACCE

LSEQ 1 5 6

SPCD 6 999 3 1.

DLOAD 2 1. 1. 4

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : enforced-grav-999z

SPC1 1 3 999

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : fix-123456

Main Index
 804 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Enforced Motion (SPCD) Examples

SPC1 3 123456 999

$ Referenced Dynamic Load Tables

$ Dynamic Load Table : unit-grav-accel

TABLED1 1

0. 386.1 3000. 386.1 ENDT

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

ENDDATA

Listing 18-1 Baseline Random Response Input File – No Superelements

Refer to Output with XYPLOT (Ch. 19) for more information on the XYPLOT commands. The output from the
XYPLOT commands generates the following summary information in the .f06 file:
CANTILEVER PLATE ENFORCED MOTION - 1G SINE SWEEP + RANDOM JULY 17, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10

SPCD-ENFORCED-ACCELERATION

BASELINE - NO SUPERELEMENTS

X Y - O U T P U T S U M M A R Y ( A U T O O R P S D F )

PLOT CURVE FRAME CURVE ID./ RMS NO. POSITIVE XMIN FOR XMAX FOR YMIN FOR X FOR YMAX FOR X
FOR*

TYPE TYPE NO. PANEL : GRID ID VALUE CROSSINGS ALL DATA ALL DATA ALL DATA YMIN ALL DATA
YMAX

PSDF ACCE 2 211( 5) 2.182143E+04 7.184097E+02 1.000E+01 2.000E+03 1.288E+04 1.392E+03 1.751E+07
3.177E+01

P R I N T E D D A T A F O R T H I S C U R V E F O L L O W S

CANTILEVER PLATE ENFORCED MOTION - 1G SINE SWEEP + RANDOM JULY 17, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10

SPCD-ENFORCED-ACCELERATION

BASELINE - NO SUPERELEMENTS

ACCELERATION CURVE ID = 211 COMPONENT = 5 WHOLE FRAME

PRINT NUMBER X-VALUE Y-VALUE CARD NUMBER

1 1.000000E+01 2.037537E+04

2 1.111784E+01 2.199330E+04

3 1.236065E+01 2.421090E+04

Listing 18-2 Random XYPLOT Summary Information – Baseline Model

The summary information for PSD output includes the RMS value and the number of positive crossings.
The frequency response for the magnitude of acceleration for grid 211 is:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 18 805
Random Vibration with Superelements

Figure 18-8 Frequency Response Accelerations for Grid 211-T3 (Magnitude) – Baseline Model (Patran Plot)

Main Index
 806 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Enforced Motion (SPCD) Examples

Figure 18-9 Frequency Response Accelerations for Grid 211-T3 (Magnitude) – Baseline Model (Nastran
XYPLOT)

Baseline Solution with MSC Random

The Patran tool MSC Random can be used to process an xdb file generated for a frequency response solution.
The advantages of MSC Random are many, to name a few:
 Guided analysis setup forms
 Random calculations on any quantity – do not have to pre-define XYPLOT commands
 Change PSD spectrum without rerunning the Nastran solution
 Graphical User Interface for plotting
 Nicer plots than XYPLOT
A few plots of the Patran Random tool are shown below. For a full description, refer to the MSC Random
User Manual. The example input file associated with the figures below is /doc/seug/chapter18/cant-plate-
spcd/part/freq-resp-spcd-random.bdf

Main Index
 CHAPTER 18 807
Random Vibration with Superelements

Figure 18-10 Accessing MSC Random from the Tools Menu

Figure 18-11 MSC Random Tool Guided Model Setup

Main Index
 808 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Enforced Motion (SPCD) Examples

Figure 18-12 MSC Random Tool XY Plot Generation Forms

Figure 18-13 MSC Random RMS Plots

Note that the MSC Random RMS plot is normalized to “Accel Scale G” so that the values are reported in
G2/Hz instead of (in2/sec2)/Hz and the RMS values is in G’s

Main Index
 CHAPTER 18 809
Random Vibration with Superelements

List Superelement, Cantilever Plate

The cantilever plate random response solution is now solved using List Superelements (SESET). The
superelement definition is shown below:

Figure 18-14 Superelement Definition for Cantilever Plate Random Base Drive Analysis

The superelements definition in Patran is described in detail in Demonstration of Defining Interior Points in Patran
(Ch. 2) and the Component Modes Synthesis definition for superelements is described in Single Level Dynamic
Reduction (Ch. 10). For this example, AUTOQSET is used. Note that in this case, the superelement
definition is different than previous examples using the same geometry. The loading, damping, etc. are
defined exactly the same as the non-superelement example above. After defining the superelements, the
input file is shown below. Note that only the entries associated with the superelement definition are
highlighted (ref: /doc/seug/chapter18/cant-plate-spcd/seset/freq-resp-spcd-random.bdf )
SOL 111

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

RANDOM=33

TITLE = cantilever plate enforced motion - 1g sine sweep + random

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = Baseline - List Superelements (SESET)

ECHO = NONE

PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES

RESVEC = YES

LOADSET = 1

SDAMPING = 1

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=SPCD-enforced-acceleration

METHOD = 1

FREQUENCY = 1

SPC = 2

DLOAD = 2

DISPLACEMENT(PLOT,SORT2,PHASE)=ALL

Main Index
 810 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Enforced Motion (SPCD) Examples

ACCELERATION(PLOT,SORT2,PHASE)=ALL

SPCFORCES(PLOT,SORT2,PHASE)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

OUTPUT(XYPLOT)

SEPLOT 20

XLOG YES

XGRID LINES YES

YLOG YES

YGRID LINES YES

XTITLE Frequency (Hz)

YTITLE Grid 211 Acceleration (in/sec^2)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT ACCE/211(T3RM)

YTITLE PSD - Grid 211 (G^2/Hz)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,PSDF,ACCE /211(T3) $ ignored if no random

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

$randps,sid,j,k,x,y,tid

RANDPS,33,1,1,1.,0.,44

PARAM,RMSINT,LOGLOG

TABRND1,44,log,log

+,10.,0.1,20.,0.1,50.,0.3,600.,0.3

+,1500.,0.12,2000.,0.12,ENDT

PARAM POST 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

FREQ2 1 10. 2000. 50

FREQ4 1 10. 2000. .3 3

TABDMP1 1 CRIT

0. .03 3000. .03 ENDT

EIGRL 1 0. 3000. 0

$ middle.10

SESET 10 105 106 107 205 206 207

$ tip.20

SESET 20 109 110 111 209 210 211

$ Loads for Load Case : SPCD-enforced-acceleration

SPCADD 2 1 3

RLOAD1 4 5 1 ACCE

LSEQ 1 5 6

SPCD 6 999 3 1.

DLOAD 2 1. 1. 4

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : enforced-grav-999z

SPC1 1 3 999

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : fix-123456

SPC1 3 123456 999

Main Index
 CHAPTER 18 811
Random Vibration with Superelements

$ Referenced Dynamic Load Tables

$ Dynamic Load Table : unit-grav-accel

TABLED1 1

0. 386.1 3000. 386.1 ENDT

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

ENDDATA

Listing 18-3 Random Response Input File – List Superelement (SESET)

The results for

CANTILEVER PLATE ENFORCED MOTION - 1G SINE SWEEP + RANDOM JULY 17, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10

SPCD-ENFORCED-ACCELERATION SUPERELEMENT 20

BASELINE - LIST SUPERELEMENTS (SESET)

X Y - O U T P U T S U M M A R Y ( A U T O O R P S D F )

PLOT CURVE FRAME CURVE ID./ RMS NO. POSITIVE XMIN FOR XMAX FOR YMIN FOR X FOR YMAX FOR X
FOR*

TYPE TYPE NO. PANEL : GRID ID VALUE CROSSINGS ALL DATA ALL DATA ALL DATA YMIN ALL DATA
YMAX

PSDF ACCE 2 211( 5) 2.181667E+04 7.174285E+02 1.000E+01 2.000E+03 1.285E+04 1.394E+03 1.751E+07
3.177E+01

P R I N T E D D A T A F O R T H I S C U R V E F O L L O W S

CANTILEVER PLATE ENFORCED MOTION - 1G SINE SWEEP + RANDOM JULY 17, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10

SPCD-ENFORCED-ACCELERATION SUPERELEMENT 20

BASELINE - LIST SUPERELEMENTS (SESET)

ACCELERATION CURVE ID = 211 COMPONENT = 5 WHOLE FRAME

PRINT NUMBER X-VALUE Y-VALUE CARD NUMBER

1 1.000000E+01 2.037537E+04

2 1.111784E+01 2.199330E+04

3 1.236065E+01 2.421090E+04

4 1.374237E+01 2.733689E+04

Listing 18-4 Random XYPLOT Summary Information – List Superelement (SESET)

Main Index
 812 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Enforced Motion (SPCD) Examples

PART Superelement, Cantilever Plate

SOL 111

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

RANDOM=33

TITLE = cantilever plate enforced motion - 1g sine sweep + random

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = PART Superelement

ECHO = NONE

PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES

RESVEC = YES

LOADSET = 1

SDAMPING = 1

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=SPCD-enforced-acceleration

METHOD = 1

FREQUENCY = 1

SPC = 2

DLOAD = 2

DISPLACEMENT(PLOT,SORT2,PHASE)=ALL

ACCELERATION(PLOT,SORT2,PHASE)=ALL

SPCFORCES(PLOT,SORT2,PHASE)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

OUTPUT(XYPLOT)

SEPLOT 0

XYPEAK PSDF ACCE/104(T3)

SEPLOT 20

XLOG YES

XGRID LINES YES

YLOG YES

YGRID LINES YES

XTITLE Frequency (Hz)

YTITLE Grid 211 Acceleration (in/sec^2)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT ACCE/211(T3RM)

YTITLE PSD - Grid 211 (G^2/Hz)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,PSDF,ACCE /211(T3) $ ignored if no random

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

$randps,sid,j,k,x,y,tid

RANDPS,33,1,1,1.,0.,44

PARAM,RMSINT,LOGLOG

TABRND1,44,log,log

+,10.,0.1,20.,0.1,50.,0.3,600.,0.3

+,1500.,0.12,2000.,0.12,ENDT

Main Index
 CHAPTER 18 813
Random Vibration with Superelements

PARAM POST 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

FREQ2 1 10. 2000. 50

FREQ4 1 10. 2000. .3 3

TABDMP1 1 CRIT

0. .03 3000. .03 ENDT

EIGRL 1 0. 3000. 0

$ Loads for Load Case : SPCD-enforced-acceleration

SPCADD 2 1 3

RLOAD1 4 5 1 ACCE

LSEQ 1 5 6

SPCD 6 999 3 1.

DLOAD 2 1. 1. 4

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : enforced-grav-999z

SPC1 1 3 999

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : fix-123456

SPC1 3 123456 999

$ Referenced Dynamic Load Tables

$ Dynamic Load Table : unit-grav-accel

TABLED1 1

0. 386.1 3000. 386.1 ENDT

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

$ Superelement Name: middle.10

BEGIN SUPER = 10

PARAM,RMSINT,LOGLOG

PARAM POST 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

EIGRL 1 0. 3000. 0

$ Loads for Load Case : SPCD-enforced-acceleration

$ dummy LSEQ

LSEQ 1 99 88

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

$ Superelement Name: tip.20

BEGIN SUPER = 20

PARAM,RMSINT,LOGLOG

Main Index
 814 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Enforced Motion (SPCD) Examples

PARAM POST 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

EIGRL 1 0. 3000. 0

$ Loads for Load Case : SPCD-enforced-acceleration

$ dummy LSEQ

LSEQ 1 99 88

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

ENDDATA

Listing 18-5 Listing

CANTILEVER PLATE ENFORCED MOTION - 1G SINE SWEEP + RANDOM JULY 17, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10

SPCD-ENFORCED-ACCELERATION ELEM SUPERELEMENT 20

PART SUPERELEMENT

X Y - O U T P U T S U M M A R Y ( A U T O O R P S D F )

PLOT CURVE FRAME CURVE ID./ RMS NO. POSITIVE XMIN FOR XMAX FOR YMIN FOR X FOR YMAX FOR X
FOR*

TYPE TYPE NO. PANEL : GRID ID VALUE CROSSINGS ALL DATA ALL DATA ALL DATA YMIN ALL DATA
YMAX

PSDF ACCE 2 211( 5) 2.181667E+04 7.174285E+02 1.000E+01 2.000E+03 1.285E+04 1.394E+03 1.751E+07
3.177E+01

P R I N T E D D A T A F O R T H I S C U R V E F O L L O W S

CANTILEVER PLATE ENFORCED MOTION - 1G SINE SWEEP + RANDOM JULY 17, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10

SPCD-ENFORCED-ACCELERATION ELEM SUPERELEMENT 20

PART SUPERELEMENT

ACCELERATION CURVE ID = 211 COMPONENT = 5 WHOLE FRAME

PRINT NUMBER X-VALUE Y-VALUE CARD NUMBER

1 1.000000E+01 2.037537E+04

2 1.111784E+01 2.199330E+04

3 1.236065E+01 2.421090E+04

Listing 18-6 Listing

Main Index
 CHAPTER 18 815
Random Vibration with Superelements

External Superelement
External superelements also support random vibration analysis. The following sections show the necessary
entries for performing external superelement analysis for random vibration with the SPCD method of
enforced motion.
The model shown in Figure 18-14 is used. The reduction runs use SOL 103 to compute the boundary
stiffness, mass, and component modes. In this example the DMIGOP2 method is used:
assign output2='ext10.op2' unit=31 delete

SOL 103

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = Cantilever Plate Random Example

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, Eaglesim

LABEL = EXTERNAL SE, 2-step method, SE 10 reduction

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = YES

EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK=MANQ,EXTBULK,EXTID=10,DMIGOP2=31)

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Center

METHOD = 1

VECTOR(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

$[boundary nodes and qset dof for component modes]

SPOINT 1001 THRU 1016

QSET1 0 1001 THRU 1016

ASET1 123456 104 108 204 208

EIGRL 1 0. 10

ENDDATA

Listing 18-7 External Superelement 10 Reduction for Random Analysis with SPCD Method – 2 Step Method
(ref: /seug/chapter18/cant-plate-spcd/external-2-step/create10.dat)
assign output2='ext20.op2' unit=32 delete

SOL 103

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = Cantilever Plate Random Example

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, Eaglesim

LABEL = EXTERNAL SE, 2-step method, SE 20 reduction

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = YES

EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK=MANQ,EXTBULK,EXTID=20,DMIGOP2=32)

Main Index
 816 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Enforced Motion (SPCD) Examples

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Tip

METHOD = 1

VECTOR(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

$[boundary nodes and qset dof for component modes]

SPOINT 2001 THRU 2016

QSET1 0 2001 THRU 2016

ASET1 123456 108 208

EIGRL 1 0. 10

ENDDATA

Listing 18-8 External Superelement 20 Reduction for Random Analysis with SPCD Method – 2 Step Method
(ref: /seug/chapter18/cant-plate-spcd/external-2-step/create20.dat)

The assembly run includes the entries to attach the external superelements and the entries required for
frequency response with random. XYPLOT commands are also included to compare the results with previous
solutions. Note that PARAM,RMSINT,LOGLOG is specified in Case Control so that LOGLOG is applied
to the external superelements and the residual structure.
assign inputt2='ext10.op2' unit=31

assign inputt2='ext20.op2' unit=32

SOL 111

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

RANDOM=33

TITLE = cantilever plate enforced motion - 1g sine sweep + random

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = External Superelement Assembly - 2 step

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = YES

PARAM,RMSINT,LOGLOG

SDAMPING = 1

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=SPCD-enforced-acceleration

METHOD = 1

FREQUENCY = 1

SPC = 2

DLOAD = 2

DISPLACEMENT(PLOT,SORT2,PHASE)=ALL

ACCELERATION(PLOT,SORT2,PHASE)=ALL

SPCFORCES(PLOT,SORT2,PHASE)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

OUTPUT(XYPLOT)

Main Index
 CHAPTER 18 817
Random Vibration with Superelements

SEPLOT 0

XYPEAK PSDF ACCE/104(T3)

SEPLOT 20

XLOG YES

XGRID LINES YES

YLOG YES

YGRID LINES YES

XTITLE Frequency (Hz)

YTITLE Grid 211 Acceleration (in/sec^2)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT ACCE/211(T3RM)

YTITLE PSD - Grid 211 (G^2/Hz)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,PSDF,ACCE /211(T3) $ ignored if no random

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

$randps,sid,j,k,x,y,tid

RANDPS,33,1,1,1.,0.,44

TABRND1,44,log,log

+,10.,0.1,20.,0.1,50.,0.3,600.,0.3

+,1500.,0.12,2000.,0.12,ENDT

PARAM POST 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

FREQ2 1 10. 2000. 50

FREQ4 1 10. 2000. .3 3

TABDMP1 1 CRIT

0. .03 3000. .03 ENDT

EIGRL 1 0. 3000. 0

$ Loads for Load Case : SPCD-enforced-acceleration

SPCADD 5 1 3

RLOAD1 4 5 1 ACCE

SPCD 5 999 3 1.

DLOAD 2 1. 1. 4

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : enforced-grav-999z

SPC1 1 3 999

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : fix-123456

SPC1 3 123456 999

$ Referenced Dynamic Load Tables

$ Dynamic Load Table : unit-grav-accel

TABLED1 1

0. 386.1 3000. 386.1 ENDT

include 'create10.asm'

include 'create20.asm'

Main Index
 818 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Enforced Motion (SPCD) Examples

ENDDATA

Listing 18-9 External Superelement Assembly Run for Random Analysis with SPCD Method – 2 Step Method
(ref: /seug/chapter18/cant-plate-spcd/external-2-step/assemble-spcd.dat)

Refer to CHAPTER 19 for more information on the XYPLOT commands. The output from the XYPLOT
commands generates the following summary information in the .f06 file:

CANTILEVER PLATE ENFORCED MOTION - 1G SINE SWEEP + RANDOM

SPCD-ENFORCED-ACCELERATION ELEM SUPERELEMENT 20

EXTERNAL SUPERELEMENT ASSEMBLY - 2 STEP

X Y - O U T P U T S U M M A R Y ( A U T O O R P S D F )

PLOT CURVE FRAME CURVE ID./ RMS NO. POSITIVE XMIN FOR XMAX FOR YMIN FOR X FOR YMAX FOR X
FOR*

TYPE TYPE NO. PANEL : GRID ID VALUE CROSSINGS ALL DATA ALL DATA ALL DATA YMIN ALL DATA
YMAX

PSDF ACCE 2 211( 5) 2.182143E+04 7.184099E+02 1.000E+01 2.000E+03 1.288E+04 1.392E+03 1.751E+07
3.177E+01

Listing 18-10 External Superelement Assembly Results – 2 Step Method

The assembly run includes the entries to attach the external superelements and the entries required for
frequency response with random. XYPLOT commands are also included to compare the results with
previous solutions. Note that PARAM,RMSINT,LOGLOG is specified in Case Control so that LOGLOG
is applied to the external superelements and the residual structure.
assign inputt2='ext10.op2' unit=31

assign inputt2='ext20.op2' unit=32

assign output2='ext10dr.op2' unit=33 delete

assign output2='ext20dr.op2' unit=34 delete

SOL 111

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

RANDOM=33

TITLE = cantilever plate enforced motion - 1g sine sweep + random

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = External Superelement Assembly - 2 step

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = no

SDAMPING = 1

PARAM,RMSINT,LOGLOG

SUBCASE 1

SUPER=10

EXTDROUT(DMIGOP2=33)

Main Index
 CHAPTER 18 819
Random Vibration with Superelements

SUBCASE 2

SUPER=20

EXTDROUT(DMIGOP2=34)

SUBCASE 3

SUBTITLE=SPCD-enforced-acceleration

METHOD = 1

FREQUENCY = 1

SPC = 2

DLOAD = 2

DISPLACEMENT(PLOT,SORT2,PHASE)=ALL

ACCELERATION(PLOT,SORT2,PHASE)=ALL

SPCFORCES(PLOT,SORT2,PHASE)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

OUTPUT(XYPLOT)

SEPLOT 0

XYPEAK PSDF ACCE/104(T3)

SEPLOT 20

XLOG YES

XGRID LINES YES

YLOG YES

YGRID LINES YES

XTITLE Frequency (Hz)

YTITLE Grid 211 Acceleration (in/sec^2)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT ACCE/211(T3RM)

YTITLE PSD - Grid 211 (G^2/Hz)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,PSDF,ACCE /211(T3) $ ignored if no random

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

$randps,sid,j,k,x,y,tid

RANDPS,33,1,1,1.,0.,44

TABRND1,44,log,log

+,10.,0.1,20.,0.1,50.,0.3,600.,0.3

+,1500.,0.12,2000.,0.12,ENDT

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

FREQ2 1 10. 2000. 50

FREQ4 1 10. 2000. .3 3

TABDMP1 1 CRIT

0. .03 3000. .03 ENDT

EIGRL 1 0. 3000. 0

$ Loads for Load Case : SPCD-enforced-acceleration

SPCADD 2 1 3

RLOAD1 4 5 1 ACCE

SPCD 5 999 3 1.

Main Index
 820 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Enforced Motion (SPCD) Examples

DLOAD 2 1. 1. 4

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : enforced-grav-999z

SPC1 1 3 999

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : fix-123456

SPC1 3 123456 999

$ Referenced Dynamic Load Tables

$ Dynamic Load Table : unit-grav-accel

TABLED 1

0. 386.1 3000. 386.1 ENDT

include create10.asm

include create20.asm

ENDDATA

Listing 18-11 External Superelement Assembly Run for Random Analysis with SPCD Method – 2 Step Method
(ref: /seug/chapter18/cant-plate-spcd/external-2-step/assemble-spcd.dat)

The data recovery runs include the frequency response and random entries:
assign inputt2='ext10dr.op2' unit=31

assign run1M='create10.master'

assign run1D='create10.dball'

restart logi=run1M

SOL 111

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = Cantilever Plate Random Example

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, Eaglesim

LABEL = EXTERNAL SE, 3-step method, SE 10 data recovery

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = YES

EXTDRIN(DMIGOP2=31)

RANDOM=33

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=SPCD-enforced-acceleration

METHOD = 10 $ original reduction

$ SPC = 2

DISPLACEMENT(PLOT,SORT2,PHASE)=ALL

ACCELERATION(PLOT,SORT2,PHASE)=ALL

SPCFORCES(PLOT,SORT2,PHASE)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

OUTPUT(XYPLOT)

$SEPLOT 20

XLOG YES

Main Index
 CHAPTER 18 821
Random Vibration with Superelements

XGRID LINES YES

YLOG YES

YGRID LINES YES

XTITLE Frequency (Hz)

YTITLE Grid 208 Acceleration (in/sec^2)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT ACCE/208(T3RM)

YTITLE PSD - Grid 208 (G^2/Hz)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,PSDF,ACCE /208(T3) $ ignored if no random

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

$randps,sid,j,k,x,y,tid

RANDPS,33,1,1,1.,0.,44

PARAM,RMSINT,LOGLOG

TABRND1,44,log,log

+,10.,0.1,20.,0.1,50.,0.3,600.,0.3

+,1500.,0.12,2000.,0.12,ENDT

ENDDATA

Listing 18-12 External Superelement Data Recovery Input File for Superelement 10 for Random Analysis with
SPCD Method – 3 Step Method (ref: /seug/chapter18/cant-plate-spcd/external-3-
step/recover10.dat)

assign inputt2='ext20dr.op2' unit=31

assign run1M='create20.master'

assign run1D='create20.dball'

restart logi=run1M

SOL 111

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = Cantilever Plate Random Example

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, Eaglesim

LABEL = EXTERNAL SE, 3-step method, SE 20 data recovery

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = YES

EXTDRIN(DMIGOP2=31)

RANDOM=33

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=SPCD-enforced-acceleration

Main Index
 822 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Enforced Motion (SPCD) Examples

METHOD = 20 $ original reduction

$ SPC = 2

DISPLACEMENT(PLOT,SORT2,PHASE)=ALL

ACCELERATION(PLOT,SORT2,PHASE)=ALL

SPCFORCES(PLOT,SORT2,PHASE)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

OUTPUT(XYPLOT)

$SEPLOT 20

XLOG YES

XGRID LINES YES

YLOG YES

YGRID LINES YES

XTITLE Frequency (Hz)

YTITLE Grid 211 Acceleration (in/sec^2)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT ACCE/211(T3RM)

YTITLE PSD - Grid 211 (G^2/Hz)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,PSDF,ACCE /211(T3) $ ignored if no random

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

$randps,sid,j,k,x,y,tid

RANDPS,33,1,1,1.,0.,44

PARAM,RMSINT,LOGLOG

TABRND1,44,log,log

+,10.,0.1,20.,0.1,50.,0.3,600.,0.3

+,1500.,0.12,2000.,0.12,ENDT

ENDDATA

External Superelement Data Recovery Input File for Superelement 20 for Random Analysis with SPCD
Method – 3 Step Method (ref: /seug/chapter18/cant-plate-spcd/external-3-step/recover20.dat)
The results for superelement 20 recovery:
CANTILEVER PLATE RANDOM EXAMPLE JULY 24, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10

SPCD-ENFORCED-ACCELERATION

EXTERNAL SE, 3-STEP METHOD, SE 20 DATA RECOVERY

X Y - O U T P U T S U M M A R Y ( A U T O O R P S D F )

PLOT CURVE FRAME CURVE ID./ RMS NO. POSITIVE XMIN FOR XMAX FOR YMIN FOR X FOR YMAX FOR X FOR*

TYPE TYPE NO. PANEL : GRID ID VALUE CROSSINGS ALL DATA ALL DATA ALL DATA YMIN ALL DATA YMAX

PSDF ACCE 2 211( 5) 2.183625E+04 7.184697E+02 1.000E+01 2.000E+03 1.070E+04 1.392E+03 1.751E+07 3.177E+01

Listing 18-13 External Superelement Assembly Results – 3 Step Method Data Recovery Run Results for
External Superelement 20

Main Index
 CHAPTER 18 823
Random Vibration with Superelements

Enforced Motion (Large Mass) Examples

MSC Nastran provides two methods for applying enforce motion: constraints (SPCD) or large mass. This
section provides examples for the large mass method. The internal superelements are based on a derivative
of the cantilever plate model used in Frequency Response Illustrative Example (Ch. 11).
With the exception of the applied loading, the procedure for random vibration with the large mass method
is the same as for the SPCD method. Rather than repeat all of the input, the difference in loading will be
highlighted and the example file locations identified. The following listing shows the differences between
the large mass and SPCD methods of applied load:
$ Loads for Load Case : Large-mass-enforced-acceleration

SPCADD 2 1 3

$ spcd method

$RLOAD1 4 5 1 ACCE

$ lgmass method

RLOAD1 4 5 1 LOAD

LSEQ 1 5 6

$ spcd method - remove for lgmass

$SPCD 6 999 3 1.

$ large mass - add conm2 and force

FORCE 6 999 0 1.e6 0. 0. 1.

CONM2 1000 999 0 1.e6

DLOAD 2 1. 1. 4

$ remove spc1 for lgmass method

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : enforced-grav-999z

$SPC1 1 3 999

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : fix-12456

SPC1 3 12456 999

$ Referenced Dynamic Load Tables

$ Dynamic Load Table : unit-grav-accel

TABLED1 1

0. 386.1 3000. 386.1 ENDT

Listing 18-14 Input Loading for Large Mass Method (ref: /seug/chapter18/cant-plate-large-
mass/baseline/freq-fresp-lgmass-random.bdf)

The following table lists the example files for the large mass method. The starting subdirectory is:
/seug/chapter18/cant-plate-large-mass:

Main Index
 824 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Electronics Board Example

Table 18-3 Example Files for Large Mass Method of Enforced Base Motion Acceleration with Random Analysis
Superelement
Approach Subdirectory Filename Description
None Baseline Freq-resp-lgmass-random.bdf Baseline solution for
comparison purposes
List (SESET) Seset Freq-resp-lgmass-random-seset.bdf List Superelement (SESET)
example
PART Part Freq-resp-lgmass-random-part.bdf PART Superelement Example
External 2-Step External-2-step create10.dat External superelement 10
reduction with EXTSEOUT
case control
create20.dat External superelement 20
reduction with EXTSEOUT
case control
Assemble-lgmass.dat External superelement
Assembly run
External 3-Step External 3-step create10.dat External superelement 10
reduction with EXTSEOUT
Case Control
create20.dat External superelement 20
reduction with EXTSEOUT
Case Control
Assemble-lgmass.dat External superelement
Assembly run with
EXTDROUT Case Control for
external data recovery
Recover10.dat External superelement 10 data
recovery run with EXTDRIN
Case Control
Recover20.dat External superelement 20 data
recovery run with EXTDRIN
Case Control

Electronics Board Example

The external superelement example is based on a derivative of the electronics board shown in Multiple Image
Example for Electronic Components (Ch. 13).

Main Index
 CHAPTER 18 825
Random Vibration with Superelements

Baseline
The baseline model is shown in the figure below. Grids 792, 1590, and 3396 represent the same corner of
a chip located in different locations; these grids will be used to compare the baseline solution with the various
superelement solutions.

Figure 18-15 Baseline Circuit Board Model (ref: /seug/chapter18/elec-board/baseline/elec-board-

random.bdf)

The power spectral density for the random analysis is the same as shown in Figure 18-2. The entries necessary
for the random analysis are highlighted in the listing below:
SOL 111

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

RANDOM=33

TITLE = electronic board enforced motion - 1g sine sweep + random

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = Baseline - no superelements

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = YES

LOADSET = 1

SDAMPING = 1

param,prgpst,no

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=SPCD-enforced-acceleration

METHOD = 1

FREQUENCY = 1

SPC = 2

DLOAD = 2

DISPLACEMENT(PLOT,SORT2,PHASE)=ALL

Main Index
 826 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Electronics Board Example

ACCELERATION(PLOT,SORT2,PHASE)=ALL

SPCFORCES(PLOT,SORT2,PHASE)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

OUTPUT(XYPLOT)

XLOG YES

XGRID LINES YES

YLOG YES

YGRID LINES YES

XTITLE Frequency (Hz)

YTITLE Grid 792 Acceleration (in/sec^2)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT ACCE/792(T3RM)

YTITLE PSD - Grid 792 (G^2/Hz)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,PSDF,ACCE /792(T3) $ ignored if no random

YTITLE Grid 1590 Acceleration (in/sec^2)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT ACCE/1590(T3RM)

YTITLE PSD - Grid 1590 (G^2/Hz)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,PSDF,ACCE /1590(T3) $ ignored if no random

YTITLE Grid 3396 Acceleration (in/sec^2)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT ACCE/3396(T3RM)

YTITLE PSD - Grid 3396 (G^2/Hz)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,PSDF,ACCE /3396(T3) $ ignored if no random

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

$randps,sid,j,k,x,y,tid

$[random and frequency solution output requests]

RANDPS,33,1,1,1.,0.,44

PARAM,RMSINT,LOGLOG

TABRND1,44,log,log

+,10.,0.1,20.,0.1,50.,0.3,600.,0.3

+,1500.,0.12,2000.,0.12,ENDT

FREQ2 1 10. 2000. 50

FREQ4 1 10. 2000. .3 3

TABDMP1 1 CRIT

0. .03 3000. .03 ENDT

EIGRL 1 0. 3000. 0

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : Screws

$SPC1 1 123456 805 824 838 1383 1402 1416

$ load application point:

GRID,9999,0,4.125,2.125

$ RBE to original boundaries

Main Index
 CHAPTER 18 827
Random Vibration with Superelements

RBE2,10000,9999,123456,805,824,838,1383,1402

,1416

$ Loads for Load Case : SPCD-enforced-acceleration

SPCADD 2 1 3

RLOAD1 4 5 1 ACCE

LSEQ 1 5 6

SPCD 6 9999 3 1.

DLOAD 2 1. 1. 4

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : enforced-grav-999z

SPC1 1 3 9999

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : fix-123456

SPC1 3 123456 9999

$ Referenced Dynamic Load Tables

$ Dynamic Load Table : unit-grav-accel

TABLED1 1

0. 386.1 3000. 386.1 ENDT

$ Referenced Coordinate Frames

ENDDATA

Listing 18-15 Frequency Response and Random Input Entries for Electronics Board Random Base Drive
Analysis

Refer to CHAPTER 19 for more information on the XYPLOT commands. The output from the XYPLOT
commands generates the following summary information in the .f06 file:
ELECTRONIC BOARD - 1G SINE SWEEP + RANDOM JULY 24, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10 PAGE 23

SPCD-ENFORCED-ACCELERATION

BASELINE - NO SUPERELEMENTS

X Y - O U T P U T S U M M A R Y ( A U T O O R P S D F )

PLOT CURVE FRAME CURVE ID./ RMS NO. POSITIVE XMIN FOR XMAX FOR YMIN FOR X FOR YMAX FOR X
FOR*

TYPE TYPE NO. PANEL : GRID ID VALUE CROSSINGS ALL DATA ALL DATA ALL DATA YMIN ALL DATA
YMAX

PSDF ACCE 4 792( 5) 1.481614E+04 3.468580E+02 1.000E+01 2.000E+03 1.059E+01 1.764E+03 1.260E+07
1.660E+02

PSDF ACCE 5 1590( 5) 1.978883E+04 5.469794E+02 1.000E+01 2.000E+03 1.919E+03 2.000E+03 1.863E+07
1.660E+02

PSDF ACCE 6 3396( 5) 2.349298E+04 6.393575E+02 1.000E+01 2.000E+03 6.747E+02 1.566E+03 2.323E+07
1.660E+02

Listing 18-16 Baseline Results for Electronics Board Random Base Drive Analysis

Main Index
 828 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Electronics Board Example

List Superelement
The list superelement example uses one chip (Superelement 10) as a primary superelement and images for
the remainder of the superelements using the CSUPER entry, i.e. Superelement 20-80 and 110-180 shown
in the figure below are images of superelement 10. For more details on CSUPER entry to generate image
superelements, refer to Using CSUPER (Ch. 13).

Listing 18-17 Image List Superelement Model Using CSUPER (Superelement ID in blue, baseline grid in black,
image superelement grid in red). (Ref: /seug/chapter18/elec-board/seset-csuper/elec-board-
random.bdf)

In this case, the baseline to superelement nodes map as follows:

Table 18-4 Map of Electronic Board Baseline Model Grid IDs to Image Superelement Grid IDs
Baseline Model Grid Superelement Number (Type) Equivalent Grid
792 10 (Primary) 792
1590 30 (Image) 792
3396 130 (Image) 792

The input file for the List (SESET) Superelement model with image (CSUPER) superelements is shown
below:
SOL 111

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

RANDOM=33

TITLE = electronic board enforced motion - 1g sine sweep + random

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

Main Index
 CHAPTER 18 829
Random Vibration with Superelements

LABEL = SESET with CSUPER Image

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = YES

LOADSET = 1

SDAMPING = 1

param,prgpst,no

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=SPCD-enforced-acceleration

METHOD = 1

FREQUENCY = 1

SPC = 2

DLOAD = 2

DISPLACEMENT(PLOT,SORT2,PHASE)=ALL

ACCELERATION(PLOT,SORT2,PHASE)=ALL

SPCFORCES(PLOT,SORT2,PHASE)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

OUTPUT(XYPLOT)

SEPLOT 10

XLOG YES

XGRID LINES YES

YLOG YES

YGRID LINES YES

XTITLE Frequency (Hz)

YTITLE Grid 792 Acceleration (in/sec^2)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT ACCE/792(T3RM)

YTITLE PSD - Grid 792 (G^2/Hz)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,PSDF,ACCE /792(T3) $ ignored if no random

SEPLOT 30

XLOG YES

XGRID LINES YES

YLOG YES

YGRID LINES YES

XTITLE Frequency (Hz)

YTITLE SE 30, Grid 792 Acceleration (in/sec^2)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT ACCE/792(T3RM)

YTITLE PSD - Grid 792 (G^2/Hz)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,PSDF,ACCE /792(T3) $ ignored if no random

SEPLOT 130

XLOG YES

XGRID LINES YES

YLOG YES

Main Index
 830 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Electronics Board Example

YGRID LINES YES

XTITLE Frequency (Hz)

YTITLE SE 130, Grid 792 Acceleration (in/sec^2)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT ACCE/792(T3RM)

YTITLE PSD - Grid 792 (G^2/Hz)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,PSDF,ACCE /792(T3) $ ignored if no random

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

$randps,sid,j,k,x,y,tid

RANDPS,33,1,1,1.,0.,44

PARAM,RMSINT,LOGLOG

TABRND1,44,log,log

+,10.,0.1,20.,0.1,50.,0.3,600.,0.3

+,1500.,0.12,2000.,0.12,ENDT

PARAM POST 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

FREQ2 1 10. 2000. 50

FREQ4 1 10. 2000. .3 3

TABDMP1 1 CRIT

0. .03 3000. .03 ENDT

EIGRL 1 0. 3000. 0

SPOINT,11001,THRU,11016

SEQSET1,10,0,11001,THRU,11016

SPOINT,12001,THRU,12016

SPOINT,13001,THRU,13016

SPOINT,14001,THRU,14016

SPOINT,15001,THRU,15016

SPOINT,16001,THRU,16016

SPOINT,17001,THRU,17016

SPOINT,18001,THRU,18016

SPOINT,11101,THRU,11116

SPOINT,12101,THRU,12116

SPOINT,13101,THRU,13116

SPOINT,14101,THRU,14116

SPOINT,15101,THRU,15116

SPOINT,16101,THRU,16116

SPOINT,17101,THRU,17116

SPOINT,18101,THRU,18116

$ Chip.10

SESET 10 709 THRU 792

SESET 10 796 797 798 802 803 804

Main Index
 CHAPTER 18 831
Random Vibration with Superelements

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : Screws

$SPC1 1 123456 805 824 838 1383 1402 1416

$ load application point:

GRID,9999,0,4.125,2.125

$ RBE to original boundaries

RBE2,10000,9999,123456,805,824,838,1383,1402

,1416

$ Loads for Load Case : SPCD-enforced-acceleration

SPCADD 2 1 3

RLOAD1 4 5 1 ACCE

LSEQ 1 5 6

SPCD 6 9999 3 1.

DLOAD 2 1. 1. 4

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : enforced-grav-999z

SPC1 1 3 9999

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : fix-123456

SPC1 3 123456 9999

$ Referenced Dynamic Load Tables

$ Dynamic Load Table : unit-grav-accel

TABLED1 1

0. 386.1 3000. 386.1 ENDT

$ CSUPER Entries

$.......2.......3.......4.......5.......6.......7.......8.......9.......0

CSUPER 20 10 878 881 1082 1085 12001 12002

12003 12004 12005 12006 12007 12008 12009 12010

12011 12012 12013 12014 12015 12016

CSUPER 30 10 882 885 1086 1089 13001 13002

13003 13004 13005 13006 13007 13008 13009 13010

13011 13012 13013 13014 13015 13016

CSUPER 40 10 886 889 1090 1093 14001 14002

14003 14004 14005 14006 14007 14008 14009 14010

14011 14012 14013 14014 14015 14016

CSUPER 50 10 890 893 1094 1097 15001 15002

15003 15004 15005 15006 15007 15008 15009 15010

15011 15012 15013 15014 15015 15016

CSUPER 60 10 894 897 1098 1101 16001 16002

16003 16004 16005 16006 16007 16008 16009 16010

16011 16012 16013 16014 16015 16016

CSUPER 70 10 898 901 1102 1105 17001 17002

17003 17004 17005 17006 17007 17008 17009 17010

17011 17012 17013 17014 17015 17016

CSUPER 80 10 902 905 1106 1109 18001 18002

18003 18004 18005 18006 18007 18008 18009 18010

Main Index
 832 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Electronics Board Example

18011 18012 18013 18014 18015 18016

CSUPER 120110 10 1319 1316 1115 1112 11101 11102

11103 11104 11105 11106 11107 11108 11109 11110

11111 11112 11113 11114 11115 11116

CSUPER 120120 10 1323 1320 1119 1116 12101 12102

12103 12104 12105 12106 12107 12108 12109 12110

12111 12112 12113 12114 12115 12116

CSUPER 120130 10 1327 1324 1123 1120 13101 13102

13103 13104 13105 13106 13107 13108 13109 13110

13111 13112 13113 13114 13115 13116

CSUPER 120140 10 1331 1328 1127 1124 14101 14102

14103 14104 14105 14106 14107 14108 14109 14110

14111 14112 14113 14114 14115 14116

CSUPER 120150 10 1335 1332 1131 1128 15101 15102

15103 15104 15105 15106 15107 15108 15109 15110

15111 15112 15113 15114 15115 15116

CSUPER 120160 10 1339 1336 1135 1132 16101 16102

16103 16104 16105 16106 16107 16108 16109 16110

16111 16112 16113 16114 16115 16116

CSUPER 120170 10 1343 1340 1139 1136 17101 17102

17103 17104 17105 17106 17107 17108 17109 17110

17111 17112 17113 17114 17115 17116

CSUPER 120180 10 1347 1344 1143 1140 18101 18102

18103 18104 18105 18106 18107 18108 18109 18110

18111 18112 18113 18114 18115 18116

ENDDATA

Listing 18-18 Electronics Board List (SESET) Superelement with Image Superelement (CSUPER) Input file for
Random Base Drive Analyis

The results are summarized in Table 18-6.

Part Superelement
The PART superelement example uses one chip (Superelement 10) as a primary superelement and images for
the remainder of the superelements using the SEBULK entry with the REPEAT option, i.e. Superelement
20-80 and 110-180 shown in the figure below are images of superelement 10. For more details on CSUPER
entry to generate image superelements, refer to Using SEBULK and SELOC to image a PART (Ch. 13).

Main Index
 CHAPTER 18 833
Random Vibration with Superelements

Figure 18-16 Image PART Superelement Model Using SEBULK and SELOC (Superelement ID in blue, baseline
grid in black, image superelement grid in red). (Ref: /seug/chapter18/elec-board/part/elec-board-random.bdf)

In this case, the baseline to superelement nodes map as follows:

Table 18-5 Map of Electronic Board Baseline Model Grid IDs to Image Superelement Grid IDs
Baseline Model Grid Superelement Number (Type) Equivalent Grid
792 10 (Primary) 792
1590 30 (Image) 792
3396 130 (Image) 792

The input file for the PART Superelement model with image (SEBULK and SELOC) superelements is
shown below:
SOL 111

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

RANDOM=33

TITLE = electronic board enforced motion - 1g sine sweep + random

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = PART Superelement with SEBULK Image

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = YES

LOADSET = 1

SDAMPING = 1

param,prgpst,no

param,rmsint,loglog

PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES

Main Index
 834 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Electronics Board Example

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=SPCD-enforced-acceleration

METHOD = 1

FREQUENCY = 1

SPC = 2

DLOAD = 2

DISPLACEMENT(PLOT,SORT2,PHASE)=ALL

ACCELERATION(PLOT,SORT2,PHASE)=ALL

SPCFORCES(PLOT,SORT2,PHASE)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

OUTPUT(XYPLOT)

SEPLOT 10

XLOG YES

XGRID LINES YES

YLOG YES

YGRID LINES YES

XTITLE Frequency (Hz)

YTITLE Grid 792 Acceleration (in/sec^2)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT ACCE/792(T3RM)

YTITLE PSD - Grid 792 (G^2/Hz)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,PSDF,ACCE /792(T3) $ ignored if no random

SEPLOT 30

XLOG YES

XGRID LINES YES

YLOG YES

YGRID LINES YES

XTITLE Frequency (Hz)

YTITLE SE 30, Grid 792 Acceleration (in/sec^2)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT ACCE/792(T3RM)

YTITLE PSD - Grid 792 (G^2/Hz)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,PSDF,ACCE /792(T3) $ ignored if no random

SEPLOT 130

XLOG YES

XGRID LINES YES

YLOG YES

YGRID LINES YES

XTITLE Frequency (Hz)

YTITLE SE 130, Grid 792 Acceleration (in/sec^2)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT ACCE/792(T3RM)

YTITLE PSD - Grid 792 (G^2/Hz)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,PSDF,ACCE /792(T3) $ ignored if no random

Main Index
 CHAPTER 18 835
Random Vibration with Superelements

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

$randps,sid,j,k,x,y,tid

RANDPS,33,1,1,1.,0.,44

PARAM,RMSINT,LOGLOG

TABRND1,44,log,log

+,10.,0.1,20.,0.1,50.,0.3,600.,0.3

+,1500.,0.12,2000.,0.12,ENDT

PARAM POST 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

FREQ2 1 10. 2000. 50

FREQ4 1 10. 2000. .3 3

TABDMP1 1 CRIT

0. .03 3000. .03 ENDT

EIGRL 1 0. 3000. 0

$.......2.......3.......4.......5.......6.......7.......8.......9.......0

SEBULK,20,REPEAT,10,AUTO

SEBULK,30,REPEAT,10,AUTO

SEBULK,40,REPEAT,10,AUTO

SEBULK,50,REPEAT,10,AUTO

SEBULK,60,REPEAT,10,AUTO

SEBULK,70,REPEAT,10,AUTO

SEBULK,80,REPEAT,10,AUTO

SELOC 20 874 877 1078 878 881 1082

SELOC 30 874 877 1078 882 885 1086

SELOC 40 874 877 1078 886 889 1090

SELOC 50 874 877 1078 890 893 1094

SELOC 60 874 877 1078 894 897 1098

SELOC 70 874 877 1078 898 901 1102

SELOC 80 874 877 1078 902 905 1106

SEBULK,110,REPEAT,10,AUTO

SEBULK,120,REPEAT,10,AUTO

SEBULK,130,REPEAT,10,AUTO

SEBULK,140,REPEAT,10,AUTO

SEBULK,150,REPEAT,10,AUTO

SEBULK,160,REPEAT,10,AUTO

SEBULK,170,REPEAT,10,AUTO

SEBULK,180,REPEAT,10,AUTO

SELOC 110 874 877 1078 1319 1316 1115

SELOC 120 874 877 1078 1323 1320 1119

SELOC 130 874 877 1078 1327 1324 1123

SELOC 140 874 877 1078 1331 1328 1127

Main Index
 836 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Electronics Board Example

SELOC 150 874 877 1078 1335 1332 1131

SELOC 160 874 877 1078 1339 1336 1135

SELOC 170 874 877 1078 1343 1340 1139

SELOC 180 874 877 1078 1347 1344 1143

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : Screws

$SPC1 1 123456 805 824 838 1383 1402 1416

$ load application point:

GRID,9999,0,4.125,2.125

$ RBE to original boundaries

RBE2,10000,9999,123456,805,824,838,1383,1402

,1416

$ Loads for Load Case : SPCD-enforced-acceleration

SPCADD 2 1 3

RLOAD1 4 5 1 ACCE

LSEQ 1 5 6

SPCD 6 9999 3 1.

DLOAD 2 1. 1. 4

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : enforced-grav-999z

SPC1 1 3 9999

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : fix-123456

SPC1 3 123456 9999

$ Referenced Dynamic Load Tables

$ Dynamic Load Table : unit-grav-accel

TABLED1 1

0. 386.1 3000. 386.1 ENDT

$$$Create two files, one that is strictly the chip and one that is the board (residual)

include 'residualboard.bdf'

Begin Super=10

include'chiponly.bdf'

$ dummy lseq

LSEQ 1 99 99

Begin Super=20

LSEQ 1 99 99

Begin Super=30

LSEQ 1 99 99

Begin Super=40

LSEQ 1 99 99

Begin Super=50

Main Index
 CHAPTER 18 837
Random Vibration with Superelements

LSEQ 1 99 99

Begin Super=60

LSEQ 1 99 99

Begin Super=70

LSEQ 1 99 99

Begin Super=80

LSEQ 1 99 99

Begin Super=110

LSEQ 1 99 99

Begin Super=120

LSEQ 1 99 99

Begin Super=130

LSEQ 1 99 99

Begin Super=140

LSEQ 1 99 99

Begin Super=150

LSEQ 1 99 99

Begin Super=160

LSEQ 1 99 99

Begin Super=170

LSEQ 1 99 99

Begin Super=180

LSEQ 1 99 99

Listing 18-19 Electronics Board PART Superelement with Image Superelement Input file for Random Base
Drive Analysis

The results are summarized in Table 18-6.

External Superelement
The electronics board can be solved efficiently by using external superelements. In examples, the chip is
reduced and reused multiple times. The DMIGDB option is used for the external superelement examples.
The reduction run for the chip is shown below:
assign master='chip.master' delete

assign dball='chip.dball' delete

$ NASTRAN input file created by the Patran 2010.2.3 64-Bit (MD Enabled)

$ input file translator on June 27, 2011 at 21:43:36.

$ Direct Text Input for Nastran System Cell Section

$ Direct Text Input for File Management Section

$ Direct Text Input for Executive Control

$ Normal Modes Analysis, Database

SOL 103

Main Index
 838 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Electronics Board Example

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = MSC Nastran job created on 22-Jun-11 at 16:14:40

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = NO

EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK=MANQ,EXTBULK,EXTID=10,DMIGDB)

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Center

METHOD = 1

VECTOR(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL

STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,CENTER)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

PARAM POST 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

EIGRL 1 10 0 MASS

SPOINT 11001 THRU 11016

QSET1 11001 THRU 11016

ASET1 123456 874 877 1078 1081

Listing 18-20 Reduction Run for Electronics Chip – 2 Step Method (ref: /seug/chapter18/elec-board/external-
2-step/chip-create-external-dmigdb.bdf)

The corresponding assembly run, attaching and locating the chip 16 times is shown below:
assign master='assy.master' delete

assign dball='assy.dball' delete

assign chipm='chip.master'

assign chipd='chip.dball'

DBLOCATE DB=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=10),LOGICAL=CHIPM

DBLOCATE DB=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=20),LOGICAL=CHIPM

DBLOCATE DB=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=30),LOGICAL=CHIPM

DBLOCATE DB=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=40),LOGICAL=CHIPM

DBLOCATE DB=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=50),LOGICAL=CHIPM

DBLOCATE DB=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=60),LOGICAL=CHIPM

DBLOCATE DB=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=70),LOGICAL=CHIPM

DBLOCATE DB=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=80),LOGICAL=CHIPM

DBLOCATE DB=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=110),LOGICAL=CHIPM

DBLOCATE DB=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=120),LOGICAL=CHIPM

DBLOCATE DB=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=130),LOGICAL=CHIPM

DBLOCATE DB=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=140),LOGICAL=CHIPM

Main Index
 CHAPTER 18 839
Random Vibration with Superelements

DBLOCATE DB=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=150),LOGICAL=CHIPM

DBLOCATE DB=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=160),LOGICAL=CHIPM

DBLOCATE DB=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=170),LOGICAL=CHIPM

DBLOCATE DB=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=180),LOGICAL=CHIPM

$ NASTRAN input file created by the Patran 2010.2.3 64-Bit (MD Enabled)

$ input file translator on June 27, 2011 at 17:47:21.

$ Direct Text Input for Nastran System Cell Section

$ Direct Text Input for File Management Section

$ Direct Text Input for Executive Control

$ Normal Modes Analysis, Database

SOL 111

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

RANDOM=33

TITLE = electronic board enforced motion - 1g sine sweep + random

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim

LABEL = Baseline - no superelements

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = YES

PARAM,RMSINT,LOGLOG

SDAMPING = 1

EXTDROUT(DMIGDB)

param,prgpst,no

PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=SPCD-enforced-acceleration

METHOD = 1

FREQUENCY = 1

SPC = 2

DLOAD = 2

DISPLACEMENT(PLOT,SORT2,PHASE)=ALL

ACCELERATION(PLOT,SORT2,PHASE)=ALL

SPCFORCES(PLOT,SORT2,PHASE)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

OUTPUT(XYPLOT)

SEPLOT 10

XLOG YES

XGRID LINES YES

YLOG YES

YGRID LINES YES

XTITLE Frequency (Hz)

YTITLE Grid 792 Acceleration (in/sec^2)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT ACCE/792(T3RM)

Main Index
 840 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Electronics Board Example

YTITLE PSD - Grid 792 (G^2/Hz)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,PSDF,ACCE /792(T3) $ ignored if no random

SEPLOT 30

XLOG YES

XGRID LINES YES

YLOG YES

YGRID LINES YES

XTITLE Frequency (Hz)

YTITLE SE 30, Grid 792 Acceleration (in/sec^2)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT ACCE/792(T3RM)

YTITLE PSD - Grid 792 (G^2/Hz)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,PSDF,ACCE /792(T3) $ ignored if no random

SEPLOT 130

XLOG YES

XGRID LINES YES

YLOG YES

YGRID LINES YES

XTITLE Frequency (Hz)

YTITLE SE 130, Grid 792 Acceleration (in/sec^2)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT ACCE/792(T3RM)

YTITLE PSD - Grid 792 (G^2/Hz)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,PSDF,ACCE /792(T3) $ ignored if no random

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

$randps,sid,j,k,x,y,tid

RANDPS,33,1,1,1.,0.,44

TABRND1,44,log,log

+,10.,0.1,20.,0.1,50.,0.3,600.,0.3

+,1500.,0.12,2000.,0.12,ENDT

PARAM POST 0

PARAM PRTMAXIM YES

FREQ2 1 10. 2000. 50

FREQ4 1 10. 2000. .3 3

TABDMP1 1 CRIT

0. .03 3000. .03 ENDT

EIGRL 1 10 0

$ load application point:

GRID,9999,0,4.125,2.125

$ RBE to original boundaries

RBE2,10000,9999,123456,805,824,838,1383,1402

,1416

Main Index
 CHAPTER 18 841
Random Vibration with Superelements

$ Loads for Load Case : SPCD-enforced-acceleration

SPCADD 2 1 3

RLOAD1 4 5 1 ACCE

SPCD 5 9999 3 1.

DLOAD 2 1. 1. 4

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : enforced-grav-999z

SPC1 1 3 9999

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : fix-123456

SPC1 3 123456 9999

$ Referenced Dynamic Load Tables

$ Dynamic Load Table : unit-grav-accel

TABLED1 1

0. 386.1 3000. 386.1 ENDT

SELOC 20 874 877 1078 878 881 1082

SELOC 30 874 877 1078 882 885 1086

SELOC 40 874 877 1078 886 889 1090

SELOC 50 874 877 1078 890 893 1094

SELOC 60 874 877 1078 894 897 1098

SELOC 70 874 877 1078 898 901 1102

SELOC 80 874 877 1078 902 905 1106

SELOC 110 874 877 1078 1319 1316 1115

SELOC 120 874 877 1078 1323 1320 1119

SELOC 130 874 877 1078 1327 1324 1123

SELOC 140 874 877 1078 1331 1328 1127

SELOC 150 874 877 1078 1335 1332 1131

SELOC 160 874 877 1078 1339 1336 1135

SELOC 170 874 877 1078 1343 1340 1139

SELOC 180 874 877 1078 1347 1344 1143

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

$include 'chip-create-external-dmigdb.asm'

SEBULK 10EXTERNAL MANUAL

SEBULK 20EXTERNAL MANUAL

SEBULK 30EXTERNAL MANUAL

SEBULK 40EXTERNAL MANUAL

SEBULK 50EXTERNAL MANUAL

SEBULK 60EXTERNAL MANUAL

SEBULK 70EXTERNAL MANUAL

SEBULK 80EXTERNAL MANUAL

SEBULK 110EXTERNAL MANUAL

SEBULK 120EXTERNAL MANUAL

Main Index
 842 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Electronics Board Example

SEBULK 130EXTERNAL MANUAL

SEBULK 140EXTERNAL MANUAL

SEBULK 150EXTERNAL MANUAL

SEBULK 160EXTERNAL MANUAL

SEBULK 170EXTERNAL MANUAL

SEBULK 180EXTERNAL MANUAL

SECONCT 10 0

874 874 877 877 1078 1078 1081 1081

11001 THRU 11016 11001 THRU 11016

SPOINT 11001 THRU 11016

SECONCT 20 0

874 878 877 881 1078 1082 1081 1085

11001 THRU 11016 12001 THRU 12016

SPOINT 12001 THRU 12016

SECONCT 30 0

874 882 877 885 1078 1086 1081 1089

11001 THRU 11016 13001 THRU 13016

SPOINT 13001 THRU 13016

SECONCT 40 0

874 886 877 889 1078 1090 1081 1093

11001 THRU 11016 14001 THRU 14016

SPOINT 14001 THRU 14016

SECONCT 50 0

874 890 877 893 1078 1094 1081 1097

11001 THRU 11016 15001 THRU 15016

SPOINT 15001 THRU 15016

SECONCT 60 0

874 894 877 897 1078 1098 1081 1101

11001 THRU 11016 16001 THRU 16016

SPOINT 16001 THRU 16016

SECONCT 70 0

874 898 877 901 1078 1102 1081 1105

11001 THRU 11016 17001 THRU 17016

SPOINT 17001 THRU 17016

SECONCT 80 0

874 902 877 905 1078 1106 1081 1109

11001 THRU 11016 18001 THRU 18016

SPOINT 18001 THRU 18016

SECONCT 110 0

874 1319 877 1316 1078 1115 1081 1112

11001 THRU 11016 11101 THRU 11116

Main Index
 CHAPTER 18 843
Random Vibration with Superelements

SPOINT 11101 THRU 11116

SECONCT 120 0

874 1323 877 1320 1078 1119 1081 1116

11001 THRU 11016 12101 THRU 12116

SPOINT 12101 THRU 12116

SECONCT 130 0

874 1327 877 1324 1078 1123 1081 1120

11001 THRU 11016 13101 THRU 13116

SPOINT 13101 THRU 13116

SECONCT 140 0

874 1331 877 1328 1078 1127 1081 1124

11001 THRU 11016 14101 THRU 14116

SPOINT 14101 THRU 14116

SECONCT 150 0

874 1335 877 1332 1078 1131 1081 1128

11001 THRU 11016 15101 THRU 15116

SPOINT 15101 THRU 15116

SECONCT 160 0

874 1339 877 1336 1078 1135 1081 1132

11001 THRU 11016 16101 THRU 16116

SPOINT 16101 THRU 16116

SECONCT 170 0

874 1343 877 1340 1078 1139 1081 1136

11001 THRU 11016 17101 THRU 17116

SPOINT 17101 THRU 17116

SECONCT 180 0

874 1347 877 1344 1078 1143 1081 1140

11001 THRU 11016 18101 THRU 18116

SPOINT 18101 THRU 18116

ENDDATA

Listing 18-21 Assembly Run for Electronics Board with Reused Chip Components – 2 Step Method (ref:
/seug/chapter18/elec-board/external-2-step/assemble-board-chips-dmigdb-random.bdf)

The results are summarized in Table 18-6.

The data recovery can be performed for the chip in any location by restarting the reduction solution database
and applying the appropriate boundary solution from the assembly run. Data recovery input files for
Superelement 10 and 130 are shown below:
assign run1M='chip.master'

assign run1D='chip.dball'

restart logi=run1M

assign assyM='assy.master'

assign assyD='assy.dball'

Main Index
 844 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Electronics Board Example

DBLOCATE DB=(EXTDB) WHERE(SEID=10),LOGICAL=ASSYM

SOL 111

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = Cantilever Plate Random Example

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, Eaglesim

LABEL = EXTERNAL SE, 3-step method, SE 10 data recovery

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = YES

EXTDRIN(DMIGDB)

RANDOM=33

PARAM,RMSINT,LOGLOG

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=SPCD-enforced-acceleration

METHOD = 10 $ original reduction

$ SPC = 2

DISPLACEMENT(PLOT,SORT2,PHASE)=ALL

ACCELERATION(PLOT,SORT2,PHASE)=ALL

SPCFORCES(PLOT,SORT2,PHASE)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

OUTPUT(XYPLOT)

$SEPLOT 10

XLOG YES

XGRID LINES YES

YLOG YES

YGRID LINES YES

XTITLE Frequency (Hz)

YTITLE Grid 792 Acceleration (in/sec^2)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT ACCE/792(T3RM)

YTITLE PSD - Grid 792 (G^2/Hz)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,PSDF,ACCE /792(T3) $ ignored if no random

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

$randps,sid,j,k,x,y,tid

RANDPS,33,1,1,1.,0.,44

TABRND1,44,log,log

+,10.,0.1,20.,0.1,50.,0.3,600.,0.3

+,1500.,0.12,2000.,0.12,ENDT

ENDDATA

Main Index
 CHAPTER 18 845
Random Vibration with Superelements

Listing 18-22 Data Recovery Run for Electronics Chip as Superelement 10 – 3 Step Method (ref:
/seug/chapter18/elec-board/external-3-step/recover-chip10.bdf)

assign run1M='chip.master'

assign run1D='chip.dball'

restart logi=run1M

assign assyM='assy.master'

assign assyD='assy.dball'

DBLOCATE DB=(EXTDB) WHERE(SEID=130),LOGICAL=ASSYM

SOL 111

CEND

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data

TITLE = Cantilever Plate Random Example

SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, Eaglesim

LABEL = EXTERNAL SE, 3-step method, SE 130 data recovery

ECHO = NONE

RESVEC = YES

EXTDRIN(DMIGDB)

RANDOM=33

PARAM,RMSINT,LOGLOG

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=SPCD-enforced-acceleration

METHOD = 10 $ original reduction

$ SPC = 2

DISPLACEMENT(PLOT,SORT2,PHASE)=ALL

ACCELERATION(PLOT,SORT2,PHASE)=ALL

SPCFORCES(PLOT,SORT2,PHASE)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

OUTPUT(XYPLOT)

$SEPLOT 10

XLOG YES

XGRID LINES YES

YLOG YES

YGRID LINES YES

XTITLE Frequency (Hz)

YTITLE Grid 792 Acceleration (in/sec^2)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT ACCE/792(T3RM)

YTITLE PSD - Grid 792 (G^2/Hz)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,PSDF,ACCE /792(T3) $ ignored if no random

Main Index
 846 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Electronics Board Example

BEGIN BULK

$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data

$randps,sid,j,k,x,y,tid

RANDPS,33,1,1,1.,0.,44

TABRND1,44,log,log

+,10.,0.1,20.,0.1,50.,0.3,600.,0.3

+,1500.,0.12,2000.,0.12,ENDT

ENDDATA

Listing 18-23 Data Recovery Run for Electronics Chip as Superelement 130 – 3 Step Method (ref:
/seug/chapter18/elec-board/external-3-step/recover-chip130.bdf

The results are summarized in Table 18-6.

Comparison of Results
The following table summarizes the results between the various solutions of the electronics board random
base drive analysis.

Table 18-6 Selected Results for Electronics Board Random Vibration Base Drive Example

Solution Baseline Grid Superelement ID / Grid G (RMS)

Baseline 792 0 / 792 1.481614E+04
1590 0 / 1590 1.978883E+04
3396 0 / 3396 2.349298E+04
SESET 792 10 / 792 1.481615E+04
1590 30 / 792 1.978884E+04
3396 130 / 792 2.349296E+04
PART 792 10 / 792 1.481625E+04
1590 30 / 792 1.978889E+04
3396 130 / 792 2.349305E+04
Second Step External 792 10 / 792 1.483775E+04
Superelement (OTM) 1590 30 / 792 1.966581E+04
3396 130 / 792 2.347352E+04
Third Step External 792 10 / 792 1.483876E+04
Superelement (restart) 1590 30 / 792 1.966612E+04
3396 130 / 792 2.347172E+04

Main Index
 CHAPTER 18 847
Random Vibration with Superelements

1.

Main Index
 848 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Electronics Board Example

Main Index
 Chapter 19: Output with XYPLOT
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User’s Guide

19 Output with XYPLOT


Introduction

Superelement Plotting with PLOT

XYPLOT Commands

Main Index
 850 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Introduction

Introduction
Typically a pre/post processor such as Patran is used to visualize the model and post process results. However,
there are some cases where visualization of imaged or relocated superelements is not possible with current
preprocessors. In this case, the MSC Nastran PLOT command provides a method for generating files
showing the full model including all superelements in their final position. Similarly, results output can be
plotted with the MSC Nastran XYPLOT command. Typically, XYPLOT results are only used for dynamic
response. The following subsections describe the PLOT and XYPLOT commands available in MSC Nastran.

Superelement Plotting with PLOT

In Chapter 13, Practical Image Superelements, there were several examples that demonstrated the use of
image superelements. The advantage of image superelements is that a superelement component can be
relocated, copied, or moved efficiently. Unfortunately most commercial pre/post processors do not have built
in functionality to manipulate and view imaged superelements. The MSC Nastran PLOT command can be
used to visualize the full model, including imaged superelements.
The PLOT instructions are contained in a special section of the case control delimited by the
OUTPUT(PLOT) entry. The PLOT commands have many options described in the Quick Reference
Guide in the OUTPUT(PLOT) section. A summary of the commands is shown below.

Table 19-1 Summary of OUTPUT(PLOT) Commands

OUTPUT(PLOT) Command Description
PLOTTER Selects format of plot file for interpretation by
plotter postprocessor.
ORTHOGRAPHIC Selects orthographic projection.
PERSPECTIVE Selects perspective projection.
STEREOSCOPIC Selects stereoscopic projection.
AXES Assigns axes of the basic coordinate system to the
observer’s coordinate system.
VIEW Defines the angular relationship between the
observer’s coordinate system (r, s, and t axes specified
on the AXES command) and the basic coordinate
system.
MAXIMUM DEFORM Defines the magnification of the maximum
displacement.
SCALE Defines reduction, as a scale factor, of the model’s
dimensions so that the model fits on a plot frame.
DISTORTION Specifies the distortion scale factors of axes in the
basic coordinate system.
CSCALE Defines scale factor for characters in the plot frame.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 19 851
Output with XYPLOT

Table 19-1 Summary of OUTPUT(PLOT) Commands

OUTPUT(PLOT) Command Description
ORIGIN Defines the origin of the plot frame with respect to
the origin of the (r, s, t) coordinate system defined
on the AXES command.
VANTAGE POINT Defines the location of the observer with respect to
the model in the (r, s, t) coordinate system defined
on the AXES command for perspective and
stereoscopic projections only.
PROJECTION Defines the separation, along the r-axis, between the
observer and the projection plane if not already
specified on the VANTAGE POINT command.
Used by stereoscopic projections only.
OCULAR SEPARATION Defines the separation of the left and right eye
vantage points along the s-axis for stereoscopic
projections.
CAMERA Specifies microfilm plotter options.
PAPER SIZE Defines the size and type of the paper.
PEN Generates a message on the printed output to
inform the plotter operator as to what size and color
pen point to mount in the various pen holders.
PTITLE Defines a character string that will appear at the top
of the plot frame on the line below the sequence
number.
SET Defines a set of elements and/or grid points to be
plotted.
FIND Requests the plotter to optimally compute any of the
parameters that can
be specified on the SCALE, ORIGIN i, and/or
VANTAGE POINT
commands.
CONTOUR Specifies contour plot options for stress,
displacement, or temperature.
PLOT Generates an undeformed plot or a deformed plot
per subcase, mode number, frequency, or time step.
A contour plot may also be requested with an
undeformed or deformed plot.

PLOT Undeformed and Deformed Plot Request

Main Index
 852 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Superelement Plotting with PLOT

Generates either undeformed or deformed plots for a subcase, mode number, or time step.
Format:

 
PLOT  analysis   dtype   CONTOUR   i1 i2 THRU i3 i4 etc·   RANGE f1 f2  
 TIME t1 t2 

 
 PHASELAG  
  MAXIMUM DEFORMATION d 
 MAGNITUDE 
 

 SYMMETRY   PEN 
SET sid1 ORIGIN oid1  w  p PRINT
 ANTISYMMETRY   DENSITY 

 SHAPE 
LABEL label   VECTOR v PRINT
 OUTLINE 

SHRINK t o NORMALS

SET sid2 ORIGIN oid2  etc (19-1)

Field Contents
Analysis Type of results (STATIC, MODAL, CMODAL, TRANSIENT,
FRQUENCY, SENOMOVE)
Dtype Specifies plot quantity (DEFORM, VELOCITY, ACCELERATION)
CONTOUR Request for contour plot
i1,i2,… Subcase identification numbers (default = all)
RANGE f1 f2 Specifies range of natural frequencies, eigenvalues, or excitation
TIME t1,t2 Frequencies, time steps, or load factors.
PHASE LAG Specifies phase lag (in degrees) for complex quantities
MAGNITUDE Requests magnitude of complex quantities
MAXIMUM Specifies magnification of the maximum displacement
DEFORMATION d

Main Index
 CHAPTER 19 853
Output with XYPLOT

Field Contents
SET sid Set identification number which defines elements or grids to be plotted
ORIGIN oid Origin identification number
SYMMETRY w Request plot of the symmetric portion of the symmetrically or
antisymmetrically loaded model.
ANTISYMMETRY w
PEN p Pen number used to generate the plot
DENSITY d Specifies line density scale factor.
SYMBOLS m[,n] Specifies symbol to use at grid points (refer to Quick Reference Guide for
more details)
LABEL label Specifies labeling for grids and elements (GRID, ELEMENTS, BOTH) –
(refer to Quick Reference Guide for more details)
SHAPE All elements in SET are shown by connecting grid points in a specified
manner.
OUTLINE Outline all of the elements in the specified SET.
VECTOR v A line representing length and deformation of displacement (refer to Quick
Reference Guide for more details)
PRINT List of the average stresses at the interior grid points in the set will be printed
for contour stress plots
SHRINK t,o t is the ratio of reduction for 2d elements
o is the ratio of reduction for 1d elements
NORMALS Plot vector normal to CHBDYP and CHBDYG elements

Only a few of these options will be described in the subsequent section.

PART Superelement Example

Consider the simplified jet example shown in the figure below (ref /doc/seug/chapter19/jet101.dat):

Main Index
 854 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Superelement Plotting with PLOT

For this example, the primary and secondary superelements and their positioning / imaging requirements are
described as follows:

Table 19-2 Description of jet101.dat Superelements

Superelement ID Type Description Comment
1 Primary Fuselage Created in proper location
2 Primary Right Inboard Wing Repositioned with SELOC
3 Primary Right Outboard Wing Repositioned with SELOC
4 Primary Vertical Tail Repositioned with SELOC
5 Primary Left Horizontal Stabilizer Repositioned with SELOC
12 Secondary image Left Inboard Wing Mirror of SE 2
13 Secondary image Left Outboard Wing Mirror of SE 3
15 Secondary image Right Horizontal Stabilizer Mirror of SE 5

Main Index
 CHAPTER 19 855
Output with XYPLOT

This model contains superelements that must be repositioned and superelements that must be mirrored. In
order to obtain a visual confirmation of the final locations and displacements, OUTPUT(PLOT) commands
are specified as follows:
SOL 101

CEND

TITLE = SE USING MIRROR IMAGE AND NASTRAN PLOTTING

ECHO = BOTH

DISP = ALL

STRESS = ALL

SPCFORCE = ALL

OLOAD = ALL

LOAD = 101

SPC = 100

OUTPUT(PLOT)

CSCALE 1.0

PLOTTER NAST

SET 1= ALL

AXES y , z, x

$isometric view

VIEW 210., 25. , 180.

$ $

seplot 1,2,3,4,5

ptitle = plot all primary se in their original positions

find scale origin 1 set 1

plot senomove set 1

seplot 1 thru 5

ptitle = prim se (fuse, rt inbd and outbd wing, vert and lt horz stab)

find scale origin 1 set 1

plot set 1

seplot 12,13,15

ptitle = plot all image se in original position

find scale origin 1 set 1

plot senomove set 1

seplot 12,13,15

ptitle = mirrored lt inbd wing, outbd wing, and rt horz stab

find scale origin 1 set 1

plot set 1

seupplot 0

ptitle = plot undeformed full model

find scale origin 1 set 1

Main Index
 856 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Superelement Plotting with PLOT

plot set 1

seupplot 0

ptitle = plot deformed full model

find scale origin 1 set 1

plot static deformation set 1 origin 1

BEGIN BULK

Listing 19-1 OUTPUT(PLOT) Commands for jet101.dat Example

The OUTPUT(PLOT) commands instruct MSC Nastran to generate a .plt file. The PLOTPS utility can
be used to translate the .plt file to a PostScript file (.ps). For more details on the plotps utility, refer to the
Using the Utility Programs (Ch. 6) in the MSC Nastran 2016 Installation and Operations Guide. On windows
systems, the command line to invoke the plotps utility is:
>c:/MSC Software/MD_Nastran/201013/md20101/win64/plotps.exe jet101.plt
The resulting .ps file can be print to a PostScript compatible printer or opened with viewers capable of
displaying PostScript files. The OUTPUT(PLOT) commands above generate the following figures:

Figure 19-1 Undeformed Plot of Primary Superelements in Original Position (jet1101.dat)

Main Index
 CHAPTER 19 857
Output with XYPLOT

Figure 19-2 Undeformed Plot of Primary Superelements in Final Position (SELOC), (jet101.dat)

Figure 19-3 Undeformed Plot of Secondary Superelements in Original Position (jet1101.dat)

Main Index
 858 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Superelement Plotting with PLOT

Figure 19-4 Undeformed Plot of Primary Superelements in Final (mirrored) Position (jet1101.dat)

Figure 19-5 Undeformed Plot of Full Model in Final Position (jet1101.dat)

Main Index
 CHAPTER 19 859
Output with XYPLOT

CSUPER Example
The flyswatter example from Section 13.2.1 can be used to demonstrate the OUTPUT(PLOT) for
CSUPER superelements. In this example, there are two copies and one mirror superelement. In order to
obtain a visual confirmation of the final locations and displacements, OUTPUT(PLOT) commands are
specified as follows (ref /doc/seug/chapter19/flyswatter-csuper-plot.bdf ) :
OUTPUT(PLOT)

CSCALE 1.0

PLOTTER NAST

SET 1= ALL

AXES x,y,z

$ front view

VIEW 0., 90., 90.

seupplot 0

ptitle = plot undeformed full model

find scale origin 1 set 1

plot set 1 label elements symbols 6

seupplot 0

ptitle = plot undeformed full model

find scale origin 1 set 1

plot set 1 label grids symbols 6

$ side view

VIEW 0., 0., 90.

seupplot 0

ptitle = plot deformed full model

find scale origin 1 set 1

plot static deformation set 1 origin 1 shape

Listing 19-2 OUTPUT(PLOT) Commands for flyswatter-csuper-plot.bdf Example

Main Index
 860 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Superelement Plotting with PLOT

Figure 19-6 Undeformed Plot of Full Model in Final Position with Element IDs (flyswatter-csuper-plot.bdf)

Main Index
 CHAPTER 19 861
Output with XYPLOT

Figure 19-7 Undeformed Plot of Full Model in Final Position with Grid IDs (flyswatter-csuper-plot.bdf)

Main Index
 862 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
XYPLOT Commands

Figure 19-8 Deformed Plot of Full Model, 3 Subcases (flyswatter-csuper-plot.bdf)

XYPLOT Commands
In CHAPTER 11, there were several examples that demonstrated the use of superelements in dynamic response
analysis. Although most commercial pre/post processors have built in functionality plot dynamic response,
many users continue to use the MSC Nastran XYPLOT commands to output and/or visualize dynamic
results.
The XYPLOT instructions are contained in a special section of the case control delimited by the
OUTPUT(XYPLOT) entry. The XYPLOT commands have many options described in the Quick Reference
Guide in the OUTPUT(XYPLOT)section.
XYPLOTs can be generated for 1-frame per page or 2-frames per page:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 19 863
Output with XYPLOT

Figure 19-9 Example of X-Y Plots: One Frame per Page and Two Frames per Page

A summary of the most common commands is shown below.

Table 19-3 Common XYPLOT Controls (All Curves)

XYPLOT Command (All Curves) Description
XMIN, XMAX Specifies the minimum and maximum values on the
x-axis on all curves
XLOG Selects logarithmic or linear x-axis on all curves
YAXIS Controls the plotting of y-axis on all curves.

XDIVISIONS Specifies spacing of tic marks on the x-axis for all

curves
XTITLE Defines x-axis title
TCURVE Defines title for top of plot frame

Main Index
 864 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
XYPLOT Commands

Table 19-3 Common XYPLOT Controls (All Curves)

XYPLOT Command (All Curves) Description
CSCALE Defines scale factor for characters in the plot frame
UPPER TICS Specifies how to draw tic marks on the upper / lower
edge and left / right edge
LOWER TICS
CURVELINESYMBOL Selects lines and/or symbols to be drawn through the
x-y points
CLEAR Resets x-y plot commands to default value

Table 19-4 Common XYPLOT Controls (One Frame per Page Curves)
XYPLOT Commands (1 Frame Curves) Description
YMIN, YMAX Specifies the minimum and maximum values on the
y-axis
XAXIS Controls the plotting of the x-axis
XGRID, YGRID Controls the drawing of grid lines in plot area
YLOG Selects logarithmic or linear y-axis
YTITLE Defines y-axis title

Table 19-5 Common XYPLOT Controls (Two Frame per Page Curves)
XYPLOT Command (2 Frame Curves) Description
YTMIN, YTMAX Specifies the Min/Max y-axis values for the plot.
(T=Top frame, B=Bottom frame)
YBMIN, YBMAX
XTGRID, XBGRID Controls drawing of grid lines in plot area (T=Top
frame, B=Bottom frame)
YTGRID, YBGRID
YTAXIS, YBAXIS Controls the plotting of the y-axis (T=Top frame,
B=Bottom frame)
YTLOG, YBLOG Selects logarithmic or linear y-axis (T=Top frame,
B=Bottom frame)
YTTITLE, TBTITLE Defines y-axis title (T=Top frame, B=Bottom frame)

MSC Nastran XYPLOT commands provide several formats for the output of X-Y data:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 19 865
Output with XYPLOT

Table 19-6 XYPLOT Data Generation Commands

XYPLOT Command Description
XYPAPLOT Generate X-Y plots for a printer
XYPEAK Print only the summary information
XYPLOT Generate X-Y plots for a plotter
XYPRINT Generate table of X-Y pairs in .f06 file
XYPUNCH Generate X-Y pairs in the PUNCH (.pch) file

The commands in Table 19-6 follow the same format as the XYPLOT command shown below:

XYPLOT Generate X-Y Plots for a Plotter

Generates X-Y Plots for a plotter

Format:
XYPLOT yvtype ptype [i1, i2, i3, …]/
id11 (itemu11 [,iteml11), id12 (itemu12 [,iteml12]), …/
id21 (itemu21 [,iteml21), id22 (itemu22 [,iteml22]), …/…

Field Contents
yvtype Type of y-value to be plotted. ACCE, BOUT, DISP, ELFORCE,
ENTHALPY, FLUX, FMPF, GPMF, HDOT, MPCF, LMPF,
NONLINEAR, OLOAD, PMPF, PRESSURE, SACCE, SDISP, SMPF,
SPCF, STEMP, STRAIN, STRESS, SVELO, TEMP, VECTOR, VELO, or
VG. – (refer to Quick Reference Guide for more details)
ptype Plot type defining meaning of i1, i2, etc., idi, itemui, and itemli. AUTO,
FREQ, MODE, PSDF, RESPONSE, SPECTRAL. – (refer to Quick
Reference Guide for more details)
i1,i2,… Subcase identification numbers for ptype=RESPONSE – (refer to Quick
Reference Guide for more details)

Main Index
 866 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
XYPLOT Commands

Field Contents
Idij Element, grid, scalar, or extra point identification number for y-value for
frame i.
itemuij Item code for y-value. itemuij is for upper half or whole itemlij curves on
frame i, and itemlij is for lower half curves only on frame i. If itemlij is not
specified, then whole frame curves will be plotted with itemuij. itemlij is
ignored for ptype=“AUTO”, “PSDF”, and “SPECTRAL” (Character or
Integer > 0).
For elements, the code represents a component of the element stress, strain,
or force and is described in and of the Guide. For ptype=“AUTO”and
“PSDF”, the complex stress or strain item codes need to be used. Since the
output quantities are real, you can use either the real or the imaginary item
code. Both will give the same result.
For grid points and pty=“RESPONSE”, the code is one of the mnemonics
T1, T2, T3, R1, R2, R3, T1RM, T2RM, T3RM, R1RM, R2RM, R3RM,
T1IP, T2IP, T3IP, R1IP, R2IP, or R3IP, where Ti stands for the i-th
translational component, Ri stands for the i-th rotational component, RM
means real or magnitude, and IP means imaginary or phase. For scalar or
extra points, or heat ransfer analysis, use T1, T1RM, or T1IP.
For grid points and ptype=“AUTO” or “PSDF”, the code is one of the
mnemonics T1, T2, T3, R1, R2, R3. For scalar or extra points, use T1.
For yvtype=VG, itemui and/or itemli can be “F” for frequency or “G” for
damping.

For superelement analysis the SEPLOT must be used to define the superelement which is used in the plot.

Illustrative Example: Modal Transient

The modal transient example in List Superelement Direct Reference to EXCITEDID (Ch. 11) will be used to
demonstrate the XYPLOT commands for a superelement modal transient solution. The model is included
in /doc/seug/ chapter19/mtran-plot.bdf.
The Case Control and XYPLOT commands in this model are:
SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Modal-Transient

METHOD = 1

TSTEP = 1

SPC = 2

DLOAD = 2

DISPLACEMENT(PLOT,SORT2,REAL)=ALL

VELOCITY(PLOT,SORT2,REAL)=ALL

Main Index
 CHAPTER 19 867
Output with XYPLOT

ACCELERATION(PLOT,SORT2,REAL)=ALL

SPCFORCES(PLOT,SORT2,REAL)=ALL

OLOAD(PLOT,SORT2,REAL)=ALL

STRESS(PLOT,SORT2,BILIN,VONM)=1

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

OUTPUT(XYPLOT)

$ xyoutput for residual

SEPLOT 0

$ set labels

XTITLE = Time (seconds)

$ add grid lines

XGRID LINES YES

YGRID LINES YES

$ create plot files for OLOAD

$ set xmin,xmax, ymin, ymax for OLOAD plot

XMIN .02

XMAX .10

YMIN -1.1

YMAX +1.1

YTITLE = Force 105 (pounds)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH OLOAD/105(T3)

$ clear all settings - xmin/xmax, ymin/ymax are not known for accelerations

CLEAR

$ set labels

XTITLE = Time (seconds)

$ create plot files for ACCELERATION

$ 2 plots on one page

XTGRID LINES YES

XBGRID LINES YES

YTGRID LINES YES

YBGRID LINES YES

$ plot acce 105-T3 on top frame, acce 205-T3 on bottom frame

YTTITLE=ACCE 105 T3 (in/sec**2)

YBTITLE=ACCE 205 T3 (in/sec**2)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH ACCE/105(T3,),205(,T3)

$ xyoutput for superelement 10

SEPLOT 10

$ clear all settings

CLEAR

XTITLE = Time (seconds)

$ add grid lines

XGRID LINES YES

YGRID LINES YES

Main Index
 868 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
XYPLOT Commands

$ set xmin,xmax, ymin, ymax for OLOAD plot

XMIN .02

XMAX .10

YMIN -1.1

YMAX +1.1

$ create plot files for OLOAD

YTITLE = Force 211 (pounds)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH OLOAD/211(T3)

$ clear all settings - xmin/xmax, ymin/ymax are not known for accelerations

CLEAR

$ set labels

XTITLE = Time (seconds)

$ add grid lines

XGRID LINES YES

YGRID LINES YES

$ create plot files for ACCELERATION

$ one plot per page:

YTITLE=ACCE 108 T3 (in/sec**2)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH ACCE/108(T3)

YTITLE=ACCE 211 T3 (in/sec**2)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH ACCE/211(T3)

$ 2 plots in same frame

YTITLE = ACCE 108 / 211 T3

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH ACCE/108(T3),211(T3)

$ 2 frames on one page

XTGRID LINES YES

XBGRID LINES YES

YTGRID LINES YES

YBGRID LINES YES

$ plot acce 108-T3 on top frame, acce 211-T3 on bottom frame

YTTITLE=ACCE 108 T3 (in/sec**2)

YBTITLE=ACCE 211 T3 (in/sec**2)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH ACCE/108(T3,),211(,T3)

SEPLOT 20

CLEAR

XTITLE = Time (seconds)

$ add grid lines

XGRID LINES YES

YGRID LINES YES

$ Create plot files for stress

YTITLE = VONM STRESS Elem 1, Grid 101

$ STRESS(BILIN) means output is for element type 144.

$ Grid 101 is corner 1. Item Code = 28

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH STRESS /1(28)

Main Index
 CHAPTER 19 869
Output with XYPLOT

YTITLE = SPCF GRID 101 MY

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH SPCF /101(R2)

BEGIN BULK

Listing 19-3 Modal Transient with Superelement XYPLOT Commands (Full)

Breaking down the curves one by one:

$ xyoutput for residual

SEPLOT 0

$ set labels

XTITLE = Time (seconds)

$ add grid lines

XGRID LINES YES

YGRID LINES YES

$ create plot files for OLOAD

$ set xmin,xmax, ymin, ymax for OLOAD plot

XMIN .02

XMAX .10

YMIN -1.1

YMAX +1.1

YTITLE = Force 105 (pounds)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH OLOAD/105(T3)

Listing 19-4 XYPLOT Commands for OLOAD of Grid 105 T3 – Single Frame

The resulting plot:

Main Index
 870 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
XYPLOT Commands

Figure 19-10 Plot for OLOAD of Grid 105 T3 – Single Frame

The resulting XY summary and XYPRINT in the .f06 file:

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 7321 (SEDRDR)

DATA RECOVERY FOR SUPERELEMENT 0 IS NOW INITIATED.

CANTILEVER BEAM MODAL TRANSIENT SOLUTION JUNE 25, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10

MODAL-TRANSIENT SUPERELEMENT 0

SESET SOLUTION, DIRECT REFERENCE, SEQSET SUBCASE 1

X Y - O U T P U T S U M M A R Y ( R E S P O N S E )

SUBCASE CURVE FRAME CURVE ID./ XMIN-FRAME/ XMAX-FRAME/ YMIN-FRAME/ X FOR YMAX-FRAME/ X FOR

ID TYPE NO. PANEL : GRID ID ALL DATA ALL DATA ALL DATA YMIN ALL DATA YMAX

1 LOAD 1 105( 5) 2.000000E-02 1.000000E-01 -1.000000E+00 3.680000E-02 1.000000E+00 4.440000E-02

Main Index
 CHAPTER 19 871
Output with XYPLOT

0.000000E+00 1.000000E+00 -1.000000E+00 3.680000E-02 1.000000E+00 4.440000E-02

P R I N T E D D A T A F O R T H I S C U R V E F O L L O W S

CANTILEVER BEAM MODAL TRANSIENT SOLUTION JUNE 25, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10 PAGE 31

MODAL-TRANSIENT SUPERELEMENT 0

SESET SOLUTION, DIRECT REFERENCE, SEQSET SUBCASE 1

LOAD CURVE ID = 105 COMPONENT = 5 WHOLE FRAME

PRINT NUMBER X-VALUE Y-VALUE CARD NUMBER

1 2.000000E-02 0.000000E+00 3

2 2.020000E-02 0.000000E+00 4

3 2.040000E-02 0.000000E+00 5

4 2.060000E-02 0.000000E+00 6

Listing 19-5 .f06 Output for XYPRINT of OLOAD of Grid 105 T3 – Single Frame

The resulting XYPUNCH data in the .pch file:

$SUBCASE 1 1

$LOAD 1 105 5 1 2

1 2.000000E-02 0.000000E+00 3

2 2.020000E-02 0.000000E+00 4

3 2.040000E-02 0.000000E+00 5

4 2.060000E-02 0.000000E+00 6

5 2.080000E-02 0.000000E+00 7

6 2.100000E-02 0.000000E+00 8

7 2.120000E-02 0.000000E+00 9

Listing 19-6 .pch Output for XYPUNCH of OLOAD of Grid 105 T3 – Single Frame

NOTE: the “105 5” maps to the “105 - T3” degree of freedom.

Also note that the .f06 and .pch files follow the same format for other quantities and will not be repeated for
this illustration. However, the XYPLOT commands will be mapped to their corresponding plots below.
$ clear all settings - xmin/xmax, ymin/ymax are not known for accelerations

CLEAR

$ set labels

XTITLE = Time (seconds)

$ create plot files for ACCELERATION

$ 2 plots on one page

XTGRID LINES YES

XBGRID LINES YES

YTGRID LINES YES

YBGRID LINES YES

$ plot acce 105-T3 on top frame, acce 205-T3 on bottom frame

YTTITLE=ACCE 105 T3 (in/sec**2)

YBTITLE=ACCE 205 T3 (in/sec**2)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH ACCE/105(T3,),205(,T3)

Main Index
 872 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
XYPLOT Commands

Listing 19-7 XYPLOT Commands for Acceleration of Grids 105 T3, 211 T3 – Two Frame

Figure 19-11 Plot for Acceleration of Grids 105 T3, 211 T3 – Two Frame

$ xyoutput for superelement 10

SEPLOT 10

$ clear all settings

CLEAR

XTITLE = Time (seconds)

$ add grid lines

XGRID LINES YES

YGRID LINES YES

Main Index
 CHAPTER 19 873
Output with XYPLOT

$ set xmin,xmax, ymin, ymax for OLOAD plot

XMIN .02

XMAX .10

YMIN -1.1

YMAX +1.1

$ create plot files for OLOAD

YTITLE = Force 211 (pounds)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH OLOAD/211(T3)

Listing 19-8 XYPLOT Commands for OLOAD of Grid 211 T3 (SEID=10) – Single Frame

Figure 19-12 2 Plot for OLOAD of Grid 211 T3 (SEID=10) – Single Frame

$ clear all settings - xmin/xmax, ymin/ymax are not known for accelerations

CLEAR

$ set labels

XTITLE = Time (seconds)

$ add grid lines

Main Index
 874 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
XYPLOT Commands

XGRID LINES YES

YGRID LINES YES

$ create plot files for ACCELERATION

$ one plot per page:

YTITLE=ACCE 108 T3 (in/sec**2)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH ACCE/108(T3)

YTITLE=ACCE 211 T3 (in/sec**2)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH ACCE/211(T3)

$ 2 plots in same frame

YTITLE = ACCE 108 / 211 T3

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH ACCE/108(T3),211(T3)

$ 2 frames on one page

XTGRID LINES YES

XBGRID LINES YES

YTGRID LINES YES

YBGRID LINES YES

$ plot acce 108-T3 on top frame, acce 211-T3 on bottom frame

YTTITLE=ACCE 108 T3 (in/sec**2)

YBTITLE=ACCE 211 T3 (in/sec**2)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH ACCE/108(T3,),211(,T3)

Listing 19-9 XYPLOT Commands for Single Frame, Multiple Plots on Single Frame, and 2-Frame Curves

Main Index
 CHAPTER 19 875
Output with XYPLOT

Listing 19-10 Plots for Single Frame, Multiple Plots on Single Frame, and 2-Frame Curves

SEPLOT 20

CLEAR

XTITLE = Time (seconds)

$ add grid lines

XGRID LINES YES

YGRID LINES YES

$ Create plot files for stress

Main Index
 876 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
XYPLOT Commands

YTITLE = VONM STRESS Elem 1, Grid 101

$ STRESS(BILIN) means output is for element type 144.

$ Grid 101 is corner 1. Item Code = 28

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH STRESS /1(28)

YTITLE = SPCF GRID 101 MY

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH SPCF /101(R2)

Listing 19-11 XYPLOT Commands for Superelement 20, Stress and SPCForce

Figure 19-13 Plots for Superelement 20, Stress and SPCForce

Illustrative Example: Modal Frequency Response

The modal transient example in Section 11.6.3 will be used to demonstrate the XYPLOT commands for a
superelement modal transient solution. The model is included in /doc/seug/ chapter19/mfreq-plot.bdf.
The Case Control and XYPLOT commands in this model are:
SDAMPING = 1

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Modal-Frequency

METHOD = 1

FREQUENCY = 1

SPC = 2

DLOAD = 2

DISPLACEMENT(PLOT,SORT1,PHASE)=ALL

VELOCITY(PLOT,SORT1,REAL)=ALL

Main Index
 CHAPTER 19 877
Output with XYPLOT

ACCELERATION(PLOT,SORT1,PHASE)=ALL

SPCFORCES(PLOT,SORT1,PHASE)=ALL

STRESS(PLOT,SORT1,PHASE,VONMISES,BILIN)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

OUTPUT(XYPLOT)

$ xyoutput for residual

SEPLOT 0

$ set labels

XTITLE = Frequency (Hz)

$ create plot files for ACCELERATION

$ 2 plots on one page, magnitude and phase

$ add grid lines

XTGRID LINES YES

XBGRID LINES YES

YTGRID LINES YES

YBGRID LINES YES

$ plot acce 105-T3 Phase on top frame, acce 105-T3 Mag on bottom frame

YTTITLE=ACCE 105 T3 Phase (degrees)

YBTITLE=ACCE 105 T3 Mag (in/sec**2)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH ACCE/105(T3IP,),105(,T3RM)

$ change to log-log for magnitude, log-linear for phase

YBLOG YES

XLOG YES

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH ACCE/105(T3IP,),105(,T3RM)

$ xyoutput for superelement 10

SEPLOT 10

$ set labels

XTITLE = Frequency (Hz)

$ add grid lines

XTGRID LINES YES

XBGRID LINES YES

YTGRID LINES YES

YBGRID LINES YES

YBLOG YES

XLOG YES

$ create plot files for ACCELERATION

YTTITLE=ACCE 211 T3 Phase (degrees)

YBTITLE=ACCE 211 T3 Mag (in/sec**2)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH ACCE/211(T3IP,),211(,T3RM)

SEPLOT 20

$ set labels

XTITLE = Frequency (Hz)

$ add grid lines

Main Index
 878 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
XYPLOT Commands

XTGRID LINES YES

XBGRID LINES YES

YTGRID LINES YES

YBGRID LINES YES

XLOG YES

YBLOG YES

YTTITLE = SPCF GRID 101 MY - Phase

YBTITLE = SPCF GRID 101 MY - Mag

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH SPCF /101(R2IP,),101(,R2RM)

BEGIN BULK

Listing 19-12 Frequency Response with Superelement XYPLOT Commands (Full)

Breaking down the curves for each superelement:

$ xyoutput for residual

SEPLOT 0

$ set labels

XTITLE = Frequency (Hz)

$ create plot files for ACCELERATION

$ 2 plots on one page, magnitude and phase

$ add grid lines

XTGRID LINES YES

XBGRID LINES YES

YTGRID LINES YES

YBGRID LINES YES

$ plot acce 105-T3 Phase on top frame, acce 105-T3 Mag on bottom frame

YTTITLE=ACCE 105 T3 Phase (degrees)

YBTITLE=ACCE 105 T3 Mag (in/sec**2)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH ACCE/105(T3IP,),105(,T3RM)

$ change to log-log for magnitude, log-linear for phase

YBLOG YES

XLOG YES

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH ACCE/105(T3IP,),105(,T3RM)

Listing 19-13 XYPLOT Commands for Residual Structure (Freq. Response)

Main Index
 CHAPTER 19 879
Output with XYPLOT

Figure 19-14 Plots for Residual Structure (Freq. Response)

DATA RECOVERY FOR SUPERELEMENT 0 IS NOW INITIATED.

CANTILEVER BEAM MODAL FREQUENCY RESPONSE SOLUTION JUNE 25, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10

MODAL-FREQUENCY SUPERELEMENT 0

LIST SUPERELEMENTS, LOADSET/LSEQ, SEQSET1 SUBCASE 1

X Y - O U T P U T S U M M A R Y ( R E S P O N S E )

SUBCASE CURVE FRAME CURVE ID./ XMIN-FRAME/ XMAX-FRAME/ YMIN-FRAME/ X FOR YMAX-FRAME/ X FOR

ID TYPE NO. PANEL : GRID ID ALL DATA ALL DATA ALL DATA YMIN ALL DATA YMAX

1 ACCE 1 105( 11,--) 1.000000E+01 1.000000E+03 2.606156E-01 1.096478E+02 3.597626E+02 1.202264E+02

1.000000E+01 1.000000E+03 2.606156E-01 1.096478E+02 3.597626E+02 1.202264E+02

P R I N T E D D A T A F O R T H I S C U R V E F O L L O W S

CANTILEVER BEAM MODAL FREQUENCY RESPONSE SOLUTION JUNE 25, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10

MODAL-FREQUENCY SUPERELEMENT 0

LIST SUPERELEMENTS, LOADSET/LSEQ, SEQSET1 SUBCASE 1

ACCELERATION CURVE ID = 105 COMPONENT = 11 UPPER FRAME

PRINT NUMBER X-VALUE Y-VALUE CARD NUMBER

1 1.000000E+01 1.787928E+02 3

2 1.096478E+01 1.786464E+02 4

3 1.202264E+01 1.784743E+02 5

4 1.318257E+01 1.782689E+02 6

5 1.445440E+01 1.780189E+02 7

6 1.584893E+01 1.777074E+02 8

Listing 19-14 XYPEAK and XYPRINT Results for Residual Structure (Freq. Response)

Main Index
 880 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
XYPLOT Commands

$SUBCASE 1 1

$ACCE 1 105 11 1 2

1 1.000000E+01 1.787928E+02 3

2 1.096478E+01 1.786464E+02 4

3 1.202264E+01 1.784743E+02 5

4 1.318257E+01 1.782689E+02 6

5 1.445440E+01 1.780189E+02 7

6 1.584893E+01 1.777074E+02 8

7 1.737801E+01 1.773068E+02 9

8 1.905461E+01 1.767698E+02 10

Listing 19-15 XYPUNCH Results for Residual Structure (Freq. Response)

Note: The “105 11” maps to the “105 - T3IP” degree of freedom.

Also note that the .f06 and .pch files follow the same format for other quantities and will not be repeated for
this illustration. However, the XYPLOT commands will be mapped to their corresponding plots below.
$ xyoutput for superelement 10

SEPLOT 10

$ set labels

XTITLE = Frequency (Hz)

$ add grid lines

XTGRID LINES YES

XBGRID LINES YES

YTGRID LINES YES

YBGRID LINES YES

YBLOG YES

XLOG YES

$ create plot files for ACCELERATION

YTTITLE=ACCE 211 T3 Phase (degrees)

YBTITLE=ACCE 211 T3 Mag (in/sec**2)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH ACCE/211(T3IP,),211(,T3RM)

Listing 19-16 5 XYPLOT Commands for Superelement 10 (Freq Response)

Main Index
 CHAPTER 19 881
Output with XYPLOT

Figure 19-15 Plot for Superelement 10 (Freq Response)

SEPLOT 20

$ set labels

XTITLE = Frequency (Hz)

$ add grid lines

XTGRID LINES YES

XBGRID LINES YES

YTGRID LINES YES

YBGRID LINES YES

XLOG YES

YBLOG YES

YTTITLE = SPCF GRID 101 MY - Phase

YBTITLE = SPCF GRID 101 MY - Mag

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH SPCF /101(R2IP,),101(,R2RM)

Listing 19-17 XYPLOT Commands for Superelement 20 (Freq Response)

Main Index
 882 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
XYPLOT Commands

Figure 19-16 Plot for Superelement 20 (Freq Response)

Illustrative Example: Random Vibration

The modal transient example in section Illustrative Example: Modal Frequency Response will be modified to
demonstrate the XYPLOT commands for a superelement modal transient solution with random response.
The model is included in /doc/seug/ chapter19/mfreq-rand-plot.bdf. The objective of this section is to
demonstrate the commands necessary to generate Power Spectral Density (PSD) plots using the XYPLOT
commands. Note that PSD plots are only available for one frame per page.
The Case Control and XYPLOT commands in this model are shown below (the differences from the example
in section Illustrative Example: Modal Frequency Response are highlighted):
SDAMPING = 1

SUBCASE 1

SUBTITLE=Modal-Frequency

METHOD = 1

FREQUENCY = 1

SPC = 2

DLOAD = 2

Main Index
 CHAPTER 19 883
Output with XYPLOT

RANDOM = 88

DISPLACEMENT(PLOT,SORT1,PHASE)=ALL

VELOCITY(PLOT,SORT1,REAL)=ALL

ACCELERATION(PLOT,SORT1,PHASE)=ALL

SPCFORCES(PLOT,SORT1,PHASE)=ALL

STRESS(PLOT,SORT1,PHASE,VONMISES,BILIN)=ALL

$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase

OUTPUT(XYPLOT)

$ xyoutput for residual

SEPLOT 0

$ set labels

XTITLE = Frequency (Hz)

$ create plot files for ACCELERATION

$ 2 plots on one page, magnitude and phase

$ add grid lines

XTGRID LINES YES

XBGRID LINES YES

YTGRID LINES YES

YBGRID LINES YES

$ plot acce 105-T3 Phase on top frame, acce 105-T3 Mag on bottom frame

YTTITLE=ACCE 105 T3 Phase (degrees)

YBTITLE=ACCE 105 T3 Mag (in/sec**2)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH ACCE/105(T3IP,),105(,T3RM)

$ change to log-log for magnitude, log-linear for phase

YBLOG YES

XLOG YES

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH ACCE/105(T3IP,),105(,T3RM)

$ psd for acceleration

XGRID LINES YES

YGRID LINES YES

YLOG YES

YTITLE PSDF ACCE 105 T3

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH ACCE PSDF / 105(T3RM)

$ xyoutput for superelement 10

SEPLOT 10

$ set labels

XTITLE = Frequency (Hz)

$ add grid lines

XTGRID LINES YES

XBGRID LINES YES

YTGRID LINES YES

YBGRID LINES YES

YBLOG YES

Main Index
 884 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
XYPLOT Commands

XLOG YES

$ create plot files for ACCELERATION

YTTITLE=ACCE 211 T3 Phase (degrees)

YBTITLE=ACCE 211 T3 Mag (in/sec**2)

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH ACCE/211(T3IP,),211(,T3RM)

$ psd for acceleration

XGRID LINES YES

YGRID LINES YES

YLOG YES

YTITLE PSDF ACCE 211 T3

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH ACCE PSDF / 211(T3RM)

SEPLOT 20

$ set labels

XTITLE = Frequency (Hz)

$ add grid lines

XTGRID LINES YES

XBGRID LINES YES

YTGRID LINES YES

YBGRID LINES YES

XLOG YES

YBLOG YES

YTTITLE = SPCF GRID 101 MY - Phase

YBTITLE = SPCF GRID 101 MY - Mag

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH SPCF /101(R2IP,),101(,R2RM)

$ psd for spc force

XGRID LINES YES

YGRID LINES YES

YLOG YES

YTITLE PSDF SPCF 101 R2

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH SPCF PSDF / 101(R2RM)

BEGIN BULK

RANDPS 88 1 1 1. 0. 89

TABRND1 89

0.0 0.0 20. 0. 100. .5 200. 0.5

1000. 0.1 2000. 0.1 ENDT

Listing 19-18 Frequency Response with Superelement XYPLOT Commands (Full)

The XYPLOT commands not highlighted above are described in the previous section. Breaking down the
curves for each superelement:
SEPLOT 0

$ set labels

Main Index
 CHAPTER 19 885
Output with XYPLOT

XTITLE = Frequency (Hz)

XLOG YES

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH ACCE/105(T3IP,),105(,T3RM)

$ psd for acceleration

XGRID LINES YES

YGRID LINES YES

YLOG YES

YTITLE PSDF ACCE 105 T3

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH ACCE PSDF / 105(T3RM)

Listing 19-19 XYPLOT Commands for Acceleration PSD for Residual Structure

Figure 19-17 Plot Results for Residual Structure (PSD Response)

CANTILEVER BEAM MODAL FREQUENCY RESPONSE SOLUTION JUNE 25, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10

MODAL-FREQUENCY SUPERELEMENT 0

LIST SUPERELEMENTS, LOADSET/LSEQ, SEQSET1

Main Index
 886 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
XYPLOT Commands

X Y - O U T P U T S U M M A R Y ( A U T O O R P S D F )

PLOT CURVE FRAME CURVE ID./ RMS NO. POSITIVE XMIN FOR XMAX FOR YMIN FOR X FOR YMAX FOR X FOR*

TYPE TYPE NO. PANEL : GRID ID VALUE CROSSINGS ALL DATA ALL DATA ALL DATA YMIN ALL DATA YMAX

PSDF ACCE 3 105( 5) 9.000029E+05 5.750994E+02 1.000E+01 1.000E+03 0.000E+00 1.000E+01 1.413E+10 5.477E+02

P R I N T E D D A T A F O R T H I S C U R V E F O L L O W S

CANTILEVER BEAM MODAL FREQUENCY RESPONSE SOLUTION JUNE 25, 2011 MSC Nastran 12/15/10

MODAL-FREQUENCY SUPERELEMENT 0

LIST SUPERELEMENTS, LOADSET/LSEQ, SEQSET1

ACCELERATION CURVE ID = 105 COMPONENT = 5 WHOLE FRAME

PRINT NUMBER X-VALUE Y-VALUE CARD NUMBER

1 1.000000E+01 0.000000E+00 322

2 1.096478E+01 0.000000E+00 323

3 1.202264E+01 0.000000E+00 324

4 1.318257E+01 0.000000E+00 325

5 1.445440E+01 0.000000E+00 326

Listing 19-20 XYPEAK and XYPRINT Results for Residual Structure (PSD Response)

$ACCE 3 105 5 9.000029E+05 5.750994E+02 321

1 1.000000E+01 0.000000E+00 322

2 1.096478E+01 0.000000E+00 323

3 1.202264E+01 0.000000E+00 324

4 1.318257E+01 0.000000E+00 325

5 1.445440E+01 0.000000E+00 326

6 1.584893E+01 0.000000E+00 327

7 1.737801E+01 0.000000E+00 328

8 1.905461E+01 0.000000E+00 329

Listing 19-21 XYPUNCH Results for Residual Structure (PSD Response)

$ xyoutput for superelement 10

SEPLOT 10

$ set labels

XTITLE = Frequency (Hz)

XLOG YES

$ psd for acceleration

XGRID LINES YES

YGRID LINES YES

YLOG YES

YTITLE PSDF ACCE 211 T3

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH ACCE PSDF / 211(T3RM)

Main Index
 CHAPTER 19 887
Output with XYPLOT

Listing 19-22 XYPLOT Commands for Acceleration PSD for Superelement 10

Figure 19-18 XYPLOT Commands for Acceleration PSD for Superelement 10

SEPLOT 20

$ set labels

XTITLE = Frequency (Hz)

XLOG YES

$ psd for spc force

XGRID LINES YES

YGRID LINES YES

YLOG YES

YTITLE PSDF SPCF 101 R2

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH SPCF PSDF / 101(R2RM)

Main Index
 888 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
XYPLOT Commands

Listing 19-23 XYPLOT Commands for SPCFORCE PSD for Superelement 20

Figure 19-19 Plot for SPCFORCE PSD for Superelement 20

1.

Main Index
 Chapter 20: Modules
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User’s Guide

20 Modules


Introduction

Module Instantiation

Automatic Contact Generation (ACG) with Modules

Geometric imperfection with Modules

Main Index
 890 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Introduction

Introduction
A Module is a standalone Bulk Data section typically representing a component of an overall assembly; e.g.,
an automobile wheel or fender. Modules are analogous to part superelements without reduction. Modules
allow the user to assemble multiple Bulk Data sections to form a single MSC Nastran input file
Each module is delimited by the BEGIN MODULE and END MODULE Bulk Data entries.

Just like in part superelements, each Module may have its own ID numbering scheme for grids, elements,
properties, etc. and the ID numbers do not have to be unique across Modules.
Modules are supported in following solution sequences (SOL):
 101: statics including contact analysis
 103: normal modes
 105: buckling
 107 and 110: direct and modal complex eigenvalue
 108 and 111: direct and modal frequency response
 109 and 112: direct and modal transient response
 400: Implicit nonlinear
 200: No optimization or sensitivity analysis

Connecting Modules to Other Modules

Modules offer a complete range of flexibility to the user when it comes to defining connections to a Module.
By default, the user must manually specify all connections between Modules using one or more of the

Main Index
 CHAPTER 20 891
Modules

methods described below. If, after all connections have been defined, any Module remains unconnected to
at least one other Module then a fatal message will be issued.

Manual Module Connections

Coincident connections may be specified by the MDCONCT entry. Modules also offers both flexible and
rigid connector elements as well as contact between bodies in different Modules. Flexible connectors include
MDWELD, MDSEAM, MDFAST, and MDDMIG entries which utilize the same technology from
CWELD, CSEAM, CFAST, and DMIG entries. Rigid connectors include the MDBOLT, MDMPC,
MDRBE2, MDRBE3, MDRJNT, and MDRROD entries which utilize the same technology from BOLT,
MPC, RBE2, RBE3, RJOINT, and RROD.

Automatic and Semi-Automatic Module Connections

Modules also offers an automatic connection feature to connect Modules. This is activated by specifying
AUTO in the METHOD field of the MDBULK Bulk Data entry. Then the program automatically connects
grids from a Module to any coincident grids in any other Modules or grids defined in the Main Bulk Data
Section. There is no need to be concerned with coordinate systems on these coincident points; MSC Nastran
automatically connects coincident points, accounting for differences in the output coordinate systems. No
special effort is required from the user to make the connection.
Semi-automatic Module connections are requested on the MDCONCT entry by specifying MID but not
GID. The program will then search for any GRID in Module MID that is coincident with the location
specified on the MDCONCT parent entry; i.e., the GRID or XYZ fields.
You may want to know if the grids have to be exactly coincident, or is there a tolerance? The answer is yes,
MSC Nastran has provisions to define a close enough tolerance for grids from different Modules to be
considered coincident. This is defined on the MDCONCT entry with the TOL field or on the MDBULK
entry with the TOL field.

Augment/Override Automatic Module Connections

The automatic connection feature in MSC Nastran is applicable to many models, but there are also many
situations where the automatic connection feature is inadequate or inappropriate. To overcome this, the
MDBULK, MDCONCT, MDBNDRY, and MDEXCLD Bulk Data entries may be used to manually control the
connections or override the default search:
 MDBULK: Defines search options (sets tolerance for coincident grid point checks).
 MDCONCT: Explicitly defines the GRIDs to be connected between Modules (override or
augment automatic search logic) and allows you to set the tolerance for the coincident point test.
 MDBNDRY: Defines a list of grid points that can be connected between a Module and one or more
Modules (used to limit the automatic search for coincident points).
 MDEXCLD: Provides a list of points in a Module that cannot be connected to one or more other
Modules (used to limit automatic search logic).

Main Index
 892 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Introduction

Module Results
Results are presented in a module-by-module basis (much like superelement results) and may be written to
the hdf5, f06, pch, and op2 files.
Grid points
 Physical: ACCELERATION, DISPLACEMENT, GPFORCE, GPKE, GPSTRAIN GPSTRESS
MPCFORCE OLOAD PACCELERATION SPCFORCE, VELOCITY
 Solution: SACCELERATION, SDISPLACEMENT, SVECTOR SVELOCITY, VECTOR
Elements
 FORCE STRAIN STRESS (including composite and intermediate station results)
 Energy Loss, Kinetic and Strain energies: EDE EKE ESE
 Equivalent Radiated Power: ERP
Dynamics
 Modal Effective Mass
• MEFFMASS
 Modal Participation Factors
• PFGRID PFPANEL PFMODE MCFRACTION
 Random response
• RANDOM RCROSS
 Virtual mass
• MPRES
 Response Spectra
• PARAM,RSPECTRA and PARAM,RSPEC
 Nonlinear load
• NLLOAD
 Modal energy
• MODALSE, MODALKE

Advanced Analysis Features Available with Modules

Modules may be specified along with the following analysis features.
 DOMAINSOLVER ACMS PARTOPT=DOF
 FATIGUE (NEF IV only)
 Contact
• NOLPRM diagnostics
• Automatic contact generation (ACG)

Main Index
 CHAPTER 20 893
Modules

• Nodal forces and stresses

• Cohesive contact resultants
• Contact pairs punch
• Iteration output
 Rotor dynamics
• Mass summaries
• CAMPBLL, DDVAL, RGYRO, ROTHYBD, ROTOR, ROTORG, RSPINR, RSPINT,
UNBALNC entries may be specified in a Module.
• A rotor cannot cross Module boundaries.
• ROTHYBD may be specified in a Module and may reference a HYBDAMP entry. But the
HYBDAMP entry must be specified in Module 0.
 Exterior Acoustics
• CACINF3, CACINF4, and PACINF entries must be specified in the Module which contains
the interior acoustic model.
• The acoustic field point mesh (BEGIN AFPM) must be specified between the last
ENDMODULE and ENDDATA statements. The acoustic field point mesh Bulk Data section
may not be specified inside a Module nor may it contain Modules.
 FRF/FBA
• FRF/FBA Analysis (SOLs 108 and 111).
• FRFXIT and FRFXIT1 Bulk Data entries may be specified in Module 0 only.
 Multidisciplinary analysis (SOL 200)
• Sensitivity and optimization analyses are not supported with Modules. The following
ANALYSIS Case Control command options are available:
ANALYSIS=STATICS, MODES, BUCK, DFREQ, MFREQ, MTRAN, DCEIG, MCEIG.
 External superelement creation
• External superelements may be generated from models that contain Modules as long as the
boundary definitions (ASETi/QSETi/SPOINT entries) reside in Module 0.
• ACCSSPT entries and any elements or grids where data recovery is required in the assembly
run must also reside in Module 0.
External superelements may not be attached to an assembly model that contains modules.

Example Summary
There are many example problems in the MSC Nastran installation tpl/modules and tpl/modules2
folders.

Main Index
 894 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Introduction

The problems and the corresponding models are listed in the following table:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 20 895
Modules

Problem Name Description Model Image

mod111_4 Rotating force due
to tire out of
balance—one
module in SOL
108

mod_103_8 Two modules in

SOL 103

brckt_mdrb Contains mdrbe2

e2 element

Main Index
 896 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Introduction

Problem Name Description Model Image

mod111_7 Tower Model with
three modules in
SOL 111

md109_1 MDRBE3 with

Modules in SOL
109

mdgcnt02 Contact between

bodies in different
modules

mdgcnt09 Contact between

nodes in different
modules in SOL
103

Main Index
 CHAPTER 20 897
Modules

Module Instantiation
Since V2018, Modules were introduced as new method of substructuring. Modules are similar to the Part
Superelement feature in which each substructure is defined by a standalone Bulk Data section delimited by
the BEGIN MODULE and ENDMODULE commands. Modules defined in this way are called primary
Modules. In V2019, Module instantiation provides the analyst with the ability to replicate or copy a Module
to a new location. In addition to a copy, the analyst is also able to mirror the Module to a new position. For
purposes of the discussion below, a primary Module is the Module being copied and the resulting copied
Module is called a secondary Module. Module 0 refers to the main Bulk Data section.

Benefits
Module instantiation is particularly useful when there are components of the structure that are repeated; for
example, gear teeth, turbine fan blades, RAM chips on a computer board or many components found in an
airplane or automobile. The primary benefit to the analyst is that there are fewer Bulk Data entries to
manage. In other words, Module instantiation greatly enhances user convenience and productivity by
eliminating the need to individually model geometrically identical Modules and contributes to enhanced
efficiency for performing the analysis of such assembled configurations.

Input
A secondary Module is first defined by the MDBULK entry by specifying TYPE=”REPEAT”, “MIRROR”,
or “MOVE” and the primary Module ID in the RMODID field:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
MDBULK MODID TYPE RMODID METHOD TOL

Describer Meaning
MODID Element identification number.
TYPE Module Type
(Character)
PRIMARY Module with its own BEGIN MODULE section (default)
REPEAT Module is identical copy of primary Module RMODID
MIRROR Module is mirror copy of primary Module RMODID
MOVE Module is identical or mirror of primary Module RMODID and the
copied module's repositioning is defined on the MDMOVE entry.
RMODID Identification number of the reference (or primary) Module, used only if TYPE = “REPEAT”,
“MIRROR” or “MOVE”. (Integer>0)

Main Index
 898 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Module Instantiation

Then the repositioning of the secondary is achieved with one of two user interfaces: Classic and Enhanced.
The Classic interface uses TYPE=”REPEAT” or TYPE=”MIRROR” and the Enhanced interface uses
TYPE=”MOVE”. For a given Module, the interfaces may not be combined.

Classic Interface
The Classic interface comprises the MDLOC and MDMPLN Bulk Data entries which are based upon the
SELOC and SEMPLN entries employed in Part Superelement instantiation. MDLOC defines a Module
copy by listing three non-collinear GRIDs or POINTs in the Primary Module and three corresponding
GRIDs or POINTs in Module 0. MDMPLN defines a Module copy/mirror by specifying three noncollinear
GRIDs or POINTs in the mirror plane. The GRIDs or POINTs referenced by MDMPLN are specified in
Module 0 only. A secondary Module may be created by both an MDMPLN and MDLOC entry but the
Module will be mirrored first according to the MDMPLN specification and then repositioned second
according to MDLOC. MDLOC and MDMPLN are specified in Module 0 only. Only one MDLOC and/or
MDMPLN may be specified for a given Module.

Enhanced Interface
The Enhanced interface comprises the MDMOVE, MDTRAN, MDROT1, MDROT2, MDMIR1, and
MDMIR2 entries. The MDBULK entry has TYPE=”MOVE” which requires an MDMOVE entry
identified by the secondary (or copied) Module's ID.

MDMOVE Defines a Module repositioning sequence. References MDMIRi, MDROTi, and

MDTRAN entries.

Then the MDMOVE entry defines a sequence of move “commands” described on one or more of the
following entries:

MDMIR1 Defines a Module mirror plane by three non-collinear GRIDs or POINTs on the mirror
plane
MDMIR2 Defines a Module mirror plane by specifying a pair of coordinate system axes defined by
a CORDij entry and a reference GRID or POINT through which the mirror plane will
be applied.
MDROT1 Defines a Module rotation by specifying the endpoints (GRIDs or POINTs) of a rotation
vector and a reference GRID or POINT about where the rotation occurs.
MDROT2 Defines a Module rotation by specifying a coordinate system axis defined by a CORDij
entry for the rotation vector and a reference GRID or POINT about where the rotation
occurs.
MDTRAN Defines a Module translation by specifying the endpoints (GRIDs or POINTs) of a
translation vector. The default magnitude of translation is the length of the vector.

MDMOVE, MDTRAN, MDROT1, MDROT2, MDMIR1, and MDMIR2 entries; and any GRIDs,
POINTs, or CORDij entries referenced by these entries, are specified in Module 0 only.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 20 899
Modules

Loading and Boundary Conditions in Secondary Modules

It should be noted that the secondary Module has its own basic coordinate system which we call the Module
Basic Coordinate System (MBCS) and, if any rotation or mirroring occurs, the MBCS will not have the same
orientation as Module 0's basic coordinate system which we call the Assembly Basic Coordinate System
(ABCS). If repositioning involves rotating or mirroring the Module, then the MBCS, and any CORDij
entries in the primary Module, will also be rotated or mirrored. Also, in the case of a mirror, the MBCS will
be a left-handed coordinate system. Thus, all GRID point loads, MPCs, and SPCs go through the same
rotation or mirroring as the Module-possibly causing unexpected results if the user has not planned for this
rotation or mirroring. The user is cautioned to check the OLOAD RESULTANTS carefully for any Modules
that are rotated during a repositioning or mirroring operation. Body loads defined by GRAV, RFORCE, and
ACCEL Bulk Data entries will be applied according to the ABCS.

Secondary Module's Bulk Data Section

By default, the secondary Module inherits all of the Bulk Data entries from it's primary or reference Module
and therefore the secondary Module does not require its own Bulk Data section (BDS). If, however the user
would like to define, for example, a new set of loads and/or boundary conditions for the secondary Module
then a BDS for the secondary is required and will contain only the entries for the new loads and/or boundary
conditions. Only those entries of the same name in the primary's BDS will be overridden by the secondary's
BDS. For example, a single FORCE entry in the secondary's BDS will only override all FORCE entries
copied from the primary's BDS. If the user just wants to ignore selected entries from the primary then the
EXCLUDE Bulk Data entry in the secondary's BDS may be specified.
It should be noted that any Bulk Data entry coming from the primary's BDS may be replaced or ignored in
the secondary's BDS except for GRID entries and any CORDij entries which affect the Module's geometry.

Output
Module Definition Table
The “MODULE DEFINITION TABLE” has been expanded to include the definition of secondary
Modules. The sample f06 excerpt shows that Module 10 is a primary Module which is being instantiated or
copied to secondary Modules 20, 30, and 40.

Main Index
 900 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Module Instantiation

MODULE DEFINITION TABLE (SORTED BY MODULE ID)

PRIMARY
MODULE MODULE TYPE LABEL
-------- -------- ----------------------------- ------------------
0 0 MAIN BULK DATA
10 0 PRIMARY (BEGIN MODULE) LOWER LEFT
20 10 COPY (MDBULK) UPPER LEFT
30 10 COPY (MDBULK) LOWER RIGHT
40 10 COPY (MDBULK) UPPER RIGHT
No other changes have been made to the format or contents of the f06, op2, or pch files.
An important point should be noted with respect to interpreting the grid point results of a secondary Module.
The grid point results; e.g., DISPLACEMENTs, SPCForces, OLOADs, etc., are interpreted according to the
MBCS as described above.

Guidelines and Limitations

V2021.1 has the current limitations:
 Create a Module copy from another Module copy. In other words, RMODID on the MDBULK
Bulk Data entry must refer to a primary Module.
 If MDMIR1 or MDMIR2 Bulk Data entry is referenced on MDMOVE entry, then it can only be
referenced as the first movement.
 Defining a group of Modules is not supported as well as copying the group.
 Modules embedded within another Module is not supported.

Examples
Flat Plate Model with One Primary and Three Secondary Modules
We will demonstrate the enhanced interface with a very simple flat plate model. The model may be found at
tpl/modules3/modules27.dat. The primary Module 10 has four CQUAD4 elements each measuring 1 cm
by 1 cm on the left below. We will create a copy called Module 30 with three movements by utilizing the
Enhanced Interface. To create Module 30 (indicated by dashed edges), we will first mirror Module 10 about
a plane parallel to the assembly basic XZ plane through GRID 107. The MDMIR1 entry below references
three POINTs in Module 0 which define this plane. We cannot use GRIDs 107 and 108 for P1 and P2 on
the MDMIR1 entry because these GRIDs are located in Module 10 and POINTs referenced by MDMIR1
must be defined in Module 0.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 20 901
Modules

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MDMIR1 MVID P1 P2 P3

Describer Meaning
MVID Move identification number to be referenced on an MDMOVE entry. (Integer>0)
Pi GRID or POINT identification numbers of three non-collinear points in Module 0.
(Integer>0)

Note how the MBCS is also mirrored in the figure above. Next, we will translate Module 30 by 2cm in the
assembly's x-direction using the MDTRAN entry. POINTs 3007 and 3008 (IDS and IDE) define a vector
in the assembly x-direction but its length is only 1cm so we must specify 2cm for MAG.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MDTRA MVID IDS IDE MAG
N

Describer Meaning
MVID Move identification number to be referenced on an MDMOVE entry. (Integer>0)
IDS GRID or POINT identification number of translation vector's starting point.
(Integer>0)

Main Index
 902 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Module Instantiation

IDE GRID or POINT identification number of translation vector's end point.

(Integer>0)
MAG Magnitude of translation. If blank or zero, then the length of the vector will be used.
(Real, Default=0.0)

Finally, we will rotate Module 30 by 90 degrees (MAG on MDROT1 entry) about a vector normal into the
page formed by POINTs 3000 and 3007 (IDS and IDE). The rotation will occur at POINT 1000 (RID).

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MDROT1 MVID RID IDS IDE MAG

Describer Meaning
MVID Move identification number to be referenced on an MDMOVE entry. (Integer>0)
RID GRID or POINT identification number of a reference point at which rotation will
occur. If blank or 0 then Module will be rotated about rotation vector defined from
IDS to IDE. (Integer≥0, Default=0)
IDS GRID or POINT identification number of rotation vector's starting point.
(Integer>0)

Main Index
 CHAPTER 20 903
Modules

IDE GRID or POINT identification number of rotation vector's end point. (Integer>0)
MAG Magnitude of rotation in degrees. (Real≠0.0)

We will now complete the model with Modules 20 and 40 and leave it to the reader to dissect the movement
commands.

Main Index
 904 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Module Instantiation

The applied loading is indicated by red arrows and constraints by green. The constraints and loads have to
applied according the mirrored and rotated coordinate systems. In BEGIN MODULE=10, GRID 101 is
allowed to slide in the y-direction. In BEGIN MODULE=20, SPC,1,101 is overridden by SPC,1,107. In
BEGIN MODULE=20, the SPC in BEGIN MODULE=10 is ignored and FORCE entries are defined. Note
that the force directions are applied in the negative x-direction because their direction is with respect to the
MBCS. Similarly, for BEGIN MODULE=40.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 20 905
Modules

The next examples are more complex than previous and show how the module copies are created with both
the classic and enhanced interface. All examples below are available in the tpl/modules3 folder.

Main Index
 906 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Module Instantiation

Main Index
 CHAPTER 20 907
Modules

Main Index
 908 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Module Instantiation

Main Index
 CHAPTER 20 909
Modules

Automatic Contact Generation (ACG) with Modules

Introduction
ACG had been supported for non-modules since 2018.0, ACG with modules is added in 2021.4.
ACG is activated by BCONACT=AUTO in case control command, this is the same when modules are
present, but ACG with modules has some special rules, it has two levels of processing: individual module and
across modules.
For individual module, the contact data generation is activated by a BCAUTOP entry in the module. If there
is no BCAUTOP in a particular module, no contact data will be generated for the module, and user supplied
contact data such as BCBODY1, BCONECT and others are allowed in the module. All contact pairs defined
by BCONECT entries will be used. This rule applies to module 0. Also if module 0 has geometric data, ACG
can construct contact bodies and/or pairs.
In the level of across modules, contact pair generation across modules is activated by a MDBCPAR entry in
module 0. The contact parameters for those pairs are defined by MDBCAPT. More details are given in the
below section on those entries.
Similar to non-module, ACG file is generated, BEGIN MODULE=id APPEND and ENDMODULE are
inserted to the file to indicate the module information.

User Interface
BCAUTOP Automatic contact generation property

There is no change in BCAUTOP entry. As mentioned above, BCAUTOP is required to generate contact
data within a module.

MDBCATP Defines Parameters of Across Modules for Automatic Contact Generation

Defines parameters for detecting contact pairs across modules for automatic contact generation (ACG). It is
similar to BCAUTOP but is used for contact pair detection, all the parameters for contact bodies in
BCAUTOP are excluded.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MDBCATP Param1 Value1 Param2 Value2 Param3 Value3
Parami Valuei

Example:
MDBCATP DISTANCE 0.3 DELSLD YES

Main Index
 910 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Automatic Contact Generation (ACG) with Modules

Describer Meaning
Param(i) Name of a parameter. Allowable names are given below (Character).

Value(i) Value of the parameter. See below (Real, Integer or character). See Remark 3.

Remarks:
1. Only one entry of MDBCATP is allowed.
2. This entry does not have effect if BCONTACT=AUTO is not present in case control section.
3. The parameters in this entry may be divided into two types - primary parameters and secondary
parameters. The primary parameters are the most important parameters for contact pair detection.
The secondary parameters are helpful for user to provide the more detail and further requirement for
contact model establishment and contact analysis with automatic contact generation. The primary
and secondary parameters are listed in the tables as follows.

Table 20-1 Primary Parameters in MDBCATP

Describer Meaning
CTYPE Characters, one of TOUCH(default), PGLUE, SGLUE and GGLUE. If CTYPE is
specified in both BCAUTOP entry and Case Control Command
BCONTACT=AUTO, the specification in this entry will be used.
DISTANCE Distance tolerance of contact pair. If the distance between any two points which are
belonging to two different contact bodies is less than this value, these two contact
bodies are recognized to be a contact pair. Default value of DISTANCE is 100 times
of contact ERROR tolerance. ERROR may be defined in either MDBCATP or left
blank. With default of ERROR, the code calculates ERROR as the smallest one of the
following values:
1 1/20 of the smallest nonzero element dimension (plates or solids) in the
contact body.
2 1/4 of the thinnest shell thickness in the contact body

Please see BCPARA for ERROR definition in detail.

Table 20-2 Secondary Parameters in MDBCATP

Describer Meaning
BEAMCNT Characters, YES or NO (default). Determining if beam is included in contact
definition.
YES BEAMs are included in the contact description.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 20 911
Modules

Describer Meaning
NO No BEAM is included in the contact description.

EDGECNT Characters, YES or NO (default). Determining if shell edge is included in contact

description.
YES The free and hard shell edges are included in the contact definition.

NO No shell edges are included in the contact definition.

FTYPE Characters, BLCOUL/BLSHEAR; or Integer, 6 / 7. BLCOUL or 6 is Bilinear

Coulomb friction. BLSHEAR or 7 is Bilinear Shear friction. Default is No Friction.
FRIC Friction coefficient. If the value is an integer, it represents the ID of a
TABLEM1,TABLEM2 or TABL3D, i.e., a temperature-dependent or multi-
dimensional table. (Real ≥ 0.0 or Integer > 0; Default = 0.0)
IGNTHK Character, YES or NO (default), Ignore thickness of shell for contact.

YES Ignore the thickness of the shell

NO Include the thickness of the shell

INISTF Character, YES or NO (default). Set the option of initial stress free.

YES Initial stress free contact.

NO General contact without implementation of initial stress free.

SelfCont Characters, YES or NO (default). Option of self-contact.

Note: The parameters defined in MDBCATP are applied only for BCONATCT=AUTO. Their
default values are defined only when BCONTACT=AUTO is applied. All the parameters in
BCPARA, BCONPRP and BCONPRG entries may be used in MDBCATP directly. For the
detailed list of these parameters, please refer to BCPARA, BCONPRP and BCONPRG

MDBCPAR Defines Candidates Modules for Automatic Contact Detection Across Modules

Defines modules as candidates for automatic contact detection across modules.

Main Index
 912 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Automatic Contact Generation (ACG) with Modules

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MDBCPAR SET3ID
MODID11 MODID21 MODID21 MODID22
MODID13 MODID23 MODID1i MODID2i

Example:
MDBCPAR 2
2 3 4 7

Describer Meaning
SET3ID Integer ≥ -1,default=-1. SET3 ID refers to a SET3 with DES=“MODULE”.

MODID1i The first module id of the candidate of contact detection between two modules

MODID2i The second module id of the candidate of contact detection between two modules.

Remarks:
1. Only one entry of MDBCPAR is allowed in module 0, and it must be in module 0.
2. MDBCPAR is used when BCONTACT=AUTO is set in case control command, and modules are
present.
3. When SET3ID is -1, all the modules will be used to detect contact pairs across them, when it is 0,and
when there is no continuation, no contact pair will be detected across modules. When SET3ID > 0,
the modules defined in the SET3 entry with SID=SET3ID and DES=”MODULE” will be used to
detect contact pairs across them. The distance tolerance of the pair detection is defined by
DISTANCE parameter in MDBCATP.
4. Continuations are optional.
5. The pairs of MODID1i and MODID2i are the pairs of two modules to be used to detect contact
pairs between them. The distance tolerance of the pair detection is defined by DISTANCE parameter
in MDBCATP

SET3 Defines a list of grids, elements, points or modules

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SET3 SID DES ID1 ID2 ... IDi

Example:
SET3 5 MODULE 0 THRU 6

Main Index
 CHAPTER 20 913
Modules

Describer Meaning
DES Set description (Character). Valid options are "GRID", "ELEM", "POINT",
"PROP", "RBEin", "RBEex" and "MODULE".

Remark:
1. When DES is "MODULE", IDi can be 0,otherwise it must be a positive number.

Example: Planetary Gear Model with ACG and Modules

The file is located at path tpl\modules4\mod_pgear_acg2.dat.
The model has BCONTACT=AUTO in case control, and there are 5 modules, each of which has a
BCAUTOP entry to active contact bodies and pairs generation. CTYPE of BCAUTOP in module 21 is
GGLUE so general glued contact pairs will be generated within module 21. MDBCPAR and MDBCATP
entries are put in module 0 to activate contact pair generation across modules, CTYPE is TOUCH so
touching contact pairs will be generated for across modules.

Main Index
 914 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Automatic Contact Generation (ACG) with Modules

The Figure 20-1 describes the model and input file.

Figure 20-1 Input File and Model

Main Index
 CHAPTER 20 915
Modules

The contact force plot is as shown Figure 20-2.

Figure 20-2 Contact Force

The ACG file is:

BEGIN MODULE=11 APPEND
BCBODY1 16 1 3D DEFORM 16
……
$ General glue contact inside module 11
BCONPRG 11 IGLUE 4
BCONECT 11 11 101 16 15
……
ENDMODULE
……
BEGIN MODULE=9 APPEND
BCBODY1 1 1 3D DEFORM 1
……
ENDMODULE
$ Touching contact across modules

Main Index
 916 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Geometric imperfection with Modules

BCONPRG 11 IGLUE 0 BIAS 0.95

BCONPRG 12 IGLUE 0 BIAS 0.95
……
……
MDBCNCT 11 11 101 1 1 11 16
MDBCNCT 12 12 102 1 1 21 14
……
MDBCTB1 0 ……
MDBCTB1 1 0 11 0 12 0 13 0
14 0 15 0 16 11 11 21
11

Geometric imperfection with Modules

Geometric imperfection capability is supported in SOL 400 with modules. Module IDs can be specified in
bulk data entry IMPGEOM and the impf text file. For details, refer to IMPGEOM entry in MSC Nastran Quick
Reference Guide.

User Interface
IMPGEOM Defines Geometric Imperfection

Defines geometric imperfection by selecting subcases, steps, mode numbers or increments from imperfection
input files. Used in SOL 400. MODID and MODIi in field 9 are added to express module id, integer ≥ 1.
Default is -1. -1 means the data is applied to the whole model. MODID or MODIDi ≥ 0 is used to specify
a module.

Format:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
IMPGEOM IMPFID SETID SCALE UNIT MODID
SUBCASE1 STEP1 MODEINC1 SETID1 SCALE1 UNIT1 MODID1
SUBCASEi STEPi MODEINCi SETIDi SCALE2 UNITi MODIDi
etc.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 20 917
Modules

Example:
IMPGEOM 1 0
1 3 1 0.011 34 1
1 3 2 0.002 34 2

Describer Meaning
IPMFID Identification number of imperfection case (integer >0, required)
SETID Default of SETIDi (integer ≥ 0, default=0)
SCALE Default of SCALEi (real, default=0.0)
UNIT Default of UNITi (integer ≥ 0, default=0)
MODID Default of MODIDi (integer ≥ -1, default=-1)
SUBCASEi Identification number of a subcase (integer ≥ 0, default=0)
STEPi Identification number of a step (integer ≥ 0, default=0)
MODEINCi Mode number if the selected step by SUBCASEi and STEPi or subcase by SUBCASEi is
a result of buckling analysis or modal analysis, increment number if the selected result is
from a static analysis. (integer ≥ 0, default=0)
SETIDi Identification number of a SET1 or SET3 bulk entry (integer ≥ 0, default = 0). When it
is defined, only the grid points with the id listed in SET1 or SET3 have geometric
imperfection effect. If a SET3 is used, it must be GRID type.
SCALEi Scale factor (real, default = 0.0)
UNITi Imperfection file unit number specified by ASSIGN HDF5IN, INPUTT2 or IMPFIN
FMS command.
MODIDi Module ID (integer ≥ -1, default=-1).

impf file with modules

The capability of geometric imperfection uses a text format of impf file as input imperfection file, for its
format, refer to remark 11. of IMPGEOM entry in MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
To support modules, BEGIN MODULE=modid and ENDMODULE are introduced. The grid IDs in between
them belong to the module with module ID=modid.

Example: mod_example.impf
# below grids are in module 0
1, 0.01, 0.0, 0.0
2, -0.001, -1.e-3, 0.0
……
# below are for module 10
begin module=10
1, -1.0000000E-2, 0.0000000E+00, 0.0000000E+00

Main Index
 918 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Geometric imperfection with Modules

2, -7.0000000E-02, 0.0000000E+00, 0.0000000E+00

3, -1.3900000E-01, 0.0000000E+00, 0.0000000E+00
……
endmodule
# below are for module 20
BEGIN MODULE 20
1, -1.0000000-3, 0.0000000E+00, 0.0000000E+00
2, -7.10E-02, 0.0000000E+00, 0.0000000E+00
3, -1.3900000E-01, 0.0000000E+00, 0.0000000E+00
ENDMODULE
……

Example: Nonlinear Static with Geometric Imperfection for Cylinders in Modules

This is an example to show modules in geometric imperfection. It has a pre-run, which uses a SOL 105 deck
to give buckling mode shapes as input of geometric imperfection of the second run. The file is at
tpl\modules4\mod_bclcyl_105.dat. The mode shape is as shown in the following figure. The left
side is module 1 and the right side is module 2.

Figure 20-3 Example of Modules in Geometric Imperfection

Main Index
 CHAPTER 20 919
Modules

The file of the second run is located at: tpl\modules4\mod_bclcyl_imp.dat.

This is a nonlinear static analysis of sol 400, there are two imperfection cases, the first is applying geometric
imperfection to the whole model and the second case applies to module 1 only. The definition of the two
cases is:
impcase,21,1,2
$ impgeom 1 has no modid is specified, apply to the entire model
impgeom, 1,
, 2, 1, 3, ,1.0, ,31
, 2, 1, 4, ,1.0, ,31
$ impgeom 2 has modid=2 specified, so only module 2 has geometric imperfect.
impgeom, 2,
, 2, 1, 3, ,1.0, ,31,2 $ only applies to module 2
, 2, 1, 4, ,1.0, ,31,2 $ only applies to module 2
The deformation plots are shown in the figures Figure 20-4 and Figure 20-5. Note that for imperfection case 1,
the plot of the two cylinders are very close whereas for case 2, displacement of module 2 is significantly larger
than module 1.

Main Index
 920 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Geometric imperfection with Modules

Figure 20-4 Deformation Plot of Imperfection Case 1

Figure 20-5 Deformation Plot of Imperfection Case 2

Main Index
 Chapter 21: Output Transformation Matrix
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User’s Guide

21 Output Transformation
Matrix

Introduction
 What is an OTM?

Generating OTMs

Available Types of OTM

How are OTMs Computed?

OFP Tables

OTM Content

Element Types for OTM Output

Storage Formats

Reference Documents

Main Index
 922 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Introduction

Introduction
This technical document examines the subject of Output Transformation Matrices (OTM) in MSC
Nastran™. OTMs may be generated when creating an external superelement, and are used to obtain response
quantities in the external superelement during the assembly level analysis.
Superelements are a way of rendering a component, or substructure, to a set of boundary behaviors. In this
way, a detailed and complex component may be reduced to a much smaller data set that describes the way
the component behaves at its boundary attachment points. The reduction process is numerically intensive,
and with internal superelements, unless restarts are used, must be carried out each time the model is analyzed.
In addition the full geometry of the components to be reduced must be present at analysis time. With external
superelements, the reduction process is executed only once and only the boundary data need be present at
analysis time. In other words, the interior details of the topology of the external superelement are not available
at the time of analysis. This is design intent and allows confidentiality to be maintained when dealing with
proprietary components. However, a consequence of the absence of the interior domain of the external
superelement is that detailed responses are not intrinsically available at analysis time. It is possible to recover
the response quantities in a subsequent restart analysis using the boundary solution from the assembly level
analysis, but there is a requirement to obtain response quantities at the assembly stage analysis for the interior
domain of the external superelement; OTMs facilitate this requirement without needing to reveal
confidential topology information.

What is an OTM?
OTM is an acronym for Output Transformation Matrix, and is a generic term for a matrix transformation
from boundary behavior to an interior response type. Typically the boundary behavior is the displacement
solution at a set of GRID points forming the interface boundary from the assembly level model to a
component. Displacements are used because the finite element method programmed in MSC Nastran™ is the
displacement method, so displacements are the primary variables output from problem solution. The interior
response type, which is the output from the transformation, depends on which type of response was
requested; common examples are displacements, velocities, accelerations, elements forces, spcforces,
mpcforces, stresses or strains.
If loads are output from the transformation, the OTM sometimes takes the name LTM, for Load
Transformation Matrix. If displacements are the subject of the OTM, it is sometimes called a DTM for
Displacement Transformation Matrix.
In the context of this document, and MSC Nastran™ in general, OTMs encompass all the types of response
outputs possible, so it is generally necessary to qualify the OTM by saying it is a displacement OTM, or a
stress OTM, and so on.
Having OTMs present at analysis time allows response quantities within an external component to be
computed at the same time as assembly level responses while maintaining confidentiality of the topology of
the external component in which the responses are computed. If a displacement OTM is used to compute
the displacement of an interior GRID point of an external superelement, only the GRID point ID and
displacement value are output, no information about the location of the GRID point is available. If a stress
OTM is used, only the element ID, the element type and stress values are output; there is no information
about the shape or location of the element, or its material properties.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 21 923
Output Transformation Matrix

Generating OTMs
OTMs may be generated automatically when MSC Nastran™ is used to create an external superelement using
the EXTSEOUT case control command. One or more types of OTM may be generated according to the
data recovery requests in the case control section of the external superelement generation input file.
When an input file is being prepared for the generation of an external superelement, the user decides which
GRID points in the input file will be used to attach the superelement to the assembly level analysis. These
GRID points define the boundary, or exterior points of the superelement and are explicitly defined to be in
the A set of the superelement. If component mode synthesis (CMS) is to be performed, at the users’
discretion, these boundary points may be held fixed or left free during the computation of the component
modes. By placing these boundary points on ASET/ASET1 or BSET/BSET1 or BNDFIX/BNDFIX1
entries, these points would be held fixed. If any points are to remain free during the computation of the
component modes, they are placed on CSET/CSET1 or BNDFREE/BNDFRE1 entries. By inference,
points not appearing on any of these entries are in the interior domain (the O set). By default, a displacement
OTM is always generated for the boundary points (the A set) of the external superelement and is used during
data recovery of the superelement. If PLOTEL elements are used to connect parts of the exterior and/or
interior points, displacement OTMs will also be generated for the points attached to the PLOTEL elements.
Any other OTMs need the definition of data recovery requests to initiate OTM generation for these items.
For example, if element force OTMs are required for elements 56 and 92 and elements stress OTMs are
required for elements 29 and 66, then the following data recovery requests will be needed.

Note: The stress request does not have the CORNER or BILIN option defined. OTMs for stress
are only possible at the element centers, and a request for corner output (SGAGE, BILIN,
CUBIC or CORNER) will fail to produce any stress OTM for the requested items. Of
course, you may request output for OTMs over the entire component by using the ALL
request, e.g. a request for STRAIN output at all elements would be STRAIN=ALL.

Available Types of OTM

The OTMs available for external superelements and their data recovery requests are shown in Table 21-1.
These can be divided into two major groups, the OTMs for point based response quantities (GRID points,
SPOINTs and EPOINTs) and the OTMs for element response quantities.

Main Index
 924 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
How are OTMs Computed?

Table 21-1 Available OTM Types

Data Recovery Type Description
Point based
DISPLACEMENT GRID point displacements.
VELOCITY GRID point velocities1.
ACCELERATION GRID point accelerations*.
SPCFORCE Forces of single point constraint.
MPCFORCE Forces of multi point constraint.
Element based
STRESS Element stresses at the element centers.
STRAIN Element strains at the element centers.
FORCE Element forces.
ELAFORCE Element elastic forces.

1The transformation for velocity and acceleration OTMs is the same as a displace-
ment OTM.

If data recovery of other items is required, the boundary solution from the assembly level analysis must be
recovered and applied to the external superelement in a subsequent restart run.

How are OTMs Computed?

OTMs are generated by imposing unit motion of the boundary points of the superelement one degree of
freedom (DOF) at a time. In other words, while all other boundary points are held fixed, each boundary
DOF in turn is moved by a unit displacement. This unit displacement at a single boundary DOF results in
a displaced shape of the interior points of the superelement, and each of these displaced shapes is recorded to
provide a complete set of displaced shapes. The displaced shapes are then used to compute derivative
responses (force, stress, strain, etc.) using standard data recovery methods in MSC Nastran™. This results in
a set of “unit” response tables which contain all the information needed to compute the interior responses
due to any specific displaced shape of the boundary points. These unit response tables are formatted using
the OFP (Output File Processor) format of MSC Nastran™, which means that if they were printed to the f06
file using standard methods, they would appear in standard output format we are used to seeing for results.
Once the unit response tables are available, they are partitioned into a set of tables containing the formatting
data for the relevant response quantities, and a set of OTMs in matrix format. The OTMs may then be used
in a standard matrix multiply operation to compute the specific interior response quantities (in matrix
format) from the boundary displacement solution. This matrix format is then reassembled with the
partitioned table data to form a specific response table containing the interior response quantities ready for
output in standard format, or output to post processing files. These are the same data you will see in the f06
file if you ask for printed output of results quantities in an external superelement.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 21 925
Output Transformation Matrix

To make things clear, let’s first look at a simple case of a displacement OTM and how it is generated. This is
best illustrated with an example, so first let’s create an input file for MSC Nastran™ containing two beam
elements. One end of the beam model is fixed and the other end will be the boundary point of an external
superelement.

All 6 DOF of GRID point 3 are defined on an ASET1 entry, so this is the boundary point of the external
superelement. The EXTSEOUT command is used to choose the DMIGOP2 format for output and the
external superelement data will be written to the file assigned to unit 31, named se10.op2. A data recovery
request of DISP=ALL is used to request the displacements of all interior points at assembly time. Note the
addition of the DIAG entry which will allow us to see exactly where in the process of external superelement
generation the OTMs are created.
Running this job, the first point of interest in the f06 are the OUTPUT2 statements telling us what was
written to the op2 file connected to unit 31. This starts with the XSOP2DIR datablock, which is a table of
contents for the op2 file.

Main Index
 926 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
How are OTMs Computed?

Thereafter are a series of geometry datablocks containing the boundary GRID points and other superelement
connection data, followed by the reduced boundary matrices for stiffness, mass etc.. Towards the end of the
f06 file, we see the datablocks related to OTMs:

The first datablock (TUG1) is the table partition containing the formatting data for displacements (T for
Table, U for displacements, G for G size and 1 for sort 1 order). The second datablock (MUG1) is the matrix
(M for matrix) containing the transformation of unit movements of the boundary points to interior points
requested on the DISP command (i.e. ALL points). The third datablock (MUG1B) is the same
transformation of unit movements of the boundary points to interior points only expressed in the BASIC
coordinate system rather than the usual GLOBAL coordinate system. As we have no local coordinate systems
defined, MUG1 should be identical to MUG1B.
Now we know the names of the datablocks being created, we can look for them in the sequence of operations
that MSC Nastran™ is carrying out. A quick look in the f04 file for the external superelement creation run
shows us that TUG1 was created at line 588 in subDMAP EXTOUT:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 21 927
Output Transformation Matrix

From this we know that TUG1 & MUG1 were created from IUG1 on input to DRMH1. IUG1 are the unit
displacements in standard f06 output format. Moving back up the process, to find where IUG1 was created,
we module SDR2 is outputting IUG1 at line 541 in subDMAP EXTOUT:

from which we deduce that IUG1 is output by SDR2 from RGA; RGA are the complete set of displaced
shapes from the unit movement of the boundary DOF. Now we can see all the pieces, let’s have a look at the
contents of these datablocks. Firstly, let’s look at matrix RGA; we can print this matrix to the f06 file. When
we do, we see:

The exterior DOF of the external superelement are the 6 DOF of GRID point 3, and we see the number of
columns in RGA is equal to the number of DOF in the exterior set (6). The number of rows in RGA is equal
to the G size of the entire external superelement; this contains 3 GRID points, so 6 × 3 = 18 DOF. As the
exterior DOF all belong to GRID point 3, these are the last 6 rows in the matrix RGA, so we see the unit
displacements of GRID point 3 in columns 1 to 6 at row locations 13 to 18. The other terms in RGA are
how the interior DOF move when the exterior DOF are moved by a unit displacement, one at a time.
RGA is transformed to table IUG1 by SDR2, and as SDR2 outputs standard printable tables, we can print
IUG1 to the f06 file in a standard format to see its contents.

Main Index
 928 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
How are OTMs Computed?

Here we find the same values we saw in matrix RGA, only now they are presented in formatted style as
eigenvectors (thanks to SDR2) rather than as raw matrix data.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 21 929
Output Transformation Matrix

The next step is where the module DRMH1 separates the data in IUG1 into a table partition (TUG1) and
a matrix partition (MUG1) and we saw this occur at line 588 above. Let’s print the contents of MUG1 and
TUG1 to the f06 file.

For MUG1, we simply get back the matrix content of RGA. This is always the case for a displacement OTM,
except now MUG1 may contain fewer rows than RGA depending on the DISP= request in the case control.
As we requested DISP=ALL, the number of rows is the same. Here is the content of TUG1.

TUG1 contains formatting data used to describe how to put a general matrix (of the correct size) back
together with all the formatting data to obtain a table in the format of IUG1 but which contains the values
computed from the actual boundary displacements, not the unit ones. The content of this table is somewhat
dependent on the problem, and we will look at examples in section 7 along with the OTM table partitions
from other response types.
To summarize the process, the unit displacement table IUG1 for the requested GRID points on the case
control DISP= command is generated by SDR2 from the G size unit displacements in RGA. IUG1 is then
partitioned into TUG1 and MUG1 by DRMH1 when the external superelement is created. The partitioned
OTM table and matrix data are written to a file for later use. Moving now to the assembly level analysis, once
it is complete, the boundary solution at the external superelement connection points is available and MUG1
is used to obtain a new matrix, the same size as MUG1, containing the exterior and interior displacements
computed from the actual boundary solution and the MUG1 transformation matrix. The new matrix is then
reassembled with the TUG1 table partition to create a new table containing the actual boundary and interior
displacement solution in OFP format (see section 6) ready to print to the f06 file.

Main Index
 930 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
OFP Tables

OFP Tables
Before discussing the content of OTMs in detail, it is useful to give a brief introduction to the OFP (Output
File Processor) format defined in the NDDL for MSC Nastran™. We will only look at a couple of details that
are pertinent to OTM content. Further reading on OFP formats can be found in references 1. and 3.
All non-empty datablocks in MSC Nastran™ have a header record, one or more general records and a trailer
record. The header data appears in record 0 of the datablock. The trailer records for all matrices define their
topology (how many rows, how many columns, type of matrix, etc.), but the content of table trailers depends
on the table datablock. There are many different types of table datablock, but OFP tables all follow a strict
format so they may be printed to the f06 file by the OFP module.
OFP tables contain results data in a format that is ready to print to the f06 file; they contain the data you see
when you ask for DISP=ALL or STRESS=ALL, etc.. All OFP tables contain a record 0 (called the header
record) which holds its name, and the date it was created. From there, all records in OFP datablocks appear
in pairs with the odd numbered records called the IDENT records and the even numbered records called the
DATA records. The DATA records contain the data specific to the result type and we will not elaborate on
this. The IDENT records are always 146 words long, and contain data such as the SUBCASE number and
the TITLE, SUBTITLE and LABEL information defined at the subcase level as well as many other aspects
pertinent to the results content.
The process outlined in section How are OTMs Computed? partitions an OFP table into 2 OTM partitions. Once
the data recovery content has been computed from the matrix part of the OTM, the resulting matrix is
reassembled with the table partition OTM into a new OFP datablock ready to print to the f06 file. To do
this properly, the process needs to know some explicit aspects of the data in the OFP table. Of particular
interest in the context of OTMs is word 2 of the IDENT record which is called the TCODE word, or table
code. This is a composite integer value that stores more than one value, so it must be decoded to understand
its content. The right most 3 digits of the integer value tells us the table code. For example, if the value stored
in word 2 were 1005, dividing 1005 by 1000 leaves a remainder of 5, and this decoded table code value of
5 tells us the table contains element stresses or strains (the format is the same for both). A full list of table
codes can be found in 1 as well as the meaning of the other part of the composite number. As we will see, the
decoded value of TCODE turns up in word 3 of the table partition of the OTM data, and trailer word 5 of
the same holds the complete composite value; these will be needed at reassembly time.
If you want to know more about the content of OFP tables, consult reference 3..

OTM Content
In this section we will look closer at the content of the table and matrix partitions of the different OTMs in
order to understand these data.

Overview
A list of the different types of OTM available for output are given in Available Types of OTM. Section How are
OTMs Computed? outlined the process of obtaining the unit response tables which are specific to each OTM
type. The unit response tables are then split into a table partition and a matrix partition which is the OTM.
Although these tables and matrices contain information specific to the type of response, and in the case of

Main Index
 CHAPTER 21 931
Output Transformation Matrix

element response OTMs the type of element, the format of the data is somewhat generic, at least within the
two groups of points and elements.
Table 2 outlines some of the most often used data recovery requests, the correspond- ing names of the various
unit response tables from which the OTMs are partitioned (these are standard OFP tables) and their
respective table and OTM partition names. The names in brackets are the names found in record 0 inside
the table partition of the OTM after it has been partitioned to table and OTM data. A complete list of all
available OTM types and the names of the partitions can be found in section 9 below.
The OTM partition (i.e. the matrix partition) is simply matrix data in columns and rows. The columns are
always related to the ascending order of boundary DOF. The meaning of the values in the various rows
depends on the OTM type. Which data pertains to which interior point (if it is a point type OTM like
displacement or SPCFORCE) or element (if it is an element type OTM like stress) is to be found in the table
partition.
For point type OTMs, the table partition is comprised of 3 records numbered 0, 1 and 2. For element type
OTMs the table partition is comprised of 4 records numbered 0, 1, 2 and 3.
Record 0 is a 7 word header record where the first two, 4 byte words are the datablock name (the name in
brackets in column 3 of table 2). Often the name stored in the table is 4 or fewer characters in length in which
case the second word is blank. Word 3 of record 0 is the table code obtained from the TCODE value stored

Table 21-2 OTM Types and Names

Data Recovery Unit Response Table Partition Matrix Partition
Type Table (OFP) Name (OTM) Name
Point based
DISPLACEMENT IUG1 TUG1 (PHIP) MUG1
SPCFORCE IKQG1 TQG1 (TQP) MKQG1
MPCFORCE IKQMG1 TQMG1 (TQMP) MKQMG1
Element based
STRESS IES1 TES1 (TES) MES1
STRAIN IEE1 TEE1 (TEE) MEE1
FORCE IEF1 TEF1 (TEF) MEF1
ELAFORCE IELAF1 TELAF1 (TELAF) MELAF1

in word 2 of the OFP table (column 2 of Table 21-2) from which the table partition originates. The table code
identifies the type of data stored in the table and allows correct formatting of the data when it is printed. A
complete list of table codes can be found in reference [1], in the section OFP Tables. For example, a value of
7 means the table data are eigenvector displacements; a value of 4 means element force response and 5 means
stress or strain. The next two words are blank, and then word 6 indicates if the table contains real or complex
values. Word 7 does not appear to be used and is always 1.

Main Index
 932 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
OTM Content

Record 1 is simply a list of column numbers and the zero value in pairs. These data are no longer used by the
OTM processing in MSC Nastran™ but are maintained for backward compatibility. Although the record is
not used, it must exist.
Record 2 contains sets of 5 values. There will be as many sets as there are response items (points or elements)
in the OTM. The meaning of the 5 values is given in table 3

Table 21-3 OTM Table Partition, Record 2

Position in the 5
values Name Description
1 TYPE Point type or Element type.
2 ID The external ID of the entity (point/element).
3 COMP The number of terms in the matrix partition related to the
entity.
4 ROW The first row in the matrix partition where the data is to be
found for this entity.
5 <blank> Always zero - end of 5 value set.

The data stored in the first of the 5 values is named TYPE. If the table pertains to GRID point, SPOINT or
EPOINT quantities like displacement, velocities or SPCFORCES, then the value in the TYPE word will be
1 if the point is a GRID point, 2 if an SPOINT and 3 if an EPOINT. If the table pertains to element
quantities like stress or force, then the value in the TYPE word will be the element type number. A list of
supported element type numbers may be gleaned from the stress/strain and force item code tables in
reference 2.; these element types are repeated in Table 21-15 and Table 21-16 in section Element Types for OTM
Output for convenience.
The second of the 5 words in the set is the ID of the point or element. Word 3 tells us how many data items
there are in the matrix data related to the point or element identified by word 2. Word 4 tells us which row
number in the matrix data identifies the start of the data pertaining to the point or element identified by word
2. The fifth value is always zero.
If the OTM is an element type, record 3 contains additional data needed to reconstruct the OFP table of
response quantities at reassembly time. These data are dependent on the element type and will be explained
in the examples that follow.
The point type OTMs and element type OTMs described in the next sections illustrate the data formats
clearly.

Point OTMs
Point OTMs are applicable to GRID points, SPOINTs and even possibly EPOINTs and include the response
quantities of displacement, velocity, acceleration, SPCFORCE and MPCFORCE. The transformation from
boundary solution to interior points is the same for displacements, velocities and accelerations, so if these
quantities are requested at analysis time, the same transformation can be used for all 3 requests. Although the

Main Index
 CHAPTER 21 933
Output Transformation Matrix

SPCFORCE and MPCFORCE transformation will be different, as they are force quantities rather than
displacements (or derivatives thereof ), the format of the data is the same. However, note that for dynamic
analysis, these are based on displacements only and will not include contributions from damping or inertia.
As described in section How are OTMs Computed? the matrix partition are simply the displacements of the
boundary and selected interior DOF when each of the boundary points is moved by a unit displacement one
at a time while all other boundary points remain fixed. These are the responses to the unit displacements of
the boundary points. If component mode synthesis (CMS) was requested during the creation of the external
superelement, the modes and possibly residual vectors of the external component are stored in one or more
points (usually SPOINTs). These points are placed in the Q set of the external superelement and
consequently appear on its boundary and will therefore also appear in the OTMs.
The following example repeats the two beam example from above but also requests CMS by adding some
SPOINTs into the problem and placing them in the Q set. A METHOD case control command is used to
activate a bulk data EIGRL entry to compute the first 3 modes of the component with the boundary points
fixed. Residual vectors will be computed if applicable. We request DISP and SPCF output for all points, so
OTMs will be generated for these response quantities.

ASSIGN OUTPUT2=’se10.op2’,UNIT=31
DIAG 8,14,15,53,56
CEND EXTSEOUT(EXTBULK,ASMBULK,EXTID=10,DMIGOP2=31)
$
DISP=ALL
SPCF=ALL
$
SPC=1
METHOD=1
BEGIN BULK
EIGRL,1,,,3
SPC1,1,123456,1
GRID,1
GRID,2,,2.3
GRID,3,,5.1
CBEAM,1,1,1,2,,1.
CBEAM,2,1,2,3,,1.
PBEAM,1,1,.01,.02,.03,,.04
,.1,.1,.1,-.1,-.1,-.1,-.1,.1
MAT1,1,2+11,,.3,7850.
ASET1,123456,3
SPOINT,1001,THRU,1006
QSET1,0,1001,THRU,1006
ENDDATA

Main Index
 934 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
OTM Content

Six SPOINTs are defined, but only 4 will be needed as the EIGRL entry requests 3 modes and the problem
computes a single residual vector. Let’s print the table and matrix partitions of the displacement OTM
(TUG1 and MUG1) and the SPCFORCE OTM (TQG1 and MKQG1) generated by the DISP=ALL and
SPCF=ALL requests.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 21 935
Output Transformation Matrix

First, notice the matrix MUG1 now has 12 columns and 54 rows. Without the SPOINTs, this matrix had
dimensions 6 columns and 18 rows. The number of columns has increased by the number of boundary DOF
(6 SPOINTs), but curiously, the number of rows has increased not by 6, but 36. This is because the SPOINTs
are still assigned 6 DOF for their rows although they only describe 1 DOF each; the other 5 DOF per point
are null. Record 2 now has 2 types of point defined, type 1 (GRID points) and type 2 (SPOINTs).
As we saw in section How are OTMs Computed?, the rows of the first 6 columns describe how the interior DOF
move when the boundary DOF are moved by a unit displacement. Columns 7 to 10 describe how the interior
DOF move when the boundary DOF move in the shapes of the 3 normal modes and one residual vector,
normalized to a unit displacement at the boundary. Although there is allocation for 6 modes, only 4 are
occupied, so the remaining 2 columns show only a unit displacement at the boundary. These columns will
not be used as there are no modes associated with these columns.
Notice also that, apart from record 0, tables TUG1 and TQG1 contain the same data. They are both table
partitions relating to point type OTMs. Record 0 differs in the name it contains (PHIP for the displacements
and TQP for the SPCFORCEs) and the TCODE value stored in word 3 (7 for eigenvectors or displacements
and 3 for SPCFORCEs).
With record 2, we can now identify exactly where in the matrix partition the transformation information is
stored for each of the boundary points and each of the interior points. Let’s say we want to look at the
transformation terms for GRID point 2, we can use record 2 to pinpoint the rows of the matrix where these

Main Index
 936 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
OTM Content

data are stored. Record 2 states in words 16 to 20 that the point type is 1 (a GRID), the ID is 2, COMP is 6
so there are 6 values and ROW is 7 so the starting row is row 7. This means the sub-matrix defining the
transformation of the boundary points to the interior GRID point 2 are to be found in rows 7 to 12 of
MUG1 for the displacements and rows 7 to 12 of MKQG1 for the SPCFORCEs.
Once the assembly level analysis is completed, the matrix MUG1 (for displacements) and TQG1 (for
SPCFORCES) will be multiplied by the actual boundary displacements of the external superelements to
create a matrix containing the displacements and SPCFORCEs respectively of all the interior points defined
by the OTMs. When these data are then reassembled back to a table datablock in OFP format, the table
partitions TUG1 and TQG1 will attribute the relevant rows of their matrix partitions with the correct point
IDs.

Element OTMs
Element OTMs are applicable to the supported element types and include the response quantities of stress,
strain, force and more recently element elastic force. The transformation from boundary solution to interior
elements is different for each element type, although the format of the data is still generic and follows the
same logic as point OTMs. An additional record is required to handle the subtleties of the elemental response
quantities.

BEAM Element OTMs

The following example uses the two beam example above with stress and force output requests to obtain the
stress and force OTMs.
ASSIGN OUTPUT2=’se10.op2’,UNIT=31
DIAG 8,14,15,53,56
CEND EXTSEOUT(EXTBULK,ASMBULK,EXTID=10,DMIGOP2=31)
STRESS=ALL
FORCE=ALL
$
SPC=1
METHOD=1
BEGIN BULK
EIGRL,1,,,3
SPC1,1,123456,1
GRID,1
GRID,2,,2.3
GRID,3,,5.1
CBEAM,1,1,1,2,,1.
CBEAM,2,1,2,3,,1.
PBEAM,1,1,.01,.02,.03,,.04
,.1,.1,.1,-.1,-.1,-.1,-.1,.1
MAT1,1,2+11,,.3,7850.
ASET1,123456,3
SPOINT,1001,THRU,1006
QSET1,0,1001,THRU,1006
ENDDATA

Main Index
 CHAPTER 21 937
Output Transformation Matrix

The table and matrix partitions of the stress OTM (TES1 and MES1) and the force OTM (TEF1 and
MEF1) generated by the STRESS=ALL and FORCE=ALL requests are printed to examine their content.
First let’s look at the STRESS OTM.

For brevity, only the first column of data is shown for the matrix partition, which has the same number of
columns as the point OTM matrix partition because there are the same number of DOF in the boundary (6
DOF for the GRID point and 6 SPOINTs for the modal synthesis). However, there are a different number
of rows (88) compared with the point OTM (54) as the matrix is now describing BEAM element stress.
Record 0 shows the name TES in the first two words and word 3 (the table code) is the value 5. In reference
[1.], a table code of 5 means element stress (or strain). Notice that trailer word 5 contains the undecoded
table code value of 1005 (see section OFP Tables). Record 1 is the same as the point OTM. Record 2 has 2 sets
of 5 values because there are 2 elements in the interior of the external superelement and STRESS=ALL was
requested. With the point OTM, the TYPE word was used to identify the point type (GRID, SPOINT,
EPOINT) but with element OTMs the TYPE word is the element type number from table Table 21-10 or
table depending on whether the OTM is for stress/strain or force. Element type 2 is a BEAM element, which
is consistent with the model. The ID words of record 2 are 1 and 2, which is again consistent with the
element IDs interior to the external superelement. The COMP words for the two elements both have a value
44, and this tells us the number of response items for each element.
Consulting the stress items codes in reference [2.] shows that only 4 response quantities are output to OTMs
for the BEAM element (those marked with a superscript 1 in [2.]), and these are the longitudinal stresses at
the 4 stress recovery points defined on the PBEAM entry. Remember that the CBEAM element allows the
definition of up to 9 intermediate stations along its length where stresses may be recovered. With the stress

Main Index
 938 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
OTM Content

at either end, this makes 11 possible locations; 11 x 4 values = 44 and these are the 44 values alluded to in
the table partition. With 2 elements, the total number of rows in the matrix is therefore 2 x 44 = 88, which
is indeed how many rows there are in the matrix partition.
As with the point OTMs, the ROW word tells us at which row in the matrix data the set of 44 values starts
for each element, and a zero value in the fifth word terminates the 5 word set.
The table partition has an additional record number 3 with 96 words. There are 2 elements in the OTM as
each element uses 48, 4-byte words to describe the stress formatting data. Each piece of data is 2 words in
length, so the 48 word set is defining 24 values per BEAM element. The meaning of the 24 values is shown
in Table 21-4, and these are repeated for each BEAM element in the OTM.

Table 21-4 Record 3, Table Partition for BEAM Elements

Word in Set Description
1 Element type (2=BEAM)
2 Element ID
3 GRID point ID at end A of the element
4 First station parametric location
5 zero
6 Second station parametric location
7 zero
8 Third station parametric location
9 zero
10 Fourth station parametric location
11 zero
12 Fifth station parametric location
13 zero
14 Sixth station parametric location
15 zero
16 Seventh station parametric location
17 zero
18 Eighth station parametric location
19 zero
20 Ninth station parametric location
21 zero
22 Tenth station parametric location
23 GRID point ID at end B of the element
24 Last station parametric location

Main Index
 CHAPTER 21 939
Output Transformation Matrix

The force OTM is output in table TEF1 and matrix MEF1. For the two beam model these are:

Again, only the first column of data is shown for the matrix partition, which has 12 columns but now we see
154 rows describing BEAM element forces.
The table partition has 2 differences compared with the element stress OTM. Firstly, word 3 of record 0 is 4
instead of 5 and trailer word 5 is 1004; a table code of 4 from reference [2.] means element force. Secondly,
the COMP words are showing there are
77 values per element and the ROW word is the offset for the start of each element’s data in the matrix
partition.
Consulting the force items codes in reference [2.] shows that 7 response quantities are output to OTMs for
the BEAM element (those marked with a superscript 1 in [2.]), including the 2 bending moments and shears,
the axial force and total and warping torques. As the CBEAM element allows the definition of up to 9
intermediate stations along its length where stresses may be recovered, along with the force at either end, this
makes 11 possible locations; 11 x 7 = 77 values. With 2 elements, the total number of rows in the matrix is
therefore 2 x 77 = 154, which is indeed how many rows there are in the matrix partition.

Main Index
 940 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
OTM Content

BAR Element OTMs

The following example uses the two bar elements with stress and force output requests to obtain the stress
and force OTMs.
ASSIGN OUTPUT2=’se10.op2’,UNIT=31
DIAG 8,14,15,53,56
CEND
EXTSEOUT(EXTBULK,ASMBULK,EXTID=10,DMIGOP2=31)
$
STRESS=ALL
FORCE=ALL
$
SPC=1
METHOD=1
BEGIN BULK
EIGRL,1,,,3
SPC1,1,123456,1
GRID,1
GRID,2,,2.3
GRID,3,,5.1
CBAR,1,1,1,2,,1.
CBAR,2,1,2,3,,1.
PBAR,1,1,.01,.02,.03,.04
,.1,.1,.1,-.1,-.1,-.1,-.1,.1
MAT1,1,2+11,,.3,7850.
ASET1,123456,3
SPOINT,1001,THRU,1006
QSET1,0,1001,THRU,1006
ENDDATA

The table and matrix partitions of the stress OTM (TES1 and MES1) and the force OTM (TEF1 and MEF1)
generated by the STRESS=ALL and FORCE=ALL requests are printed to examine their content.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 21 941
Output Transformation Matrix

First let’s look at the STRESS OTM.

TABLE TES1 LINES CONTAINING BINARY ZERO HAVE BEEN DELETED.
RECORD NO. 0
1) TES 5 REAL 1
END OF 7 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO. 1
1) 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0
11) 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 0 10 0
21) 11 0 12 0
END OF 24 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO. 2
1) TYPE ID COMP ROW TYPE ID COMP ROW
11) 34 1 9 1 0 34 2 9 10 0
END OF 20 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO. 3
1) 34 1 34 2
END OF 8 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO. 4
END OF FILE
TRAILER WORD1 = 18 WORD2 = 12 WORD3 = 32767 WORD4 = 0 WORD5 = 1005 WORD6 = 0
MATRIX MES1 (GINO NAME 102 ) IS A REAL 12 COLUMN X 18 ROW RECTANG MATRIX.
COLUMN 1 ROWS 5 THRU 14 --------------------------------------------------
ROW
5) 3.9216E+10 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 3.9216E+10
...
THE NUMBER OF NON-ZERO TERMS IN THE DENSEST COLUMN = 16
THE DENSITY OF THIS MATRIX IS 46.30 PERCENT.

In the matrix MES1 there are the expected 12 columns of data but this time there are 18 rows describing the
BAR element stresses.
Record 0 of the table partition TES indicates a table code of 5 in word 3 (element stress) and in the first word
of the 5 value set in record 2 we see element type 34 (reference [2.] confirms this is a BAR element) with 9
values (COMP) for a single BAR element. The stress item codes for a BAR element confirm these are the
end A and end B stress recovery point stresses (4 at each end) plus an axial stress component; 4 + 4 + 1 = 9.
Now familiar to us, the ROW word tells us the starting row number in the matrix partition for the data
pertaining to the element.
Record 3 is much smaller than for the BEAM element because the BAR element does not have intermediate
station output. Record 3 is therefore simply a list of pairs of element type and element ID.

Main Index
 942 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
OTM Content

The force OTM is very similar for the BAR element.

TABLETEF1 LINES CONTAINING BINARY ZERO HAVE BEEN DELETED.
RECORD NO.0
1) TEF 4 REAL1
RECORD NO.1
END OF7 WORD RECORD.
1) 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0
11) 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 0 10 0
21) 11 0 12 0
RECORD NO.2
END OF24 WORD RECORD.
1) TYPE ID COMP ROWTYPEID COMP ROW
11) 34 1 8 1 0 34 2 8 9 0
END OF20 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO.3
1) 34 1 34 2
RECORD NO.4
END OF FILE
END OF8 WORD RECORD.
TRAILER WORD1 = 16 WORD2 = 12 WORD3 = 32767 WORD4 = 0 WORD5 = 1004 WORD6 = 0
MATRIX MEF1 (GINO NAME 104 ) IS A REAL12 COLUMN X16 ROW RECTANG MATRIX. COLUMN1 ROWS7 THRU15 ----------------------
ROW
7) 3.9216E+08 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 3.9216E+08
...
COLUMNS10 THRU 12 ARE NULL.
THE NUMBER OF NON-ZERO TERMS IN THE DENSEST COLUMN = 6
THE DENSITY OF THIS MATRIX IS 21.88 PERCENT.

Note only that the matrix MEF1 has 16 rows (2 x 8) and the table partition TEF shows a table code of 4 for
forces, and 8 values per element in the COMP word of record 2. The 8 values are the bending moments in
planes 1 and 2 at the two ends (so, 4 values), the shears in planes 1 and 2 (2 values), the axial force and the
torque; 4 + 2 + 1 + 1 = 8 values in total.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 21 943
Output Transformation Matrix

Plate Element OTMs

The following example uses three plate elements, a single QUAD4 and 2 TRIA3 elements, with stress and
force output requests to obtain the stress and force OTMs.
ASSIGN OUTPUT2=’se10.op2’,UNIT=31
DIAG 8,14,15,53,56
SOL 103
CEND
EXTSEOUT(EXTBULK,ASMBULK,EXTID=10,DMIGOP2=31)
$
STRESS=ALL
FORCE=ALL
$
SPC=1
METHOD=1
BEGIN BULK
EIGRL,1,,,3
SPC1,1,123456,1,11
GRID,1
GRID,2,,2.3
GRID,3,,5.1
GRID,11,,,1.
GRID,12,,2.3,1.
GRID,13,,5.1,1.
CQUAD4,1,1,1,2,12,11
CTRIA3,2,1,2,3,12
CTRIA3,3,1,12,3,13
PSHELL,1,1,.01,1,,1
MAT1,1,2+11,,.3,7850.
ASET1,123456,3
SPOINT,1001,THRU,1006
QSET1,0,1001,THRU,1006
ENDDATA

Main Index
 944 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
OTM Content

The table and matrix partitions of the stress OTM (TES1 and MES1) and the force OTM (TEF1 and MEF1)
generated by the STRESS=ALL and FORCE=ALL requests are printed to examine their content. First let’s
look at the STRESS OTM.
TABLE TES1 LINES CONTAINING BINARY ZERO HAVE BEEN DELETED.
7 OTM CONTENT 23
RECORD NO. 0
1) TES 5 REAL 1
END OF 7 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO. 1
1) 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0
11) 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 0 10 0
21) 11 0 12 0
END OF 24 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO. 2
1) TYPE ID COMP ROW TYPE ID COMP ROW
11) 33 1 6 1 0 74 2 6 7 0
21) 74 3 6 13 0
END OF 25 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO. 3
1) 33 1 -5.0 00-3 5.00 00-3 74
11) 2 -5.0 00-3 5.00 00-3 74 3
21) -5.0 00-3 5.00 00-3
END OF 24 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO. 4
END OF FILE
TRAILER WORD1 = 18 WORD2 = 12 WORD3 = 32767 WORD4 = 0 WORD5 = 1005 WORD6 = 0
MATRIX MES1 (GINO NAME 102 ) IS A REAL 12 COLUMN X 18 ROW RECTANG MATRIX.
COLUMN 1 ROWS 1 THRU 18 --------------------------------------------------
ROW
1) 3.5995E+10 3.1772E+09 -4.5400E+09 3.5995E+10 3.1772E+09 -4.5400E+09
4.1518E+10 -2.7870E+09 1.7985E+09 4.1518E+10
11) -2.7870E+09 1.7985E+09 3.4357E+10 -3.3528E-06 1.5370E+06 3.4357E+10 -
3.3528E-06 1.5370E+06
...
THE NUMBER OF NON-ZERO TERMS IN THE DENSEST COLUMN = 18
THE DENSITY OF THIS MATRIX IS 100.00 PERCENT.

In the matrix MES1 there are the expected 12 columns of data and 18 rows describing the QUAD4 element
stress and TRIA3 element stresses, as once again the boundary consists of a single GRID point with all 6 DOF
in the A set and a Q set containing 6 DOF on SPOINTs.
Record 0 of the table partition (TES) indicates a table code of 5 in word 3 (element stress) and in the first
word of the first set of 5 values in record 2 we see element type 33 (reference [2.] confirms this is a QUAD4
element) with 6 values (COMP) for a single QUAD4 element. The second and third sets of 5 values pertain
to element type 74, which are the two TRIA3 elements. The stress item codes for a QUAD4 and TRIA3
element confirm these 6 values are the Z1 and Z2 stresses for the 2 normal and single shear components

Main Index
 CHAPTER 21 945
Output Transformation Matrix

(3x2=6 values). As before, the ROW word tells us the starting row number in the matrix partition for the
data pertaining to each element.
In record 3 of the table partition, we see there are 24 words in this record. There are 3 elements in the OTM
(because STRESS=ALL was requested) so each element uses 8, 4-byte words to describe the stress formatting
data. Each piece of data is 2 words in length, so the 8 word set is defining 4 values per plate element. The
meaning of the 4 values is shown in Table 21-5.

Table 21-5 Record 3, Table Partition for Plate Elements

Word in Set Description

1 Element type (33=QUAD4, 74=TRIA3)
2 Element ID
3 Fiber distance Z1
4 Fiber distance Z2

The force OTM for the plate elements follows the familiar pattern where the table partition (TEF) has word
3 of record 0 set to 4 (the table code for element forces), but record 2 shows there are 8 values per element
in the matrix partition. These are the 3 components of membrane force, 3 components of bending moment
and 2 components of shear (3 + 3 + 2 = 8 values), as indicated in reference [2.].

Main Index
 946 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
OTM Content

TABLE TEF1 LINES CONTAINING BINARY ZERO HAVE BEEN DELETED.

RECORD NO. 0
1) TEF 4 REAL 1
END OF 7 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO. 1
1) 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0
11) 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 0 10 0
21) 11 0 12 0
END OF 24 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO. 2
1) TYPE ID COMP ROW TYPE ID COMP ROW
11) 33 1 8 1 0 74 2 8 9 0
21) 74 3 8 17 0
END OF 25 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO. 3
1) 33 1 74 2 74
11) 3
END OF 12 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO. 4
END OF FILE
TRAILER WORD1 = 24 WORD2 = 12 WORD3 = 32767 WORD4 = 0 WORD5 = 1004 WORD6 = 0
MATRIX MEF1 (GINO NAME 104 ) IS A REAL 12 COLUMN X 24 ROW RECTANG MATRIX.
COLUMN 1 ROWS 1 THRU 19 --------------------------------------------------
ROW
1) 3.5995E+08 3.1772E+07 -4.5400E+07 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00
0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 4.1518E+08 -2.7870E+07
11) 1.7985E+07 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00
3.4357E+08 -3.3528E-08 1.5370E+04
..
THE NUMBER OF NON-ZERO TERMS IN THE DENSEST COLUMN = 24
THE DENSITY OF THIS MATRIX IS 75.00 PERCENT.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 21 947
Output Transformation Matrix

Shell Element OTMs

The following example uses three shell elements, a single QUAD8 and 2 TRIA6 elements, with stress and
force output requests to obtain the stress and force OTMs.
ASSIGN OUTPUT2=’se10.op2’,UNIT=31
DIAG 8,14,15,53,56
SOL 103
CEND
EXTSEOUT(EXTBULK,ASMBULK,EXTID=10,DMIGOP2=31)
$
STRESS=ALL
FORCE=ALL
$
SPC=1
METHOD=1
BEGIN BULK
EIGRL,1,,,3
SPC1,1,123456,1,11
GRID,1
GRID,2,,2.3
GRID,3,,5.1
GRID,11,,,1.
GRID,12,,2.3,1.
GRID,13,,5.1,1.
GRID,21,,1.15
GRID,22,,3.7
GRID,23,,2.3,.5
GRID,24,,5.1,.5
GRID,25,,1.15,1.
GRID,26,,3.7,1.
GRID,27,,,.5
GRID,28,,3.7,.5
CQUAD8,1,1,1,2,12,11,21,23
,25,27
CTRIA6,2,1,2,3,12,22,28,23
CTRIA6,3,1,12,3,13,28,24,26
PSHELL,1,1,.01,1,,1
MAT1,1,2+11,,.3,7850.
ASET1,123456,3
SPOINT,1001,THRU,1006
QSET1,0,1001,THRU,1006
ENDDATA

Main Index
 948 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
OTM Content

The table and matrix partitions of the stress OTM (TES1 and MES1) and the force OTM (TEF1 and MEF1)
generated by the STRESS=ALL and FORCE=ALL requests are printed to examine their content. First let’s
look at the STRESS OTM.
RECORD NO. 0
1) TES 5 REAL 1
END OF 7 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO. 1
1) 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0
11) 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 0 10 0
21) 11 0 12 0
END OF 24 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO. 2
1) TYPE ID COMP ROW TYPE ID COMP ROW
11) 64 1 30 1 0 75 2 24 31 0
21) 75 3 24 55 0
END OF 25 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO. 3
1) 64 1 CEN/ 8 -5.0 00-3
11) 5.00 00-3 1 -5.0 00-3 5.00 00-3 2
21) -5.0 00-3 5.00 00-3 12 -5.0 00-3 5.00 00-3
31) 11 -5.0 00-3 5.00 00-3 75 2
41) CEN/ 6 -5.0 00-3 5.00 00-3 2
51) -5.0 00-3 5.00 00-3 3 -5.0 00-3 5.00 00-3
61) 12 -5.0 00-3 5.00 00-3 75 3
71) CEN/ 6 -5.0 00-3 5.00 00-3 12
81) -5.0 00-3 5.00 00-3 3 -5.0 00-3 5.00 00-3
91) 13 -5.0 00-3 5.00 00-3
END OF 96 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO. 4
END OF FILE
TRAILER WORD1 = 78 WORD2 = 12 WORD3 = 32767 WORD4 = 0 WORD5 = 1005 WORD6 = 0
MATRIX MES1 (GINO NAME 102 ) IS A REAL 12 COLUMN X 78 ROW RECTANG MATRIX.
COLUMN 1 ROWS 1 THRU 78 --------------------------------------------------
ROW
1) 2.1634E+10 1.9334E+09 -3.1667E+09 2.1634E+10 1.9334E+09 -3.1667E+09 -1.1084E+10 3.0109E+09 1.3159E+10 -1.1084E+10
11) 3.0109E+09 1.3159E+10 3.2617E+10 -2.6646E+09 -8.1584E+09 3.2617E+10 -2.6646E+09 -8.1584E+09 1.0650E+10 3.1562E+09
21) 1.8250E+09 1.0650E+10 3.1562E+09 1.8250E+09 5.4351E+10 4.2310E+09 -1.9492E+10 5.4351E+10 4.2310E+09 -1.9492E+10
31) 3.4915E+10 -1.4187E+08 -3.5212E+09 3.4915E+10 -1.4187E+08 -3.5212E+09 4.7712E+10 4.7332E+09 -8.8144E+09 4.7712E+10
41) 4.7332E+09 -8.8144E+09 7.2589E+10 -3.3221E+09 1.6792E+09 7.2589E+10 -3.3221E+09 1.6792E+09 -1.5556E+10 -1.8367E+09
51) -3.4285E+09 -1.5556E+10 -1.8367E+09 -3.4285E+09 8.8783E+09 -7.1526E-05 1.7881E-05 8.8783E+09 -7.1526E-05 1.7881E-05
61) -1.0164E+10 -3.8147E-04 7.5864E+08 -1.0164E+10 -3.8147E-04 7.5864E+08 6.1039E+10 -1.8620E-05 -7.5864E+08 6.1039E+10
71) -1.8620E-05 -7.5864E+08 -2.4240E+10 4.1723E-05 4.7684E-05 -2.4240E+10 4.1723E-05 4.7684E-05
...
THE NUMBER OF NON-ZERO TERMS IN THE DENSEST COLUMN = 78
THE DENSITY OF THIS MATRIX IS 91.67 PERCENT.

As expected, in matrix MES1 we see 12 columns of data, but now 78 rows describe the QUAD8 element
stress and TRIA6 element stresses.
Record 0 of the table partition (TES) indicates a table code of 5 in word 3 (element stress) and in the first
word of the first set of 5 values in record 2 we see element type 64 (reference 2. confirms this is a QUAD8
element) with 30 values (COMP) for a single QUAD8 element. The second and third sets of 5 values pertain
to element type 75, which are the two TRIA6 elements; these have 24 values (COMP) per element. The stress
item codes for a QUAD8 element confirm the 30 values are the Z1 and Z2 stresses for the 2 normal and
single shear components (3 x 2 = 6 values) at the element centre and 4 corners (4 corners + the centre = 6 x
5 = 30 values). For the TRIA6 element, the same content is present for 3 corners and the centre = 6 x 4 = 24
values. As before, the ROW word tells us the starting row number in the matrix partition for the data
pertaining to each element.
In record 3 of the TES table partition, we see there are 96 words in this record, and as before each item uses
a pair of 4-byte words, so 48 items are described. STRESS=ALL was requested, so there are items for all 3

Main Index
 CHAPTER 21 949
Output Transformation Matrix

elements. The QUAD8 element uses the first 18 word pairs and the 2 TRIA6 elements the subsequent 2 sets
of 15 word pairs each, the meanings of which are shown in Table 21-6.

Table 21-6 Record 3, TES Table Partition for Shell Elements

Word in Set Description

For TRIA6 and QUAD8 elements
1 Element type (64=QUAD8, 75=TRIA6)
2 Element ID
3 “CEN/” for QUAD8 and TRIA6 elements
4 “8” for QUAD8 elements, “6” for TRIA6 elements
5 Fiber distance Z1
6 Fiber distance Z2
7 GRID point at corner 1
8 Fiber distance Z1
9 Fiber distance Z2
10 GRID point at corner 2
11 Fiber distance Z1
12 Fiber distance Z2
13 GRID point at corner 3
14 Fiber distance Z1
15 Fiber distance Z2
Only for QUAD8 elements
16 GRID point at corner 4
17 Fiber distance Z1
18 Fiber distance Z2

The force OTM for the shell elements follows the familiar pattern where the table partition (MEF) has word
3 of record 0 set to 4 (the table code for element forces), and record 2 shows there are 40 values per QUAD8
element and 32 values per TRIA6 element in the matrix partition. These are the 3 components of membrane
force, 3 components of bending moment and 2 components of shear (3 + 3 + 2 = 8 values) at the center and
corners of the element, as indicated in reference 2.

Main Index
 950 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
OTM Content

RECORD NO. 0
1) TEF 4 REAL 1
END OF 7 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO. 1
1) 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0
11) 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 0 10 0
21) 11 0 12 0
END OF 24 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO. 2
1) TYPE ID COMP ROW TYPE ID COMP ROW
11) 64 1 40 1 0 75 2 32 41 0
21) 75 3 32 73 0
END OF 25 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO. 3
1) 64 1 CEN/ 8 1
7 OTM CONTENT 27
11) 2 12 11 75 2
21) CEN/ 6 2 3 12
31) 75 3 CEN/ 6 12
41) 3 13
END OF 44 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO. 4
END OF FILE
TRAILER WORD1 = 104 WORD2 = 12 WORD3 = 32767 WORD4 = 0 WORD5 = 1004 WORD6 = 0
MATRIX MEF1 (GINO NAME 104 ) IS A REAL 12 COLUMN X 104 ROW RECTANG MATRIX.
COLUMN 1 ROWS 1 THRU 99 --------------------------------------------------
ROW
1) 2.1634E+08 1.9334E+07 -3.1667E+07 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 -1.1084E+08 3.0109E+07
11) 1.3159E+08 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 3.2617E+08 -2.6646E+07 -8.1584E+07 0.0000E+00
21) 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 1.0650E+08 3.1562E+07 1.8250E+07 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00
31) 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 5.4351E+08 4.2310E+07 -1.9492E+08 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00
41) 3.4915E+08 -1.4187E+06 -3.5212E+07 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 4.7712E+08 4.7332E+07
51) -8.8144E+07 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 7.2589E+08 -3.3221E+07 1.6792E+07 0.0000E+00
61) 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 -1.5556E+08 -1.8367E+07 -3.4285E+07 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00
71) 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 8.8783E+07 -7.1526E-07 1.7881E-07 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00
81) -1.0164E+08 -3.8147E-06 7.5864E+06 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 6.1039E+08 -1.8620E-07
91) -7.5864E+06 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 -2.4240E+08 4.1723E-07 4.7684E-07
...
THE NUMBER OF NON-ZERO TERMS IN THE DENSEST COLUMN = 104
THE DENSITY OF THIS MATRIX IS 71.88 PERCENT.

In record 3 of the TEF table partition, we see there are 44 words in this record, again each item uses a pair of
4-byte words, so 22 items are described for all 3 elements. The QUAD8 element uses the first 8 word pairs
and the 2 TRIA6 elements the subsequent 2 sets of 7 word pairs each, the meanings of which are shown in
Table 21-7.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 21 951
Output Transformation Matrix

Table 21-7 Record 3, TEF Table Partition for Shell Elements

Word in Set Description

For TRIA6 and QUAD8 elements
1 Element type (64=QUAD8, 75=TRIA6)
2 Element ID
3 “CEN/” for QUAD8 and TRIA6 elements
4 “8” for QUAD8 elements, “6” for TRIA6 elements
5 GRID point at corner 1
6 GRID point at corner 2
7 GRID point at corner 3
Only for QUAD8 elements
8 GRID point at corner 4

Solid Element OTMs

The following example uses a HEXA element, two PENTA elements and 3 TETRA elements, with stress
output requests to obtain the stress OTMs. Force OTMs are not available for solid elements because this
would be a force per unit area, which is stress.

Main Index
 952 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
OTM Content

ASSIGN OUTPUT2=’se10.op2’,UNIT=31
DIAG 8,14,15,53,56
SOL 103
CEND
EXTSEOUT(EXTBULK,ASMBULK,EXTID=10,DMIGOP2=31)
$
STRESS=ALL
FORCE=ALL
$
SPC=1
METHOD=1
BEGIN BULK
EIGRL 1 3 0
MAT1 1 2.+11 .3 7850.
PSOLID 1 1 0
CHEXA 1 1 1 2 4 3 5 6
8 7
CPENTA 2 1 12 4 2 16 8 6
CPENTA 3 1 2 10 12 6 14 16
CTETRA 4 1 16 6 14 19
CTETRA 5 1 19 6 14 18
CTETRA 6 1 19 6 18 17
GRID 1 0. 0. 0.
GRID 2 1. 0. 0.
GRID 3 0. 1. 0.
GRID 4 1. 1. 0.
GRID 5 0. 0. 1.
GRID 6 1. 0. 1.
GRID 7 0. 1. 1.
GRID 8 1. 1. 1.
GRID 10 2. 0. 0.
GRID 12 2. 1. 0.
GRID 14 2. 0. 1.
GRID 16 2. 1. 1.
GRID 17 1. 0. 2.
GRID 18 2. 0. 2.
GRID 19 2. 1. 2.
SPC1 1 123 1 3 5 7
ASET1 123456 17 18 19
SPOINT,1001,THRU,1010
QSET1,0,1001,THRU,1010
ENDDATA

The table and matrix partitions of the stress OTM (TES1 and MES1) generated by the STRESS=ALL request
are printed to examine their content.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 21 953
Output Transformation Matrix

In matrix MES1 we see 28 columns of data associated with the 3 GRID points (6 DOF each) in the A set
and 10 SPOINTs in the Q set, and 228 rows describing the solid element stresses.
Record 0 of the table partition (TES) indicates a table code of 5 in word 3 (element stress) and in the first
word of the first 5 value set in record 2 we see element type 67 (reference 2. confirms this is a HEXA element)
with 54 values (COMP). The second and third sets of 5 values pertain to element type 68, which are the two
PENTA elements; these have 42 values (COMP) per element. The remaining 3 set of 5 values pertain to the
three TETRA elements, each with 30 values per element. The stress item codes for a HEXA element confirm

Main Index
 954 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Element Types for OTM Output

the 54 values are the 6 values of normal X, shear XY, normal Y, shear YZ, normal Z and shear ZX at the
element centre and 8 corners of the element (6 x 9 = 54 values). For the PENTA elements, the same content
is present for the 6 corners and the centre = 6 x 7 = 42 values. For the TETRA elements, the same content is
present for the 4 corners and the centre = 6 x 5 = 30 values. As always, the ROW word tells us the starting
row number in the matrix partition for the data pertaining to each element.
In record 3 of the TES table partition, we see there are 136 words in this record, and as before each item uses
a pair of 4-byte words, so 68 items are described. STRESS=ALL was requested, so there are items for all 6
elements. The HEXA element uses the first 14 word pairs, the 2 PENTA elements uses 12 words per element
and the 3 TETRA elements the subsequent 3 sets of 10 word pairs each, the meanings of which are shown
in Table 21-8.

Table 21-8 Record 3, TES Table Partition for Solid (Linear) Elements

Word in Set Description

For HEXA, PENTA and TETRA elements
1 Element type (67=HEXA, 68=PENTA, 39=TETRA)
2 Element ID
3 0
4 “GRID”
5 “8” for HEXA elements, “6” for PENTA elements, “4”

for TETRA elements

6 0 (for element centre)
7 GRID point at corner 1
8 GRID point at corner 2
9 GRID point at corner 3
10 GRID point at corner 4
Only for HEXA and PENTA elements
11 GRID point at corner 5
12 GRID point at corner 6
Only for HEXA elements
13 GRID point at corner 7
14 GRID point at corner 8

Element Types for OTM Output

Table 21-9 shows the various element type numbers for which stress/strain OTM data is available and for
element forces. Note that not all response values are available via the OTM capability. Consult the

Main Index
 CHAPTER 21 955
Output Transformation Matrix

stress/strain or force item codes documented in reference 2. to see which item codes are supported. The item
codes with a superscript value of 1 in reference 2. are the supported items.

Table 21-9 Element Type Support for Stress/Strain OTM Output

Element Type Element Number Description
CAXIF2 47 FLUID ELEMENT WITH 2 POINTS
CAXIF3 48 FLUID ELEMENT WITH 3POINTS
CAXIF4 49 FLUID ELEMENT WITH 4 POINTS
CBAR 34 SIMPLE BEAM ELEMENT
CBEAM 02 BEAM ELEMENT
CBEND 69 CURVED BEAM OR PIPE ELEMENT
CBUSH 102 GENERALIZED SPRING AND DAMPER ELEMENT
CCONEAX 35 AXISYMMETRIC SHELL ELEMENT
CDUM3 55 THREE-POINT DUMMY ELEMENT
CDUM4 56 FOUR-POINT DUMMY ELEMENT
CDUM5 57 FIVE-POINT DUMMY ELEMENT
CDUM6 58 SIX-POINT DUMMY ELEMENT
CDUM7 59 SEVEN-POINT DUMMY ELEMENT
CRAC2D/CDUM8 60 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CRACK TIP ELEMENT
CRAC3D/CDUM9 61 THREE-DIMENSIONAL CRACK TIP ELEMENT
CELAS1 11 SCALAR SPRING ELEMENT
CELAS2 12 SCALAR SPRING ELEMENT WITH PROPERTIES
CELAS3 13 SCALAR SPRING ELEMENT TO SCALAR POINTS ONLY
CHEXA 67 8 OR 20 NODED HEXAHEDRAL ELEMENT
CONROD 10 ROD ELEMENT CONNECTION AND PROPERTY
CROD 01 ROD ELEMENT
CPENTA 68 6 OR 15 NODED PENTAHEDRAL ELEMENT
CQUAD4 33 QUADRILATERAL PLATE ELEMENT
CQUAD8 64 CURVED QUADRILATERAL SHELL ELEMENT
CSHEAR 04 SHEAR PANEL ELEMENT
CTETRA 39 4 OR 10 NODED TETRAHEDRAL ELEMENT
CTRIA3 74 TRIANGULAR SHELL ELEMENT
CTRIA6 75 CURVED TRIANGULAR SHELL ELEMENT
CTRIAX6 53 AXISYMMETRIC TRIANGULAR ELEMENT

Main Index
 956 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Element Types for OTM Output

Table 21-10 Element Type Support for Force OTM Output

Element Type Element Number Description

CBAR 34 SIMPLE BEAM ELEMENT
CBEAM 02 BEAM ELEMENT
CBEND 69 CURVED BEAM OR PIPE ELEMENT
CBUSH 102 GENERALIZED SPRING AND DAMPER ELEMENT
CDUM3 55 THREE-POINT DUMMY ELEMENT
CDUM4 56 FOUR-POINT DUMMY ELEMENT
CDUM5 57 FIVE-POINT DUMMY ELEMENT
CDUM6 58 SIX-POINT DUMMY ELEMENT
CDUM7 59 SEVEN-POINT DUMMY ELEMENT
CRAC2D/CDUM8 60 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CRACK TIP ELEMENT
CRAC3D/CDUM9 61 THREE-DIMENSIONAL CRACK TIP ELEMENT
CELAS1 11 SCALAR SPRING ELEMENT
CONROD 10 ROD ELEMENT CONNECTION AND PROPERTY
CROD 01 ROD ELEMENT
CQUAD4 33 QUADRILATERAL PLATE ELEMENT
CQUAD8 64 CURVED QUADRILATERAL SHELL ELEMENT
CSHEAR 04 SHEAR PANEL ELEMENT
CTRIA3 74 TRIANGULAR SHELL ELEMENT
CTRIA6 75 CURVED TRIANGULAR SHELL ELEMENT

Main Index
 CHAPTER 21 957
Output Transformation Matrix

Storage Formats
When an external superelement is generated, the boundary matrices (mass, stiffness, loads, etc.) may be
written into different file formats to store these data for later use in an assembly run. If OTMs are requested,
they are stored along with the boundary matrices. The OTMs are partitioned into pairs of table and matrix
data; the matrix data is the OTM and the table data is used to recreate the results output format when the
final external superelement response quantities are reassembled. Several possibilities exist to store the
boundary matrix and OTM data, and they are all driven by options on the EXTSEOUT case control
command.
The first three of these options, MATRIXDB (which can be shortened to MATDB), DMIGDB and
DMIGOP2, all store the external superelement boundary and OTM matrices as a family in the EXTDB
datablock. The different EXTDB datablock members are individually identified by qualifier values rather
like the subscripts of an array. There are several qualifiers associated with the EXTDB datablock, but to keep
things concise we will only look at the XNAME qualifier which names the various boundary matrices and
OTMs. For example, with the MATRIXDB option the boundary stiffness matrix is written to EXTDB with
the XNAME qualifier set to KAA, while the boundary mass matrix takes a qualifier of MAA. As we are
interested in the OTMs in this document, Table 21-11 shows the list of qualifier values for XNAME which
define the OTM domains within the EXTDB datablock.
If the MATRIXOP EXTDB datablock is not used and the boundary matrices an4 (which can be shortened
to MATOP4) option is used, thed OTMs are stored in datablocks that take the same names as the qualifiers
in Table 21-11. One more option exists, DMIGPCH, where the boundary matrices and OTMs are stored in
MSC Nastran™ bulk data format written to the punch (pch) file. Each option and file format has its
advantages and disadvantages. We will look at each of these storage formats in greater or lesser detail as the
formats and relevance permit.

Table 21-11 EXTDB XNAME Qualifiers or Datablock Names for OTMs

XNAME OTM Description
TUG1 Displacement table partition
MUG1 Global displacement matrix partition (due to boundary movement)
MUG1O Global displacements matrix partition (due to interior loads)
TQG1 SPCFORCE table partition
MKQG1 SPCFORCE matrix partition (stiffness contribution)
MBQG1 SPCFORCE matrix partition (viscous damping contribution)
MMQG1 SPCFORCE matrix partition (mass contribution)
MK4QG1 SPCFORCE matrix partition (structural damping contribution)
MKQG1O SPCFORCE matrix partition (due to interior loads)
TELAF1 Elastic force table partition
MELAF1 Elastic force matrix partition
TES1 Element stress table partition

Main Index
 958 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Storage Formats

Table 21-11 EXTDB XNAME Qualifiers or Datablock Names for OTMs

XNAME OTM Description
MES1 Element stress matrix partition
MES1O Element stress matrix partition (due to interior loads)
TEF1 Element force table partition
MEF1 Element force matrix partition
MEF1O Element force matrix partition (due to interior loads)
MUG1B Basic displacements matrix partition
MUG1OB Basic displacements matrix partition (due to interior loads)
TEE1 Element strain table partition
MEE1 Element strain matrix partition
MEE1O Element strain matrix partition (due to interior loads)
TQMG1 MPCFORCE table partition
MKQMG1 MPCFORCE matrix partition (stiffness contribution)
MBQMG1 MPCFORCE matrix partition (viscous damping contribution)
MMQMG1 MPCFORCE matrix partition (mass contribution)
MK4QMG1 MPCFORCE matrix partition (structural damping contribution)
MKQMG1O MPCFORCE matrix partition (due to interior loads)

The MSC Nastran™ Database

To write the boundary matrices and OTM data to the MSC Nastran™ database, use the EXTSEOUT option
MATRIXDB (MATDB) or DMIGDB. The two methods are very similar and differ only in the internal
format used to store the boundary matrix data, but they both use the MSC Nastran™ . MASTER and .DBALL
files to store the information. If you print the content of the EXTDB datablocks for the MATRIXDB option,
you will see raw matrix data for the boundary matrices and the table and matrix partition data for the OTMs.
If the DMIGDB option is selected, when you print the EXTDB datablocks, you will see MATPOOL format
(internal full precision DMIG format) for the boundary matrices and the table and matrix partition data for
the OTMs. Which one you choose is purely a matter of preference; the MATRIXDB method will arguably
result in a slightly smaller dataset with slightly faster access.
Advantages of the database methods are:
 Very fast access to the data because they are stored in internal MSC Nastran™ format.
 Automatic connection of the external superelement (all necessary data are stored on the external
superelement database).
 All data may be stored in a single file (the .MASTER) - use PARAM,DBEXT,MASTER
Disadvantages of the database methods are:
 Viewing the data on the MSC Nastran™ database requires knowledge of how to interrogate it.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 21 959
Output Transformation Matrix

 The MSC Nastran™ databases are version dependent. There is no guarantee that external
superelement data in a database written by one version of MSC Nastran™ will be readable by
another version.
 Some care is needed when referencing the data in files that have been moved from one file system to
another.

OUTPUT2 Files
To write the boundary matrices and OTM data to an OUTPUT2 (op2) file, use the EXTSEOUT option
DMIGOP2. The file in which these data are stored may be native binary (UNFORMATTED) or what is
called a neutral file (FORMATTED) because it is encoded using only ASCII characters.
Advantages of the OUTPUT2 method are:
 Both binary and ASCII encoded file formats are robust industry standards (Fortran units) and have
a high degree of compatibility in today’s world of Windows/Linux computing.
 The neutral file is readable on any computer platform that represents its character data using a
subset of the ASCII character set. Even IBM systems using the EBCDIC character set are able to
read these neutral files because the ASCII characters used to encode the neutral file are stored in the
file along with the data they encode, and those same ASCII characters are also found in the
EBCDIC character set.
 The binary option produces the smallest datasets.
 Both binary and ASCII encoded methods mean each component is contained in one file.
 Essentially unlimited data sets may be acquired. The data in the op2 file is stored in physical records
of finite (small) size. The data is read into MSC Nastran™ in “buffers” determined by the physical
record size; only disk space plus available memory will govern the maximum amount of data that
can be read in.
Disadvantages of the OUTPUT2 method are:
 A limited number of op2 files may be connected to MSC Nastran™ at any one time.
 Access to the data in output2 files is sequential. Although this does not slow down data access to a
major degree, access to the data is slower than the MSC Nastran™ database options.
Boundary matrix data is stored in MATPOOL format in the output2 file, but the OTM table and matrix
partitions are in their raw form. Let’s take a look at the OTMs generated by the DMIGOP2 option by
examining the op2 file created by the example in section BEAM Element OTMs above. With the DMIGOP2
method, only the datablocks that are generated are output to the op2 file. For example, if there is no damping
defined for the external superelement, no boundary damping matrix is output to the op2 file; if you did not
request any, say, element force output, then no force OTMs will be output the op2 file. Which datablocks
are eventually written to the op2 file are recorded in a special table called XSOP2DIR which is output to the
op2 file as the very first datablock. This proves very useful when you want to read the contents of the op2
file later, as you are able to read this first datablock and determine a list of subsequent datablocks to read.
When the DMIGOP2 method is used to create an external superelement, the OUTPUT2 module that
writes the data to the op2 file produces diagnostic messages 4114 informing us of the output. Here are the
4114 messages for the model.

Main Index
 960 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Storage Formats

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4114 (OUTPX2)

DATA BLOCK XSOP2DIR WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT USING NDDL DESCRIPTION FOR
XSOP2DIR, TRL =
101 14 0 0 0 0 0
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS XSOP2DIR
(MAXIMUM POSSIBLE FORTRAN RECORD SIZE = 131074 WORDS.) (MAXIMUM SIZE OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN =
7 WORDS.)
(NUMBER OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN = 80 RECORDS.) (TOTAL DATA WRITTEN FOR DATA BLOCK = 132 WORDS.)
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4114 (OUTPX2)
DATA BLOCK GEOM1XWRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT USING NDDL DESCRIPTION FOR
GEOM1, TRL =
101 1 0 8 0 0 0
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS GEOM1X
(MAXIMUM POSSIBLE FORTRAN RECORD SIZE = 131074 WORDS.) (MAXIMUM SIZE OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN =
19 WORDS.)
(NUMBER OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN = 25 RECORDS.) (TOTAL DATA WRITTEN FOR DATA BLOCK = 65 WORDS.)
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4114 (OUTPX2)
DATA BLOCK GEOM2XWRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT USING NDDL DESCRIPTION FOR
GEOM2, TRL =
101 0 0 0 32768 0 0
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS GEOM2X
(MAXIMUM POSSIBLE FORTRAN RECORD SIZE = 131074 WORDS.) (MAXIMUM SIZE OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN =
9 WORDS.)
(NUMBER OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN = 20 RECORDS.) (TOTAL DATA WRITTEN FOR DATA BLOCK = 40 WORDS.)
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4114 (OUTPX2)
DATA BLOCK GEOM4XWRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT USING NDDL DESCRIPTION FOR
GEOM4, TRL =
101 2048 0 0 0 16 0
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS GEOM4X
(MAXIMUM POSSIBLE FORTRAN RECORD SIZE = 131074 WORDS.) (MAXIMUM SIZE OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN =
15 WORDS.)
(NUMBER OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN = 25 RECORDS.) (TOTAL DATA WRITTEN FOR DATA BLOCK = 55 WORDS.)
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4114 (OUTPX2)
DATA BLOCK EXTDBWRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT USING NDDL DESCRIPTION FOR
MATPOOL, TRL =
101 32768 0 0 0 0 0
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS MATK
(MAXIMUM POSSIBLE FORTRAN RECORD SIZE = 131074 WORDS.) (MAXIMUM SIZE OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN =
90 WORDS.)
(NUMBER OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN = 20 RECORDS.) (TOTAL DATA WRITTEN FOR DATA BLOCK = 121 WORDS.)
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4114 (OUTPX2)
DATA BLOCK EXTDBWRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT USING NDDL DESCRIPTION FOR
MATPOOL, TRL =
101 32768 0 0 0 0 0
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS MATM
(MAXIMUM POSSIBLE FORTRAN RECORD SIZE = 131074 WORDS.) (MAXIMUM SIZE OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN =
108 WORDS.)
(NUMBER OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN = 20 RECORDS.) (TOTAL DATA WRITTEN FOR DATA BLOCK = 139 WORDS.)
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4114 (OUTPX2)
DATA BLOCK EXTDBWRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT USING NDDL DESCRIPTION FOR
MATPOOL, TRL =
101 32768 0 0 0 0 0
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS MATP
(MAXIMUM POSSIBLE FORTRAN RECORD SIZE = 131074 WORDS.) (MAXIMUM SIZE OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN =
14 WORDS.)
(NUMBER OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN = 20 RECORDS.) (TOTAL DATA WRITTEN FOR DATA BLOCK = 45 WORDS.)
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4114 (OUTPX2)

Main Index
 CHAPTER 21 961
Output Transformation Matrix

DATA BLOCK EXTDBWRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT USING NDDL DESCRIPTION FOR
MATPOOL, TRL =
101 32768 0 0 0 0 0
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS MATV
(MAXIMUM POSSIBLE FORTRAN RECORD SIZE = 131074 WORDS.) (MAXIMUM SIZE OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN =
54 WORDS.)
(NUMBER OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN = 20 RECORDS.) (TOTAL DATA WRITTEN FOR DATA BLOCK = 85 WORDS.)
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4114 (OUTPX2)
DATA BLOCK EXTDBWRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT USING NDDL DESCRIPTION FOR
DRMHDIR, TRL =
101 32768 0 0 0 0 0
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS TUG1
(MAXIMUM POSSIBLE FORTRAN RECORD SIZE = 131074 WORDS.) (MAXIMUM SIZE OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN =
24 WORDS.)
(NUMBER OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN = 20 RECORDS.) (TOTAL DATA WRITTEN FOR DATA BLOCK = 72 WORDS.)
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4114 (OUTPX2)
DATA BLOCK EXTDBWRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT AND IN MATRIX FORMAT, TRL =
101 12 6 2 2 2 833
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS MUG1
(MAXIMUM POSSIBLE FORTRAN RECORD SIZE = 131074 WORDS.) (MAXIMUM SIZE OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN =
7 WORDS.)
(NUMBER OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN = 58 RECORDS.) (TOTAL DATA WRITTEN FOR DATA BLOCK = 76 WORDS.)
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4114 (OUTPX2)
DATA BLOCK EXTDBWRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT USING NDDL DESCRIPTION FOR
DRMHDIR, TRL =
101 88 12 32767 0 1005 0
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS TES1
(MAXIMUM POSSIBLE FORTRAN RECORD SIZE = 131074 WORDS.) (MAXIMUM SIZE OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN =
96 WORDS.)
(NUMBER OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN = 25 RECORDS.) (TOTAL DATA WRITTEN FOR DATA BLOCK = 177 WORDS.)
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4114 (OUTPX2)
DATA BLOCK EXTDBWRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT AND IN MATRIX FORMAT, TRL =
101 12 88 2 2 32 1212
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS MES1
(MAXIMUM POSSIBLE FORTRAN RECORD SIZE = 131074 WORDS.) (MAXIMUM SIZE OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN =
9 WORDS.)
(NUMBER OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN = 94 RECORDS.) (TOTAL DATA WRITTEN FOR DATA BLOCK = 234 WORDS.)
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4114 (OUTPX2)
DATA BLOCK EXTDBWRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT USING NDDL DESCRIPTION FOR
DRMHDIR, TRL =
101 154 12 32767 0 1004 0
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS TEF1
(MAXIMUM POSSIBLE FORTRAN RECORD SIZE = 131074 WORDS.) (MAXIMUM SIZE OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN =
96 WORDS.)
(NUMBER OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN = 25 RECORDS.) (TOTAL DATA WRITTEN FOR DATA BLOCK = 177 WORDS.)
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4114 (OUTPX2)
DATA BLOCK EXTDBWRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT AND IN MATRIX FORMAT, TRL =
101 12 154 2 2 16 346
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS MEF1
(MAXIMUM POSSIBLE FORTRAN RECORD SIZE = 131074 WORDS.) (MAXIMUM SIZE OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN =
7 WORDS.)
(NUMBER OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN = 174 RECORDS.) (TOTAL DATA WRITTEN FOR DATA BLOCK = 250
WORDS.)
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4114 (OUTPX2)
DATA BLOCK EXTDBWRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT AND IN MATRIX FORMAT, TRL =
101 12 6 2 2 2 833
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS MUG1B

Main Index
 962 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Storage Formats

(MAXIMUM POSSIBLE FORTRAN RECORD SIZE = 131074 WORDS.) (MAXIMUM SIZE OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN =
7 WORDS.)
(NUMBER OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN = 58 RECORDS.) (TOTAL DATA WRITTEN FOR DATA BLOCK = 76 WORDS.)

These outputs are summarized in Table 21-12. Notice that the boundary matrix and OTM datablocks all have
the same EXTDB family name as explained, but when they are written to the op2 file they are given
individual names. Remember, this is not a complete list of possible datablocks; these are defined in Table 21-13
and Table 21-14 at the end of this section.

Table 21-12 Example DMIGOP2 External Superelement Datablocks

DB NAME op2 Name Description
XSOP2DIR XSOP2DIR Table of contents of the op2 file.
GEOM1X GEOM1X GRID point geometry.
GEOM2X GEOM2X SPOINTs.
GEOM4X GEOM4X ASET/ASET1 and QSET/QSET1 entries.
EXTDB MATK Boundary stiffness.
EXTDB MATM Boundary mass.
EXTDB MATP Boundary loads.
EXTDB MATV Boundary fluid-structure partitioning vector.
EXTDB TUG1 Displacement OTM table.
EXTDB MUG1 Displacement OTM matrix.
EXTDB TES1 Stress OTM table.
EXTDB MES1 Stress OTM matrix.
EXTDB TEF1 Force OTM table.
EXTDB MEF1 Force OTM matrix.
EXTDB MUG1B Displacement OTM matrix in basic coordinates system.

The external superelement is now available in an op2 file (called se10.op2 in the example), and we can read
the contents of this op2 file and look at each of the datablocks. It is possible to write a Fortran, Python, C,
etc. program to read the op2 file, but we already have the best tool for doing this - MSC Nastran™. With the
help of the following short DMAP alter to SOL 100, we will read the content of the se10.op2 file and print
the data to the f06 file.

ASSIGN INPUTT2=’se10.op2’,UNIT=61
SOL 100
DIAG 8,14,15,53,56
COMPILE USERDMAP LIST $

Main Index
 CHAPTER 21 963
Output Transformation Matrix

ALTER 2 $
TYPE PARM,,I,N,REC $
INPUTT2 //-3/61///////S,N,DBKNT $ INPUTT2 /XSOP2DIR/0/61 $
MATPRN XSOP2DIR $ REC=1 $ DBKNT=DBKNT-1 $
DO WHILE ( REC<=DBKNT ) $
PARAML XSOP2DIR//’DTI2C’/REC/1////S,N,NAME $
IF ( NAME=’GEOM4X’ ) NAME=’GEOM4’ $
IF ( INDEX(NAME,’MAT’)=1 ) NAME=’MATRIX’ $
INPUTT2 /INDB/0/61////////NAME $
MATPRN INDB $
REC = REC + 1 $
ENDDO $ ( I<=DBKNT )
ENDALTER $
CEND
BEGIN BULK
ENDDATA

The short sequence of operations in the DMAP alter to SOL 100 starts by reading the first datablock
XSOP2DIR stored in the op2 file and then dumps it to the f06 file. This datablock is a table of contents for
the other datablocks stored in the op2 file. The statement MATPRN XSOP2DIR $ results in the following
output.

TABLE XSOP2DIR LINES CONTAINING BINARY ZERO HAVE BEEN DELETED.

RECORD NO.0
1) XSOP 2DIR
END OF2 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO.1
1) XSOP 2DIR
END OF2 WORD RECORD.

RECORD NO.1
1) GEOM1XXXXXXXXX
END OF4 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO.2
1) GEOM2XXXXXXXXX

Main Index
 964 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Storage Formats

END OF4 WORD RECORD.

RECORD NO.3
1) GEOM4XXXXXXXXX
END OF4 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO.4
1) MATKXXXXXXXX
END OF4 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO.5
1) MATMXXXXXXXX
END OF4 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO.6
1) MATPXXXXXXXX
END OF4 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO.7
1) MATVXXXXXXXX
END OF4 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO.8
1) TUG1XXXXXXXX
END OF4 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO.9
1) MUG1XXXXXXXX
END OF4 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO.10
1) TES1XXXXXXXX
END OF4 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO.11
1) MES1XXXXXXXX
END OF4 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO.12
1) TEF1XXXXXXXX
END OF4 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO.13
1) MEF1XXXXXXXX
END OF4 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO.14
1) MUG1BXXXXXXXX

Main Index
 CHAPTER 21 965
Output Transformation Matrix

END OF4 WORD RECORD.

RECORD NO.15
END OF FILE
TRAILER WORD1 = 14 WORD2 = 0 WORD3 = 0 WORD4 = 0 WORD5 = 0 WORD6 = 0

TABLE XSOP2DIR LINES CONTAINING BINARY ZERO HAVE BEEN DELETED.

RECORD NO.0
1) XSOP 2DIR
END OF 2 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO.1
1) XSOP 2DIR
END OF 2 WORD RECORD.

RECORD NO.1
1) GEOM 1X XXXX XXXX
END OF 4 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO.2
1) GEOM 2X XXXX XXXX
END OF 4 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO.3
1) GEOM 4X XXXX XXXX
END OF 4 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO.4
1) MATK XXXX XXXX
END OF 4 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO.5
1) MATM XXXX XXXX
END OF 4 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO.6
1) MATP XXXX XXXX
END OF 4 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO.7
1) MATV XXXX XXXX
END OF 4 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO.8
1) TUG1 XXXX XXXX
END OF 4 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO.9
1) MUG1 XXXX XXXX
END OF 4 WORD RECORD.

Main Index
 966 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Storage Formats

RECORD NO.10
1) TES1 XXXX XXXX
END OF 4 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO.11
1) MES1 XXXX XXXX
END OF 4 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO.12
1) TEF1 XXXX XXXX
END OF 4 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO.13
1) MEF1 XXXX XXXX
END OF 4 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO.14
1) MUG1 B XXXX XXXX
END OF4 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO.15
END OF FILE
TRAILER WORD1 = 14 WORD2 = 0 WORD3 = 0 WORD4 = 0 WORD5 = 0 WORD6 = 0

As no surprise, in the records of the XSOP2DIR datablock we find the datablock names of the boundary
matrix and OTM datablocks in the order they were written to the se10.op2 file. The subsequent DMAP
statements in the alter to SOL 100 loop over reading these datablocks one by one and dump them to the f06
file. In records 1 to 7 we see the names of the first 7 datablocks are the boundary geometry data (GEOM*)
which contain the boundary GRID points, SPOINTs, ASET and QSET definitions, and the boundary
matrices (MATK, MATM, MATP and MATV). In records 8 and 9 we find the first OTM data and see the
now familiar names TUG1 and MUG1 respectively. In the interests of brevity, we will only illustrate the
content of these two datablocks; the remaining datablocks follow a similar pattern. The statement MATPRN
INDB $ dumps the datablock contents to the f06 file; here are the contents for TUG1 and MUG1.

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4105 (INPTX2)

DATA BLOCK INDBRETRIEVED FROM FORTRAN UNIT 61 (GENERATED IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT) USING NDDL
DESCRIPTION FOR TUG1
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WHEN PLACED ON FORTRAN UNIT WAS TUG1.

RECORD NO.0
1) INDB 7 538976288 538976288 1279346002 1
END OF 7 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO.1
1) 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0
11) 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 0 10 0
21) 11 0 12 0
END OF 7 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO.2

Main Index
 CHAPTER 21 967
Output Transformation Matrix

1)1162893652 1145643040 1347243843 1464816160 538976288 1162893652 1145643040 1347243843 1464816160 538976288
11) 1 1 6 1 0 1 2 6 7 0
21) 11 0 12 0
END OF 24 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO.2
1)1162893652 1145643040 1347243843 1464816160 538976288 1162893652 1145643040 1347243843 1464816160 538976288
11) 1 1 6 1 0 1 2 6 7 0
21) 1 1 6 1 0 1 2 6 7 0
31) 2 1002 6 25 0 2 1003 6 31 0
41) 2 1004 6 37 0 2 1005 6 43 0
51) 2 1006 6 49 0
END OF 55 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO.3
END OF FILE
TRAILER WORD1 = 54 WORD2 = 12 WORD3 = 32767 WORD4 = 0 WORD5 = 7 WORD6 = 0

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4105 (INPTX2)

DATA BLOCK INDBRETRIEVED FROM FORTRAN UNIT 61 (GENERATED IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT) USING NDDL
DESCRIPTION FOR MUG1
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WHEN PLACED ON FORTRAN UNIT WAS MUG1 .

MATRIX INDB (GINO NAME 101 ) IS A REAL12 COLUMN X54 ROW RECTANG MATRIX.
COLUMN1 ROWS 7 THRU 13------------------------------------------------
ROW
7) 4.5098E-01 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 1.0000E+00
COLUMN2 ROWS 8 THRU 14 -----------------------------------------------
ROW
8) 4.4384E-01 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 8.5697E-02 0.0000E+00 1.0000E+00
COLUMN3 ROWS 9 THRU 15 -----------------------------------------------
ROW
9) 4.4570E-01 0.0000E+00 -6.3343E-02 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 1.0000E+00
COLUMN4 ROWS 10 THRU 16 -----------------------------------------------
ROW
10) 4.5098E-01 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 1.0000E+00
COLUMN5 ROWS 9 THRU 17 -----------------------------------------------
ROW
9) 6.1791E-01 0.0000E+00 2.8946E-01 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 1.0000E+00
COLUMN6 ROWS 8 THRU 18 -----------------------------------------------
ROW
8) -6.1316E-01 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 2.3245E-01 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00
18) 1.0000E+00
COLUMN7 ROWS 10 THRU 19 -----------------------------------------------
ROW
10) 3.1609E-02 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 1.0000E+00
COLUMN8 ROWS 8 THRU 25 -----------------------------------------------
ROW
8) 7.0680E-02 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 2.2443E-04 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00
18) 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 1.0000E+00
COLUMN9 ROWS 9 THRU 31 -----------------------------------------------
ROW
9) 7.0680E-02 0.0000E+00 -1.1414E-04 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00
19) 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00

Main Index
 968 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Storage Formats

29) 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 1.0000E+00

COLUMN10 ROWS 7 THRU 37 -----------------------------------------------
ROW
7) -7.0680E-02 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00
ROW POSITIONS17 THRU 36 NOT PRINTED - ALL ARE NULL.
37) 1.0000E+00
COLUMN11 ROWS 43 THRU 43 -----------------------------------------------
ROW
43) 1.0000E+00
COLUMN12 ROWS 49 THRU 49 ------------------------------------------------
ROW
49) 1.0000E+00
THE NUMBER OF NON-ZERO TERMS IN THE DENSEST COLUMN = 6
THE DENSITY OF THIS MATRIX IS 4.32 PERCENT.

Aside from the content of record 2 in TUG1, these look like the same data we saw in Point OTMs when we
dumped the TUG1 and MUG1 datablocks to the f06 file at generation time. This is because they are indeed
the same data, only they have been written to the op2 file and subsequently read by us using those DMAP
alters to SOL 100.
On closer inspection however, it looks like record 2 of TUG1 is different; it isn’t, it’s just a formatting issue.
The MATPRN module used to dump the TUG1 table to the f06 file is a general datablock printer. It is often
used to dump datablocks because it has a really simple requirement that it only needs to know which
datablock you want to print. The downside of this simplicity is there is no absolute way for the MATPRN
module to know which type of data is stored in a table. For matrix data, it is easy as the values are always
floating point numbers. For tables, in order to provide correctly interpreted data 100% of the time, the
MATPRN module would need to know the structure of the data in the table, i.e. the type of data (integer,
real, character, logical,...) for each word in the table. MATPRN will do its best to work out the type of data,
but sometimes it gets it wrong. From Point OTMs, we know that record 2 starts with the character data “TYPE,
ID, COMP, ROW, blank” in the first 5 words. The data here are large integer values. If MATPRN had
concluded these were character data, we would indeed see the TYPE, ID, COMP, ROW, blank sequence, but
it guessed (wrongly) they were integers. To be sure this is the case, we can read the first few words of record
2 one by one using another module called PARAML, only this time we can tell the PARAML module to
interpret the data as integer and as character data. We’ll need a few more lines of DMAP:
ASSIGN INPUTT2=’se10.op2’,UNIT=61
SOL 100
DIAG 8,14,15,53,56
COMPILE USERDMAP LIST $ ALTER 2 $
TYPE PARM,,I,N,REC $
INPUTT2 //-3/61///////S,N,DBKNT $ INPUTT2 /XSOP2DIR/0/61 $
MATPRN XSOP2DIR $ REC=1 $ DBKNT=DBKNT-1 $
DO WHILE ( REC<=DBKNT ) $
PARAML XSOP2DIR//’DTI2C’/REC/1////S,N,NAME $
IF ( NAME=’GEOM4X’ ) NAME=’GEOM4’ $

Main Index
 CHAPTER 21 969
Output Transformation Matrix

IF ( INDEX(NAME,’MAT’)=1 ) NAME=’MATRIX’ $
INPUTT2 /INDB/0/61////////NAME $
MATPRN INDB $
IF ( NAME=’TUG1 ’) THEN $
PARAML INDB//’DTI’/2/1//S,N,INT//S,N,CHAR $
MESSAGE //’TUG1, WORD 1 READ AS INTEGER = ’/INT $
MESSAGE //’TUG1, WORD 1 READ AS CHARACTER = ’/CHAR $
PARAML INDB//’DTI’/2/2//S,N,INT//S,N,CHAR $
MESSAGE //’TUG1, WORD 2 READ AS INTEGER = ’/INT $
MESSAGE //’TUG1, WORD 2 READ AS CHARACTER = ’/CHAR $
PARAML INDB//’DTI’/2/3//S,N,INT//S,N,CHAR $
MESSAGE //’TUG1, WORD 3 READ AS INTEGER = ’/INT $
MESSAGE //’TUG1, WORD 3 READ AS CHARACTER = ’/CHAR $
PARAML INDB//’DTI’/2/4//S,N,INT//S,N,CHAR $
MESSAGE //’TUG1, WORD 4 READ AS INTEGER = ’/INT $
MESSAGE //’TUG1, WORD 4 READ AS CHARACTER = ’/CHAR $
ENDIF $
REC = REC + 1 $
ENDDO $ ( I<=DBKNT )
ENDALTER $
CEND
BEGIN BULK
ENDDATA

When we run this job, we can see the content of the TUG1 table record 2 as integer data and as character
data:

^^^TUG1, WORD 1 READ AS INTEGER = 1162893652

^^^TUG1, WORD 1 READ AS CHARACTER = TYPE
^^^TUG1, WORD 2 READ AS INTEGER = 1145643040
^^^TUG1, WORD 2 READ AS CHARACTER = ID
^^^TUG1, WORD 3 READ AS INTEGER = 1347243843
^^^TUG1, WORD 3 READ AS CHARACTER = COMP
^^^TUG1, WORD 4 READ AS INTEGER = 1464816160
^^^TUG1, WORD 4 READ AS CHARACTER = ROW

Main Index
 970 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Storage Formats

This confirms the MATPRN output is only due to a data type format guess and TUG1 really does contains
the expected data.
If the ASCII encoded option is required for the op2 file when creating the external superelement, the
ASSIGN statement for the file must define the FORMATTED keyword.
ASSIGN OUTPUT2=’se10.op2’,UNIT=31,FORMATTED
In this case, the FORMATTED keyword must also be defined when the file is read.
ASSIGN INPUTT2=’se10.op2’,UNIT=61,FORMATTED
The ASCII encoded file is not human readable directly, it is called ASCII encoded because only ASCII
characters are used to encode the data. Consequently, you can open the op2 file in a text editor and view the
data. Here is an excerpt from the start of the ASCII encoded op2 file from the two beam external
superelement.
X 0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ$/+-()’=.*"#%&,;:<>?@![]^_\ 010080
61^GXSOPG2DIR^4^66^810$6D33333^71^60^3^61^GXSOPG2DIR^72^60^3^63^GGEOMG1X GXXXX
GXXXX^73^60^3^63^GGEOMG2X GXXXXGXXXX^74^60^3^63^GGEOMG4X GXXXXGXXXX^75^60^3^6
3^GMATKFGXXXXGXXXX^76^60^3^63^GMATMFGXXXXGXXXX^77^60^3^63^GMATPFGXXXXGXXXX^78^6
0^3^63^GMATVFGXXXXGXXXX^79^60^3^63^GTUG1FGXXXXGXXXX^7A^60^3^63^GMUG1FGXXXXGXXXX
^7B^60^3^63^GTES1FGXXXXGXXXX^7C^60^3^63^GMES1FGXXXXGXXXX^7D^60^3^63^GTEF1FGXXXX
GXXXX^7E^60^3^63^GMEF1FGXXXXGXXXX^7F^60^3^63^GMUG1GBGXXXXGXXXX^7G^60^3^3^HHH
X 0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ$/+-()’=.*"#%&,;:<>?@![]^_\ 010080
61^GGEOMG1X ^4^66^810$60367333^71^60^3^61^GGEOMG1 ^72^60^3^6I^81OQ6F816E6282
T8 81E(6081E)6081E’6081E=6081E.6081E*6044^73^60^3^6A^8205K6.N628324#G623K TOU
.\/8O\II333^74^60^3^62^82E\\82E\\82E\\^75^60^3^3^HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
...

You may just be able to make out one or two character strings like GEOM. Although generally it appears
unintelligible, along with knowledge of the cypher used to encode these data it is possible to decode it. If you
are writing a program to read the op2 file or you want to understand the format, refer to the OUTPUT2
documentation in reference 1. Delivered with every version of MSC Nastran™ is a set of utilities in the “util”
directory, among which is the tabtst.F Fortran source program that illustrates how to read a binary op2 file.
Further details and explanation may also be found in reference 3..
The example above illustrates only some of the datablocks that are written to the output2 file when using the
DMIGOP2 method. The complete list of possible datablocks is given in Table 21-13 and Table 21-14. The
specific content of any particular op2 file from an external superelement will be written to the XSOP2DIR
datablock in the op2 file and will depend on the defined behaviors and requested outputs.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 21 971
Output Transformation Matrix

Table 21-13 Complete DMIGOP2 External Superelement Boundary Datablocks

DB Name op2 Name Description
XSOP2DIR XSOP2DIR Table of contents of the op2 file (always the first datablock to
appear).
GEOM1X GEOM1X GRID point geometry.
GEOM2X GEOM2X SPOINTs.
GEOM4X GEOM4X ASET/ASET1 and QSET/QSET1 entries.
For AVL EXB output
EXTDB LAMAAVP Eigenvalue table for AVL POST.
EXTDB MATAPH Eigenvectors for AVL POST.
EXTDB MATAEK Diagonal matrix of eigenvalues for AVL POST.
EXTDB MATAM0 Generalized mass for AVL POST.
For Adams MNF output
EXTDB MATAKA Boundary stiffness matrix in basic coordinates (Adams POST).
EXTDB MATPH2 Eigenvectors in basic coordinates (Adams POST).
EXTDB MATAMA Boundary mass matrix in basic coordinates with WTMASS
removed (Adams POST).
EXTDB MATK Boundary stiffness.
EXTDB MATM Boundary mass.
EXTDB MATB Boundary viscous damping.
EXTDB MATK4 Boundary structural damping.
EXTDB MATP Boundary loads.
EXTDB MATV Boundary fluid-structure partitioning vector.
EXTDB MATGP Aerodynamic transformation matrix for loads.
EXTDB MATGD Aerodynamic transformation matrix for displacements.
EXTDB MATRGA Unit transformation from boundary to interior DOF.
EXTDB MATVAFS Fluid-structure partitioning vector.
EXTDB MATA Partitioned acoustic coupling.
EXTDB MATRV Residual vector partitioning vector.
EXTDB MATPC Access points.
EXTDB MATKSM Aerodynamic generalized stiffness.

Main Index
 972 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Storage Formats

Table 21-13 Complete DMIGOP2 External Superelement Boundary Datablocks (continued)

DB Name op2 Name Description
EXTDB MATMSM Aerodynamic generalized mass.
For rotors
NAMELIST NAMELIST List of rotors.
MTRXNAME MTRXNAME Rotor matrices defined in NAMELIST.

Table 21-14 Complete DMIGOP2 External Superelement OTM Datablocks

DB Name op2 Name Description
EXTDB TUG1 Displacement OTM table.
EXTDB MUG1 Displacement OTM matrix.
EXTDB MUG1O Displacement OTM for loaded interior DOF.
EXTDB TQG1 SPCFORCE OTM table.
EXTDB MKQG1 SPCFORCE stiffness contribution OTM.
EXTDB MBQG1 SPCFORCE viscous damping contribution OTM.
EXTDB MMQG1 SPCFORCE mass contribution OTM.
EXTDB MK4QG1 SPCFORCE structural damping contribution OTM.
EXTDB MKQG1O SPCFORCE stiffness contribution OTM for loaded interior DOF.
EXTDB TELAF1 Elastic element force OTM table.
EXTDB MELAF1 Elastic element force OTM matrix.
EXTDB TES1 Stress OTM table.
EXTDB MES1 Stress OTM matrix.
EXTDB MES1O Stress OTM matrix for loaded interior DOF.
EXTDB TEF1 Force OTM table.
EXTDB MEF1 Force OTM matrix.
EXTDB MEF1O Force OTM matrix for loaded interior DOF.
EXTDB MUG1B Displacement OTM matrix in basic coordinates system.
EXTDB MUG1OB Displacement OTM matrix in basic coordinates system for loaded
interior DOF.
EXTDB TEE1 Strain OTM table.
EXTDB MEE1 Strain OTM matrix.
EXTDB MEE1O Strain OTM matrix for loaded interior DOF.
EXTDB TQMG1 MPCFORCE OTM table.
EXTDB MKQMG1 MPCFORCE stiffness contribution OTM.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 21 973
Output Transformation Matrix

Table 21-14 Complete DMIGOP2 External Superelement OTM Datablocks (continued)

DB Name op2 Name Description
EXTDB MBQMG1 MPCFORCE viscous damping contribution OTM.
EXTDB MMQMG1 MPCFORCE mass contribution OTM.
EXTDB MK4QMG1 MPCFORCE structural damping contribution OTM.
EXTDB MKQMG1O MPCFORCE stiffness contribution OTM for loaded interior
DOF.

OUTPUT4 + PCH (Punch) Files

To write the boundary matrices and OTM data to an OUTPUT4 (op4) file, use the EXTSEOUT option
MATOP4 or MATRIXOP4 (these are synonyms). Output4 data must be matrix data, so any data that is not
floating point in matrix format cannot be written to the op4 file. Consequently, the table partitions of the
OTMs must be written to the punch file (pch) as they contain character and integer data as well. The output4
file in which the matrix data are stored may be native binary (UNFORMATTED) or ASCII
(FORMATTED). Both of these options allow the matrix data to be stored in either sparse or non-sparse
format. When using MSC Nastran™ to read the op4 file, the sparse/non-sparse nature is dealt with
automatically, but if external programs are used to create or read the op4 file, knowledge of the two options
is necessary. For details on the format of the sparse and non-sparse methods, refer to the OUTPUT4 module
documentation in reference 1.
Advantages of the OUTPUT4 method are:
 Both binary and ASCII file formats are robust industry standards (Fortran units) and have a high
degree of compatibility in today’s world of Win- dows/Linux computing.
 The ASCII option writes the output4 file in limited precision ASCII format, making the file
readable on any computer platform as well as being human readable.
 A sparse option, where extraneous zero values are not stored explicitly exists to minimize file size.

Disadvantages of the OUTPUT4 method are:

 The sparse option is awkward to interpret.
 The OTM data is split across 2 files.
 Although sequential access to the data does not slow down data access significantly, access to the
data is slower than the MSC Nastran™ database option.
 A limited number of op4 files may be connected to MSC Nastran™ at any one time.
 External superelements containing rotors may not use this format.
 If MSC Nastran™ is being used to read the op4 file, enough memory must be allocated to allow an
entire column of the matrix data to be read into memory in one go.
Boundary matrix data and the matrix partitions of the OTMs are stored in the output4 file in raw form, while
the table partitions of the OTM data are written to the punch file (PCH) in bulk data format. Let’s take a

Main Index
 974 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Storage Formats

look at the OTMs generated in the example in BEAM Element OTMs above when we switch to the MATRIXOP4
format with the following input file.

ASSIGN OUTPUT4=’se10.op4’,UNIT=31
DIAG 8,14,15,53,56
CEND
EXTSEOUT(EXTBULK,ASMBULK,EXTID=10,MATRIXOP4=31)
$
DISP=ALL
STRESS=ALL
FORCE=ALL
$
SPC=1
METHOD=1
BEGIN BULK
EIGRL,1,,,3
SPC1,1,123456,1
GRID,1
GRID,2,,2.3
GRID,3,,5.1
CBEAM,1,1,1,2,,1.
CBEAM,2,1,2,3,,1.
PBEAM,1,1,.01,.02,.03,,.04
,.1,.1,.1,-.1,-.1,-.1,-.1,.1
MAT1,1,2+11,,.3,7850.
ASET1,123456,3
SPOINT,1001,THRU,1006
QSET1,0,1001,THRU,1006
ENDDATA

The OUTPUT4 module that writes the data to the op4 file produces the following diagnostic messages 4106
informing us of the output.

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4106 (OUTPT4)

DATA BLOCK KAA WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 FROM DMAP MODULE OUTPUT4 IN BINARY(LTLEND) FORMAT
TRAILER= 101 12 12 6 1 2 972
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS KAA

Main Index
 CHAPTER 21 975
Output Transformation Matrix

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4106 (OUTPT4)

DATA BLOCK MAA WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 FROM DMAP MODULE OUTPUT4 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT
TRAILER= 101 12 12 6 1 3 1806
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS MAA
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4106 (OUTPT4)
DATA BLOCK BXX WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 FROM DMAP MODULE OUTPUT4 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT
TRAILER= 101 1 1 6 1 0 0
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS BXX
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4106 (OUTPT4)
DATA BLOCK K4XX WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 FROM DMAP MODULE OUTPUT4 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT
TRAILER= 101 1 1 6 1 0 0
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS K4XX
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4106 (OUTPT4)
DATA BLOCK PA WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 FROM DMAP MODULE OUTPUT4 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT
TRAILER= 101 1 12 2 1 0 0
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS PA
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4106 (OUTPT4)
DATA BLOCK GPXX WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 FROM DMAP MODULE OUTPUT4 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT
TRAILER= 101 1 1 6 1 0 0
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS GPXX
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4106 (OUTPT4)
DATA BLOCK GDXX WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 FROM DMAP MODULE OUTPUT4 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT
TRAILER= 101 1 1 6 1 0 0
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS GDXX
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4106 (OUTPT4)
DATA BLOCK VAFX WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 FROM DMAP MODULE OUTPUT4 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT
TRAILER= 101 1 1 6 1 0 0
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS VAFX
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4106 (OUTPT4)
DATA BLOCK AX WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 FROM DMAP MODULE OUTPUT4 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT
TRAILER= 101 1 1 6 1 0 0
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS AX
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4106 (OUTPT4)
DATA BLOCK RVAX WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 FROM DMAP MODULE OUTPUT4 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT
TRAILER= 101 1 1 6 1 0 0
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS RVAX
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4106 (OUTPT4)
DATA BLOCK KASMX WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 FROM DMAP MODULE OUTPUT4 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT
TRAILER= 101 1 1 6 1 0 0
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS KASMX
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4106 (OUTPT4)
DATA BLOCK MASMX WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 FROM DMAP MODULE OUTPUT4 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT
TRAILER= 101 1 1 6 1 0 0
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS MASMX
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4106 (OUTPT4)
DATA BLOCK VA WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 FROM DMAP MODULE OUTPUT4 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT
TRAILER= 101 1 12 2 1 12 10000
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS VA
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4106 (OUTPT4)

Main Index
 976 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Storage Formats

DATA BLOCK MUG1 WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 FROM DMAP MODULE OUTPUT4 IN BINARY (LTLEND FORMAT
TRAILER= 101 12 54 2 1 3 432
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS MUG1
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4106 (OUTPT4)
DATA BLOCK MUG1O WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 FROM DMAP MODULE OUTPUT4 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT
TRAILER= 102 1 1 6 1 0 0
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS MUG1O
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4106 (OUTPT4)
DATA BLOCK MELAF1 WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 FROM DMAP MODULE OUTPUT4 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT
TRAILER= 101 1 1 6 1 0 0
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS MELAF1
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4106 (OUTPT4)
DATA BLOCK MES1 WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 FROM DMAP MODULE OUTPUT4 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT
TRAILER= 101 12 88 2 1 16 1212
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS MES1
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4106 (OUTPT4)
DATA BLOCK MES1O WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 FROM DMAP MODULE OUTPUT4 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT
TRAILER= 102 1 1 6 1 0 0
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS MES1O
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4106 (OUTPT4)
DATA BLOCK MEF1 WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 FROM DMAP MODULE OUTPUT4 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT
TRAILER= 101 12 154 2 1 8 346
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS MEF1
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4106 (OUTPT4)
DATA BLOCK MEF1O WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 FROM DMAP MODULE OUTPUT4 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT
TRAILER= 102 1 1 6 1 0 0
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS MEF1O
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4106 (OUTPT4)
DATA BLOCK MKQG1 WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 FROM DMAP MODULE OUTPUT4 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT
TRAILER= 101 1 1 6 1 0 0
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS MKQG1
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4106 (OUTPT4)
DATA BLOCK MKQG1O WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 FROM DMAP MODULE OUTPUT4 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT
TRAILER= 102 1 1 6 1 0 0
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS MKQG1O
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4106 (OUTPT4)
DATA BLOCK MMQG1 WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 FROM DMAP MODULE OUTPUT4 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT
TRAILER= 101 1 1 6 1 0 0
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS MMQG1
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4106 (OUTPT4)
DATA BLOCK MBQG1 WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 FROM DMAP MODULE OUTPUT4 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT
TRAILER= 102 1 1 6 1 0 0
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS MBQG1
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4106 (OUTPT4)
DATA BLOCK MK4QG1 WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 FROM DMAP MODULE OUTPUT4 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT
TRAILER= 103 1 1 6 1 0 0
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS MK4QG1
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4106 (OUTPT4)
DATA BLOCK MUG1B WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 FROM DMAP MODULE OUTPUT4 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT
TRAILER= 101 12 54 2 1 3 432

Main Index
 CHAPTER 21 977
Output Transformation Matrix

NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS MUG1B

*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4106 (OUTPT4)
DATA BLOCK MUG1OB WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 FROM DMAP MODULE OUTPUT4 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT
TRAILER= 101 1 1 6 1 0 0
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS MUG1OB
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4106 (OUTPT4)
DATA BLOCK MEE1 WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 FROM DMAP MODULE OUTPUT4 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT
TRAILER= 101 1 1 6 1 0 0
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS MEE1
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4106 (OUTPT4)
DATA BLOCK MEE1O WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 FROM DMAP MODULE OUTPUT4 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT
TRAILER= 102 1 1 6 1 0 0
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS MEE1O
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4106 (OUTPT4)
DATA BLOCK MKQMG1 WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 FROM DMAP MODULE OUTPUT4 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT
TRAILER= 101 1 1 6 1 0 0
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS MKQMG1
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4106 (OUTPT4)
DATA BLOCK MKQMG1O WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 FROM DMAP MODULE OUTPUT4 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT
TRAILER= 102 1 1 6 1 0 0
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS MKQMG1O
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4106 (OUTPT4)
DATA BLOCK MMQMG1 WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 FROM DMAP MODULE OUTPUT4 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT
TRAILER= 101 1 1 6 1 0 0
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS MMQMG1
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4106 (OUTPT4)
DATA BLOCK MBQMG1 WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 FROM DMAP MODULE OUTPUT4 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT
TRAILER= 102 1 1 6 1 0 0
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS MBQMG1
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4106 (OUTPT4)
DATA BLOCK MK4QMG1 WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT 31 FROM DMAP MODULE OUTPUT4 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT
TRAILER= 103 1 1 6 1 0 0
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS MK4QMG1

The OTM matrix data starts with the MUG1 matrix; notice the names of all the datablocks thereafter start
with an “M” and there are no tables output to op4; the OTM tables are written to the punch file. The matrix
outputs are summarized in Table 21-15. Notice there is no “table of contents” datablock (similar to
XSOP2DIR) with the op4 format. This means that even when there is no data for a particular boundary
matrix or OTM, a null datablock must be output to maintain order. For boundary matrices, the suffix XX
is used to indicate the datablock is empty, but for OTMs, the name is the same whether the OTM has any
content or not. Note also that the boundary matrices and OTM datablocks are written to the op4 with their
direct individual names, not in a family (like EXTDB). The OTM table outputs are summarized in
Table 21-16.

Main Index
 978 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Storage Formats

Table 21-15 MATRIXOP4 External Superelement Matrix Datablocks

DB Name
DB Name (if not
(if generated) generated) Description
KAA KXX Boundary stiffness.
MAA MXX Boundary mass.
BAA BXX Boundary viscous damping.
K4AA K4XX Boundary structural damping.
PA PX Boundary loads.
GPAK GPXX Aerodynamic transformation matrix for loads.
GDAX GDXX Aerodynamic transformation matrix for displacements.
VAFS VAFX Fluid-structure partitioning vector.
AA AX Partitioned acoustic coupling.
RVA RVAX Residual vector partitioning vector.
KASM KASMX Aerodynamic generalized stiffness.
MASM MASMX Aerodynamic generalized mass.
VA VA A size unit vector.
DB NAME (if generated or empty) Description
MUG1 Displacement OTM.
MUG1O Displacement OTM for loaded interior DOF.
MELAF1 Elastic force OTM.
MES1 Element stress OTM.
MES1O Element stress OTM for loaded interior DOF.
MEF1 Element force OTM.
MEF1O Element force OTM for loaded interior DOF.
MKQG1 SPCFORCE stiffness contribution OTM.
MKQG1O SPCFORCE stiffness contribution OTM for loaded interior DOF.
MMQG1 SPCFORCE stiffness contribution OTM.
MBQG1 SPCFORCE viscous damping contribution OTM.
MK4QG1 SPCFORCE structural damping contribution OTM.
MUG1B Displacement OTM in basic system.
MUG1OB Displacement OTM in basic system for loaded interior DOF.
MEE1 Element strain OTM.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 21 979
Output Transformation Matrix

Table 21-15 MATRIXOP4 External Superelement Matrix Datablocks (continued)

DB Name
DB Name (if not
(if generated) generated) Description
MEE1O Element strain OTM for loaded interior DOF.
MKQMG1 MPCFORCE stiffness contribution OTM.
MKQMG1O MPCFORCE stiffness contribution OTM for loaded interior DOF.
MMQMG1 MPCFORCE mass contribution OTM.
MBQMG1 MPCFORCE viscous damping contribution OTM.
MK4QMG1 MPCFORCE structural damping contribution OTM.

Table 21-16 MATRIXOP4 External Superelement Table Datablocks

DB NAME Description
TUG1 Displacement OTM table.
TQG1 SPCFORCE OTM table.
TELAF1 Elastic element force OTM table.
TES1 Stress OTM table.
TEF1 Force OTM table.
TEE1 Strain OTM table.
TQMG1 MPCFORCE OTM table.

The external superelement is now available in an op4 file (called se10.op4 in the example) and the punch file
(the job run file name with a .pch extension), and we can read the contents of this op4 file and look at each
of the datablocks. It is possible to write a Fortran, Python, C, etc. program to read the op4 file, but we already
have the best tool for doing this - MSC Nastran™. With the help of the following short DMAP alter to SOL
100, we will read the content of the se10.op4 file and print the data to the f06 file.

ASSIGN INPUTT4=’se10.op4’,UNIT=61
SOL 100
DIAG 8,14,15,53,56
COMPILE USERDMAP LIST $
ALTER 2 $
TYPE PARM,,I,N,REC $
INPUTT4 /KAA /1/61/-1 $
INPUTT4 /MAA /1/61/0 $
INPUTT4 /BAA /1/61/0 $

Main Index
 980 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Storage Formats

INPUTT4 /K4AA /1/61/0 $

INPUTT4 /PA /1/61/0 $
INPUTT4 /GPAK /1/61/0 $
INPUTT4 /GDAX /1/61/0 $
INPUTT4 /VAFS /1/61/0 $
INPUTT4 /AA /1/61/0 $
INPUTT4 /RVA /1/61/0 $
INPUTT4 /KASM /1/61/0 $
INPUTT4 /MASM /1/61/0 $
INPUTT4 /VA /1/61/0 $
INPUTT4 /MUG1 /1/61/0 $
INPUTT4 /MUG1O /1/61/0 $
INPUTT4 /MELAF1 /1/61/0 $
INPUTT4 /MES1 /1/61/0 $
INPUTT4 /MES1O /1/61/0 $
INPUTT4 /MEF1 /1/61/0 $
INPUTT4 /MEF1O /1/61/0 $
INPUTT4 /MKQG1 /1/61/0 $
INPUTT4 /MKQG1O /1/61/0 $
INPUTT4 /MMQG1 /1/61/0 $
INPUTT4 /MBQG1 /1/61/0 $
INPUTT4 /MK4QG1 /1/61/0 $
INPUTT4 /MUG1B /1/61/0 $
INPUTT4 /MUG1OB /1/61/0 $
INPUTT4 /MEE1 /1/61/0 $
INPUTT4 /MEE1O /1/61/0 $
INPUTT4 /MKQMG1 /1/61/0 $
INPUTT4 /MKQMG1O /1/61/0 $
INPUTT4 /MMQMG1 /1/61/0 $
INPUTT4 /MBQMG1 /1/61/0 $
INPUTT4 /MK4QMG1 /1/61/0 $
$
MATPRN KAA $
MATPRN MAA $
MATPRN BAA $
MATPRN K4AA $

Main Index
 CHAPTER 21 981
Output Transformation Matrix

MATPRN PA $
MATPRN GPAK $
MATPRN GDAX $
MATPRN VAFS $
MATPRN AA $
MATPRN RVA $
MATPRN KASM $
MATPRN MASM $
MATPRN VA $
MATPRN MUG1 $
MATPRN MUG1O $
MATPRN MELAF1 $
MATPRN MES1 $
MATPRN MES1O $
MATPRN MEF1 $
MATPRN MEF1O $
MATPRN MKQG1 $
MATPRN MKQG1O $
MATPRN MMQG1 $
MATPRN MBQG1 $
MATPRN MK4QG1 $
MATPRN MUG1B $
MATPRN MUG1OB $
MATPRN MEE1 $
MATPRN MEE1O $
MATPRN MKQMG1 $
MATPRN MKQMG1O $
MATPRN MMQMG1 $
MATPRN MBQMG1 $
MATPRN MK4QMG1 $
$
ENDALTER $
CEND
BEGIN BULK
ENDDATA

Main Index
 982 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Storage Formats

The short sequence of operations in the DMAP alter to SOL 100 reads each of the datablocks stored in the
op4 file and then dumps it to the f06 file. As there is no “table of contents” datablock, it is important to know
the order of the datablocks and to read them all, even the empty ones.
As we are interested in the OTM data, we see the first OTM matrix is MUG1; only the first column is printed
for brevity but you will notice it matches the MUG1 data discussed in the examples above.

MATRIX MUG1 (GINO NAME 101 ) IS A REAL12 COLUMN X54 ROW RECTANG MATRIX. COLUMN
1 ROWS 7 THRU 13 --------------------------------------------------
ROW
7) 4.5098E-01 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 1.0000E+00
...
THE NUMBER OF NON-ZERO TERMS IN THE DENSEST COLUMN = 3
THE DENSITY OF THIS MATRIX IS 4.32 PERCENT.
The other OTM matrices with content are MES1 and MEF1 because DISP, STRESS and FORCE requests
were made. Also appearing is the basic coordinate system displacement OTM MUG1B. All the other OTM
matrices are empty as this example output for the BAA (viscous damping) OTM suggests.

MATRIX BAA(GINO NAME 101) IS A REAL1 COLUMN X1 ROW SYMMETRC MATRIX.

COLUMNS 1 THRU 1 ARE NULL.
THE NUMBER OF NON-ZERO TERMS IN THE DENSEST COLUMN = 0
THE DENSITY OF THIS MATRIX IS 0.00 PERCENT.

Turning to the punch file, we can see the table part of the OTMs in bulk data format.
DTI TUG1 0 54 12 32767 0 7 0
PHIP 7 REAL 1ENDREC
DTI TUG1 1 1 0.00000 2 0.00000 3 0.00000
4 0.00000 5 0.00000 6 0.00000 7 0.00000
8 0.00000 9 0.00000 10 0.00000 11 0.00000
12 0.00000 ENDREC
DTI TUG1 2
TYPE ID COMP ROW TYPE ID COMP ROW
1 1 6 1 1 2 6 7
1 3 6 13 2 1001 6 19
2 1002 6 25 2 1003 6 31
2 1004 6 37 2 1005 6 43
2 1006 6 49 ENDREC

Main Index
 CHAPTER 21 983
Output Transformation Matrix

DTI TES1 0 88 12 32767 0 1005 0

TES 5 REAL 1ENDREC
DTI TES1 1 1 0.00000 2 0.00000 3 0.00000
4 0.00000 5 0.00000 6 0.00000 7 0.00000
8 0.00000 9 0.00000 10 0.00000 11 0.00000
12 0.00000 ENDREC
DTI TES1 2
TYPE ID COMP ROW TYPE ID COMP ROW
2 1 44 1 2 2 44 45
ENDREC
DTI TES1 3
2 1 1 0.00000 0 0.00000 0 0.00000
0 0.00000 0 0.00000 0 0.00000 0 0.00000
0 0.00000 0 0.00000 0 0.00000 2 1.00000
2 2 2 0.00000 0 0.00000 0 0.00000
0 0.00000 0 0.00000 0 0.00000 0 0.00000
0 0.00000 0 0.00000 0 0.00000 3 1.00000
ENDREC
DTI TEF1 0 154 12 32767 0 1004 0
TEF 4 REAL 1ENDREC
DTI TEF1 1 1 0.00000 2 0.00000 3 0.00000
4 0.00000 5 0.00000 6 0.00000 7 0.00000
8 0.00000 9 0.00000 10 0.00000 11 0.00000
12 0.00000 ENDREC
DTI TEF1 2
TYPE ID COMP ROW TYPE ID COMP ROW
2 1 77 1 2 2 77 78
ENDREC
DTI TEF1 3
2 1 1 0.00000 0 0.00000 0 0.00000
0 0.00000 0 0.00000 0 0.00000 0 0.00000
0 0.00000 0 0.00000 0 0.00000 2 1.00000
2 2 2 0.00000 0 0.00000 0 0.00000
0 0.00000 0 0.00000 0 0.00000 0 0.00000
0 0.00000 0 0.00000 0 0.00000 3 1.00000
ENDREC

Main Index
 984 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Storage Formats

Here we find the same data discussed in section OTM Content above. The DTI entries written to the .pch file
are bulk data entries and can be supplied in the MSC Nastran™ input file for the assembly level analysis.
Consult reference 2. for the format of the DTI entry. Let’s take a look at one or two aspects of these data to
be clear. Extracting the TUG1 data from the .pch file and comparing it with the TUG1 data we saw in
section OTM Content, we can see the same values, only they appear in different locations due to the formatting
needs of the DTI entry.
DTI TUG1 0 54 12 32767 0 7 0
PHIP 7 REAL 1ENDREC
DTI TUG1 1 1 0.00000 2 0.00000 3 0.00000
4 0.00000 5 0.00000 6 0.00000 7 0.00000
8 0.00000 9 0.00000 10 0.00000 11 0.00000
12 0.00000 ENDREC
DTI TUG1 2
TYPE ID COMP ROW TYPE ID COMP ROW
1 1 6 1 1 2 6 7
1 3 6 13 2 1001 6 19
2 1002 6 25 2 1003 6 31
2 1004 6 37 2 1005 6 43
2 1006 6 49 ENDREC

TABLE TUG1 LINES CONTAINING BINARY ZERO HAVE BEEN DELETED.

RECORD NO. 0
1) PHIP 7 REAL 1
END OF 7 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO.1
1) 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0
11) 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 0 10 0
21) 11 0 12 0
END OF 24 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO.2
1) TYPE ID COMP ROW TYPE ID COMP ROW
11) 1 1 6 1 0 1 2 6 7 0
21) 1 3 6 13 0 2 1001 6 19 0
31) 2 1002 6 25 0 2 1003 6 31 0
41) 2 1004 6 37 0 2 1005 6 43 0
51) 2 1006 6 49 0
END OF 55 WORD RECORD.
RECORD NO.3
END OF FILE
TRAILER WORD1 = 54 WORD2 = 12 WORD3 = 32767 WORD4 = 0 WORD5 = 7 WORD6 = 0

Main Index
 CHAPTER 21 985
Output Transformation Matrix

For example, the TRAILER data

TRAILER WORD1 = 54 WORD2 = 12 WORD3 = 32767 WORD4 = 0 WORD5 = 7 WORD6 = 0

appears as the first line of the DTI entry

DTI TUG1 0 54 12 32767 0 7 0

Record number 1 of the DTI TUG1 table is just record number 1 of the TUG1 table, and in record 2, the
DTI entry is omitting the zero value of the set of 5 values that define the TYPE, ID, COMP, ROW, zero
sequence. Apart from these subtle formatting differences, these data are the same and so they should be; it is
the same OTM table. The other flavours of OTM (TES, MES, MEF, etc.) follow a similar pattern.
If the ASCII option is required for the op4 file when creating the external superele- ment, the ASSIGN
statement for the file must define the FORMATTED keyword.
ASSIGN OUTPUT4=’se10.op4’,UNIT=31,FORMATTED

In this case, the FORMATTED keyword must also be defined when the file is read.
ASSIGN INPUTT4=’se10.op4’,UNIT=61,FORMATTED

The ASCII op4 file is human readable and contains the matrix data formatted to the Fortran standard. As
with the binary format, two types of formatted op4 file may be generated by the EXTSEOUT command,
sparse format and non-sparse format. In sparse format, any long sequences of zero values are not stored
explicitly so the file contains extra data to indicate the start, and the length, of the non-zero values. The non-
sparse format can only deal in a concise way with the leading and trailing zeros in a column. Any zero values
between the first and last non-zero value in a column will be printed to the ASCII op4 file, and for sparse
matrices this is potentially a lot of data.
Let’s take a quick look at these 2 formats by rerunning the 2 beam example and requesting a FORMATTED
op4 file. First, the non-sparse format; note the negative unit number on the MATRIXOP4= option to request
non-sparse format.
ASSIGN OUTPUT4=’se10.op4’,UNIT=31,FORM=FORMATTED
DIAG 8,14,15,53,56
CEND
$ non-sparse
EXTSEOUT(EXTBULK,ASMBULK,EXTID=10,MATRIXOP4=-31)
$
DISP=ALL
STRESS=ALL
FORCE=ALL
...
For space reasons, we will show only the stiffness matrix written in non-sparse format.
12 12 6 1KAA 1P,3E22.15
1 1 1
3.921568627450981E+08

Main Index
 986 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Storage Formats

2 2 5
1.064558840163144E+08 0.000000000000000E+00 0.000000000000000E+00
0.000000000000000E+00-2.714625042416016E+08
3 3 3
1.180306584635359E+08 0.000000000000000E+00 3.009781790820166E+08
4 4 1
6.033182503770739E+08
5 3 3
3.009781790820166E+08 0.000000000000000E+00 1.943964944894436E+09
6 2 5
-2.714625042416016E+08 0.000000000000000E+00 0.000000000000000E+00
0.000000000000000E+00 1.476543111306280E+09
7 7 1
2.434563497980833E+06
8 8 1
2.759241724527988E+06
9 9 1
2.847683529190117E+06
10 10 1
7.912331368437712E+06
13 1 1
1.000000000000000E+00
...
Notice that column 2 has a string of 3 zero values. Now let’s look at the FORMATTED sparse format; note
the positive unit number on the MATRIXOP4 option.

ASSIGN OUTPUT4=’se10.op4’,UNIT=31,FORM=FORMATTED
DIAG 8,14,15,53,56
CEND
$ sparse
EXTSEOUT(EXTBULK,ASMBULK,EXTID=10,MATRIXOP4=31)
$
DISP=ALL
STRESS=ALL

Main Index
 CHAPTER 21 987
Output Transformation Matrix

FORCE=ALL
...
12 12 6 1KAA 1P,3E22.15
1 0 2
3.921568627450981E+08
2 2 5
131074
1.064558840163144E+08
131078
3.921568627450981E+08
2 2 5
131074
-2.714625042416016E+08
3 0 4
131075
1.180306584635359E+08
131077
6.033182503770739E+08
5 0 4
131075
3.009781790820166E+08
131077
1.943964944894436E+09
6 0 4
131074
-2.714625042416016E+08
131078
1.476543111306280E+09
7 0 2
131079
2.434563497980833E+06
8 0 2
131080
2.759241724527988E+06
9 0 2
131081

Main Index
 988 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Storage Formats

2.847683529190117E+06
10 0 2
131082
7.912331368437712E+06
13 1 1
1.000000000000000E+00
...
Notice there are no strings of zero values, but there are additional values between the real values of the matrix
elements. If you are writing a program to read the op4 file or you want to understand how to interpret these
additional values, and read the other data in the op4 file, refer to the OUTPUT4 documentation in reference
1. Delivered with every version of MSC Nastran™ is a set of utilities in the “util” directory, among which is
the mattst.F Fortran source program that illustrates how to read a binary op4 file. Further details and
explanation may also be found in reference 3.

The PCH (Punch) File

To write the boundary matrices and OTM data to a punch (pch) file, use the EXTSEOUT option
DMIGPCH. The format of all data in this output follows MSC Nastran™ bulk data formatting rules.
Advantages of the DMIGPCH method are:
 The file format is bulk data format and can be read by any version of MSC Nastran™ on any
platform.
 The file format is human readable.
 All the data are in one file.
 The external superelement boundary matrices may be read just as external matrices or as a
superlement (the OTM data requires it to be read as a superelement).
Disadvantages of the DMIGPCH method are:

 The DMIG bulk data format is complicated to code by hand.

 The bulk data must be read and format checked prior to use and this slows down the reading
process.
 Excessive truncation of precision occurs due to the limitations of the 16 character maximum width
fields of bulk data.
 If a return to the external superelement is foreseen in order to recover result quantities not supported
by the OTM functionality, the DMIGPCH offers no route to do this.

All the relevant points about the OTM format for the punch file are covered in OUTPUT4 + PCH (Punch) Files.
Any remaining explanations of formatting may be found in reference 2.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 21 989
Output Transformation Matrix

Reference Documents
1. MSC Nastran DMAP Programmer’s Guide
2. MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide
3. Programming DMAP in MSC.Nastran, Direct Matrix Abstract Programming, ISBN: 978-1-105-
91151-4, Robinson, 2012.

Main Index
 990 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Reference Documents

Main Index
 Glossary

Glossary


Glossary

Main Index
 992 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Glossary

Glossary

Boundary Element
For a list superelement, an element that has GRIDs that belong to more than one superelement is a boundary
superelement. The element will be assigned to the uppermost superelement in the superelement tree or
processing order.

Branch Element
For a list superelement, a branch superelement connects to grid pints belonging to more than one
superelement. A common example is a line element that has both grids attaching to the exterior grids of an
upstream superelement. Branch superelements are automatically assigned to the downstream superelement,
but can be reassigned to the upstream superelement using the SEELT command bulk data entry.

Collector Superelement
In a multilevel superelement tree, a collector superelement is a superelement with more than one upstream
superelements attached to it.

Component Modes Synthesis

Component Modes are generated as part of dynamic reduction and consist of the dynamic superelement
influence coefficients (or superelement dynamic shape functions) and are used to improve the dynamic mass
reduction approximation. The component modes are stored in the G oq matrix; each column of this matrix
represents a dynamic mode shape. The boundary dof may be fixed, free, or a combination of fixed and free
during the Eigenvalue calculation.

Constraint Modes
Constraint modes are generated as part of static condensation and consist of the static influence coefficients
of the interior dof generated when all exterior or dof are held fixed except for one dof which is moved a unit
displacement. The constraint modes are stored in the [GOT] matrix; each column of this matrix represents
the motion of the interior points when one boundary DOF is moved one unit while the other boundary
points are held constrained.

External Superelement
An external superelement is a superelement that has been reduced to its boundary in a separate solution and
attached to the current model.

Main Index
 993
Glossary

Fixed Boundary Solution

Component Modes Synthesis performed with all physical exterior dof fixed during Eigenvalue calculations
is referred to as a fixed boundary solution.

Free Boundary Solution

Component Modes Synthesis performed with all physical exterior dof free during Eigenvalue calculations is
referred to as a free boundary solution.

List Superelement
A superelement defined in the main bulk data section by defining a list is a list superelement. The list
superelement can be defined by grids (SESET, or the SEID field of the GRID entry) or by elements (SEELT)
when BEGIN SUPER is present.

Load Sequence
The load sequence is used in static analysis to define the load vector association to a residual structure load
sequence. Most commonly used with expanded case control.

Mixed Boundary Solution

Component Modes Synthesis performed with some physical exterior dof fixed and the remaining physical
exterior dof fixed during Eigenvalue calculations is referred to as a fixed boundary solution.

Multilevel Superelement Tree

A multilevel superelement tree occurs when exterior dof from one or more superelements are attached to the
interior dof of a superelement other than the residual.

Mutually Exclusive Set

Each dof is a member of one mutually exclusive set. In superelement analysis, each boundary dof is part of
one of the following sets: B-Set = Physical dof Fixed for Component Modes Synthesis Calculations; C-Set =
Physical dof Free for Component Modes Synthesis Calculations; Q-Set = Modal dof calculated during
Component Modes Synthesis. Since these dof must be mutually exclusive of all other MSC Nastran sets,
they cannot be define as Single Point or Multi Point constraints.

Main Bulk Data Section

Most commonly, the Main Bulk Data Section refers to the section of the bulk data that is used to define the
residual structure when PART superelements are used. This Main Bulk Data Section occurs after BEGIN
BULK (or BEGIN SUPER = 0) and concludes with BEGIN SUPER=i, or ENDDATA.

Main Index
 994 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Glossary

MSC Nastran has the possibility of auxiliary models used for Optimization, Exterior Acoustic Analysis, and
Arbitrary Beam Cross Sections. These are delimited from the Main Bulk Data Section with BEGIN
AUXMODEL, BEGIN AFPM, or BEGIN ARBMODEL, respectively.

PART Superelement
A PART Superelement is a superelement that is partitioned within its own bulk data section delimited by
BEGIN SUPER.

Phase 1 Processing
In Phase 1 Superelement processing, the superelement matrices are reduced to boundary matrix
representations and assembled with the residual structure. For a multilevel tree multiple reductions and
assemblies are performed until the final assembly of the residual structure.

Phase 2 Processing
In Phase 2 Superelement processing, the solution of residual structure is performed. The solution is defined
as the displacements of the residual structure (including velocities and accelerations for dynamic solutions).
The solution is performed at the lowest reduction level of the residual structure (typically the A-Set).

Phase 3 Processing
In Phase 3 Superelement processing, the data recovery of each superelement, including the residual, is
performed. The data recovery includes back-expansion of the solution vector to the G-Set and calculation of
additional data recovery items (stresses, forces, etc.).

Qualifier
Each matrix stored on the MSC Nastran database has a qualifier to identify its origin and applicability. For
example, there may be several reduced stiffness matrices K aa stored on the database. The qualifiers will
identify SEID (superelement ID), SPC (constraint set), etc. so that these matrices may be identified and
assembled in the proper sequence.

SEP1
Superelement Processing, Phase 1 (old style) – generates the superelement map (SEMAP) which defines the
superelement membership of each grid and element and defines the superelement connectivity and process
order. Module SEP1 is executed for list superelements when BEGIN SUPER is not present.

Main Index
 995
Glossary

SEP1X
Superelement Processing, Phase 1 (new style) – generates the superelement map (SEMAP) which defines the
superelement membership of each grid and element and defines the superelement connectivity and process
order. Module SEP1X is executed for models with PART superelements and for List Superelements when
BEGIN SUPER is present.

Single Level Superelement Tree

A single level superelement tree is a model where all superelements are connected directly to the residual
structure.

Processing Order
The Processing Order defines the superelement reduction and data recovery order.

Main Index
 996 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide
Glossary

Main Index